Iec 62368-1-2018

I EC ■EC 62368-1
Edition 3.0 2018-10
INTERNATIONAL
STANDARD
NORME
INTERNATIONALE colour
inside
Audio/video, information and communication technology equipment-

Part 1: Safety requirements
白quipements des technologies de I’audio/video, de înformation et de la

communication -
Partie 1: Exigences de securite
( ue
)ov 5
co
CNI
H-89 s o
<o
liJ
l
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

THIS PUBLICATION IS COPYRIGHT PROTECTED
A Copyright ® 2018 IEC, Geneva, Switzerland

All rights reserved. Unless otherwise specified, no part of this publication may be reproduced or utilized in any form
or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and microfilm, without permission in writing from
either IEC or lEC’s member National Committee in the country of the requester. If you have any questions about IEC
copyright or have an enquiry about obtaining additional rights to this publication, please contact the address below or
your local IEC member National Committee for further information.
Droits de reproduction r6serv6s. Sauf indication contraire, aucune partie de cette publication ne peut §tre reproduite
ni utilisee sous quelque forme que ce soit et par aucun procede, electronique ou mecanique, y compris la photocopie
et les microfilms, sans raccord ecrit de NEC ou du Comite national de NEC du pays du demandeur. Si vous avez des
questions sur le copyright de NEC ou si vous desirez obtenir des droits suppl^mentaires sur cette publication, utilisez
les coordonnees ci-apres ou contactez le Comite national de NEC de votre pays de residence.
IEC Central Office Tel.: +41 22 919 02 11

3, rue de Varembe info@iec.ch
CH-1211 Geneva 20 www.iec.ch
Switzerland
About the IEC

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is the leading global organization that prepares and publishes
International Standards for all electrical, electronic and related technologies.
About IEC publications

The technical content of IEC publications is kept under constant review by the IEC. Please make sure that you have the
latest edition, a corrigenda or an amendment might have been published.
IEC Catalogue - webstore.iec.ch/catalogue Electropedia-www.electropedia.org

The stand-alone application for consulting the entire The world's leading online dictionary of electronic and
bibliographical information on IEC International Standards, electrical terms containing 21 000 terms and definitions in
Technical Specifications， Technical Reports and other English and French, with equivalent terms in 16 additional
documents. Available for PC, Mac OS, Android Tablets and languages. Also known as the International Electrotechnical
iPad. Vocabulary (IEV) online.
IEC publications search - webstore.iec.ch/advsearchform IEC Glossary - std.iec.ch/glossary

The advanced search enables to find IEC publications by a 67 000 electrotechnical terminology entries in English and
variety of criteria (reference number, text, technical French extracted from the Terms and Definitions clause of
committee,...). It also gives information on projects, replaced IEC publications issued since 2002. Some entries have been
and withdrawn publications. collected from earlier publications of IEC TC 37, 77, 86 and
CISPR.
IEC Just Published - webstore.iec.ch/justpublished
Stay up to date on all new IEC publications. Just Published IEC Customer Service Centre - webstore.iec.ch/csc
details all new publications released. Available online and If you wish to give us your feedback on this publication or
also once a month by email. need further assistance, please contact the Customer Service
Centre: sales@iec.ch.
A propos de I1EC
La Commission Electrotechnique Internationale (IEC) est la premiere organisation mondiale qui elabore et publie des
Normes internationales pour tout ce qui a trait a Telectricite, a Telectronique et aux technologies apparentees.
A propos des publications IEC

Le contenu technique des publications IEC est constamment revu. Veuillez vous assurer que vous possedez Tedition la
plus recente, un corrigendum ou amendement peut avoir ete publie.
Catalogue IEC - webstore.iec.ch/catalogue Electropedia-www.electropedia.org

Application autonome pour consulter tous les renseignements Le premier dictionnaire en ligne de termes electroniques et
bibliographiques sur les Normes internationales, ^lectriques. II contient 21 000 termes et definitions en anglais
Specifications techniques, Rapports techniques et autres et en frangais, ainsi que les termes equivalents dans 16
documents de I'lEC. Disponible pour PC, Mac OS, tablettes
langues additionnelles. Egalement appel^ Vocabulaire
Android et iPad. Electrotechnique International (IEV) en ligne.
Recherche de publications IEC - Glossaire IEC - std.iec.ch/glossary
webstore.iec.ch/advsearchform 67 000 entrees terminologiques electrotechniques, en anglais
La recherche avancê permet de trouver des publications IEC et en frangais, extraites des articles Termes et Definitions des
en utilisant differents criteres (numero de reference, texte, publications IEC parues depuis 2002. Plus certaines entrees
comite d^tudes,...). Elle donne aussi des informations sur les anterieures extraites des publications des CE 37, 77f 86 et
projets et les publications remplacees ou retirees. CISPR de NEC.
IEC Just Published - webstore.iec.ch/justpublished Service Clients - webstore.iec.ch/csc

Restez informe sur les nouvelles publications IEC. Just Si vous desirez nous donner des commentaires sur cette
Published detaille les nouvelles publications parues. publication ou si vous avez des questions contactez-nous:
Disponible en ligne et aussi une fois par mois par email. sales@iec.ch.

I EC 旧C 62368-1
Edition 3.0 2018-10
INTERNATIONAL
STANDARD
NORME
INTERNATIONALE colour
inside
Audio/video, information and communication technology equipment-

白quipements des technologies de Taudio/video, d e 「 information et de la

communication -
Partie 1: Exigences de securite
INTERNATIONAL
ELECTROTECHNICAL
COMMISSION
COMMISSION
ELECTROTECHNIQUE
INTERNATIONALE
ICS 33.160.01; 35.020 ISBN 978-2-8322-5977-1
Warning! Make sure that you obtained this publication from an authorized distributor.
Attention! Veuillez vous assurer que vous avez obtenu cette publication via un distributeur agree.
® Registered trademark of the International Electrotechnical Commission

Copyright International EteciroiGRUa邮 gc^pgf 的e de la Commission Electrotechnique Internationale
- 2- 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
CONTENTS
FOREWORD................................................................................................................................. 20
INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................................23
0 Principles of this product safety standard............................................................................23
0.1 Objective...................................................................................................................... 23
0.2 Persons.........................................................................................................................23
0.2.1 General..................................................................................................................23
0.2.2 Ordinary person.................................................................................................... 23
0.2.3 Instructed person.................................................................................................. 23
0.2.4 Skilled person........................................................................................................23
0.3 Model for pain and injury............................................................................................. 24
0.4 Energy sources.............................................................................................................24
0.5 Safeguards................................................................................................................... 25
0.5.1 General..................................................................................................................25
0.5.2 Equipment safeguard............................................................................................26
0.5.3 Installation safeguard............................................................................................26
0.5.4 Personal safeguard............................................................................................... 26
0.5.5 Behavioural safeguards........................................................................................ 27
0.5.6 Safeguards during ordinary or instructed personservice conditions...................28
0.5.7 Equipment safeguards during skilled person service conditions........................28
0.5.8 Examples of safeguard characteristics................................................................ 28
0.6 Electrically-caused pain or injury(electric shock)....................................................... 29
0.6.1 Models for electrically-caused pain or injury........................................................29
0.6.2 Models for protection against electrically-causedpain or injury..........................30
0.7 Electrically-caused fire .................................................................................................31
0.7.1 Models for electrically-caused fir e ....................................................................... 31
0.7.2 Models for protection against electrically-caused fire ........................................ 31
0.8 Injury caused by hazardous substances..................................................................... 32
0.9 Mechanically-caused injury.......................................................................................... 32
0.10 Thermally-caused injury (skinbum )............................................................................. 33
0.10.1 Models for thermally-caused injury...................................................................... 33
0.10.2 Models for protection against thermally-causedpain or injury.............................34
0.11 Radiation-caused injury................................................................................................35
1 Scope..................................................................................................................................... 36
2 Normative references............................................................................................................ 37
3 Terms, definitions andabbreviated term s.............................................................................44
3.1 Energy source abbreviations...................................................................................... 44
3.2 Other abbreviations..................................................................................................... 45
3.3 Terms and definitions.................................................................................................. 46
3.3.1 Circuit term s.........................................................................................................49
3.3.2 Enclosure terms................................................................................................... 49
3.3.3 Equipment terms.................................................................................................. 50
3.3.4 Flammability terms............................................................................................... 51
3.3.5 Electrical insulation..............................................................................................53
3.3.6 Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................53
3.3.7 Operating and fault conditions............................................................................ 55
3.3.8 Persons.................................................................................................................56

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -3 -
3.3.9 Potential ignition sources.................................................................................... 57

3.3.10 Ratings..................................................................................................................57
3.3.11 Safeguards............................................................................................................ 58
3.3.12 Spacings............................................................................................................... 60
3.3.13 Temperature controls...........................................................................................60
3.3.14 Voltages and currents..........................................................................................60
3.3.15 Classes of equipment with respect to protection from electric shock............... 61
3.3.16 Chemical terms.................................................................................................... 62
3.3.17 Batteries............................................................................................................... 62
3.3.18 FIW terms............................................................................................................. 63
3.3.19 Sound exposure................................................................................................... 63
4 General requirements.......................................................................................................... 64
4.1 General......................................................................................................................... 64
4.1.1 Application of requirements and acceptance of materials, components
and subassemblies..............................................................................................64
4.1.2 Use of components..............................................................................................65
4.1.3 Equipment design and construction....................................................................65
4.1.4 Equipment installation..........................................................................................65
4.1.5 Constructions and components not specifically covered...................................66
4.1.6 Orientation during transport and use.................................................................. 66
4.1.7 Choice of criteria.................................................................................................. 66
4.1.8 Liquids and liquid filled components (LFC).........................................................66
4.1.9 Electrical measuring instruments........................................................................ 67
4.1.10 Temperature measurements................................................................................67
4.1.11 Steady state conditions....................................................................................... 67
4.1.12 Hierarchy of safeguards...................................................................................... 67
4.1.13 Examples mentioned in this document............................................................... 67
4.1.14 Tests on parts or samples separate from the end-product............................... 67
4.1.15 Markings and instructions.................................................................................... 67
4.2 Energy sourceclassifications...................................................................................... 68
4.2.1 Class 1 energy source..........................................................................................68
4.2.4 Energy source classification by declaration....................................................... 68
4.3 Protection againstenergy sources...............................................................................68
4.3.1 General.................................................................................................................68
4.3.2 Safeguards for protection of an ordinary person................................................68
4.3.3 Safeguards for protection of an instructed person.............................................70
4.3.4 Safeguards for protection of a skilled person.................................................... 71
4.3.5 Safeguards in a restricted access area.............................................................. 72
4.4 Safeguards...................................................................................................................72
4.4.1 Equivalent materials or components.................................................................. 72
4.4.2 Composition of a safeguard.................................................................................72
4.4.3 Safeguard robustness..........................................................................................72
4.4.4 Displacement of a safeguard by an insulating liquid......................................... 74
4.4.5 Safety interlocks.................................................................................................. 75
4.5 Explosion...................................................................................................................... 75
4.5.1 General.................................................................................................................75
4.5.2 Requirements.......................................................................................................75
Copyright Inlernational Etectrotechmcal Commission

-4 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
4.6 Fixing of conductors.................................................................................................... 76

4.6.1 Requirements.......................................................................................................76
4.6.2 Compliance criteria..............................................................................................76
4.7 Equipment for direct insertion into mains socket-outlets.......................................... 76
4.7.1 General.................................................................................................................76
4.7.2 Requirements.......................................................................................................76
4.8 Equipment containing coin / button cell batteries...................................................... 77
4.8.1 General.................................................................................................................77
4.8.2 Instructional safeguard........................................................................................ 77
4.8.3 Construction.........................................................................................................77
4.8.4 Tests..................................................................................................................... 77
4.9 Likelihood of fire or shock due to entry of conductive objects..................................79
4.10 Components requirements...........................................................................................79
4.10.1 Disconnect device................................................................................................79
4.10.2 Switches and relays.............................................................................................79
5 Electrically-caused injury.....................................................................................................79
5.1 General......................................................................................................................... 79
5.2 Classification and limits of electrical energy sources................................................80
5.2.1 Electrical energy source classifications.............................................................. 80
5.2.2 Electrical energy source ES1 and ES2 limits..................................................... 80
5.3 Protection against electrical energy sources............................................................. 86
5.3.1 General.................................................................................................................86
5.3.2 Accessibility to electrical energy sources andsafeguards................................. 86
5.4 Insulation materials and requirements........................................................................ 89
5.4.1 General.................................................................................................................89
5.4.2 Clearances........................................................................................................... 94
5.4.3 Creepage distances........................................................................................... 104
5.4.4 Solid insulation...................................................................................................108
5.4.5 Antenna terminal insulation...............................................................................117
5.4.6 Insulation of internal wire asa part of a supplementary safeguard..................117
5.4.7 Tests for semiconductor components and forcemented joints........................ 118
5.4.8 Humidity conditioning.........................................................................................118
5.4.9 Electric strength te s t..........................................................................................119
5.4.10 Safeguards against transientvoltages from external circuits.......................... 122
5.4.11 Separation between externalcircuits and earth................................................. 124
5.4.12 Insulating liquid...................................................................................................125
5.5 Components as safeguards.......................................................................................126
5.5.1 General...............................................................................................................126
5.5.2 Capacitors and RC units.................................................................................... 126
5.5.3 Transformers...................................................................................................... 127
5.5.4 Optocouplers...................................................................................................... 127
5.5.5 Relays.................................................................................................................127
5.5.6 Resistors............................................................................................................ 128
5.5.7 SPDs................................................................................................................... 128
5.5.8 Insulation between the mainsand an external circuit consisting of a
coaxial cable....................................................................................................... 129
5.5.9 Safeguards for socket-outletsin outdoor equipment.........................................129

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -5 -
5.6 Protective conductor................................................................................................. 130

5.6.1 General...............................................................................................................130
5.6.2 Requirements for protective conductors........................................................... 130
5.6.3 Requirements for protective earthing conductors............................................131
5.6.4 Requirements for protective bonding conductors.............................................131
5.6.5 Terminals for protective conductors..................................................................134
5.6.6 Resistance of the protective bonding system .................................................. 135
5.6.7 Reliable connection of a protective earthing conductor................................... 137
5.6.8 Functional earthing............................................................................................ 137
5.7 Prospective touch voltage, touch current and protective conductor current..........137
5.7.1 General...............................................................................................................137
5.7.2 Measuring devices and networks...................................................................... 138
5.7.3 Equipment set-up, supply connections and earth connections.......................138
5.7.4 Unearthed accessible parts............................................................................... 138
5.7.5 Earthed accessible conductive parts.................................................................139
5.7.6 Requirements when touch current exceeds ES2 limits.................................... 139
5.7.7 Prospective touch voltage and touch current associated with external
circuits.................................................................................................................139
5.7.8 Summation of touch currents from external circuits.........................................141
5.8 Backfeed safeguard in battery backed up supplies................................................. 143
6 Electrically-caused fire........................................................................................................ 143
6.1 General....................................................................................................................... 143
6.2 Classification of power sources (PS) and potential ignition sources (PIS)............ 143
6.2.1 General...............................................................................................................143
6.2.2 Power source circuit classifications..................................................................144
6.2.3 Classification of potential ignition sources.......................................................147
6.3 Safeguards against fire under normal operating conditions and abnormal
operating conditions..................................................................................................148
6.3.1 Requirements.....................................................................................................148
6.3.2 Compliance criteria............................................................................................ 149
6.4 Safeguards against fire under single fault conditions.............................................. 149
6.4.1 General...............................................................................................................149
6.4.2 Reduction of the likelihood of ignition under single fault conditions in
PS1 circuits........................................................................................................ 149
6.4.3 Reduction of the likelihood of ignition under single fault conditions in
PS2 circuits and PS3circuits.............................................................................. 149
6.4.4 Control of fire spread in PS1 circuits.................................................................151
6.4.5 Control of fire spread in PS2 circuits.................................................................151
6.4.6 Control of fire spread in a PS3 circuit.............................................................. 152
6.4.7 Separation of combustible materials from a PIS.............................................. 152
6.4.8 Fire enclosures and fire barriers....................................................................... 155
6.4.9 Flammability of an insulating liquid...................................................................160
6.5 Internal and externalw iring........................................................................................ 161
6.5.1 General requirements.........................................................................................161
6.5.2 Requirements for interconnection to building wiring........................................ 161
6.5.3 Internal wiring for socket-outlets....................................................................... 161
6.6 Safeguards against fire due to the connection of additional equipment................ 162
7 Injury caused by hazardous substances...........................................................................162
；
： 7.1 General...................................................................................................................... 162
7.2 Reduction of exposure to hazardous substances..................................................... 162
- 6- 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
7.3 Ozone exposure......................................................................................................... 162

7.4 Use of personal safeguards or personal protective equipment (PPE)....................162
7.5 Use of instructional safeguards and instructions......................................................163
7.6 Batteries and their protection circuits....................................................................... 163
8 Mechanically-caused injury............................................................................................... 163
8.1 General....................................................................................................................... 163
8.2 Mechanical energy source classifications.................................................................163
8.2.1 General classification.........................................................................................163
8.2.2 MS1..................................................................................................................... 165
8.2.3 MS2..................................................................................................................... 166
8.2.4 MS3..................................................................................................................... 166
8.3 Safeguards against mechanical energy sources......................................................166
8.4 Safeguards against parts with sharp edges and corners.........................................166
8.4.1 Requirements.....................................................................................................166
8.5 Safeguards against moving parts..............................................................................167
8.5.1 Requirements.....................................................................................................167
8.5.2 Instructional safeguard requirements............................................................... 168
8.5.4 Special categories of equipment containing moving parts...............................168
8.5.5 High pressure lamps..........................................................................................173
8.6 Stability of equipment................................................................................................ 174
8.6.1 Requirements.....................................................................................................174
8.6.2 Static stability.....................................................................................................176
8.6.3 Relocation stability............................................................................................. 177
8.6.4 Glass slide te st...................................................................................................178
8.6.5 Horizontal force test and compliance criteria................................................... 178
8.7 Equipment mounted to a wall, ceiling or other structure......................................... 178
8.7.1 Requirements.....................................................................................................178
8.7.2 Test methods...................................................................................................... 178
8.8 Handle strength.......................................................................................................... 180
8.8.1 General...............................................................................................................180
8.8.2 Test method........................................................................................................ 180
8.9 Wheels or casters attachment requirements............................................................ 181
8.9.1 General...............................................................................................................181
8.9.2 Test method........................................................................................................ 181
8.10 Carts, stands, and similar carriers............................................................................181
8.10.1 General...............................................................................................................181
8.10.2 Marking and instructions................................................................................... 181
8.10.3 Cart, stand or carrier loadingtest and compliance criteria...............................182
8.10.4 Cart, stand or carrier impact te s t.......................................................................183
8.10.5 Mechanical stability............................................................................................ 183
8.10.6 Thermoplastic temperaturestability................................................................... 183
8.11 Mounting means for slide-rail mounted equipment (SRME)..................................... 183
8.11.1 General...............................................................................................................183
8.11.2 Requirements.....................................................................................................184
8.11.3 Mechanical strength te s t.................................................................................... 184
8.11.4 Compliance criteria.............................................................................................185

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
8.12 Telescoping or rod antennas......................................................................................185

9 Thermal bum injury............................................................................................................ 185
9.1 General....................................................................................................................... 185
9.2 Thermal energy source classifications..................................................................... 186
9.2.1 TS1 ..................................................................................................................... 186
9.2.2 T S 2 ..................................................................................................................... 186
9.2.3 T S 3 ..................................................................................................................... 186
9.3 Touch temperature lim its........................................................................................... 186
9.3.1 Requirements.....................................................................................................186
9.3.2 Test method and compliancecriteria................................................................. 186
9.4 Safeguards against thermal energy sources............................................................ 187
9.5 Requirements for safeguards.................................................................................... 188
9.5.1 Equipment safeguard.........................................................................................188
9.5.2 Instructional safeguard...................................................................................... 188
9.6 Requirements for wireless power transmitters......................................................... 188
9.6.1 General...............................................................................................................188
9.6.2 Specification of the foreign objects...................................................................189
9.6.3 Test method and compliancecriteria................................................................. 191
10 Radiation............................................................................................................................. 192
10.1 General....................................................................................................................... 192
10.2 Radiation energy source classifications...................................................................192
10.2.1 General classification.........................................................................................192
10.2.2 RS1..................................................................................................................... 193
10.2.3 RS2..................................................................................................................... 194
10.2.4 RS3..................................................................................................................... 194
10.3 Safeguards against laser radiation............................................................................194
10.4 Safeguards against optical radiation from lamps and lamp systems
(including LED types)................................................................................................ 194
10.4.1 General requirements.........................................................................................194
10.4.2 Requirements for enclosures.............................................................................196
10.4.3 Instructional safeguard...................................................................................... 196
10.5 Safeguards against X-radiation................................................................................. 198
10.5.1 Requirements.....................................................................................................198
10.5.3 Test method........................................................................................................ 198
10.6 Safeguards against acoustic energy sources.......................................................... 199
10.6.1 General...............................................................................................................199
10.6.2 Classification......................................................................................................200
10.6.3 Requirements for dose-based systems............................................................ 201
10.6.4 Measurement methods...................................................................................... 201
10.6.5 Protection of persons........................................................................................ 202
10.6.6 Requirements for listening devices (headphones, earphones, etc.)...............202
Annex A (informative) Examples of equipment within the scope of this document.............. 204
Annex B (normative) Normal operating condition tests, abnormal operating condition
tests and single fault condition tests.......................................................................................... 205
B.1 General.........................................................................................................................205
: B.1.1 Test applicability................................................................................................205
: B.1.2 Type of test.........................................................................................................205

- 8- 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
B.1.3 Test samples.......................................................................................................205

B.1.4 Compliance by inspection of relevant data........................................................205
B.1.5 Temperature measurement conditions.............................................................. 205
B.2 Normal operating conditions...................................................................................... 206
B.2.1 General............................................................................................................... 206
B.2.2 Supply frequency................................................................................................ 206
B.2.3 Supply voltage.....................................................................................................206
B.2.4 Normal operating voltages.................................................................................. 206
B.2.5 Input te s t..............................................................................................................207
B.2.6 Operating temperature measurement conditions..............................................208
B.2.7 Battery charging and discharging under normal operating conditions.............208
B.3 Simulated abnormal operating conditions................................................................. 208
B.3.1 General............................................................................................................... 208
B.3.2 Covering of ventilation openings........................................................................ 209
B.3.3 DC mains polarity test.........................................................................................210
B.3.4 Setting of voltage selector.................................................................................. 210
B.3.5 Maximum load at output terminals.....................................................................210
B.3.6 Reverse battery polarity..................................................................................... 210
B.3.7 Audio amplifier abnormal operating conditions................................................. 210
B.3.8 Compliance criteria during and after abnormal operating conditions..............210
B. 4 Simulated single fault conditions............................................................................... 210
B.4.1 General............................................................................................................... 210
B.4.2 Temperature controlling device.......................................................................... 211
B.4.3 Motor tests........................................................................................................... 211
B.4.4 Functional insulation...........................................................................................211
B.4.5 Short-circuit and interruption of electrodes in tubesand semiconductors.......212
B.4.6 Short-circuit or disconnection of passive components..................................... 212
B.4.7 Continuous operation of components................................................................ 212
B.4.8 Compliance criteria during and after single fault conditions............................ 213
B. 4.9 Battery charging and discharging under single faultconditions........................ 213
Annex C (normative) UV radiation........................................................................................... 214
C. 1 Protection of materials in equipment from UVradiation........................................... 214
C. 1.1 General............................................................................................................... 214
C.1.2 Requirements......................................................................................................214
C.1.3 Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 214
C. 2 UV light conditioning test........................................................................................... 215
C.2.1 Test apparatus.................................................................................................... 215
C.2.2 Mounting of test samples.................................................................................... 215
C.2.3 Carbon-arc light-exposure te s t.......................................................................... 215
C.2.4 Xenon-arc light-exposure test............................................................................ 215
Annex D (normative) Test generators......................................................................................216
D. 1 Impulse test generators..............................................................................................216
D.2 Antenna interface test generator............................................................................... 216
D. 3 Electronic pulse generator......................................................................................... 217
Annex E (normative) Test conditions for equipment containing audio amplifiers................. 218
E. 1 Electrical energy source classification for audio signals......................................... 218
E.2 Audio amplifier normal operating conditions.............................................................218
E.3 Audio amplifier abnormal operating conditions........................................................ 219
Annex F (normative) Equipment markings, instructions, and instructional safeguards........220
旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 —9 —
F. 1 General.........................................................................................................................220
F_2 Letter symbols and graphical symbols...................................................................... 220
F.2.1 Letter symbols.................................................................................................... 220
F.2.2 Graphical symbols..............................................................................................220
F.2.3 Compliance criteria............................................................................................ 220
F_3 Equipment markings....................................................................................................220
F.3.1 Equipment marking locations............................................................................. 220
F.3.2 Equipment identification markings.................................................................... 221
F.3.3 Equipment rating markings.................................................................................221
F.3.4 Voltage setting device........................................................................................ 223
F.3.5 Markings on terminals and operating devices...................................................223
F.3.6 Equipment markings related to equipment classification................................. 225
F.3.7 Equipment IP rating marking............................................................................. 225
F.3.8 External power supply output marking..............................................................226
F.3.9 Durability, legibility and permanence ofmarkings..............................................226
F. 3.10 Test for the permanence of markings................................................................226
F_4 Instructions.................................................................................................................. 226
F_5 Instructional safeguards............................................................................................. 227
Annex G (normative) Components........................................................................................... 230
G. 1 Switches...................................................................................................................... 230
G. 1.1 General............................................................................................................... 230
G.1.2 Requirements..................................................................................................... 230
G.1.3 Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 231
G.2 Relays..........................................................................................................................231
G.2.1 Requirements..................................................................................................... 231
G.2.2 Overload te st...................................................................................................... 232
G.2.3 Relay controlling connectors supplyingpower to other equipment...................232
G.3 Protective devices....................................................................................................... 232
G.3.1 Thermal cut-offs..................................................................................................232
G.3.2 Thermal links...................................................................................................... 233
G.3.3 PTC thermistors.................................................................................................. 234
G.3.4 Overcurrent protective devices.......................................................................... 235
G.3.5 Safeguard components not mentioned in G.3.1 to G.3.4 ................................. 235
G.4 Connectors.................................................................................................................. 235
G.4.1 Clearance and creepage distance requirements.............................................. 235
G.4.2 Mains connectors................................................................................................235
G.4.3 Connectors other than mains connectors......................................................... 236
G.5 Wound components.....................................................................................................236
G.5.1 Wire insulation in wound components...............................................................236
G.5.2 Endurance test.................................................................................................... 236
G.5.3 Transformers...................................................................................................... 238
G.5.4 Motors................................................................................................................. 246
G.6 Wire insulation............................................................................................................ 250
G.6.1 General............................................................................................................... 250
G.6.2 Enamelled winding wire insulation.................................................................... 251
G.7 Mains supply cords.....................................................................................................251
G.7.1 General............................................................................................................... 251
G.7.2 Cross sectional area.......................................................................................... 252

- 10 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
G.7.3Cord anchorages and strain relief for non-detachable power supply

cords...................................................................................................................254
G.7.4 Cord entry............................................................................................................ 255
G.7.5 Non-detachable cord bend protection............................................................... 255
G.7.6 Supply wiring space............................................................................................256
G.8 Varistors..................................................................................................................... 257
G.8.1 General............................................................................................................... 257
G.8.2 Safeguards against fire ...................................................................................... 258
G.9 Integrated circuit (IC) current limiters........................................................................260
G.9.1 Requirements..................................................................................................... 260
G.9.2 Test program...................................................................................................... 260
G.9.3 Compliance criteria.............................................................................................261
G.10 Resistors.................................................................................................................... 261
G.10.1 General............................................................................................................... 261
G.10.2 Conditioning........................................................................................................261
G.10.3 Resistor te s t........................................................................................................262
G.10.4 Voltage surge test...............................................................................................262
G.10.5 Impulse test.........................................................................................................262
G.10.6 Overload te st.......................................................................................................262
G.11 Capacitors and RC units............................................................................................ 262
G.11.1 General............................................................................................................... 262
G.11.2 Conditioning of capacitors andRC units............................................................ 262
G.11.3 Rules for selecting capacitors............................................................................ 263
G.12 Optocouplers..............................................................................................................263
G.13 Printed boards............................................................................................................264
G.13.1 General............................................................................................................... 264
G.13.2 Uncoated printed boards.................................................................................... 264
G.13.3 Coated printed boards........................................................................................ 264
G.13.4 Insulation between conductorson the same inner surface................................265
G.13.5 Insulation between conductorson different surfaces........................................ 266
G.13.6 Tests on coated printed boards.........................................................................266
G.14 Coatings on component terminals............................................................................. 268
G.14.1 Requirements..................................................................................................... 268
G.15 Pressurized liquid filled components.........................................................................269
G.15.1 Requirements..................................................................................................... 269
G.15.2 Test methods and compliance criteria.............................................................. 269
G.15.3 Compliance criteria.............................................................................................270
G. 16 IC that includes a capacitor discharge function (IC X )............................................. 270
G.16.1 Requirements..................................................................................................... 270
G.16.2 Tests....................................................................................................................270
G. 16.3 Compliance criteria.............................................................................................271
Annex H (normative) Criteria for telephone ringing signals....................................................272
H. 1 General........................................................................................................................272
H.2 Method A .................................................................................................................... 272
H.3 Method B .................................................................................................................... 275
H. 3.1 Ringing signal..................................................................................................... 275
H.3.2 Tripping device and monitoring voltage..............................................................275

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 11 -
Annex I (informative) Overvoltage categories (see IEC 60364-4-44).................................... 277

Annex J (normative) Insulated winding wires for use without interleaved insulation............ 278
J.1 General........................................................................................................................ 278
J.2 Type tests................................................................................................................... 278
J.2.1 General............................................................................................................... 278
J.2.2 Electric strength.................................................................................................. 278
J.2.3 Flexibility and adherence.................................................................................... 279
J.2.4 Heat shock........................................................................................................... 279
J.2.5 Retention of electric strength after bending.......................................................280
J. 3 Testing during manufacturing....................................................................................280
J.3.1 General............................................................................................................... 280
J.3.2 Spark test............................................................................................................ 280
J. 3.3 Sampling test.......................................................................................................280
Annex K (normative) Safety interlocks.................................................................................... 281
K. 1 General........................................................................................................................ 281
K. 1.1 General requirements..........................................................................................281
K.1.2 Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 281
K.2 Components of the safety interlocksafeguard mechanism....................................... 281
K.3 Inadvertent change of operating mode......................................................................282
K.4 Interlock safeguard override...................................................................................... 282
K.5 Fail-safe......................................................................................................................282
K.5.1 Requirement........................................................................................................ 282
K.6 Mechanically operated safety interlocks................................................................... 283
K.6.1 Endurance requirement...................................................................................... 283
K. 7 Interlock circuit isolation.............................................................................................283
K.7.1 Separation distances for contact gaps and interlock circuit elements.............283
K.7.2 Overload te st.......................................................................................................284
K.7.3 Endurance test.....................................................................................................284
K.7.4 Electric strength te s t...........................................................................................284
Annex L (normative) Disconnect devices................................................................................ 285
L. 1 General requirements................................................................................................. 285
L.2 Permanently connected equipment........................................................................... 285
L.3 Parts that remain energized....................................................................................... 285
L.4 Single-phase equipment.............................................................................................285
L.5 Three-phase equipment............................................................................................. 286
L.6 Switches as disconnect devices.................................................................................286
L.7 Plugs as disconnect devices...................................................................................... 286
L.8 Multiple power sources...............................................................................................286
L. 9 Compliance criteria.................................................................................................... 287
Annex M (normative) Equipment containing batteries and their protection circuits............. 288
M. 1 General requirements.................................................................................................288
M.2 Safety of batteries and their cells.............................................................................. 288
M.2.1 Requirements......................................................................................................288
M.2.2 Compliance criteria.............................................................................................288
M.3 Protection circuits for batteries provided within the equipment............................... 288
M.3.1 Requirements......................................................................................................288

- 12 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
M.3.2 Test method......................................................................................................... 289

M.3.3 Compliance criteria............................................................................................. 290
M.4 Additional safeguards for equipment containing a portable secondary lithium
battery........................................................................................................................ 290
M.4.1 General................................................................................................................290
M.4.2 Charging safeguards........................................................................................... 290
M.4.3 Fire enclosure...................................................................................................... 291
M.4.4 Drop test of equipment containing a secondary lithium battery....................... 291
M.5 Risk of burn due to short-circuit during carrying...................................................... 292
M.5.1 Requirements...................................................................................................... 292
M.5.2 Test method and compliance criteria.................................................................293
M.6 Safeguards against short-circuits.............................................................................. 293
M.6.1 Requirements...................................................................................................... 293
M.6.2 Compliance criteria............................................................................................. 293
M.7 Risk of explosion from lead acid and NiCdbatteries................................................ 293
M.7.1 Ventilation preventing an explosive gas concentration..................................... 293
M.7.2 Test method and compliance criteria.................................................................294
M.7.3 Ventilation tests...................................................................................................297
M.7.4 Marking requirement........................................................................................... 298
M.8 Protection against internal ignition from external spark sources of batteries
with aqueous electrolyte............................................................................................298
M.8.1 General................................................................................................................298
M.8.2 Test method......................................................................................................... 298
M.9 Preventing electrolyte spillage...................................................................................301
M.9.1 Protection from electrolyte spillage.................................................................... 301
M.9.2 Tray for preventing electrolyte spillage............................................................. 301
M.10 Instructions to prevent reasonably foreseeable misuse........................................... 301
Annex N (normative) Electrochemical potentials (V).............................................................. 303
Annex 〇（ normative) Measurement of creepage distances and clearances......................... 304
Annex P (normative) Safeguards against conductive objects................................................ 311
P.1 General........................................................................................................................ 311
P.2 Safeguards against entry or consequences of entry of a foreign object................. 311
P.2.1 General...............................................................................................................311
P.2.2 Safeguards against entry of a foreign object....................................................311
P.2.3 Safeguards against the consequences of entry of a foreign object.................312
P.3 Safeguards against spillage of internal liquids..........................................................314
P.3.1 General...............................................................................................................314
P.3.2 Determination of spillage consequences.......................................................... 314
P.3.3 Spillage safeguards........................................................................................... 314
P.3.4 Compliance criteria............................................................................................ 315
P. 4 Metallized coatings and adhesives securing parts................................................... 315
P.4.1 General...............................................................................................................315
P. 4.2 Tests................................................................................................................... 315
Annex Q (normative) Circuits intended for interconnection with building wiring...................317
Q. 1 Limited power source................................................................................................. 317
Q. 1.1 Requirements..................................................................................................... 317
Q.1.2 Test method and compliance criteria................................................................317
Q.2 Test for external circuits - paired conductor cable...................................................318
Annex R (normative) Limited short-circuit test........................................................................ 319

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -13-
R.1 General........................................................................................................................319
R.2 Test setup................................................................................................................... 319
R.3 Test method................................................................................................................ 319
R. 4 Compliance criteria.................................................................................................... 320
Annex S (normative) Tests for resistance to heat and fire .....................................................321
S.1 Flammability test for fire enclosure and fire barrier materials of equipment
where the steady state power does not exceed 4 000 W ...................................... 321
5.2 Flammability test for fire enclosure and fire barrier integrity.................................. 322
5.3 Flammability tests for the bottom of a fire enclosure.............................................. 323
5.3.1 Mounting of samples..........................................................................................323
5.3.2 Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 323
5.4 Flammability classification of materials....................................................................324
5.5 Flammability test for fire enclosure materials of equipment with a steady
state power exceeding 4 000 W ............................................................................... 325
Annex T (normative) Mechanical strength tests...................................................................... 327
T.1 General........................................................................................................................327
T.2 Steady force test, 10 N...............................................................................................327
T.3 Steady force test, 30 N...............................................................................................327
T.4 Steady force test, 100 N ............................................................................................ 327
T.5 Steady force test, 250 N ............................................................................................ 327
T.6 Enclosure impact test.................................................................................................327
T.7 Drop test......................................................................................................................328
T.8 Stress relief test..........................................................................................................328
T.9 Glass impact te s t....................................................................................................... 329
T.10 Glass fragmentation test............................................................................................ 329
T. 11 Test for telescoping or rod antennas.........................................................................330
Annex U (normative) Mechanical strength of CRTs and protection against the effects
of implosion................................................................................................................................ 331
U. 1 General........................................................................................................................331
U.2 Test method and compliance criteria for non-intrinsically protected CRTs............ 332
U. 3 Protective screen....................................................................................................... 332
Annex V (normative) Determination of accessible parts......................................................... 333
V. 1 Accessible parts of equipment.................................................................................. 333
V.1.1 General................................................................................................................333
V.1.2 Test method 1 - Surfaces and openings tested with jointed test probes........ 333
V.1.3 Test method 2 - Openings tested with straight unjointed test probes............ 333
V.1.4 Test method 3 - Plugs, jacks, connectors........................................................ 336
V.1.5 Test method 4 - Slot openings..........................................................................336
V.1.6 Test method 5 - Terminals intended to be used by an ordinary person......... 337
V. 2 Accessible part criterion............................................................................................ 338
Annex W (informative) Comparison of terms introduced in this document........................... 339
W. 1 General........................................................................................................................339
W.2 Comparison of terms..................................................................................................339
Annex X (normative) Alternative method for determining clearances for insulation in
circuits connected to an AC mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)......................... 356
Annex Y (normative) Construction requirements for outdoor enclosures..............................358
Y.1 General........................................................................................................................358
Y.2 Resistance to UV radiation........................................................................................ 358
Y.3 Resistance to corrosion..............................................................................................358

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Y.3.1 General................................................................................................................358
Y.3.2 Test apparatus.....................................................................................................359
Y.3.3 Water - saturated sulphurdioxide atmosphere................................................. 359
Y.3.4 Test procedure.....................................................................................................359
Y.3.5 Compliance criteria............................................................................................. 360
Y.4 Gaskets...................................................................................................................... 360
Y.4.1 General................................................................................................................360
Y.4.2 Gasket tests......................................................................................................... 360
Y.4.3 Tensile strength and elongation te sts............................................................... 360
Y.4.4 Compression test................................................................................................ 361
Y.4.5 Oil resistance....................................................................................................... 362
Y.4.6 Securing means...................................................................................................362
Y.5 Protection of equipment within an outdoor enclosure..............................................363
Y.5.1 General................................................................................................................363
Y.5.2 Protection from moisture.................................................................................... 363
Y.5.3 Water spray test.................................................................................................. 364
Y.5.4 Protection from plants andvermin.......................................................................366
Y.5.5 Protection from excessive dust......................................................................... 367
Y.6 Mechanical strength of enclosures........................................................................... 367
Y.6.1 General................................................................................................................367
Y.6.2 Impact test........................................................................................................... 368
Bibliography................................................................................................................................ 369
Figure 1 - Three block model for pain and injury.......................................................................24

Figure 2 - Three block model for safety...................................................................................... 25
Figure 3 - Schematic and model for electrically-caused pain or injury................................... 30
Figure 4 - Model for protection against electrically-caused painor injury.................................30
Figure 5 - Model for electrically-caused fir e ...............................................................................31
Figure 6 - Models for protection against fire ...............................................................................32
Figure 7 - Schematic and model for thermally-caused injury.................................................... 34
Figure 8 - Model for protection against thermally-caused injury...............................................34
Figure 9 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against aclass 1 energy source......... 69
Figure 10 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against a class 2 energy
source............................................................................................................................................ 69
source during ordinary person servicing conditions....................................................................69
source............................................................................................................................................ 70
Figure 13 - Model for protection of an instructed person against a class 1 energy
source............................................................................................................................................ 70
source............................................................................................................................................ 70
source............................................................................................................................................ 71
Figure 16 - Model for protectionof a skilled person against a class 1 energy source............. 71

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -15-
Figure 19 - Model for protection of a skilled person against class 3 energy sources
during equipment servicing conditions........................................................................................ 72
Figure 20 - Test hook..................................................................................................................79
Figure 21 - Illustration showing ES limits for voltage and current............................................81
Figure 22 - Maximum values for combined AC current and DC current...................................83
Figure 23 - Maximum values for combined AC voltage and DC voltage..................................83
Figure 24 - Contact requirements to bare internal conductive parts....................................... 87
Figure 25 - Mandrel................................................................................................................... 112
Figure 26 - Initial position of mandrel.......................................................................................113
Figure 27 - Final position of mandrel........................................................................................113
Figure 28 - Position of metal foil on insulating material.......................................................... 113
Figure 29 - Example of electric strength test instrument for solid insulation........................ 121
Figure 30 - Application points of test voltage...........................................................................122
Figure 31 - Test for separation between an external circuit and earth.................................. 125
Figure 32 - Test circuit for touch current of single-phase equipment.................................... 141
Figure 33 - Test circuit for touch current of three-phase equipment..................................... 141
Figure 34 - Power measurement for worst-case fault............................................................. 145
Figure 35 - Power measurement for worst-case power source fa u lt..................................... 146
Figure 36 - Illustration of power source classification............................................................ 147
Figure 37 - Minimum separation requirements from a P IS ...................................................... 153
Figure 38 - Extended separation requirements from a PIS..................................................... 153
Figure 39 - Deflected separation requirements from a PIS when a fire barrier is used.......154
Figure 40 - Determination of top, bottom and side openings................................................. 156
Figure 41 - Top openings......................................................................................................... 157
Figure 42 - Bottom openings....................................................................................................158
Figure 43 - Baffle plate construction........................................................................................158
Figure 44 - PIS trajectory downwards......................................................................................159
Figure 45 - Limits for moving fan blades made of non-plasticmaterials................................. 165
Figure 46 - Limits for moving fan blades made of plastic materials.......................................165
Figure 47 - Steel disc................................................................................................................ 189
Figure 48 - Aluminium rin g .......................................................................................................190
Figure 49 - Aluminium foil......................................................................................................... 191
Figure 50 - Example of a warning label for a lamp with multiple hazard spectral
regions......................................................................................................................................... 198
Figure D.1 - 1,2/50 yis and 10/700 (.is voltage impulse generator......................................... 216
Figure D.2 - Antenna interface test generator circuit.............................................................217
Figure D.3 - Example of an electronic pulse generator..........................................................217
Figure E.1 - Band-pass filter for wide-band noise measurement.......................................... 219
Figure F.1 - Example of an instructional safeguard................................................................ 228
Figure G.1 - Determination of arithmetic average temperature..............................................241
Figure G.2 - Test voltages........................................................................................................ 246
Figure G.3 - Thermal ageing tim e............................................................................................ 267
Figure G.4 - Abrasion resistance test for coating layers........................................................268
Figure H.1 - Definition of ringing period and cadence cycle.................................................. 273

- 16 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Figure H.2 - 打 31 limit curve for cadenced ringing signal........................................................274

Figure H.3 - Peak and peak-to-peak currents.......................................................................... 274
Figure H.4 - Ringing voltage trip criteria................................................................................... 276
Figure M.1 - Distance J as a function of the rated capacity for various charge currents
/(m A/Ah)..................................................................................................................................... 301
Figure 0.1 - Narrow groove.......................................................................................................304
Figure 0.2 - Wide groove.......................................................................................................... 305
Figure 0.3 - V-shaped groove.................................................................................................. 305
Figure 0.4 - Intervening unconnected conductive part............................................................ 305
Figure 0.5 - R ib......................................................................................................................... 305
Figure 0.6 - Uncemented joint with narrow groove..................................................................306
Figure 0.7 - Uncemented joint with wide groove.....................................................................306
Figure 0.8 - Uncemented joint with narrow and wide grooves................................................ 306
Figure 0.9 - Narrow recess.......................................................................................................307
Figure 0.10 - Wide recess........................................................................................................ 307
Figure 0.11 - Coating around terminals................................................................................... 308
Figure 0.12 - Coating over printed wiring................................................................................ 308
Figure 0.13 - Example of measurements in an enclosure of insulating material..................309
Figure 0.14 - Cemented joints in multi-layer printed boards................................................. 309
Figure 0.15 - Device filled with insulating compound............................................................. 310
Figure 0.16 - Partitioned bobbin............................................................................................... 310
Figure P.1 - Examples of cross-sections of designs of top openings which prevent
vertical entry................................................................................................................................ 312
Figure P.2 - Examples of cross-sections of designs of side opening louvres which
prevent vertical entry..................................................................................................................312
Figure P.3 - Internal volume locus for foreign object entry..................................................... 313
Figure S.1 - Top openings / surface of fire enclosure or fire barrier...................................... 323
Figure T.1 - Impact test using sphere....................................................................................... 328
Figure V.1 - Jointed test probe for equipment likely to be accessible tochildren...................334
Figure V.2 - Jointed test probe for equipment not likely to be accessible tochildren............. 335
Figure V.3 - Blunt probe............................................................................................................ 336
Figure V.4 - Wedge probe........................................................................................................ 337
Figure V.5 - Terminal probe......................................................................................................338
Figure Y.1 - Gasket te s t........................................................................................................... 362
Figure Y.2 - Water-spray test spray-head piping.....................................................................365
Figure Y.3 - Water-spray test spray head.................................................................................366
Table 1 - Response to energy class..........................................................................................24

Table 2 - Examples of body response or property damage related to energy sources..........25
Table 3 - Examples of safeguard characteristics..................................................................... 29
Table 4 - Electrical energy source limits for steady state ES1 and ES2...................................82
Table 5 - Electrical energy source limits for a charged capacitor.............................................84
Table 6 - Voltage limits for single pulses.................................................................................. 85
Table 7 - Current limits for single pulses.................................................................................. 85
旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018 - 17 -
Table 8 - Minimum air gap distance........................................................................................... 88

Table 9 - Temperature limits for materials, components and systems.................................... 90
Table 10 - Minimum clearances for voltages with frequencies up to 30 kH z........................... 96
Table 11 - Minimum clearances for voltages with frequencies above 30 kHz..........................97
Table 12 - Mains transient voltages............................................................................................98
Table 13 - External circuit transient voltages............................................................................100
Table 14 - Minimum clearances using required withstand voltage......................................... 102
Table 15 - Electric strength test voltages................................................................................. 103
Table 16 - Multiplication factors for clearances and test voltages......................................... 104
Table 17 - Minimum creepage distances for basic insulation and supplementary
insulation in m m ..........................................................................................................................107
Table 18 - Minimum values of creepage distances (in mm) for frequencies higher than
30 kHz and up to 400 kHz......................................................................................................... 108
Table 19 - Tests for insulation in non-separable layers........................................................... 111
Table 20 - Electric field strength Ep for some commonly used materials...............................115
Table 21 - Reduction factors for the value of breakdown electric field strength Ep at
higher frequencies...................................................................................................................... 116
Table 22 - Reduction factors for the value of breakdown electric field strength Ep at
higher frequencies for thin materials..........................................................................................116
Table 23 - Values for insulation resistance...............................................................................117
Table 24 - Distance through insulation of internal wiring.........................................................118
Table 25 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on transient voltages.................. 120
Table 26 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on the peak of the working
voltages and recurring peak voltages........................................................................................120
Table 27 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on temporary overvoltages..........120
Table 28 - Test values for electric strength tests..................................................................... 123
Table 29 - Overview of tests for resistor applications............................................................. 128
Table 30 - Protective earthing conductor sizes for reinforced safeguards for
permanently connected equipment............................................................................................ 131
Table 31 - Minimum protective bonding conductor size of copper conductors....................... 133
Table 32 - Sizes of terminals for protective conductors.......................................................... 135
Table 33 - Test duration, mains connected equipment............................................................ 136
Table 34 - List of applicable IEC standards regarding insulating liquids................................160
Table 35 - Classification for various categories of mechanical energy sources.....................164
Table 36 - Overview of requirements and tests....................................................................... 175
Table 37 - Torque to be applied to screws...............................................................................180
Table 38 - Touch temperature limits for accessible parts........................................................ 187
Table 39 - Radiation energy source classifications..................................................................192
Table 40 - Allowable radiation level according to IEC 62471 (all parts) for each hazard
type ............................................................................................................................................. 195
Table 41 - Hazard-related risk group marking of equipment................................................... 197
Table 42 - Explanation of marking information and guidance on control measures.............. 197
Table C.1 - Minimum property retention limits after UV exposure.......................................... 214
Table D.1 - Component values for Figure D.1 and Figure D.2................................................217
Table E.1 - Audio signal electrical energy source classes and safeguards........................... 218

- 18 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Table F.1 - Instructional safeguard element description and examples..................................228

Table F.2 - Examples of markings, instructions, and instructional safeguards..................... 229
Table G.1 - Peak surge current................................................................................................. 231
Table G.2 - Test temperature and testing time (days) per cycle.............................................237
Table G.3 - Temperature limits for transformer windings and for motor windings
(except for the motor running overload te s t)............................................................................240
Table G.4 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on the peak of the working
voltages........................................................................................................................................242
Table G.5 - Values of FIW wires with maximum overall diameter and minimum test
voltages according to the enamel increase...............................................................................245
Table G.6 - Temperature limits for running overload te sts..................................................... 247
Table G.7 - Sizes of conductors................................................................................................ 253
Table G.8 - Strain relief test force.............................................................................................254
Table G.9 - Range of conductor sizes to be accepted by terminals....................................... 256
Table G.10 - Varistor overload and temporary overvoltage test..............................................259
Table G.11 - Performance test program for integrated circuit (IC) current limiters............... 261
Table G.12 - Capacitor ratings according to IEC 60384-14.................................................... 263
Table G.13 - Minimum separation distances for coated printed boards.................................265
Table G.14 - Insulation in printed boards.................................................................................266
Table 1.1 - Overvoltage categories............................................................................................277
Table J.1 - Mandrel diameter.................................................................................................... 279
Table J.2 - Oven temperature................................................................................................... 280
Table M.1 - Values for current /f|oat and /boost，factors/g a n d /s, and voltages U^\oa{
and L b〇〇s t.................................................................................................................................. 296
Table 0.1 - Value of^T................................................................................................................304
Table Q.1 - Limits for inherently limited power sources..........................................................317
Table Q.2 - Limits for power sources not inherently limited (overcurrent protective
device required)...........................................................................................................................318
Table S.1 - Foamed materials................................................................................................... 324
Table S.2 - Rigid materials........................................................................................................324
Table S.3 - Very thin materials................................................................................................. 324
Table T.1 - Impact force............................................................................................................ 329
Table T.2 - Torque values for end-piece test........................................................................... 330
Table W.1 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60664-1:2007 and
IEC 62368-1 ................................................................................................................................ 340
Table W.2 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 61140:2016 and IEC 62368-1 ....... 342
IEC 62368-1 ................................................................................................................................ 345
IEC 62368-1 ................................................................................................................................ 349
Table X.1 - Alternative minimum clearances for insulation in circuits connected to ac
.mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)....................................................................... 356
Table X.2 - Additional clearances for insulation in circuits connected to ac mains not
exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)..........................................................................................357
Copyright International Eieclrotechnical Commission

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018 - 19 -
Table Y.1 - Examples of the provision of pollution degree environments 363

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION
AUDIO/VIDEO, INFORMATION AND

COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT -
FOREWORD
1) The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is a worldwide organization for standardization comprising
all national electrotechnical committees (IEC National Committees). The object of IEC is to promote
international co-operation on all questions concerning standardization in the electrical and electronic fields. To
this end and in addition to other activities, IEC publishes International Standards, Technical Specifications,
Technical Reports, Publicly Available Specifications (PAS) and Guides (hereafter referred to as MIEC
Publication(s),,). Their preparation is entrusted to technical committees; any IEC National Committee interested
in the subject dealt with may participate in this preparatory work. International, governmental and non
governmental organizations liaising with the IEC also participate in this preparation. IEC collaborates closely
with the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) in accordance with conditions determined by
agreement between the two organizations.
2) The formal decisions or agreements of IEC on technical matters express, as nearly as possible, an international
consensus of opinion on the relevant subjects since each technical committee has representation from all
interested IEC National Committees.
3) IEC Publications have the form of recommendations for international use and are accepted by IEC National
Committees in that sense. While all reasonable efforts are made to ensure that the technical content of IEC
Publications is accurate, IEC cannot be held responsible for the way in which they are used or for any
misinterpretation by any end user.
4) In order to promote international uniformity, IEC National Committees undertake to apply IEC Publications
transparently to the maximum extent possible in their national and regional publications. Any divergence
between any IEC Publication and the corresponding national or regional publication shall be clearly indicated in
the latter.
5) IEC itself does not provide any attestation of conformity. Independent certification bodies provide conformity
assessment services and, in some areas, access to IEC marks of conformity. IEC is not responsible for any
services carried out by independent certification bodies.
6) All users should ensure that they have the latest edition of this publication.
7) No liability shall attach to IEC or its directors, employees, servants or agents including individual experts and
members of its technical committees and IEC National Committees for any personal injury, property damage or
other damage of any nature whatsoever, whether direct or indirect, or for costs (including legal fees) and
expenses arising out of the publication, use of, or reliance upon, this IEC Publication or any other IEC
Publications.
8) Attention is drawn to the Normative references cited in this publication. Use of the referenced publications is
indispensable for the correct application of this publication.
9) Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of this IEC Publication may be the subject of
patent rights. IEC shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such patent rights.
International Standard IEC 62368-1 has been prepared by TC 108: Safety of electronic
equipment within the field of audio/video, information technology and communication
technology.
This third edition cancels and replaces the second edition published in 2014. This edition
constitutes a technical revision.
This edition includes the following significant technical changes with respect to the previous
edition:
- addition of requirements for outdoor equipment;

- new requirements for optical radiation;
- addition of requirements for insulating liquids;
- addition of requirements for work cells;

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- addition of requirements for wireless power transmitters;

- addition of requirements for fully insulated winding wire (FIW);
- alternative method for determination of top, bottom and side openings for fire enclosures;
- alternative requirements for sound pressure.
The text of this document is based on the following documents:
FDIS Report on voting
108/701/FDIS 108/707/RVD
Full information on the voting for the approval of this International Standard can be found in
the report on voting indicated in the above table.
This document has been drafted in accordance with the ISO/IEC Directives, Part 2.
A list of all parts in the IEC 62368 series, published under the general title Audio/video,
information and communication technology equipment, can be found on the IEC website.
The “in some countries” notes regarding differing national practices are contained in the
following clauses, subclauses and tables:
0.2.1, Clause 1, 3.3.8.1, 3.3.8.3, 4.1.15, 4.7.3, 5.2.2.2, 5.4.2.3.2.4, 5.4.2.5, 5.4.5.1,
5.4.10.2.1, 5.4.10.2.2, 5.4.10.2.3, 5.5.2.1, 5.5.6, 5.6.4.2.1, 5.6.8, 5.7.6, 5.7.7.1, 8.5.4.2.3,
10.5.3, 10.6.1, F.3.3.6, Y.4.1, Y.4.5, Table 12, Table 13 and Table 39.
In this document, the following print types or formats are used:
- requirements proper and normative annexes: in roman type;

- compliance statements and test specifications: in italic type]
- notes/explanatory matter: in smaller roman type;
- normative conditions within tables：in smaller roman type;
- terms that are defined in 3.3: bold.
In figures and tables, if colour is available:
- green colour denotes a class 1 energy source;

- yellow colour denotes a class 2 energy source;
- red colour denotes a class 3 energy source.
A comparison of terms introduced in this document that are different from other existing IEC
documents is given in Annex W.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
The committee has decided that the contents of this document will remain unchanged until the
stability date indicated on the IEC website under Mhttp://webstore.iec.chu in the data related to
the specific document. At this date, the document will be
• reconfirmed,
• withdrawn,
• replaced by a revised edition, or
• amended.
NOTE Explanatory information related to IEC 62368-1 is contained in IEC TR 62368-2. It provides rationale
together with explanatory information related to this document.
IMPORTANT - The fcolour inside* logo on the cover page of this publication indicates
that it contains colours which are considered to be useful for the correct
understanding of its contents. Users should therefore print this document using a
colour printer.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
INTRODUCTION
0 Principles of this product safety standard
0.1 Objective
This part of IEC 62368 is a product safety standard that classifies energy sources, prescribes
safeguards against those energy sources, and provides guidance on the application of, and
requirements for, those safeguards.
The prescribed safeguards are intended to reduce the likelihood of pain, injury and, in the
case of fire, property damage.
The objective of the INTRODUCTION is to help designers to understand the underlying

principles of safety in order to design safe equipment. These principles are informative and
not an alternative to the detailed requirements of this document.
0.2 Persons
0.2.1 General
This document describes safeguards for the protection of three kinds of persons: the
ordinary person, the instructed person, and the skilled person. Unless otherwise
specified, the requirements for an ordinary person apply. This document assumes that a
person will not intentionally create conditions or situations that could cause pain or injury.
NOTE 1 In Australia, the work conducted by an instructed person or skilled person may require formal licensing
from regulatory authorities.
NOTE 2 In Germany, a person may only be regarded as an instructed person or a skilled person if certain legal
requirements are fulfilled.
0.2.2 Ordinary person
Ordinary person is the term applied to all persons other than instructed persons and
skilled persons. Ordinary persons include not only users of the equipment, but also all
persons who may have access to the equipment or who may be in the vicinity of the
equipment. Under normal operating conditions or abnormal operating conditions,
ordinary persons should not be exposed to parts comprising energy sources capable of
causing pain or injury. Under a single fault condition, ordinary persons should not be
exposed to parts comprising energy sources capable of causing injury.
0.2.3 Instructed person
Instructed person is a term applied to persons who have been instructed and trained by a
skilled person, or who are supervised by a skilled person, to identify energy sources that
may cause pain (see Table 1) and to take precautions to avoid unintentional contact with or
exposure to those energy sources. Under normal operating conditions, abnormal
operating conditions or single fault conditions, instructed persons should not be exposed
to parts comprising energy sources capable of causing injury.
0.2.4 Skilled person
Skilled person is a term applied to persons who have training or experience in the equipment
technology, particularly in knowing the various energies and energy magnitudes used in the
equipment. Skilled persons are expected to use their training and experience to recognize
energy sources capable of causing pain or injury and to take action for protection from injury
from those energies. Skilled persons should also be protected against unintentional contact
or exposure to energy sources capable of causing injury.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
0.3 Model for pain and injury
An energy source that causes pain or injury does so through the transfer of some form of
energy to or from a body part.
This concept is represented by a three-block model (see Figure 1).
Energy source
capable of Energy
transfer Body part
causing pain or
injury
Figure 1 - Three block model for pain and injury
This safety standard specifies three classes of energy sources defined by magnitudes and
durations of source parameters relative to the body responses to those electrical and thermal
energy sources (see Table 1). Source parameters relative to responses to combustible
material, mechanical energy sources and radiation energy sources are specified based on
experience and basic safety standards.
Table 1 - Response to energy class
Energy source Effect on the body Effect on combustible materials

Class 1 Not painful, but may be detectable Ignition not likely
Class 2 Painful, but not an injury Ignition possible, but limited growth
and spread of fire
Ignition likely, rapid growth and

spread of fire
The energy threshold for pain or injury is not constant throughout the population. For
example, for some energy sources, the threshold is a function of body mass; the lower the
mass, the lower the threshold, and vice-versa. Other body variables include age, state of
health, state of emotions, effect of drugs, skin characteristics, etc. Furthermore, even where
outward appearances otherwise appear equal, individuals differ in their thresholds of
susceptibility to the same energy source.
The effect of duration of energy transfer is a function of the specific energy form. For
example, pain or injury from thermal energy can be very short (1 s) for high skin temperature,
or very long (several hours) for low skin temperature.
Furthermore, the pain or injury may occur some considerable time after the transfer of energy
to a body part. For example, pain or injury from some chemical or physiological reaction may
not be manifested for days, weeks, months, or years.
0.4 Energy sources
Energy sources are addressed by this document, together with the pain or injury that results
from a transfer of that energy to the body, and the likelihood of property damage that results
from fire escaping the equipment.
An electrical product is connected to an electrical energy source (for example, the mains), an
external power supply, or a battery. An electrical product uses the electrical energy to
perform its intended functions.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
In the process of using electrical energy, the product transforms the electrical energy into
other forms of energy (for example, thermal energy, kinetic energy, optical energy, audio
energy, electromagnetic energy, etc.). Some energy transformations may be a deliberate part
of the product function (for example, moving parts of a printer, images on a visual display unit,
sound from a speaker, etc.). Some energy transformations may be a by-product of the product
function (for example, heat dissipated by functional circuits, X-radiation from a cathode-ray
tube, etc.).
Some products may use energy sources that are non-electrical energy sources such as
moving parts or chemicals. The energy in these other sources may be transferred to or from a
body part, or may be transformed into other energy forms (for example, chemical energy may
be converted to electrical energy through a battery, or a moving body part transfers its kinetic
energy to a sharp edge).
Examples of the types of energy forms and the associated injuries and property damage
addressed in this document are in Table 2.
Table 2 - Examples of body response or property damage related to energy sources
Forms of energy Examples of body response or property Clause

damage
Electrical energy Pain, fibrillation, cardiac arrest, respiratory 5
(for example, energized conductive parts) arrest, skin burn, or internal organ burn
Thermal energy 6
Electrically-caused fire leading to bum-related
(for example, electrical ignition and spread of pain or injury, or property damage
fire)
Chemical reaction 7
Skin damage, organ damage, or poisoning
(for example, electrolyte, poison)
Kinetic energy Laceration, puncture ， abrasion, contusion, 8

(for example, moving parts of equipment, or a crush, amputation, or loss of a limb, eye, ear,
moving body part against an equipment part) etc.
Thermal energy 9
Skin burn
(for example, hot accessible parts)
Radiated energy 10
(for example, electromagnetic energy, optical Loss of sight, skin burn, or loss of hearing
energy, acoustic energy)
0.5 Safeguards
0.5.1 General
Many products necessarily use energy capable of causing pain or injury. Product design
cannot eliminate such energy use. Consequently, such products should use a scheme that
reduces the likelihood of such energy being transferred to a body part. The scheme that
reduces the likelihood of energy transfer to a body part is a safeguard (see Figure 2).
Energy source
capable of causing Safeguard 巳 ody part
pain or injury
IEC
Figure 2 - Three block model for safety

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
A safeguard is a device or scheme or system that:
- is interposed between an energy source capable of causing pain or injury and a body part,
and
- reduces the likelihood of transfer of energy capable of causing pain or injury to a body
part.
NOTE Safeguard mechanisms against transfer of energy capable of causing pain or injury include:
一 attenuating the energy (reduces the value of the energy); or
- impeding the energy (slows the rate of energy transfer); or
- diverting the energy (changes the energy direction); or
- disconnecting, interrupting, or disabling the energy source; or
- enveloping the energy source (reduces the likelihood of the energy from escaping); or
- interposing a barrier between a body part and the energy source.
A safeguard can be applied to the equipment, to the local installation, to a person or can be a
learned or directed behaviour (for example, resulting from an instructional safeguard)
intended to reduce the likelihood of transfer of energy capable of causing pain or injury. A
safeguard may be a single element or may be a set of elements.
Generally, this document uses an order of preference for providing safeguards based on the
requirements given in ISO/IEC Guide 51 as follows:
- equipment safeguards are always useful, since they do not require any knowledge or
actions by persons coming into contact with the equipment;
- installation safeguards are useful when a safety characteristic can only be provided after
installation (for example, the equipment has to be bolted to the floor to provide stability);
- behavioural safeguards are useful when the equipment requires an energy source to be
accessible.
In practice, safeguard selection accounts for the nature of the energy source, the intended
user, the functional requirements of the equipment, and similar considerations.
0.5.2 Equipment safeguard
An equipment safeguard may be a basic safeguard, a supplementary safeguard, a

double safeguard, or a reinforced safeguard.
0.5.3 Installation safeguard
Installation safeguards are not controlled by the equipment manufacturer, although in some
cases, installation safeguards may be specified in the equipment installation instructions.
Generally, with respect to equipment, an installation safeguard is a supplementary

safeguard.
NOTE For example, the supplementary safeguard providing protective earthing is located partly in the
equipment and partly in the installation. The supplementary safeguard providing protective earthing is not
effective until the equipment is connected to the protective earthing of the installation.
Requirements for installation safeguards are not addressed in this document. However, this
document does assume some installation safeguards, such as protective earthing, are in
place and are effective.
0.5.4 Personal safeguard
A personal safeguard may be a basic safeguard， a supplementary safeguard， or a

reinforced safeguard.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Requirements for personal safeguards are not addressed in this document. However, this
document does assume that personal safeguards are available for use as specified by the
manufacturer.
0.5.5 Behavioural safeguards
0.5.5.1 Introduction to behavioural safeguards
In the absence of an equipment， installation, or personal safeguard, a person may use a

specific behaviour as a safeguard to avoid energy transfer and consequent injury. A
behavioural safeguard is a voluntary or instructed behaviour intended to reduce the likelihood
of transfer of energy to a body part.
Three kinds of behavioural safeguards are specified in this document. Each kind of
behavioural safeguard is associated with a specific kind of person. An instructional
safeguard is usually addressed to an ordinary person， but may also be addressed to an
instructed person or a skilled person. A precautionary safeguard is used by an
instructed person. A skill safeguard is used by a skilled person.
0.5.5.2 Instructional safeguard
An instructional safeguard is a means of providing information, describing the existence and

location of an energy source capable of causing pain or injury, and is intended to invoke a
specific behaviour on the part of a person to reduce the likelihood of transfer of energy to a
body part (see Annex F).
An instructional safeguard may be a visual indicator (symbols or words or both) or an

audible message, as applicable to the expected use of the product.
When accessing locations where the equipment needs to be energized to perform a service
activity, an instructional safeguard may be considered acceptable protection to bypass an
equipment safeguard such that the person is made aware of how to avoid contact with a
class 2 or class 3 energy source.
If equipment safeguards would interfere with or prohibit the equipment function, an

instructional safeguard may replace an equipment safeguard.
If exposure to an energy source capable of causing pain or injury is essential to the correct
functioning of equipment, an instructional safeguard may be used to ensure protection of
persons instead of another safeguard. Consideration should be given as to whether the
instructional safeguard should require the use of a personal safeguard.
Provision of an instructional safeguard does not result in an ordinary person becoming an

instructed person (see 0.5.5.3).
0.5.5.3 Precautionary safeguard (used by an instructed person)
A precautionary safeguard is the training and experience or supervision of an instructed

person by a skilled person to use precautions to protect the instructed person against
class 2 energy sources. Precautionary safeguards are not specifically prescribed in this
document but are assumed to be effective when the term instructed person is used.
During equipment servicing, an instructed person may need to remove or defeat an

equipment safeguard. In this case, an instructed person is expected to then apply
precaution as a safeguard to avoid exposure to class 2 energy sources.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
0.5.5.4 Skill safeguard (used by a skilled person)
A skill safeguard is the education, training, knowledge and experience of the skilled person
that is used to protect the skilled person against class 2 or class 3 energy sources. Skill
safeguards are not specifically prescribed in this document but are assumed to be effective
when the term skilled person is used.
During equipment servicing, a skilled person may need to remove or defeat an equipment
safeguard. In this case, a skilled person is expected to then apply skill as a safeguard to
avoid injury.
0.5.6 Safeguards during ordinary or instructed person service conditions
During ordinary person or instructed person service conditions, safeguards for such
persons may be necessary. Such safeguards can be equipment safeguards, personal
safeguards, or instructional safeguards.
0.5.7 Equipment safeguards during skilled person service conditions
During skilled person service conditions, equipment safeguards should be provided to

protect against the effects of a bodyfs involuntary reaction (for example, startle) that might
cause unintentional contact with a class 3 energy source located outside the view of the
skilled person.
NOTE This safeguard typically applies in large equipment, where the skilled person needs to partially or wholly
enter between two or more class 3 energy source locations while servicing.
0.5.8 Examples of safeguard characteristics
Table 3 lists some examples of safeguard characteristics.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table 3 - Examples of safeguard characteristics
Safeguard Basic Supplementary Reinforced

safeguard safeguard safeguard
Equipment safeguard: Effective under normal Effective in the event of Effective under normal
operating conditions failure of the basic operating conditions
a physical part of an safeguard and in the event of a
equipment single fault condition
elsewhere in the
equipment
Example: basic Example: supplementary Example: reinforced
insulation insulation insulation
Example: normal Example: fire enclosure Not applicable
temperatures below
ignition temperatures
Installation safeguard: Effective under normal Effective in the event of Effective under normal
operating conditions failure of an equipment operating conditions
a physical part of a man basic safeguard and in the event of a
made installation single fault condition
elsewhere in the
equipment
Example: wire size Example: overcurrent Example: socket outlet

protective device
Personal safeguard: In the absence of any Effective in the event of In the absence of any
equipment safeguard, failure of an equipment equipment safeguard ，
a physical device worn on effective under normal basic safeguard effective under normal
the body operating conditions operating conditions
and in the event of a
single fault condition
elsewhere in the
equipment
Example: gloves Example: insulating floor Example: electrically-

mat insulated glove for
handling live conductors
Instructional safeguard: In the absence of any Effective in the event of Only effective on an
equipment safeguard, failure of an equipment exceptional basis, when
a voluntary or instructed effective under normal basic safeguard providing all appropriate
behaviour intended to operating conditions safeguards would
reduce the likelihood of prevent the intended
transfer of energy to a functioning of the
body part equipment
Example: instructional Example: after opening a Example: instructional
safeguard to disconnect door, an instructional safeguard of hot parts in
telecommunication cable safeguard against hot an office photocopier, or
before opening the cover parts a continuous roll paper
cutter o 门 a commercial
printer
0.6 Electrically-caused pain or injury (electric shock)
0.6.1 Models for electrically-caused pain or injury
Electrically-caused pain or injury may occur when electrical energy capable of causing pain or
injury is transferred to a body part (see Figure 3).
Electrical energy transfer occurs when there are two or more electrical contacts to the body:
- the first electrical contact is between a body part and a conductive part of the equipment;
- the second electrical contact is between another body part and
• earth, or
• another conductive part of the equipment.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Figure 3 - Schematic and model for electrically-caused pain or injury
Depending on the magnitude， duration, wave shape， and frequency of the current, the effect
on the human body varies from undetectable to detectable to painful to injurious.
0.6.2 Models for protection against electrically-caused pain or injury
One or more safeguards are interposed between an electrical energy source capable of
causing pain or injury and a body part to protect against electrically-caused pain or injury (see
Figure 4).
IEC
Figure 4 - Model for protection against electrically-caused pain or injury
Protection against electrically-caused pain is provided under normal operating conditions

and abnormal operating conditions. For such protection, under normal operating
conditions and abnormal operating conditions, a basic safeguard is interposed between
an electrical energy source capable of causing pain and an ordinary person.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
The m ost com m on basic safeguard a g a in s t a n e le c tric a l e n e rg y s o u rc e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g

p a in is e l e c t r i c a l i n s u l a t i o n (a ls o k n o w n a s basic insulation) in te rp o s e d b e tw e e n th e e n e rg y
s o u r c e a n d a b o d y p a rt.
P ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric a lly -c a u s e d normal operating conditions,

i n j u r y is p r o v i d e d under
abnormal operating conditions, a n d single fault conditions. F o r s u c h p r o t e c t i o n , u n d e r
normal operating conditions a n d abnormal operating conditions, b o t h a basic safeguard
a n d a supplementary safeguard a r e i n t e r p o s e d b e t w e e n a n e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b l e
o f c a u s i n g i n j u r y a n d a n ordinary person ( s e e 4 . 3 . 2 . 4 ) , o r a n instructed person ( s e e
4 . 3 . 3 . 3 ) . In t h e e v e n t o f a f a i l u r e o f e i t h e r safeguard, t h e o t h e r safeguard b e c o m e s e f f e c t i v e .
T h e supplementary safeguard a g a i n s t a n e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b l e o f c a u s i n g i n j u r y
i s p l a c e d b e t w e e n t h e basic safeguard a n d a b o d y p a r t . A supplementary safeguard m a y
b e a d d i t i o n a l e l e c t r i c a l i n s u l a t i o n (supplementary insulation) o r a p r o t e c t i v e l y e a r t h e d
c o n d u c tiv e b a rrie r o r o th e r c o n s tru c tio n th a t p e rfo rm s th e s a m e fu n c tio n .
A n o th e r safeguard a g a in s t a n e le c tric a l e n e rg y s o u rc e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g i n j u r y is e le c t r ic a l
in s u la tio n (a ls o known as double insulation or reinforced insulation) p la c e d b e tw e e n th e
e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a b o d y p a rt.
L ik e w is e , a reinforced safeguard m ay be p la c e d b e tw e e n an e le c tric a l e n e rg y so u rce

c a p a b le o f c a u s in g in ju ry a n d a b o d y p a rt.
0.7 Electrically-caused fire
0.7.1 Models for electrically-caused fire
E le c tric a lly -c a u s e d fire is due to c o n v e rs io n of e le c tric a l e n e rg y to th e rm a l e n e rg y (se e

F ig u re 5), w h e r e th e th e rm a l e n e r g y h e a ts a fu e l m a te ria l fo llo w e d b y ig n itio n a n d c o m b u s tio n .
Figure 5 - Model for electrically-caused fire
E le c tric a l e n e rg y is c o n v e r t e d to th e rm a l e n e rg y e ith e r in a re s is ta n c e o r in an a rc and is

tra n s fe rre d to a fu e l m a te ria l by c o n d u c tio n , c o n v e c tio n , or ra d ia tio n . As th e fu e l m a te ria l
h e a t s , it c h e m i c a l l y d e c o m p o s e s i n t o g a s e s , l i q u i d s a n d s o l i d s . W h e n t h e g a s is a t its i g n i t i o n
t e m p e r a t u r e , t h e g a s c a n b e ig n i t e d b y a n ig n it io n s o u r c e . W h e n t h e g a s is a t its s p o n t a n e o u s
i g n i t i o n t e m p e r a t u r e , t h e g a s i g n i t e s b y i t s e l f . B o t h r e s u l t in f i r e .
0.7.2 Models for protection against electrically-caused fire
The basic safeguard a g a i n s t e l e c t r i c a l l y - c a u s e d f i r e ( s e e F i g u r e 6 ) is t h a t t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o f

a m a t e r i a l ，u n d e r normal operating conditions and abnormal operating conditions, does
n o t c a u s e th e m a te ria l to ig n ite .
The supplementary safeguard a g a in s t e le c tric a lly -c a u s e d fire re d u c e s th e lik e lih o o d of

i g n i t i o n o r , in t h e c a s e o f i g n i t i o n , r e d u c e s t h e l i k e l i h o o d o f s p r e a d o f f i r e .

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
IEC
Figure 6 - Models for protection against fire
0.8 Injury caused by hazardous substances
In ju ry c a u s e d by hazardous substances is d u e t o a c h e m i c a l r e a c t i o n w i t h a b o d y p a r t . T h e
e x te n t of in ju ry by a g iv e n s u b s ta n c e depends on b o th th e m a g n itu d e and d u ra tio n of
e x p o s u r e a n d o n th e b o d y p a rt s u s c e p tib ility to th a t s u b s ta n c e .
The basic safeguard a g a in s t in ju ry c a u s e d by hazardous substances is c o n t a i n m e n t o f t h e

m a te ria l.
Supplementary safeguards a g a in s t in ju ry c a u s e d b y hazardous substances m a y in c lu d e :
- a s e c o n d c o n ta in e r o r a s p ill-re s is ta n t c o n ta in e r;
- c o n t a i n m e n t tra y s ;
- t a m p e r - p r o o f s c r e w s to p r e v e n t u n a u th o r iz e d a c c e s s ;
- instructional safeguards.
N a tio n a l a n d r e g io n a l r e g u la tio n s g o v e r n th e u s e o f a n d e x p o s u r e to hazardous substances

used in e q u i p m e n t . T h e s e re g u la tio n s do n o t e n a b le a p ra c tic a l c l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f hazardous
substances in th e m anner in w h ic h o th e r e n e rg y so u rce s a re c la s s ifie d in th is d o c u m e n t.
T h e r e f o r e , e n e r g y s o u r c e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s a r e n o t a p p l i e d in C l a u s e 7 .
0.9 Mechanically-caused injury
M e c h a n ic a lly -c a u s e d i n j u r y is d u e to k in e tic e n e r g y tr a n s f e r to a b o d y p a r t w h e n a c o llis io n

o ccu rs b e tw e e n a body p a rt a n d a n e q u ip m e n t p a rt. T h e k in e tic e n e rg y is a f u n c t i o n o f th e
re la tiv e m o tio n b e tw e e n a b o d y p a rt a n d accessible p a rts o f th e e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g p a rts
e je c te d fr o m th e e q u ip m e n t th a t c o llid e w ith a b o d y p a rt.
E x a m p le s o f k in e tic e n e rg y s o u rc e s a re :
- b o d y m o tio n re la tiv e to s h a rp e d g e s a n d c o rn e rs ;
- par t m o tio n d u e to r o ta tin g o r o th e r m o v in g p a rts , in c lu d in g p in c h p o in ts ;
- par t m o tio n d u e to lo o s e n in g , e x p lo d in g , o r im p lo d in g p a rts ;

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- e q u i p m e n t m o tio n d u e to in s ta b ility ;
- e q u i p m e n t m o tio n d u e to w a ll, c e ilin g , o r ra c k m o u n tin g m e a n s fa ilu re ;
- e q u i p m e n t m o tio n d u e to h a n d le fa ilu re ;
- par t m o tio n d u e to a n e x p lo d in g battery;

- e q u i p m e n t m o tio n d u e to c a rt o r s ta n d in s ta b ility o r fa ilu re .
The basic safeguard a g a i n s t m e c h a n i c a l l y - c a u s e d i n j u r y is a f u n c t i o n o f th e s p e c ific e n e rg y

s o u r c e . Basic safeguards m a y i n c l u d e :
- ro u nd e d e d g e s and co rn e rs;
- an enclosure to p r e v e n t a m o v in g p a rt fro m b e in g accessible;

- an enclosure to p r e v e n t e x p e llin g a m o v in g p a rt;
- a safety interlock to c o n tro l a c c e s s to a n o th e r w is e m o v in g p a rt;
- m e a n s to s to p th e m o tio n o f a m o v in g p a rt;
- m e a n s to s ta b iliz e th e e q u ip m e n t;
- r o b u s t h a n d le s ;
- r o b u s t m o u n tin g m e a n s ;
- m e a n s to c o n ta in p a r ts e x p e lle d d u r in g explosion o r im p lo s io n .
The supplementary safeguard a g a i n s t m e c h a n i c a l l y - c a u s e d i n j u r y is a fu n c tio n of th e

s p e c i f i c e n e r g y s o u r c e . Supplementary safeguards m a y i n c l u d e :
- instructional safeguards;
- i n s t r u c t i o n s a n d tra in in g ;
- additional enclosures o r b a rrie rs ;
- safety interlocks.
The reinforced safeguard a g a i n s t m e c h a n i c a l l y - c a u s e d in ju ry is a f u n c t i o n o f th e s p e c ific

e n e r g y s o u r c e . Reinforced safeguards m a y i n c l u d e :
- ex t r a th ic k g la s s o n th e fro n t o f a C R T ;
- r a c k s lid e -ra ils a n d m e a n s o f s u p p o rt;
- safety interlock.
0.10 Thermally-caused injury (skin burn)
0.10.1 Models for thermally-caused injury
T h e rm a lly -c a u s e d in ju ry m ay occur when th e rm a l e n e rg y c a p a b le of c a u s in g in ju ry is

tr a n s fe r r e d to a b o d y p a r t ( s e e F ig u r e 7).
T h e rm a l e n e rg y tra n s fe r o c c u rs when a body to u c h e s a h o t e q u ip m e n t p a rt. T h e e x te n t o f

in ju ry d e p e n d s o n th e te m p e r a tu r e d iffe re n c e , th e th e rm a l m a s s o f th e o b je c t, ra te o f th e rm a l
e n e r g y tr a n s fe r to th e s k in , a n d d u r a tio n o f c o n ta c t.
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s in t h i s d o c u m e n t o n l y a d d r e s s safeguards a g a in s t th e rm a l e n e rg y tra n s fe r
b y c o n d u c tio n . T h is d o c u m e n t d o e s n o t a d d re s s safeguards a g a in s t th e rm a l e n e rg y tra n s fe r
b y c o n v e c tio n o r ra d ia tio n .

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
IEC
Figure 7 - Schematic and model for thermally-caused injury
D e p e n d in g on th e te m p e ra tu re , c o n ta c t d u ra tio n , m a te ria l p ro p e rtie s , and m ass of th e

m a t e r i a l , t h e p e r c e p t i o n o f t h e h u m a n b o d y v a r i e s f r o m w a r m t h t o h e a t t h a t m a y r e s u l t in p a in
o r in ju ry (b u rn ).
0.10.2 Models for protection against thermally-caused pain or injury
O n e o r m o re safeguards a r e i n t e r p o s e d b e t w e e n a t h e r m a l e n e rg y s o u rc e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g
p a in o r in ju r y a n d a n ordinary person ( s e e F i g u r e 8 ) .
IEC
Figure 8 - Model for protection against thermally-caused injury
Under normal operating conditions and abnormal operating conditions, p r o t e c t i o n i s u s e d

a g a in s t th e rm a lly -c a u s e p a i n . F o r s u c h p r o t e c t i o n , a basic safeguard i s i n t e r p o s e d b e t w e e n
a th e rm a l e n e rg y s o u rc e c a p a b l e o f c a u s i n g p a i n a n d a n ordinary person.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Under normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions a n d single fault

conditions, p r o t e c t i o n i s u s e d a g a i n s t t h e r m a l l y - c a u s e d i n j u r y . F o r s u c h p r o t e c t i o n , a basic
safeguard a n d a supplementary safeguard a r e i n t e r p o s e d b e t w e e n a t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e
c a p a b l e o f c a u s i n g i n j u r y a n d a n ordinary person.
The basic safeguard a g a in s t a th e rm a l e n e rg y so u rce c a p a b le o f c a u s in g p a in o r in ju ry is

t h e r m a l i n s u l a t i o n p l a c e d b e t w e e n t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a b o d y p a r t . In s o m e c a s e s , a basic
safeguard a g a i n s t a t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b l e o f c a u s in g p a in or in ju ry m ay be an
instructional safeguard i d e n t i f y i n g t h e h o t p a r t s a n d h o w t o r e d u c e t h e l i k e l i h o o d o f i n j u r y . In
s o m e c a s e s , a basic safeguard r e d u c e s t h e l i k e l i h o o d of a n o n -in ju rio u s th e rm a l e n e rg y
s o u rc e fro m b e c o m in g a th e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g p a in o r in ju ry .
E x a m p le s o f s u c h basic safeguards a re :
- control of e le c tric a l e n e rg y b e in g c o n v e rte d to th e rm a l e n e rg y (fo r e x a m p le , a

thermostat);
- h e a t s in k in g , e tc .
The supplementary safeguard a g a in s t a th e rm a l e n e rg y s o u rc e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g i n j u r y is

th e rm a l in s u la tio n p la c e d b e tw e e n th e e n e rg y so u rce and a body p a rt. In som e cases, a
supplementary safeguard a g a i n s t a t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g p a in o r in ju r y
m a y b e a n instructional safeguard i d e n t i f y i n g t h e h o t p a r t s a n d h o w to re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d
o f in ju ry .
0.11 Radiation-caused injury
R a d ia tio n -c a u s e d i n j u r y w i t h i n t h e s c o p e o f t h i s d o c u m e n t is g e n e r a l l y a t t r i b u t e d t o o n e o f t h e
fo llo w in g e n e rg y tra n s fe r m e c h a n is m s :
- heating o f a b o d y o rg a n caused b y e x p o s u r e to n o n - io n is in g r a d ia tio n , s u c h a s th e h ig h ly

lo c a lis e d e n e r g y o f a la s e r im p in g in g o n th e re tin a ; o r
- a u d i t o r y in ju r y c a u s e d b y o v e r s tim u la t io n o f th e e a r b y e x c e s s iv e p e a k s o r s u s ta in e d lo u d
s o u n d , le a d in g to p h y s ic a l o r n e rv e d a m a g e ; o r
- X-radiation; or
- U V ra d ia tio n .
R a d i a t e d e n e r g y is t r a n s f e r r e d b y i m p i n g e m e n t o f w a v e e m i s s i o n u p o n a b o d y p a r t .
The basic safeguard a g a i n s t r a d i a t i o n - c a u s e d i n j u r y is c o n t a i n m e n t o f t h e e n e r g y w i t h i n an

enclosure t h a t i s o p a q u e t o t h e r a d i a t e d e n e r g y .
T h e re supplementary safeguards a g a i n s t r a d i a t i o n - c a u s e d
a re se ve ra l in ju ry . The
supplementary safeguards m a y i n c l u d e safety interlocks t o d i s c o n n e c t power to th e
g e n e ra to r, ta m p e r - p r o o f s c re w s to p re v e n t u n a u th o riz e d a c c e s s , e tc .
The basic safeguard a g a i n s t a u d i t o r y i n j u r y is t o l i m i t t h e a c o u s t i c o u t p u t o f p e r s o n a l m u s i c

p la y e rs a n d th e ir a s s o c ia te d h e a d p h o n e s a n d e a rp h o n e s .
E x a m p le s o f supplementary safeguards a g a in s t a u d it o r y p a in a n d in ju r y a re th e p r o v is io n o f
w a r n in g s a n d in fo r m a tio n a d v is in g th e u s e r h o w to u s e th e e q u ip m e n t c o r r e c tly .

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
AUDIO/VIDEO, INFORMATION AND

COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT -
1 Scope
T h i s p a r t o f I E C 6 2 3 6 8 is a p p l i c a b l e t o t h e s a f e t y o f e l e c t r i c a l a n d e l e c t r o n i c e q u i p m e n t w i t h i n
th e fie ld o f a u d io , v id e o , in fo r m a tio n a n d c o m m u n ic a tio n te c h n o lo g y , a n d b u s in e s s a n d o ffic e
m a c h in e s w ith a rated voltage not e x c e e d in g 600 V. T h is docum ent does not in c lu d e
re q u ire m e n ts fo r p e rfo rm a n c e o r fu n c tio n a l c h a ra c te ris tic s o f e q u ip m e n t.
NOTE 1 Examples of equipment within the scope of this document are given in Annex A.
NOTE 2 A rated voltage of 600 V is considered to include equipment rated 400/690 V.
T h i s d o c u m e n t is a ls o a p p l i c a b l e to :
- components and s u b a s s e m b lie s in te n d e d fo r in c o rp o ra tio n in th is e q u ip m e n t. Such

c o m p o n e n ts a n d s u b a s s e m b lie s n e e d n o t c o m p ly w ith e v e r y r e q u ir e m e n t o f th is d o c u m e n t,
p ro v id e d th a t th e c o m p le te e q u ip m e n t, in c o rp o ra tin g such c o m p o n e n ts and
s u b a s s e m b lie s , d o e s c o m p ly ;
- external p o w e r s u p p ly u n its in te n d e d to s u p p ly o th e r e q u ip m e n t w ith in th e s c o p e o f th is

d o c u m e n t;
- a c c e s s o r i e s in te n d e d to b e u s e d w ith e q u ip m e n t w ith in th e s c o p e o f th is d o c u m e n t;
- l arge e q u ip m e n t in s ta lle d in restricted access areas. For e q u ip m e n t h a v in g la rg e

m a c h in e r y a s p e c ts , a d d itio n a l r e q u ir e m e n ts m a y a p p ly ; a n d
- e q u i p m e n t t o b e u s e d in t r o p i c a l r e g i o n s .
T h is docum ent a ls o in c lu d e s re q u ire m e n ts fo r a u d io /v id e o , in fo rm a tio n and c o m m u n ic a tio n

te c h n o lo g y e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to b e in s ta lle d in a n outdoor location. T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r
outdoor equipment a ls o a p p ly , w h e re re le v a n t, to outdoor enclosures s u i t a b l e f o r d i r e c t
in s ta lla tio n in t h e f i e l d a n d s u p p lie d fo r h o u s in g a u d io /v id e o , in fo rm a tio n a n d c o m m u n ic a tio n
te c h n o lo g y e q u ip m e n t to be in s ta lle d in an outdoor location. See Annex Y fo r s p e c ific
c o n s t r u c t i o n r e q u i r e m e n t s n o t c o v e r e d e l s e w h e r e in t h i s d o c u m e n t .
E a c h in s ta lla tio n m a y h a v e p a r t i c u l a r r e q u i r e m e n t s . In a d d i t i o n , r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p r o t e c t i o n o f
th e outdoor equipment a g a in s t th e e ffe c ts o f d ir e c t lig h tn in g s trik e s a re n o t c o v e r e d b y th is
d o c u m e n t.
NOTE 3 For information on this subject, see IEC 62305-1,
T h is docum ent assum es a m a x im u m a ltitu d e of 2 000 m u n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d b y th e

m a n u f a c t u r ㊀r
A d d itio n a l re q u ire m e n ts fo r e q u ip m e n t h a v in g th e c a p a b ility to s u p p ly DC power over

c o m m o n ly used c o m m u n ic a tio n c a b le s , such as USB or E th e rn e t (P o E ), a re g iv e n in
IE C 6 2 3 6 8 - 3 . IE C 6 2 3 6 8 - 3 d o e s n o t a p p ly to :
- e q u i p m e n t s u p p ly in g p o w e r u s in g p r o p r ie ta r y c o n n e c to r s ; o r
- e q u i p m e n t u s in g a p r o p r ie ta r y p ro to c o l fo r p o w e r s e le c tio n .
T h is d o c u m e n t s p e c ifie s safeguards fo r ordinary persons， instructed persons, and skilled

persons. A d d itio n a l re q u ire m e n ts m ay a p p ly fo r e q u ip m e n t th a t is c le a rly d e s ig n e d or
in te n d e d fo r u s e b y c h ild re n o r s p e c ific a lly a ttra c tiv e to c h ild re n .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
NOTE 4 In Australia, the work conducted by an instructed person or a skilled person may require formal
licensing from regulatory authorities.
NOTE 5 In Germany, in many cases a person may only be regarded as an instructed person or a skilled person
if certain legal requirements are fulfilled.
T h is d o c u m e n t d o e s n o t a p p l y to :
- equipment w ith n o n -s e lf-c o n ta in e d h a za rd o u s m o v in g p a rts , such as ro b o tic e q u ip m e n t;

and
NOTE 6 For requirements related to robotic equipment in an industrial environment, see IEC 60204-1,
IEC 60204-11, ISO 10218-1 and ISO 10218-2.
- personal ca re ro b o ts , in c lu d in g m o b ile se rva n t ro b o ts , p h y s ic a l a s s is ta n t ro b o ts , and

p e rs o n c a rrie r ro b o ts ; a n d
NOTE 7 For requirements related to personal care robots, see ISO 13482.
- power s u p p ly s y s te m s th a t a re not an in te g ra l p a rt of th e e q u ip m e n t, such as m o to r-

g e n e ra to r s e ts , battery b a c k u p s y s te m s a n d d is trib u tio n tra n s fo rm e rs .
T h is d o c u m e n t d o e s n o t a d d re s s :
- m a n u f a c t u r i n g p ro c e s s e s e x c e p t fo r routine tests;
- i n j u r i o u s e ffe c ts o f g a s e s re le a s e d b y th e rm a l d e c o m p o s itio n o r c o m b u s tio n ;
- disposal p ro ce sse s;
- e f f e c t s o f t r a n s p o r t ( o t h e r t h a n a s s p e c i f i e d in t h i s d o c u m e n t ) ;
- e f f e c t s o f s t o r a g e o f m a t e r ia ls , c o m p o n e n t s , o r th e e q u ip m e n t its e lf;
- t he lik e lih o o d o f in ju ry fro m p a rtic u la te ra d ia tio n s u c h a s a lp h a p a rtic le s a n d b e ta p a rtic le s ;
- t h e lik e lih o o d o f th e r m a l in ju r y d u e to r a d ia te d o r c o n v e c te d th e r m a l e n e r g y ;
- t he lik e lih o o d o f in ju ry d u e to fla m m a b le liq u id s ;
- t h e u s e o f t h e e q u i p m e n t in o x y g e n - e n r i c h e d o r explosive a tm o s p h e re s ;
- e x p o s u r e t o c h e m i c a l s o t h e r t h a n a s s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 7 ;
- e l e c t r o s t a t i c d is c h a rg e e v e n ts ;
- e x p o s u r e to e le c t r o m a g n e t ic fie ld s ;
- e n v i r o n m e n t a l a s p e c ts ; or
- r e q u i r e m e n t s fo r fu n c tio n a l s a fe ty , e x c e p t fo r th o s e re la te d to work cells.

NOTE 8 For specific functional and software safety requirements of electronic safety-related systems (for
example, protective electronic circuits), see IEC 61508-1.
2 Normative references
The fo llo w in g d o c u m e n ts a re re fe rre d to in t h e t e x t in s u c h a way th a t s o m e o r a ll o f t h e i r

c o n te n t c o n s titu te s re q u ire m e n ts of th is d o c u m e n t. For d a te d re fe re n c e s , o n ly th e e d itio n
c ite d a p p lie s . F o r u n d a te d r e fe re n c e s , th e la te s t e d itio n o f th e re fe r e n c e d d o c u m e n t (in c lu d in g
a n y a m e n d m e n ts ) a p p lie s .
IE C 6 0 0 2 7 -1 , Letter symbols to be used in electrical technology - Part 1: General
IE C 6 0 0 6 5 , Audio, video and similar electronic apparatus - Safety requirements
IE C 6 0 0 6 8 - 2 - 6 , Environmental testing - Part 2-6: Tests - Test Fc: Vibration (sinusoidal)
IE C 6 0 0 6 8 - 2 - 1 1 , Basic environmental testing procedures - Part 2-11: Tests - Test Ka: Salt
mist

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
IE C 6 0 0 6 8 -2 -7 8 , Environmental testing - Part 2-78: Tests - Test Cab: Damp heatf steady
state
Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identification
IE C 6 0 0 7 3 ,
- Coding principles for indicators and actuators
Power transformers - Part 14: Liquid-immersed power transformers using

IE C 6 0 0 7 6 - 1 4 ，
high-temperature insulation materials
Plugs and socket-outlets for domestic and similar general use standardized in
IE C T R 6 0 0 8 3 ,
member countries o f IEC
IE C 6 0 0 8 5 , Electrical insulation - Thermal evaluation and designation
IE C 6 0 0 8 6 -4 , Primary batteries - Part 4: Safety of lithium batteries
IE C 6 0 0 8 6 -5 , Primary batteries - Part 5: Safety of batteries with aqueous electrolyte
IE C 6 0 1 0 7 - 1 :1 9 9 7 , Methods of measurement on receivers for television broadcast

transmissions - Part 1: General considerations - Measurements at radio and video
frequencies
Method for the determination of the proof and the comparative tracking indices of
IE C 6 0 1 1 2 ,
solid insulating materials
IE C 6 0 1 2 7 (a ll p a r t s ) , Miniature fuses
Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including

IE C 6 0 2 2 7 - 1 ，
450/750 V - Part 1: General requirements
Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including

IE C 6 0 2 2 7 - 2 :1 9 9 7 ,
450/750 V - Part 2: Test methods
IE C 6 0 2 2 7 - 2 :1 9 9 7 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 3
Rubber insulated cables - Rated voltages up to and including 450/750 V -

IE C 6 0 2 4 5 -1 ,
Part 1: General requirements
Fluids for electrotechnical applications -

IE C 6 0 2 9 6 , Unused mineral insulating oils for
transformers and switchgear
IE C 6 0 3 0 9 (a ll p a r ts ) , Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes
IE C 6 0 3 1 7 (a ll p a r ts ) , Specifications for particular types of winding wires
Specifications for particular types of winding wires - Part 0-7: General

IE C 6 0 3 1 7 - 0 - 7 :2 0 1 7 ,
requirements - Fully insulated (FIW) zero-defect enamelled round copper wire
Specifications for particular types of winding wires -

IE C 6 0 3 1 7 -4 3 , Part 43: Aromatic
polyimide tape wrapped round copper wire， class 240
Specifications for particular types of winding wires - Part 56: Solderable fully
IE C 6 0 3 1 7 -5 6 ,
insulated (FIW) zero-defect polyurethane enamelled round copper wire, class 180
IE C 6 0 3 2 0 (a ll p a r ts ) , Appliance couplers for household and similar general purposes

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Appliance couplers for household and similar general purposes - Part 1:

IE C 6 0 3 2 0 -1 ,
General requirements
Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions - Part 7 - 2 : Test
IE C 6 0 3 3 2 -1 -2 ,
for vertical flame propagation for a single insulated wire or cable - Procedure for 1 kW pre
mixed flame
Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions - Part 1-3: Test
IE C 6 0 3 3 2 -1 -3 ,
for vertical flame propagation for a single insulated wire or cable - Procedure for
determination of flaming droplets/particles
Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions - Part 2 - 2 ; Test
IE C 6 0 3 3 2 -2 -2 ,
for vertical flame propagation for a single small insulated wire or cable - Procedure for
diffusion flame
Fixed capacitors for use in electronic equipment - Part 14: Sectional

IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 ，
specification: Fixed capacitors for electromagnetic interference suppression and connection to
the supply mains
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 , Graphical symbols for use on equipment, a v a ila b le fro m : < h ttp ://w w w .g ra p h ic a l-
s y m b o ls .in fo /e q u ip m e n t>
IE C 6 0 5 2 9 , Degrees o f protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 1:

IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 ,
Principles, requirements and tests
Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 3: Use

IE C 6 0 6 6 4 -3 ,
of coating, potting or moulding for protection against pollution
IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5 , Thermal-links - Requirements and application guide
Fire hazard testing - Part 2-11: Glowing/hot-wire based test methods -

IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 2 - 1 1 ,
Glow-wire flammability test method for end-products (GWEPT)
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 0 - 2 , Fire hazard testing - Part 10-2: Abnormal heat - Ball pressure test method
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 0 - 3 , Fire hazard testing - Part 10-3: Abnormal heat - Mould stress relief
distortion test
Fire hazard testing - Part 11-5: Test flames - Needle-flame test

IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 :2 0 1 6 ,
method - Apparatus, confirmatory test arrangement and guidance
Fire hazard testing - Part 11-10: Test flames - 50 W horizontal and vertical
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 1 0 ,
flame test methods
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 2 0 :2 0 1 5 , Fire hazard testing - Part 11-20: Test flames - 500 W flame test
methods
Fire hazard testing - Part 11-21: Test flames - 500 W vertical flame test
IE C T S 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 2 1 ,
method for tubular polymeric materials
Cable networks for television signals, sound signals and interactive

IE C 6 0 7 2 8 - 1 1 :2 0 1 6 ,
services - Part 11: Safety
IE C 6 0 7 3 0 (a ll p a r t s ) , Automatic electrical controls for household and similar use

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 , Automatic electrical controls - Part 1: General requirements
Thermistors - Directly heated positive temperature coefficient - Part 1:

IE C 6 0 7 3 8 -1 :2 0 0 6 ,
Generic specification
Semiconductor devices - Discrete devices - Part

IE C 6 0 7 4 7 -5 -5 :2 0 0 7 , 5 -5 ; Optoelectronic
devices - Photocouplers
IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 :2 0 0 7 /A M D 1 :2 0 1 5
IE C 6 0 8 2 5 -1 , Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification and requirements
IE C 6 0 8 2 5 -2 , Safety of laser products - Part 2: Safety of optical fibre communication systems

(OFCS)
Safety of laser products - Part 12: Safety of free space optical communication
IE C 6 0 8 2 5 -1 2 ,
systems used for transmission of information
IE C 6 0 8 3 6 , Specifications for unused silicone insulating liquids for electrotechnical purposes
IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 3 :2 0 0 9 , Winding wires - Test methods - Part 3: Mechanical properties

IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 3 :2 0 0 9 /A M D 1 :2 0 1 3
IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 5 :2 0 0 8 , Winding wires - Test methods - Part 5: Electrical properties

IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 5 :2 0 0 8 /A M D 1 :2 0 1 1
IE C 6 0 8 8 4 -1 , Plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes - Part 1: General
requirements
Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 11: Vented types - General requirements

IE C 6 0 8 9 6 - 1 1 ,
and methods of tests
IE C 6 0 8 9 6 - 2 1 :2 0 0 4 , Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 21: Valve regulated types - Methods

of test
IE C 6 0 8 9 6 -2 2 , Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 22: Valve regulated types - Requirements
IEC system of plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes -
IE C 6 0 9 0 6 -1 ,
Part 1: Plugs and socket-outlets 16 A 250 V AC
IEC system of plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes -
IE C 6 0 9 0 6 -2 ,
Part 2: Plugs and socket-outlets 15 A 125 V AC
IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -1 , Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1: General rules
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 5 - 5 : Control circuit devices

IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -5 -5 ,
and switching elements - Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function
IE C 6 0 9 5 0 -1 , Information technology equipment - Safety - Part 1: General requirements
IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6 , Methods of measurement of touch current and protective conductor current
Connecting devices for low-voltage circuits for household and similar purposes
IE C 6 0 9 9 8 -1 ,
- Part 1: General requirements

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Connecting devices - Electrical copper conductors - Safety requirements for

IE C 6 0 9 9 9 -1 ,
screw-type and screwless-type clamping units - Part 1: General requirements and particular
requirements for clamping units for conductors from 0,2 mm2 up to 35 mm2 (included)
Connecting devices - Electrical copper conductors - Safety requirements for

IE C 6 0 9 9 9 -2 ,
screw-type and screwless-type clamping units - Part 2: Particular requirements for clamping
units for conductors above 35 mm2 up to 300 mm2 (included)
IE C 6 1 0 3 9 , Classification of insulating liquids
IE C 6 1 0 5 1 -1 , Varistors for use in electronic equipment - Part 1: Generic specification
Varistors for use in electronic equipment - Part 2: Sectional specification

IE C 6 1 0 5 1 -2 :1 9 9 1 ,
for surge suppression varistors
IE C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 :1 9 9 1 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 9
General purpose lead-acid batteries (valve-regulated types) - Part 1: General

IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -1 ,
requirements, functional characteristics - Methods of test
General purpose lead-acid batteries

IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -2 , (valve-regulated types) - Part 2:
Dimensions, terminals and marking
IE C 6 1 0 5 8 -1 :2 0 1 6 , Switches for appliances - Part 1: General requirements
IE C 6 1 0 9 9 , Insulating liquids - Specifications for unused synthetic organic esters for electrical
purposes
IE C 6 1 2 0 4 -7 , Low-voltage power supplies - Part 7: Safety requirements
Marking of electrical equipment with ratings related to electrical supply - Safety

IE C 6 1 2 9 3 ,
requirements
Secondary cells and batteries for renewable energy storage - General

IE C 6 1 4 2 7 (a ll p a r t s ) ,
requirements and methods of test
Secondary cells and batteries - Test methods for checking the performance of
IE C T S 6 1 4 3 0 ,
devices designed for reducing explosion hazards - Lead-acid starter batteries
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes -

IE C 6 1 4 3 4 ,
Guide to designation of current in alkaline secondary cell and battery standards
Safety of power transformers, power supplies， reactors and similar

IE C 6 1 5 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 7 ,
products - Part 1: General requirements and tests
\EC 6A55&-2-A6, Safety of transformers, reactors， power supply units and similar products for
voltages up to 1 100 V - Part 2-16: Particular requirements and tests for switch mode power
supply units and transformers for switch mode power supply units
Low-voltage surge protective devices - Part 11: Surge protective devices

IE C 6 1 6 4 3 -1 1 :2 0 1 1 ,
connected to low-voltage power systems - Requirements and test methods
Components for low-voltage surge protective devices -

IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 3 1 :2 0 1 7 , Part 331:
Performance requirements and test methods for metal oxide varistors (MOV)
IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5 , Electromechanical elementary relays - Part 1: General and safety

requirements

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
\EC 61959， Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes -
Mechanical tests for sealed portable secondary cells and batteries
IE C 6 1 9 6 5 , Mechanical safety of cathode ray tubes
IE C 6 1 9 8 4 , Connectors - Safety requirements and tests
IE C 6 2 1 3 3 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid

(a ll p a rts ),
electrolytes - Safety requirements for portable sealed secondary cells, and for batteries made
from them, for use in portable applications
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes

IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -1 ,
- Safety requirements for portable sealed secondary cells, and for batteries made from them,
for use in portable applications - Part 1: Nickel systems
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes

IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -2 ,
- Safety requirements for portable sealed secondary lithium cells, and for batteries made from
them， for use in portable applications - Part 2: Lithium systems
IE C 6 2 2 8 1 , Safety of primary and secondary lithium cells and batteries during transport
Electrical insulation systems (EIS) - Thermal evaluation of combined liquid

IE C T S 6 2 3 3 2 -1 ,
and solid components - Part 1: General requirements
IE C 6 2 4 4 0 :2 0 0 8 , Electric cables with a rated voltage not exceeding 450/750 V - Guide to use
IE C 6 2 4 7 1 :2 0 0 6 , Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems
IE C 6 2 4 7 1 - 5 :2 0 1 5 , Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems - Part 5: Image

projectors
Safety requirements for secondary batteries and battery installations - Part 2:

IE C 6 2 4 8 5 -2 ,
Stationary batteries
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes -

IE C 6 2 6 1 9 ,
Safety requirements for secondary lithium cells and batteries, for use in industrial applications
IS O 3 7 ，Rubber， vulcanized or thermoplastic - Determination o f tensile stress-strain

properties
IS O 1 7 8 , Plastics - Determination of flexural properties
IS O 1 7 9 -1 , Plastics - Determination o f Charpy impact properties - Part 1: Non-instrumented

impact test
IS O 1 8 0 , Plastics - Determination of Izod impact strength
IS O 3 0 6 , Plastics - Thermoplastic materials - Determination of Vicat softening temperature

(VST)
IS O 5 2 7 (a ll p a r ts ) , Plastics - Determination o f tensile properties
IS O 8 7 1 , Plastics - Determination of ignition temperature using a hot-air furnace
Flexible cellular polymeric materials -

IS O 1 7 9 8 , Determination o f tensile strength and
elongation at break
旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
IS O 1 8 1 7 :2 0 1 5 , Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic - Determination of the effect of liquids
IS O 2 7 1 9 , Determination of flash point - Pensky-Martens closed cup method
Paints and varnishes -

IS O 3 2 3 1 , Determination of resistance to humid atmospheres
containing sulfur dioxide
IS O 3 6 7 9 , Determination o f flash no-flash and flash point - Rapid equilibrium closed cup
method
IS O 3 8 6 4 (a ll p a r t s ) , Graphical symbols - Safety colours and safety signs
Graphical symbols - Safety colours and safety signs - Part 2: Design principles
IS O 3 8 6 4 -2 ,
for product safety labels
IS O 4 8 9 2 -1 , Plastics - Methods of exposure to laboratory light sources - Part 1: General

guidance
IS O 4 8 9 2 -2 , Plastics - Methods of exposure to laboratory light sources - Part 2: Xenon-arc

lamps
Plastics - Methods of exposure to laboratory light sources - Part 4: Open-flame

IS O 4 8 9 2 -4 ,
carbon-arc lamps
IS O 7 0 0 0 ， Graphical symbols for use on equipment - Registered symbols, a v a ila b le fro m :

< h ttp ://w w w .g ra p h ic a l-s y m b o ls .in fo /e q u ip m e n t>
Graphical symbols - Safety colours and safety signs - Safety signs used in
IS O 7 0 1 0 ,
workplaces and public areas
IS O 8 2 5 6 , Plastics - Determination of tensile-impact strength
Cellular plastics - Determination o f horizontal burning characteristics of small

IS O 9 7 7 2 ,
specimens subjected to a small flame
Plastics - Determination o f burning behaviour of thin flexible vertical specimens in

IS O 9 7 7 3 ,
contact with a small-flame ignition source
Corrosion of metals and alloys - Accelerated testing involving cyclic exposure to

IS O 1 4 9 9 3 ,
salt mist， “dry” and “wet” conditions
Corrosion tests in artificial atmospheres - Accelerated corrosion tests involving

IS O 2 1 2 0 7 ,
alternate exposure to corrosion-promoting gases, neutral salt-spray and drying
ASTM D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers -
Tension
ASTM D 4 7 1 -9 8 , Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Effect o f Liquids
ASTM Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials - Slab, Bonded, and
D3574,
Molded Urethane Foams
Sound system equipment: Headphones and earphones associated with

E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 :2 0 1 3,
portable audio equipment - Maximum sound pressure level measurement methodology and
limit considerations - Part 1: General method for “one package equipment”

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Sound system equipment: Headphones and earphones associated with portable

EN 5 0 3 3 2 -2 ,
audio equipment - Maximum sound pressure level measurement methodology and limit
considerations - Part 2: Matching of sets with headphones if either or both are offered
separately
Sound system equipment: Headphones and earphones associated with personal

EN 5 0 3 3 2 -3 ,
music players - maximum sound pressure level measurement methodology - Part 3:
Measurement method for sound dose management
3 Terms, definitions and abbreviated terms
3.1 Energy source abbreviations

Abbreviation Description
ES Electrical energy source see 5.2
ES1 Electrical energy source class 1
MS Mechanical energy source see 8.2

MS1 Mechanical energy source class 1
PS Power source see 6.2

PS1 Power source class 1
RS Radiation energy source see 10.2

RS1 Radiation energy source class 1
TS Thermal energy source see 9.2

TS1 Thermal energy source class 1

旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 -1 :2 0 1 8 © IE C 2 0 1 8
3.2 Other abbreviations

Abbreviation Description
CD compact disc
CD ROM compact disc read-only memory
CRT cathode ray tube
CSD calculated sound dose
CTI comparative tracking index
DVD digital versatile disc
E sound exposure
EIS electrical insulation system
EUT equipment under test

FIW fully insulated winding wire
GDT gas discharge tube
IC integrated circuit
ICX integrated circuit with X-capacitor function
IR infrared
LED light emitting diode
LEL lower explosion limit
LFC liquid filled component
LPS limited power source
MEL momentary exposure level
MOV metal oxide varistor
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NiCd nickel cadmium
PIS potential ignition source
PMP personal music player
PoE power over Ethernet
PPE personal protective equipment
PTC positive temperature coefficient
PTI proof tracking index
RC resistor-capacitor
RG risk group
Sb antimony
SEL sound exposure level
SPD surge protective device
SRME slide rail mounted equipment
TSS thyristor surge suppressor
UPS uninterruptible power supply
USB universal serial bus
UV ultraviolet
VDR voltage dependent resistor
VRLA valve regulated lead acid

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
3.3 Terms and definitions
F o r th e p u r p o s e s o f th is d o c u m e n t th e fo llo w in g te r m s a n d d e fin itio n s a p p ly .
IS O a n d IE C m a in ta in te rm in o lo g ic a l d a ta b a s e s fo r use in s ta n d a rd iz a tio n a t th e fo llo w in g

a d d re s s e s :
• IE C E le c tro p e d ia : a v a ila b le a t h ttp ://w w w .e le c tr o p e d ia .o r g /
• IS O O n lin e b ro w s in g p la tfo rm : a v a ila b le a t h ttp ://w w w .is o .o r g /o b p
For th e c o n v e n ie n c e o f th e u se r, th e d e fin e d te rm s a re lis te d b e lo w in a lp h a b e tic a l o rd e r

in d ic a tin g th e n u m b e r o f th e d e fin e d te rm .
W h e re th e w o rd s “ v o lta g e ” a n d “ c u r r e n t” o r th e ir a b b re v ia tio n s a re u s e d , th e y a re R M S v a lu e s
u n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d .
5 V A c la s s m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .1
5 V B c la s s m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .2
a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n 3 .3 .7 .1
a c c e s s ib le 3 .3 .6 .1
a rc in g P IS 3 .3 .9 .2
b a c k fe e d 3 .3 .6 .2
b a c k fe e d s a fe g u a rd 3 .3 .1 1 .1
b a s ic in s u la tio n 3 .3 .5 .1
b a s ic s a fe g u a r d 3 .3 .1 1 .2
b a tte ry 3 .3 .1 7 .1
c a lc u la te d s o u n d d o s e , C S D 3 .3 .1 9 .1
c e ll 3 .3 .1 7 .2
c h e e s e c lo th 3 .3 .6 .3
c la s s I e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .1 5 .1
c l a s s II c o n s t r u c t i o n 3 .3 .1 5 .2
c l a s s II e q u i p m e n t 3 .3 .1 5 .3
c l a s s III e q u i p m e n t 3 .3 .1 5 .4
c le a ra n c e 3 .3 .1 2 .1
c o in / b u tto n c e ll b a tte r y 3 .3 .1 7 .3
c o m b u s tib le m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .1
c o n s u m a b le m a te ria l 3 .3 .1 6 .1
c r e e p a g e d is ta n c e 3 .3 .1 2 .2
D C v o lta g e 3 .3 .1 4 .1
d ig ita l s ig n a l le v e l r e la t iv e to fu ll s c a le , d B F S 3 .3 .1 9 .5
d ir e c t p lu g -in e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .3 .1
d is c o n n e c t d e v ic e 3 .3 .6 .4
d o u b le in s u la tio n 3 .3 .5 .2
d o u b le s a fe g u a rd 3 .3 .1 1 .3
e le c tric a l e n c lo s u re 3 .3 .2 .1
e n c lo s u re 3 .3 .2 .2
e q u ip m e n t s a fe g u a rd 3 .3 .1 1 .4

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
e x p lo s io n 3 .3 .1 6 .2
e x p lo s iv e 3 .3 .1 6 .3
e x te rn a l c irc u it 3 .3 .1 .1
fire e n c lo s u r e 3 .3 .2 .3
fix e d e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .3 .2
fu lly in s u la te d w in d in g w ire , F IW 3 .3 .1 8 .1
fu n c tio n a l e a rth in g 3 .3 .6 .5
fu n c tio n a l in s u la tio n 3 .3 .5 .3
g ra d e o f F IW 3 .3 .1 8 .2
h a n d -h e ld e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .3 .3
h a z a rd o u s s u b s ta n c e 3 .3 .1 6 .4
H B 4 0 c la s s m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .3
H B 7 5 c la s s m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .4
H B F c la s s fo a m e d m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .5
H F -1 c la s s fo a m e d m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .6
H F -2 c la s s fo a m e d m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .7
h ig h e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g te m p e r a tu r e 3 .3 .1 7 .4
in s ta lla tio n s a fe g u a rd 3 .3 .1 1 .5
in s tru c te d p e rs o n 3 .3 .8 .1
in s tru c tio n a l s a fe g u a rd 3 .3 .1 1 .6
in s u la tin g liq u id 3 .3 .5 .4
in te rm itte n t o p e ra tio n 3 .3 .7 .2
lo w e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g te m p e r a tu r e 3 .3 .1 7 .5
m a in s 3 .3 .1 .2
m a in s tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e 3 .3 .1 4 .2
m a te ria l fla m m a b ility c la s s 3 .3 .4 .2
m a x im u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g c u rre n t 3 .3 .1 7 .6
m a x im u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g v o lta g e 3 .3 .1 7 .7
m e c h a n ic a l e n c lo s u re 3 .3 .2 .4
m o m e n t a r y e x p o s u r e le v e l, M E L 3 .3 .1 9 .2
m o v a b le e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .3 .4
n o n -c lip p e d o u tp u t p o w e r 3 .3 .7 .3
n o n -d e ta c h a b le p o w e r s u p p ly c o rd 3 .3 .6 .6
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n 3 .3 .7 .4
o rd in a ry p e rs o n 3 .3 .8 .2 ：
o u td o o r e n c lo s u re 3 .3 .2 .5
o u td o o r e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .3 .5
o u td o o r lo c a tio n 3 .3 .6 .7
p e a k re s p o n s e fre q u e n c y 3 .3 .7 .5
p e rm a n e n tly c o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .3 .6
p e rs o n a l s a fe g u a rd 3 .3 .1 1 .7
p lu g g a b le , ty p e A e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .3 .7
p lu g g a b le , ty p e B e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .3 .8

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
p o llu tio n d e g re e 3 .3 .6 .8
p o te n tia l ig n itio n s o u r c e , P IS 3 .3 .9 .1
p re c a u tio n a ry s a fe g u a rd 3 .3 .1 1 .8
p ro fe s s io n a l e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .3 .9
p ro s p e c tiv e to u c h v o lta g e 3 .3 .1 4 .3
p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r 3 .3 .1 1 .9
p ro te c tiv e c o n d u c to r c u rre n t 3 .3 .1 4 .4
p ro te c tiv e c o n d u c to r 3 .3 .1 1 .1 0
p r o te c tiv e c u r r e n t ra tin g 3 .3 .1 0 .6
p r o te c tiv e e a rth in g 3 .3 .1 1 .1 1
p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g c o n d u c to r 3 .3 .1 1 .1 2
ra te d c u rre n t 3 .3 .1 0 .1
ra te d fre q u e n c y 3 .3 .1 0 .2
ra te d lo a d im p e d a n c e 3 .3 .7 .6
ra te d p o w e r 3 .3 .1 0 .3
ra te d v o lta g e ra n g e 3 .3 .1 0 .5
ra te d v o lta g e 3 .3 .1 0 .4
re a s o n a b ly fo re s e e a b le m is u s e 3 .3 .7 .7
re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n 3 .3 .5 .5
re in fo rc e d s a fe g u a rd 3 .3 .1 1 .1 3
re q u ire d w ith s ta n d v o lta g e 3 .3 .1 4 .5
r e s is tiv e P IS 3 .3 .9 .3
re s tric te d a c c e s s a re a 3 .3 .6 .9
R M S w o rk in g v o lta g e 3 .3 .1 4 .6
ro u tin e te s t 3 .3 .6 .1 0
s a fe g u a rd 3 .3 .1 1 .1 4
s a fe ty in te rlo c k 3 .3 .1 1 .1 5
s a m p lin g te s t 3 .3 .6 .1 1
s e c o n d a r y lith iu m b a tte ry 3 .3 .1 7 .8
s h o rt-tim e o p e ra tio n 3 .3 .7 .8
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n 3 .3 .7 .9
s k ill s a fe g u a r d 3 .3 .1 1 .1 6
s k ille d p e rs o n 3 .3 .8 .3
s o lid in s u la tio n 3 .3 .5 .6
so u n d e xp o su re , £ 3 .3 .1 9 .3
s o u n d e x p o s u r e le v e l, S E L 3 .3 .1 9 .4
s ta tio n a ry e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .3 .1 0
s to re d e n e rg y m o d e 3 .3 .6 .1 2
s u p p le m e n ta r y in s u la tio n 3 .3 .5 .7
s u p p le m e n ta ry s a fe g u a rd 3 .3 .1 1 .1 7
te m p e r a tu r e lim ite r 3 .3 .1 3 .1
te m p o ra ry o v e rv o lta g e 3 .3 .1 4 .7
th e rm a l c u t-o ff 3 .3 .1 3 .2

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
th e rm o s ta t 3 .3 .1 3 .3
to o l 3 .3 .6 .1 3
to u c h c u rre n t 3 .3 .6 .1 4
tra n s p o rta b le e q u ip m e n t 3 .3 .3 .1 1
ty p e te s t 3 .3 .6 .1 5
V -0 c la s s m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .8
V -1 c la s s m a te r ia l 3 .3 .4 .2 .9
V -2 c la s s m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .1 0
V T M - 0 c la s s m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .1 1
V T M -1 c la s s m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .1 2
V T M - 2 c la s s m a te ria l 3 .3 .4 .2 .1 3
w ire le s s p o w e r tra n s m itte r 3 .3 .3 .1 2
w o r k c e ll 3 .3 .6 .1 6
w o rk in g v o lta g e 3 .3 .1 4 .8
w ra p p in g tis s u e 3 .3 .6 .1 7
3.3.1 C irc u it te rm s
3.3.1.1
e x te rn a l c irc u it
e l e c t r i c a l c i r c u i t t h a t is e x t e r n a l t o t h e e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t m a i n s
Note 1 to entry: An external circuit is classified as ES1 ， ES2 or ES3, and PS1, PS2, or PS3.
3.3.1.2
m a in s
A C o r D C p o w e r d is trib u tio n s y s te m ( e x te r n a l to th e e q u ip m e n t ) th a t s u p p lie s o p e r a t in g p o w e r
t o t h e e q u i p m e n t a n d is P S 3
Note 1 to entry: Mains include public or private utilities and， unless otherwise specified in this document，
equivalent sources such as motor-driven generators and uninterruptible power supplies.
3.3.2 E n c lo s u re te rm s
3.3.2.1
e le c tric a l e n c lo s u re
e n c lo s u r e in te n d e d a s a s a f e g u a r d a g a in s t e le c tric a lly -c a u s e d in ju ry
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 6 -1 3 , m o d ifie d - th e te rm s a fe g u a r d has been used]
3.3.2.2
e n c lo s u re
h o u s in g a ffo rd in g th e ty p e a n d d e g re e o f p ro te c tio n s u ita b le fo r th e in te n d e d a p p lic a tio n
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 2 -3 5 ]
3.3.2.3
fire e n c lo s u re
e n c lo s u re in te n d e d as a s a fe g u a rd a g a in s t th e sp re a d o f fire fro m w ith in th e e n c lo s u r e to
o u ts id e th e e n c lo s u r e

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
3.3.2.4
mocha门 ical enclosure
enclosure i n t e n d e d a s a safeguard a g a in s t m e c h a n ic a lly - c a u s e d p a in a n d in ju ry
3.3.2.5
outdoor enclosure
enclosure t h a t i s i n t e n d e d to p ro v id e p ro te c tio n fro m s p e c ific c o n d itio n s in an outdoor
location
Note 1 to entry: An outdoor enclosure can also perform the functions of another enclosure, for example: a fire
enclosure; an electrical enclosure; a mechanical enclosure.
Note 2 to entry: A separate cabinet or housing into which the equipment is placed can provide the function of an
outdoor enclosure.
3.3.3 Equipment terms
3.3.3.1
direct plug-in equipment
e q u i p m e n t in w h i c h t h e mains p lu g fo r m s a n in te g r a l p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t enclosure
3.3.3.2
fixed equipment
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is s p e c i f i e d in t h e in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s to o n ly be se cu re d in p la c e by a
m e a n s d e fin e d b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r
Note 1 to entry: Equipment that has a screw hole or other means to secure the equipment by an ordinary
person, such as for securement to a table or for earthquake protection, is not considered to be fixed equipment.
Note 2 to entry: Typically, fixed equipment will be wall, ceiling or floor mounted.
3.3.3.3
hand-held equipment
movable equipment, o r a p a rt o f a n y k in d o f e q u i p m e n t , t h a t is i n t e n d e d to b e h e ld in t h e
h a n d d u rin g n o rm a l u s e
3.3.3.4
movable equipment
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is e i t h e r :
- 1 8 k g o r l e s s in m a s s a n d i s n o t fixed equipment; or
- provided w ith w h e e ls , c a s te rs , or o th e r m eans to fa c ilita te m ovem ent by an ordinary

person a s r e q u ir e d to p e r f o r m its in t e n d e d u s e
3.3.3.5
outdoor equipment
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n s t a l l e d o r e x p o s e d in a n outdoor location, s p e c ifie d b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r
t o c o m p l y w h o l l y o r in p a r t u n d e r s p e c i f i c c o n d i t i o n s
Note 1 to entry: Transportable equipment, for example, a laptop or notebook computer, or a telephone, is not
outdoor equipment unless specified by the manufacturer for continuous use in an outdoor location.
3.3.3.6
permanently connected equipment
e q u ip m e n t th a t c a n o n ly b e e le c tric a lly c o n n e c te d to o r d is c o n n e c te d fr o m th e mains b y th e
use o f a tool
3.3.3.7
pluggable equipment type A
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n t e n d e d f o r c o n n e c t i o n t o t h e mains v ia a n o n - in d u s tr ia l p lu g a n d s o c k e t-
o u tle t o r v ia a n o n - in d u s tr ia l a p p lia n c e c o u p le r , o r b o th

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Note 1 to entry: Examples are plugs and socket-outlets covered by standards such as IEC TR 60083 and
IEC 60320-1.
3.3.3.8
pluggable equipment type B
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n t e n d e d f o r c o n n e c t i o n t o t h e mains v ia a n in d u s tria l p lu g a n d s o c k e t- o u tle t
o r v ia a n in d u s tr ia l a p p lia n c e c o u p le r , o r b o th
Note 1 to entry: Examples are plugs and socket-outlets covered by standards such as IEC 60309-1.
3.3.3.9
professional equipment
e q u i p m e n t f o r u s e in t r a d e s , p r o f e s s i o n s o r i n d u s t r i e s a n d w h i c h is n o t i n t e n d e d f o r s a l e t o t h e
g e n e ra l p u b lic
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 6 1 :1 9 9 0 , 1 6 1 -0 5 -0 5 ]
3.3.3.10
stationary equipment
- fixed equipment, or
- permanently connected equipment, or
- e q u i p m e n t t h a t , d u e t o its p h y s i c a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , is n o r m a l l y n o t m o v e d
Note 1 to entry: Stationary equipment is neither movable equipment nor transportable equipment.
3.3.3.11
transportable equipment
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n t e n d e d t o b e r o u t i n e l y c a r r i e d
Note 1 to entry: Examples include notebook computers, CD players and portable accessories, including their
external power supplies.
3.3.3.12
wireless power transmitter
e q u ip m e n t th a t u s e s e le c t r o m a g n e t ic fie ld s to tr a n s f e r e le c tr ic a l p o w e r fo r c h a rg in g battery
o p e ra te d h a n d -h e ld d e v ic e s
3.3.4 Flammability terms
3.3.4.1
combustible material
m a t e r ia l t h a t is c a p a b l e o f b e in g ig n i t e d o r b u r n e d
Note 1 to entry: All thermoplastic materials are considered capable of being ignited or burned regardless of the
material flammability class.
3.3.4.2
material flammability class
r e c o g n i t i o n o f t h e b u r n in g b e h a v i o u r o f m a t e r ia ls a n d t h e i r a b ilit y to e x t i n g u i s h if ig n it e d
Note 1 to entry: Materials are classified when tested in accordance with IEC 60695-11-10, IEC 60695-11-20,
ISO 9772 or ISO 9773.
3.3.4.2.1
5VA class material
m a te ria l te s te d in th e th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s used and c la s s ifie d 5VA a c c o rd in g to
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -2 0

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
3.3.4.2.2
5VB class material
m a te ria l te s te d in th e th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s used and c la s s ifie d 5VB a c c o rd in g to
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -2 0
3.3.4.2.3
HB40 class material
m a te ria l te s te d in th e th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s used and c la s s ifie d HB40 a c c o rd in g to
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -1 0
3.3.4.2.4
HB75 class material
m a te ria l te s te d in th e th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s used and c la s s ifie d HB75 a c c o rd in g to
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -1 0
3.3.4.2.5
HBF class foamed material
f o a m e d m a t e r i a l t e s t e d in t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s u s e d a n d c l a s s i f i e d H B F a c c o r d i n g
to IS O 9 7 7 2
3.3.4.2.6
HF-1 class foamed material
fo a m e d m a te ria l te s te d in th e th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s used and c la s s ifie d H F -1
a c c o rd in g to IS O 9 7 7 2
3.3.4.2.7
HF-2 class foamed material
fo a m e d m a te ria l te s te d in th e th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s used and c la s s ifie d H F -2
a c c o rd in g to IS O 9 7 7 2
3.3.4.2.8
V-0 class material
m a te ria l te s te d in th e th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s used and c la s s ifie d V -0 a c c o rd in g to
旧 C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -1 0
3.3.4.2.9
V-1 class material
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 1 0
3.3.4.2.10
V-2 class material
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 1 0
3.3.4.2.11
VTM-0 class material
m a te ria l te s te d in t h e th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s used and c la s s ifie d V T M -0 a c c o rd in g to
IS O 9 7 7 3
3.3.4.2.12
m a te ria l te s te d in t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s used and c la s s ifie d V T M -1 a c c o rd in g to
IS O 9 7 7 3

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
3.3.4.2.13
m a te ria l te s te d in t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s used and c la s s ifie d V T M -2 a c c o rd in g to
IS O 9 7 7 3
3.3.5 Electrical insulation
3.3.5.1
basic insulation
in s u la tio n to p r o v id e a basic safeguard a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k
Note 1 to entry: This concept does not apply to insulation used exclusively for functional purposes.
3.3.5.2
double insulation
in s u la tio n c o m p ris in g b o th basic insulation and supplementary insulation
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 6 -0 8 ]
3.3.5.3
functional insulation
in s u la tio n b e tw e e n c o n d u c tiv e p a rts w h ic h is n e c e s s a r y o n l y f o r t h e p r o p e r f u n c t i o n i n g o f t h e
e q u ip m e n t
3.3.5.4
insulating liquid
in s u la tin g m a te r ia l c o n s is t in g e n tir e ly o f a liq u id
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 2 1 2 :2 0 1 0 , 2 1 2 -1 1 - 0 4 ]
3.3.5.5
reinforced insulation
s in g le in s u la tio n s y s te m th a t p ro v id e s a d e g re e o f p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k e q u iv a le n t
to double insulation
3.3.5.6
solid insulation
in s u la tio n c o n s is tin g e n tir e ly o f s o lid m a te ria l
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 2 1 2 :2 0 1 0 , 2 1 2 -1 1 -0 2 ]
3.3.5.7
supplementary insulation
in d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n a p p lie d in a d d i t i o n to basic insulation to p ro v id e a supplementary
safeguard fo r fa u lt p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k
3.3.6 Miscellaneous
3.3.6.1
accessible
to u c h a b le b y a b o d y p a rt
Note 1 to entry: A body part is represented by one or more of the probes specified in Annex V, as applicable.
3.3.6.2
backfeed
c o n d i t i o n in w h i c h a v o l t a g e o r e n e r g y a v a i l a b l e w i t h i n a battery b a c k e d u p s u p p l y is f e d b a c k
t o a n y o f t h e i n p u t t e r m i n a l s , e i t h e r d i r e c t l y o r b y a l e a k a g e p a t h w h i l e o p e r a t i n g in t h e stored
energy mode a n d w ith mains p o w e r n o t a v a ila b le

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
3.3.6.3
cheesecloth
b le a c h e d c o tto n c lo th o f a p p r o x im a te ly 4 0 g / m 2
Note 1 to entry: Cheesecloth is a coarse, loosely woven cotton gauze, originally used for wrapping cheese.
3.3.6.4
disconnect device
m eans to e le c tric a lly d is c o n n e c t e q u ip m e n t fro m th e mains th a t, in th e open p o s itio n ,
c o m p lie s w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s s p e c ifie d fo r is o la tio n
3.3.6.5
functional earthing
e a r t h i n g a p o i n t o r p o i n t s in a s y s t e m o r in a n i n s t a l l a t i o n o r i n e q u i p m e n t , f o r p u r p o s e s o t h e r
th a n e le c tric a l s a fe ty
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 1 , 1 9 5 -0 1 -1 3 ]
3.3.6.6
non-detachable power supply cord
fle x ib le s u p p ly co rd a ffix e d to o r a s s e m b le d to th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th a t c a n n o t be re m o ve d
fro m th e e q u ip m e n t w ith o u t th e u s e o f tools
3.3.6.7
outdoor location
lo c a tio n fo r e q u ip m e n t w h e re p ro te c tio n fro m th e w e a th e r and o th e r o u td o o r in flu e n c e s
p r o v i d e d b y a b u i l d i n g o r o t h e r s t r u c t u r e is l i m i t e d o r n o n - e x i s t e n t
3.3.6.8
pollution degree
n u m e ra l c h a r a c te r iz in g th e e x p e c te d p o llu tio n o f th e m ic r o - e n v ir o n m e n t
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 5 8 1 :2 0 0 8 , 5 8 1 -2 1 -0 7 ]
3.3.6.9
restricted access area
a r e a accessible o n l y to skilled persons and to instructed persons w ith th e p ro p e r
a u th o riz a tio n
3.3.6.10
routine test
te s t to w h ic h each in d iv id u a l d e v ic e is s u b je c te d d u rin g o r a fte r m a n u fa c tu re to a s c e rta in
w h e t h e r it c o m p l i e s w i t h c e r t a i n c r i t e r i a
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .1 9 .2 ]
3.3.6.11
sampling test
te s t o n a n u m b e r o f d e v ic e s ta k e n a t ra n d o m fro m a b a tc h
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .1 9 .3 ]
3.3.6.12
stored energy mode
s ta b le m o d e o f o p e ra tio n th a t a battery b a c k e d up s u p p ly a tta in s u n d e r s p e c ifie d c o n d itio n s
Note 1 to entry: In accordance with IEC 62040-1:2017, the specified conditions are as follows:
一 AC input power, is disconnected or is out of required tolerance;

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- operating and output power is supplied by the energy storage device;

一 the load is within the specified rating of the battery backed up supply.
3.3.6.13
tool
o b je c t th a t c a n b e u s e d to o p e r a te a s c r e w , la tc h o r s im ila r fix in g m e a n s
Note 1 to entry: Examples of tools include coins, tableware, screwdrivers, pliers, etc.
3.3.6.14
touch current
e le c tric c u rre n t th ro u g h a hum an body when b o d y p a rts to u c h tw o o r m o re accessible p a rts
or one accessible p a rt a n d e a rth
3.3.6.15
type test
te s t on a re p re s e n ta tiv e s a m p le w ith th e o b je c tiv e of d e te rm in in g if, as d e s ig n e d and
m a n u f a c t u r e d , it c a n m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h is d o c u m e n t
3.3.6.16
work cell
s p a c e w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t o f s u c h s iz e th a t a p e rs o n can e n te r c o m p le te ly o r p a rtia lly (fo r
e x a m p le , e n tir e lim b o r h e a d ) fo r s e r v ic in g o r o p e r a tin g th e e q u ip m e n t a n d w h e r e m e c h a n ic a l
h a za rd s m a y be p re s e n t
Note 1 to entry: A work cell can contain more than one compartment. A compartment can be used for either
operational or service purposes.
Note 2 to entry: The equipment containing the work cell is typically installed within a restricted access area.
3.3.6.17
wrapping tissue
tis s u e b e tw e e n 12 g /m 2 a n d 3 0 g /m 2
Note 1 to entry: The wrapping tissue is soft, thin, usually translucent paper used for wrapping delicate articles.
3.3.7 Operating and fault conditions
3.3.7.1
abnormal operating condition
te m p o r a ry o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n t h a t is n o t a normal operating condition and is n o t a single
fault condition o f th e e q u ip m e n t its e lf
Note 1 to entry: Abnormal operating conditions are specified in Clause B.3.
Note 2 to entry: An abnormal operating condition may be introduced by the equipment or by a person.
Note 3 to entry: An abnormal operating condition may result in a failure of a component, a device or a
safeguard.
3.3.7.2
intermittent operation
o p e ra tio n in a s e r i e s o f c y c l e s , e a c h c o m p o s e d o f a p e r i o d o f o p e r a t i o n f o l l o w e d b y a p e rio d
w ith th e e q u ip m e n t s w it c h e d o ff o r r u n n in g id le
3.3.7.3
non-clipped output power
s i n e w a v e p o w e r d i s s i p a t e d in t h e rated load impedance, m e a s u re d a t 1 0 0 0 H z a t th e o n s e t
o f c lip p in g on e ith e r o n e o r b o th p e a k s

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
3.3.7.4
normal operating condition
m ode o f o p e ra tio n th a t re p re s e n ts a s c lo s e ly as p o s s ib le th e ra n g e o f n o rm a l use th a t can
re a s o n a b ly be e x p e c te d
Note 1 to entry: Unless otherwise specified, the most severe conditions of normal use are the most unfavourable
default values as specified in Clause B.2.
Note 2 to entry: Reasonably foreseeable misuse is not covered by normal operating conditions. Instead, it is
covered by abnormal operating conditions.
3.3.7.5
peak response frequency
te s t fre q u e n c y th a t p ro d u ce s th e m a x im u m o u tp u t power m e a su re d at th e rated load
impedance
Note 1 to entry: The frequency applied should be within the amplifier/transducer's intended operating range.
3.3.7.6
rated load impedance
im p e d a n c e o r re s is ta n c e , a s d e c la re d b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r, b y w h ic h a n o u tp u t c irc u it s h o u ld
b e te rm in a te d
3.3.7.7
reasonably foreseeable misuse
use of a p ro d u c t, p ro ce ss o r s e rv ic e in a way n o t in te n d e d by th e s u p p lie r, b u t w h ic h can
re s u lt fro m re a d ily p re d ic ta b le h u m a n b e h a v io u r
Note 1 to entry: Reasonably foreseeable misuse is considered to be a form of abnormal operating conditions.
[S O U R C E : IS O /IE C G u i d e 5 1 : 2 0 1 4 , 3 . 7 ，m o d i f i e d — I n t h e d e f i n i t i o n , " p r o d u c t o r s y s t e m " h a s

b e e n r e p l a c e d b y " p r o d u c t ，p r o c e s s o r s e r v i c e " . T h e N o t e s t o e n t r y h a v e b e e n r e p l a c e d . ]
3.3.7.8
short-time operation
o p e r a t i o n u n d e r normal operating conditions fo r a s p e c ifie d p e rio d , s ta rtin g when th e
e q u ip m e n t is c o l d , t h e in te rv a ls a fte r e a ch p e rio d o f o p e ra tio n b e in g s u ffic ie n t to a llo w th e
e q u ip m e n t to c o o l d o w n to r o o m te m p e r a tu r e
3.3.7.9
single fault condition
c o n d itio n o f e q u ip m e n t w ith a fa u lt u n d e r normal operating condition o f a s in g le safeguard
(b u t not a reinforced safeguard) o r o f a s in g le c o m p o n e n t o r a d e v ic e
Note 1 to entry: Single fault conditions are specified in Clause B.4.
3.3.8 Persons
3.3.8.1
instructed person
p e rso n in s tru c te d or skilled person a s t o e n e r g y s o u r c e s a n d w h o c a n
s u p e rv is e d by a
re s p o n s ib ly u s e equipment safeguards a n d precautionary safeguards w i t h r e s p e c t t o t h o s e
e n e rg y so u rce s
Note 1 to entry: Supervised, as used in the definition, means having the direction and oversight of the
performance of others.
Note 2 to entry: In Germany, in many cases, a person may only be regarded as an instructed person if certain
legal requirements are fulfilled.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
3.3.8.2
ordinary person
p e r s o n w h o is n e i t h e r a skilled person nor an instructed person
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 8 2 6 :2 0 0 4 , 8 2 6 -1 8 -0 3 ]
3.3.8.3
skilled person
p e rs o n w ith r e le v a n t e d u c a tio n o r e x p e rie n c e to e n a b le h im o r h e r to id e n t if y h a z a r d s a n d to
ta k e a p p r o p r ia te a c tio n s to r e d u c e th e r is k s o f in ju r y to t h e m s e lv e s a n d o th e r s
Note 1 to entry: In Germany, in many cases, a person may only be regarded as an skilled person if certain legal
requirements are fulfilled.
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 8 2 6 :2 0 0 4 , 8 2 6 -1 8 -0 1 , m o d ifie d - The d e fin itio n has been m ade

a p p l i c a b l e to a ll t y p e s o f h a z a r d s . ]
3.3.9 Potential ignition sources
3.3.9.1
potential ignition source
PIS
lo c a tio n w h e r e e le c tr ic a l e n e r g y c a n c a u s e ig n itio n
3.3.9.2
arcing PIS
PIS w h e r e a n a rc m a y o c c u r d u e to th e o p e n in g o f a c o n d u c to r o r a c o n ta c t
Note 1 to entry: An electronic protection circuit or additional constructional measures may be used to prevent a
location from becoming an arcing PIS.
Note 2 to entry: A faulty contact or interruption in an electric connection that may occur in conductive patterns on
printed boards is considered to be within the scope of this definition.
3.3.9.3
resistive PIS
PIS w h e r e a c o m p o n e n t m a y ig n ite d u e to e x c e s s iv e p o w e r d is s ip a tio n
Note 1 to entry: An electronic protection circuit or additional constructional measures may be used to prevent a
location from becoming a resistive PIS.
3.3.10 Ratings
3.3.10.1
rated current
in p u t cu rre n t of th e e q u ip m e n t, as d e c la re d by th e m a n u fa c tu re r, at normal operating
conditions
3.3.10.2
rated frequency
s u p p ly fr e q u e n c y o r fr e q u e n c y ra n g e a s d e c la re d b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r
3.3.10.3
rated power
in p u t power of th e e q u ip m e n t, as d e c la re d by th e m a n u fa c tu re r, at normal operating
conditions
3.3.10.4
rated voltage
v a lu e o f v o lta g e a s s ig n e d by th e m a n u f a c t u r e r to a c o m p o n e n t, d e v ic e o r e q u ip m e n t a n d to
w h ic h o p e ra tio n a n d p e rfo rm a n c e c h a ra c te ris tic s a re re fe rre d

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Note 1 to entry: Equipment may have more than one rated voltage value or may have a rated voltage range.
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .9 ]
3.3.10.5
rated voltage range
s u p p ly v o lta g e ra n g e , as d e c la re d by th e m a n u fa c tu re r, e xp re sse d by its lo w e r a n d upper
rated voltages
3.3.10.6
protective current rating
c u r r e n t r a t i n g o f a n o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e t h a t is in t h e b u ild in g in s ta lla tio n o r in t h e
e q u ip m e n t to p r o te c t a c ir c u it
3.3.11 Safeguards
3.3.11.1
backfeed safeguard
c o n tr o l s c h e m e th a t r e d u c e s th e ris k o f e le c tr ic s h o c k d u e to b a c k fe e d
3.3.11.2
basic safeguard
safeguard t h a t p r o v i d e s p r o t e c t i o n under normal operating conditions and under abnormal
operating conditions w h e n e v e r an e n e rg y so u rce c a p a b le of c a u s in g p a in or in ju ry is
p r e s e n t in t h e e q u i p m e n t
3.3.11.3
double safeguard
safeguard c o m p r i s i n g b o th a basic safeguard and a supplementary safeguard
3.3.11.4
equipment safeguard
safeguard t h a t i s a p h y s i c a l p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t
3.3.11.5
installation safeguard
safeguard t h a t i s a p h y s i c a l p a rt o f a m a n -m a d e in s ta lla tio n
3.3.11.6
instructional safeguard
in s tru c tio n in v o k in g s p e c ifie d b e h a v io u r
3.3.11.7
personal safeguard
p e rso n a l p ro te c tiv e e q u ip m e n t th a t is w o rn on th e body and th a t re d u c e s e xp o su re to an
e n e rg y so u rce
Note 1 to entry: Examples are shields, goggles, gloves, aprons, face masks or breathing apparatus.
3.3.11.8
precautionary safeguard
instructed person b e h a v i o u r to a v o id c o n ta c t w ith or e xp o su re to a c la s s 2 e n e rg y so u rce
b a s e d o n s u p e rv is io n o r in s tru c tio n s g iv e n b y a skilled person
3.3.11.9
protective bonding conductor
protective conductor i n t h e e q u i p m e n t p r o v i d e d f o r p r o t e c t i v e e q u i p o t e n t i a 卜b o n d i n g o f p a r t s
re q u ire d to b e e a rth e d fo r s a fe ty p u rp o s e s

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Note 1 to entry: A protective bonding conductor is internal in the equipment.
3.3.11.10
protective conductor
c o n d u c to r p ro v id e d fo r th e p u rp o s e s o f s a fe ty (fo r e x a m p le , p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k )
Note 1 to entry: A protective conductor is either a protective earthing conductor or a protective bonding
conductor.
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 2 -0 9 ]
3.3.11.11
protective earthing
e a rth in g a p o in t o r p o in ts in a s y s te m or in a n in s ta lla tio n o r in e q u i p m e n t f o r p u r p o s e s of
e le c tric a l s a fe ty
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 1 , 1 9 5 -0 1 -1 1 ]
3.3.11.12
protective earthing conductor
protective conductor c o n n e c t i n g a m a in protective earthing t e r m i n a l in t h e e q u i p m e n t t o a n
e a r t h p o i n t in t h e b u i l d i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n f o r protective earthing
3.3.11.13
reinforced safeguard
s i n g l e safeguard t h a t i s e ffe c tiv e u n d e r:
- normal operating conditions;

- abnormal operating conditions; and
- single fault conditions
3.3.11.14
safeguard
p h y s ic a l p a rt o r s y s te m o r in s tru c tio n s p e c ific a lly p ro v id e d to re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f p a in o r
in ju ry , o r, fo r fire , to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n o r s p r e a d o f fire
Note 1 to entry: See 0.5 for further explanation of a safeguard.
3.3.11.15
safety interlock
m e a n s to a u to m a tic a lly c h a n g e a n e n e rg y s o u rc e to a lo w e r c la s s e n e rg y s o u rc e p r io r to th e
p o te n tia l fo r tr a n s fe r o f th e h ig h e r e n e rg y to a b o d y p a rt
Note 1 to entry: A safety interlock encompasses the system of components and circuits that are directly involved
in the safeguard function, including electro-mechanical devices, conductors on printed boards, wiring and their
terminations, etc., as applicable.
3.3.11.16
skill safeguard
skilled person b e h a v io u r to a v o id c o n ta c t w ith or e xp o su re to a c la s s 2 o r c la s s 3 e n e rg y
s o u rc e b a s e d o n e d u c a tio n a n d e x p e rie n c e
3.3.11.17
supplementary safeguard
safeguard a p p l i e d in a d d i t i o n t o t h e basic safeguard t h a t is o r b e c o m e s o p e r a t i o n a l in t h e
e v e n t o f f a i l u r e o f t h e basic safeguard

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
3.3.12 Spacings
3.3.12.1
clearance
s h o r t e s t d i s t a n c e in a i r b e t w e e n t w o c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .2 ]
3.3.12.2
creepage distance
s h o r te s t d is ta n c e a lo n g th e s u r fa c e o f a n in s u la tin g m a te ria l b e tw e e n tw o c o n d u c tiv e p a rts
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .3 , m o d ifie d - I n t h e d e f i n i t i o n , us o l i d w h a s b e e n d e l e t e d . ]
3.3.13 Temperature controls
3.3.13.1
temperature limiter
d e v ic e fo r lim itin g th e te m p e r a tu r e o f a s y s te m , e ith e r b e lo w o r a b o v e a p a rtic u la r v a lu e , b y
c o n tr o llin g , e ith e r d ir e c tly o r in d ir e c tly , th e flo w o f th e r m a l e n e r g y in to o r o u t o f th e s y s te m
Note 1 to entry: A temperature limiter may be of the automatic reset or of the manual reset type.
3.3.13.2
thermal cut-off
d e v ic e fo r lim itin g th e te m p e r a tu r e o f a s y s te m , u n d e r single fault conditions, b y c o n tro llin g ,
e it h e r d ir e c tly o r in d ir e c tly , th e flo w o f th e r m a l e n e r g y in to o r o u t o f th e s y s te m
3.3.13.3
thermostat
d e v ic e fo r m a in ta in in g th e te m p e ra tu re of a s y s te m w ith in a ra n g e by c o n tro llin g , e ith e r
d ir e c tly o r in d ir e c tly , th e flo w o f th e r m a l e n e r g y in to o r o u t o f th e s y s te m
3.3.14 Voltages and currents
3.3.14.1
DC voltage
v o lta g e h a v in g a p e a k - to - p e a k rip p le n o t e x c e e d in g 10 % o f th e a v e r a g e v a lu e
Note 1 to entry: Where peak-to-peak ripple exceeds 10 % of the average value, the requirements related to peak
voltage are applicable.
3.3.14.2
mains transient voltage
h ig h e s t peak v o lta g e e x p e c te d a t th e mains in p u t to th e e q u ip m e n t a ris in g fro m e x te rn a l
tra n s ie n ts
3.3.14.3
prospective touch voltage
v o lta g e b e tw e e n s im u lta n e o u s ly accessible c o n d u c tiv e p a rts or b e tw e e n one accessible
c o n d u c tiv e p a rt a n d e a rth w h e n th o s e c o n d u c tiv e p a rts a re n o t b e in g to u c h e d
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 5 -0 9 , m o d ifie d - In th e d e fin itio n , "o r b e tw e e n one

accessible c o n d u c tiv e p a rt a n d e a rth " h a s b e e n a d d e d .]
3.3.14.4
protective conductor current
cu rre n t flo w in g th ro u g h th e protective earthing conductor under normal operating
conditions

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Note 1 to entry: Protective conductor current was previously included in the term “leakage current”.
3.3.14.5
required withstand voltage
p e a k v o l t a g e t h a t t h e i n s u l a t i o n u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n is r e q u i r e d t o w i t h s t a n d
3.3.14.6
RMS working voltage
tru e R M S v a lu e o f th e working voltage
Note 1 to entry: True RMS value of the working voltage includes any DC component of the waveform.
Note 2 to entry: The resultant RMS value of a waveform having an AC RMS voltage /( and a DC component
voltage B is given by the following formula:
RMS value = (A2 + B 2 ) 1/2
3.3.14.7
temporary overvoltage
o v e r v o l t a g e a t mains p o w e r fr e q u e n c y o f re la tiv e ly lo n g d u r a tio n
3.3.14.8
working voltage
v o lta g e a cro ss a n y p a rtic u la r in s u la tio n w h i l e t h e e q u i p m e n t is s u p p l i e d at rated voltage or
a n y v o l t a g e in t h e rated voltage range under normal operating conditions
Note 1 to entry: External transients are disregarded.
Note 2 to entry: Recurring peak voltages are disregarded.
3.3.15 Classes of equipment with respect to protection from electric shock
3.3.15.1
class I equipment
e q u i p m e n t w i t h basic insulation u s e d a s a basic safeguard, a n d w ith p r o te c tiv e b o n d in g a n d
protective earthing u s e d a s a supplementary safeguard
Note 1 to entry: Class I equipment may be provided with class II construction.
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 8 5 1 :2 0 0 8 , 8 5 1 -1 5 - 1 0 , m o d ifie d — The d e fin itio n has been a d a p te d to

th e safeguard p rin c ip le .]
3.3.15.2
class II construction
p a rt of an e q u ip m e n t fo r w h ic h p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric shock re lie s upon double
insulation or reinforced insulation
3.3.15.3
class II equipment
e q u i p m e n t in w h i c h p r o te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tr ic s h o c k d o e s n o t re ly o n basic insulation o n l y ,
b u t in w h i c h a supplementary safeguard is p r o v i d e d , t h e r e b e i n g n o p r o v i s i o n f o r protective
earthing o r re lia n c e u p o n in s ta lla tio n c o n d itio n s
3.3.15.4
class III equipment
e q u ip m e n t in w h ic h p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric shock re lie s upon s u p p ly fro m ES1 and in
w h i c h E S 3 is n o t g e n e r a t e d

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
3.3.16 Chemical terms
3.3.16.1
consumable material
m a t e r i a l t h a t i s u s e d b y t h e e q u i p m e n t in p e r f o r m i n g i t s i n t e n d e d f u n c t i o n , a n d i n t e n d e d t o b e
p e rio d ic a lly or o c c a s io n a lly re p la c e d or re p le n is h e d , in c lu d in g any m a te ria l th a t has a life
e x p e c ta n c y le s s th a n th a t o f th e e q u ip m e n t
Note 1 to entry: Air filters are not considered to be consumable materials.
3.3.16.2
explosion
c h e m ic a l re a c tio n of any c h e m ic a l com pound or m e c h a n ic a l m ix tu re th a t, when in itia te d ,
u n d e rg o e s a ve ry ra p id c o m b u s tio n or d e c o m p o s itio n , re le a s in g la rg e v o lu m e s of h ig h ly
h e a te d g a s e s th a t e x e rt p re s s u re o n th e s u r r o u n d in g m e d iu m
Note 1 to entry: Explosion can also be a mechanical reaction in which failure of the container causes sudden
release of pressure, and the contents, from within a pressure vessel. Depending on the rate of energy release, an
explosion can be categorized as a deflagration, a detonation or pressure rupture.
3.3.16.3
explosive
s u b s ta n c e o r m ix tu r e o f s u b s t a n c e s th a t c a n u n d e r g o a ra p id c h e m ic a l c h a n g e w ith o r w it h o u t
a n o u ts id e s o u r c e o f o x y g e n , g e n e r a tin g la rg e q u a n titie s o f e n e r g y g e n e r a lly a c c o m p a n ie d by
hot gases
3.3.16.4
hazardous substance
s u b s ta n c e th a t h a s th e p o te n tia l fo r a d v e r s e ly im p a c tin g h u m a n h e a lth
Note 1 to entry: The criteria for determining whether a substance is classified as hazardous are usually defined
by law or regulation.
3.3.17 Batteries
3.3.17.1
battery
a s s e m b ly o f o n e o r m o re cells re a d y fo r u s e a s a s o u r c e o f e le c tric a l e n e r g y c h a r a c te r iz e d b y
its v o l t a g e , s i z e , t e r m i n a l a r r a n g e m e n t , c a p a c i t y a n d r a t e c a p a b i l i t y
Note 1 to entry: The term battery pack is considered to be a battery,
3.3.17.2
cell
b a s ic m a n u fa c tu re d u n it p ro v id in g a so u rce of e le c tric a l e n e rg y by d ire c t c o n v e rs io n of
c h e m ic a l e n e rg y , th a t c o n s is ts o f e le c tro d e s , s e p a ra to rs , e le c tro ly te , c o n ta in e r a n d te rm in a ls
3.3.17.3
coin / button cell battery
s m a l l , s i n g l e cell battery h a v i n g a d i a m e t e r g r e a t e r t h a n its h e ig h t
3.3.17.4
highest specified charging temperature
h ig h e s t te m p e r a tu r e s p e c ifie d b y th e m a n u f a c tu r e r a t a s ite o n e a c h in d iv id u a l cell c o m p ris in g
th e battery d u rin g c h a rg in g o f a s e c o n d a r y battery
Note 1 to entry: It is usually assumed that the end-product manufacturer is responsible to specify the safety-
sensitive temperature, voltage or current of the battery, based on the specifications provided by battery supplier.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
3.3.17.5
lowest specified charging temperature
lo w e s t te m p e r a tu r e s p e c ifie d b y th e m a n u f a c tu r e r a t a s ite o n e a c h in d iv id u a l cell c o m p ris in g
th e battery d u rin g c h a rg in g o f a s e c o n d a r y battery
Note 1 to entry: It is usually assumed that the end-product manufacturer is responsible to specify the safety
sensitive temperature, voltage or current of the battery, based on the specifications provided by battery supplier.
3.3.17.6
maximum specified charging current
h ig h e s t c h a rg in g cu rre n t s p e c ifie d by th e m a n u fa c tu re r d u rin g c h a rg in g of a se co n d a ry
battery
3.3.17.7
maximum specified charging voltage
h ig h e s t c h a rg in g v o lta g e s p e c ifie d by th e m a n u fa c tu re r d u rin g c h a rg in g of a se co n d a ry
battery
3.3.17.8
secondary lithium battery
battery t h a t
- i n c o r p o r a t e s o n e o r m o re s e c o n d a r y lith iu m cells, and
- h a s a h o u s in g a n d a te rm in a l a rra n g e m e n t, a n d
- m a y h a v e e le c tro n ic c o n tro l d e v ic e s , a n d
- is r e a d y f o r u s e
Note 1 to entry: Examples of a secondary lithium battery include a rechargeable lithium-ion battery, a
rechargeable lithium-polymer battery and a rechargeable lithium manganese battery.
3.3.18 FIW terms
3.3.18.1
fully insulated winding wire
FIW
p o ly u r e th a n e e n a m e lle d ro u n d c o p p e r w ire , c la s s 1 8 0
Note 1 to entry: The insulating properties are in accordance with IEC 60317-0-7， IEC 60317-56 and
IEC 60851-5:2008. These standards also refer to this type of wire as “zero-defect wire” ， which they define as
“winding wire that exhibits no electrical discontinuities when tested under specific co n d itio n s'
Note 2 to entry: The term “zero-defect wire” is commonly used to refer to FIW.
3.3.18.2
grade of FIW
ra n g e o f o v e ra ll d ia m e te r o f a w ire (F IW 3 to F IW 9 )
3.3.19 Sound exposure
3.3.19.1
calculated sound dose
CSD
one week ro llin g e s tim a te of sound exposure e xp re sse d as a p e rc e n ta g e o f th e m a x im u m
re g a rd e d a s s a fe
Note 1 to entry: See B.4 of EN 50332-3:2017 for additional information.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
3.3.19.2
momentary exposure level
MEL
m e t r i c f o r e s t i m a t i n g 1 s sound exposure le v e l fr o m a s p e c ific te s t s ig n a l a p p lie d to b o th
c h a n n e ls , b a s e d o n E N 5 0 3 3 2 -1 :2 0 1 3 , 4 .2
Note 1 to entry: MEL is measured in dB(A).
3.3.19.3
sound exposure
E
A -w e ig h te d s o u n d p re s s u re (p) s q u a re d a n d in te g ra te d o v e r a s ta te d p e rio d o f tim e , T
E = \p { t) 26t
0
Note 1 to entry: The SI unit is Pa2 s.
3.3.19.4
sound exposure level
SEL
lo g a rith m ic m e a s u re o f sound exposure re la tiv e to a re fe re n c e v a lu e , E0
/ \
S E L = 1 0 l o g 10 ^
VE 〇 J
Note 1 to entry: SEL is measured in dB(A).
Note 2 to entry: The reference value E 〇is typically the 1 kHz threshold of hearing in humans.
3.3.19.5
digital signal level relative to full scale
dBFS
le v e l o f a D C - fr e e 9 9 7 H z s in e w a v e w h o s e u n d ith e re d p o s itiv e p e a k v a lu e is p o s i t i v e d i g i t a l
fu ll s c a le , le a v in g th e c o d e c o r r e s p o n d in g to n e g a tiv e d ig ita l fu ll s c a le u n u s e d
Note 1 to entry: Levels reported in dBFS are always RMS.
Note 2 to entry: It is invalid to use dBFS for non-RMS levels. Because the definition of full scale is based on a
sine wave, the level of signals with a crest factor lower than that of a sine wave may exceed 0 dBFS. In particular,
square-wave signals may reach +3,01 dBFS.
4 General requirements
4.1 General
4.1.1 Application of requirements and acceptance of materials, components and

subassemblies
R e q u i r e m e n t s a r e s p e c i f i e d i n t h e r e l e v a n t c l a u s e s a n d , w h e r e r e f e r e n c e d in t h o s e c l a u s e s , in
the relevant annexes.
W h e r e c o m p l i a n c e o f m a t e r i a l s , c o m p o n e n t s o r s u b a s s e m b l i e s is d e m o n s t r a t e d b y i n s p e c t i o n ,
s u c h c o m p lia n c e m a y b e b y r e v ie w o f p u b lis h e d d a ta o r p r e v io u s te s t re s u lts .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
In te rn a l and e x te rn a l c o m p o n e n ts and s u b a s s e m b lie s th a t c o m p ly w ith IE C 6 0 9 5 0 -1 or

IE C 6 0 0 6 5 a re a c c e p ta b le as p a rt o f e q u ip m e n t co ve re d by th is d o c u m e n t w ith o u t fu rth e r
e v a lu a tio n o th e r th a n to g iv e c o n s id e ra tio n to th e a p p ro p ria te use of th e com ponent or
s u b a s s e m b l y in t h e e n d - p r o d u c t .
NOTE The paragraph above will be deleted in the next revision of this document, subject to a vote of National
Committees at the time. It is added here to provide a smooth transition from the latest editions of IEC 60950-1 and
IEC 60065 to this document.
4.1.2 Use of components
W h e re th e c o m p o n e n t, or a c h a ra c te ris tic of a c o m p o n e n t, is a safeguard or a p a rt of a

safeguard， c o m p o n e n ts s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts of th is docum ent o r, w h e re
s p e c ifie d in a re q u ire m e n ts c la u s e , w ith th e s a fe ty a s p e c ts o f th e re le v a n t IE C com ponent
s ta n d a rd s .
NOTE 1 An IEC component standard is considered relevant only if the component in question clearly falls within
its scope.
NOTE 2 The applicable test for compliance with a component standard is, in general, conducted separately.
W h e re use of an IE C com ponent s ta n d a rd is p e rm itte d above, e v a lu a tio n and te s tin g of

c o m p o n e n ts s h a ll b e c o n d u c te d a s fo llo w s :
一 a com ponent s h a ll be checked fo r co rre ct a p p lic a tio n and use in a cco rd a n ce w ith its
ra tin g ;
- a c o m p o n e n t th a t h a s b e e n d e m o n s tr a te d to c o m p ly w ith a s ta n d a r d h a r m o n iz e d w ith th e
re le v a n t IE C com ponent s ta n d a rd s h a ll be s u b je c te d to th e a p p lic a b le te s ts of th is
d o c u m e n t, a s p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t, w ith th e e x c e p tio n o f th o s e te s ts th a t a re p a rt o f th e
re le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd ;
- a c o m p o n e n t th a t h a s n o t b e e n d e m o n s t r a t e d to c o m p ly w ith a r e le v a n t s ta n d a r d a s a b o v e
s h a ll b e s u b je c t e d to th e a p p lic a b le te s ts o f th is d o c u m e n t, a s p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t, a n d
to th e a p p lic a b le te s ts o f th e c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd , u n d e r th e c o n d itio n s o c c u rrin g in t h e
e q u ip m e n t; a n d
- w h e r e c o m p o n e n ts a r e u s e d in c i r c u i t s n o t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e i r s p e c i f i e d ra tin g s , th e
c o m p o n e n t s s h a ll b e te s te d u n d e r th e c o n d itio n s o c c u rrin g in t h e e q u i p m e n t . T h e n u m b e r
of s a m p le s re q u ire d fo r te s t is , in g e n e ra l, th e sam e as re q u ire d by an e q u iv a le n t
s ta n d a rd .
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the relevant data or tests.
4.1.3 Equipment design and construction
normal operating conditions a s

E q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e s o d e s ig n e d a n d c o n s tr u c te d th a t, u n d e r
s p e c i f i e d i n C l a u s e B.2, abnormal operating conditions a s s p e c i f i e d i n C l a u s e B.3, a n d
single fault conditions a s s p e c i f i e d i n C l a u s e B.4, safeguards a r e p r o v i d e d t o r e d u c e t h e
l i k e l i h o o d o f i n j u r y o r , in t h e c a s e o f f i r e , p r o p e r t y d a m a g e .
P a rts o f e q u ip m e n t th a t c o u ld cause in ju ry s h a ll not be accessible, and accessible p a rts

s h a ll n o t c a u s e a n in ju ry .
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the relevant tests.
4.1.4 Equipment installation
E xcept as g iv e n in 4 . 1 . 6 , e q u ip m e n t e v a lu a tio n a c c o rd in g to th is docum ent s h a ll ta k e in to

account m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s in s tru c tio n s w ith re g a rd to in s ta lla tio n , re lo c a tio n , s e rv ic in g and
o p e ra tio n , a s a p p lic a b le .

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Outdoor enclosures p r o v i d i n g a safeguard f u n c t i o n s h a l l c o m p l y w ith A n n e x Y. Outdoor

equipment a n d outdoor enclosures s h a l l b e s u i t a b l e f o r u s e a t a n y t e m p e r a t u r e in t h e r a n g e
s p e c ifie d by th e m a n u fa c tu re r. If n o t s p e c i f i e d b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r , th e r a n g e s h a ll b e ta k e n
as:
- m i n i m u m a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re : - 3 3 °C ;
- m a x i m u m a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re : + 4 0 °C .
Compliance is checked by inspection and by evaluation of the data provided by the

manufacturer.
NOTE 1 The temperature values are based on IEC 60721-3-4, Class 4K2. These temperatures do not take into
account severe environments (for example, extremely cold or extremely warm), nor do they include provision for
heating by radiation from the sun (solar loading).
NOTE 2 Attention is drawn to IEC 61587-1 for additional information on performance levels C1, C2 and C3,
4.1.5 Constructions and components not specifically covered
W h e re th e e q u ip m e n t in v o lv e s te c h n o lo g ie s , c o m p o n e n ts and m a te ria ls or m e th o d s of
c o n s tru c tio n not s p e c ific a lly co ve re d in th is d o c u m e n t, th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll p ro v id e
safeguards n o t le s s th a n th a t g e n e r a lly a ffo r d e d b y th is d o c u m e n t a n d th e p rin c ip le s o f s a fe ty
c o n ta in e d h e re in .
T h e n e e d fo r a d d itio n a l d e ta ile d r e q u ir e m e n t s to c o p e w ith a n e w s itu a tio n s h o u ld be b ro u g h t

p r o m p t ly to th e a tte n tio n o f th e a p p r o p r ia te c o m m it te e .
4.1.6 Orientation during transport and use
W h e re it is c l e a r t h a t t h e o r i e n t a t i o n o f u s e o f e q u i p m e n t is l i k e l y t o h a v e a s i g n i f i c a n t e f f e c t
o n t h e a p p lic a t io n o f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o r th e r e s u lt s o f t e s t s , a ll o r ie n t a t io n s o f u s e s p e c if ie d
in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n o r u s e r i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l b e t a k e n in t o a c c o u n t . H o w e v e r , if e q u i p m e n t h a s
m e a n s fo r fix in g in p l a c e by an ordinary person, such a s th e p ro v is io n o f scre w h o le s fo r
d ire c t a tta c h m e n t to a m o u n tin g s u rfa c e o r th ro u g h th e use of b ra c k e ts o r th e lik e , e ith e r
p ro v id e d w ith th e e q u ip m e n t or re a d ily a v a ila b le in th e m a rk e t, a ll lik e ly p o s itio n s of
o r ie n ta t io n o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e ta k e n in to a c c o u n t, in c lu d in g th e p o s s ib ility o f m o u n tin g
to a n o n - v e r tic a l s u r fa c e r e g a r d le s s o f th e in s ta lla tio n o r u s e r in s tr u c tio n s th a t a re p r o v id e d b y
th e m a n u fa c tu re r.
In a d d itio n , fo r transportable equipment, a ll o rie n ta tio n s o f tra n s p o rt s h a ll be ta k e n in to

a c c o u n t.
4.1.7 Choice of criteria
W h e r e th is d o c u m e n t in d ic a te s a c h o ic e b e tw e e n d iffe r e n t c rite ria fo r c o m p lia n c e , o r b e tw e e n

d i f f e r e n t m e t h o d s o r c o n d i t i o n s o f t e s t , t h e c h o i c e is s p e c i f i e d b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r .
4.1.8 Liquids and liquid filled components (LFC)
U n le s s s p e c ifie d as an insulating liquid, liq u id s s h a ll be tre a te d as e le c tric a lly c o n d u c tiv e

m a te ria ls .
C o n s tru c tio n s and te s t re q u ire m e n ts fo r p re s s u riz e d LFCs used in s id e th e e q u ip m e n t w h e re

a n i n j u r y c a n o c c u r w i t h i n t h e m e a n i n g o f t h i s d o c u m e n t d u e t o l e a k s o f t h e l i q u i d in t h e L F C
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e G .1 5 . H o w e v e r , C la u s e G .1 5 d o e s n o t a p p ly to th e fo llo w in g :
- a n L F C t h a t i s s e a l e d b u t o p e n t o t h e a t m o s p h e r e in t h e e q u i p m e n t ; o r
- components c o n ta in in g s m a ll a m o u n ts of liq u id s not lik e ly to cause any in ju ry (fo r

e x a m p le , liq u id c r y s ta l d is p la y s , e le c t r o ly tic c a p a c it o r s , liq u id c o o lin g h e a t p ip e s , e tc .); o r
- wet cell batteries (fo r w e t cell batteries, s e e A n n e x M ); o r

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- a n L F C a n d its a s s o c ia t e d p a r t s t h a t c o m p ly w it h P .3 .3 ; o r
- e q u i p m e n t w ith m o r e th a n 1 I o f liq u id .
4.1.9 Electrical measuring instruments
E le c tr ic a l m e a s u r in g in s tr u m e n ts s h a ll h a v e s u ffic ie n t b a n d w id th to p r o v id e a c c u r a te r e a d in g s ,
ta k in g in to account a ll c o m p o n e n ts (D C , mains fre q u e n c y , h ig h fre q u e n c y and h a rm o n ic
c o n te n t) o f th e p a r a m e te r b e in g m e a s u re d .
If a n R M S v a l u e is m e a s u r e d , c a r e s h a ll b e t a k e n t h a t t h e m e a s u r i n g i n s t r u m e n t g iv e s a t r u e
R M S re a d in g o f n o n -s in u s o id a l w a v e fo r m s a s w e ll a s s in u s o id a l w a v e fo rm s .
M e a s u r e m e n ts s h a ll b e m a d e w ith a m e te r w h o s e in p u t im p e d a n c e h a s a n e g lig ib le in flu e n c e

on th e m e a s u re m e n t.
4.1.10 Temperature measurements
U n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d , w h e re th e r e s u l t o f a t e s t is l i k e l y t o depend upon th e a m b ie n t

t e m p e r a t u r e ，t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s s p e c i f i e d a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e r a n g e o f t h e e q u i p m e n t ( T m a )
s h a ll be ta k e n in to a c c o u n t. W hen p e rfo rm in g th e te s t at a s p e c ific a m b ie n t
t e m p e r a t u r e ( T a m b ) ，e x t r a p o l a t i o n (a b o v e and b e lo w ) th e re s u lts o f th e te s t m a y be used to
c o n s i d e r t h e i m p a c t o f r ma o n t h e r e s u l t . C o m p o n e n t s a n d s u b a s s e m b l i e s m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d
s e p a ra te ly fro m th e e q u ip m e n t if th e te s t re s u lts and e x tra p o la tio n is re p re s e n ta tiv e o f th e
w h o le e q u ip m e n t b e in g so te s te d . R e le v a n t te s t d a ta a n d m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s s p e c if ic a t io n s m ay
be e x a m in e d in o r d e r to d e te rm in e th e e ffe c t o f te m p e ra tu re v a ria b ility on a com ponent or
s u b a s s e m b ly (s e e B .1 .5 ).
4.1.11 Steady state conditions
S t e a d y s t a t e c o n d i t i o n s a r e c o n d i t i o n s w h e n t e m p e r a t u r e s t a b i l i t y is c o n s i d e r e d t o e x i s t ( s e e
B .1 .5 ).
4.1.12 Hierarchy of safeguards
Safeguards t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d f o r ordinary persons a r e a c c e p t a b l e , b u t m a y n o t b e r e q u i r e d ,

f o r instructed persons a n d skilled persons. L i k e w i s e , safeguards t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d f o r
instructed persons a r e a c c e p t a b l e , b u t m a y n o t b e r e q u i r e d , f o r skilled persons.
A reinforced safeguard m a y b e u s e d i n p l a c e o f a basic safeguard or a supplementary

safeguard o r a double safeguard. A double safeguard m a y b e used in p la c e of a
Safeguards， o t h e r th a n equipment safeguards, a r e s p e c i f i e d in s p e c i f i c c l a u s e s .
4.1.13 Examples mentioned in this document
W h e r e e x a m p l e s a r e g i v e n in t h i s d o c u m e n t ，o t h e r e x a m p l e s ， s i t u a t i o n s ，a n d s o l u t i o n s a r e n o t
e x c lu d e d .
4.1.14 Tests on parts or samples separate from the end-product
If a t e s t is c o n d u c t e d on a p a rt o r s a m p le s e p a ra te fro m th e e n d - p r o d u c t, th e te s t s h a ll be
c o n d u c t e d a s i f t h e p a r t o r s a m p l e w a s in t h e e n d - p r o d u c t .
4.1.15 Markings and instructions
E q u i p m e n t t h a t is r e q u i r e d b y t h i s d o c u m e n t t o :
- b e a r m a rk in g s ; o r

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
- b e p r o v id e d w ith in s tr u c tio n s ; o r
- b e p r o v id e d w ith instructional safeguards
s h a ll m e e t t h e r e le v a n t r e q u i r e m e n t s o f A n n e x F.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
NOTE In Finland, Norway and Sweden, class I pluggable equipment type A intended for connection to other
equipment or a network shall, if safety relies on connection to reliable earthing or if surge suppressors are
connected between the network terminals and accessible parts, have a marking stating that the equipment must
be connected to an earthed mains socket-outlet.
4.2 Energy source classifications
4.2.1 Class 1 energy source
U n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d , a c la s s 1 s o u rc e is a n e n e r g y so u rce w ith le v e ls n o t e x c e e d in g

c la s s 1 lim its u n d e r:
- normal operating conditions; and
- abnormal operating conditions th a t d o n o t le a d to a single fault condition; and
- single fault conditions t h a t d o n o t r e s u l t in c l a s s 2 l im i t s b e in g e x c e e d e d .
A protective conductor is a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e .
U n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d , a c la s s 2 so u rce is an e n e rg y so u rce w ith le v e ls e x c e e d in g

c la s s 1 lim its and not e x c e e d in g c la s s 2 lim its under normal operating conditions,
abnormal operating conditions, or single fault conditions.
A c la s s 3 so u rce is an e n e rg y so u rce w ith le v e ls e x c e e d in g c la s s 2 lim its under normal

operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions, or single fault conditions, or any
e n e r g y s o u r c e d e c l a r e d t o b e a c l a s s 3 s o u r c e , a s g i v e n in 4 . 2 . 4 .
A n e u t r a l c o n d u c t o r is a c l a s s 3 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e .
4.2.4 Energy source classification by declaration
T h e m a n u fa c tu r e r m a y d e c la re :
- a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e to b e e ith e r a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e o r a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e ;
- a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e to b e a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e .
4.3 Protection against energy sources
4.3.1 General
T h e t e r m s “ p e r s o n s ” ，“ b o d y ” ，a n d “ b o d y p a r t s ” a r e r e p r e s e n t e d b y t h e p r o b e s o f A n n e x V .
4.3.2 Safeguards for protection of an ordinary person
4.3.2.1 Safeguards between a class 1 energy source and an ordinary person
No safeguards a re re q u ire d b e tw e e n a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e a n d a n ordinary person ( s e e

F ig u re 9). C o n s e q u e n tly , a c la s s 1 e n e r g y s o u rc e m a y b e accessible t o a n ordinary person.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Ordinary
person
IEC
Figure 9 - Model for protection of an ordinary

person against a class 1 energy source
A t le a s t o n e basic safeguard is r e q u i r e d b e tw e e n a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e a n d an ordinary

person (s e e F ig u re 10 ).
Class 2
energy
source o Basic
safeguard
Ordinary
person

4.3.2.3 Safeguards between a class 2 energy source and an ordinary person during
ordinary person servicing conditions
If ordinary person s e r v i c i n g c o n d i t i o n s r e q u i r e a basic safeguard t o b e r e m o v e d o r

d e f e a t e d , a n instructional safeguard a s d e s c r i b e d i n C l a u s e F . 5 s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d a n d
l o c a t e d in s u c h a w a y t h a t a n ordinary person w i l l s e e t h e i n s t r u c t i o n p r i o r t o r e m o v i n g o r
d e f e a t i n g t h e basic safeguard ( s e e F i g u r e 1 1 ) .
The instructional safeguard (s e e C la u s e F.5) s h a ll in c lu d e a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g :
- i dent i f y p a rts a n d lo c a tio n s o f th e c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e ;
- s p e c i f y a c tio n s th a t w ill p r o te c t p e r s o n s fr o m th a t e n e r g y s o u r c e ; a n d
- s p e c i f y a c tio n s to r e in s ta te o r r e s to r e th e basic safeguard.
If ordinary person s e rv ic in g c o n d itio n s re q u ire a basic safeguard to be re m o ve d or

d e fe a te d , and w h e re th e e q u ip m e n t is in te n d e d fo r use in th e hom e, an instructional
safeguard (se e F.5), d i r e c t e d t o w a r d s
C la u s e a d u lts , s h a ll w a rn a g a in s t re m o v in g or
d e fe a tin g th e basic safeguard b y c h i l d r e n .
Removed or
Class 2
energy
source
[
defeated
basic
safeguard
O Instructional
safeguard 〇
Ordinary
person
V
IEC
Figure 11 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against a class 2

energy source during ordinary person servicing conditions
U n le s s o th e r w is e s p e c ifie d ,
- an equipment basic safeguard and an equipment supplementary safeguard (to g e th e r

f o r m i n g a double safeguard); o r

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
- a reinforced safeguard
is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n a c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a n ordinary person (s e e F ig u re 12).
o
Supplementary
Ordinary
safeguard
person
IEC

4.3.3 Safeguards for protection of an instructed person
4.3.3.1 Safeguards between a class 1 energy source and an instructed person
No safeguards a re re q u ire d b e tw e e n a c la s s 1 e n e rg y so u rce and an instructed person (se e

F i g u r e 13).
1
C la s s
energy
Instructed
source person
__________________
IEC
Figure 13 - Model for protection of an instructed person

against a class 1 energy source
An instructed person u s e s a precautionary safeguard ( s e e F i g u r e 14). N o a d d i t i o n a l

safeguards a r e r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n a c l a s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a n instructed person.
C o n s e q u e n t l y , a c l a s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e m a y b e accessible t o a n instructed person.
f ) 厂
C lass 2
Precautionary Instructed
e n e rg y
〇 safeguard person
s o u rc e
v J ___________ /
v. <___________/y
IEC

U n le s s o th e r w is e s p e c ifie d ,
- an equipment basic safeguard and an equipment supplementary safeguard (to g e th e r

f o r m i n g a double safeguard); o r
- a reinforced safeguard
is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n a c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a n instructed person (s e e F ig u re 15).

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018

4.3.4 Safeguards for protection of a skilled person
4.3.4.1 Safeguards between a class 1 energy source and a skilled person
No safeguard is re q u ire d b e tw e e n a c la s s 1 e n e rg y so u rce and a skilled person.

C o n s e q u e n tly , a c la s s 1 e n e rg y so u rce m ay be accessible to a skilled person
(s e e F ig u re 16).
Class 1
Skilled
energy
source person
IEC
Figure 16 - Model for protection of a skilled person against a class 1 energy source
A skilled person uses a skill safeguard (se e F ig u re 17 ). No a d d itio n a l safeguards a re

re q u ire d b e tw e e n a c la s s 2 e n e rg y so u rce skilled person.
and a C o n s e q u e n tly , a c la s s 2
e n e rg y so u rce m a y be accessible to a skilled person.
厂 f > r a
O
Class 2
Skill Skilled
energy
〇
safeguard person
source
V ^ J v____________ /
IEC
A skilled person u s e s a skill safeguard ( s e e F i g u r e 18). U n l e s s o t h e r w i s e s p e c i f i e d ( f o r

e x a m p l e , s e e 8.5.4), n o a d d i t i o n a l safeguards a r e r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n a c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e
a n d a skilled person. C o n s e q u e n t l y , a c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e m a y b e accessible t o a skilled
person.
f f N
Class 3
energy
source o Skill
safeguard O Skilled
person
L J ^____________ y
IEC
D u rin g e q u ip m e n t s e rv ic in g c o n d itio n s o n a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e , a safeguard in te n d e d to

r e d u c e t h e l i k e l i h o o d o f i n j u r y d u e t o a n i n v o l u n t a r y r e a c t i o n is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n :

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
- another c la s s 3 e n e rg y so u rce , not u n d e rg o in g s e rv ic e and in th e sam e v ic in ity as th e

c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e b e in g s e r v ic e d ; a n d
- a skilled person (s e e 0 .5 .7 a n d F ig u re 19).
f
Another
Class 3
energy
source O Skill
safeguard
Skilled
person Safeguard
O class 3
energy
source
、 j V J C J l j
IEC
Figure 19 - Model for protection of a skilled person against class 3 energy

sources during equipment servicing conditions
4.3.5 Safeguards in a restricted access area
C e rta in e q u i p m e n t is i n t e n d e d fo r in s ta lla tio n e x c lu s iv e ly in restricted access areas. S u c h

e q u ip m e n t s h a ll h a v e safeguards a s re q u ire d in 4 . 3 . 3 f o r instructed persons a n d 4 . 3 . 4 f o r
skilled persons.
4.4 Safeguards
4.4.1 Equivalent materials or components
W h e re th is d o c u m e n t s p e c ifie s a p a rtic u la r safeguard p a r a m e t e r , s u c h a s t h e r m a l c l a s s o f

in s u la tio n o r material flammability class, a safeguard w i t h a b e t t e r p a r a m e t e r m a y b e u s e d .
NOTE For a hierarchy of the m aterial fla m m a b ility classes see Table S.1, Table S.2 and Table S.3.
4.4.2 Composition of a safeguard
A safeguard m a y b e c o m p ris e d o f o n e o r m o re e le m e n ts .
4.4.3 Safeguard robustness
4.4.3.1 General
W h e re a s o lid safeguard ( f o r e x a m p l e , a n enclosure, b a r r i e r , solid insulation, e a r t h e d

m e ta l, g la s s , e t c . ) i s accessible t o a n ordinary person o r t o a n instructed person, t h e
safeguard s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e l e v a n t r o b u s t n e s s t e s t s a s s p e c i f i e d in 4 . 4 . 3 . 2 t o 4 . 4 . 3 . 1 0 .
For a safeguard t h a t is accessible a fte r o p e n in g an e x te rn a l enclosure, see 4.4.3 . 5.
R e q u ir e m e n ts fo r:
- a d h e s i o n o f m e ta lliz e d c o a tin g s ; a n d
- a d h e s i v e s s e c u rin g p a rts s e rv in g a s safeguards; and
- parts th a t m a y d e fe a t a safeguard if a n a d h e s iv e fa ils
a r e s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e P . 4 .
4.4.3.2 Steady force tests
An enclosure o r b a r r i e r t h a t is accessible a n d t h a t is u s e d a s a safeguard o f:
- transportable equipment; and
- hand-held equipment; and
- direct plug-in equipment

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e s te a d y fo r c e te s t o f C la u s e T .4 .
A safeguard t h a t is accessible a n d th a t o n ly a c ts a s a fire enclosure o r fire b a r r ie r s h a ll b e

s u b je c te d to th e s te a d y fo rc e te s t o f C la u s e T .3 .
A ll o th e r enclosures o r b a rrie rs th a t a re accessible and th a t a re u s e d as a safeguard s h a ll

be s u b je c te d to th e s te a d y fo rc e te s t o f C la u s e T .5 . T h e re a re n o re q u ire m e n ts fo r th e b o tto m
of e q u ip m e n t h a v in g a m ass of m o re th a n 18 kg u n le s s th e user in s tru c tio n s p e rm it an
o r i e n t a t i o n in w h i c h t h e b o t t o m o f t h e enclosure b e c o m e s th e to p o r a s id e o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
T h i s s u b c l a u s e d o e s n o t a p p l y t o g l a s s . R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r g l a s s a r e g i v e n in 4 . 4 . 3 . 6 .
4.4.3.3 Drop tests
T h e fo llo w in g e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e d ro p te s t o f C la u s e T .7 :
- hand-held equipment;
- direct plug-in equipment;
- transportable equipment;
- movable equipment re q u irin g liftin g or h a n d lin g by an ordinary person as p a rt o f its
in te n d e d u s e , in c lu d in g ro u tin e re lo c a tio n ;
NOTE An example of such equipment is a paper shredder that rests on a waste container that requires
removal of the paper shredder to empty the container.
- d e s k - t o p e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g a m a s s o f 7 k g o r l e s s t h a t is i n t e n d e d f o r u s e w i t h a n y o n e o f
th e fo llo w in g :
• a c o rd -c o n n e c te d te le p h o n e h a n d s e t; o r
• a n o th e r c o r d - c o n n e c te d h a n d - h e ld a c c e s s o r y w ith a n a c o u s tic fu n c tio n ; o r
• a h e a d s e t.
4.4.3.4 Impact tests
A ll e q u ip m e n t, o th e r th a n th a t s p e c ifie d in 4 . 4 . 3 . 3 , s h a ll be s u b je c te d to th e im p a c t te s t o f
C la u s e T . 6.
T h e i m p a c t t e s t o f C l a u s e T . 6 is n o t a p p l i e d t o t h e f o l l o w i n g :
- t he b o tto m of an enclosure, e x c e p t i f t h e u s e r in s tru c tio n s p e rm it a n o rie n ta tio n in w h i c h

th e b o tto m o f th e enclosure b e c o m e s t h e to p o r a s id e o f th e e q u ip m e n t;
- glass;
NOTE Impact tests for glass are in 4.4.3.6.
- t he s u rfa c e o f th e enclosure of stationary equipment, in c lu d in g e q u ip m e n t fo r b u ild in g -

i n , t h a t is
• not accessible; or
• p ro te c te d a fte r in s ta lla tio n .
4.4.3.5 Internal accessible safeguard tests
An in te rn a l safeguard t h a t i s accessible t o a n ordinary person a f t e r o p e n i n g

s o lid an
e x t e r n a l enclosure a n d w h o s e f a i l u r e w o u l d a l l o w c l a s s 2 o r c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s t o be
accessible s h a l l b e s u b j e c t e d t o t h e s t e a d y f o r c e t e s t o f C l a u s e T . 3 .
4.4.3.6 Glass impact tests
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s b e lo w a r e a p p l i c a b le to a ll p a r t s m a d e o f g la s s , w it h th e e x c e p t i o n o f:

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
- p l a t e n g la s s u s e d o n c o p ie r s , s c a n n e r s a n d t h e lik e , w h e r e th e g la s s h a s b e e n s u b je c t e d
t o t h e s t e a d y f o r c e t e s t o f C l a u s e T . 3 a n d is p r o v i d e d w i t h a c o v e r o r d e v i c e t o p r o t e c t th e
p la te n g la s s ; a n d
- C R T s : R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r C R T s a r e g i v e n in A n n e x U ; a n d
- g l a s s t h a t is l a m i n a t e d o r h a s a c o n s t r u c t i o n s u c h t h a t g l a s s p a r t i c l e s d o n o t s e p a r a t e f r o m
e a c h o t h e r i f t h e g l a s s is b r o k e n .
NOTE Laminated glass includes constructions such as plastic film affixed to a single side of a glass.
G l a s s t h a t is accessible to a n ordinary person o r to a n instructed person:
- h a v i n g a s u r f a c e a r e a e x c e e d i n g 0 ,1 m 2 ; o r
- h a v i n g a m a jo r d im e n s io n e x c e e d in g 4 5 0 m m ; o r
- t hat p r e v e n ts a c c e s s to c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s o th e r th a n P S 3
s h a ll b e s u b je c t e d to th e g la s s im p a c t te s t o f C la u s e T .9 .
4.4.3.7 Glass fixation test
L a m in a te d g la s s u s e d a s a safeguard th a t p re v e n ts a c c e s s to c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s o th e r
th a n P S 3 s h a ll b e s u b je c t e d to th e fo llo w in g fix a tio n te s ts :
- a g l a s s i m p a c t t e s t a s g i v e n in C l a u s e T . 9 w i t h a n i m p a c t o f 1 J a p p l i e d t h r e e t i m e s ; a n d
- a p u s h /p u ll te s t w ith 10 N a p p lie d in th e c e n tre of th e g la s s in th e le a s t fa v o u ra b le

d ire c tio n .
NOTE To perform the test, any suitable method can be used, such as using suction handles or gluing a
support to the glass.
4.4.3.8 Thermoplastic material tests
If a safeguard is o f m o u l d e d o r fo rm e d th e rm o p la s tic m a te ria l, th e safeguard s h a ll be so

c o n s tr u c te d t h a t a n y s h r in k a g e o r d is to r tio n o f th e m a te r ia l d u e to r e le a s e o f in te r n a l s tr e s s e s
s h a ll n o t d e f e a t its safeguard fu n c tio n . T h e th e rm o p la s tic m a te r ia l s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e
s tre s s re lie f te s t o f C la u s e T .8 .
4.4.3.9 Air comprising a safeguard
W h e re a safeguard is c o m p r i s e d o f a ir (fo r e x a m p le , a clearance), a b a rrie r o r enclosure

s h a ll p re ve n t d is p la c e m e n t o f th e a ir by a body p a rt or a c o n d u c tiv e p a rt. The b a rrie r or
enclosure s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e m e c h a n i c a l s t r e n g t h t e s t s p e c i f i e d in A n n e x T , a s a p p l i c a b l e .
4.4.3.10 Compliance criteria
During and after the tests:
- except for PS3, class 3 energy sources shall not become a c c e s s ib le to an o rd in a ry

p e rs o n or to an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; and
- glass shall:
• not break or crack; or
• not expel pieces of glass greater than 30 g in mass or greater than 50 mm in any
dimension; or
• pass the fragmentation test of Clause T.10 on a separate test sample; and
- all other s a fe g u a rd s shall remain effective.
4.4.4 Displacement of a safeguard by an insulating liquid
If a n insulating liquid d is p la c e s a ir c o m p ris in g a safeguard:

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- t he re q u ire m e n ts o f 5 .4 .1 2 a n d 6 .4 .9 a p p ly to th e insulating liquid; and
- t he re q u ire m e n ts o f 5 .4 .2 and 5 .4 .3 a p p ly to th e e q u ip m e n t b o th w ith and w ith o u t th e

insulating liquid p re s e n t.
P a rtia l or to ta l lo s s o f th e insulating liquid s h a ll be c o n s id e re d an abnormal operating

condition o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
If t h e p o w e r s u p p lie d to p a r ts im m e r s e d in insulating liquid is d i s c o n n e c t e d in t h e e v e n t o f

p a rtia l o r to ta l lo s s o f th e insulating liquid, th e re q u ire m e n ts o f 6 .4 .2 to 6 .4 .8 d o n o t a p p ly fo r
th e im m e rs e d p a rts . An e x a m p le of such a d is c o n n e c t s y s te m is a flo a t s w itc h s y s te m
c o m p ly in g w ith A n n e x K.
NOTE The use of insulating liquids to replace a basic insulation, a supplementary insulation or a reinforced
insulation is not covered by the requirements of this document.
4.4.5 Safety interlocks
U n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d , if a safety interlock is used as a safeguard fo r p ro te c tio n

a g a in s t:
- a c la s s 2 o r a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r a n ordinary person; or
- a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r a n instructed person,
th e safety interlock s h a ll c o m p ly w ith A n n e x K.
4.5 Explosion
4.5.1 General
Explosion c a n be c a u s e d by:
- c h e m i c a l re a c tio n ;
- m e c h a n i c a l d e fo rm a tio n o f a s e a le d c o n ta in e r;
- r api d c o m b u s tio n o r d e c o m p o s itio n , p ro d u c in g a la rg e v o lu m e o f h o t g a s ;
- hi gh p re s s u re ; or
- hi gh te m p e ra tu re .
NOTE 1 Depending on the energy rate, explosion can be categorized as a deflagration, a detonation, or pressure
rupture.
NOTE 2 An ultracapacitor (for example, a double layer capacitor) is a high energy source and can explode
following overcharging and high temperature.
F o r re q u ire m e n ts re g a rd in g explosion of batteries, see A nnex M.
4.5.2 Requirements
D u rin g normal operating conditions and abnormal operating conditions, an explosion

s h a ll n o t o c c u r.
If a n explosion o ccu rs d u rin g single fault conditions, it s h a ll not cause in ju ry and th e

e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t p a rts o f th is d o c u m e n t.
Compliance is checked by inspection and tests as specified in Clause B.2, Clause B.3 and
Clause BA.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
4.6 Fixing of conductors
4.6.1 Requirements
C o n d u c to rs s h a ll be such th a t d is p la c e m e n t c a n n o t d e fe a t a safeguard, such as re d u c in g

clearances or creepage distances b e l o w t h e v a l u e s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 2 a n d 5 . 4 . 3 .
T h e f ix in g o f t h e c o n d u c t o r s s h a ll b e s u c h t h a t , if a c o n d u c t o r b e c o m e s lo o s e o r d e t a c h e d , th e
c o n d u c to r c a n n o t d e fe a t a safeguard, s u c h a s re d u c in g clearances or creepage distances
b e l o w t h e v a l u e s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 2 a n d 5 . 4 . 3 .
F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s , it i s a s s u m e d t h a t :
- t w o in d e p e n d e n t f ix in g s w ill n o t b e c o m e lo o s e o r d e t a c h e d a t th e s a m e tim e ; a n d
- p a r t s fix e d b y m e a n s o f s c r e w s o r n u ts p ro v id e d w ith s e lf- lo c k in g w a s h e r s o r o th e r m e a n s

o f lo c k in g a re n o t lia b le to b e c o m e lo o s e o r d e ta c h e d .
NOTE Spring washers and the like can provide satisfactory locking.
4.6.2 Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection， by measurement or， in case o f doubt， by the test of

Clause T.2 applied in the most unfavourable direction.
EXAMPLE Constructions regarded as meeting the requirements include:

- close-fitting tubing (for example, a heat shrink or rubber sleeve), applied over the wire and its termination;
- conductors connected by soldering and held in place near to the termination, independently of the soldered
connection;
- conductors connected by soldering and securely hooked in before soldering, provided that the hole through
which the conductor is passed is not unduly large;
一 conductors connected to screw terminals, with an additional fixing near to the terminal that clamps, in the case
of stranded conductors, the insulation and not only the conductors;
- conductors connected to screw terminals and provided with terminators that are unlikely to become free (for
example, ring lugs crimped onto the conductors),however, the pivoting of such terminators is considered; or
- short rigid conductors that remain in position when the terminal screw is loosened.
4.7 Equipment for direct insertion into mains socket-outlets
4.7.1 General
E q u ip m e n t in c o r p o r a tin g in te g r a l p in s fo r in s e r tio n in to mains s o c k e t- o u tle ts s h a ll n o t im p o s e

u n d u e to r q u e o n th e s o c k e t- o u tle t. T h e m e a n s fo r re ta in in g th e p in s s h a ll w ith s ta n d th e fo r c e s
t o w h i c h t h e p i n s a r e l i k e l y t o b e s u b j e c t e d in n o r m a l u s e .
4.7.2 Requirements
The mains p lu g p a rt s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t s ta n d a r d fo r th e mains p lu g .
The e q u i p m e n t i s i n s e r t e d , a s in n o r m a l u s e , i n t o a f i x e d s o c k e t-o u tle t o f a c o n fig u ra tio n as

i n t e n d e d b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , w h i c h is p i v o t e d a b o u t a h o r i z o n t a l a x i s i n t e r s e c t i n g t h e c e n t r e
lin e s o f th e c o n ta c ts a t a d is ta n c e o f 8 m m b e h in d th e e n g a g e m e n t fa c e o f th e s o c k e t o u tle t
p a ra lle l to th e e n g a g e m e n t fa c e .
Compliance is checked by inspection and, the additional torque that has to be applied to the
socket-outlet to maintain the engagement face in the vertical plane shall not exceed 0,25 Nm.
The torque to keep the socket-outlet itself in the vertical plane is not included in this value.
NOTE 1 In Australia and New Zealand, compliance is checked in accordance with AS/NZS 3112.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
NOTE 2 In the United Kingdom, the torque test is performed using a socket-outlet complying with BS 1363， and
the plug part shall be assessed to the relevant clauses of BS 1363.
4.8 Equipment containing coin / button cell batteries
4.8.1 General
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s a p p ly to e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g r e m o te c o n tr o ls , th a t:
- a r e lik e ly to b e accessible to c h ild r e n ; a n d
- include coin / button cell batteries w ith a d ia m e t e r o f 3 2 m m o r le s s .
T h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
- professional equipment;
- e q u i p m e n t f o r u s e in l o c a t i o n s w h e r e i t i s u n l i k e l y t h a t c h i l d r e n w i l l b e p r e s e n t ; o r
- e q u i p m e n t c o n ta in in g coin / button cell batteries t h a t a r e s o l d e r e d in p l a c e .
4.8.2 Instructional safeguard
E q u ip m e n t c o n ta in in g one o r m o re coin / button cell batteries s h a ll h a v e a n instructional

safeguard in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 .
The instructional safeguard i s n o t re q u ire d w h e re th e s e batteries a re n o t in te n d e d to be

r e p l a c e d o r a r e o n l y accessible a f t e r d a m a g in g th e e q u ip m e n t.
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e instructional safeguard s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
- e l e m e n t 1a: n o t a v a ila b le
- e l e m e n t 2: “ D o n o t in g e s t b a tte ry , C h e m ic a l B u m H a z a rd ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd in g
- e l e m e n t 3: th e fo llo w in g o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
[T h e r e m o t e c o n t r o l s u p p lie d w it h ] T h is p r o d u c t c o n t a in s a c o in / b u t t o n c e ll
b a tte ry . If t h e c o in / b u tto n c e ll b a tte ry is s w a l l o w e d , it c a n cause se ve re
i n t e r n a l b u r n s in j u s t 2 h o u r s a n d c a n l e a d t o d e a t h .
- e l e m e n t 4: th e fo llo w in g o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
K e e p n e w a n d u s e d b a tte rie s a w a y fro m c h ild re n .
If t h e b a tte ry c o m p a rtm e n t d o e s n o t c lo s e s e c u re ly , s to p u s in g th e p ro d u ct
a n d k e e p it a w a y f r o m c h i l d r e n .
If y o u t h i n k b a t t e r i e s m ig h t h a v e b e e n s w a llo w e d o r p la c e d in s id e a n y p a rt
o f th e b o d y , s e e k im m e d ia te m e d ic a l a tte n tio n .
4.8.3 Construction
E q u ip m e n t h a v in g a battery c o m p a rtm e n t door / cover s h a ll be d e s ig n e d to re d u c e th e

p o s s ib ility o f c h ild re n re m o v in g th e battery b y o n e o f th e fo llo w in g m e th o d s :
- a tool, such as a s c r e w d r iv e r o r c o in , is r e q u i r e d to open th e battery c o m p a rtm e n t, in

w h ic h c a s e a m in im u m to rq u e o f 0 ,5 N m and a m in im u m a n g le o f 9 0 d e g r e e s o f ro ta tio n
s h a ll b e r e q u ir e d to o p e n th e c o m p a r t m e n t ; or
- t he battery c o m p a rtm e n t door / cover re q u ire s th e a p p lic a tio n of a m in im u m of tw o

in d e p e n d e n t a n d s im u lta n e o u s m o v e m e n ts to o p e n b y h a n d .
4.8.4 Tests
4.8.4.1 Test sequence
One sample shall be subjected to the applicable tests of 4.8.4.2 to 4.8.4.6. If applicable, the
test in 4.8.4.2 shall be conducted first.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
4.8.4.2 Stress relief test
If the b a tte ry compartment utilizes moulded or formed thermoplastic materials, the sample
consisting of the complete equipment， or of the complete e n c lo s u re together with any
supporting framework, is tested according to the stress relief test of Clause T.8.
During the test, the b a tte ry may be removed.
4.8.4.3 Battery replacement test
For equipment with a b a tte ry compartment door / cover, the b a tte ry compartment shall be
opened and closed and the b a tte ry removed and replaced ten times to simulate normal
replacement according to the manufacturer's instructions.
If the b a tte ry compartment door / cover is secured by one or more screws, the screws are
loosened and then tightened applying a continuous linear torque according to Table 37, using
a suitable screwdriver， spanner or key. The screws are to be completely removed and
reinserted each time.
4.8.4.4 Drop test
Portable equipment having a mass of 7 kg or less are subjected to three drops from a height
of 1 m onto a horizontal surface in positions likely to produce the maximum force on the
b a tte ry compartment in accordance with Clause T.7.
If the equipment is a remote control, it shall be subjected to ten drops.
4.8.4.5 Impact test
The b a tte ry compartment door / cover shall be subjected to three impacts in a direction
perpendicular to the b a tte ry compartment door / cover according to the test method of
Clause T.6 with a force of:
- 0 , 5 J (102 mm 土 10 mm height) for glasses for watching， for example， 3 dimensional

television; or
- 2 J (408 mm ± 1 0 mm height) for all other doors / covers.
4.8.4.6 Crush test
Hand held remote control devices are to be supported by a fixed rigid supporting surface in a
position likely to produce the most adverse results as long as the position can be self-
supported. A crushing force of 330 N ± 5 N is applied to the exposed top and back surfaces of
remote control devices placed in a stable condition by a flat surface measuring approximately
100 mm by 250 mm for a period o f 10 s.
Compliance is checked by applying a force of 30 N ± 1 N for 10 s to the b a tte ry compartment

door / cover by the straight unjointed version of the test probe of Figure V.1 at the most
unfavourable place and in the most unfavourable direction. The force shall be applied in one
direction at a time.
The b a tte ry compartment door / cover shall remain functional, and:
- the b a tte ry shall not become a c c e s s ib le ; or

- it shall not be possible remove the b a tte ry from the product with the test hook of Figure 20
using a force of approximately 20 N.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
D im ensions in m illim etres
1 ± 0,1
IEC
Material: steel
Figure 20 - Test hook
4.9 Likelihood of fire or shock due to entry of conductive objects
W h e r e th e e n try o f a c o n d u c tiv e o b je c t fro m o u ts id e th e e q u ip m e n t o r fro m a n o th e r p a rt o f th e

e q u i p m e n t c a n r e s u l t in :
- b r i d g i n g w ith in P S 3 a n d E S 3 c irc u its ; o r
- b r i d g i n g a n E S 3 c ir c u it to accessible, u n e a rth e d c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ,
to p a n d s id e o p e n in g s a b o v e P S 3 a n d E S 3 c irc u its s h a ll:
- b e lo c a te d m o r e th a n 1 ,8 m a b o v e th e flo o r; o r
- c o m p l y w ith A n n e x P.
Compliance is checked by inspection or according to Annex P.
4.10 Components requirements
4.10.1 Disconnect device
E q u ip m e n t c o n n e c te d to th e mains s h a ll be p ro v id e d w ith a disconnect device in

a c c o r d a n c e w i t h A n n e x L.
4.10.2 Switches and relays
S w i t c h e s a n d r e l a y s l o c a t e d in a P S 3 c i r c u i t o r u s e d a s a safeguard s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e
G .1 o r C la u s e G .2 r e s p e c t iv e ly .
5 Electrically-caused injury
5.1 General
T o re d u ce th e lik e lih o o d o f p a in fu l e ffe c ts a n d in ju r y d u e to e le c tr ic c u r r e n t p a s s in g th r o u g h

th e h u m a n b o d y , e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith th e safeguards s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 5.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
5.2 Classification and limits of electrical energy sources
5.2.1 Electrical energy source classifications
5.2.1.1 ES1
ES1 is a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w it h c u r r e n t o r v o l t a g e le v e ls :
- not e x c e e d in g ES1 lim its u n d e r
• normal operating conditions, and
• abnormal operating conditions， a n d

• single fault conditions of a c o m p o n e n t， d e v ic e or in s u la tio n not s e rv in g as a
safeguard; a n d
- not ES2 l i m i t s u n d e r single fault conditions
e x c e e d in g of a basic safeguard or of a
supplementary safeguard.
NOTE For accessibility requirements， see 5.3.1 •
5.2.1.2 ES2
E S 2 is a c l a s s 2 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w h e r e :
- b o t h th e v o lta g e a n d th e c u r r e n t e x c e e d th e lim its fo r E S 1 ; a n d
- under
• abnormal operating conditions, and
• single fault conditions，
e ith e r th e v o lta g e o r th e c u r r e n t d o e s n o t e x c e e d th e lim it fo r E S 2 .
NOTE For accessibility requirements, see 5.3.1.
5.2.1.3 ES3
E S 3 is a c l a s s 3 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w h e r e b o t h t h e v o l t a g e a n d c u r r e n t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t
fo r E S 2 .
5.2.2 Electrical energy source ES1 and ES2 limits
5.2.2.1 General
T h e l i m i t s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 2 . 2 a r e w i t h r e s p e c t t o e a r t h o r w i t h r e s p e c t t o a n accessible p a rt.

IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018
f
6 e —
d)
ioa s
A
lo
0)
I S
s
lco
cn
ILIJ
L
1J l i j
E
•g
CO
E LU
ES3 Current
2 ES2 Current
O
ES1 Current
ES1 ES2 ES3
Potential, volts
ie c
Figure 21 - Illustration showing ES limits for voltage and current
For any v o lta g e up to th e v o lta g e lim it, th e re is no lim it fo r th e c u rre n t. L ik e w is e fo r a n y

c u r r e n t u p t o t h e c u r r e n t l i m i t , t h e r e is n o l i m i t f o r t h e v o l t a g e , s e e F i g u r e 2 1 .
5.2.2.2 Steady state voltage and current limits
A n e le c tric a l e n e rg y s o u rc e c l a s s is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m b o th th e v o lta g e a n d th e c u rre n t u n d e r

normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions, and single fault conditions
(s e e T a b le 4 ).
T h e v a lu e s a re th e m a x im u m th a t c a n b e d e liv e re d b y t h e s o u r c e . S t e a d y s t a t e is c o n s i d e r e d
e s ta b lis h e d w h e n th e v o lta g e o r c u r r e n t v a lu e s p e r s is t fo r 2 s o r lo n g e r, o th e r w is e th e lim its o f
5 .2 .2 .3 , 5 .2 .2 .4 o r 5 .2 .2 .5 a p p ly , a s a p p ro p ria te .
NOTE In Denmark, a warning (marking safeguard) for high touch current is required if the touch current
exceeds the limits of 3,5 mA AC or 10 mA DC.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Table 4 - Electrical energy source limits for steady state ES1 and ES2
ES1 limits ES2 limits

Energy CCQ
COO
source
Voltage Current a. c. d Voltage Current b* c- e
DC c 60 V 2 mA 120 V 25 mA
AC up to 30 V RMS 50 V RMS
1 kHz 42,4 V peak 70,7 V peak
AC
30 V RMS + 0 , 4 / 0,5 mA RMS 50 V RMS + 0 , 9 / 5 mA RMS
> 1 kHz up to
42,4 V peak. + 0,4 \ 2 / 0,707 mA peak 70,7 V peak + 0,9 <2 f 7,07 mA peak
100 kHz
> ES2
AC above 70 V RMS 140 V RMS
100 kHz 99 V peak 198 V peak
^D c(V ) ( LrACRMs(V ) ^ 1 /DC(mA) ^ /ACRMs(mA) ^ 1

Combined 60 ^RMS limit 2 0,5 '
See Figure 23 See Figure 22
AC and DC /DC(mA) /ACpeak(mA)
^rDc(V ) (； ACpeak(V )
T -2： 1
6〇 Gpeak limit 2 0,707
As an alternative to the requirements above, the values below can be used for purely sinusoidal waveforms
ES1 limits ES2 limits

Energy
Current c Current c ES3
source
RMS RMS
AC up to
0,5 mA 5 mA
1 kHz
AC
> 1 kHz up to 0,5 mA x / d 5 mA + 0f9 5 / e > ES2
100 kHz
AC above
50 m A d 100 m A e
100 kHz
/ i s in kHz.
Peak values shall be used for non-sinusoidal voltage and current. RMS values may be used only for sinusoidal voltage and
current.
See 5.7 for measurement of prospective touch voltage and touch current.
a Current is measured using the measuring network specified in Figure 4 of IEC 60990:2016.
b Current is measured using the measuring network specified in Figure 5 of IEC 60990:2016.
c For sinusoidal waveforms and DC, the current may be measured using a 2 000 Q resistor.
d Above 22 kHz the accessible area is limited to 1 cm2.
e Above 36 kHz the accessible area is limited to 1 cm2.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Figure 22 - Maximum values for combined AC current and DC current
Figure 23 - Maximum values for combined AC voltage and DC voltage
5.2.2.3 Capacitance limits
W h e re th e e le c tric a l e n e rg y so u rce is a c a p a c i t o r , t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e is c l a s s i f i e d fro m b o th

th e c h a rg e v o lta g e a n d th e c a p a c ita n c e .
T h e c a p a c i t a n c e is t h e r a t e d v a l u e o f t h e c a p a c i t o r p l u s t h e s p e c i f i e d t o l e r a n c e .

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
T h e E S 1 a n d E S 2 l i m i t s f o r v a r i o u s c a p a c i t a n c e v a l u e s a r e l i s t e d in T a b l e 5 .
NOTE 1 The capacitance values for ES2 are derived from Table A.2 of IEC TS 61201:2007.
NOTE 2 The values for ES1 are calculated by dividing the values from Table A.2 of IEC TS 61201:2007, by
two (2).
Table 5 - Electrical energy source limits for a charged capacitor
c ES1 ES2 ES3
nF ^ peak ^peak Cpeak

V V V
300 or greater 60 120
170 75 150
91 100 200
61 125 250
41 150 300
28 200 400
18 250 500
12 350 700 > ES2
8,0 500 1 000
4,0 1 000 2 000
1,6 2 500 5 000
0,8 5 000 10 000
0,4 10 000 20 000
0,2 20 000 40 000
0,133 or less 30 000 60 000
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points.
5.2.2.4 Single pulse limits
W h e r e t h e e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e is a s i n g l e p u l s e , t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e is c l a s s i f i e d f r o m b o th
th e v o lta g e and th e d u ra tio n o r fro m b o th th e c u rre n t a n d th e d u ra tio n . V a lu e s a re g iv e n in
T a b le 6 a n d T a b le 7 . If t h e v o lta g e exceeds th e lim it, th e n th e c u r r e n t s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e
lim it. If t h e cu rre n t exceeds th e lim it, th e v o lta g e s h a ll not exceed th e lim it. C u rre n ts a re
m e a s u r e d a c c o r d in g to 5 .7 . F o r r e p e titiv e p u ls e s , s e e 5 .2 .2 .5 .
F o r p u ls e d u r a tio n s u p to 10 m s , th e v o lta g e o r c u r r e n t lim it fo r 10 m s a p p lie s .
If m o r e t h a n o n e p u l s e is d e t e c t e d w i t h i n a p e r i o d o f 3 s , t h e n t h e e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e is
tre a te d a s a re p e titiv e p u ls e a n d th e lim its o f 5 .2 .2 .5 a p p ly .
NOTE 1 The pulse limits are calculated from Figure 22 and Table 10 of IEC TS 60479-1:2005.
NOTE 2 These single pulses do not include transients.
NOTE 3 Pulse duration is considered to be the time duration when the voltage or current exceeds ES1 limits.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table 6 - Voltage limits for single pulses
Pulse duration ES1 ES2 ES3

up to and including ^ peak U peaku
^ peak
ms V V V
10 196
20 178
50 150
60 > ES2
80 135
100 129
200 and longer 120
If the time duration lies between the values in any two rows， either the lower ES2 value of C/peak shall be used or
a linear interpolation may be used between any two adjacent rows with the calculated peak voltage value
rounded down to the nearest volt.
If the peak voltage for ES2 lies between the values in any two rows, either the shortest time duration may be
used or a linear interpolation may be used between any two adjacent rows with the calculated time duration
rounded down to the nearest millisecond.
Table 7 - Current limits for single pulses
5.2.2.5 Limits for repetitive pulses
E x c e p t fo r p u ls e s co ve re d in A n n e x H, a re p e titiv e p u ls e e le c tric a l e n e rg y so u rce c la s s is

d e te rm in e d fro m e ith e r th e a v a ila b le v o lta g e o r th e a v a ila b le c u rre n t. If th e v o lt a g e exceeds
th e lim it, th e n th e cu rre n t s h a ll not exceed th e lim it. If t h e cu rre n t exceeds th e lim it, th e
v o lt a g e s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e lim it. C u r r e n ts a re m e a s u r e d a c c o r d in g to 5 .7 .
F o r p u ls e o ff tim e s le s s th a n 3 s, th e p e a k v a lu e s o f 5 .2 .2 .2 a p p ly . F o r lo n g e r d u r a tio n s , th e
v a lu e s o f 5 .2 .2 .4 a p p ly .
5.2.2.6 Ringing signals
W h e re th e e le c tric a l e n e rg y so u rce is an a n a lo g u e te le p h o n e n e tw o rk rin g in g s ig n a l as

d e f i n e d in A n n e x H , t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e c l a s s is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e E S 2 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
5.2.2.7 Audio signals
F o r e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e s t h a t a r e a u d i o s i g n a l s , t h e l i m i t s a r e s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e E . 1 .
5.3 Protection against electrical energy sources
5.3.1 General
E x c e p t a s g iv e n b e lo w , p ro te c tio n re q u ire m e n ts fo r p a rts accessible to ordinary persons,

instructed persons, and skilled persons a r e g i v e n in 4 . 3 .
ES2 or ES3 c irc u its , fro m w h ic h accessible ES1 or ES2 c i r c u i t s a r e d e r i v e d , s h a ll be

s e p a ra te d fro m ES3 mains by a double safeguard or a reinforced safeguard. In a d d itio n ,
th e fo llo w in g a p p lie s :
- under single fault conditions in t h e c i r c u i t b e t w e e n E S 2 /E S 3 a n d th e accessible ES1,

th e c u r r e n t o r v o lta g e le v e ls s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e E S 1 lim its ; a n d
- under single fault conditions in t h e c i r c u i t b e t w e e n E S 2 /E S 3 and accessible E S 2 , th e

c u r r e n t o r v o lt a g e le v e ls s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e E S 2 lim its .
NOTE An example for this construction is a rectifier in the insulated (secondary) circuit in a switch mode power
supply in which multiple components are present.
B a re c o n d u c to rs at ES3 s h a ll be lo c a te d or g u a rd e d s o th a t u n in te n tio n a l c o n ta c t w ith such

c o n d u c to rs d u rin g s e rv ic e o p e ra tio n s b y a skilled person is u n l i k e l y ( s e e F i g u r e 1 9 ) .
For a battery b a c k e d u p s u p p ly c a p a b le o f b a c k fe e d in g to th e in p u t A C te r m in a ls , s e e 5 .8 .
5.3.2 Accessibility to electrical energy sources and safeguards
5.3.2.1 Requirements
For ordinary persons, th e fo llo w in g s h a ll n o t b e accessible:
- bare p a rts at ES2, e x c e p t fo r th e p in s o f c o n n e c to rs . H o w e ve r, such p in s s h a ll not be

accessible under normal operating conditions b y th e b lu n t p ro b e o f F ig u re V .3 ; a n d
- b a r e p a rts a t E S 3 ; a n d
- an ES3 basic safeguard.
For b a re p a rtsoutdoor equipment t h a t a r e accessible t o a n ordinary person

of in th e ir
in te n d e d outdoor location, t h e f o l l o w i n g s h a l l n o t b e accessible:
- bare p a rts e x c e e d in g 0 ,5 ES1 v o l t a g e l i m i t s u n d e r normal operating conditions

tim e s
a n d abnormal operating conditions a n d single fault conditions o f a c o m p o n e n t , d e v i c e
o r i n s u l a t i o n n o t s e r v i n g a s a safeguard; a n d
- bare p a rts e x c e e d in g ES1 v o lta g e lim its under single fault conditions of a basic
safeguard or of a supplementary safeguard (s e e 5 .2 .1 .1 ).
For instructed persons, th e fo llo w in g s h a ll n o t b e accessible:
- b a r e p a rts a t E S 3 ; a n d
- an ES3 basic safeguard.
5.3.2.2 Contact requirements
F o r E S 3 v o lta g e s u p to 4 2 0 V p e a k , th e a p p r o p r ia te te s t p r o b e fr o m A n n e x V s h a ll n o t c o n ta c t
a b a re in te rn a l c o n d u c tiv e p a rt.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
For ES3 v o lta g e s above 420 V peak, th e a p p ro p ria te te s t p ro b e fro m Annex V s h a ll not
c o n ta c t a b a re in te rn a l c o n d u c tiv e p a rt and s h a ll have an a ir gap fro m th a t p a rt
(s e e F ig u re 2 4 ).
T h e a ir g a p s h a ll e ith e r:
a) p a s s a n e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h t e s t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 9 . 1 a t a te s t v o lta g e (D C o r p e a k A C )
t h a t is e q u a l t o t h e t e s t v o l t a g e f o r basic insulation in T a b l e 2 6 c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e p e a k
o f th e working voltage; or
b) h a v e a m in im u m d is t a n c e a c c o r d in g to T a b le 8.
Bare internal conductive part
Figure 24 - Contact requirements to bare internal conductive parts

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Table 8 - Minimum air gap distance
Voltage Air gap distance

mm
V peak or DC up to and including Pollution degree
2 3
> 420 and < 1 000 0,2

1 200 0,25 0,8
1 500 0,5
2 000 1,0
2 500 1,5
3 000 2,0
4 000 3,0
5 000 4,0
6 000 5,5
8 000 8,0
10 000 11
12 000 14
15 000 18
20 000 25
25 000 33
30 000 40
40 000 60
50 000 75
60 000 90
80 000 130
100 000 170
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum air gap distance being
rounded up to the next higher 0,1 mm increment or the value in the next row below whichever is lower.
For equipment intended to be used more than 2 000 m above sea level, the values in this table are multiplied by
the multiplication factor for the desired altitude according to Table 16.
Compliance is checked by the test of Clause T.3.
In addition, for bare ES3 parts at a voltage above 420 V peak, compliance is checked by
distance measurement or by an electric strength test.
Components and subassemblies that comply with their respective IEC standards do not have
to be tested when such components and subassemblies are used in the final product.
5.3.2.4 Terminals for connecting stripped wire
The use o f a s trip p e d w ire to m ake c o n n e c tio n w ith its a s s o c ia te d te rm in a l in te n d e d to be

used:
- by an ordinary person s h a l l n o t r e s u l t in c o n t a c t w i t h E S 2 o r E S 3 ; a n d
- by an instructed person s h a l l n o t r e s u l t in c o n t a c t w i t h E S 3 .
F o r a u d io s ig n a l v o lta g e s , s e e T a b le E.1 f o r t h e v a l u e s o f ES2 and ES3. P a rts o f a u d io s ig n a l

te r m in a ls p r o v id e d w ith o n e o f th e safeguards i n T a b l e E.1 a r e n o t te s te d .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Compliance is checked by the test o f V.1.6 for each wire term inal opening as well as any
other openings within 25 mm from the terminal. During the test，no portion o f the probe
inserted into the term inal or opening shall contact ES2 or ES3.
5.4 Insulation materials and requirements
5.4.1 General
5.4.1.1 Insulation
In s u la tio n c o n s is tin g of clearances, creepage distances a n d solid

in s u la tin g m a te ria ls ，
insulation， a n d t h a t i s p r o v i d i n g a safeguard f u n c t i o n i s d e s i g n a t e d basic insulation，
supplementary insulation， double insulation， o r reinforced insulation.
5.4.1.2 Properties of insulating material
The c h o ic e and a p p lic a tio n of in s u la tin g m a te ria l s h a ll ta k e in to account th e needs fo r

e le c tric a l s tre n g th , m e c h a n ic a l s tre n g th , d im e n s io n , fre q u e n c y o f th e working voltage and
o th e r p ro p e rtie s fo r th e w o rk in g e n v iro n m e n t (te m p e ra tu re , p re s s u re , h u m id ity a n d p o llu tio n )
a s s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 5 a n d A n n e x T .
In s u la tin g m a te ria l s h a ll n o t b e h y g r o s c o p ic a s d e te r m in e d b y 5 .4 .1 .3 .
Compliance is checked by inspection and，where necessary，by evaluation o f the data for the
material.
Where necessary，if the data does not confirm that the m aterial is non-hygroscopic，the
hygroscopic nature o f the m aterial is determ ined by subjecting the com ponent or subassem bly
using the insulation in question to the hum idity treatm ent o f 5.4.8. The insulation is then
subjected to the relevant electric strength test o f 5.4.9.1 while still in the hum idity chamber, or
in the room in which the samples were brought to the prescribed temperature.
5.4.1.4 Maximum operating temperatures for materials， components and systems
5.4.1.4.1 Requirements
Under normal operating conditions, in s u la tin g m a te ria l te m p e r a tu r e s s h a ll not exceed th e

te m p e ra tu re lim it o f th e E IS f in c lu d in g in s u la tin g m a te ria ls o f c o m p o n e n ts , o r th e m a x im u m
t e m p e r a t u r e l i m i t o f t h e i n s u l a t i o n s y s t e m a s g i v e n in T a b l e 9 .
For m a x im u m te m p e ra tu re s b e lo w or equal to 100 °C , no d e c la re d in s u la tio n s y s te m is

r e q u i r e d . A n u n d e c l a r e d E I S is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e C l a s s 1 0 5 ( A ) .
5.4.1.4.2 Test method
Insulating m aterial tem peratures are m easured in accordance with B.1.5.
The equipm ent or parts o f the equipm ent are operated under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s
(see Clause B.2) as follows:
一 for continuous operation，until steady state conditions are established; and

- f or in te rm itte n t o p e ra tio n , until steady state conditions are established, using the rated
“O N” and “O FF” periods; and
- f or s h o rt-tim e o p e ra tio n , for the operating time specified by the manufacturer.
Components and other parts may be tested independently o f the end product provided that
the test conditions applicable to the end product are applied to the com ponent or part.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Equipm ent intended for building-in or rack-m ounting，or for incorporation in larger equipment,
is tested under the m ost adverse actual or sim ulated conditions specified in the installation
instructions.
5.4.1.4.3 Compliance criteria
The tem perature o f the electrical insulation m aterial or EIS shall not exceed the lim its in
Table 9.
For a single insulating material, the declared relative temperature index inform ation from the
m aterial m anufacturer can be used if it is suitable for the applicable class o f insulation.
For an EIS, the available therm al class data o f the EIS as indicated by the m anufacturer can
be used if it is suitable for the applicable class o f insulation.
For therm al classifications above Class 105 (A), the EIS shall com ply with IEC 60085.
Table 9 - Temperature limits for materials， components and systems
Part Maximum temperature r max

oc
Insulation, including winding insulation:

of Class 105 (A) material or EIS 100 a
of Class 120 (E) material or EIS 115 a

of Class 130 (B) material or EIS 120 a
of Class 155 (F) material or EIS 140 a
of Class 180 (H) material or EIS 165 a
of Class 200 (N) material or EIS 180 a
of Class 220 (R) material or EIS 200 a

of Class 250 material or EIS 225 a
Insulation of internal and external wiring, including power supply cords:
一 without temperature marking 70
- with temperature marking Temperature marked on the wire or spool,

or rating assigned by the manufacturer
Other thermoplastic insulation See 5.4.1.10
Components See also Annex G and 4.1.2
The classes are related to the temperature classes of electrical insulating materials and EIS in accordance with
IEC 60085. The assigned letter designations are given in parentheses.
For each material, account shall be taken of the data for that material to determine the appropriate maximum
temperature.
a If the temperature of a winding is determined by thermocouples, these values are reduced by 10 K, except in
the case of:
- a motor, or
一 a winding with embedded thermocouples.
5.4.1.5 Pollution degrees
5.4.1.5.1 General
T h e d iffe re n t d e g re e s o f p o llu tio n o f th e o p e ra tin g o r m ic r o - e n v ir o n m e n t fo r p ro d u c ts c o v e re d

b y th is d o c u m e n t a re g iv e n b e lo w .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Pollution degree 1
N o p o llu tio n o r o n ly d ry , n o n - c o n d u c tiv e p o llu tio n o c c u rs . T h e p o llu tio n h a s n o in flu e n c e .
NOTE 1 Within the equipment, components or subassemblies that are sealed to exclude dust and moisture are
examples of pollution degree 1.
Pollution degree 2
O n ly n o n -c o n d u c tiv e p o llu tio n o ccu rs except th a t o c c a s io n a lly a te m p o ra ry c o n d u c tiv ity

c a u s e d b y c o n d e n s a t i o n is to b e e x p e c t e d .
NOTE 2 Pollution degree 2 is generally appropriate for equipment covered by the scope of this document.
Pollution degree 3
C o n d u c tiv e p o llu tio n o c c u rs o r d ry n o n -c o n d u c tiv e p o llu tio n o c c u rs th a t b e c o m e s c o n d u c tiv e

d u e t o c o n d e n s a t i o n , w h i c h is to b e e x p e c t e d .
5.4.1.5.2 Test for pollution degree 1 environment and for an insulating compound
A sample is subjected to the therm al cycling sequence o f 5.4.1.5.3.
It is allow ed to cool to room temperature and is then subjected to the hum idity conditioning o f
5.4.8.
If the test is conducted for verification o f the insulating com pound form ing s o lid in s u la tio n as
required by 5.4.4.3f the conditioning is im m ediately follow ed by the electric strength test o f
5.4.9.1.
For printed boards, compliance is checked by external visual inspection. There shall be no
delam ination which affects the creepage d is ta n c e s required to fulfil the requirem ents o f
p o llu tio n degree 1.
For other than printed boards，compliance is checked by inspection o f the cross-sectional

area，and there shall be no visible voids, gaps o r cracks in the insulating material.
5.4.1.5.3 Thermal cycling test procedure
A sample o f a com ponent o r subassem bly is subjected to the follow ing sequence o f tests. The
sample is subjected 10 times to the follow ing sequence o f therm al cycling:
68 h at (T^ ± 2) °C;
1h at ± °C ;
2h at (0 ± 2) °C;
> 1h at (2 5 f
= T2 + Tma - Tamb + 10 K, or 85 °C, whichever is higher. However，the 10 K margin is not

added if the tem perature is m easured by an embedded thermocouple o r by the resistance
method.
T2 is the temperature o f the parts m easured during the test o f 5.4.1.4.
The significance o f Tma and Tarr)b are as given in B .2 .6 .1.
The period o f time taken for the transition from one temperature to another is not specified,
but the transition may be gradual.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
5.4.1.6 Insulation in transformers with varying dimensions
If t h e in s u la tio n of a tra n s fo rm e r has d iffe re n t working voltages a lo n g th e le n g th of th e

w in d in g , th e clearances, creepage distances a n d d i s t a n c e s t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n m a y v a r y in a
c o rre s p o n d in g fa s h io n .
NOTE An example of such a construction is a 30 kV winding, consisting of multiple bobbins connected in series,
and earthed or connected to a common point at one end.
5.4.1.7 Insulation in circuits generating starting pulses
For c irc u its g e n e ra tin g s ta rtin g p u ls e s e x c e e d in g ES1 (fo r e x a m p le , to ig n ite a d is c h a rg e

la m p ), th e re q u ire m e n ts basic insulation, supplementary insulation
fo r and reinforced
insulation a p p ly to creepage distances a n d d i s t a n c e s t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n .
NOTE 1 For working voltages in the above cases, see 5.4.1.8.1 i).
NOTE 2 If the starting pulse is an AC waveform, the pulse width is determined by connecting the peak values of
the AC waveform.
The clearances a re d e te rm in e d b y o n e o f th e fo llo w in g m e th o d s :
- d e t e r m i n e th e m in im u m clearance in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5.4.2; or
- conduct one o f th e fo llo w in g e le c tric s tre n g th te s ts , w ith th e c o n n e c tio n te rm in a ls o f th e

s ta rtin g p u ls e c ir c u it (fo r e x a m p le , a la m p ) s h o rte d to g e th e r:
• t h e t e s t g i v e n in 5 . 4 . 9 . 1 ; o r
• a p p l y 3 0 p u l s e s h a v i n g a n a m p l i t u d e e q u a l t o t h e r e q u i r e d t e s t v o l t a g e g i v e n in 5 . 4 . 9 . 1
g e n e r a te d b y a n e x te r n a l p u ls e g e n e r a to r . T h e p u ls e w id th s h a ll b e e q u a l to o r g r e a te r
th a n th a t o f th e in te r n a lly g e n e r a te d s ta r tin g p u ls e .
Compliance is checked by inspection or test. During the test, the insulation shall show no
breakdown or flashover.
5.4.1.8 Determination of working voltage
5.4.1.8.1 General
In d e t e r m i n i n g working voltages, a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s a p p ly :
a) u n e a rth e d accessible c o n d u c t iv e p a r ts a re a s s u m e d to b e e a r th e d ;
b) if a tra n s fo rm e r w in d in g o r o th e r p a rt is n o t c o n n e c te d to a c irc u it th a t e s ta b lis h e s its

p o te n tia l re la tiv e to e a rth , th e w in d in g o r o th e r p a rt a re a s s u m e d to b e e a r th e d a t a p o in t
b y w h ic h th e h ig h e s t working voltage is o b t a i n e d ;
c) except as s p e c ifie d in 5 .4 .1 .6 , fo r in s u la tio n b e tw e e n tw o tra n s fo rm e r w in d in g s , th e

h i g h e s t v o l t a g e b e t w e e n a n y t w o p o i n t s in t h e t w o w i n d i n g s i s t h e working voltage, ta k in g
in to a c c o u n t th e v o lt a g e s to w h ic h th e in p u t w in d in g s w ill b e c o n n e c t e d ;
d) e x c e p t a s s p e c ifie d in 5 . 4 . 1 . 6 , f o r i n s u l a t i o n b e tw e e n a tra n s fo r m e r w in d in g and a n o th e r

p a rt, th e h ig h e s t v o lta g e b e tw e e n any p o in t on th e w in d in g and th e o th e r p a rt is th e
working voltage;
e) w h e re double insulation working voltage a c r o s s t h e basic insulation is
is u s e d , t h e
d e t e r m i n e d b y i m a g i n i n g a s h o r t - c i r c u i t a c r o s s t h e supplementary insulation, a n d v i c e
v e r s a . F o r double insulation b e t w e e n t r a n s f o r m e r w i n d i n g s , t h e s h o r t - c i r c u i t i s a s s u m e d
t o t a k e p l a c e a t t h e p o i n t b y w h i c h t h e h i g h e s t working voltage i s p r o d u c e d a c r o s s t h e
o th e r in s u la tio n ;
f) when th e working voltage is d e t e r m i n e d by m e a s u re m e n t, th e in p u t v o lta g e s u p p lie d to

th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e th e rated voltage o r th e v o lta g e w ith in th e rated voltage range
t h a t r e s u l t s in t h e h i g h e s t m e a s u r e d v a l u e ;
g) th e working voltage b e t w e e n a n y p o i n t in t h e c i r c u i t s u p p l i e d b y t h e mains and
- a n y p a r t c o n n e c t e d to e a r th ; a n d

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- a n y p o i n t in a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m t h e mains,
s h a ll b e ta k e n a s th e g r e a te r o f th e fo llo w in g :
- t he rated voltage o r th e u p p e r v o lta g e o f th e rated voltage range; and
- t he m e a s u r e d v o lta g e ;
h) when d e te rm in in g th e working voltage fo r an ES1 or ES2 external circuit, th e n o rm a l

o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s s h a ll be ta k e n in to a c c o u n t. If t h e o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s a re not known,
th e working voltage s h a ll b e ta k e n a s th e u p p e r lim its o f E S 1 o r E S 2 a s a p p lic a b le . S h o r t
d u ra tio n s ig n a ls (su ch as te le p h o n e rin g in g ) s h a ll not be ta k e n in to account fo r
d e te rm in in g working voltage;
i) fo r c irc u its g e n e ra tin g s ta rtin g p u ls e s (fo r e x a m p le , d is c h a rg e la m p s , see 5 .4 .1 .7 ), th e
working voltage is t h e p e a k v a l u e o f t h e p u l s e s w i t h t h e la m p c o n n e c te d b u t b e fo re th e
la m p ig n ite s . T h e fr e q u e n c y o f th e working voltage t o d e t e r m i n e th e m in im u m clearance
s h a ll be ta k e n as le s s th a n 30 k H z . T h e working voltage to d e te rm in e m in im u m
creepage distances is t h e v o l t a g e m e a s u r e d a f t e r t h e ig n it io n o f t h e la m p .
5.4.1.8.2 RMS working voltage
In d e te rm in in g th e RMS working voltage, s h o r t - t e r m c o n d i t i o n s ( f o r e x a m p l e , c a d e n c e d

te le p h o n e rin g in g s i g n a l s i n external circuits) a n d n o n - r e p e t i t i v e t r a n s i e n t s ( f o r e x a m p l e , d u e
to a t m o s p h e r ic d is t u r b a n c e s ) a re n o t ta k e n in to a c c o u n t.
NOTE The creepage distances are determined from the RMS w o rkin g voltages.
5.4.1.9 Insulating surfaces
An accessible i n s u l a t i n g s u rfa c e is c o n s id e re d to be co ve re d by a th in m e ta llic fo il fo r

d e te rm in in g clearances, creepage distances and d is ta n c e th ro u g h in s u la tio n
(s e e F ig u re 0 . 1 3 ) .
5.4.1.10 Thermoplastic parts on which conductive metallic parts are directly mounted
5.4.1.10.1 Requirements
T h e rm o p la s tic p a rts on w h ic h c o n d u c tiv e m e ta llic p a rts a re d ire c tly m o u n te d s h a ll be

s u ffic ie n tly re s is ta n t to heat if s o fte n in g of th e p la s tic c o u ld re s u lt in th e fa ilu re of a
safeguard.
Compliance is checked by exam ination o f the Vicat test or ball pressure data from the
m aterial manufacturer. If the data is not available, compliance is checked by either the Vicat
test o f 5.4.1.10.2 o r by the ball pressure test o f 5.4.1.10.3.
5.4.1.10.2 Vicat test
The m easured tem perature during n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , as specified in Clause B.2f
shall be at least 15 K less than the Vicat softening temperature as specified in Vicat test B50
o f ISO 306.
The m easured tem perature during a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s o f Clause B.3 shall be
less than the Vicat softening temperature.
The Vicat softening tem perature o f a non-m etallic part supporting parts in a circuit supplied
from the m a in s shall be not less than 125 °C.
5.4.1.10.3 Ball pressure test
Compliance is checked by subjecting the part to the ball pressure test according to
IEC 60695-10-2. The test is made in a heating cabinet at a temperature o f (T -
âmb + Tma + 15 °C) 土 2 °C (see B.2.6.1 for the explanation o f T， Tma and Tamb). However, a

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
thermoplastic part supporting parts in a circuit supplied from the m a in s is tested at a

minimum of 125 °C.
After the test, dimension d (diameter o f the indentation) shall not exceed 2 mm.
The test is not made if it is clear from examination of the physical characteristics of the
material that it will meet the requirements of this test.
5.4.2 Clearances
5.4.2.1 General requirements
Clearances s h a ll b e s o d im e n s io n e d t h a t th e lik e lih o o d o f b r e a k d o w n d u e to :
- temporary overvoltages; and
- t r a n s i e n t v o lta g e s th a t m a y e n te r th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
- recurring peak v o lta g e s and th e ir re la te d fre q u e n c ie s th a t a re g e n e ra te d w ith in th e

e q u ip m e n t
is r e d u c e d .
A ll re q u ire d clearances and te s t v o lta g e s a p p ly to an a ltitu d e up to 2 000 m. For h ig h e r

a ltitu d e s , th e m u ltip lic a tio n fa c to rs of 5.4.2.5 a p p ly a fte r a n y lin e a r in te rp o la tio n , b u t b e fo re
ro u n d in g up, and b e fo re any o th e r m u ltip lic a tio n fa c to rs a re a p p lie d as s ta te d in T a b le 10,
T a b le 11, T a b le 14 a n d T a b le 15.
NOTE For air gaps between contacts of safety interlocks, see Annex K. For air gaps between contacts of
disconnect devices, see Annex L. For air gaps between contacts in components, see Annex G. For connectors,
see G.4.1.
U n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d b y th e m a n u f a c t u r e r a n d s u p p lie d w ith m e a n s to a s s u r e m in im u m

clearances d u r in g a ll m o d e s o f n o r m a l o p e r a t io n , th e v o ic e c o il a n d a d j a c e n t c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s
o f a lo u d s p e a k e r a re c o n s id e r e d to b e c o n d u c t iv e ly c o n n e c t e d .
T o d e te rm in e th e clearance, th e h ig h e s t v a lu e o f th e fo llo w in g tw o p r o c e d u r e s s h a ll b e u s e d :
- P r o c e d u r e 1: D e t e r m i n e clearances a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .2 .2 .
- P r o c e d u r e 2: D e te rm in e clearances a c c o rd in g to 5 .2 .2 .3 . A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e adequacy of

clearances m ay be d e te rm in e d u s in g an e le c tric s tre n g th te s t a c c o rd in g to 5 .2 .2 .4 , in
w h ic h c a s e th e v a lu e s a c c o r d in g to P r o c e d u r e 1 s h a ll b e m a in ta in e d .
F o r O v e rv o lta g e C a te g o ry II, clearances in c i r c u i t s c o n n e c t e d t o a n A C mains n o t e x c e e d in g

4 2 0 V p e a k (3 0 0 V R M S ) m a y b e d e te rm in e d p e r A n n e x X a s a n a lte rn a tiv e .
5.4.2.2 Procedure 1 for determining clearance
To d e te rm in e th e v o lta g e to be used in T a b le 10 and T a b le 11, th e h ig h e s t v o lta g e o f th e

f o l l o w i n g is u s e d a s a p p l i c a b l e :
- t he p e a k v a lu e o f th e working voltage a c ro s s th e clearance;

- t h e r e c u r r i n g p e a k v o lt a g e s , if a n y , a c r o s s t h e clearance;
- f or c irc u its AC mains: t h e temporary overvoltage, w h i c h i s t a k e n a s
c o n n e c te d to th e
2 000 V p e a k i f t h e n o m i n a l AC mains s y s t e m v o l t a g e d o e s n o t e x c e e d 250 V a n d i s t a k e n
a s 2 500 V p e a k i f t h e n o m i n a l AC mains s y s t e m v o l t a g e e x c e e d s 250 V b u t d o e s n o t
e x c e e d 600 V.
A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e temporary overvoltage m a y b e d e t e r m i n e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 3 . 3 . 2 . 3

o f I E C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 : 2 0 0 7 a t t h e d i s c r e t i o n o f t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , in w h i c h c a s e t h e r e f e r e n c e to

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
“ s o lid i n s u l a t i o n ” in 5 . 3 . 3 . 2 . 3 o f I E C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 : 2 0 0 7 is r e p l a c e d by “c le a ra n c e s ” . M o re o v e r，
th e s h o r t te r m v a lu e e q u a l to + 1 2 0 0 V is t a k e n a s t h e v o l t a g e f o r u s e in T a b l e 1 0 .
NOTE Un is the nominal line-to-neutral voltage of the neutral-earthed supply system.
T h is v o lt a g e s h a ll b e u s e d to d e te r m in e th e clearance a s fo llo w s :
- clearance v a lu e s o f T a b le 10 fo r c ir c u its w ith fu n d a m e n t a l f r e q u e n c ie s u p to 3 0 k H z ; o r
- clearance v a lu e s of T a b le 11 fo r c irc u its w ith fu n d a m e n ta l fre q u e n c ie s h ig h e r th a n

30 kH z; or
- t he h ig h e s t clearance v a l u e s o f T a b l e 1 0 a n d T a b l e 11 f o r c i r c u i t s w h e r e b o t h f r e q u e n c i e s
lo w e r th a n 3 0 k H z a n d h ig h e r th a n 3 0 k H z a re p re s e n t.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Table 10 - Minimum clearances fo r voltages with frequencies up to 30 kHz
Basic insulation or supplementary Reinforced insulation

Voltage up to and insulation
including mm mm
peak Pollution degree Pollution degree
1a 2 3 1a 2 3
330 0,01 0,02
400 0,02 0,04
500 0,04 〇 ,2 0,08 0,4
600 0,06 0,12 1,5
0,8
800 0,13 0,26
1 000 0,26 0,26 0,52 0,52
1 200 0,42 0,84
1 500 0,76 1,52 1,6
2 000 1,27 2,54
2 500 1,8 3,6
3 000 2,4 4,8
! 4 000 3,8 7,6
5 000 5,7 11,0
6 000 7,9 15,8
8 000 11,0 20
( 10 000 15,2 27
12 000 19 33
； 15 000 25 42
20 000 34 59
25 000 44 77
30 000 55 95
40 000 77 131
50 000 100 175
60 000 120 219
80 000 175 307
100 000 230 395
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum clearances being
rounded up to the next higher specified increment. For values:
- not exceeding 0,5 mm， the specified increment is 0,01 mm; and
一 exceeding 0,5 mm, the specified increment is 0,1 mm.
a The values for pollution degree 1 may be used if a sample complies with the tests of 5.4.1.5.2.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table 11 - Minimum clearances for voltages with frequencies above 30 kHz
Voltage up to and including Basic insulation or Reinforced insulation

supplementary insulation
peak mm mm
600 0,07 0,14
800 0,22 0,44
1 000 0,6 1,2
1 200 1,68 3,36
1 400 2,82 5,64
1 600 4,8 9,6
1 800 8,04 16,08
2 000 13,2 26,4
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum clearances being
一 not exceeding 0,5 mmf the specified increment is 0,01 mm; and
一 exceeding 0,5 mm, the specified increment is 0,1 mm.
For pollution degree 1, use a multiplication factor of 0,8.
For pollution degree 3, use a multiplication factor of 1,4.
5.4.2.3 Procedure 2 for determining clearance
5.4.2.3.1 General
The d im e n s io n fo r a clearance th a t is s u b je c t to tra n s ie n t v o lta g e s fro m th emains or an

external circuit is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m t h e required withstand voltage fo r th a t clearance.
Each clearance s h a ll b e d e te r m in e d u s in g th e fo llo w in g s te p s :
- d e t e r m i n e th e t r a n s ie n t v o lt a g e a c c o r d in g to 5 .4 .2 .3 .2 ; a n d
- d e t e r m i n e th e required withstand voltage a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .2 .3 .3 ; a n d
- d e t e r m i n e th e m in im u m clearance a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .2 .3 .4 .
5.4.2.3.2 Determining transient voltages
5.4.2.3.2.1 General
T ra n s ie n t v o lta g e s can be d e te rm in e d based on th e ir o rig in , or can be m e a su re d in

a c c o r d a n c e w ith 5 .4 .2 .3 .2 .5 .
If d if f e r e n t t r a n s ie n t v o lt a g e s a f f e c t th e s a m e clearance, t h e l a r g e s t o f t h o s e v o l t a g e s is u s e d .
T h e v a lu e s a re n o t a d d e d to g e th e r.
Outdoor equipment c o n n e c t e d to th e mains s h a ll be s u ita b le fo r th e h ig h e s t mains

transient voltage e x p e c t e d i n t h e in s ta lla tio n lo c a tio n .
C o n s id e r a tio n s h a ll b e g iv e n to th e fo llo w in g :
- t h e p r o s p e c t iv e fa u lt c u r r e n t o f th e s u p p ly to outdoor equipment can b e h ig h e r th a n fo r

in d o o r e q u ip m e n t, s e e IE C 6 0 3 6 4 -4 -4 3 ; a n d
- t he mains transient voltage fo r outdoor equipment can be h ig h e r th a n fo r in d o o r

e q u ip m e n t.
C o m p o n e n ts w ith in outdoor equipment th a t re d u ce th e mains transient voltage or th e

p r o s p e c tiv e fa u lt c u r r e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - s e r ie s .

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
NOTE 1 The overvoltage category of outdoor equipment is normally considered to be one of the following:
一 if powered via the normal building installation wiring, Overvoltage Category II;
- if powered directly from the mains distribution system, Overvoltage Category III;
- if at, or in the proximity of, the origin of the electrical installation, Overvoltage Category IV.
NOTE 2 For further information regarding protection from overvoltages, see IEC 60364-5-53.
Compliance is checked by inspection of the equipment, the installation instructions and,

where necessary, by the applicable component tests specified in the IEC 61643-series.
5.4.2.3.2.2 Determining AC mains transient voltages
F o r e q u ip m e n t to be s u p p lie d fro m th e A C mains, th e v a lu e o f th e mains transient voltage

d e p e n d s on th e o v e rv o lta g e c a te g o ry a n d th e A C mains v o l t a g e a n d is g iv e n in T a b l e 1 2 . In
g e n e ra l, clearances in e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to be c o n n e c te d to th e AC mains, s h a ll be
d e s i g n e d f o r O v e r v o l t a g e C a t e g o r y II.
NOTE See Annex I for further guidance on the determination of overvoltage categories.
E q u ip m e n t th a t is lik e ly , when in s ta lle d , to be s u b je c te d to tra n s ie n t v o lta g e s th a t e x c e e d

t h o s e f o r its d e s ig n o v e r v o l t a g e c a t e g o r y r e q u ir e s a d d it io n a l t r a n s i e n t v o lt a g e p r o t e c t io n to b e
p ro v id e d e x te r n a l to th e e q u ip m e n t. In t h i s c a s e , th e in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s s h a ll s ta te th e
n e e d fo r s u c h e x te rn a l p ro te c tio n .
Table 12 - Mains transient voltages
AC mains voltage a Mains transient voltage b

up to and including
V peak
Overvoltage Category
V RMS
I II III IV
50 330 500 800 1 500
100 c 500 800 1 500 2 500

150 d 800 1 500 2 500 4 000
300 e 1 500 2 500 4 000 6 000
600 f 2 500 4 000 6 000 8 000

For equipment designed to be connected to a three-phase 3-wire supply, where there is no neutral conductor,
the AC mains supply voltage is the line-to-line voltage. In all other cases, where there is a neutral conductor,
it is the line-to-neutral voltage.
b The mains transient voltage is always one of the values in the table. Interpolation is not permitted.
In Japan, the value of the mains transient voltages for the nominal AC mains supply voltage of 100 V is
determined from columns applicable to the nominal AC mains supply voltage of 150 V.
d Including 120/208 V and 120/240 V.
e Including 230/400 V and 277/480 V.
f Including 400/690 V.
5.4.2.3.2.3 Determining DC mains transient voltages
If a n e a rth e d DC p o w e r d is trib u tio n s y s te m is e n t i r e l y w i t h i n a s in g le b u ild in g , th e tr a n s ie n t

v o l t a g e is s e l e c t e d a s f o l l o w s :
- if t h e DC p o w e r d is trib u tio n s y s te m is e a r t h e d a t a s in g le p o in t, th e tra n s ie n t v o lta g e is

ta k e n to b e 5 0 0 V p e a k ; o r
- if t h e DC power d is trib u tio n s y s te m is e a rth e d at th e so u rce and th e e q u ip m e n t, th e

t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e is t a k e n t o b e 3 5 0 V p e a k ; o r

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
NOTE The connection to protective earth can be at the source of the DC power distribution system or at the
equipment location, or both (see ITU-T Recommendation K.27).
- if t h e c a b lin g a s s o c ia te d w ith th e DC p o w e r d is trib u tio n s y s te m i s s h o r t e r t h a n 4 m o r is

i n s t a l l e d e n t i r e l y in c o n t i n u o u s m e t a l l i c c o n d u i t , t h e t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e is t a k e n t o b e 1 5 0 V
peak.
If a DC power d is trib u tio n s y s te m is not e a rth e d or is not w ith in th e sam e b u ild in g , th e

tra n s ie n t v o lta g e w ith r e s p e c t to e a rth s h a ll be ta k e n to be equal to th e mains transient
voltage in t h e mains f r o m w h i c h t h e D C p o w e r is d e r iv e d .
If t h e DC p o w e r d is trib u tio n s y s te m is n o t w i t h i n th e s a m e b u ild in g , a n d is c o n s t r u c t e d u s in g

in s ta lla tio n and p ro te c tio n te c h n iq u e s s im ila r to th o s e of external circuits, th e tra n s ie n t
v o lta g e s h a ll b e d e te r m in e d u s in g th e r e le v a n t c la s s ific a tio n fro m 5 .4 .2 .3 .2 .4 .
If e q u i p m e n t is s u p p l i e d fro m a d e d ic a te d battery th a t has n o p ro v is io n fo r c h a rg in g fro m a

mains s u p p ly w it h o u t r e m o v a l fro m th e e q u ip m e n t, th e tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e s h a ll b e d is r e g a r d e d .
W h e n d e te rm in in g th e D C mains transient voltage, th e in s ta lla tio n a n d th e s o u rc e o f th e D C

mains s h a ll b e ta k e n in to a c c o u n t. If t h e s e a re n o t k n o w n , th e mains transient voltage on
th e D C mains s u p p ly fo r a n outdoor equipment s h a ll b e ta k e n a s 1 ,5 kV .
If t h e DC p o w e r d is trib u tio n s y s te m is n o t w i t h i n th e sam e b u ild in g , th e m a n u f a c tu r e r s h a ll

d e c la re th e mains transient voltage on th e D C mains s u p p l y in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s .
5.4.2.3.2.4 Determining external circuit transient voltages
T h e a p p lic a b le v a lu e o f th e tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e th a t m a y o c c u r o n a n external circuit s h a ll b e

d e te rm in e d u s in g T a b le 13. W h e re m o re th a n one lo c a tio n or c o n d itio n is a p p lic a b le , th e
h ig h e s t tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e a p p lie s . A rin g in g o r o th e r in te rru p te d s ig n a l s h a ll n o t b e ta k e n in to
a c c o u n t if t h e v o l t a g e o f t h i s s i g n a l is l e s s t h a n t h a t o f t h e t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e .
If t h e tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e is le s s th a n th e peak v o lta g e o f a s h o rt d u ra tio n s ig n a l (su ch as a

te le p h o n e rin g in g s ig n a l), th e p e a k v o lta g e o f th e s h o rt d u ra tio n s ig n a l s h a ll b e u s e d a s th e
tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e .
If t h e external circuit tra n s ie n t v o lta g e s a re known to b e h ig h e r th a n in d ic a te d in T a b l e 1 3 ,

th e k n o w n v a lu e s h a ll b e u s e d .
NOTE 1 Australia has published its overvoltage limits in AS/ACIF G624:2005.
NOTE 2 It is assumed that adequate measures have been taken to reduce the likelihood that the transient
voltages presented to the equipment exceed the values specified in Table 13. In installations where transient
voltages presented to the equipment are expected to exceed the values specified in Table 13, additional measures
such as surge suppression can be necessary.
NOTE 3 In Europe, the requirement for interconnection with an external circuit is in addition given in
EN 50491-3:2009, G eneral requirem ents fo r Home and B uilding E lectronic System s (HBES) and B uilding
A utom ation and C ontrol System s (BACS) - P art 3: E le ctrica l safety requirem ents.

- 100 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 13 - External circuit transient voltages
ID Cable type Additional conditions Transient voltages
1 Paired conductor a - The building or structure may or may not 1 500 V 10/700 Ms
shielded or have equipotential bonding.
unshielded Only differential if one conductor is
earthed in the equipment
2 Any other conductors The external circuit is not earthed at either Mains transient voltage or external
end, but there is an earth reference (for circuit transient voltage of the circuit
example, from connection to mains). from which the circuit in question is
derived whichever is higher.
3 Coaxial cable in the Equipment other than power-fed coaxial 4 000 V 10/700 Ms
cable distribution repeaters. Cable shield is earthed at the
network equipment. Centre conductor to shield
4 Coaxial cable in the Power fed coaxial repeaters (up to 4,4 mm 5 000 V 10/700 ns
cable distribution coaxial cable). Cable shield is earthed at
network the equipment. Centre conductor to shield
5 Coaxial cable in the Equipment other than power-fed coaxial 4 000 V 10/700 ms
cable distribution repeaters. Cable shield is not earthed at the
network equipment. Cable shield is earthed at Centre conductor to shield
building entrance. 1 500 V 1,2/50 ps shield to earth
6 Coaxial cable Cable connects to an outdoor antenna no transient b

7 Paired conductor a Cable connects to an outdoor antenna no transient b
8 Coaxial cable within The connection of the cable coming from Not applicable
the building outside the building is made via a transfer
point. The shield of the coaxial cable from
outside the building and the shield of the
coaxial cable of the cable within the building
are connected together and are connected
to earth.
In general, for external circuits installed wholly within the same building structure, transients are not taken into
account. However, a conductor is considered to leave the building if it terminates on equipment earthed to a
different earthing network.
The effects of unwanted steady state voltages generated outside the equipment (for example, earth potential
differences and voltages induced on telecommunication networks by electric train systems) are controlled by
installation practices. Such practices are application dependent and are not dealt with by this document.
For a shielded cable to affect a reduction in transients, the shield shall be continuous, earthed at both ends, and
have a maximum transfer impedance of 20 Q/km (fo r/le s s than 1 MHz).
NOTE 1 Home appliances like audio, video and multimedia products are addressed by ID 6, 7 and 8.
NOTE 2 In Norway and Sweden, the cable shield on coaxial cables is normally not earthed at the building
entrance (see the note in 5.7.7). For installation conditions, see IEC 60728-11.
a A paired conductor includes a twisted pair.

These cables are not subject to any transients but they may be affected by a 10 kV electrostatic discharge
voltage (from a 1 nF capacitor). The effect of such electrostatic discharge voltages is not taken into account
when determining clearances. Compliance is checked by the test of G.10.4.
5.4.2.3.2.5 Determining transient voltage levels by measurement
T h e tra n s ie n t v o lta g e a c ro s s th e clearance is m e a s u r e d u s i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g p r o c e d u r e .
D u rin g th e m e a s u re m e n t, th e e q u ip m e n t is n o t c o n n e c t e d to th e mains o r to any external

circuit. O n l y s u r g e s u p p r e s s o r s i n t e r n a l t o t h e e q u i p m e n t in c i r c u i t s c o n n e c t e d t o t h e mains
a r e d i s c o n n e c t e d . If t h e e q u i p m e n t is i n t e n d e d t o b e u s e d w i t h a s e p a r a t e p o w e r s u p p l y , it is
c o n n e c te d to th e e q u ip m e n t d u rin g th e m e a s u re m e n t.
T o m e a s u re th e tra n s ie n t v o lta g e a c ro s s a clearance, th e a p p ro p ria te im p u ls e te s t g e n e ra to r

of Annex D is used to g e n e ra te im p u ls e s . At le a s t th re e im p u ls e s of each p o la rity , w ith
in te r v a ls o f a t le a s t 1 s b e tw e e n im p u ls e s , a re a p p lie d b e tw e e n e a c h r e le v a n t p o in t.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 101 -
a) T ra n s ie n t v o lta g e s fro m a n A C mains

The i m p u l s e t e s t g e n e r a t o r c i r c u i t 2 o f T a b l e D .1 is u s e d t o g e n e r a t e 1 , 2 / 5 0 (is i m p u l s e s
e q u a l to th e AC mains transient voltages b e tw e e n th e fo llo w in g p o in ts :
- line-to-line;
- al l l i n e c o n d u c t o r s c o n d u c t i v e l y j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d n e u t r a l ;
- al l l i n e c o n d u c t o r s c o n d u c t i v e l y j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h ; a n d
- neut r al a n d p ro te c tiv e e a rth .
b) T ra n s ie n t v o lta g e s fro m a D C mains

The i m p u l s e t e s t g e n e r a t o r c i r c u i t 2 o f T a b l e D .1 is u s e d t o g e n e r a t e 1 , 2 / 5 0 (is i m p u l s e s
e q u a l to th e DC mains transient voltages, a t th e fo llo w in g p o in ts :
- t he p o s itiv e a n d n e g a tiv e s u p p ly c o n n e c tio n p o in ts ; a n d
- al l s u p p l y c o n n e c t i o n p o i n t s j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h .
c) T ra n s ie n t v o lta g e s fro m a n external circuit

T h e a p p r o p r i a t e t e s t g e n e r a t o r o f A n n e x D is u s e d t o g e n e r a t e i m p u l s e s a s a p p l i c a b l e a n d
d e s c rib e d in T a b le 13 and a re a p p lie d b e tw e e n each o f th e fo llo w in g external circuit
c o n n e c tio n p o in ts o f a s in g le in te rfa c e ty p e :
- e a c h p a i r o f t e r m i n a l s ( f o r e x a m p l e , A a n d B o r t i p a n d r i n g ) in a n i n t e r f a c e ; a n d
- al l t e r m i n a l s o f a s i n g l e i n t e r f a c e t y p e j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d e a r t h .
A v o l t a g e m e a s u r i n g d e v i c e is c o n n e c t e d a c r o s s t h e clearance in q u e s t i o n .
W h e r e t h e r e a r e s e v e r a l i d e n t i c a l c i r c u i t s , o n l y o n e is t e s t e d .
5.4.2.3.3 Determining required withstand voltage
The required withstand voltage is e q u a l t o t h e t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e a s d e t e r m i n e d in 5 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 2 ,

e x c e p t fo r th e fo llo w in g c a s e s :
- If a c ir c u it is o la te d f r o m mains i s c o n n e c t e d t o t h e m a i n protective earthing t e r m i n a l

th e
t h r o u g h a protective bonding conductor, t h e required withstand voltage m a y b e o n e
o v e r v o l t a g e c a t e g o r y l o w e r o r o n e AC mains v o l t a g e l o w e r in T a b l e 12. F o r a n AC mains
u p to a n d in c lu d in g 5 0 V R M S , n o a d ju s t m e n ts a re m a d e .
- In a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m th e mains s u p p lie d b y a D C s o u r c e w ith c a p a c itiv e filte rin g , a n d

c o n n e c te d to p ro te c tiv e required withstand voltage s h a l l b e
e a rth , th e assum ed to be
e q u a l t o t h e p e a k v a l u e o f t h e DC voltage o f t h e s o u r c e , o r t h e p e a k o f th e working
voltage o f t h e c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m t h e mains, w h i c h e v e r i s h i g h e r .
- If e q u i p m e n t is s u p p l i e d f r o m a d e d ic a te d battery th a t h a s n o p ro v is io n fo r c h a rg in g fro m
th e mains s u p p l y w i t h o u t r e m o v a l fro m th e e q u ip m e n t, th e tra n s ie n t v o lta g e is z e r o and
th e required withstand voltage i s e q u a l to th e p e a k o f th e working voltage.
5.4.2.3.4 Determining clearances using required withstand voltage
Each clearance s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t v a lu e o f T a b le 14.

- 102 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 14 - Minimum clearances using required withstand voltage
Required Basic insulation or supplementary Reinforced insulation

withstand voltage insulation
mm mm
V peak or DC Pollution degree Pollution degree
up to and including 1a 2 3 1a 2 3
330 0,01 0,02
400 0,02 0,04
500 0,04 0,08
0,2 〇 ,4
600 0,06 0,12
0,8 1,5
800 0,10 〇 ,2
1 000 0,15 〇 ,3
1 200 0,25 0,5
1 500 0,5 1,0
2 000 1,0 2,0
2 500 1,5 3,0
3 000 2,0 3,8
4 000 3,0 5,5
5 000 4,0 8,0
6 000 5,5 8,0
8 000 8,0 14
10 000 11 19
12 000 14 24
15 000 18 31
20 000 25 44
25 000 33 60
30 000 40 72
40 000 60 98
50 000 75 130
60 000 90 162
80 000 130 226
100 000 170 290
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum clearances shall be
- not exceeding 0,5 mm, the specified increment is 0,01 mm; and
一 exceeding 0 f5 mm, the specified increment is 0,1 mm.
5.4.2.4 Determining the adequacy of a clearance using an electric strength test
The cle a ra n ce s shall withstand an electric strength test. The test may be conducted using an
impulse voltage or an AC voltage or a DC voltage. The re q u ire d w ith s ta n d v o lta g e is
determined as given in 5.4.2.3.
The impulse withstand voltage test is carried out with a voltage having an appropriate
waveform (see Annex D) with the values specified in Table 15. Five impulses of each polarity
are applied with an interval of at least 1 s between pulses.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 103 -
The AC voltage test is conducted using a sinusoidal voltage with a peak value as specified in
Table 15 and is applied for 5 s.
The DC v o lta g e test is conducted using a DC v o lta g e specified in Table 15 and applied for
5 s in one polarity and then for 5 s in reverse polarity.
Table 15 - Electric strength test voltages
Required withstand voltage up to and including Test voltage for electric strength for clearances for
basic insulation or supplementary insulation
kV peak kV peak
(impulse or AC or DC)
0,33 0,36
0,5 0,54
0,8 0,93
1,5 1,75
2,5 2,92
4,0 4,92
6,0 7,39
8,0 9,85
12,0 14,77
U a 1,23 x U a
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum test voltage being
rounded up to the next higher 0,01 kV increment.
For reinforced insulation, the test voltage for electric strength is 160 % of the value for the basic insulation
after which this calculated test voltage is rounded up to the next higher 0,01 kV increment.
If the EUT fails the AC or DC test, the impulse test shall be used.
If the test is conducted at an altitude of 200 m or more above sea level, Table F.5 of IEC 60664-1:2007 may be
used, in which case linear interpolation between 200 m and 500 m altitudes and between the corresponding
impulse test voltages of Table F.5 of IEC 60664-1:2007 may be used.
a V is any required withstand voltage higher than 12,0 kV.
5.4.2.5 Multiplication factors for altitudes higher than 2 000 m above sea level
F o r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d and d e s ig n e d to be used m o re th a n 2 000 m above sea le v e l, th e

m in im u m clearances in T a b le 10, T a b l e 11 and T a b le 14 and th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t
v o lta g e s in T a b le 15 a re m u ltip lie d by th e m u ltip lic a tio n fa c to r fo r th e d e s ire d a ltitu d e
a c c o rd in g to T a b le 16.
NOTE 1 Higher altitudes can be simulated in a vacuum chamber.
NOTE 2 In China, special requirements in choosing multiplication factors for altitudes above 2 000 m exist.

- 104 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 16 - Multiplication factors for clearances and test voltages
Normal Multiplication factor for electric

Altitude barometric Multiplication strength test voltages
pressure factor for
m clearances > 1 mm to > 1 0 mm to
< 1 mm
kPa < 1 0 mm < 1 0 0 mm
2 000 80,0 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00
3 000 70,0 1,14 1,05 1,07 1,1 〇
4 000 62,0 1,29 1,10 1,15 1,20
5 000 54,0 1,48 1,16 1,24 1,33
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum multiplication factor
being rounded up to the next higher 0,01 increment.
Compliance is checked by measurement and test taking into account the relevant clauses of
Annex 〇 and Annex T.
The following conditions apply:
- movabl e parts are placed in their most unfavourable positions;

- cl ear ances from an e n c lo s u re of insulating material through a slot or opening are
measured according to Figure 0.13f point X;
- during the force tests, metal e n c lo s u re s shall not come into contact with bare conductive
parts of:
• ES2 circuits， unless the product is in a re s tric te d a cce ss area, or
• ES3 circuits;
- after the tests of Annex T:
• the dimensions for cle a ra n ce s are measured, and
• the relevant electric strength test shall be applied， and
• for the glass impact test of Clause T.9， damage to the finish, small dents that do not
reduce cle a ra n ce s below the specified values, surface cracks and the like are ignored.
If a through crack appears, cle a ra n ce s shall not be reduced. For cracks not visible to
the naked e y e , an electric strength test shall be conducted; and
- components and parts, other than parts serving as an e n clo su re , are subjected to the test
of Clause T.2. After the application of the force, cle a ra n ce s shall not be reduced below
the required values.
For circuits connected to coaxial cable distribution or outdoor antennas, compliance is

checked by the tests o f 5.5.8.
5.4.3 Creepage distances
5.4.3.1 General
Creepage distances s h a ll be so d im e n s io n e d th a t, fo r a g iv e n RMS working voltage,

pollution degree a n d m a te ria l g ro u p , n o fla s h o v e r o r b r e a k d o w n o f in s u la tio n (fo r e x a m p le ,
d u e to tr a c k in g ) w ill o c c u r .
Creepage distances fo r basic insulation and supplementary insulation f o r f r e q u e n c i e s u p

to 30 kH z s h a ll c o m p ly w ith T a b le 17. Creepage distances f o r basic insulation a n d
supplementary insulation fo r fre q u e n c ie s g re a te r th a n 30 kH z and up to 400 kH z s h a ll
c o m p ly w ith T a b le 18.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 105 -
The creepage distance re q u ire m e n ts fo r fre q u e n c ie s up to 400 kHz can be used fo r

f r e q u e n c i e s o v e r 4 0 0 k H z u n t i l a d d i t i o n a l d a t a is a v a i l a b l e .
NOTE Creepage distances for frequencies higher than 400 kHz are under consideration.
The creepage distance b e tw e e n th e o u te r in s u la tin g s u rfa c e (se e 5 .4 .3 .2 ) of a c o n n e c to r

(in c lu d in g an o p e n in g in th e enclosure) a n d c o n d u c t i v e p a rts th a t a re c o n n e c te d to ES2
w ith in th e c o n n e c to r (o r in t h e enclosure) s h a l l c o m p l y w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts fo r basic
insulation.
The creepage distance b e tw e e n th e o u te r in s u la tin g s u rfa c e (se e 5.4.3.2 ) of a c o n n e c to r

(in c lu d in g an o p e n in g in th e enclosure) and c o n d u c tiv e p a rts th a t a re c o n n e c te d ES3
to
w i t h i n t h e c o n n e c t o r ( o r in t h e enclosure) s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s fo r reinforced
insulation.
As an e x c e p tio n , th e creepage distance m ay c o m p ly w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts fo r basic

insulation i f t h e c o n n e c t o r is :
- f i xed to th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
- l o c a t e d in te r n a lly to th e o u t e r electrical enclosure o f th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
- only accessible a fte r re m o v a l o f a s u b a s s e m b ly th a t
• i s r e q u i r e d t o b e in p l a c e d u r i n g normal operating conditions, and
• is p r o v i d e d w i t h a n instructional safeguard to re p la c e th e re m o v e d s u b a s s e m b ly .
F o r a ll o t h e r creepage distances in c o n n e c t o r s , i n c l u d i n g c o n n e c t o r s t h a t a r e n o t f i x e d t o t h e
e q u i p m e n t , t h e m i n i m u m v a l u e s d e t e r m i n e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 3 a p p l y .
T h e a b o v e m in im u m creepage distances fo r c o n n e c t o r s d o n o t a p p ly to c o n n e c t o r s lis te d in

C la u s e G .4.
If th e m in im u m creepage distance d e r i v e d f r o m T a b l e 17 o r T a b l e 18 i s l e s s t h a n t h e
m in im u m clearance, t h e n t h e m i n i m u m clearance s h a l l b e a p p l i e d a s t h e m i n i m u m creepage
distance.
For g la s s , m ic a , g la z e d c e ra m ic or s im ila r in o rg a n ic m a te ria ls , if t h e m in im u m creepage

distance clearance,
is g r e a t e r t h a n t h e a p p l i c a b l e m i n i m u m th e v a lu e o f m in im u m clearance
m a y be a p p lie d a s th e m in im u m creepage distance.
For reinforced insulation, t h e v a l u e s fo r creepage distances a re tw ic e th e v a lu e s fo r basic

insulation in T a b l e 17 o r T a b l e 18.
5.4.3.2 Test method
The following conditions apply:
一 movable parts are placed in their most unfavourable positions;

- for equipment incorporating ordinary n o n -d e ta ch a b le p o w e r s u p p ly cords, creepage
d is ta n c e measurements are made with supply conductors of the largest cross-sectional
area specified in Clause G.7f and also without conductors;
一 when measuring creepage d is ta n c e s from an a c c e s s ib le outer surface of an e n c lo s u re
of insulating material through a slot or opening in the e n c lo s u re or through an opening in
an a c c e s s ib le connector, the a c c e s s ib le outer surface of the e n c lo s u re shall be
considered to be conductive as if it were covered by a metal foil during the test of V.1.2,
applied without appreciable force (see Figure 0.73, point X);
一 the dimensions for creepage d is ta n c e s functioning as b a s ic in s u la tio n , s u p p le m e n ta ry
in s u la tio n and re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n are measured after the tests of Annex T according
to 4.4.3;

- 106 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- for the glass impact test of Clause T.9f damage to the finish, small dents that do not
reduce creepage d is ta n c e s below the specified values, surface cracks and the like are
ignored. If a through crack appears, creepage d is ta n c e s shall not be reduced;
- components and parts, other than parts serving as an e n clo su re , are subjected to the test
of Clause T.2. After the application of the force, creepage d is ta n c e s shall not be reduced
below the required values.
5.4.3.3 Material group and CTI
M a te ria l g r o u p s a re b a s e d o n th e C T I a n d a re c la s s ifie d a s fo llo w s :
M a te ria l G r o u p I 600 < CTI
M a t e r i a l G r o u p II 400 < CTI < 600
M a te ria l G r o u p Ilia 175 < CTI < 400
M a te ria l G r o u p lllb 100 < CTI < 175
The m a te ria l g ro u p is c h e c k e d b y e v a lu a tio n o f th e te s t d a ta fo r th e m a te ria l a c c o rd in g to

IE C 6 0 1 1 2 u s in g 5 0 d r o p s o f s o lu tio n A .
If t h e m a t e r i a l g r o u p is n o t k n o w n , M a t e r i a l G r o u p l l l b s h a l l b e a s s u m e d .
If a C T I o f 1 7 5 o r g r e a t e r is n e e d e d , a n d t h e d a t a is n o t a v a i l a b l e , t h e m a t e r i a l g r o u p c a n be
e s t a b l i s h e d w i t h a t e s t f o r p r o o f t r a c k i n g i n d e x ( P T I ) a s d e t a i l e d in I E C 6 0 1 1 2 . A m a t e r i a l m a y
be in c lu d e d in a g r o u p if its P T I e s t a b l is h e d by th e s e te s ts is e q u a l t o , o r g r e a t e r t h a n , t h e
lo w e r v a lu e o f th e c o m p a r a tiv e tra c k in g in d e x (C T I) s p e c ifie d fo r th e g ro u p .
Compliance is checked by measurement taking into account Annex 0 7 Annex T and Annex V.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 107 -
Table 17 - Minimum creepage distances for basic insulation

and supplementary insulation in mm
RMS working Pollution degree

voltage
1a 2 3
up to and
including Material group
V I, II ， Ilia, m b I II Ilia, lllb I II Ilia, lllb b
10 0,08 0,4 0,4 0,4 1,0 1,0 1,0
12,5 0,09 0,42 0,42 0,42 1,05 1,05 1,05
16 0,1 0,45 0,45 0,45 1,1 1,1 1,1
20 0,11 0,48 0,48 0,48 1,2 1,2 1,2
25 0,125 0,5 0,5 0,5 1,25 1,25 1,25
32 0,14 0,53 0,53 0,53 1,3 1,3 1,3
40 0,16 0,56 0,8 1,1 1,4 1,6 1,8
50 0,18 0,6 0,85 1,2 1,5 1,9
63 0,2 0,63 0,9 1,25 1,6 1,8 2,0
80 0,22 0,67 0,95 1,3 1,7 1,9 2,1
100 0,25 0,71 1,0 1,4 1,8 2,0 2,2
125 0,28 0,75 1,05 1,5 1,9 2,1 2,4
160 0,32 0,8 1,1 1,6 2,0 2,2 2,5
200 0,42 1,0 1,4 2,0 2,5 2,8 3,2
250 0.56 1,25 1,8 2,5 3,2 3,6 4,0
320 0,75 1,6 2,2 3,2 4,0 4,5 5,0
400 1,0 2,0 2,8 4,0 5,0 5,6 6,3
500 1,3 2,5 3,6 5,0 6,3 7,1 8,0
630 1,8 3,2 4,5 6,3 8,0 9.0 10
800 2,4 4,0 5,6 8,0 10 11 12,5
1 000 3,2 5,0 7,1 10 12,5 14 16
1 250 4,2 6,3 9,0 12,5 16 18 20
1 600 5,6 8,0 11 16 20 22 25
2 000 7,5 10 14 20 25 28 32
2 500 10 12,5 18 25 32 36 40
3 200 12,5 16 22 32 40 45 50
4 000 16 20 28 40 50 56 63
5 000 20 25 36 50 63 71 80
6 300 25 32 45 63 80 90 100
8 000 32 40 56 80 100 110 125
10 000 40 50 71 100 125 140 160
12 500 50 63 90 125
16 000 63 80 110 160
20 000 80 100 140 200
25 000 100 125 180 250
32 000 125 160 220 320
40 000 160 200 280 400
50 000 200 250 360 500
63 000 250 320 450 600
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum creepage distance
being rounded to the next higher 0,1 mm increment or the value in the next row below whichever is lower.
For reinforced insulation, the rounding to the next higher 0,1 mm increment or to double the value in the next
row is done after doubling the calculated value for basic insulation.
b Material Group lllb is not recommended for applications in pollution degree 3 with an RMS working voltage
above 630 V.

- 108 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 18 - Minimum values of creepage distances (in mm) for frequencies higher
than 30 kHz and up to 400 kHz
Voltage 30 kHz < / < 100 kHz 100 kHz < f < , 200 kHz 200 kHz < f< , 400 kHz
kV
〇 ,1 0,016 7 0,02 0,025

〇 ,2 0,042 0,043 0,05
〇 ,3 0,083 0,09 0,1

0,4 0,125 0,13 0,15
〇 ,5 0,183 0,23 0,25
0,6 0,267 0,38 0,4

0,7 0,358 0,55 0,68
0,8 0,45 0,8 1,1

0,9 0,525 1,0 1,9
1 〇 ,6 1,15 3
The values for the creepage distances in the table apply for pollution degree 1. For pollution degree 2 a
multiplication factor of 1,2 and for pollution degree 3, a multiplication factor of 1,4 shall be used.
Linear interpolation may be applied, the result being rounded up to the next significant digit.
The data given in this Table 18 (from Table 2 of IEC 60664-4:2005) does not take into account the influence of
tracking phenomena. For that purpose, Table 17 has to be taken into account. Therefore, if values in Table 18
are smaller than those in Table 17, the values of Table 17 apply.
5.4.4 Solid insulation
The re q u ire m e n ts o f th is s u b c la u s e a p p ly to solid insulation， i n c l u d i n g com pounds and gel

m a te ria ls u s e d a s in s u la tio n .
Solid insulation s h a ll n o t b re a k d o w n :
- d u e to o v e rv o lta g e s , in c lu d in g tra n s ie n ts , th a t e n te r th e e q u ip m e n t, a n d p e a k v o lta g e s th a t

m a y be g e n e r a te d w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
- d u e t o p i n h o l e s in t h i n l a y e r s o f i n s u l a t i o n .
E n a m e lle d c o a tin g s s h a ll not be used fo r basic insulation, supplementary insulation or

reinforced insulation e x c e p t a s g i v e n in G . 6 . 2 .
E x c e p t fo r p rin te d b o a rd s , solid insulation s h a ll e ith e r:
- c o m p l y w i t h m i n i m u m d i s t a n c e s t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 4 . 2 ; o r
- m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s a n d p a s s t h e t e s t s in 5 . 4 . 4 . 3 t o 5 . 4 . 4 . 7 , a s a p p l i c a b l e .
G la s s u s e d a s solid insulation s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e g l a s s i m p a c t t e s t a s s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e
T.9. Dam age to th e fin is h , s m a ll d e n ts th a t do not re d u ce clearances b e lo w th e s p e c ifie d
v a lu e s , s u r fa c e c r a c k s a n d th e lik e a re ig n o r e d . If a t h r o u g h cra ck a p p e a rs, clearances and
creepage distances s h a ll n o t b e r e d u c e d b e lo w th e s p e c ifie d v a lu e s .
F o r p rin te d b o a rd s , s e e C la u s e G .1 3 . F o r a n te n n a te rm in a ls , s e e 5 .4 .5 . F o r solid insulation

o n in te rn a l w irin g , s e e 5 .4 .6 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 —109 —
5.4.4.2 Minimum distance through insulation
E xce p t w h e re a n o th e r s u b c la u s e o f C la u s e 5 a p p lie s , d is ta n c e s th ro u g h in s u la tio n s h a ll be

d im e n s io n e d a c c o rd in g to th e a p p lic a tio n o f th e in s u la tio n and a s fo llo w s (se e F ig u re 0 . 1 5
a n d F ig u re 0 .1 6 ) :
- if th e working voltage does not exceed ES2 v o lta g e lim its , th e r e is n o re q u ire m e n t fo r
d is ta n c e th ro u g h in s u la tio n ;
- if th e working voltage e x c e e d s E S 2 v o lta g e lim its , th e fo llo w in g ru le s a p p ly :
• fo r basic insulation, n o m i n i m u m d i s t a n c e t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n is s p e c i f i e d ;
• fo r supplementary insulation or reinforced insulation c o m p ris e d o f a s in g le la y e r,

th e m in im u m d is ta n c e th r o u g h in s u la tio n s h a ll b e 0 ,4 m m ;
• fo r supplementary insulation or reinforced insulation c o m p ris e d o f m u ltip le la y e rs ,

th e m in im u m d is ta n c e th r o u g h in s u la tio n s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .6 .
5.4.4.3 Insulating compound forming solid insulation
T h e r e is n o m i n i m u m in te rn a l clearance or creepage distance r e q u i r e d if:
- t he in s u la tin g com pound c o m p le te ly fills th e c a s in g of a com ponent or s u b a s s e m b ly ,

in c lu d in g a s e m ic o n d u c to r d e v ic e (fo r e x a m p le , a n o p to c o u p le r); a n d
- t he com ponent or s u b a s s e m b ly m e e ts th e m in im u m d is ta n c e s th ro u g h in s u la tio n

o f 5 .4 .4 .2 ; an d
- a s in g le s a m p le p a s s e s th e te s ts o f 5 .4 .1 .5 .2 .
NOTE Some examples of such treatment are variously known as potting, encapsulation and vacuum
impregnation.
S u c h c o n s tr u c tio n s c o n ta in in g c e m e n te d jo in ts s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .5 .
Alternative requirements for semiconductor devices are given in 5.4.4.4.
F o r p rin te d b o a rd s , s e e C la u s e G .1 3 a n d fo r w o u n d c o m p o n e n ts , s e e 5 .4 .4 .7 .
Compliance is checked by sectioning the sample. There shall be no visible voids in the
insulating material.
5.4.4.4 Solid insulation in semiconductor devices
T h e re is no m in im u m clearance o r creepage distance, a n d n o m i n i m u m d i s t a n c e

in te rn a l
th ro u g h in s u la tio n fo r supplementary insulation o r reinforced insulation c o n s i s t i n g o f a n
in s u la tin g com pound c o m p le te ly fillin g th e c a s in g of a s e m ic o n d u c to r com ponent (fo r
e x a m p le , a n o p to c o u p le r ) p ro v id e d th a t th e c o m p o n e n t:
- passes th e type tests and in s p e c tio n c rite ria of 5 .4 .7 ; and passes routine tests fo r
e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h d u r i n g m a n u f a c t u r i n g , u s i n g t h e a p p r o p r i a t e t e s t in 5 . 4 . 9 . 2 ; o r
- c o m p l i e s w ith C la u s e G .1 2 .
S u c h c o n s tr u c tio n s c o n ta in in g c e m e n te d jo in ts s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .5 .
A lte rn a tiv e ly , a s e m ic o n d u c to r m a y b e e v a lu a te d a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .4 .3 .
5.4.4.5 Insulating compound forming cemented joints
T h e re q u ire m e n ts s p e c ifie d b e lo w a p p ly w h e n an in s u la tin g c o m p o u n d fo rm s a c e m e n te d jo in t

b e tw e e n tw o n o n -c o n d u c tiv e p a rts o r b e tw e e n a n o th e r n o n -c o n d u c tiv e p a rt and its e lf. T h e s e
r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to o p to c o u p le r s th a t c o m p ly w ith IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 .

- 110 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
W h e re th e p a th b e tw e e n c o n d u c tiv e p a rts is fille d w ith in s u la tin g com pound, and th e

in s u la tin g c o m p o u n d fo rm s a c e m e n te d jo in t b e tw e e n tw o n o n -c o n d u c tiv e p a rts o r b e tw e e n a
n o n -c o n d u c tiv e p a rt a n d its e lf (s e e F ig u re 0 . 1 4 , F ig u re 0 . 1 5 and F ig u re 0 . 1 6 ) , one o f th e
fo llo w in g a ), b ) o r c) a p p lie s .
a) T h e d is ta n c e a lo n g th e p a th b e tw e e n th e tw o c o n d u c tiv e p a rts s h a ll b e n o t le s s th a n th e
m in im u m clearances and creepage distances fo r pollution degree 2. T h e re q u ire m e n ts
fo r d is ta n c e th ro u g h in s u la tio n o f 5 .4 .4 .2 d o n o t a p p ly a lo n g th e jo in t.
b) The d is ta n c e a lo n g th e p a th b e tw e e n th e tw o c o n d u c tiv e p a rts s h a ll n o t b e le s s th a n th e

m in im u m clearances and creepage distances fo r pollution degree 1. A d d itio n a lly , o n e
s a m p l e s h a l l p a s s t h e t e s t o f 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 2 . T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r d i s t a n c e t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n in
5 .4 .4 .2 d o n o t a p p ly a lo n g th e jo in t.
c) The re q u ire m e n ts fo r d is ta n c e th ro u g h in s u la tio n o f 5 .4 .4 .2 a p p ly b e tw e e n th e c o n d u c tiv e

p a rts a lo n g th e jo in t. A d d itio n a lly , th r e e s a m p le s s h a ll p a s s th e te s t o f 5 .4 .7 .
For a) and b) a b o v e , if t h e in s u la tin g m a te ria ls in v o lv e d have d iffe r e n t m a te ria l g ro u p s , th e

w o r s t c a s e is u s e d . If a m a t e r i a l g r o u p is n o t k n o w n , M a t e r i a l G r o u p l l l b s h a l l b e u s e d .
F o r b) a n d c) a b o v e , th e te s ts o f 5 .4 .1 .5 .2 a n d 5 .4 .7 a re n o t a p p lie d to th e in n e r la y e rs o f a
p rin te d b o a rd m ade u s in g p re -p re g if t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o f th e p rin te d b o a rd m e a su re d d u rin g
th e h e a tin g te s t o f 5 .4 .1 .4 d o e s n o t e x c e e d 9 0 °C .
NOTE Some examples of cemented joints are as follows:

- two non-conductive parts cemented together (for example, two layers of a multilayer board,
see Figure 0 .1 4 ) or the split bobbin of a transformer where the centre limb is secured by adhesive
(see Figure 0.16);
spirally wrapped insulation on a winding wire, sealed by adhesive insulating compound, is an example of
PD1; or
- the joint between a non-conductive part (the casing) and the insulating compound itself in an optocoupler
(see Figure 0.15).
5.4.4.6 Thin sheet material
5.4.4.6.1 General requirements
T h e re is no d im e n s io n a l o r c o n s tru c tio n a l re q u ire m e n t fo r in s u la tio n in th in sheet m a te ria l

used as basic insulation.
NOTE An instrument to carry out the electric strength test on thin sheets of insulating material is described in
Figure 29.
I n s u l a t i o n in t h i n s h e e t m a t e r i a l s m a y b e u s e d f o r supplementary insulation and reinforced

insulation, irre s p e c tiv e o f th e d is ta n c e th ro u g h in s u la tio n , p ro v id e d th a t:
- t wo o r m o re la y e rs a re u s e d ; a n d
- t h e i n s u l a t i o n is w i t h i n t h e e q u i p m e n t enclosure; and
- t h e i n s u l a t i o n is n o t s u b j e c t to h a n d l i n g o r a b r a s i o n d u r i n g ordinary person or instructed

person s e rv ic in g ; a n d
- t he re q u ire m e n ts and te s ts of 5 .4 .4 .6 .2 (fo r s e p a ra b le la y e rs ) or 5 .4 .4 .6 .3 (fo r non-

s e p a r a b le la y e r s ) a re m e t.
T h e tw o o r m o r e la y e r s a re n o t r e q u ir e d to b e fix e d to th e s a m e c o n d u c t iv e p a rt. T h e tw o o r
m o re la y e rs c a n be:
- f i xed to o n e o f th e c o n d u c tiv e p a rts re q u irin g s e p a ra tio n ; o r
- s h a r e d b e tw e e n th e tw o c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ; o r
- not fix e d to e ith e r c o n d u c tiv e p a rt.
F o r i n s u l a t i o n in t h r e e o r m o r e l a y e r s o f n o n - s e p a r a b l e t h i n s h e e t m a t e r i a l s :

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 111 -
- m i n i m u m d is ta n c e s th ro u g h in s u la tio n a re n o t re q u ire d ; a n d
- e a c h la y e r o f in s u la tio n d o e s n o t h a v e to b e o f th e s a m e m a te r ia l.
5.4.4.6.2 Separable thin sheet material
In a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5 . 4 . 4 . 6 . 1 , f o r :
- supplementary insulation c o n s i s t i n g o f t w o l a y e r s o f m a te ria l, e a c h la y e r s h a ll p a s s th e

e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h t e s t f o r supplementary insulation; or
- supplementary insulation c o n s is tin g o f th re e la y e rs o f m a te ria l, a n y c o m b in a tio n o f tw o

la y e r s s h a ll p a s s th e e le c tr ic s tr e n g th te s t fo r supplementary insulation; or
- reinforced insulation c o n s is tin g of tw o la y e rs of m a te ria l, each la y e r s h a ll pass th e

e le c tric s tre n g th te s t fo r reinforced insulation; or
- reinforced insulation c o n s is tin g o f th re e la y e rs o f m a te ria l, a n y c o m b in a tio n o f tw o la y e rs

s h a ll p a s s th e e le c tr ic s tr e n g th te s t fo r reinforced insulation.
If m o r e th a n t h r e e la y e r s a r e u s e d , la y e r s m a y b e d iv id e d in to tw o o r th r e e g r o u p s o f la y e rs .
E a c h g r o u p o f la y e rs s h a ll p a s s th e e le c tr ic s tr e n g th te s t fo r th e a p p r o p r ia te in s u la tio n .
A t e s t o n a l a y e r o r g r o u p o f l a y e r s is n o t r e p e a t e d o n a n i d e n t i c a l l a y e r o r g r o u p .
T h e r e is n o r e q u i r e m e n t f o r a ll l a y e r s o f i n s u l a t i o n t o b e o f t h e s a m e m a t e r i a l a n d t h i c k n e s s .
5.4.4.6.3 Non-separable thin sheet material
F o r i n s u l a t i o n c o n s i s t i n g o f n o n - s e p a r a b l e t h i n s h e e t m a t e r i a l s , in a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 5 . 4 . 4 . 6 . 1 , t h e t e s t p r o c e d u r e s in T a b l e 1 9 a r e a p p l i e d . T h e r e is n o r e q u i r e m e n t f o r a ll l a y e r s
o f in s u la tio n to b e o f th e s a m e m a te ria l a n d th ic k n e s s .
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the tests specified in Table 19.
Table 19 - Tests for insulation in non-separable layers
Number of layers Test procedure

Supplementary insulation
Two or more layers: The test procedure of 5.4.4.6.4 is applied
Reinforced insulation
Two layers: The test procedure of 5.4.4.6.4 is applied

Three or more layers: The test procedures of 5.4.4.6.4 and 5.4.4.6.5 a are applied
NOTE The purpose of the tests in 5.4.4.6.5 is to ensure that the material has adequate strength to resist
damage when hidden in inner layers of insulation. Therefore, the tests are not applied to insulation in two layers.
The tests in 5.4.4.6.5 are not applied to supplementary insulation.
a Where the insulation is integral to winding wire, the test does not apply.
5.4.4.6.4 Standard test procedure for non-separable thin sheet material
For non-separable layers， electric strength tests are applied in accordance with 5.4.9.1 to all
layers together. The test voltage is:
- 2 0 0 % of Utes{ if two layers are used; or

- 1 5 0 % o f Utest if three or more layers are used ，
where Utes{ is the test voltage specified in 5.4.9.1 for s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n or

re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n as appropriate.

- 112 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
NOTE Unless all the layers are of the same material and have the same thickness, there is a possibility that the
test voltage will be divided unequally between layers， causing breakdown of a layer that would have passed if
tested separately.
5.4.4.6.5 Mandrel test
The test requirements for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n made of three or more thin insulating sheets
of material that are inseparable are specified below.
NOTE This test is based on IEC 61558-1 and will give the same results.
Three test samples, each individual sample consisting of three or more layers of non-
separable thin sheet material forming re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n , are used. One sample is fixed to
the mandrel of the test fixture given in Figure 25. The fixing shall be performed as shown in
Figure 26.
Side view
Material: corrosion-resistant metal
60。 ± 5〇
Detail A - Tip
Figure 25 - Mandrel

旧C 62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018 - 113 -
Fixing system
Insulating material
▼1 5 0 N ± 1 0 N
IEC IEC
The final position of the mandrel is rotated

230° 土 5° from the initial position.
Figure 26 - Initial position of mandrel Figure 27 - Final position of mandrel
A pull is applied to the free end of the sample, using an appropriate clamping device. The
mandrel is rotated:
- f rom the initial position (Figure 26) to the final position (Figure 27) and back;
- a second time from the initial position to the final position.
If a sample breaks during rotation where it is fixed to the mandrel or to the clamping device,
this does not constitute a failure. If a sample breaks at any other place, the test has failed.
After the above test， a sheet of metal foil, 0,035 mm ± 0,005 mm thick, at least 200 mm long,
is placed along the surface of the sample, hanging down on each side of the mandrel
(see Figure 27). The surface of the foil in contact with the sample shall be conductive， not
oxidized or otherwise insulated. The foil is positioned so that its edges are not less than
18 mm from the edges of the sample (see Figure 28). The foil is then tightened by two equal
weights, one at each end, using appropriate clamping devices.
Insulating material
Metal foil
IEC
Figure 28 - Position of metal foil on insulating material

- 114 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
While the mandrel is in its final position, and within the 60 s following the final positioning, an
electric strength test is applied between the mandrel and the metal foil in accordance with
5.4.9.1. The test voltage is 150 % of U[esV but not less than 5 kV RMSf C/te s t is the test
voltage specified in 5.4.9.1 for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n as appropriate.
The test is repeated on the other two samples.
5.4.4.7 Solid insulation in wound components
Basic insulation， supplementary insulation or reinforced insulation in a wound

c o m p o n e n t m a y b e p ro v id e d by:
- t he in s u la tio n on w o u n d c o m p o n e n ts (s e e C la u s e G .5 ); o r
一 th e in s u la tio n on o th e r w ire (s e e C la u s e G .6 ); o r
- a c o m b in a tio n o f th e tw o .
W o u n d c o m p o n e n ts c o n ta in in g c e m e n te d jo in ts s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .5 .
P la n a r t r a n s fo r m e r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f C la u s e G .1 3 .
Compliance with the requirements of 5.4.4.2 to 5.4.4.7 for the adequacy o f solid insulation is
checked by inspection and measurement， taking into account Annex O , by the electric
strength tests o f 5.4.9.1 and the additional tests required in 5.4.4.2 to 5A .4.7f as applicable.
5.4.4.9 Solid insulation requirements at frequencies higher than 30 kHz
T h e s u ita b ility o f th e solid insulation s h a ll b e d e te r m in e d a s fo llo w s :
- D e t e r m i n e th e v a lu e o f th e b re a kd o w n e le c tr ic fie ld s tre n g th o f th e in s u la tio n m a te ria l at

mains power fre q u e n c y EP in k V / m m (R M S ) fo r th e in s u la tin g m a te ria l. One of th e
fo llo w in g m e th o d s s h a ll b e u s e d to d e te r m in e th e v a lu e of Ep:
• th e v a lu e d e c la r e d b y th e m a n u f a c t u r e r b a s e d o n m a te r ia l m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s d a ta ; o r
• th e v a lu e fro m T a b le 2 0 ; o r
• t h e v a l u e b a s e d o n t h e t e s t s p e c i f i e d in I E C 6 0 2 4 3 - 1 .
T h e m a n u f a c t u r e r is r e s p o n s i b l e f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e v a l u e .
- Determine th e re d u c tio n fa c to r A：
R fo r th e b re a kd o w n e le c tric fie ld s tre n g th of th e
i n s u l a t i n g m a t e r i a l a t t h e a p p l i c a b l e f r e q u e n c y f r o m T a b l e 2 1 o r T a b l e 2 2 . I f t h e m a t e r i a l is
n o t o n e l i s t e d in T a b l e 21 o r T a b l e 2 2 , u s e t h e a v e r a g e r e d u c t i o n f a c t o r in t h e l a s t r o w o f
T a b l e 21 o r T a b l e 2 2 a s a p p li c a b le .
- D e t e r m i n e th e v a lu e o f th e b r e a k d o w n e le c tr ic fie ld s tr e n g th a t th e a p p lic a b le fr e q u e n c y EF
b y m u ltip ly in g th e v a lu e w ith th e re d u c tio n fa c to r
Ep — Ep x ATp
- Determine th e a c tu a l e le c tric s tre n g th Fw o f th e in s u la tin g m a te ria l by m u ltip ly in g th e

v a lu e Ef w ith th e to ta l th ic k n e s s (d in m m ) o f t h e i n s u l a t i n g m a t e r i a l .
V]N = EF x d
- For basic insulation orsupplementary insulation, Fw s h a ll e x c e e d th e m e a su re d h ig h

fre q u e n c y p e a k o f th e working voltage F p w b y 2 0 % .
I’ w > 1，
2 x ^ pw , 1，
41
- For reinforced insulation， Kw s h a ll e x c e e d tw ic e th e m e a su re d h ig h fr e q u e n c y peak of
th e working voltage F p w b y 2 0 %.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018 - 115 -
厂w 〉 1 , 2 x 2 x Vp\j\j / 1 ,4 1
A s a n a lte rn a tiv e to th e a b o v e , th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .9 .1 m a y b e a p p lie d

e x c e p t th a t th e mains fr e q u e n c y te s t v o lta g e s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
- f or basic insulation: 1 , 2 x J/pW /
- f or reinforced insulation: 1 , 2 x 2 x Kpw /
T h e r e s h a ll b e n o b r e a k d o w n .
Table 20 - Electric field strength E p for some commonly used materials
Breakdow n e le c tric fie ld strength E p
kV/mm
M aterial T hickness o f the m aterial
mm
0,75 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,03
Porcelain a 9,2 - • _ -
Silicon-glass a 14 ■ _ _ ■
Phenolic a 17 ■ ■ - ■
Ceramic a 19 ■ m
m _ ■
Teflon® a 1 27 ■ ■ ■ ■
Melamine-glass a 27 ■ _ _ ■
Mica a 29 ■ ■ ■ ■
Paper phenolic a 38 ■ • _ -
Polyethylene b 49 ■ _ 52 ■
Polystyrene c 55 65 ■ - ■
Glass a 60 ■ m
m _ ■
Kapton® 3 2 303 ■ ■ - ■
FR530L3 33 _ m
m _ ■
Mica-filled phenolic a 28 ■ ■ ■ ■
Glass-silico 门 e lam inate3 18 ■ 雜 _ 雜
Cellulose-acetobutyrate d ■ ■ 120 _ 210

Polycarbonate d - ■ 160 - 270
Cellulose-triacetate d ■ ■ 120 _ 210
NOTE Missing values in the above and the values for other materials not in the list are under investigation.
a For the breakdown electric field strength of the specified materials, the EP value of 0,75 mm thickness may
be used for all thicknesses.
b The EP value of 0,05 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,05 mm. The EP value
of 0,75 mm thickness is used otherwise.
c The EP value of 0,08 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,08 mm. The EP value
of 0,75 mm thickness is used otherwise.
d The EP value of 0,03 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,03 mm. The EP value
of 0,06 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,06 mm and greater than 0,03 mm.
1 Teflon® is the trademark of a product supplied by DuPont. This information is given for the convenience of
users of this document and does not constitute an endorsement by IEC of the product named. Equivalent
products may be used if they can be shown to lead to the same results.
2 Kapton® is the trademark of a product supplied by DuPont. This information is given for the convenience of
users of this document and does not constitute an endorsement by IEC of the product named. Equivalent
products may be used if they can be shown to lead to the same results.

- 116 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 21 - Reduction factors for the value of breakdown

electric field strength E p at higher frequencies
Frequency
kHz
Material a
30 100 200 300 400 500 1 000 2 000 3 000 5 000 10 000
Reduction factor KR
Porcelain 0,52 0,42 0,40 0,39 0,38 0,37 0,36 0,35 0,35 0,34 0,30
Silicon-glass 0,79 0,65 0,57 0,53 0,49 0,46 0,39 0,33 0,31 0,29 0,26
Phenolic 0,82 0,71 0,53 0,42 0,36 0,34 0,24 0,16 0,14 0,13 0,12
Ceramic 0,78 0,64 0,62 0,56 0,54 0,51 0,46 0,42 0,37 0,35 0,29
Teflon® 0,57 0,54 0,52 0,51 0,48 0,46 0,45 0,44 0,41 0,37 0,22
Melamine-glass 0,48 0,41 0,31 0,27 0,24 0,22 0,16 0,12 0,10 0,09 0,06
Mica 0,69 0,55 0,48 0,45 0,41 0,38 0,34 0,28 0,26 0,24 0,20
Paper phenolic 0,58 0,47 0,40 0,32 0,26 0,23 0,16 0,11 0,08 0,06 0,05
Polyethylene 0,36 0,28 0,22 0,21 0,20 0,19 0,16 0,13 0,12 0,12 0,11
Polystyrene 0,35 0,22 0,15 0,13 0,13 0,11 0,08 0,06 0,06 0,06 0,06
Glass 0,37 0,21 0,15 0,13 0,11 0,10 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,05 0,04
Other materials 0,43 0,35 0,30 0,27 0,25 0,24 0,20 0,17 0,16 0,14 0,12
If the frequency lies between the values in any two columns, the reduction factor value in the next column shall
be used or a logarithmic interpolation may be used between any two adjacent columns with the calculated value
rounded down to the nearest 0,01 value.
This data is for materials that are 0,75 mm thick.
Table 22 - Reduction factors for the value of breakdown electric

field strength E p at higher frequencies for thin materials
Frequency
kHz
Thin material
30 100 200 300 400 500 1 000 2 000 3 000 5 000 10 000
Reduction factor K R
Cellulose-acetobutyrate
0,67 0,43 0,32 0,27 0,24 0,20 0,15 0,11 0,09 0,07 0,06
(0,03 mm)
Cellulose-acetobutyrate
0,69 0,49 0,36 0,30 0,26 0,23 0,17 0,13 0,11 0,08 0,06
(0,06 mm)
Polycarbonate (0,03 mm) 0,61 0,39 0,31 0,25 0,23 0,20 0,14 0,10 0,08 0,06 0,05
Polycarbonate (0,06 mm) 0J0 0,49 0,39 0,33 0,28 0,25 0,19 0,13 0,11 0,08 0,06
Cellulose-triacetate
0,67 0,43 0,31 0,26 0,23 0,20 0,14 0,10 0,09 0,07 0,06
(0,03 mm)
Cellulose-triacetate
0,72 0,50 0,36 0,31 0,27 0,23 0,17 0,13 0,10 0,10 0,06
(0,06 mm)
Other thin foil materials 0,68 0,46 0,34 0,29 0,25 0,22 0,16 0,12 0,10 0,08 0,06
If the frequency lies between the values in any two columns, the reduction factor value in the next column shall
be used or a logarithmic interpolation may be used between any two adjacent columns with the calculated value
rounded down to the nearest 0,01 value.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018 - 117 -
5.4.5 Antenna terminal insulation
5.4.5.1 General
T h e in s u la tio n
- between mains a n d a n te n n a te rm in a ls ; a n d
- between m a in s and external circuits p ro v id in g n o n -m a in s s u p p ly v o lta g e s to o th e r

e q u ip m e n t h a v in g a n te n n a te r m in a ls
s h a ll w ith s ta n d e le c tr o s ta tic d is c h a r g e s a t th e a n te n n a te rm in a ls .
T h is te s t does not a p p ly to e q u ip m e n t w h e re one a n te n n a te rm in a l on th e e q u ip m e n t is

c o n n e c t e d t o e a r t h in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 6 . 7 .
NOTE In China, connection of the CATV to the main protective earthing terminal of equipment is not permitted.
5.4.5.2 Test method
The sample is subjected to 50 discharges from the antenna interface test generator (circuit 3)
of Clause D.2f at not more than 12 discharges per minute， with Uc equal to 10 kV. The
equipment shall be placed on an insulating surface. The antenna interface test generator
output shall be connected to the antenna terminals connected together and to the mains
terminals connected together. If the equipment has external circuits providing non-mains
supply voltages to other equipment having antenna terminals, the test is repeated with the
generator connected to the mains terminals connected together and the e x te rn a l c ir c u it
terminals connected together. The equipment is not energized during these tests.
NOTE Test personnel are cautioned not to touch the equipment during this test.
Compliance is checked by measuring the insulation resistance with 500 V DC.
The equipment complies with the requirement if the insulation resistance measured after
1 min is not less than the values given in Table 23.
Table 23 - Values for insulation resistance
Insulation requirements between parts Insulation resistance

MQ
Between parts separated by basic insulation or by supplementary insulation 2
Between parts separated by double insulation or reinforced insulation 4
As an alternative to the above, compliance may be checked by an electric strength test in

accordance with 5 .4 .9 . 1 for b a s ic in s u la tio n or re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n as applicable. The test
voltage shall be the highest of the test voltages determined by methods 1, 2 and 3. There
shall be no insulation breakdown.
5.4.6 Insulation of internal wire as a part of a supplementary safeguard
The re q u ire m e n ts o f th is s u b c la u s e a p p ly w h e re th e in s u la tio n of an in te rn a l w ire , a lo n e ,

m e e ts th e re q u ire m e n ts fo r basic insulation, but does not m eet th e re q u ire m e n ts fo r
supplementary insulation.
W h e re w ire in s u la tio n is u s e d as supplementary insulation

p a rt o f a s y s te m and th e w ire
i n s u l a t i o n is accessible to a n ordinary person:

- 118 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- t h e w ir e in s u la tio n d o e s n o t n e e d to b e h a n d le d b y th e ordinary person; and
- t h e w i r e is p l a c e d s u c h t h a t t h e ordinary person i s u n l i k e l y t o p u l l o n it, o r t h e w i r e s h a l l

b e s o fix e d th a t th e c o n n e c tin g p o in ts a re re lie v e d fro m s tra in ; a n d
- t h e w i r e is r o u t e d a n d f i x e d s u c h a s n o t t o t o u c h u n e a rth e d accessible c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ;

and
- t he w ire in s u la tio n passes th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t of 5 .4 .9 .1 fo r supplementary

insulation; and
- t h e d i s t a n c e t h r o u g h t h e w i r e i n s u l a t i o n s h a l l b e a t l e a s t a s g i v e n in T a b l e 2 4 .
Table 24 - Distance through insulation of internal wiring
Working voltage in case of failure of basic insulation Minimum distance through insulation
V peak or DC V RMS (sinusoidal) mm
> 71 < 350 > 50 < 250 0,17
> 350 > 250 0,31
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement, and by the test of 5.4.9.1.
5.4.7 Tests for semiconductor components and for cemented joints
Three samples are subjected to the thermal cycling sequence of 5.4.1.5.3. Before testing a
cemented jo in t， any winding of enamelled wire used in the component is replaced by metal foil
or by a few turns o f bare wire, placed close to the cemented joint.
The three samples are then tested as follows:
- one of the samples is subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, immediately after
the last period at (T1 土 2) °C during thermal cycling， except that the test voltage is
multiplied by 1,6; and
- the other samples are subjected to the relevant electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 after the
humidity conditioning o f 5.4.8, except that the test voltage is multiplied by 1,6.
Compliance is checked by test and the following inspections:
Except for cemented joints on the same inner surface of a printed board, compliance is
checked by inspection o f the cross-sectional area, and there shall be no visible voids， gaps or
cracks in the insulating material.
In the case of insulation between conductors on the same inner surface of printed boards and
the insulation between conductors on different surfaces of multilayer boards, compliance is
checked by external visual inspection. There shall be no delamination.
5.4.8 Humidity conditioning
Humidity conditioning is carried out for 48 h in a cabinet or room containing air with a relative
humidity of (93 ± 3) %• The temperature of the air, at all places where samples can be
located， is maintained within ± 2 °C of any value T between 20 °C and 3d °C so that
condensation does not occur. During this conditioning, the component or subassembly is not
energized.
For tropical conditions the time duration shall be 120 h at a temperature of (40 ± 2) °C and a
relative humidity of (93 ± 3) %.
Before the humidity conditioning, the sample is brought to a temperature between the
specified temperature T and (T + 4) °C.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 119 -
5.4.9 Electric strength test
5.4.9.1 Test procedure for type testing of solid insulation
Unless otherwise specified, compliance is checked either:
- immedi atel y following the temperature test in 5.4.1.4; or

- if a component or subassembly is tested separately outside the equipment, it is brought to
the temperature attained by that part during the temperature test in 5.4.1.4 (for example,
by placing it in an oven) prior to performing the electric strength test.
Alternatively, thin sheet material for s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n or re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n may

be tested at room temperature.
Unless otherwise specified, the test voltage for the electric strength of b a s ic in s u la tio n ,
s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n or re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n is the highest value o f the following
three methods:
- Method 1: Determine the test voltage according to Table 25 using the re q u ire d w ith s ta n d
v o lta g e (based on transient voltages from the AC m a in s or DC m a in s or from e x te rn a l
c irc u its ).
- Method 2: Determine the test voltage according to Table 26 using the peak of the w o rk in g
v o lta g e or the recurring peak voltages, whichever is higher.
- Method 3: Determine the test voltage according to Table 21 using the nominal AC m ains
voltage (to cover te m p o ra ry o ve rvo lta g e s).
The insulation is subjected to the highest test voltage as follows:
- by applying an AC voltage of substantially sine-wave form having a frequency of 50 Hz or

60 Hz; or
- by applying a DC v o lta g e for the time specified below.
The voltage applied to the insulation under test is gradually raised from zero to the prescribed
voltage and maintained at that value for 60 s (for ro u tin e te s ts see 5.4.9.2).
Where necessary, the insulation is tested with a metal foil in contact with the insulating
surface. This procedure is limited to places where the insulation is likely to be weak (for
example, where there are sharp metal edges under the insulation). If practicable, insulating
linings are tested separately. Care is taken that the metal foil is so placed that no flashover
occurs at the edges of the insulation. Where adhesive metal foil is used, the adhesive shall be
conductive.
To avoid damage to components or insulations that are not involved in the test, ICs or the
like, may be disconnected and equipotential bonding may be used. A varistor complying with
Clause G.8 may be removed during the test.
For equipment incorporating b a s ic in s u la tio n and s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n in parallel with

re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n , care is taken that the voltage applied to the re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n
does not overstress b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
Where capacitors are in parallel with the insulation under test (for example ， radio-frequency
filter capacitors) and the capacitors can affect the test results, DC test voltages shall be used.
Components providing a DC path in parallel with the insulation to be tested， such as

discharge resistors for filter capacitors and voltage limiting devices, may be disconnected.
Where insulation of a transformer winding varies along the length of the winding in
accordance with 5.4.1.6, an electric strength test method is used that stresses the insulation
accordingly.

- 120 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
EXAMPLE Such a test method may be an induced voltage test that is applied at a frequency sufficiently high to
avoid saturation of the transformer. The input voltage is raised to a value that would induce an output voltage equal
to the required test voltage.
Table 25 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on transient voltages
Required withstand voltage Test voltage for basic insulation Test voltage for
up to and including or supplementary insulation reinforced insulation
kV peak kV peak or DC
0,33 0,33 〇 ,5
0,5 0,5 0,8
〇 ,8 0,8 1,5
1,5 1,5 2,5
2,5 2,5 4
4 4 6
6 6 8
8 8 12
12 12 18
^R a 1,5 x UR a
3 UR is any required withstand voltage higher than 12 kV.
Table 26 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on the peak
of the working voltages and recurring peak voltages
Voltage Test voltage for basic insulation Test voltage for

up to and including or supplementary insulation reinforced insulation
kV peak kV peak or DC
0,33 0,43 0,53
〇 ,5 0,65 〇 ,8
〇 ,8 1,04 1,28
1,5 1,95 2,4
2,5 3,25 4
4 5,2 6,4
6 7,8 9,6
8 10,4 12,8
12 15,6 19,2
1,3 x t/p a 1,6 x Up a
a Up is any voltage higher than 12 kV.
Table 27 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on temporary overvoltages
Nominal mains system voltage Test voltage for basic insulation Test voltage for
or supplementary insulation reinforced insulation
V RMS kV peak or DC
Up to and including 250 2 4
Over 250 up to and including 600 2,5 5

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 121 -
Terminals for test voltage base

ie c
Figure 29 - Example of electric strength test instrument for solid insulation
NOTE Thin sheet insulation can be tested using the instrument of Figure 29. When applying the test fixture ，
ensure that the specimen sample diameter is of sufficient size to prevent breakdown around the edges.
There shall be no insulation breakdown during the test. Insulation breakdown is considered to
have occurred when the current that flows as a result of the application o f the test voltage,
rapidly increases in an uncontrolled manner, that is, the insulation does not restrict the flow of
the current. Corona discharge or a single momentary flashover is not regarded as insulation
breakdown.
5.4.9.2 Test procedure for routine tests
Where required ， ro u tin e te s ts are performed according to 5 .4 .9 .1, except for the following:
- the test may be performed at room temperature; and

一 the duration of the electric strength test shall be between 1 s to 4 s; and
- the test voltage may be reduced by 10 %.
NOTE Routine testing for equipment is specified in IEC 62911.
There shall be no insulation breakdown during the test. Insulation breakdown is considered to
have occurred when the current that flows as a result of the application o f the test voltage,
rapidly increases in an uncontrolled manner， that is, the insulation does not restrict the flow of
the current. Corona discharge or a single momentary flashover is not regarded as insulation
breakdown.

- 122 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
5.4.10 Safeguards against transient voltages from external circuits
A d e q u a te e le c tric a l s e p a ra tio n s h a ll be p ro v id e d b e tw e e n th e c irc u itry in te n d e d to be

c o n n e c t e d to external circuits a s i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 1 3 , ID n u m b e r 1, F i g u r e 3 0 a n d :
a) n o n -c o n d u c tiv e p a rts and u n e a rth e d c o n d u c tiv e p a rts o f th e e q u ip m e n t e x p e c te d to be

h e ld o r o th e rw is e m a in ta in e d in c o n t i n u o u s c o n ta c t w ith th e b o d y d u rin g n o rm a l u s e (fo r
e x a m p le , a t e le p h o n e h a n d s e t o r h e a d s e t o r th e p a lm r e s t s u r fa c e o f a la p to p o r n o te b o o k
c o m p u te r);
b) accessible p a r t s a n d c i r c u i t r y , e x c e p t f o r t h e p i n s o f c o n n e c t o r s . H o w e v e r , s u c h p i n s s h a l l
n o t b e accessible u n d e r normal operating conditions b y t h e b l u n t p r o b e o f F i g u r e V . 3 ;
c) a n o th e r ES1 o r ES2 p a rt s e p a ra te d fro m th e c irc u itry in te n d e d to be c o n n e c te d to an

external circuit. T h e re q u ire m e n t fo r s e p a ra tio n a p p lie s w h e th e r o r n o t th e ES1 or ES2
p a r t i s accessible.
T h e s e re q u ire m e n ts d o n o t a p p ly w h e re c irc u it a n a ly s is a n d e q u ip m e n t in v e s tig a tio n in d ic a te

th a t a d e q u a te p ro te c tio n is a s s u r e d b y o th e r m e a n s (fo r e x a m p le , b e tw e e n tw o c irc u its e a c h
o f w h ic h h a s a p e r m a n e n t c o n n e c t io n to p r o te c tiv e e a r th ) .
Connection for AC
mains supply
Figure 30 - Application points of test voltage
5.4.10.2 Test methods
5.4.10.2.1 General
The separation is checked by the test of either 5.4.10.2.2 or 5.4.10.2.3.
NOTE In Australia, the tests of both 5.4.10.2.2 and 5.4.10.2.3 apply.
During the test:
- all conductors intended to be connected to the e x te rn a l c ir c u it are connected together,

including any conductors that may be connected to earth in the e x te rn a l c irc u it; and

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 123 -
- all conductors intended to be connected to other e x te rn a l c irc u its are also connected
together.
Table 28 - Test values for electric strength tests
Impulse test (see Annex D)

Parts Steady state test
Test generator
Parts indicated in 5.4.10.1 a) a 2,5 kV circuit 1 1,5 kV
Parts indicated in 5.4.10.1 b) and c) b 1,5 kV circuit 1 c 1,0 kV
Surge suppressors shall not be removed.

b Surge suppressors may be removed, provided that such devices pass the impulse test of 5.4.10.2.2 when
tested as components outside the equipment.
During this test, it is allowed for a surge suppressor to operate and for a sparkover to occur in a GDT.
5.4.10.2.2 Impulse test
The electrical separation is subjected to ten impulses of alternating polarity as given in

Table 28. The interval between successive impulses is 60 s. Uc is the value to which the
capacitor needs to be charged.
NOTE In Australia, a value of U 〇= 7,0 kV is used for hand-held telephones and for headsets and 2,5 kV for other
equipment in 5.4.10.1 a). The 7 kV impulse simulates lightning surges on typical rural and semi-rural network lines.
5.4.10.2.3 Steady state test
The electrical separation is subjected to an electric strength test according to 5.4.9.1, with a
voltage as given in Table 28.
NOTE In Australia, the steady state test voltage is 3 kV for 5.4.10.1 a), and 1,5 kV for 5.4.10.1 b) and c). These
values have been determined considering the low frequency induced voltages from the power supply distribution
system.
During the tests of 5.4.10.2.2 and 5.4.10.2.3:
- there shall be no insulation breakdown; and

- except as indicated in Table 28, footnote c, a surge suppressor shall not operate, or a
sparkover shall not occur within a GDT.
For the electric strength test, insulation breakdown is considered to have occurred when the
current that flows as a result of the application of the test voltage rapidly increases in an
uncontrolled manner.
For the impulse tests, insulation breakdown is verified in one of the following two ways:
- during the application of the impulses, by observation of oscillograms, surge suppressor

operation or breakdown through insulation is judged from the shape of an oscillogram;
- after application of all the impulses, by an insulation resistance test. Disconnection of
surge suppressors is permitted while insulation resistance is being measured. The test
voltage is 500 V DC or, if surge suppressors are left in place, a DC test voltage that is
10 % less than the surge suppressor operating or striking voltage. The insulation
resistance shall not be less than 2 MO.

- 124 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
5.4.11 Separation between external circuits and earth
5.4.11.1 General
These re q u ire m e n ts a p p ly o n ly to e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to be c o n n e c te d to external circuits

i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 1 3 , ID n u m b e r 1.
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
- permanently connected equipment; or
- pluggable equipment type B; or
- stationary pluggable equipment type A, t h a t i s i n t e n d e d t o b e u s e d in a l o c a t i o n h a v i n g

e q u ip o te n tia l b o n d in g (s u c h a s a te le c o m m u n ic a tio n c e n tre , a d e d ic a te d c o m p u te r ro o m o r
a restricted access area) a n d h a s in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s th a t re q u ire v e rific a tio n o f th e
protective earthing c o n n e c t i o n o f th e s o c k e t-o u tle t b y a skilled person; or
- stationary pluggable equipment type A, th a t h a s p ro v is io n fo r a p e r m a n e n tly c o n n e c te d

protective earthing conductor, i n c l u d i n g in s tru c tio n s fo r th e in s ta lla tio n o f th a t c o n d u c to r
t o b u i l d i n g e a r t h b y a skilled person.
T h e re s h a ll be s e p a ra tio n b e tw e e n c irc u itry in te n d e d to be c o n n e c te d to external circuits

m e n tio n e d above and any p a rts o r c ir c u itr y th a t w ill b e e a r th e d in s o m e a p p lic a tio n s , e ith e r
w ith in th e E U T o r v ia o th e r e q u ip m e n t.
S P D s th a t b rid g e th e s e p a ra tio n b e tw e e n ES1 or ES2 c irc u itry in te n d e d to be c o n n e c te d to

external circuits and e a rth s h a ll h a v e a m in im u m ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e U0[) (fo r e x a m p le ,
t h e s p a r k o v e r v o lt a g e o f a g a s d i s c h a r g e t u b e ) o f:
^ o p - "p e a k + +
w h e re :
Upeak is o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g v a l u e s :
- for e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to be in s ta lle d in an a re a w h e re th e n o m in a l
v o lta g e o f th e A C mains e xce e d s 130 V: 360 V;
- f o r a ll o t h e r e q u i p m e n t : 180 V.
A ^ / sp is t h e n e g a tiv e to le ra n c e o f th e ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e due to v a r ia t io n s in

S P D p ro d u c tio n , o b ta in e d b y s u b tra c tin g th e m in im u m ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e
fro m th e n o m in a l ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e . If t h is is n o t s p e c i f i e d b y th e S P D
m a n u f a c t u r e r , A ( 7 sp s h a l l b e t a k e n as 10 % o f th e ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e o f
th e S P D .
AUsa is t h e c h a n g e o f t h e r a t e d o p e r a t i n g v o l t a g e d u e t o t h e S P D a g e in g o v e r th e
e x p e c te d life of th e e q u ip m e n t， o b ta in e d by s u b tra c tin g th e m in im u m
o p e ra tin g v o lta g e a fte r a g e in g fro m th e ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e . If t h i s is n o t
s p e c ifie d b y th e S P D m a n u f a c t u r e r , A " sa s h a l l b e t a k e n a s 1 0 % o f t h e r a t e d
o p e ra tin g v o lta g e o f th e S P D .
( A t / sp + A [ / s a ) m a y b e a s i n g l e v a l u e p r o v i d e d b y t h e c o m p o n e n t m a n u f a c t u r e r .
5.4.11.3 Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 with a test
voltage according to Table 25 for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n based on
the re q u ire d w ith s ta n d v o lta g e for the m a in s voltage of the equipment.
Components， other than capacitors, that bridge the separation， may be removed during
electric strength testing. Components that are left in place during the test shall not be
damaged.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 125 -
If components are removed, the following additional test with a test circuit according to
Figure 31 is performed with all components in place.
For equipment powered from AC m ains, the test is performed with a voltage equal to the
ra te d v o lta g e of the equipment or to the upper voltage of the ra te d v o lta g e range. For
equipment powered from DC m ains, the test is performed with a voltage equal to the highest
nominal voltage o f the AC m a in s in the region where the equipment is to be used (for
example, 230 V for Europe or 120 V for North America).
The current flowing in the test circuit of Figure 31 shall not exceed 10 mA.
Components bridging the

insulation，for example,
Figure 31 - Test for separation between an external circuit and earth
5.4.12 Insulating liquid
An insulating liquid s h a ll n o t b r e a k d o w n d u e to o v e r v o lta g e s , in c lu d in g tr a n s ie n ts , th a t e n te r

th e e q u ip m e n t, a n d p e a k v o lta g e s th a t m a y be g e n e ra te d w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t.
The insulating liquid s h a l l c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .1 2 .2 and 5 .4 .1 2 .3 . The c o n ta in e r fo r th e

insulating liquid s h a l l c o m p l y w ith 5 .4 .1 2 .4 .
5.4.12.2 Electric strength of an insulating liquid
The e le c tric s tre n g th insulating liquid s h a l l

o f th e c o m p ly w ith th e e le c tric s tre n g th t e s t in
5.4.9 w ith th e insulating liquid i n t h e e q u i p m e n t .
5.4.12.3 Compatibility of an insulating liquid
The insulating liquid s h a ll n o t r e a c t w ith o r o th e r w is e d e te r io r a te safeguards, such as:
- solid insulation; or
- t he insulating liquid its e lf.
For in s u la tin g liq u id s with a thermal classification of IEC 60085 Class 105 (A)t compliance is
checked by operating the immersed equipment for 60 days followed by an electric strength
test in accordance with 5.4.9. There shall be no breakdown and there shall be no visible
damage or deformation of the other immersed e q u ip m e n t sa fe g u a rd s.
For higher thermal classes the requirements of 5.4.1.4.3 are applicable.

- 126 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
5.4.12.4 Container for insulating liquid
The c o n ta in e r fo r th e insulating liquid s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith a m e a n s o f p re ssu re r e l i e f if

t h e r e is a c l o s e d v e s s e l .
The insulating liquid c o n t a in e r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G . 1 5 .2 .1 fo r a c lo s e d v e s s e l.
For an insulating liquid t h a t is a ls o c o n s i d e r e d to b e a hazardous substance, th e c o n ta in e r

s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 7 .2 .
Compliance is checked by the relevant tests.
5.5 Components as safeguards
5.5.1 General
A com ponent is c o n s i d e r e d a safeguard if th e c la s s ific a tio n o f th e e n e rg y so u rce changes

d u e to a fa ilu r e o f th e c o m p o n e n t.
A com ponent used as a safeguard s h a ll:
- c o m p l y w i t h a ll t h e a p p l i c a b l e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h a t safeguard; and
- b e u s e d w it h in its r a tin g .
NOTE See Annex G for the qualification of components used as a safeguard.
5.5.2 Capacitors and RC units
C a p a c ito rs and RC u n its th a t se rve as (e le c tric a l) safeguards s h a ll c o m p ly w ith

IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 . R C u n its m a y c o n s is t o f d is c r e te c o m p o n e n ts .
C a p a c ito r s o r R C u n its w ith o n e o r m u ltip le c a p a c ito r s s h a ll:
- c o m p l y w ith C la u s e G .1 1 , h o w e v e r, th e re q u ire m e n ts o f C la u s e G .1 1 d o n o t a p p ly to th e
c a p a c ito r a n d R C u n it u s e d a s a basic safeguard b e tw e e n :
• ES3 is o la te d fro m th e mains a n d p ro te c tiv e e a rth ; a n d
• E S 2 a n d p ro te c tiv e e a rth ; a n d
• ES2 and ES1;
and
- pass th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1 , ta k in g in to a c c o u n t th e to ta l working voltage

a c r o s s th e c a p a c it o r ( s ) a n d R C u n it. C a p a c it o r s c o m p ly in g w ith IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 d o n o t n e e d
t o b e t e s t e d if:
• th e re q u ire d p e a k im p u ls e te s t v o lta g e o f T a b le G .1 2 ; a n d
• th e r e q u ire d R M S te s t v o lta g e o f T a b le G .1 2 m u ltip lie d b y 1 ，

414
a re e q u a l to o r g r e a te r th a n th e re q u ire d te s t v o lta g e o f 5 .4 .9 .1 .
W hen m u ltip le c a p a c ito rs a re u s e d , th e te s t v o lta g e s o f T a b le G .1 2 a re m u ltip lie d by th e

n u m b e r o f c a p a c ito rs u s e d .
Under single fault conditions, if a c a p a c it o r o r R C u n it c o n s is t s o f m o r e th a n o n e c a p a c it o r ，

th e v o lta g e o n e a c h o f th e re m a in in g in d iv id u a l c a p a c ito r s s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e v o lta g e ra tin g
o f th e re le v a n t in d iv id u a l c a p a c ito rs .
NOTE In Norway, due to the IT power system used, capacitors are required to be rated for the applicable line-to-
line voltage (230 V).

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 127 -
C la s s X c a p a c ito rs m a y b e u s e d a s basic safeguards in c i r c u i t s i s o l a t e d f r o m th e mains but

s h a ll n o t b e u s e d a s a:
- basic safeguard in c i r c u i t s c o n n e c t e d t o t h e mains; or
- supplementary safeguard.
C la s s X c a p a c ito r s s h a ll n o t b e u s e d a s a reinforced safeguard.
5.5.2.2 Capacitor discharge after disconnection of a connector
W h e re a c a p a c ito r v o lta g e becom es accessible u p o n d i s c o n n e c t i o n o f a c o n n e c t o r ( f o r

e x a m p le , th e mains c o n n e c to r) th e accessible v o l t a g e m e a s u r e d 2 s a f t e r d i s c o n n e c t i o n o f
th e c o n n e c to r , s h a ll c o m p ly w ith :
- t he ES1 lim its o f T a b le 5 u n d e r normal operating conditions fo r an ordinary person;

and
- t h e E S 2 lim its o f T a b le 5 u n d e r normal operating conditions fo r an instructed person;

and
- t he ES2 l i m i t s o f T a b l e 5 under single fault conditions fo r b o th a n ordinary person and

an instructed person.
A re s is to r o r a g ro u p o f re s is to rs safeguard
used as a a g a in s t c a p a c ito r d is c h a rg e is not
s u b je c te d to s im u la te d single fault conditions i f t h e re s is to r or th e g ro u p of re s is to rs
c o m p lie s w ith 5 .5 .6 .
If a n IC t h a t i n c l u d e s a c a p a c i t o r d i s c h a r g e f u n c t i o n ( I C X ) is u s e d t o c o m p l y w i t h t h e a b o v e :
- t he accessible mains
v o lta g e (fo r e x a m p le , a t th e c o n n e c t o r ) s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e lim its
g iv e n above under a single fault condition o f a n IC X or of any one c o m p o n e n t in t h e
a s s o c ia te d c a p a c ito r d is c h a r g e c irc u it; o r
- t he IC X w ith th e a s s o c ia te d c irc u itry a s p ro v id e d in t h e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e

re q u ire m e n ts o f C la u s e G .1 6 . A n y im p u ls e a tte n u a tin g c o m p o n e n ts (s u c h a s v a ris to rs a n d
G D T s ) a re d is c o n n e c te d ; o r
- three s a m p le s of th e IC X te s te d s e p a ra te ly s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts of

C la u s e G .1 6 .
The m e a su re m e n t is m ade w ith an in s tru m e n t h a v in g an in p u t im p e d a n c e c o n s is tin g of a

r e s i s t a n c e o f 1 0 0 M Q ± 5 M Q in p a r a l l e l w i t h a n i n p u t c a p a c i t a n c e o f 2 5 p F o r l e s s .
If a s w i t c h (fo r e x a m p le , th e mains s w i t c h ) h a s a n i n f l u e n c e o n t h e t e s t r e s u lt , it is p la c e d in
th e m o s t u n fa v o u ra b le p o s itio n . T h e d is c o n n e c tio n o f th e c o n n e c to r (s ta rt o f d is c h a rg e tim e )
h a s t o b e d o n e a t t h e m o m e n t w h e n t h e i n p u t c a p a c i t o r o f t h e d e v i c e u n d e r t e s t is c h a r g e d t o
its p e a k v a lu e .
O th e r m e th o d s th a t g iv e a s im ila r re s u lt a s th e a b o v e m e th o d m a y b e u s e d .
5.5.3 Transformers
T ra n s fo rm e rs u se d as a safeguard s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .5 .3 .
5.5.4 Optocouplers
In s u la tio n o f o p to c o u p le rs u s e d a s a safeguard s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 5 .4 o r

w ith C la u s e G .1 2 .
5.5.5 Relays
In s u la tio n o f re la y s u s e d a s a safeguard s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 5.4.

-128 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
5.5.6 Resistors
The fo llo w in g re s is to r a p p lic a tio n s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e re le v a n t te s ts as in d ic a te d in

T a b le 2 9 :
- a s in g le re s is to r u s e d a s a reinforced safeguard o r fo r b rid g in g reinforced insulation;

- a re s is to r o r a g ro u p o f re s is to rs s e rv in g as a safeguard b e tw e e n a c irc u it c o n n e c te d to
th e mains a n d a c ir c u it in te n d e d to b e c o n n e c t e d to c o a x ia l c a b le ;
- r e s i s t o r s s e rv in g a s a c a p a c ito r d is c h a rg e safeguard.
NOTE In Finland, Norway and Sweden, resistors used as a basic safeguard or for bridging basic insulation in
class I pluggable equipment type A shall comply with the relevant requirements of Clause G.10.
In a d d i t i o n , r e s i s t o r s t h a t b r i d g e basic insulation, supplementary insulation or reinforced

insulation s h a ll c o m p ly w ith e a c h o f th e fo llo w in g :
- a s in g le re s is to r or a g ro u p of re s is to rs s h a ll c o m p ly w ith clearance and creepage

distance r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5.4.2 a n d 5.4.3, re s p e c tiv e ly , b e tw e e n its t e r m i n a t io n s fo r th e
t o t a l working voltage a c r o s s t h e i n s u l a t i o n (s e e F ig u re 0.4);
- f or a g ro u p of re s is to rs used as reinforced safeguard o r
a fo r b rid g in g reinforced
insulation, th e clearance and creepage distance a r e a s s e s s e d a s if e a c h re s is to r w e re
s h o rt-c irc u ite d in tu rn u n le s s th e g ro u p c o m p lie s w ith th e re le v a n t re q u ire m e n ts of
C la u s e G .1 0 .
Table 29 - Overview of tests for resistor applications
Conditioning Resistor test Voltage surge Impulse test Overload test

Resistor application test
G.10.2 G.10.3 G.10.4 G.10.5 G.10.6
Reinforced safeguard or
bridging reinforced X X
insulation
Between a mains connected Xa Xb
X
circuit and a coaxial cable
Capacitor discharge
X X
safeguard
a For an external circuit indicated in Table 13, ID 6 and 7.
For an external circuit indicated in Table 13, ID 3, 4 and 5.
5.5.7 SPDs
W h e r e a v a r i s t o r is u s e d b e t w e e n a mains c irc u it a t E S 3 v o lta g e a n d protective earthing:
- t h e e a rth c o n n e c tio n s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 5 .6 .7 ; a n d
- t h e v a r is to r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e G .8 .
W h e re a v a ris to r is used b e tw e e n lin e and n e u tra l or b e tw e e n lin e s , it s h a l l c o m p ly w ith

C la u s e G .8 .
W h e re an SPD is used b e tw e e n th e mains and protective earthing, it s h a l l c o n s is t of a

v a r i s t o r a n d a G D T c o n n e c t e d in s e r i e s , w h e r e t h e f o l l o w i n g a p p l i e s :
- t h e v a r is to r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e G .8 ;
- t h e G D T s h a ll c o m p ly w ith :
• th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1 fo r basic insulation; and
• th e e x te rn a l clearance a n d creepage distance re q u ire m e n ts of 5.4.2 and 5.4.3

re s p e c tiv e ly f o r basic insulation.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 129 -
NOTE 1 Some examples of SPDs are MOVs, varistors and GDTs. A varistor is sometimes referred to as a VDR or
a metal oxide varistor (MOV).
T h e a b o v e r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to S P D s c o n n e c t e d to r e lia b le e a r th in g ( s e e 5 .6 .7 ).
NOTE 2 It is not a requirement of this document that surge suppressors comply with any particular component
standard. However, attention is drawn to the IEC 61643 series of standards, in particular:
- IEC 61643-21 (surge suppressors in telecommunications application)
- I EC 61643-311 (gas discharge tubes)
一 IEC 61643-321 (avalanche breakdown diodes)
一 IEC 61643-331 (metal oxide varistors)
- I EC 61643-341 (thyristor surge suppressors TSS).
NOTE 3 SPDs between an external circuit and earth are not considered to be a safeguard. Requirements for
those SPDs are covered in 5.4.11.2.
5.5.8 Insulation between the mains and an external circuit consisting of a coaxial
cable
The in s u la tio n b e tw e e n th e mains and th e c o n n e c tio n to a c o a x ia l c a b le , in c lu d in g any

r e s i s t o r in p a ra lle l w ith th is in s u la tio n , s h a ll be a b le to w ith s ta n d su rg e s fro m th e external
circuit a n d fro m th e mains.
T h i s r e q u i r e m e n t d o e s n o t a p p l y in a n y o f t h e f o l l o w i n g e q u i p m e n t :
- e q u i p m e n t fo r in d o o r u s e p r o v id e d w ith a b u ilt-in ( in te g r a l) a n te n n a a n d n o t p r o v id e d w ith

a c o n n e c tio n to a c o a x ia l c a b le ; o r
- e q u i p m e n t c o n n e c t e d t o a r e l i a b l e e a r t h i n g in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 6 . 7 .
The combination of the insulation with the resistor is tested after the conditioning of G.10.2 as
follows:
- for equipment intended to be connected to a coaxial cable connected to an outdoor

antenna， the voltage surge test of G.10.4; or
- for equipment intended to be connected to another coaxial cable， the impulse test of
G.10.5; or
- for equipment intended to be connected to both an outdoor antenna and other coaxial
connections, the voltage surge test o f G.10.4 and the impulse test o f G.10.5.
After the tests:
- the insulation shall comply with 5.4.5.3 and the resistor may be removed during this test;
and
- the resistors shall comply with G.10.3, unless available data shows compliance of the
resistor.
5.5.9 Safeguards for socket-outlets in outdoor equipment
A re s id u a l c u r r e n t p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e (R C D ) w ith ra te d re s id u a l o p e ra tin g c u r r e n t n o t e x c e e d in g

3 0 m A s h a l l b e u s e d in t h e mains s u p p ly to s o c k e t- o u tle t s in te n d e d fo r g e n e r a l u s e .
The RCD s h a ll b e a n in te g ra l p a rt o f th e outdoor equipment o r s h a ll b e p a rt o f th e b u ild in g

in s t a lla tio n . If th e RCD is n o t a n i n t e g r a l p a r t o f t h e e q u i p m e n t , t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l p r o v i d e
th e in s ta lla tio n re q u ire m e n ts fo r th e RCD.

- 130 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
5.6 Protective conductor
5.6.1 General
Under normal operating conditions， a protective conductor m a y se rve :
- as a basic safeguard to p r e v e n t accessible c o n d u c tiv e p a rts fro m e x c e e d in g ES1 lim its ;

and
- a s a m e a n s t o l i m i t t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e s in a n e a r t h e d c i r c u i t .
Under single fault conditions, a protective conductor m ay se rve as a supplementary

safeguard t o p r e v e n t accessible c o n d u c t iv e p a r ts fr o m e x c e e d in g E S 2 lim its .
5.6.2 Requirements for protective conductors
Protective conductors s h a ll not c o n ta in s w itc h e s , cu rre n t lim itin g d e v ic e s or o ve rcu rre n t

p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s .
T h e c u rre n t-c a rry in g c a p a c ity o f protective conductors s h a ll b e a d e q u a te fo r th e d u r a tio n o f

th e fa u lt c u rre n t u n d e r single fault conditions.
T h e c o n n e c tio n s fo r th e protective conductors s h a ll m a k e e a r lie r a n d s h a ll b r e a k la te r th a n

t h e s u p p l y c o n n e c t i o n s in e a c h o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
- a c o n n e c to r (o n a c a b le ) o r a c o n n e c to r a tta c h e d to a p a rt o r a s u b a s s e m b ly th a t c a n be
re m o v e d b y o th e r th a n a skilled person;
NOTE It is good practice that this construction also be applied when it is expected that the skilled person
will replace powered parts and assemblies while the equipment is operational.
- a p lu g o n a p o w e r s u p p ly c o r d ;
- a n a p p lia n c e c o u p le r.
S o ld e r s h a ll n o t s e rv e a s th e s o le m e a n s to p ro v id e m e c h a n ic a l s e c u re m e n t o f a protective
conductor
A protective conductor te rm in a tio n s h a ll be m ade such t h a t it i s n o t l i k e l y t o be lo o s e n e d

A s in g le te rm in a l m a y be
d u r in g s e r v ic in g , o t h e r th a n s e r v ic in g o f th e a c tu a l c o n d u c t o r its e lf.
u s e d to c o n n e c t m u ltip le protective bonding conductors. A protective earthing conductor
te rm in a tio n s h a ll not se rve as a m eans to se cu re any com ponent or p a rt o th e r th a n a
protective bonding conductor.
A s i n g l e w i r i n g t e r m i n a l o f t h e s c r e w o r s t u d t y p e m a y b e u s e d t o s e c u r e b o t h t h e protective
earthing conductor a n d t h e protective bonding conductor in e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g a non-
detachable power supply cord. I n t h i s c a s e , t h e w i r i n g t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e protective
earthing conductor s h a l l b e s e p a r a t e d b y a n u t f r o m t h a t o f t h e protective bonding
conductor. T h e protective earthing conductor s h a l l b e o n t h e b o t t o m o f t h e s t a c k , s o t h a t it
is t h e l a s t c o n n e c t i o n d i s t u r b e d .
5.6.2.2 Colour of insulation
T h e in s u la tio n o f th e protective earthing conductor s h a ll b e g r e e n - a n d - y e llo w .
If a protective bonding conductor is in s u la te d , th e in s u la tio n s h a ll be g re e n -a n d -y e llo w

e x c e p t in t h e f o l l o w i n g t w o c a s e s :
- f or a n e a r t h in g b r a id , t h e i n s u la t io n , if p r o v id e d , m a y b e t r a n s p a r e n t ;

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 131 -
- a protective bonding conductor in a s s e m b l i e s s u c h a s r i b b o n c a b l e s , b u s b a r s , p r i n t e d

w irin g , e tc ., m ay be of any c o lo u r p ro v id e d th a t no m is in te rp re ta tio n o f th e use o f th e
c o n d u c t o r is l i k e l y t o a r i s e .
5.6.3 Requirements for protective earthing conductors
Protective earthing conductors s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e m in im u m c o n d u c to r s iz e s in

T a b le G .7 .
NOTE 1 For permanently connected equipment provided with terminal(s) for connection to mains supply,
reference is made to the national building wiring requirements for the size of the protective earthing conductor.
NOTE 2 IEC 60364-5-54 can also be used to determine the minimum conductor size.
For co rd c o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t s u p p lie d fro m a DC mains， th e protective earthing

c o n n e c tio n m a y b e p ro v id e d b y a s e p a r a te te rm in a l.
A protective earthing conductor s e r v i n g a s a reinforced safeguard m a y b e u s e d on

pluggable equipment type B o r o n permanently connected equipment o n l y a n d s h a l l :
- be in c lu d e d in and p ro te c te d by a s h e a th e d s u p p ly co rd th a t c o m p lie s w ith G .7 .1 and

w h i c h i s n o t l i g h t e r t h a n h e a v y d u t y a s s p e c i f i e d in A n n e x C o f I E C 6 2 4 4 0 : 2 0 0 8 ; o r
- h a v e a m in im u m c o n d u c t o r s iz e n o t le s s t h a n 4 m m 2 if n o t p ro te c te d fro m p h y s ic a l d a m a g e ;
or
- h a v e a m i n i m u m c o n d u c t o r s i z e n o t l e s s t h a n 2 , 5 m m 2 i f p r o t e c t e d f r o m p h y s i c a l d a m a g e ；o r
- b e p ro te c te d b y a c o n d u it in te n d e d to b e c o n n e c te d to th e e q u ip m e n t a n d h a v e a m in im u m
s i z e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h T a b l e 3 0 .
NOTE 3 For mains supply cords, see also Clause G.7.
NOTE 4 A heavy duty cord jacket is considered suitable for protection against physical damage.
Table 30 - Protective earthing conductor sizes for reinforced safeguards

for permanently connected equipment
Protection provided by Minimum protective earthing conductor size

mm2
Non-metallic flexible conduit 4
Metallic flexible conduit 2,5
Non-flexible metal conduit 1,5
The protective earthing conductor is intended for installation by a skilled person.
A protective earthing conductor s e r v i n g a s a double safeguard m a y b e u s e d on pluggable

equipment type B o r o n permanently connected equipment o n l y a n d s h a l l c o n s is t o f tw o
i n d e p e n d e n t protective earthing conductors.
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement of p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g c o n d u c to r

sizes in accordance with Table 30 or Table G.7 as applicable.
5.6.4 Requirements for protective bonding conductors
Protective bonding conductors o f p a rts re q u ire d to be e a rth e d fo r s a fe ty p u rp o se s s h a ll

c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :

- 132 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- t he m in im u m c o n d u c t o r s i z e s in T a b l e G . 7 ; o r
- if e it h e r t h e rated current o f th e e q u ip m e n t o r th e protective current rating o f th e c irc u it

e x c e e d s 2 5 A , w i t h t h e m i n i m u m c o n d u c t o r s i z e s in T a b l e 3 1 ; o r
- if b o t h t h e rated current o f th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th e protective current rating o f th e c irc u it

d o n o t e x c e e d 2 5 A ; e ith e r
• w i t h t h e m i n i m u m c o n d u c t o r s i z e s in T a b l e 3 1 ; o r
• w ith th e lim ite d s h o r t- c ir c u it te s t o f A n n e x R ; o r
- f or c o m p o n e n ts o n ly , be not s m a lle r th a n th e c o n d u c to rs s u p p ly in g power to th e

c o m p o n e n t.
If t h e rated current o f t h e e q u i p m e n t i s n o t d e c l a r e d b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , it is t h e c a l c u l a t e d
v a lu e o f t h e rated power d i v i d e d b y rated voltage.
NOTE The value of the protective current rating is used in Table 31 and in the test of 5.6.6.2.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 133 -
Table 31 - Minimum protective bonding conductor size of copper conductors
Smaller of the rated current of the Minimum conductor sizes

equipment or the protective current rating
of the circuit under consideration
Cross-sectional area AWG
A
mm2 [cross-sectional area in mm2]
up to and including
3 0,3 22 [0,324]
6 0,5 20 [0,519 】
10 0,75 18 [〇 ,8]
13 1,0 16 [1.3]
16 1,25 16 [1,3 】
25 1,5 14 P]
32 2,5 12 [3]
40 4,0 10 [5]
63 6,0 8 [8]
80 10 6 [13]
100 16 4 [21 】
125 25 2 03]
160 35 1 [42]
190 50 0 [53]
230 70 000 [85]
260 95 0000 [107 】
kcmil
[cross-sectional area in mm2 】
300 120 250 [126]

340 150 300 [152 】
400 185 400 [202]
460 240 500 [253]
NOTE AWG and kcmil sizes are provided for information only. The associated cross-sectional areas have been
rounded to show significant figures only. AWG refers to the American Wire Gage and the term "cmil” refers to
circular mils where one circular mil is equal to (diameter in mils)2. These terms are commonly used to designate
wire sizes in North America.
5.6.4.2 Determination of the protective current rating
5.6.4.2.1 Mains supply as the source
W h e re th e so u rce is t h e mains s u p p ly , th e protective current rating o f th e c irc u it is t h e

ra tin g o f th e o v e r c u r r e n t p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e p ro v id e d in t h e b u ild in g in s ta lla tio n , o r a s p a rt o f
th e e q u ip m e n t.
W h e r e t h e o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e i s p r o v i d e d in t h e b u i l d i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n , t h e n :
- f or pluggable equipment type A, th e protective current rating is th e ra tin g of an

o ve rcu rre n t p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e p ro v id e d e x te rn a l to th e e q u ip m e n t (fo r e x a m p le , in th e
b u i l d i n g w i r i n g , in t h e mains p l u g o r in a n e q u i p m e n t r a c k ) , w i t h a m i n i m u m o f 1 6 A ;
NOTE 1 In most countries, 16 A is considered to be suitable as the protective current rating of the circuit
supplied from the mains.
NOTE 2 In Canada and the USA, the protective current rating of the circuit supplied from the mains is
taken as 20 A.

- 134 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
NOTE 3 In the UK and Ireland, the protective current rating is taken to be 13 A, this being the largest rating
of fuse used in the mains plug.
NOTE 4 In France, in certain cases, the protective current rating of the circuit supplied from the mains is
taken as 20 A instead of 16 A.
- fo r pluggable equipment type B, a n d permanently connected equipment t h e

protective current rating i s t h e m a x i m u m r a t i n g o f t h e o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e
s p e c ifie d in th e e q u ip m e n t in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s to be p ro v id e d e x te rn a l to th e
e q u ip m e n t.
5.6.4.2.2 Other than mains supply as the source
W h e r e t h e s o u r c e is a n e x t e r n a l s u p p l y h a v i n g t h e m a x i m u m c u r r e n t in h e r e n tly lim ite d b y th e

in te rn a l so u rce im p e d a n c e (su ch as an im p e d a n c e p ro te c te d tra n s fo rm e r), th e protective
current rating o f t h e c i r c u i t is t h e h i g h e s t c u r r e n t a v a i l a b l e f r o m t h a t s u p p l y i n t o a n y l o a d .
W h e re th e m a x im u m cu rre n t fro m th e e x te rn a l s u p p ly so u rce is lim ite d by e le c tro n ic

c o m p o n e n ts in th e so u rce , th e protective current rating s h a ll be ta k e n as th e m a x im u m
o u t p u t c u r r e n t w i t h a n y r e s i s t i v e l o a d , i n c l u d i n g a s h o r t - c i r c u i t . I f t h e c u r r e n t is l im i t e d by an
i m p e d a n c e , a f u s e , a P T C d e v i c e o r a c i r c u i t b r e a k e r , t h e c u r r e n t is m e a s u r e d 6 0 s a f t e r t h e
a p p lic a tio n o f th e lo a d . If t h e c u r r e n t is l i m i t e d b y o t h e r m e a n s , t h e c u r r e n t is m e a s u r e d 5 s
a fte r th e a p p lic a tio n o f th e lo a d .
5.6.4.2.3 Internal circuit as the source
W h e r e t h e s o u r c e is a c i r c u i t w i t h i n t h e e q u i p m e n t , t h e protective current rating o f th e c irc u it

is :
- t he ra tin g o f th e o v e rc u rre n t p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e if t h e c u r r e n t is l i m i t e d by an o ve rcu rre n t

p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e ; o r
- t he m a x im u m o u tp u t c u rre n t, if th e cu rre n t is lim ite d by th e so u rce im p e d a n c e of th e

s u p p ly . The o u tp u t c u rre n t is m e a su re d w ith any re s is tiv e lo a d in c lu d in g a s h o rt-c irc u it
m e a su re d 60 s a fte r th e a p p lic a tio n o f th e lo a d if c u r r e n t is l i m i t e d b y im p e d a n c e o r th e
c u r r e n t l i m i t i n g d e v i c e is a f u s e , a c i r c u i t b r e a k e r o r a P T C d e v i c e , o r 5 s in o t h e r c a s e s .
5.6.4.2.4 Current limiting and overcurrent protective devices
A c u r r e n t lim itin g d e v ic e (a P T C d e v ic e ) o r a n o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t iv e d e v ic e (a f u s e o r a c ir c u it
b r e a k e r ) s h a ll n o t b e c o n n e c te d in p a r a l l e l w i t h a n y o t h e r c o m p o n e n t t h a t c o u l d f a i l t o a l o w -
r e s i s t a 门c e s t a t e .
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement of the p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g

c o n d u c to r sizes in accordance with Table 31 or Table G.7 and the test of 5.6.6 or Annex R
as applicable.
5.6.5 Terminals for protective conductors
T e rm in a ls fo r c o n n e c tin g protective earthing conductors s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e m in im u m

t e r m i n a l s i z e s in T a b l e 3 2 .
T e rm in a ls fo r c o n n e c tin g protective bonding conductors s h a ll c o m p ly w ith one of th e

fo llo w in g :
- t h e m i n i m u m t e r m i n a l s i z e s in T a b l e 3 2 ; o r
- if e it h e r th e rated current o f th e e q u ip m e n t o r th e protective current rating o f th e c irc u it

exceeds 25 A, w ith te rm in a l s iz e s th a t a re not m o re th a n one s iz e s m a lle r th a n in
T a b le 3 2 ; o r

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -135-
- if b o th th e rated current o f th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th e protective current rating o f th e c irc u it

d o n o t e x c e e d 2 5 A ; e ith e r
• w i t h t e r m i n a l s i z e s t h a t a r e n o t m o r e t h a n o n e s i z e s m a l l e r t h a n in T a b l e 3 2 ; o r
• w ith th e lim ite d s h o r t- c ir c u it te s t o f A n n e x R;
or
- f or c o m p o n e n ts o n ly , be not s m a lle r th a n th e te rm in a l s iz e s s u p p ly in g power to th e

c o m p o n e n t.
Table 32 - Sizes of terminals for protective conductors
Conductor size Minimum nominal thread diameter Area of cross section

mm2 mm mm2
(from Table G.7) Pillar type or stud type Screw type a Pillar type or stud type Screw type a
1 3,0 3,5 7 9,6

1,5 3,5 4,0 9,6 12,6
2,5 4,0 5,0 12,6 19,6
4 4,0 5,0 12,6 19,6
6 5,0 5,0 19,6 19,6
10 b 6,0 6,0 28 28
16 b 7,9 7,9 49 49
’’Screw type" refers to a terminal that clamps the conductor under the head of a screw， with or without a
washer.
b As an alternative to the requirements of this table, the protective earthing conductor may be attached to
special connectors, or suitable clamping means (for example, an upturned spade or closed loop pressure
type; clamping unit type; saddle clamping unit type; mantle clamping unit type; etc.) that is secured by a
screw and nut mechanism to the metal chassis of the equipment. The sum of the cross-sectional areas of the
screw and the nut shall not be less than three times the cross-sectional area of the conductor size in Table 31
or Table G.7 as applicable. The terminals shall comply with IEC 60998-1 and IEC 60999-1 or IEC 60999-2.
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement of protective terminal sizes in

accordance with Table 32, the test of 5.6.6 or Annex R as applicable.
5.6.5.2 Corrosion
C o n d u c tiv e p a rts in c o n ta c t at th e m a in protective earthing te rm in a l, p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g

t e r m i n a l s a n d c o n n e c t i o n s s h a l l b e s e l e c t e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h A n n e x N s o t h a t t h e p o t e n t i a l
d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n a n y t w o d i f f e r e n t m e t a l s is 0 , 6 V o r l e s s .
Compliance is checked by inspection of the materials of the conductors and terminals and
associated parts and determination of the potential difference.
5.6.6 Resistance of the protective bonding system
Protective bonding conductors a n d th e ir te r m in a tio n s s h a ll n o t h a v e e x c e s s iv e re s is ta n c e .
NOTE A protective bonding system in the equipment consists of a single conductor or a combination of
conductive parts, connecting a main protective earthing terminal to a part of the equipment that is to be earthed
for safety purposes.
Protective bonding conductors th a t m eet th e m in im u m c o n d u c to r s iz e s in T a b le G .7

th ro u g h o u t th e ir le n g th and whose te rm in a ls a ll m eet th e m in im u m s iz e s in T a b le 3 2 a re
c o n s id e r e d to c o m p ly w ith o u t te s t.

- 136 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
O n e q u i p m e n t w h e r e t h e p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h c o n n e c t i o n t o a s u b a s s e m b l y o r t o a s e p a r a t e u n i t is
m a d e b y m e a n s o f o n e c o r e o f a m u ltic o r e c a b le th a t a ls o s u p p lie s p o w e r to th a t s u b a s s e m b ly
o r u n it a n d w h e r e th e c a b le is p r o t e c t e d b y a s u ita b ly ra te d p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e t h a t ta k e s in to
a c c o u n t th e s iz e o f th e c o n d u c to r, th e re s is ta n c e o f th e protective bonding conductor in
t h a t c a b l e i s n o t i n c l u d e d in t h e m e a s u r e m e n t .
5.6.6.2 Test method
The test current can be either AC or DC and the test voltage shall not exceed 12 V. The
measurement is made between the main p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g terminal and the point in the
equipment that is required to be earthed.
The resistance of the p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g c o n d u c to r and of any earthed conductor in other
external wiring is not included in the measurement. However， if the p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g
c o n d u c to r is supplied with the equipment， the conductor may be included in the test circuit
but the measurement of the voltage drop is made only from the main p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g
terminal to the part required to be earthed.
Care is taken that the contact resistance between the tip of the measuring probe and the
conductive part under test does not influence the test results. The test current and duration of
the test are as follows:
a) For equipment powered from the m a in s where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g of the circuit
under test is 25 A or less， the test current is 200 % of the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g
applied for 2 min.
b) For equipment powered from the AC m a in s where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g of the
circuit under test exceeds 25 Af the test current is 200 % of the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g
or 500 A， whichever is less, and the duration of the test is as shown in Table 33.
Table 33 - Test duration， mains connected equipment
Protective current rating of the circuit Duration of the test

A
up to and including min
30 2
60 4
100 6
200 8
over 200 10
c) As an alternative to b)， the tests are based on the time-current characteristic of the
overcurrent protective device that limits the fault current in the p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g
c o n d u c to r. This device is either one provided in the BUT or specified in the installation
instructions to be provided external to the equipment. The tests are conducted at 200 % of
the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g , for the duration corresponding to 200 % on the time-current
characteristic. If the duration for 200 % is not given, the nearest point on the time-current
characteristic may be used.
d) For equipment powered from a DC m ains, if the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g o f the circuit
under test exceeds 25 Af the test current and duration are as specified by the
manufacturer.
e) For equipment receiving its power from an e x te rn a l c irc u it, the test current is 1,5 times
the maximum current available from the e x te rn a l c ir c u it or 2 A ， whichever is greater， for a
duration o f 2 min. For parts connected to the p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r to limit the
transients or to limit to u c h c u rre n t to an e x te rn a l c ir c u it and that do not exceed an ES2
level during s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s , the test is conducted in accordance with the relevant
test method of either a), b), c) or d) based on the power source assumed.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 137 -
Where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g does not exceed 25 A f the resistance of the protective
bonding system, calculated from the voltage drop, shall not exceed 0,1 Q.
Where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g exceeds 25 A f the voltage drop over the protective
bonding system shall not exceed 2,5 V.
5.6.7 Reliable connection of a protective earthing conductor
For permanently connected equipment， e a r t h i n g is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e r e lia b le .
F o r co rd c o n n e c te d mains e q u i p m e n t , e a r t h i n g is a ls o c o n s i d e r e d to b e r e l i a b l e f o r :
- pluggable equipment type B; or
- stationary pluggable equipment type A ，

• th a t is in te n d e d to be used in a lo c a tio n h a v in g e q u ip o te n tia l b o n d in g (su ch as a
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n c e n tre , a d e d ic a te d c o m p u te r ro o m , o r a restricted access area);
and
• has in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s th a t re q u ire v e rific a tio n of th e protective earthing
c o n n e c tio n o f th e s o c k e t- o u tle t b y a skilled person; or
- stationary pluggable equipment type A,

• th a t h a s p ro v is io n fo r a p e r m a n e n tly c o n n e c te d protective earthing conductor; and
• has in s tru c tio n s fo r th e in s ta lla tio n o f th a t c o n d u c to r to b u ild in g e a rth by a skilled

person.
F o r e q u ip m e n t c o n n e c te d to a n external circuit a s i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 1 3 ，I D n u m b e r s 1 , 2 , 3 ,
4 and 5, e a rth in g is c o n s id e re d to be re lia b le fo r pluggable equipment type A and
pluggable equipment type B t h a t h a v e p ro v is io n fo r:
- a p e rm a n e n tly c o n n e c te d protective earthing conductor; and
一 h a s in s tr u c tio n s fo r th e in s ta lla tio n o f th a t c o n d u c to r to b u ild in g e a rth b y a skilled person.
5.6.8 Functional earthing
If aprotective earthing conductor in t h e mains s u p p ly co rd is o n l y used fo r e s ta b lis h in g

functional earthing:
- t he r e q u ir e m e n ts fo r c o n d u c to r s iz e a s g iv e n in G . 7 . 2 a p p ly to th e e a rth in g c o n d u c to r o f
th e mains s u p p ly c o rd ; a n d
- t he m a rk in g fo r class II equipment w ith functional earthing s h a ll b e u s e d a s s p e c ifie d in

F .3 .6 .2 : an d
- t he a p p lia n c e in le t, if used, s h a ll c o m p ly w ithcreepage distance

th e and clearance
re q u ire m e n ts fo r double insulation or reinforced insulation.
NOTE 1 Some appliance inlets for class I equipment do not have sufficient insulation to serve as double
insulation or reinforced insulation between the phases and the protective earthing terminal. Equipment
using such an inlet is not considered to be class II equipment.
NOTE 2 In Norway, equipment connected with an earthed mains plug is classified as class I equipment. See
the marking requirement in the country note to 4.1.15. The symbol IEC 60417-6092, as specified in F.3.6.2, is
accepted.
5.7 Prospective touch voltage, touch current and protective conductor current
5.7.1 General
M e a s u re m e n ts of prospective touch voltage, touch current, and protective conductor

current a re m a d e w ith th e E U T s u p p lie d a t th e m o s t u n fa v o u r a b le s u p p ly v o lta g e (s e e B .2 .3 ).

- 138 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
5.7.2 Measuring devices and networks
5.7.2.1 Measurement of touch current
F o r m e a s u re m e n ts o f touch current, th e in s tru m e n t u s e d fo r m e a s u rin g U2 and U3 s p e c ifie d

in F i g u r e s 4 a n d 5 re s p e c tiv e ly in IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6 s h a ll in d ic a te p e a k v o lta g e . If t h e touch
current w a v e fo rm is s i n u s o i d a l , a n R M S i n d i c a t i n g i n s t r u m e n t m a y b e u s e d .
5.7.2.2 Measurement of voltage
E q u i p m e n t , o r p a r t s o f e q u i p m e n t , t h a t a r e i n t e n d e d t o b e e a r t h e d in t h e i n t e n d e d a p p l i c a t i o n ,
b u t a re u n e a rth e d as p r o v id e d , s h a ll be c o n n e c te d to e a rth d u rin g th e m e a s u r e m e n t a t th e
p o in t b y w h ic h th e h ig h e s t prospective touch voltage is o b t a i n e d .
5.7.3 Equipment set-up, supply connections and earth connections
The e q u ip m e n t s e t-u p , e q u ip m e n t s u p p ly c o n n e c tio n s and e q u ip m e n t e a rth in g s h a ll be in

a c c o r d a n c e w ith C la u s e 4 , 5 .3 a n d 5 .4 o f IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6 .
E q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d w ith a c o n n e c tio n to e a rth s e p a ra te fro m th e protective earthing

conductor s h a ll b e te s te d w ith th a t c o n n e c tio n d is c o n n e c te d .
S y s te m s o f in te r c o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t w ith s e p a r a te c o n n e c tio n s to th e mains s h a ll h a v e e a c h

e q u ip m e n t te s te d s e p a ra te ly .
S y s te m s o f in te rc o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t w ith o n e c o n n e c t io n to th e mains s h a ll b e te s te d a s a
s in g le e q u ip m e n t.
NOTE 1 Systems of interconnected equipment are specified in more detail in Annex A of IEC 60990:2016.
E q u i p m e n t t h a t is d e s i g n e d f o r m u lt ip l e c o n n e c t i o n s t o t h e mains, w h e re o n ly o n e c o n n e c tio n
is re q u ire d at a tim e , s h a ll have each c o n n e c tio n te s te d w h ile th e o th e r c o n n e c tio n s a re
d is c o n n e c te d .
E q u ip m e n t th a t is d e s ig n e d fo r m u ltip le c o n n e c tio n s to th e mains, w h e re m o re th a n one

c o n n e c tio n is re q u ire d , s h a ll have each c o n n e c tio n te s te d w h ile th e o th e r c o n n e c tio n s a re
c o n n e c te d , w ith th e protective earthing conductors c o n n e c t e d t o g e t h e r . I f t h e touch
current e x c e e d s th e l i m i t i n 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 f t h e touch current s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d i n d i v i d u a l l y .
NOTE 2 It is not necessary that the EUT operates normally during this test.
5.7.4 Unearthed accessible parts
Under normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions and single fault
conditions ( e x c e p t f o r a safeguard f a u l t ) , t o u c h v o l t a g e o r touch current s h a ll b e m e a s u r e d
f r o m a l l u n e a r t h e d accessible c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s . Touch current ( c u r r e n t a and cu rre n t b of
T a b l e 4 ) s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 1 , 5 . 4 a n d 6 . 2 . 1 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 .
Under single fault conditions o f a r e l e v a n t basic safeguard o r a supplementary

safeguard, i n c l u d i n g 6 . 2 . 2 . 2 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 , t o u c h v o l t a g e o r touch current s h a l l b e
m e a s u r e d f r o m a l l u n e a r t h e d accessible c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s . Touch current ( c u r r e n t b o f
T a b l e 4 ) s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d w i t h t h e n e t w o r k s p e c i f i e d in F i g u r e 5 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 .
For an accessible n o n - c o n d u c t i v e p a r t , t h e t e s t is m a d e w i t h a m e t a l f o i l a s s p e c i f i e d in 5 .2 .1
o f IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -139-
5.7.5 Earthed accessible conductive parts
A t le a s t o n e e a rth e d accessible c o n d u c tiv e p a rt s h a ll b e te s te d fo r touch current fo llo w in g

s u p p l y c o n n e c t i o n f a u l t s in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 6 .1 a n d 6 . 2 . 2 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 , e x c e p t 6 . 2 . 2 . 8 .
E x c e p t a s p e r m i t t e d in 5 . 7 . 6 , t h e touch current s h a l l n o t e x c e e d t h e E S 2 l i m i t s in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 .
S u b c la u s e 6 .2 .2 .3 of IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6 does n o t a p p ly to e q u ip m e n t w ith a s w itc h or o th e r

disconnect device t h a t d i s c o n n e c t s a ll p o le s o f t h e s u p p ly .
NOTE An appliance coupler is an example of a disconnect device.
5.7.6 Requirements when touch current exceeds ES2 limits
W h e re th e touch current e x c e e d s t h e E S 2 l i m i t s in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 u n d e r th e s u p p ly fa u lt c o n d itio n s

s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 2 . 2 . 2 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 , a ll o f t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s a p p l y :
- t he protective conductor current m e a su re d a c c o rd in g to C la u s e 8 o f IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6

s h a ll n o t e x c e e d 5 % o f th e in p u t c u r r e n t m e a s u r e d u n d e r normal operating conditions;
- t he c o n s tru c tio n o f th e protective earthing conductor c irc u it a n d its c o n n e c tio n s s h a ll
have:
• a protective earthing conductor s e r v i n g a s a reinforced safeguard a s s p e c ifie d in

5 . 6 . 3 o r t w o i n d e p e n d e n t protective earthing conductors s e r v i n g as a double
safeguard, a n d
• a re lia b le c o n n e c tio n to protective earthing a s s p e c i f i e d in 5.6.7;
- t he m a n u fa c tu re r s h a ll in d ic a te th e v a lu e o f th e protective conductor current in th e
i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s if t h e c u r r e n t e x c e e d s 1 0 m A ;
- an instructional safeguard s h a ll b e p ro v id e d in a c c o r d a n c e w it h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t
e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l . T h e e l e m e n t s o f t h e instructional safeguard s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
旧 C 6 0 4 1 7 -6 0 4 2 (2 0 1 0 -1 1 ); and
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 1 7 3 (2 0 1 2 -1 0 ); a n d
(T )
, IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 9 (2 0 0 6 -0 8 )
• e le m e n t 2: “ C a u t io n ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o r d o r te x t, a n d “ H ig h to u c h c u r r e n t ” o r e q u iv a le n t
te x t
• e le m e n t 3: o p tio n a l
• e le m e n t 4: “ C o n n e c t to e a r th b e fo r e c o n n e c t in g to s u p p ly ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e instructional safeguard th a t a re re q u ire d to b e p la c e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t

s h a ll b e a ffix e d to th e e q u ip m e n t a d ja c e n t to th e e q u ip m e n t s u p p ly c o n n e c tio n .
NOTE In Denmark, the installation instruction shall be affixed to the equipment if the protective conductor
current exceeds the limits of 3t5 mA AC or 10 mA DC.
5.7.7 Prospective touch voltage and touch current associated with external circuits
5.7.7.1 Touch current from coaxial cables
If t h e e q u i p m e n t is c o n n e c t e d t o external circuits w it h a c o a x ia l c a b le a n d if s u c h c o n n e c t i o n
is l i k e l y t o c r e a t e a h a z a r d , t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r s h a l l p r o v i d e in s tr u c tio n s to c o n n e c t th e s h ie ld
of th e c o a x ia l c a b le to th e b u ild in g e a rth in a cco rd a n ce w ith 6 .2 g ) and 6 . 2 I) of
IE C 6 0 7 2 8 -1 1 :2 0 1 6 .
Copyright Inlernatiohal Etectrotechmcal Commission

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
NOTE 1 In Norway and Sweden, the screen of the television distribution system is normally not earthed at the
entrance of the building and there is normally no equipotential bonding system within the building. Therefore the
protective earthing of the building installation needs to be isolated from the screen of a cable distribution system.
It is however accepted to provide the insulation external to the equipment by an adapter or an interconnection
cable with galvanic isolator, which may be provided by a retailer, for example.
The user manual shall then have the following or similar information in Norwegian and Swedish language
respectively, depending on in what country the equipment is intended to be used in:
“Apparatus connected to the protective earthing of the building installation through the mains connection or
through other apparatus with a connection to protective earthing - and to a television distribution system using
coaxial cable, may in some circumstances create a fire hazard. Connection to a television distribution system
therefore has to be provided through a device providing electrical isolation below a certain frequency range
(galvanic isolator, see IEC 60728-11)” .
NOTE 2 In Norway, due to regulation for CATV-installations, and in Sweden, a galvanic isolator shall provide
electrical insulation below 5 MHz. The insulation shall withstand a dielectric strength of 1,5 kV RMS, 50 Hz or
60 Hzf for 1 minute.
Translation to Norwegian (the Swedish text will also be accepted in Norway):
t4Apparater som er koplet til beskyttelsesjord via nettplugg og/eller via annet jordtilkoplet utstyr - og er tilkoplet et
koaksialbasert kabel-TV nett, kan forarsake brannfare. For a unnga dette skal det ved tilkopling av apparater til
kabel-TV nett installeres en galvanisk isolator mellom apparatet og kabe 卜 TV nettet.”
Translation to Swedish:
”Apparater som ar kopplad till skyddsjord via jordat vagguttag och/eller via annan utrustning och samtidigt ar
kopplad till kabel-TV nat kan i vissa fall medfora risk for brand. For att undvika detta skall vid anslutning av
apparaten till kabel-TV nat galvanisk isolator finnas mellan apparaten och kabel-TV natet.>,
5.7.7.2 Prospective touch voltage and touch current associated with paired
conductor cables
F o r c irc u its in te n d e d to b e c o n n e c te d to external circuits s u c h a s th o s e d e s c rib e d in I D 1 o f

T a b le 13:
- t he prospective touch voltage s h a ll c o m p ly w ith E S 2 ; o r
- t he touch current s h a ll n o t e x c e e d 0 ,2 5 m A .
T h e a b o v e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly if t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g external circuits a re c o n n e c t e d to
a protective earthing conductor.
Compliance is checked by measurement according 5.7.2 and 5.7.3 by using the measurement
arrangement in Figure 32 for single-phase equipment and Figure 33 for three-phase
equipment.
NOTE For other power distribution systems, see IEC 60990:2016.

IEC 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Point of connection
to AC mains supply
(Polarity)
External circuit
ports
P2
(Polarity)
Optional test
transformer
for isolation
Measuring (Test switch)
network
ie c
Figure 32 - Test circuit for touch current of single-phase equipment
Point of connection
to AC mains supply
L1
(Polarity)
External circuit
L2 P1_____ L2 ports
(Polarity)
L3 L3 p2
N N
PE e PE EUT
T
(Earthing
Optional test conductor)
transformer
for isolation
Oa
b
Measuring
(Test switch)
network
ICC
Figure 33 - Test circuit for touch current of three-phase equipment
5.7.8 Summation of touch currents from external circuits
The re q u ire m e n ts b e lo w s p e c ify when a p e rm a n e n tly protective earthing

c o n n e c te d
conductor is re q u ire d fo r pluggable equipment type A or pluggable equipment type B,
s h o u ld th e mains c o n n e c tio n b e d is c o n n e c te d .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
The re q u ire m e n ts a p p ly o n ly to e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to be c o n n e c te d to a n external circuit

s u c h a s d e s c r i b e d in T a b l e 1 3 , I D n u m b e r s 1 , 2 , 3 a n d 4 .
NOTE These types of external circuits are typically telecommunication networks.
T h e s u m m a tio n of touch currents fro m e q u ip m e n t th a t p ro v id e s m u ltip le external circuits,

s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e lim its fo r E S 2 (s e e T a b le 4 ).
T h e fo llo w in g a b b re v ia tio n s a re u s e d :
- I y touch current re c e iv e d fro m o th e r e q u ip m e n t v ia a n e x te r n a l n e tw o rk ;
- S(I^): s u m m a tio n of touch current re c e iv e d fro m a ll o th e r e q u ip m e n t v ia an e x te rn a l

n e tw o rk ;
一 / 2: touch current d u e to th e mains o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
It s h a ll be assum ed th a t each c irc u it o f th e e q u ip m e n t c o n n e c te d to an external circuit

re c e iv e s 0 ,2 5 mA (1^) fro m th e o th e r e q u ip m e n t, u n le s s th e a c tu a l c u rre n t fro m th e o th e r
e q u i p m e n t is k n o w n t o b e l o w e r .
T h e fo llo w in g r e q u ir e m e n ts , a ) o r b) a s a p p lic a b le , s h a ll b e m e t:
a) E q u ip m e n t c o n n e c t e d to a n e a r th e d external circuit
For e q u ip m e n t in w h ic h each c irc u it th a t can be c o n n e c te d to an external circuit is
c o n n e c te d to a te rm in a l fo r th e protective earthing conductor o f th e e q u ip m e n t, th e
fo llo w in g s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d :
1) If S(I^) (n o t in c lu d in g I2) e x c e e d s E S 2 lim its o f T a b le 4:
- t h e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll h a v e p r o v is io n fo r a p e r m a n e n t c o n n e c tio n to p r o te c tiv e e a rth

in protective earthing conductor i n t h e p o w e r
a d d itio n to th e s u p p ly co rd of
pluggable equipment type A o r pluggable equipment type B; a n d
- t h e in s t a lla t io n in s t r u c t io n s s h a ll s p e c if y th e p r o v is io n o f a p e r m a n e n t c o n n e c t io n to
p ro te c tiv e e a rth w ith a c ro s s -s e c tio n a l a re a of not le s s th a n 2 ,5 m m 2, if
m e c h a n ic a lly p ro te c te d , o r o th e rw is e 4 ,0 m m 2; a n d
- p r o v i d e a m a r k i n g in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 7 . 6 a n d C l a u s e F . 3 .
2) S u c h e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 5 .7 .6 . T h e v a lu e o f I2 s h a ll b e u s e d to c a lc u la te th e
5 % i n p u t c u r r e n t l i m i t p e r p h a s e s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 7 . 6 .
3) The sum of S(I^) a n d / 2 s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e lim its o f T a b le 4.
Compliance with item a) is checked by inspection and if necessary by test.

If the equipment has provision for a permanent protective earth connection in accordance
with item 1) above, it is not necessary to make any measurements, except that I2 shall
comply with the relevant requirements of 5.7.
Touch c u rre n t tests, if necessary, are made using the relevant measuring instrument
described in IEC 60990:2016, Figure 5f or any other instrument giving the same results. A
source (for example, a capacitively coupled AC source of the same line frequency and
phase as the AC m ains) is applied to each e x te rn a l c ir c u it and adjusted so that 0,25 mAf
or the actual current from other equipment, if known to be lower, is available to flow into
that e x te rn a l c irc u it. The current flowing in the earthing conductor is then measured.
b) E q u ip m e n t c o n n e c t e d to a n u n e a r th e d external circuit
If e a c h c irc u it o f th e e q u ip m e n t th a t c a n be c o n n e c te d to an external circuit does not
have a com m on c o n n e c tio n , th e touch current fo r e a c h c ir c u it s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e E S 2
lim its o f T a b le 4.
If a ll c i r c u i t s o f t h e e q u i p m e n t t h a t c a n b e c o n n e c t e d to a n external circuit o r a n y g r o u p s
of such p o rts have a com m on c o n n e c tio n , th e to ta l touch current f r o m e a c h c o m m o n
c o n n e c tio n s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e E S 2 lim its o f T a b le 4.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Compliance with item b) is checked by inspection and, if there are common connection
points, by the following test.
A capacitively coupled AC source of the same frequency and phase as the AC m a in s is
applied to each circuit of the equipment that can be connected to an e x te rn a l c ir c u it so
that 0,25 mA, or the actual current from the other equipment if known to be lower, is
available to flow into that circuit. Common connection points are tested in accordance with
5.7.3, whether or not the points are a cce ssib le .
5.8 Backfeed safeguard in battery backed up supplies
A battery backed up s u p p ly th a t is an in te g ra l p a rt of th e e q u ip m e n t and is c a p a b le of

b a c k fe e d in g s h a ll p r e v e n t g r e a t e r th a n ES1 fro m b e in g p re s e n t on th e mains te rm in a ls a fte r
in te rru p tio n o f th e mains p o w e r.
N o h a z a rd s h a ll e x is t a t th e mains t e r m i n a l s w h e n m e a s u r e d 1 s a f t e r d e - e n e r g i z a t i o n o f t h e
mains f o r pluggable type A equipment, 5 s f o r pluggable type B equipment o r 1 5 s f o r
permanently connected equipment u s i n g t h e m e a s u r e m e n t i n s t r u m e n t s d e s c r i b e d i n 5 . 7 . 2 .
W h e r e t h e m e a s u r e d o p e n - c i r c u i t v o l t a g e d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e E S 1 l i m i t s , t h e touch current
d o e s n o t h a v e to b e m e a s u re d .
Compliance is checked by inspection o f the equipment and the relevant circuit diagram, by
measurement and by s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s in accordance with BA.
NOTE 1 For standards related to battery backed up power supply systems that are not an integral part of the
equipment, see standards related to UPS, such as IEC 62040-1. For transfer switches, see IEC 62310-1:2005.
NOTE 2 See also the explanatory information in IEC TR 62368-2.
W hen an a ir gap is e m p lo y e d backfeed safeguard, t h e

as a re q u ire m e n ts of 5.4.2 fo r
clearances and 5.4.3 fo r creepage distances a p p l y i n a d d i t i o n t o th e fo llo w in g :
- s u b j e c t to c o n firm a tio n fro m th e m a n u fa c tu re r, th e battery backed up s u p p ly o u tp u t, in

stored energy mode m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d a t r a n s i e n t f r e e c i r c u i t o f O v e r v o l t a g e C a t e g o r y I;
- clearances a n d creepage distances s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s

t he fo r pollution
degree 2 o r h i g h e r i f e x p e c t e d i n t h e i n t e n d e d i n s t a l l a t i o n l o c a t i o n ;
- reinforced insulation s h a l l b e a p p l i e d b e t w e e n t h e u n i t o u t p u t a n d t h e u n it i n p u t if d u r in g
stored energy mode o f o p e r a t i o n n o t a l l i n p u t p o l e s a r e is o la te d by th e backfeed
safeguard d e v i c e . I n a l l o t h e r c a s e s , basic insulation s h a l l b e a p p lie d .
6 Electrically-caused fire
6.1 General
To re d u ce th e lik e lih o o d of in ju ry or p ro p e rty dam age due to an e le c tric a lly -c a u s e d fire

o r ig in a tin g w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t, e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith th e safeguards s p e c ifie d
in C l a u s e 6 .
6.2 Classification of power sources (PS) and potential ignition sources (PIS)
6.2.1 General
E le c tric a l s o u r c e s o f h e a tin g c a n b e c la s s ifie d in to a v a ila b le p o w e r le v e ls P S 1 , P S 2 a n d P S 3

(se e 6 .2 .2 .4 , 6 .2 .2 .5 and 6 .2 .2 .6 ) th a t m a y c a u s e re s is tiv e h e a tin g o f b o th c o m p o n e n ts and
c o n n e c tio n s . T h e s e p o w e r s o u r c e s a re b a s e d o n a v a ila b le e n e r g y to a c irc u it.
W ith in a p o w e r s o u rc e , a PIS m a y a r is e d u e to a r c in g o f e it h e r b r o k e n c o n n e c t io n s o r o p e n in g
o f c o n ta c ts (arcing PIS) o r fro m c o m p o n e n ts d is s ip a tin g m o re th a n 15 W (resistive PIS).

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
D e p e n d in g on th e p o w e r so u rce c la s s ific a tio n of each c irc u it, o n e o r m o re safeguards a re

r e q u ir e d e it h e r to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n o r to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f s p r e a d o f fire
b e y o n d th e e q u ip m e n t.
6.2.2 Power source circuit classifications
6.2.2.1 General
A n e l e c t r i c c i r c u i t is c l a s s i f i e d P S 1 , P S 2 , o r P S 3 b a s e d o n t h e e l e c t r i c a l p o w e r a v a i l a b l e t o th e
c irc u it fro m th e p o w e r s o u rc e .
The e le c tric a l p o w e r so u rce c la s s ific a tio n s h a ll be d e te rm in e d by m e a s u rin g th e m a x im u m

p o w e r u n d e r e a c h o f th e fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s :
- f or lo a d c irc u its : a p o w e r s o u r c e u n d e r normal operating conditions a s s p e c ifie d b y th e

m a n u f a c t u r e r in to a w o r s t - c a s e fa u lt ( s e e 6 .2 .2 .2 ) ;
- f or p o w e r s o u r c e c irc u its : a w o r s t- c a s e p o w e r s o u r c e fa u lt in to th e s p e c ifie d n o r m a l lo a d

c irc u it (s e e 6 .2 .2 .3 ).
T h e p o w e r is m e a s u r e d a t p o i n t s X a n d Y in F i g u r e 3 4 a n d F i g u r e 3 5 .
6.2.2.2 Power measurement for worst-case fault
With reference to Figure 34:
- the measurement may be performed without the load circuit I NL connected, unless the
maximum power is dependent on the connection o f the load;
- at points X and Y， insert a wattmeter (or a voltmeter， VA， and a current meter， IA);
- connect a variable resistor, L VR, as shown;
- adjust the variable resistor, L V R , for maximum power. Measure the maximum power and
classify the power source according to 6.2.2.4, 6.2.2.5 or 6.2.2.6.
If an overcurrent protective device operates during the test， the measurement shall be
repeated at 125 % of the current rating of the overcurrent protective device.
If a power limiting device or circuit operates during the test， the measurement shall be
repeated at a point ju s t below the current at which the power limiting device or circuit
operated.
When evaluating accessories connected via cables to the equipment， the impedance of the
cable may be taken into account in the determination of PS1 or PS2 on the accessory side.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Key
V voltage source
R、 internal resistance of the power source
/A current from the power source
VA voltage at the points where determination of PS power is made
△ VR variable resistor load
L nl normal load
Figure 34 - Power measurement for worst-case fault
6.2.2.3 Power measurement for worst-case power source fault
With reference to Figure 35:
一 At points X and Y， insert a wattmeter (or a voltmeter, VA， and a current meter， IA).
- Within the power source circuit, simulate any s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n that will result in
maximum power to the circuit being classified. All relevant components in the power
source circuits shall be short-circuited or disconnected one at a time at each
measurement.
- Equi pment containing audio amplifiers shall also be tested under a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g
c o n d itio n s as specified in Clause E.3.
- Measure the maximum power as specified and classify circuits supplied by the power
source according to 6.2.2.4, 6.2.2.5 or 6.2.2.6.
If an overcurrent protective device operates during the test， the measurement shall be
repeated at 125 % of the current rating o f the overcurrent protective device.
If a power limiting device or circuit operates during the test， the measurement shall be
repeated at a point ju s t below the current at which the power limiting device or circuit
operated.
When the tests are repeated, a variable resistance may be used to simulate the component
under fault.
To avoid damage to the components of the normal load, a resistor (equal to the normal load)
may be substituted for the normal load.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
NOTE Experimentation can be used to identify the single component fault that produces maximum power.
Key
V voltage source
internal resistance of the power source
/A current from the power source
VA voltage at the points where determination of PS power is made
Z，NLnormal load
Figure 35 - Power measurement for worst-case power source fault
6.2.2.4 PS1
PS1 is a c i r c u i t w h e r e t h e p o w e r s o u r c e , ( s e e F ig u re 3 6 ) m e a s u r e d a c c o rd in g to 6 .2 .2 , d o e s
n o t e x c e e d 1 5 W m e a s u r e d a f t e r 3 s.
The p o w e r a v a ila b le fro m external circuits d e s c rib e d in T a b l e 1 3 , I D n u m b e r s 1 and 2, a re

c o n s id e r e d to b e lim ite d to P S 1 .
6.2.2.5 PS2
P S 2 is a c irc u it w h e r e th e p o w e r s o u rc e , (s e e F ig u re 3 6 ) m e a s u r e d a c c o r d in g to 6 .2 .2 :
- e x c e e d s PS1 lim its ; a n d
- d o e s n o t e x c e e d 1 0 0 W m e a s u r e d a fte r 5 s.
6.2.2.6 PS3
P S 3 is a c i r c u i t w h o s e p o w e r so u rce e xce e d s P S 2 lim its , o r a n y c ir c u it w h o s e p o w e r so u rce

h a s n o t b e e n c la s s ifie d (s e e F ig u re 3 6 ).

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
4 000W
PS3 circuit
—
l
o
o
s
C NJ
s d
T -
d
100 w
PS2 circuit
15 w
PS 1 circuit
Figure 36 - Illustration of power source classification
6.2.3 Classification of potential ignition sources
6.2.3.1 Arcing PIS
An arcing PIS is a l o c a t i o n w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s :
- an open c irc u it v o lta g e (m e a su re d a fte r 3 s) a cro ss an open c o n d u c to r or o p e n in g

e le c tric a l c o n ta c t e x c e e d in g 5 0 V (p e a k ) A C o r D C ; a n d
- t he p ro d u c t o f th e p e a k o f th e open c irc u it v o lta g e ( F p) a n d th e m e a su re d RMS cu rre n t

( / rm s ) e x c e e d s 1 5 ( t h a t is , Fp x / rm s > 1 5 ) f o r a n y o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
• a c o n ta c t, s u c h a s a s w itc h o r c o n n e c to r;
• a te r m in a tio n , s u c h a s o n e m a d e b y a c rim p , s p rin g o r s o ld e r te r m in a tio n ;
• o p e n in g o f a c o n d u c to r, su ch a s a p rin te d w ir in g b o a rd tra c e , as a c o n s e q u e n c e of a
single fault condition. T h i s c o n d it io n d o e s n o t a p p ly if e le c t r o n i c p r o t e c t i o n c ir c u it s o r
a d d itio n a l c o n s tr u c tio n a l m e a s u r e s a re u s e d to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d th a t s u c h a fa u lt
be co m e s an arcing PIS.
An arcing PIS i s c o n s i d e r e d n o t t o e x i s t in a P S 1 b e c a u s e o f th e lim its o f th e p o w e r s o u rc e .
NOTE 1 An open conductor in an electric circuit includes those interruptions that occur in conductive patterns on
printed boards.
R e lia b le o r r e d u n d a n t c o n n e c tio n s a re n o t c o n s id e re d to be a n arcing PIS.
Redundant c o n n e c tio n s a re any k in d o f tw o or m o re c o n n e c tio n s in p a ra lle l, w h e re in th e

e v e n t o f th e fa ilu r e o f o n e c o n n e c t io n , th e r e m a in in g c o n n e c t io n s a re s till c a p a b le o f h a n d lin g
th e fu ll p o w e r .
R e lia b le c o n n e c tio n s a re c o n n e c tio n s th a t a re c o n s id e re d n o t to o p e n .
NOTE 2 Connections that could be considered reliable are:

一 holes of solder pads on a printed board that are through-metallized;
- tubular rivets/eyelets that are additionally soldered;
- machine-made or tool-made crimp or wire-wrap connections.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
NOTE 3 Other means to avoid the occurrence of an arcing PIS can be used.
NOTE 4 Connection failure due to thermal fatigue phenomena could be prevented by selection of components
with a coefficient of thermal expansion similar to that of the printed board material, taking into account the location
of the component with respect to the fibre direction of the board material.
6.2.3.2 Resistive PIS
A resistive PIS is a n y p a r t in a P S 2 o r P S 3 c i r c u i t t h a t :
- d i s s i p a t e s m o re th a n 15 W m e a s u re d a fte r 30 s u n d e r normal operating conditions; or
NOTE During the first 30 s there is no limit.
- under single fault conditions:

• d is s ip a te s m o re th a n 100 W m e a s u r e d fo r 3 0 s, d is r e g a r d in g th e firs t 3 s, im m e d ia te ly
a fte r th e in tro d u c tio n o f th e f a u l t if e le c t r o n i c c irc u its , re g u la to rs or PTC d e v ic e s a re
used; or
• d is s ip a te s m o re th a n 15 W m e a s u r e d 3 0 s a fte r th e in tr o d u c tio n o f th e fa u lt.
A resistive PIS is c o n s i d e r e d n o t t o e x i s t in a P S 1 b e c a u s e o f th e lim its o f th e p o w e r s o u rc e .
6.3 Safeguards against fire under normal operating conditions and abnormal
operating conditions
6.3.1 Requirements
Under normal operating conditions and abnormal operating conditions, th e fo llo w in g

basic safeguards a r e r e q u i r e d :
- i gni t i on s h a ll n o t o c c u r; a n d
- no p a rt of th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll a tta in a te m p e ra tu re v a lu e g re a te r th a n 90 % of th e
s p o n ta n e o u s ig n itio n te m p e ra tu re lim it, in C e ls iu s , o f th e p a rt as d e fin e d by IS O 8 7 1 .
W h e n t h e s p o n t a n e o u s i g n i t i o n t e m p e r a t u r e o f t h e m a t e r i a l is n o t k n o w n , t h e t e m p e r a t u r e
s h a ll b e lim ite d to 3 0 0 ° C ; a n d
NOTE This document currently does not contain requirements for flammable dust or liquids other than for
insulating liquids.
- combustible materials f o r c o m p o n e n t s a n d o t h e r p a r t s ( i n c l u d i n g electrical enclosures，

mechanical enclosures a n d d e c o r a t i v e p a r t s ) n o t i n s i d e a fire enclosure s h a l l c o m p l y
w ith :
• HB75 class material if t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f t h i s m a t e r i a l is < 3 m m ; o r
• HB40 class material i f t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f t h i s m a t e r i a l is > 3 m m ; o r
• HBF class foamed material; or
• s h a ll p a s s th e G lo w - W ir e te s t a t 5 5 0 °C a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 2 - 1 1 .
T h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
• p a rts w ith a v o lu m e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3 ;
• p a rts w ith a m a s s o f combustible material o f le s s th a n 4 g;
• s u p p lie s , consumable materials， m e d i a a n d r e c o rd in g m a te ria ls ;
• p a rts th a t a re re q u ire d to have p a rtic u la r p ro p e rtie s in o rd e r to p e rfo rm in te n d e d

fu n c tio n s , such as s y n th e tic ru b b e r ro lle rs , in k tu b e s and m a te ria l re q u irin g o p tic a l
c h a ra c te ris tic s ; a n d
• g e a rs , c a m s , b e lts , b e a r in g s a n d o th e r p a rts th a t w o u ld c o n trib u te n e g lig ib le fu e l to a

fir e , in c lu d in g , la b e ls , m o u n t in g fe e t, k e y c a p s , k n o b s a n d th e lik e .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Compliance is checked by inspection of the data sheets and by test under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g
c o n d itio n s according to Clause B.2 and under a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s according to
Clause B.3. The temperatures of materials are measured continuously until thermal
equilibrium has been attained.
NOTE See B.1.5 for details on thermal equilibrium.
Temperature limiting b a s ic s a fe g u a rd s that comply with the applicable requirements of this

document or the applicable safety device standard shall remain in the circuit being evaluated.
6.4 Safeguards against fire under single fault conditions
6.4.1 General
T h is s u b c la u s e d e fin e s th e p o s s ib le safeguard m e t h o d s t h a t c a n be used to re d u c e th e

lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n o r s p r e a d o f fire u n d e r single fault conditions.
T h e re a re tw o m e th o d s o f p ro v id in g p ro te c tio n . E ith e r m e th o d m ay be a p p lie d to d iffe re n t

p a rts o f th e s a m e e q u ip m e n t.
一 Reduce the likelihood of ignition: E q u i p m e n t is so d e s ig n e d th a t under single fault

conditions n o p a r t s h a l l h a v e s u s t a i n e d f l a m i n g . T h is m e th o d c a n b e u s e d fo r a n y c irc u it
in w h i c h th e a v a ila b le s te a d y s ta te p o w e r to th e c irc u it d o e s not exceed 4 000 W . The
a p p r o p r i a t e r e q u i r e m e n t s a n d t e s t s a r e d e t a i l e d in 6 . 4 . 2 a n d 6 . 4 . 3 .
• Pluggable equipment type A is c o n s i d e r e d n o t to e x c e e d th e s te a d y s ta te v a lu e of

4 000 W .
• Pluggable equipment type B and permanently connected equipment a re

c o n s id e re d not to exceed th e s te a d y s ta te v a lu e of 4 000 W if t h e p ro d u ct o f th e
n o m in a l mains v o lta g e and th e protective current rating of th e in s ta lla tio n
o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e ( F mains x / max) d o e s n o t e x c e e d 4 0 0 0 W .
- Control fire spread: S e le c tio n and a p p lic a tio n of supplementary safeguards fo r

c o m p o n e n ts , w ir in g , m a te r ia ls a n d c o n s tr u c tio n a l m e a s u r e s th a t r e d u c e th e s p r e a d o f fire
and, w h e re n e c e s s a ry , b y th e u s e o f a s e c o n d supplementary safeguard such as a fire
enclosure. T h is m e th o d can be used fo r any ty p e of e q u ip m e n t. The a p p ro p ria te
r e q u i r e m e n t s a r e d e t a i l e d in 6 . 4 . 4 , 6 . 4 . 5 a n d 6 . 4 . 6 .
6.4.2 Reduction of the likelihood of ignition under single fault conditions in PS1
circuits
No supplementary safeguards a re needed fo r p ro te c tio n a g a in s t PS1. A PS1 is not

c o n s id e re d to b e c a p a b le o f p r o v id in g enough e n e rg y to r e s u l t in m a t e r i a l s r e a c h i n g ig n itio n
te m p e ra tu re s .
6.4.3 Reduction of the likelihood of ignition under single fault conditions in PS2
circuits and PS3 circuits
The lik e lih o o d of ig n itio n under single fault conditions in PS2 c irc u its and PS3 c irc u its
w h e r e th e a v a ila b le p o w e r d o e s n o t e x c e e d 4 0 0 0 W (s e e 6 .4 .1 ) s h a ll b e re d u c e d b y u s in g th e
fo llo w in g supplementary safeguards a s a p p lic a b le :
NOTE For PS3 circuits where the available power exceeds 4 000 W, see 6.4.6.
- an arcing PIS o r a resistive PIS s h a l l b e s e p a r a t e d as s p e c ifie d in 6.4.7 w i t h t h e

accessible o u t e r s u r f a c e o f t h e e q u i p m e n t c o n s i d e r e d t o b e c o v e re d w ith a combustible
material;

- 150 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- p r o t e c t i v e d e v ic e s a c tin g a s a safeguard s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G.3.1 to G.3.4 o r th e re le v a n t

IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd s ;
- motors and tra n s fo rm e rs s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .5 .3 , G .5 .4 o r th e re le v a n t IE C com ponent

s ta n d a rd ;
- v a r i s t o r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .8 .2 ; a n d
- components a s s o c ia te d w ith th e mains s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e re le v a n t IEC com ponent

s ta n d a r d s a n d th e re q u ire m e n ts o f o th e r p a rts o f th is d o c u m e n t.
In a d d i t i o n , t h e t e s t s o f 6 . 4 . 3 . 2 a p p l y .
EXAMPLES Components associated with the mains include the supply cord, appliance couplers, EMC filtering
components, switches, etc.
6.4.3.2 Test method
The conditions of Clause B.4f that are possible causes for ignition, are applied in turn. A
c〇 A?sec/tyeA7f/a/ fau/f may 厂 /nfeATi/pf or s/?〇 At-c/厂cu/f a c 〇 Ar?p〇 A7eA7f. / a
? case ofcyoubf, f/?e fesf
shall be repeated two more times with replacement components in order to check that
sustained flaming does not occur.
The equipment is operated under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s and the temperatures of materials

are monitored continuously until thermal equilibrium has been attained.
If a conductor opens during a simulated s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n ， the conductor shall be

bridged and the simulated s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n shall be continued. In all other cases, where
an applied s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n results in interruption of the current before steady state has
been reached, the temperatures are measured immediately after the interruption.
NOTE 1 See B.1.5 for details on thermal equilibrium.
NOTE 2 Temperature rise can be observed after interruption of the current due to thermal inertia.
If the temperature is limited by a fuse, under a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n :
- a fuse complying with the IEC 60127 series shall open within 1 s; or
- a fuse not complying with the IEC 60127 series shall open within 1 s for three consecutive
times; or
- the fuse shall comply with the following test.
The fuse is short-circuited and the current that would have passed through the fuse under the
relevant s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n is measured.
If the fuse current remains less than 2,1 times the current rating o f the fuse， the temperatures
are measured after a steady state has been attained.
If the current either immediately reaches 2,1 times the current rating of the fuse or more， or
reaches this value after a period o f time equal to the maximum pre-arcing time for the relevant
current through the fuse under consideration, both the fuse and the short-circuit link are
removed after an additional time corresponding to the maximum pre-arcing time of the fuse
under consideration and the temperatures are measured immediately thereafter.
If the fuse resistance influences the current of the relevant circuit, the maximum resistance
value o f the fuse shall be taken into account when establishing the value of the current.
Printed board conductors are tested by applying the relevant s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s

of B A A .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 151 -
Compliance is checked by inspection, tests and measurements. See B.4.8 for compliance
criteria.
6.4.4 Control of fire spread in PS1 circuits
No supplementary safeguards a re needed fo r p ro te c tio n a g a in s t PS1. A PS1 is not

c o n s id e re d to b e c a p a b le o f p ro v id in g enough e n e r g y t o r e s u l t in m a t e r i a l s re a c h in g ig n itio n
te m p e ra tu re s .
6.4.5 Control of fire spread in PS2 circuits
6.4.5.1 General
For th e p u rp o se s of re d u c in g th e lik e lih o o d of fire sp re a d in PS2 c irc u its to n e a rb y

combustible materials, c irc u its th a t m e e t th e re q u ire m e n ts o f A n n e x Q a re c o n s id e re d to be
P S 2 c irc u its .
A supplementary safeguard is r e q u i r e d t o c o n t r o l t h e s p r e a d o f f i r e f r o m a n y p o s s i b l e PIS to

o th e r p a rts o f th e e q u ip m e n t a s g iv e n b e lo w .
C o n d u c to rs a n d d e v ic e s th a t c o n s titu te a PIS s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e fo llo w in g :
- p r i n t e d b o a rd s s h a ll b e m a d e o f V-1 class material or VTM-1 class material; and
- wi r e in s u la tio n a n d tu b in g s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 6 .5 .1 .
M o to r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .5 .4 .
T r a n s fo r m e r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .5 .3 .
A ll o t h e r c o m p o n e n t s in a P S 2 c i r c u i t s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
- be m o u n te d on V-1 class material or VTM-1 class material; or
- be m ade of V-2 class material, VTM-2 class material or HF-2 class foamed material; or
- c o m p l y w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f C la u s e S . 1 ; o r
- h a v e a s iz e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3 ; o r
- have a m ass of combustible material o f le s s th a n 4 g; o r
- b e s e p a ra te d fro m a PIS b y th e re q u ire m e n ts o f 6 .4 .7 ; o r
- c o m p l y w ith th e fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e r e le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d ; o r
- be in a s e a le d enclosure of 0 ,0 6 m 3 or le s s , c o n s is tin g to ta lly of non-combustible

material a n d h a v in g n o v e n tila tio n o p e n in g s ; o r
- t h e c o m p o n e n t s h a ll n o t ig n ite d u rin g single fault conditions a s s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 4 . 3 . 2 .
If th e fo llo w in g m a te ria ls and p a rts a re not s e p a ra te d fro m a PIS a c c o rd in g to th e

re q u ire m e n ts of 6 .4 .7 , th e n th e m a te ria ls and p a rts s h a ll not ig n ite d u rin g single fault
conditions a s s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 4 . 3 . 2 :
- supplies, consumable materials, m e d ia a n d re c o rd in g m a te ria ls ; a n d
- p a r t s t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d t o h a v e p a r t i c u l a r p r o p e r t i e s in o r d e r t o p e r f o r m i n t e n d e d f u n c t i o n s ,
s u c h a s s y n th e tic r u b b e r ro lle rs , in k tu b e s a n d m a te r ia l r e q u ir in g o p tic a l c h a r a c te r is tic s .
Compliance is checked by testing or by inspection of the equipment and material data sheets.

- 152 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
6.4.6 Control of fire spread in a PS3 circuit
F ire s p r e a d in P S 3 c i r c u i t s s h a l l b e c o n t r o l l e d b y a p p ly i n g a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g supplementary
safeguards:
- c o n d u c t o r s a n d d e v ic e s w ith in a P S 3 c ir c u it s h a ll m e e t th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 6 .4 .5 ;
- devices s u b je c t to a rc in g or c h a n g in g c o n ta c t re s is ta n c e (fo r e x a m p le , p lu g g a b le
c o n n e c t o r s ) s h a ll c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :
• h a v e m a te ria ls m a d e o f V_1 class material, or
• c o m p ly w ith th e fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n t s o f th e r e le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d , o r
• c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f C la u s e S . 1 , o r
• be m o u n te d o n m a te ria l m a d e o f V-1 class material or VTM-1 class material a n d b e

o f a v o lu m e n o t e x c e e d in g 1 750 m m 3 or have a m ass o f combustible material o f l e s s
th a n 4 g; a n d
- b y p ro v id in g a fire enclosure a s s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 4 . 8 .
W ith in th e fire enclosure, combustible materials th a t d o n o t c o m p ly w ith th e fla m m a b ility

r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r P S 2 o r P S 3 c i r c u i t s s h a l l c o m p l y w it h t h e f l a m m a b i l i t y t e s t o f C l a u s e S .1 or
be m ade of V-2 class material, VTM-2 class material or HF-2 class foamed material.
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
- par t s w ith a v o lu m e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3;
- par t s w ith a m a s s o f combustible material o f le s s th a n 4 g;
- supplies, consumable materials, m e d ia a n d re c o rd in g m a te ria ls ;
- p a r t s t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d t o h a v e p a r t i c u l a r p r o p e r t i e s in o r d e r t o p e r f o r m i n t e n d e d f u n c t i o n s ,
s u c h a s s y n t h e t ic r u b b e r r o lle r s , in k tu b e s a n d m a te r ia l r e q u ir in g o p tic a l c h a r a c t e r is t ic s ;
- g e a r s , c a m s , b e lts , b e a r in g s a n d o t h e r p a rts th a t w o u ld c o n tr ib u t e n e g lig ib le fu e l to a fire ,

in c lu d in g , la b e ls , m o u n t in g fe e t, k e y c a p s , k n o b s a n d th e lik e ; a n d
- t u b i n g fo r a ir o r flu id s y s te m s , c o n ta in e r s fo r p o w d e r s o r liq u id s a n d fo a m e d p la s tic p a rts ,

p ro v id e d th a t th e y a re o f HB75 class material i f t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f th e
m a te ria l is < 3 m m , o r HB40 class material i f t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f th e
m a t e r i a l is > 3 m m , o r HBF class foamed material o r p a s s t h e g l o w - w i r e t e s t a t 5 5 0 °C
a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 2 - 1 1 .
A fire enclosure is n o t n e c e s s a r y f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g c o m p o n e n t s a n d m a t e r i a l s :
- wi r e in s u la tio n a n d tu b in g c o m p ly in g w ith 6 .5 .1 ;
- components, in c lu d in g c o n n e c to r s , c o m p ly in g w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 6 .4 .8 .2 .1 , a n d th a t
f i l l a n o p e n i n g in a fire enclosure;
- pl ugs and c o n n e c to rs fo rm in g p a rt of a power s u p p ly co rd or in te rc o n n e c tin g c a b le
c o m p ly in g w ith 6 .4 .9 , G .4 .1 a n d C la u s e G .7 ;
- m o t o r s c o m p ly in g w ith G .5 .4 ; a n d
- t r a n s f o r m e r s c o m p ly in g w ith G .5 .3 .
Compliance is checked by inspection of the material data sheets or by test, or both.
6.4.7 Separation of combustible materials from a PIS
6.4.7.1 General
W hen re q u ire d , th e m in im u m s e p a ra tio n re q u ire m e n ts b e tw e e n a PIS and combustible

materials, in o r d e r to re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f s u s ta in e d fla m in g or sp re a d o f fire , m ay be
a c h ie v e d b y e ith e r s e p a ra tio n b y d is ta n c e (6 .4 .7 .2 ) o r s e p a ra tio n b y a fire b a rrie r (6 .4 .7 .3 ).

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -153-
A d d itio n a l re q u ire m e n ts fo r a fire enclosure o r a f i r e b a r r i e r o f combustible material lo c a te d

w ith in 13 m m o f an arcing PIS o r 5 m m o f a resistive PIS a r e g i v e n i n 6 . 4 . 8 . 4 .
6.4.7.2 Separation by distance
Combustible material， e x c e p t t h e m a t e r i a l o n w h i c h t h e PIS i s m o u n t e d , s h a l l be s e p a ra te d

f r o m a n arcing PIS o r a resistive PIS a c c o r d i n g t o F i g u r e 3 7 a n d F i g u r e 3 8 .
Base m a te ria l of p rin te d b o a rd s, on w h ic h an arcing PIS i s l o c a t e d , s h a l l be m ade of

V-1 class material, VTM-1 class material or HF-1 class foamed material.
Figure 37 - Minimum separation requirements from a PIS
NOTE This figure can be used for:

- an arcing PIS that consists of tracks or areas on printed boards;
the resistive PIS areas of components. Measurements are made from the nearest power dissipating element
of the component involved. If in practice it is not readily possible to define the power dissipating part, then the
outer surface of the component is used.
Figure 38 - Extended separation requirements from a PIS
W hen th e d is ta n c e b e tw e e n a PIS and combustible materials i s l e s s th a n s p e c ifie d in

F ig u re 3 7 a n d F ig u re 3 8 a s a p p lic a b le , th e combustible materials s h a l l :
- h a v e a v o lu m e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3 ;
- have a m ass of combustible material o f le s s th a n 4 g; o r
- c o m p l y w ith :

- 154 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
• th e fla m m a b ility re q u ir e m e n ts o f th e re le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d ; o r
• be m ade of V-1 class material, VTM-1 class material or HF-1 class foamed
material o r c o m p l y w i t h I E C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 . S e v e r i t i e s a r e i d e n t i f i e d in C l a u s e S . 2 .
6.4.7.3 Separation by a fire barrier
Combustible material s h a ll be s e p a ra te d fro m an arcing PIS or a resistive PIS b y a fire

b a r r i e r a s d e f i n e d in 6 . 4 . 8 . 2 . 1 (s e e F ig u re 3 9 ).
P rin te d b o a rd s a re n o t c o n s id e re d to b e a fire b a rrie r a g a in s t a n arcing PIS lo c a te d o n th e

sam e b o a rd . P rin te d b o a rd s c o m p ly in g w ith 6 .4 .8 m ay be c o n s id e re d to be a fire b a rrie r
a g a in s t a n arcing PIS lo c a te d o n a d iffe re n t b o a r d
P r in te d b o a r d s c a n b e c o n s id e r e d to b e a fire b a r r ie r a g a in s t a resistive PIS p ro v id e d th a t th e

fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s a re m e t:
- t h e p r in te d b o a rd s h a ll:
• c o m p l y w i t h t h e f l a m m a b i l i t y t e s t o f C l a u s e S . 1 a s u s e d in t h e a p p l i c a t i o n ; o r
• be m ade of V-1 class material， VTM-1 class material or HF-1 class foamed
material;
- wi t h i n th e re s tric te d v o lu m e , c o m p o n e n ts s h a ll m e e t th e fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e
re le v a n t c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd and n o o th e r m a te ria ls ra te d V-1 class material
le s s th a n
s h a ll b e m o u n te d o n th e s a m e s id e o f a p rin te d b o a rd a s th e resistive PIS; a n d
- within th e re s tric te d v o lu m e , th e p rin te d b o a rd s h a ll have no PS2 c o n d u c to rs or PS3
c o n d u c to rs (e x c e p t fo r th e c o n d u c to rs th a t s u p p ly th e c irc u it u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n ). T h is
a p p lie s to a n y s id e o f th e p rin te d b o a rd a s w e ll a s th e in n e r la y e r o f th e p rin te d b o a rd .
Diverted /
cone
Barrier
IEC
Figure 39a - Illustration showing Figure 39b - Illustration showing

an angled barrier a horizontal barrier
NOTE 1 The volume of the flame is nearly constant; consequently the shape of the flame is dependent upon
the position and the shape of the barrier. Different shapes of barriers might give different flame shapes and
result in a different restricted area and separation requirements.
NOTE 2 Dimensions are identical to Figure 37 and Figure 38 but, except as given in 6.4.8.4, the distance of
the barrier from the PIS is not significant.
Figure 39 - Deflected separation requirements from a PIS when a fire barrier is used
Compliance is checked by inspection or measurement or both.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -155-
6.4.8 Fire enclosures and fire barriers
6.4.8.1 General
The safeguard fu n c tio n o f th e fire enclosure a n d t h e f ir e b a r r i e r is to i m p e d e t h e s p r e a d o f

fire th ro u g h th e enclosure o r b a rrie r.
The fire enclosure m a y be th e o v e ra ll enclosure, o r it m a y b e w i t h i n t h e o v e r a l l enclosure.

The fire enclosure need n o t h a v e a n e x c lu s iv e fu n c tio n , b u t m a y p ro v id e o th e r fu n c tio n s in
a d d itio n to th a t o f a fire enclosure.
6.4.8.2 Fire enclosure and fire barrier material properties
6.4.8.2.1 Requirements for a fire barrier
A fire b a r r ie r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f C la u s e S . 1 .
T h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p l y p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e m a t e r i a l is :
- made of non-combustible material (fo r e x a m p le , m e ta l, g la s s , c e ra m ic , e tc .); o r
- made of V-1 class material or VTM-1 class material.
6.4.8.2.2 Requirements for a fire enclosure
F o r c irc u its w h e re th e a v a ila b le p o w e r d o e s n o t e x c e e d 4 0 0 0 W (s e e 6 .4 .1 ), a fire enclosure

s h a ll:
- c o m p l y w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f C la u s e S . 1 ; o r
- be m ade of non-combustible material (fo r e x a m p le , m e ta l, g la s s , c e ra m ic , e tc .); o r
- be m ade of V-1 class material.
F o r c irc u its w h e re th e a v a ila b le p o w e r e x c e e d s 4 0 0 0 W f a fire enclosure s h a ll:
- c o m p l y w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f C la u s e S .5 ; o r
- be m a d e o f non-combustible material (fo r e x a m p le , m e ta l, g la s s , c e ra m ic , e tc .); o r
- be m a d e o f 5VA class material or 5VB class material.
M a te ria l fo r c o m p o n e n ts t h a t fill an o p e n in g in a fire enclosure or th a t is in te n d e d to be

m o u n t e d in s u c h o p e n i n g s h a l l :
- c o m p l y w ith th e fla m m a b ility r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e r e le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d ; o r
- be m a d e o f V-1 class material; or
- c o m p l y w ith C la u s e S .1 .
Compliance is checked by inspection of applicable data sheets or test.
The m a te ria l fla m m a b ility c la s s is checked for the thinnest significant thickness used.
6.4.8.3 Constructional requirements for a fire enclosure and a fire barrier
6.4.8.3.1 Fire enclosure and fire barrier openings
O p e n in g s in a fire enclosure o r in a f i r e b a r r ie r s h a ll be of such d im e n s io n s th a t fire and

p ro d u c ts o f c o m b u s tio n p a s s in g th ro u g h th e o p e n in g s a re n o t lik e ly to ig n ite m a te ria l o n th e
o u ts id e o f th e enclosure o r o n th e s id e o f a fire b a r r ie r o p p o s ite to th e PIS.

- 156 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
T h e o p e n in g s to w h ic h th e s e p r o p e r tie s a p p ly a re re la tiv e to th e s ite o r lo c a tio n o f th e PIS and

of combustible materials. T h e lo c a tio n s o f o p e n in g s r e la tiv e to th e fla m e p r o p e r t y a re s h o w n
in F i g u r e 4 1 a n d F i g u r e 4 2 .
R e g a rd le s s o f th e e q u ip m e n t o rie n ta tio n , th e fla m e o rie n ta tio n PIS i s a l w a y s

p ro p e rty o f th e
v e rtic a l. W h e re th e e q u ip m e n t has tw o or m o re normal operating condition o r i e n t a t i o n s ,
o p e n in g p r o p e r tie s a p p ly to e a c h p o s s ib le o r ie n ta tio n .
R e q u ire m e n ts fo r th e fire enclosure of a secondary lithium battery a r e s p e c i f i e d in M.4.3.
D e te rm in a tio n of to p o p e n in g s , s id e o p e n in g s and b o tto m o p e n in g s s h a ll be done in

a cco rd a n ce w ith F ig u re 4 0 , ta k in g in to account a ll p o s s ib le o rie n ta tio n s of use (se e a ls o
4 .1 .6 ).
Enclosure top Enclosure top
5C
s u
s u c d o pjg
o) o)
cd
a)
op
(D
!
(l> a)
a)
Enclosure Enclosure
bottom ^5C bottom
Figure 40 - Determination of top, bottom and side openings
6.4.8.3.2 Fire barrier dimensions
T h e e d g e s o f th e fire b a r rie r s s h a ll e x te n d b e y o n d th e r e s tr ic te d v o lu m e (s e e F ig u re 3 9 ).
6.4.8.3.3 Top openings and top opening properties
T o p o p e n in g p ro p e rtie s o f a fire enclosure s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s o n a h o r iz o n ta l s u r fa c e o r

a n y s u rfa c e w ith a n in c lin a tio n o f m o re th a n 5 d e g r e e s fro m v e rtic a l (s e e F ig u re 4 0 ) a b o v e a
PIS lo c a te d in a P S 3 c i r c u i t a s s h o w n in F ig u re 4 1 . T o p o p e n in g p ro p e rtie s o f a fire b a rrie r
s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s a b o v e a PIS a s s h o w n in F i g u r e 4 1 .
Top openings that fall within the volume defined in Figure 41 shall comply with Clause S.2.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018 - 157 -
IEC
NOTE Dimensions of the cone are identical to Figure 37 and Figure 38.
Figure 41 - Top openings
No test is required provided that the openings do not exceed:
- 5 mm in any dimension; or
- 1 mm in width regardless of length.
6.4.8.3.4 Bottom openings and bottom opening properties
B o tto m o p e n in g p ro p e rtie s o f a fire enclosure a n d a fire b a r r ie r s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s o n a

h o riz o n ta l s u rfa c e o r a n y o th e r s u rfa c e w ith an in c lin a tio n o f m o re th a n 5 d e g re e s fro m th e
v e rtic a l (s e e F ig u re 4 0 ) b e lo w a PIS l o c a t e d i n a P S 3 c i r c u i t a s s h o w n in F i g u r e 4 2 . O p e n i n g s
o n o th e r s u rfa c e s b e lo w th e PIS s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d s id e o p e n in g s a n d 6 .4 .8 .3 .5 a p p lie s .
B o tto m o p e n in g s a re th o s e o p e n in g s b e lo w a PIS and w ith in 30 m m d ia m e te r c y lin d e r

e x te n d in g in d e fin ite ly b e lo w th e PIS.

- 158 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
With respect to the potential

ignition source, bottom openings
are any horizontal openings within
the volume shown
(2 mm around the cone)
Potential ignition source

IEC
NOTE Dimensions of the cone are identical to Figure 37 and Figure 38.
Figure 42 - Bottom openings
B o tto m o p e n in g s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e S .3 .
N o t e s t is n e c e s s a r y p r o v i d e d t h a t o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s is m e t :
a) th e b o tto m o p e n in g s d o n o t e x c e e d :
- 3 m m in a n y d i m e n s i o n ; o r
- 1 m m in w i d t h r e g a r d l e s s o f l e n g t h .
b) u n d e r c o m p o n e n ts and p a rts m e e tin g th e re q u ire m e n ts fo r V-1 class material, or HF-1

class foamed material or under c o m p o n e n ts th a t pass th e n e e d le -fla m e te s t of
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 u s in g a 3 0 s fla m e a p p lic a tio n , b o tto m o p e n in g s s h a ll n o t e x c e e d :
- 6 m m in a n y d i m e n s i o n ; o r
- 2 m m in w i d t h r e g a r d l e s s o f l e n g t h .
c) c o m p l y w i t h a b a f f l e p l a t e c o n s t r u c t i o n a s i l l u s t r a t e d in F i g u r e 4 3 .
Not less Baffle plates (may be above or below

than 2 ^ the bottom of a fire enclosure)
Bottom of fire enclosure

IEC
Figure 43 - Baffle plate construction

旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 1 :2 0 1 8
- ◎ 旧C 2 0 1 8 -159-
Fixed equipment i n t e n d e d t o b e flo o r s ta n d in g on a n o n -c o m b u s tib le s u rfa c e does not

r e q u i r e a fire enclosure b o t t o m . Such e q u ip m e n t s h a ll be m a rke d in a cco rd a n ce w ith
C l a u s e F .5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
- e l e m e n t 1a : n o t a v a ila b le
- e l e m e n t 2: “ R IS K O F F IR E ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
- e l e m e n t 3: o p tio n a l
- e l e m e n t 4: “ In s ta ll o n ly o n c o n c r e te o r o th e r n o n - c o m b u s tib le s u r f a c e ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
6.4.8.3.5 Side openings and side opening properties
S id e o p e n in g p ro p e rtie s o f a fire enclosure a n d a fire b a r rie r s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s th a t a re

o n a v e r tic a l (± 5 d e g r e e s ) s id e s u r fa c e .
W h e r e a p o rtio n o f th e s id e o f a fire enclosure fa lls w ith in th e a re a in d ic a te d b y th e 5 d e g re e

a n g le in F ig u re 4 4 , th e lim ita tio n s in 6 .4 .8 .3 .4 on s iz e s of o p e n in g s in b o tto m s of fire
enclosures a ls o a p p ly to th is p o rtio n o f th e s id e .
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement. Except for that portion of the side of
a fire e n c lo s u re that is subject to the requirements of 6.4.8.3.5 (see above paragraph), there
are no other considerations for side openings.
NOTE Limitations affecting the size of side openings are contained in other clauses of this document.
15 mm 15 mm
PIS •
No fire
No fire
5° 5° opening
opening
requirements
requirements
apply apply
^---------------------------
• 6.4.8.3.4 applies No fire opening | 6.4.8.3.4 applies
requirements apply
ie c
The PIS can be either a point, a component or a trace on a printed board.
Figure 44 - PIS trajectory downwards
6.4.8.3.6 Integrity of a fire enclosure
If p a r t o f a fire enclosure c o n s is ts o f a d o o r o r c o v e r th a t c a n be opened by an ordinary

person, th e d o o r o r c o v e r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith r e q u ir e m e n t s a ), b), o r c ):
a) th e d o o r o r c o v e r s h a ll b e in te rlo c k e d a n d c o m p ly w ith th e safety interlock re q u ire m e n ts

in A n n e x K .
b) a d o o r o r co ve r, in te n d e d to b e ro u tin e ly opened b y th e ordinary person, s h a ll c o m p ly

w ith b o th o f th e fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s :

- 160 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- it s h a ll not be re m o v a b le fro m o th e r p a rts of th e fire enclosure by th e ordinary

person; and
- it s h a ll be p ro v id e d w ith a m eans to keep it c lo s e d d u rin g normal operating

conditions.
c) a d o o r o r c o v e r in te n d e d o n ly fo r o c c a s io n a l u s e b y th e ordinary person, s u c h a s f o r t h e
in s ta lla tio n o f a c c e s s o rie s , m ay be re m o v a b le if a n instructional safeguard i s p r o v i d e d
fo r c o rre c t re m o v a l a n d re in s ta lla tio n o f th e d o o r o r c o v e r.
Compliance is checked by inspection of applicable data sheets andf where necessary, by test.
6.4.8.4 Separation of a PIS from a fire enclosure and a fire barrier
A fire enclosure o r fire b a r rie r m a d e o f combustible material s h a ll:
- h a v e a m in im u m d is ta n c e o f 13 m m to a n arcing PIS; and
- h a v e a m in im u m d is ta n c e o f 5 m m to a resistive PIS.
S m a lle r d is ta n c e s a re a llo w e d p ro v id e d th a t th e p a rt o f th e fire enclosure o r fire b a r r ie r w ith in

th e r e q u ire d s e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e c o m p lie s w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :
- t he fire enclosure or fire b a rrie r m e e ts th e n e e d le -fla m e te s t a c c o rd in g to

IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 . S e v e r itie s a re id e n tifie d in C l a u s e S . 2 . A f t e r t h e t e s t , t h e fire enclosure
o r fire b a r rie r m a te ria l s h a ll not have fo rm e d any h o le s th a t a re b ig g e r th a n a llo w e d in
6 .4 .8 .3 .3 o r 6 .4 .8 .3 .4 a s a p p ro p ria te ; or
- t he fire enclosure is m a d e o f V-0 class material; or
- t h e f i r e b a r r i e r is m a d e o f V-0 class material or VTM-0 class material.
6.4.9 Flammability of an insulating liquid
An insulating liquid:
- s h a l l h a v e a n a u t o i g n i t i o n t e m p e r a t u r e n o t l e s s t h a n 3 0 0 ° C a s d e t e r m i n e d in a c c o r d a n c e
w ith IS O 871 o r s im ila r n a tio n a l s ta n d a rd (fo r e x a m p le A S T M E 6 5 9 -8 4 ); and
- shall n o t fla s h ; o r s h a ll have a fla s h p o in t h ig h e r th a n 135 °C d e te rm in e d in a c c o r d a n c e

w ith IS O 2 7 1 9 u s in g P e n s k y -M a rte n s c lo s e d cup m e th o d (o r a n a tio n a l s ta n d a rd , fo r
e x a m p le ASTM D 9 3 ); or by th e S m a ll S c a le c lo s e d cup m e th o d in a cco rd a n ce w ith
IS O 3 6 7 9 (o r n a tio n a l s ta n d a rd s , fo r e x a m p le A S T M D3828 and ASTM D 3 2 7 8 ).
If t r a n s f o r m e r o il, s i l i c o n o il, m i n e r a l o il o r o t h e r s i m i l a r o il is u s e d a s insulating liquid， t h e o il

s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e fla s h p o in t, fire p o in t o r fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n t s o f th e a p p lic a b le IE C
s t a n d a r d . S e e T a b le 3 4 fo r a lis t o f th e IE C s ta n d a r d s .
The te m p e ra tu re o f c o m p o n e n ts in c o n ta c t w ith th e insulating liquid s h a ll not exceed th e

fla s h p o in t o f th e insulating liquid.
Table 34 - List of applicable IEC standards regarding insulating liquids
IE C 6 0 2 9 6 Fluids fo r e le ctrote chn ica l applications - Unused m ine ra l insu la tin g oils fo r transform ers and
sw itchgear
IE C 6 0 8 3 6 S pecifications fo r unused silicone insu la tin g liquids fo r e le ctrote chn ica l purposes
IE C 6 1 0 3 9 C lassification o f insu la tin g liquids
IE C 6 1 0 9 9 Insulating liquids - S pecifications fo r unused synthetic organic esters fo r e le ctrica l purposes
IE C 6 0 0 7 6 - 1 4 P ow er transform ers - Part 14: Liquid-im m ersed p o w e r transform ers using high-tem perature
insulation m aterials
IE C T S 6 2 3 3 2 -1 E le ctrica l insulation system s (EIS) - Therm al evaluation o f com bined liq u id and so lid
com ponents - P art 1: G eneral requirem ents

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 161 -
Compliance is checked by the available data or by inspection and tests as applicable.
6.5 Internal and external wiring
6.5.1 General requirements
In P S 2 c i r c u i t s o r P S 3 c i r c u i t s , t h e i n s u l a t i o n o n i n t e r n a l o r e x t e r n a l w i r i n g s h a l l p a s s t h e t e s t
m e th o d s d e s c r ib e d b e lo w , o r th e e q u iv a le n t.
For c o n d u c to rs w ith a c ro s s -s e c tio n a l a re a of 0 ,5 mm2 or g re a te r, th e te s t m e th o d s in

IE C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 a n d IE C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 3 s h a ll b e u s e d .
For c o n d u c to rs w ith a c ro s s -s e c tio n a l a re a of le s s th a n 0 ,5 m m 2, th e te s t m e th o d s in

IE C 6 0 3 3 2 - 2 - 2 s h a ll b e u s e d .
F o r b o th in te rn a l a n d e x te r n a l w irin g , th e te s t m e th o d d e s c rib e d in I E C T S 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 2 1 m ay
b e u s e d i n s t e a d o f t h e t e s t m e t h o d s in I E C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 , I E C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 3 o r I E C 6 0 3 3 2 - 2 - 2 .
NOTE Wire complying with UL 2556 VW-1 is considered to comply with these requirements.
The insulated conductor or cable shall be acceptable if it complies with the recommended
performance requirements of the applicable IEC 60332 standards or with the requirements of
IEC TS 60695-11-21.
6.5.2 Requirements for interconnection to building wiring.
E q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to p ro v id e p o w e r o v e r th e w irin g s y s te m to r e m o te e q u ip m e n t s h a ll lim it
th e o u tp u t cu rre n t to a v a lu e th a t does not cause dam age to th e w irin g s y s te m , due to
o v e rh e a tin g , under any e x te rn a l lo a d c o n d itio n . The m a x im u m c o n tin u o u s c u rre n t fro m th e
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll not exceed a cu rre n t lim it th a t is s u ita b le fo r th e m in im u m w ire gauge
s p e c i f i e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s .
NOTE This wiring is not usually controlled by the equipment installation instructions, since the wiring is often
installed independent of the equipment installation.
P S 2 c irc u its o r P S 3 c irc u its th a t p ro v id e pow er and th a t a re in te n d e d to b e c o m p a tib le w ith

L P S to external circuits (s e e A n n e x Q ) s h a ll h a v e th e ir o u tp u t p o w e r lim ite d to v a lu e s th a t
re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n w ith in b u ild in g w irin g .
E x te rn a l p a ire d c o n d u c to r c a b le c irc u its , s u c h a s th o s e d e s c rib e d in T a b l e 1 3 , I D n u m b e r s 1

a n d 2 h a v in g a m in im u m w ir e d ia m e t e r o f 0 ,4 m m , s h a ll h a v e th e c u r r e n t lim ite d to 1 ,3 A .
EXAMPLE Time/current characteristics of type gD and type gN fuses specified in IEC 60269-2 comply with the
above limit. Type gD or type gN fuses rated 1 A f would meet the 1,3 A current limit.
Compliance is checked by test， inspection and where necessary by the requirements of

Annex Q.
6.5.3 Internal wiring for socket-outlets
In te rn a l w irin g fo r s o c k e t-o u tle ts or a p p lia n c e o u tle ts p ro v id in g mains power to o th e r

e q u ip m e n t s h a ll have a n o m in a l c ro s s -s e c tio n a l a re a at le a s t as s p e c ifie d in T a b le G .7 ,
in c lu d in g th e c o n d itio n o f fo o tn o te a.

- 162 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
6.6 Safeguards against fire due to the connection of additional equipment
The p o w e r d e liv e re d to c o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t o r a c c e s s o r ie s s h a ll b e lim ite d to P S 2 o r s h a ll

c o m p ly w ith C la u s e Q .1 , u n le s s it is l i k e l y t h a t t h e c o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t o r a c c e s s o ry a ls o
c o m p lie s w ith th is d o c u m e n t.
T h is r e q u ir e m e n t d o e s n o t a p p ly to th e a u d io o u tp u t o f a u d io a m p lifie r s .
EXAMPLE Connected equipment or accessories that are likely to comply with this document include a scanner, a
mouse, a keyboard, a DVD drive, a CD ROM drive or a joystick.
Compliance is checked by inspection or measurement.
7 Injury caused by hazardous substances
7.1 General
T o r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju r y d u e to e x p o s u r e to hazardous substances, e q u ip m e n t s h a ll

b e p r o v id e d w ith th e safeguards s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 7.
NOTE 1 These safeguards are not intended to be the only means to reduce the likelihood of such injury.
NOTE 2 The classification of other possible hazardous substances not addressed in Clause 7 is not covered by
this document. In many regions of the world different legislation applies, such as
Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) and Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction
of Chemicals (REACH).
7.2 Reduction of exposure to hazardous substances
The hazardous substances s h a l l

e xp o su re to be re d u ce d . R e d u c tio n of e xp o su re to
hazardous substances s h a l l b e c o n t r o l l e d b y u s in g c o n ta in m e n t of th e hazardous
substances. C o n t a i n e r s s h a l l b e s u f f i c i e n t l y r o b u s t a n d s h a ll n o t b e d a m a g e d o r d e g r a d e d b y
th e c o n te n ts o v e r th e life tim e o f th e p ro d u c t.
Compliance is checked by:
- the examination of the effects the chemical has on the material of the container; and
- any relevant tests of Annex T according to 4.4.3, following which there shall be no leakage
from the container.
7.3 Ozone exposure
F o r e q u ip m e n t th a t p ro d u c e s o z o n e , th e in s ta lla tio n and o p e ra tin g in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll in d ic a te

th a t p re c a u tio n s h a ll b e ta k e n to e n s u re th a t th e c o n c e n tra tio n of ozone is l im i t e d to a s a fe
v a lu e .
NOTE 1 Currently, the typical long term exposure limit for ozone is considered to be 0,1 x 10~6 (0,2 mg/m3)
calculated as an 8 h time-weighted average concentration. Time-weighted average is the average level of exposure
over a given time period.
NOTE 2 Ozone is heavier than air.
Compliance is checked by inspection of instructions or accompanying documents.
7.4 Use of personal safeguards or personal protective equipment (PPE)
safeguards, s u c h a s
W h e re c o n ta in m e n t of a c h e m ic a l, a re not p ra c tic a l, a personal
safeguard a n d i t s u s e s h a l l be s p e c ifie d in th e in s tru c tio n s th a t a re p ro v id e d w ith th e
e q u ip m e n t.
Compliance is checked by inspection of instructions or accompanying documents.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 163 -
7.5 Use of instructional safeguards and instructions
W h e re a hazardous substance is c a p a b l e o f c a u s i n g a n i n j u r y , instructional safeguards as

s p e c ifie d in I S O 7 0 1 0 and in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll b e a p p lie d t o t h e e q u i p m e n t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
C la u s e F .5 .
Compliance is checked by inspection o f instructions or accompanying documents.
7.6 Batteries and their protection circuits
Batteries a n d th e ir p r o te c tio n c ir c u its s h a ll c o m p ly w ith A n n e x M .
8 Mechanically-caused injury
8.1 General
T o r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju r y d u e to e x p o s u r e to m e c h a n ic a l h a z a r d s , e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e
p ro v id e d w ith th e safeguards s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 8.
NOTE 1 In some cases, the person is the source of the kinetic energy.
NOTE 2 Where not specifically mentioned in Clause 8， the words “products” and “equipment” also cover carts ，
stands and carriers used with these products or equipment.
8.2 Mechanical energy source classifications
8.2.1 General classification
V a r i o u s c a t e g o r i e s o f m e c h a n i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e s a r e g i v e n in T a b l e 3 5 .

- 164 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 35 - Classification for various categories of mechanical energy sources
Line C ategory MS1 MS2 MS3
Sharp edges and Does not cause pain or Does not cause injury b but
1 May cause injury
corners injury b may be painful
Does not cause pain or Does not cause injury b but
2 Moving parts May cause injury
injury b may be painful
Plastic fan blades a N ( K ^ ^
3a N 十 K 。 > MS2
See Figure 46 15 000 2 400 44 000 ' 7 200 '
Other fan blades a N 丨尺叫 N 丨尺叫

3b > MS2
See Figure 45 15 000 ' 2 400 22 000 1 3 600 _
Loosening,
4 exploding or NA NA See d
imploding parts
5 Equipment mass f < 7 kg < 25 kg > 25 kg
Wall/ceiling or other Equipment mass < 1 kg Equipment mass > 1 kg All equipment mounted
6
structure m ountf mounted < 2 m e mounted < 2 m e > 2 m
10—7 (w r 2 A^2), where w is the mass (kg) of the moving

part of the fan assembly (blade, shaft and rotor), r is the radius (mm) of the fan blade from centre line of the
motor (shaft) to the tip of the outer area likely to be contacted, ;V is the rotational speed (rpm) of the fan
blade.
In the end product, the fan maximum operational voltage can be different than the rated voltage of the fan
and this difference should be taken into account.
b The phrase “Does not cause injury” means that, according to experience and/or basic safety standards, a
doctor or hospital emergency attention is not needed.
The phrase “May cause injury” means that， according to experience and/or basic safety standards, a doctor
or hospital emergency attention may be needed.
The following equipment constructions are examples considered MS3:
一 CRTs having a maximum face dimension exceeding 160 mm; and
一 lamps in which the pressure exceeds 0,2 MPa when cold or 0,4 MPa when operating.
This classification can only be used if the manufacturer’s instructions state that the equipment is only
suitable for mounting at heights < 2 m.
Mass of supplies, consumable materials, media or the like that may be contained in the equipment shall be
included in the calculation of the equipment mass. The additional mass of such items is determined by the
manufacturer.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 165 -
25 000
20 000
15 0 0 0
MS3
|
10 000
MS2
5 000 MS1
o
0 000 1 500 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 4 000
尺 -factor IEC
Figure 45 - Limits for moving fan blades made of non-plastic materials
44 000
40 000•
36 000
32 000.
28 000
看
M 33
24 000.
CL
CH
20 ooo -i
-
16 000 -I
M$2
12 000 -I
8 000 -
4 000- M$1
0
0 1 000 2 000 3 000 4 000 5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000
欠 -factor
IEC
Figure 46 - Limits for moving fan blades made of plastic materials
8.2.2 MS1
MS1 i s a c l a s s 1 m e c h a n i c a l e n e rg y so u rce w ith le v e ls not e x c e e d in g MS1 lim its under

normal operating conditions and abnormal operating conditions and n o t e x c e e d in g MS2
u n d e r single fault conditions.

- 166 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
8.2.3 MS2
MS2 is a c la s s 2 m e c h a n ic a l e n e rg y so u rce w ith le v e ls not e x c e e d in g MS2 lim its under

normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions， and single fault
conditions, b u t i s n o t M S 1 .
8.2.4 MS3
MS3 is a c l a s s 3 m e c h a n ic a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w ith le v e ls e x c e e d in g MS2 lim its under normal

operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions or single fault conditions, or any
m e c h a n ic a l e n e rg y s o u rc e d e c la re d to b e tre a te d a s M S 3 b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r.
8.3 Safeguards against mechanical energy sources
E x c e p t a s g iv e n b e lo w , safeguard r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p a r t s accessible to ordinary persons,

instructed persons and skilled persons a r e g i v e n in 4 . 3 .
An instructional safeguard s h a ll b e p ro v id e d fo r M S 2 t h a t is n o t o b v i o u s to a n instructed

person o r f o r M S 3 t h a t i s n o t o b v io u s to a skilled person.
O th e r M S 3 p a rts n o t a c tiv e ly b e in g s e r v ic e d s h a ll b e lo c a te d o r g u a r d e d s o th a t u n in te n tio n a l

c o n ta c t w ith such p a rts d u rin g s e rv ic e o p e ra tio n s is a n u n l i k e l y r e s u l t in t h e skilled person
in v o lu n ta r y re c o ilin g fro m c la s s 2 o r c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s b e in g s e r v ic e d .
8.4 Safeguards against parts with sharp edges and corners
8.4.1 Requirements
Safeguards t h a t re d u ce th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju ry by p a rts w ith sh a rp edges and co rn e rs in

accessible a r e a s o f th e e q u ip m e n t a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
C l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e s s h a ll b e d o n e a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 5 , lin e 1.
W h e r e a s h a r p e d g e o r c o r n e r c l a s s i f i e d a s M S 2 o r M S 3 is r e q u i r e d t o b e accessible fo r th e
fu n c tio n o f th e e q u ip m e n t:
- a n y p o t e n t ia l e x p o s u r e s h a ll n o t b e life t h r e a t e n in g ; a n d
- t h e s h a r p e d g e o r c o r n e r s h a ll b e o b v io u s to a n ordinary person or an instructed person

w hen exposed; and
- t h e s h a r p e d g e s h a ll b e g u a r d e d a s m u c h a s p ra c tic a b le ; a n d
- an instructional safeguard s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d t o r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f u n i n t e n t i o n a l c o n t a c t in
a c c o r d a n c e w it h C l a u s e F .5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
- e l e m e n t 1a: ^ ~ \ IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 4 3 ( 2 0 1 1 -0 1 )
- e l e m e n t 2: “ S h a rp e d g e s ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
- e l e m e n t 4: “ D o n o t to u c h ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
Where a sharp edge or corner is required to be a c c e s s ib le for the function of the equipment,
compliance is checked by inspection.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 167 -
Where a sharp edge or corner is not required to be a c c e s s ib le for the function of the
equipment compliance is checked by the relevant tests of Annex V. During and after the
application of the force, the sharp edge or corner shall not be a cce ssib le .
8.5 Safeguards against moving parts
8.5.1 Requirements
Safeguards th a t re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju ry c a u s e d b y m o v in g p a rts o f th e e q u ip m e n t (fo r

e x a m p le , p in c h p o in ts , m e s h in g g e a rs and p a rts th a t m ay s ta rt m o v in g due to u n e x p e c te d
re s e ttin g o f a c o n tro l d e v ic e ) a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
P la s tic fa n b la d e s a re c la s s ifie d a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 3 a . O t h e r fa n b la d e s a re c la s s ifie d

a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 3 b . O t h e r m o v in g p a r ts a r e c la s s ifie d a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 2.
NOTE 1 The ability of a part to cause injury is not solely dependent upon the kinetic energy it possesses.
Consequently, the classification used in this document can only be based on typical experience and engineering
judgement.
NOTE 2 Examples of factors influencing the energy transfer to a body part include shape of the surface that
strikes the body part, elasticity, velocity and the mass of equipment and body part.
If a safety interlock safeguard,

is u s e d a s th e e n e r g y o f th e m o v in g p a r t s h a ll b e r e d u c e d to
MS1 b e f o r e t h e p a r t is accessible.
U n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d , w h e re th e lik e lih o o d e x is ts th a t fin g e rs , je w e lle ry , c lo th in g , h a ir,

e tc ., c a n c o m e in to c o n ta c t w ith m o v in g M S 2 o r M S 3 p a rts , a n equipment safeguard s h a ll b e
p r o v id e d to p r e v e n t e n tr y o f b o d y p a r ts o r e n t a n g le m e n t o f s u c h ite m s .
If a m o v in g MS2 p a r t is r e q u i r e d to be accessible fo r th e fu n c tio n o f th e e q u ip m e n t to an

ordinary person, t h e m o v i n g p a r t s h a l l b e g u a rd e d as m uch as p ra c tic a b le and an
instructional safeguard a s g i v e n in 8 . 5 . 2 s h a l l be used.
If a MS3 p a r t i s r e q u i r e d t o b e accessible
m o v in g fo r th e fu n c tio n o f th e e q u ip m e n t to an
ordinary person o r a n instructed person:
- a n y e x p o s u r e s h a ll n o t b e life t h r e a t e n in g ; a n d
- t h e m o v in g p a rt s h a ll b e o b v io u s w h e n e x p o s e d ; a n d
- t h e m o v in g p a rt s h a ll b e g u a r d e d a s m u c h a s p r a c tic a b le ; a n d
- an instructional safeguard a s g i v e n in 8 . 5 . 2 s h a l l b e u s e d ; a n d
- a m a n u a lly a c tiv a te d s to p p in g d e v ic e s h a ll b e c le a rly v is ib le and p la c e d in a p ro m in e n t

p o s itio n w ith in 7 5 0 m m o f th e M S 3 p a rt.
C o m p o n e n ts o f th e m a n u a lly a c tiv a te d s to p p in g d e v ic e s h a ll be o f an e le c tro m e c h a n ic a l

t y p e . A m a n u a l l y a c t iv a t e d s t o p p in g d e v ic e m a y c o n s is t o f:
• a s w itc h c o m p ly in g w ith IE C 6 1 0 5 8 -1 a n d th a t m e e ts th e re q u ire m e n ts o f A n n e x K a n d

th a t is p ro v id e d w ith a la tc h in g ty p e m e c h a n is m m e e tin g th e re q u ire m e n ts of
IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -5 -5 , o r
• a n e m e r g e n c y s t o p d e v i c e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 9 4 7 - 5 - 5 .
R e s ta rtin g o f th e m e c h a n ic a l s y s te m s h a ll o n ly be p o s s ib le by in itia tin g a s ta rt c o n tro l

p ro c e d u re a fte r th e m a n u a lly a c tiv a te d s to p p in g d e v ic e h a s b e e n m a n u a lly re s e t.
M o v in g M S 3 p a rts :
- t hat a re o n ly accessible to a skilled person; and
- where th e MS3 m o v in g p a rt is not o b v io u s (fo r e x a m p le , a d e v ic e h a v in g in te rm itte n t

m o v e m e n t),

- 168 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
s h a ll h a v e a n instructional safeguard a s g i v e n in 8 . 5 . 2 . U n l e s s t h e m o v i n g p a r t is a r r a n g e d ,
lo c a te d , e n c lo s e d or g u a rd e d in s u c h a way th a t th e p o s s ib ility o f c o n ta c t w ith th e m o v in g
p a r t s is u n l i k e l y , a s t o p p i n g d e v i c e s h a l l b e p l a c e d in a c l e a r l y v i s i b l e a n d p r o m i n e n t p o s i t i o n
w ith in 7 5 0 m m o f th e M S 3 p a rt.
8.5.2 Instructional safeguard requirements
An instructional safeguard s h a ll b e p r o v id e d to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f u n in te n tio n a l c o n ta c t

w i t h a m o v i n g p a r t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 i s o p t i o n a l .
- e l e m e n t 1a: L--------- M E C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 6 ( 2 0 1 1 - 0 5 ) fo r m o v in g fa n b la d e s ; o r
/ 〇 ^
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 7 ( 2 0 1 1 - 0 5 ) fo r o th e r m o v in g p a rts
- e l e m e n t 2: “ M o v in g p a r ts ” o r “ M o v in g fa n b la d e ” a s a p p lic a b le , o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
- e l e m e n t 4: “Keep b o d y p a rts a w a y fro m m o v in g p a rts ” o r “ K e e p b o d y p a r t s a w a y 1Yom

fa n b la d e s ” o r “ K e e p body p a rts o u t o f th e m o tio n p a th ” a s a p p lic a b le , or
e q u iv a le n t te x t
ordinary person
D u rin g s e rv ic in g c o n d itio n s , w h e re it i s n e c e s s a r y t o d e f e a t o r b y p a s s t h e
equipment safeguard p re v e n tin g access to a m o v in g p a rt c la s s ifie d as MS2, an
instructional safeguard s h a ll b e p r o v id e d to :
- d i s c o n n e c t th e p o w e r so u rce p rio r to d e fe a tin g o r b y p a s s in g th e equipment safeguard;

and
- r e s t o r e th e equipment safeguard b e fo re re s to rin g p o w e r.
The accessibility o f moving parts shall be checked by inspection and, if necessary， be

evaluated according to the relevant parts o f Annex V.
8.5.4 Special categories of equipment containing moving parts
8.5.4.1 General
C la u s e 8 .5 .4 a p p lie s to la rg e s e lf-c o n ta in e d e q u ip m e n t in s ta lle d in restricted access areas

(fo r e x a m p le , a d a ta c e n tre ), ty p ic a lly o f s u c h a s iz e th a t a p e rs o n m a y e n te r c o m p le te ly , o r
m a y in s e r t a c o m p le te lim b o r h e a d in to a r e a s c o n ta in in g h a z a rd o u s m o v in g p a rts a n d w h e re
a p e r s o n is e x p e c t e d t o e n t e r t h e a r e a t o s e r v i c e o r o p e r a t e t h e e q u i p m e n t .
E q u ip m e n t c o v e re d b y th is p a ra g ra p h a re a u to m a te d in fo rm a tio n m a s s s to ra g e and re trie v a l

s y s te m s th a t use in te g ra l h a za rd o u s m o v in g p a rts fo r th e h a n d lin g o f re co rd e d m e d ia (fo r
e x a m p le , ta p e c a rtrid g e s , ta p e c a s s e tte s , o p tic a l d is c s , e tc .) a n d s im ila r fu n c tio n s and la rg e
p rin te rs .
8.5.4.2 Equipment containing work cells with MS3 parts
8.5.4.2.1 Protection of persons in the work cell
normal operating conditions,

D u rin g n o M S 3 m o v in g p a rts s h a ll b e accessible at th e o u te r
enclosure o f a work cell.
The e q u ip m e n t s h a ll be p ro v id e d w ith safeguards to re d u ce th e ris k o f in ju ry due to MS3

m o v in g p a rts in t h e work cell. O th e r c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s w ith in a work cell s h a ll n o t b e

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 169 -
accessible u n d e r normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions and

single fault conditions.
EXAMPLES Safeguards include interlocks, barriers and awareness signals, together with designated procedures
and training.
NOTE 1 Some authorities may require installation of fire detection and extinguishing systems in work cells.
A c c e s s to a work cell o r a n y o f its c o m p a r t m e n t s s h a ll b e p r o t e c t e d b y e it h e r o f th e f o llo w in g

m e th o d s :
- Method 1 - Safety interlock m e t h o d . N o k e y o r tool i s n e e d e d t o g a in e n tr y to th e work

cell. Safety interlocks m e e t i n g t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f A n n e x K s h a l l b e p ro v id e d to p re v e n t
a c c e s s t o t h e work cell w h i l e p o w e r i s a v a i l a b l e t o t h e M S 3 m o v in g p a rts in th a t
c o m p a rtm e n t. P o w e r to th e MS3 m o v in g p a rts s h a ll not be re s to re d u n til th e d o o rs a re
c lo s e d and la tc h e d . O p e n in g o f th e in te rlo c k e d access door in to any c o m p a rtm e n t o f a
work cell c o n ta in in g MS3 m o v in g p a rts , or an access door b e tw e e n a c o m p a rtm e n t
c o n ta in in g MS3 m o v in g p a rts a n d o n e th a t h a s b e e n d is a b le d , s h a ll a u to m a tic a lly in itia te
d is c o n n e c tio n o f th e s u p p ly to s u c h p a rts , a n d to r e d u c e to a c la s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e w ith in
2 s fo r an instructed person or a skilled person. I f r e d u c t i o n o f th e e n e r g y s o u r c e c la s s
ta k e s lo n g e r th a n 2 s, th e n an instructional safeguard s h a l l b e p ro v id e d in a c c o r d a n c e
w ith C la u s e F .5 .
- Method 2 - Key or tool tool s h a l l b e r e q u i r e d t o g a i n a n d c o n t r o l a c c e s s

m e th o d . A k e y o r
t o t h e work cell, a n d a c c e s s t o t h e work cell s h a l l b e p r e v e n t e d w h i l e p o w e r i s a v a i l a b l e
t o t h e M S 3 m o v i n g p a r t s i n t h a t work cell. T h e o p e r a t i n g a n d s e r v i c i n g i n s t r u c t i o n s , a s
a p p r o p r i a t e , s h a l l s p e c i f y t h a t t h e k e y o r tool m u s t b e c a r r i e d b y t h e p e r s o n w h i l e i n t h e
work cell. W h e n t h e work cell c a n b e e n t e r e d c o m p l e t e l y c l o s i n g o f t h e d o o r w i t h o u t t h e
k e y o r tool s h a l l n o t r e s u l t i n t h e e q u i p m e n t b e i n g r e s t a r t e d a u t o m a t i c a l l y .
NOTE 2 The key or tool may be used as the means to remove power before access to the work cell or
compartment.
E x c e p t a s p e rm itte d in 8 . 5 . 4 . 2 . 2 , i t s h a l l n o t b e p o s s i b l e t o s t a r t o r r e s t a r t t h e s y s t e m u n t il a ll
r e le v a n t a c c e s s d o o rs a re c lo s e d a n d la tc h e d .
W h e re it i s p o s s i b l e to e n te r a work cell c o m p le te ly , a n a u to m a tic a lly a c tiv a te d m e c h a n ic a l

in te rlo c k s h a ll be p ro v id e d so th a t th e door cannot be c lo s e d in a d v e rte n tly if th is c lo s u re
w o u ld a llo w th e e q u ip m e n t to b e re s ta rte d . It s h a l l b e p o s s i b l e t o o p e n a n y d o o r fro m in s id e
work cell w i t h o u t t h e u s e o f a k e y o r tool. T h e m e a n s o f o p e n i n g t h e
th e d o o r fro m in s id e th e
work cell s h a l l b e r e a d i l y i d e n t i f i a b l e a n d v i s i b l e , w h e t h e r t h e d o o r is open or c lo s e d ,
irre s p e c tiv e o f th e o p e ra tin g s ta tu s o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
D u r in g s e r v ic in g o f th e e q u ip m e n t, th e r e m a y b e a n e e d to e n e r g iz e th e e q u ip m e n t to a llo w fo r
a lig n m e n t, e tc . In such cases, under single fault conditions or abnormal operating
conditions, a d e q u a t e m e a n s s h a ll b e p r o v id e d to lim it th e m o v e m e n t o f t h e p a r ts s o t h a t t h e y
do not becom e M S3, such as by e x te n d e d tra v e l o r b y h a v in g p a rts d e ta c h and b e e je c te d
fro m th e m o v in g a s s e m b ly . Such m eans s h a ll be c a p a b le o f lim itin g th e s e m o v in g p a rts to
le s s th a n M S 3 u n d e r ra te d lo a d , m a x im u m s p e e d c o n d itio n s a n d a t m a x im u m e x te n s io n .
Compliance is checked by inspection, and， if necessary， by the tests of B.3 and BA. The
e n c lo s u re or compartment separation barriers shall contain any part that may become
detached during the test.
8.5.4.2.2 Access Protection Override
8.5.4.2.2.1 General
If it is n e c e s s a r y f o r a skilled person to o v e r r id e a p r o te c tiv e m e c h a n is im such as a safety

interlock fo r access t o a work cell or c o m p a rtm e n t, an o v e rrid e s y s te m c o m p ly in g w ith

- 170 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
C la u s e K .4 s h a ll be p ro v id e d . In a d d i t i o n , w h e n an o v e rrid e s y s te m is u s e d , an e m e rg e n c y
s to p s y s te m s h a ll be p ro v id e d in a cco rd a n ce w ith 8 .5 .4 .2 .3 , and s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e
o p e ra tio n a l e n d u ra n c e re q u ire m e n ts o f 8 .5 .4 .2 .4 .
8.5.4.2.2.2 Visual indicator
A s e t o f tw o o r m o re b rig h t fla s h in g in d ic a to r s c o m p ly in g w ith IE C 6 0 0 7 3 s h a ll o p e r a te u n d e r

th e fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s :
a) fo r a work cell o r c o m p a r tm e n t th a t c a n b e e n te re d c o m p le te ly to in d ic a te th e e q u ip m e n t
is b e i n g r e s t o r e d t o n o r m a l o p e r a t i o n a n d m o t i o n is p e n d i n g ; o r
b) fo r a n y e q u ip m e n t w h e n th e i n t e r l o c k is o v e r r i d d e n and d riv e p o w e r is a v a i l a b l e to MS3

m o v in g p a rts .
The in d ic a to rs s h a ll be re a d ily v is ib le at any p o in t w ith in th e work cell or re le v a n t

c o m p a rtm e n t and a t th e p o in t o f e n try . F o r c o n d itio n a), th e in d ic a to rs s h a ll o p e ra te fo r a
m in im u m o f 10 s p rio r to m o v e m e n t o f a M S 3 m o v in g p a rt a lo n g th e m o s t s ig n ific a n t a x is . If
c o n d itio n a) can occur w h ile c o n d itio n b) is in e ffe c t, th e re s h a ll be a change of lig h t
s e q u e n c i n g s u c h t h a t t h e c h a n g e in s t a t u s w i l l b e o b v i o u s t o p e r s o n s i n o r a t t h e p o i n t o f e n t r y
to th e work cell.
NOTE The most significant axis is the one with the longest travel distance. This is usually the horizontal (X) axis.
Compliance is checked by inspection and test.
8.5.4.2.3 Emergency stop system
T h is s u b c la u s e o n ly a p p lie s if a safety interlock o v e rrid e is p ro v id e d as s p e c ifie d in

8 .5 .4 .2 .2 .
An e m e rg e n c y s to p s y s te m s h a ll o v e r r id e a ll o t h e r c o n t r o ls , re m o ve d riv e p o w e r fro m MS3

m o v in g p a r t s a n d e m p l o y a u t o m a t i c b r a k in g , if n e c e s s a r y , to c a u s e a ll t h e s e m o v in g p a r ts to
s to p w ith in a r e a s o n a b le tim e p e rio d s u c h th a t a le v e l 3 h a z a rd c a n n o t b e c o n ta c te d .
C o m p o n e n ts of th e e m e rg e n c y s to p s y s te m s h a ll be of an e le c tro m e c h a n ic a l ty p e . An
e m e r g e n c y s t o p c o n t r o l m a y c o n s is t o f:
- a s w itc h c o m p ly in g w ith IE C 6 1 0 5 8 -1 a n d th a t m e e ts th e re q u ire m e n ts o f A n n e x K a n d th a t

is p r o v i d e d w i t h a l a t c h i n g t y p e m e c h a n i s m m e e tin g th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -5 -5 , o r
e q u iv a le n t; o r
- a n e m e r g e n c y s t o p d e v i c e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 9 4 7 - 5 - 5 .
NOTE In the United Kingdom, an emergency stop system complying with the requirements of IEC 60204-1 and
ISO 13850 is required where there is a risk of personal injury.
A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e s a fe ty fu n c tio n o f th e e m e rg e n c y s to p s y s te m s h a ll h a v e a S a fe ty In te g rity

L e v e l (S IL ) p e r IE C 6 2 0 6 1 , o r a P e r fo r m a n c e Level (P L ) p e r IS O 1 3 8 4 9 -1 t h a t is c o n s i s t e n t
w ith th e r e s u lts o f a ris k a s s e s s m e n t o f th e work cell.
R e s ta rtin g of th e m e c h a n ic a l s y s te m s h a ll o n ly be p o s s ib le by in itia tin g a s ta rt c o n tro l

p ro c e d u re a fte r th e e m e rg e n c y s to p c o n tro l h a s b e e n m a n u a lly re s e t.
For e q u ip m e n t w h e re a p e rso n m ay c o m p le te ly e n te r th e work cell, th e e m e rg e n c y s to p

s y s te m s h a ll in c lu d e a m in im u m o f tw o e m e rg e n c y s to p c o n tro ls , o n e o u ts id e th e work cell
and o n e w ith in th e work cell. The s y s te m s ta rt up p ro c e d u re s h a ll in c lu d e a n o n -h a z a rd o u s
m e t h o d t o e n s u r e n o p e r s o n is p r e s e n t in t h e work cell. If it c a n b e s h o w n , a f t e r a p p l i c a t i o n o f
th e s in g le fa u lt te s ts s p e c ifie d in 8 . 5 . 4 . 2 . 4 t o t h e m o v e m e n t c o n t r o l c i r c u i t r y o r o t h e r s e n s i n g

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 171 -
m e a n s , th a t s u c h te s ts d o n o t b y -p a s s th e n o n -h a z a rd o u s s ta rt up p ro c e d u re , th e e m e rg e n c y
s t o p p i n g d i s t a n c e t e s t o f t h is s u b c l a u s e is n o t r e q u i r e d .
For e q u ip m e n t w h e re a p e rso n m ay o n ly p a rtia lly e n te r a work cell or c o m p a rtm e n t, a

m in im u m of one e m e rg e n c y s to p c o n tro l s h a ll be p ro v id e d o u ts id e o f th e work cell. T h e
e m e rg e n c y s to p s y s te m s h a ll b e o p e r a b le b y th e p e r s o n n e e d in g to h a v e a c c e s s t o t h e work
cell.
A n e m e r g e n c y s to p c o n tro l p ro v id e d o u ts id e th e work cell s h a ll b e r e a d ily v is ib le a n d s h a ll be

lo c a te d on th e e q u ip m e n t such th a t th e p e rso n o p e ra tin g it c a n see if th e work cell is
o c c u p ie d . T h e in s ta lla tio n in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll r e q u ir e th a t s p a c e b e p r o v id e d a r o u n d th e c o n tro l
so th a t an instructed person or skilled person c a n e a s i l y r e a c h a n d a c t i v a t e it.
An e m e rg e n c y s to p c o n tro l p ro v id e d in s id e th e work cell s h a ll be re a d ily a c c e s s ib le fro m

a n y w h e re in s id e th e work cell a n d s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w ith lig h tin g to p e r m it e a s y id e n tific a tio n .
It s h a ll c o n s is t of a re d p a lm or m u sh ro o m head b u tto n or be p ro v id e d w ith an in d ire c t
a rra n g e m e n t, such as an e a s ily id e n tifia b le re d s a fe ty c a b le , th a t a c tiv a te s th e e m e rg e n c y
s to p s y s te m .
Compliance is checked by inspection and, if necessary, by the following tests.
While the mechanical system is operating at its maximum kinetic energy (carrying maximum
load capacity at maximum speed)， the emergency stop system is to be activated and the
distance to stop measured. The results of the distance measurements shall show that after
activation of the emergency stop system, any subsequent motion in any direction would be
unlikely to present a risk of injury.
The maximum stopping distance from the point o f activation， along the most significant axis,
shall be 1 m or less. In addition, if there is an end point along the most significant axis beyond
which the MS3 moving part does not operate, there shall be at least 150 mm of empty space
available between this end point and the nearest fixed mechanical part, intended to provide
sufficient space for a person not to be harmed. The requirements of B.3.8 apply.
8.5.4.2.4 Endurance requirements
Except as re fe re n c e d in 8.5 . 4.2 . 3 , th is s u b c la u s e o n ly a p p lie s safety interlock

when a
o v e r r i d e is p r o v i d e d a s s p e c ifie d in 8.5 . 4.2 . 2 , o r if a n y instructed person o r skilled person
accessible c a b le c o n ta in s E S 3 v o lta g e s .
M o v a b le c a b le a s s e m b lie s a re te s te d to e n s u r e th a t n o m e c h a n ic a l d a m a g e o c c u r s th a t c o u ld
r e s u l t in a n y o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
- a m a lfu n c tio n o f th e safety interlock s y s te m ;
- c o m p r o m i s e a n y c o m p a r tm e n t s e p a ra tio n b a rrie rs o r mechanical enclosures;

- e x p o s e a p e rs o n to o th e r h a z a rd s .
I f t h e v o l t a g e in t h e s e c a b l e s a n d m o v e m e n t c o n t r o l c i r c u i t r y a r e E S 3 , m e c h a n i c a l e n d u r a n c e
te s ts s h a ll b e a p p lie d to e n s u r e th a t n o e le c tr ic s h o c k h a z a rd re s u lts .
F o r c a b l e s t h a t c a r r y o n l y v o l t a g e s m e e t i n g t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r E S 1 f if it c a n b e s h o w n t h a t
s in g le o p e n - c ir c u it o r s h o rt-c irc u it fa u lt te s tin g o f th e s e c a b le s a n d m o v e m e n t c o n tro l c irc u itry
w o u l d n o t r e s u l t in a h a z a r d , t h e y a r e e x e m p t f r o m t h e m e c h a n i c a l e n d u r a n c e t e s t s .
Compliance is checked by inspection and, when necessary, by the following mechanical

endurance tests.

- 172 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
The mechanical system, including the means (for example, limit switches) that limit movement
during normal operation, are subjected to 100 000 cycles of operation at rated load and
maximum speed through the maximum length or rotation o f travel permitted by the design.
After the cycling:
- a mechanical function check (for example, MS3 moving parts to operate electromechanical
switches; end of travel mechanical stop, etc.) and a visual inspection, are conducted.
Mechanical stops and electromechanical switches shall perform as intended. There shall
be no evidence of loss of mechanical integrity. All safety-related functions (including
emergency stop systems, and the like, as applicable) shall operate normally; and
- the assembly cables that control the MS3 moving parts, other than those containing only
ES1， are examined for damage that exposes conductors carrying greater than ES1. No
conductor shall be broken and no individual strands shall have penetrated the insulation. If
damage cannot be determined by inspection, the cable assembly shall pass an electric
strength test of 1 000 V， in accordance with 5.4, applied between the conductors carrying
greater than ES1 and foil wrapped around the body of the cable.
8.5.4.3 Equipment having an electromechanical device for destruction of media
8.5.4.3.1 General requirements
Equipment safeguards to p ro te c t p e rso n s, in c lu d in g c h ild re n , fo r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to

m e c h a n ic a lly d e s tro y v a rio u s m e d ia b y m e a n s o f m o v in g p a rts th a t d ra w th e m e d ia in to th e
e q u i p m e n t a r e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w . T h e m e d i a d e s t r u c t i o n d e v i c e w i t h i n t h i s e q u i p m e n t is c l a s s e d
as M S3.
EXAMPLES Equipment that includes household use and home-office use document shredding and similar media
destruction devices, as determined by the nature of their power source.
F o r e q u i p m e n t f o r u s e in l o c a t i o n s w h e r e c h i l d r e n a r e n o t l i k e l y t o b e p r e s e n t , s e e C l a u s e F . 4 .
NOTE This equipment design typically applies to commercial or industrial equipment expected to be installed in
locations where only adults are normally present.
E q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith safeguards so th a t MS3 m o v in g p a rts a re n o t accessible to

th e a p p ro p ria te jo in te d te s t p ro b e of Annex V and th e wedge p ro b e of F ig u re V .4 .
R e q u ire m e n ts fo r safety interlocks a re a c c o rd in g to 4 .4 .5 , e x c e p t th a t w h e r e a m o v in g p a rt
cannot be re d u ce d to th e a p p ro p ria te e n e rg y c la s s w ith in 2 s, th e safety interlock s h a ll
c o n tin u e to p re v e n t a c c e s s .
8.5.4.3.2 Instructional safeguards against moving parts
F o r e q u ip m e n t in s ta lle d w h e r e c h ild r e n m a y be p re s e n t, an instructional safeguard s h a ll b e

p r o v i d e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
- e l e m e n t 1a: IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 7 (2 0 1 1 -0 5 )
- element 2: o p tio n a l
- element 4: “ T h i s e q u i p m e n t is n o t i n t e n d e d fo r u s e b yc h ild re n ” a n d “ A v o id to u c h in g th e
m e d ia fe e d o p e n in g w ith th e h a n d s , c lo th in g o r h a ir” and “ U n p lu g th is
e q u ip m e n t w h e n n o t in use fo r an e x te n d e d p e rio d o f tim e ” o r e q u iv a le n t
te x t

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 173 -
8.5.4.3.3 Disconnection from the supply
An is o la tin g s w itc h c o m p ly in g w ith A n n e x L s h a ll be p ro v id e d to d is c o n n e c t p o w e r to MS3

m o v in g p a r ts . A s w it c h w it h a n “ O F F ” p o s it io n , t h a t r e m o v e s a ll p o w e r f r o m th e M S 3 m o v in g
p a r t is a c c e p t a b l e . T h e s w i t c h s h a l l b e l o c a t e d w h e r e it is e a s i l y accessible to th e u s e r w h o s e
b o d y p a rt o r c lo th e s m a y b e c a u g h t.
The ”〇 N 丨
丨 and "O F F " p o s itio n s of a tw o -p o s itio n s w itc h s h a ll be m a rke d in a cco rd a n ce
w ith F .3 .5 .2 .
F o r a m u lti-p o s itio n s w itc h , th e ,,O F F M p o s i t i o n o f th e s w itc h s h a ll be m a rke d in a c c o r d a n c e

w ith F .3 .5 .2 , a n d th e o th e r p o s itio n s s h a ll b e m a r k e d w ith a p p r o p r ia te w o r d s o r s y m b o ls .
8.5.4.3.4 Test method
The media destruction device is tested with the wedge probe of Figure V.4 applied in any
direction relative to the opening:
- wi th a force up to 45 N for a strip-cut type device; and

- wi th a force up to 90 N for a cross-cut type device.
NOTE Media destruction devices are typically identified as either strip-cut type or cross-cut type. A strip-cut
media destruction device shreds the media into long strips using a motor-based shredding mechanism. A cross-cut
media destruction device shreds the media two or more ways into tiny particles, typically using a more powerful
motor and more complex shredding mechanism.
Any e n c lo s u re or guard that can be removed or opened by an o rd in a ry p e rs o n or an

in s tru c te d p e rs o n shall be removed or opened prior to application of the probes.
Compliance is checked in accordance with V.1.2 and V.1.5. The wedge probe shall not
contact any moving part.
Where the equipment is provided with a s a fe ty in te rlo c k ， compliance is checked according to

4.4.5， except where a moving part cannot be reduced to the appropriate energy class within
2 s , the s a fe ty in te rlo c k shall continue to prevent access.
8.5.5 High pressure lamps
8.5.5.1 General
The c o n ta in m e n t m e c h a n is m fo r h ig h p re ssu re la m p s th a t a re c o n s id e re d MS3 a c c o rd in g to

L in e 4 o f T a b le 3 5 s h a ll h a v e a d e q u a te s tr e n g th to c o n ta in a n explosion o f t h e la m p s o a s to
re d u ce th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju ry to an ordinary person or instructed person d u rin g n o rm a l
u s e , o r la m p a s s e m b ly re p la c e m e n t, a s a p p ro p ria te .
8.5.5.2 Test method
For the protection against the effects of a high pressure lamp failure， the following test is
performed as follows:
- l amp assemblies considered MS3 parts during field replacement are tested separate from
the equipment;
- l amp assemblies only considered MS3 parts during operation, may be tested separately,
or as normally installed in the equipment, or both.
An e x p lo s io n of the lamp is stimulated by mechanical impact, electronic pulse generator or

similar method. The lamp shall operate for at least 5 min to obtain operational temperature
and pressure. To evaluate the rupture results for potential debris area and particle size, the
equipment or lamp assembly is placed on a horizontal surface， and a dark sticky mat (or

- 174 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
another adequate method) of adequate size to capture the particles is placed near the
exhaust vent of the equipment. The equipment opening shall be oriented to maximize
potential for particles to be expelled from the product horizontally across the dark sticky mat.
After the rupture, the glass particles generated are measured using a magnified glass piece
with a 0,1 mm resolution. The test shall be conducted to simulate the worst case operating
position specified in the instructions.
NOTE It is easier for the inspection of potential glass debris if the sticky mat has a dark blue colour.
An example of an electronic pulse generator method is given in Figure D.3.
The charge is increased in steps o f 5 J until the lamp ruptures are repeatable.
Compliance is checked by physical inspection or, if necessary, by the tests of 8.5.5.2.
When tested in accordance with 8.5.5.2, inspect the dark sticky mat for glass particles ， and:
- gl ass particles less than 0,8 mm in the longest axis shall not be found beyond 1 m of the
e n c lo s u re opening; and
- gl ass particles equal to or greater than 0,8 mm in the longest axis shall not be found.
For p ro fe s s io n a l e q u ip m e n t ， where it is unlikely that the particles will be within reach of an

o rd in a ry p e rso n , the value of 0,8 mm may be replaced with 5 mm.
8.6 Stability of equipment
8.6.1 Requirements
C la s s ific a tio n o f p ro d u c ts fo r th e p u rp o se s o f a s s e s s in g e q u ip m e n t s ta b ility is to be done

a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 5.
I n c a s e u n i t s a r e f i x e d t o g e t h e r , t h e M S c l a s s i s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e t o t a l w e i g h t o f t h e u n i t s . If
u n it s a r e i n t e n d e d t o b e s e p a r a t e d f o r r e l o c a t i o n , t h e M S c l a s s is d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e i n d i v i d u a l
w e ig h t.
In d iv id u a l u n its th a t a re d e s ig n e d to b e m e c h a n ic a lly fix e d t o g e t h e r o n s ite a n d a re n o t u s e d

in d iv id u a lly , or stationary equipment, s h a ll be assessed by in s p e c tio n a fte r in s ta lla tio n
a c c o r d i n g to t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s i n s t r u c t i o n s a n d , if n e c e s s a r y , t e s t e d a c c o r d i n g to 8 . 6 . 2 . 2 .
E q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s a n d te s ts g iv e n in 8 . 6 . 2 f 8 . 6 . 3 , 8 . 6 . 4 a n d 8 . 6 . 5
a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 6 . W h e r e a n “ x ” is g i v e n , it m e a n s t h a t t h e t e s t is a p p l i c a b l e .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 175 -
Table 36 - Overview of requirements and tests
Type o f te st
Static Downward H orizontal

Equipm ent type R elocation Glass slide b
s ta b ility force force
8.6.2.2 8.6.2.3 8.6.3 8.6.4 8.6.5
MS1 All equipment No stability requirements
Floor standing X
Non-floor standing X
MS2
Controls or display a X X
Fixed equipm ent No stability requirements

Floor standing X X X
Non-floor standing X
Moo
Controls or display X X X
Fixed equipm ent No stability requirements

Equipment with front mounted accessible user controls and equipment having displays with moving images
likely to be used in the home or similar installation environments where the equipment may be accessible to
children.
b The glass slide test is not applicable to floor standing equipment, even though the equipment may have
controls or a display.
W h e re th e rm o p la s tic m a te ria ls have an in flu e n c e on th e s ta b ility of th e e q u ip m e n t, th e

r e le v a n t s ta b ility te s ts s h a ll b e c o n d u c te d a f t e r t h e s t r e s s r e l i e f t e s t in C l a u s e T .8 w h e n th e
e q u ip m e n t h a s c o o le d to ro o m te m p e ra tu re .
MS2 and MS3 te le v is io n s e ts s h a ll instructional safeguard in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h

have an
C la u s e F .5 , except th a t th e instructional safeguard m a y b e i n c l u d e d i n t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n
in s tru c tio n s o r e q u iv a le n t d o c u m e n t a c c o m p a n y in g th e e q u ip m e n t.
- e l e m e n t 2: “ S ta b ility H a z a r d ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd
- e l e m e n t 3: “T he te le v is io n set m ay fa ll, c a u s in g s e rio u s p e rso n a l in ju ry or d e a th ” or

- e l e m e n t 4: th e te x t b e lo w o r e q u iv a le n t te x t

- 176 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
A television set may fall, causing serious personal injury or death. Many injuries, particularly to children, can be
avoided by taking simple precautions such as:
一 ALWAYS use cabinets or stands or mounting methods recommended by the manufacturer of the television
set.
一 ALWAYS use furniture that can safely support the television set,
- ALWAYS ensure the television set is not overhanging the edge of the supporting furniture.
- ALWAYS educate children about the dangers of climbing on furniture to reach the television set or its
controls.
- ALWAYS route cords and cables connected to your television so they cannot be tripped over, pulled or
grabbed.
- NEVER place a television set in an unstable location.
- NEVER place the television set on tall furniture (for example, cupboards or bookcases) without anchoring
both the furniture and the television set to a suitable support.
- NEVER place the television set on cloth or other materials that may be located between the television set
and supporting furniture.
一 NEVER place items that might tempt children to climb, such as toys and remote controls, on the top of the
television or furniture on which the television is placed.
If the existing television set is going to be retained and relocated, the same considerations as above should be
applied.
8.6.2 Static stability
8.6.2.1 Test setup
The equipment shall be blocked， if necessary, by means of a stop of the smallest dimensions
possible to keep it from sliding or rolling during the test. During the tests ， containers, if any,
are to contain the amount of substance within their rated capacity that will result in the most
disadvantageous condition.
All doors ， drawers ， casters， adjustable feet and other appurtenances that are a c c e s s ib le to
an o rd in a ry p e rso n , are arranged in any combination that results in the least stability.
Equipment provided with multi-positional features shall be tested in the least favourable
position based on the equipment construction. However, if the casters are intended only to
transport the unit, and if the installation instructions require adjustable feet to be lowered after
installation, then the adjustable feet (and not the casters) are used in this test.
Where equipment is subject to periodic maintenance or routinely serviced or repaired at its

intended use location， the doors, drawers, etc. or any other adjustment means a c c e s s ib le to
an in s tru c te d p e rs o n or s k ille d p e rs o n shall be arranged in any combination specified by
the servicing instructions that results in the least stability.
The tests of 8.6.2.2 and 8.6.2.3 shall be performed as indicated in Table 36.
8.6.2.2 Static stability test
The equipment shall be subjected to one of the following tests:
- The equipment is tilted in all directions such that the base of the equipment is at an angle
up to and including 10°; or
- The equipment is placed on a plane at an angle of 10° from the horizontal and rotated
slowly through an angle o f 360° about its normal vertical axis; or
- The equipment is placed on a horizontal non-skid surface and subjected to a force equal
to:
• 50 % of the weight of the unit vertical downwards， but not more than 100 N. If， during
the test, the supporting surface prevents the equipment from overturning, the test shall
be repeated such that the supporting surface is not used to pass the test; and

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 177 -
• 13 % o f the weight in all horizontal directions but not more than 250 N9
that is applied to the worst case positions on the equipment by means of a suitable test
apparatus having a flat surface of approximately 125 mm by 200 mm, in such a way as to
produce the maximum overturning moment. The test may be applied at any height not
exceeding 1f5 m from the base of the equipment. The test force shall be discontinued if
the equipment remains stable after being tilted 10° from vertical.
8.6.2.3 Downward force test
Equipment shall not tip over when a constant downward force of 800 N is applied at the point
of leverage for a maximum moment to any point of any surface within 10° of horizontal of at
least 125 mm by at least 200 mm， at any height up to 1 m from the base of the equipment.
The 800 N force is applied by means of a suitable test apparatus having a flat surface of
approximately 125 mm by 200 mm. The downward force is applied with the complete flat
surface of the test apparatus in contact with the equipment， however the test apparatus need
not be in full contact with uneven surfaces (for example, corrugated or curved surfaces).
Equipment having a shape or a flexibility of the surface that is not likely to be used as a step
or a ladder are exempt from the test.
EXAMPLE Products in combination with a cart or stand or products with protrusion or recess where the
construction is obviously not to be used as a step or ladder.
During the tests, the equipment shall not tip over.
8.6.3 Relocation stability
E q u i p m e n t s h a l l b e s t a b l e w h e n it is b e i n g r e l o c a t e d . E q u i p m e n t s h a l l :
- b e e q u ip p e d w ith w h e e ls h a v in g a m in im u m d ia m e te r o f 1 0 0 m m ; o r
- c o m p l y w ith th e te s t o f 8 .6 .3 .2 .
8.6.3.2 Test method and compliance criteria
The equipment is tilted to an angle of 10° from its normal upright position in any direction. If
the equipment is such that when it is tilted through an angle of 10° when standing on a
horizontal plane, a part of the equipment not normally in contact with the supporting surface
would touch the horizontal plane, the equipment is placed on the edge of the horizontal
support during the test so that the contact is not made. Alternatively， the equipment may be
placed on a plane and is rotated through an angle of 360° about its normal vertical axis while
tilted at 10°.
Equipment expected to be moved or relocated by o rd in a ry p e rs o n s shall have:
一 all doors and drawers not having a positive means of retention and that can be opened
inadvertently; and
一 casters， adjustable feet and the like
arranged in any combination that results in the least stability.
Equipment expected to be moved or relocated by an in s tru c te d p e rs o n or a s k ille d pe rso n ,

shall have all doors ， drawers, etc” positioned in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
A unit provided with multi-positional features shall be tested in the least favourable position
based on the equipment construction.

- 178 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
The equipment shall not tip over during the test.
8.6.4 Glass slide test
The equipment is placed on a clean ， dry， glass covered horizontal surface so that only the
supporting feet are in contact with the glass. The glass-covered surface is then tilted in the
most unfavourable direction through an angle of 10°.
During the test, the equipment shall not slide or tip over.
8.6.5 Horizontal force test and compliance criteria
The equipment is to be placed on a horizontal non-skid surface with all doors， drawers ，
casters， adjustable feet and other movable parts arranged in any combination that results in
the least stable condition. The equipment shall be blocked， if necessary， by means of a stop
of the smallest dimensions possible, to keep it from sliding or rolling when subjected to one of
the following tests:
- an external horizontal force of 20 % of the weight of the equipment or 250 A/, whichever is
less， is applied to that point on the equipment that will result in the least stability. The
force shall not be applied more than 1,5 m above the supporting surface; or
- the equipment shall be moved through any angle o f tilt up to and including 15° from the
vertical; or
- the equipment is placed on a plane and is rotated through an angle of 360° about its
normal vertical axis while tilted at an angle o f 15°.
During the test, the equipment shall not tip over.
8.7 Equipment mounted to a wall， ceiling or other structure
8.7.1 Requirements
C la s s ific a tio n o f e q u ip m e n t fo r th e p u rp o s e s o f a s s e s s in g m o u n tin g m e a n s fo r a tta c h m e n t to a

w a ll, c e ilin g or o th e r fix e d s tru c tu re (fo r e x a m p le , a p o le or to w e r) is done a c c o rd in g to
T a b le 3 5 , lin e 6.
F o r M S 2 o r M S 3 e q u ip m e n t:
- If th e m a n u fa c tu re r d e fin e s s p e c ific m o u n tin g m eans, th e c o m b in a tio n o f th e m o u n tin g

m eans and th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 8 . 7 . 2 , T e s t 1. T h e h a rd w a re used to fix th e
m o u n tin g m eans to th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll e ith e r be p ro v id e d w ith th e e q u ip m e n t, or
d e s c rib e d in d e t a i l in t h e u s e r i n s t r u c t i o n s ( f o r e x a m p l e , l e n g t h o f s c r e w s , d i a m e t e r o f t h e
s c re w s , e tc .).
- If th e m a n u fa c tu re r does not d e fin e s p e c ific m o u n tin g m eans, but th e e q u ip m e n t is

p ro v id e d w ith a n y p a rt (fo r e x a m p le , a h o o k o r th re a d e d h o le ) w h ic h fa c ilita te s a tta c h in g
such m o u n tin g m eans to th e e q u ip m e n t, such p a rts s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 8 .7 .2 , T est 2 f as
a p p r o p r ia te . T h e u s e r in s tr u c tio n s h a ll a d v is e o n th e s a fe u s e o f s u c h p a rts (fo r e x a m p le ,
s c r e w s iz e in c lu d in g th re a d s iz e a n d le n g th , n u m b e r o f s c re w s , e tc .).
- If t h e e q u i p m e n t is p r o v i d e d w ith th re a d e d p a rts fo r a tta c h m e n t o f th e m o u n tin g m eans,

th e th re a d e d p a rts w ith o u t th e m o u n tin g m eans s h a ll a d d itio n a lly c o m p ly w ith 8 .7 .2 ,
T e s t 3.
NOTE The tests are meant to test the fixing of the mounting means to the equipment and not to test the fixing to
the wall, ceiling or other structure.
8.7.2 Test methods
If the construction involves thermoplastic materials that have an influence on the strength of
the mounting system, the tests shall be performed after the stress relief test of Clause T.8.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 179 -
Test 1
The equipment is mounted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the
mounting means positioned, when possible， to represent the most severe stress on the
supports.
A force in addition to the weight o f the equipment is applied downwards through the centre of
gravity of the equipment， for 1 min. The additional force shall be:
- three times the weight of the equipment; or

- the weight of the equipment plus 880 A/,
whichever is less.
Afterwards， for equipment mounted to a wall or another structure， a horizontal force of 50 N is

applied laterally for 1 min.
Test 2
The test force shall be equivalent to the least of the following divided by the number of
attachment points in the mounting system:
- f our times the weight of the equipment; or

- t wo times the weight of the equipment plus 880 N.
Each individual representative point in the mounting system, one at a time， shall be subjected
to the following six test forces:
- a shear force perpendicular to its centre axis for 1 min. The force shall be applied in four
directions， one direction at a time， separated by 90°.
- an inward directed push force parallel to its centre axis for 1 min.
- an outward directed pull force parallel to its centre axis for 1 min.
Test 3
If the mounting system design relies upon threaded parts, each threaded part， one at a time,
shall be subjected to the following test.
The screw is tightened with a torque according to Table 37 and then loosened， for a total of 5
times. The torque shall be applied gradually.
If a corresponding screw fastener is supplied by the manufacturer, it shall be used for the test.
If no corresponding screw fastener is supplied by the manufacturer, even though a screw type
may be recommended in the user instructions, any screw with the same diameter shall be
used for the test.

- 180 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 37 - Torque to be applied to screws
Nominal diameter of screw Torque

mm Nm
up to and including 2,8 0,4

over 2,8 up to and including 3,0 0,5
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the tests of 8.7.2, as applicable. The equipment
or its associated mounting means shall not become dislodged and shall remain mechanically
intact and secure during the test. Threaded parts shall remain mechanically intact.
8.8 Handle strength
8.8.1 General
A p a r t o f t h e e q u i p m e n t u s e d f o r liftin g o r c a r r y in g t h e e q u ip m e n t , r e g a r d l e s s o f its s h a p e o r
lo c a tio n or w h e th e r th e p a rt is in te n d e d fo r liftin g or c a rry in g by hand or v ia m e c h a n ic a l
m e a n s , is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e a h a n d l e a n d s h a l l h a v e a d e q u a t e s t r e n g t h .
T h e e q u i p m e n t is c l a s s i f i e d a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 5 , l in e 5.
If e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g h a n d le s is d e s i g n e d , o r p r o v i d e d w ith in s tr u c tio n s , fo r liftin g o r c a r r y in g

m u ltip le u n its to g e th e r, th e c la s s is d e t e r m i n e d ta k in g in to a c c o u n t th e w e ig h t th a t m a y be
c a rrie d .
Compliance is checked by inspection or by available data, or， where necessary， by the test of
8.8.2. As a result o f the test， the handle， its securing means, or that portion of the e n c lo s u re
to which it is secured， shall not break, crack， or detach from the equipment.
8.8.2 Test method
A weight shall be uniformly applied over a 75 mm width at the centre of the handle, without
clamping.
The weight shall be the equipment weight plus an additional weight as specified below:
- for MS1 equipment with two or more handles, a weight that exerts a force o f three times
the weight of the equipment;
NOTE No tests apply to MS1 equipment having only one handle.
- for MS2 equipment, a weight that exerts a force of three times the weight of the
equipment;
一 for MS3 equipment with a mass 50 kg or less， a weight that exerts a force of two times the
weight of the equipment or 75 kgf whichever is greater; and
一 for MS3 equipment with a mass greater than 50 kg， a weight that exerts a force of the
weight of the equipment or 100 kg, whichever is greater.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 181 -
The additional weight shall be started at zero and gradually increased so that the test value is
attained in 5 s to 10 s and maintained for 60 s. When more than one handle is provided， the
force shall be distributed between the handles. The distribution of the forces shall be
determined by measuring the percentage of the equipment's weight sustained by each handle
with the equipment in the intended carrying position. When MS2 equipment is furnished with
more than one handle, and it can be considered capable of being carried by only one handle,
each handle shall be capable o f sustaining the total force.
8.9 Wheels or casters attachment requirements
8.9.1 General
T h e e q u i p m e n t is c l a s s i f i e d a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 5 , l i n e 5 . W h e n e q u i p m e n t is i n t e n d e d t o b e
u s e d w ith c a rts , s ta n d s a n d s im ila r c a r r ie r s p r o v id e d w ith w h e e ls o r c a s te r s , th e c la s s ific a tio n
is a p p l i e d u s i n g t h e c o m b i n e d m a s s .
T h e lik e lih o o d o f M S 3 e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g c a rts , s ta n d s a n d s im ila r c a rrie rs th a t s u p p o rt th e

e q u ip m e n t, fro m tip p in g o v e r d u rin g m o v e m e n t s h a ll b e r e d u c e d .
8.9.2 Test method
Wheels or casters on MS3 equipment， or their supporting cart， stand or similar carrier，
intended to be moved as part of its n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ， shall be capable of
withstanding a pull of 20 N. The pull force is to be applied by a weight， or a steady pull， to the
wheel or caster for a period o f 1 min in any direction made possible by the construction.
During the test, the wheels or casters shall not be damaged or pull free from its securing
means.
8.10 Carts， stands， and similar carriers
8.10.1 General
The e q u ip m e n t s h a ll be s ta b le w ith th e c a rt, s ta n d o r s im ila r c a rrie r. T h e c la s s ific a tio n s of

T a b le 3 5 , lin e 5 a re a p p lie d u s in g th e c o m b in e d m a s s o f b o th th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th e c a rts o r
s ta n d s s p e c ifie d w ith th e e q u ip m e n t.
A ll c a r ts a n d s ta n d s s p e c ifie d fo r u s e w ith th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e a p p lic a b le

te s ts d e s c rib e d in t h e f o l l o w i n g s u b c l a u s e s . A c a r t , s t a n d o r c a r r ie r s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e
a p p lic a b le te s ts a lo n e a n d a g a in w ith th e e q u ip m e n t s p e c ifie d b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r p la c e d o n
th e c a rt o r s ta n d .
M S 3 e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g th e ir s u p p o rtin g c a rts , s ta n d s a n d s im ila r c a rrie rs th a t s u p p o r t th e

e q u ip m e n t , t h a t a r e n o t m o v e d a s p a r t o f its normal operating conditions, s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
th e h o riz o n ta l fo rc e te s t o f 8 .6 .5 .
MS2 or MS3 e q u ip m e n t m o re th a n 1m in h e ig h t, in c lu d in g e q u ip m e n t m o u n te d on th e ir
s p e c ifie d c a rt, s ta n d o r c a rrie r, s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e re lo c a tio n s t a b i l i t y t e s t in 8 . 6 . 3 except
t h a t t h e t ip a n g l e b e c o m e s 1 5 ° . If e q u i p m e n t is p r o v i d e d w i t h w h e e l s o r c a s t e r s t h a t a l l o w t h e
e q u ip m e n t to o n ly m o v e in l i m i t e d d i r e c t i o n s , t h e t e s t is o n l y a p p l i e d in t h o s e d ire c tio n s (fo r
e x a m p le , a n e le c tro n ic w h ite b o a rd ).
8.10.2 Marking and instructions
A c a rt, s ta n d or s im ila r c a rrie r th a t is s p e c ifie d by th e m a n u fa c tu re r fo r use w ith s p e c ific

e q u ip m e n t, b u t is p a c k a g e d and m a rk e te d s e p a ra te ly fro m th e e q u ip m e n t, s h a ll b e p r o v id e d
w ith a n instructional safeguard in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F.5.

- 182 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- e l e m e n t 2: “ C a u tio n ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
- e l e m e n t 4: 4T h i s (c a rt, s ta n d , o r c a rrie r) is i n t e n d e d fo r u s e o n ly w ith (m a n u fa c tu re rs

n a m e ), (m o d e l n u m b e r o r s e rie s ), ( e q u ip m e n t n a m e ) .” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
- e l e m e n t 3: “Use w ith o th e r e q u ip m e n t m ay re s u lt in in s ta b ility c a u s in g in ju ry ” or

T h e e l e m e n t s s h a l l b e in t h e o r d e r 2 , 4 , a n d 3.
The instructional safeguard s h a ll b e a ffix e d to th e c a rt, s ta n d o r c a rrie r, o r in c lu d e d in t h e

in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s o r e q u iv a le n t d o c u m e n t a c c o m p a n y in g th e e q u ip m e n t.
E q u ip m e n t o n ly in te n d e d and s h ip p e d fo r use w ith a s p e c ific c a rt, s ta n d o r s im ila r c a rrie r,

s h a ll be p ro v id e d w ith an instructional safeguard in a cco rd a n ce w ith C la u s e F.5 and be
c o m p r is e d o f:
- e l e m e n t 2: “ C a u tio n ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t
- e l e m e n t 4: “ T h i s ( e q u i p m e n t n a m e ) is f o r u s e o n l y w it h ( m a n u f a c t u r e r s n a m e ) ，（m o d e l
n u m b e r o r s e r i e s ) ，（c a r t ，s t a n d ，o r c a r r i e r ) ” o r e q u i v a l e n t t e x t
- e l e m e n t 3: ttU s e w i t h o t h e r ( c a r t s , s t a n d s , o r c a r r i e r s ) m a y r e s u l t in i n s t a b i l i t y c a u s i n g
in ju ry ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
T h e e l e m e n t s s h a l l b e in t h e o r d e r 2 f 4 , a n d 3.
The instructional safeguard s h a ll b e a ffix e d to th e e q u ip m e n t o r in c lu d e d in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n

in s tru c tio n s o r e q u iv a le n t d o c u m e n t a c c o m p a n y in g th e e q u ip m e n t.
8.10.3 Cart, stand or carrier loading test and compliance criteria
A cart， stand or carrier shall be constructed so that permanent deformation or damage that is
capable of resulting in injury to a person, does not occur when it is subjected to a force of
220 N applied for 1 min to any grippable or leverage point a c c e s s ib le to a child.
To determine compliance, the force is applied through the end of a 30 mm diameter circular
cylinder. The force is to be applied to a shelf drawer， dowel rung support， or equivalent part
that is within 750 mm from the floor and will support some or all of a child's weight. The force
is to be applied for 1 min with the cart or stand at room temperature. The part shall not
collapse or break so as to expose sharp edges or produce pinch points that are capable of
resulting in injury.
In addition， a cart， stand or other carrier shall be constructed so that permanent deformation
or damage that is capable of resulting in injury to persons does not occur when each
supporting surface is individually loaded with:
- the manufacturer’s intended load plus 440 N for the surface intended to support a display
with moving images; or
- f our times the manufacturer’s intended load or 100 N， whichever is greater but not to
exceed 440 N, is applied to all applicable surfaces.
A dedicated storage area intended to accommodate specific accessories such as media

tapes, discs ， etc. shall be fully loaded to the rated load.
The weight is to be applied for 1 min on each supporting surface, with the other supporting
surfaces unloaded.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 183 -
8.10.4 Cart, stand or carrier impact test
When tested as described below, a cart, stand or carrier shall not produce a risk o f injury to
persons.
A single impact is to be applied to any part of the cart or stand and the test method is to be as
described in Clause T.6. However， a cart， stand or carrier made of glass shall instead be
tested according to 4.4.3.6.
8.10.5 Mechanical stability
A cart， stand or carrier， including floor standing types， shall be subjected to the applicable
tests described in 8.6.3 and 8.6.5 by itself, and where applicable in combination with its
intended MS2 or MS3 equipment.
For the purposes of these tests， the weight shall be considered as the total weight of the
equipment plus the weight of the cart, stand or carrier. The equipment shall be installed
according to the manufacturer's instructions and the horizontal force shall be applied to either
the cart, stand or carrier or intended equipment to produce a maximum overturning moment
on the equipment at a point up to a maximum height of 1,5 m above the floor level.
If during the tests of 8.6.3 and 8.6.5 the equipment starts to slide or tip relative to the cart,
stand or carrier， only the horizontal force test shall be repeated by reducing the force to 13 %
of the weight o f the equipment alone， or 100 N， whichever is less.
The equipment and cart or stand shall not tip over.
8.10.6 Thermoplastic temperature stability
An e q u ip m e n t, c a r t ，s t a n d o r c a rrie r u s in g th e rm o p la s tic m a te ria ls in its c o n s tru c tio n s h a ll

w ith s ta n d th e te s t o f C la u s e T .8 w ith o u t a n y s h rin k a g e , w a rp a g e , o r o th e r d is to rtio n o f th e
t h e r m o p l a s t i c m a t e r i a l s t h a t r e s u l t s in t h e e q u i p m e n t f a i l i n g t o c o m p l y w i t h 8 . 1 0 . 3 t 8 . 1 0 . 4 a n d
8 .1 0 .5 .
8.11 Mounting means for slide-rail mounted equipment (SRME)
8.11.1 General
T h is s u b c la u s e s p e c ifie s re q u ire m e n ts fo r h o riz o n ta lly m o u n te d s lid e -ra ils to re d u ce th e

lik e lih o o d o f in ju ry b y re ta in in g th e S R M E in a s t a b l e p o s itio n a n d n o t a llo w in g th e s lid e -ra ils
to b u c k le , th e m e a n s o f a t t a c h m e n t to b r e a k , o r th e S R M E to s lid e p a s t th e e n d o f th e s lid e -
ra ils .
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s b e l o w a p p l y t o t h e m o u n t i n g m e a n s o f M S 2 a n d M S 3 S R M E t h a t is :
- i n s t a l l e d in a r a c k a n d t h a t i s i n t e n d e d t o b e e x t e n d e d o n s l i d e - r a i l s a w a y f r o m t h e r a c k f o r
in s ta lla tio n , u s e o r s e rv ic e ; a n d
- S R M E th a t e x te n d s th e fu ll w id th o f th e ra c k ; a n d
- h a v i n g a t o p i n s t a l l a t i o n p o s i t i o n m o r e t h a n 1 m in h e i g h t f r o m t h e s u p p o r t i n g s u r f a c e .
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
:一 e q u ip m e n t s u b a s s e m b lie s ; or
:一 o t h e r e q u i p m e n t f i x e d i n p l a c e in t h e r a c k ; o r
::一 e q u i p m e n t t h a t is n o t i n t e n d e d t o b e s e r v i c e d w h i l e e x t e n d e d o n s l i d e - r a i l s .
T h e m e c h a n ic a l m o u n tin g m e a n s fo r th e S R M E a re r e fe r r e d to a s s lid e - r a ils . T h e S R M E m ay

be th e a c tu a l p ro d u c t c o n fig u re d in its w o r s t c a s e m e c h a n ic a l lo a d in g , or a re p re s e n ta tiv e
enclosure w ith w e ig h ts to s im u la te w o r s t c a s e lo a d in g .

- 184 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
NOTE 1 Slide-rails include bearing slides, friction slides or other equivalent mounting means.
NOTE 2 Subassemblies of the end product (for example, removable modules, component drawers, pull out
paper/heater trays in copiers/printers) are not considered to be SRME.
8.11.2 Requirements
C la s s ific a tio n o f p ro d u c ts fo r th e p u rp o se s o f a s s e s s in g e q u ip m e n t s ta b ility is to be done

a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 5.
NOTE For assessing equipment stability, see 8.6.
S lid e -ra ils s h a ll re ta in th e SRME and have end s to p s th a t p re ve n t th e SRME fro m

u n in te n tio n a lly s lid in g o ff th e m o u n tin g m e a n s .
The s lid e - r a ils s h a ll b e in s ta lle d in a r e p r e s e n t a t i v e r a c k w i t h t h e S R M E , o r in a n e q u i v a l e n t

s e t u p in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s i n s t r u c t i o n s .
S lid e ra ils w ith a s in g le e x te n d e d p o s itio n s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e d o w n w a rd fo rc e te s t of

8 .1 1 .3 .1 in t h e e x t e n d e d p o s it io n .
S lid e ra ils h a v in g a s e rv ic e p o s itio n and an in s ta lla tio n p o s itio n s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e

d o w n w a rd fo rc e te s t o f 8 .1 1 .3 .1 in t h e s e r v i c e p o s i t i o n .
A ll s l i d e r a i l s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e t e s t s o f 8 . 1 1 . 3 . 2 a n d 8 . 1 1 . 3 . 3 in b o t h t h e s e r v i c e p o s i t i o n
a n d th e in s ta lla tio n p o s itio n .
F o llo w in g e a c h te s t, th e s lid e -ra ils a n d th e S R M E m a y b e re p la c e d b e fo re c o n d u c tin g th e n e x t

te s t.
A m u lt i p o s i t i o n s lid e ra il s h a ll n o t e x t e n d a u t o m a t i c a l l y t o a n y o f t h e e x t e n d e d p o s itio n s . T h e
S R M E s h a ll o n ly b e a b le to g o to th e s e r v ic e p o s itio n w h e n p u lle d o u t. A la tc h o r o th e r m e a n s
s h a ll be p ro v id e d to s to p th e SRME in th e s e rv ic e p o s itio n . Any s e rv ic e p o s itio n and
in s ta lla tio n p o s itio n s h a ll b e e x p la in e d . A n instructional safeguard s h a l l b e p ro v id e d fo r th e
in s ta lle r. T h e e le m e n ts o f th e instructional safeguard s h a l l b e a s f o l l o w s :
- e l e m e n t 2: S ta b ility h a z a rd
- e l e m e n t 3: “ T h e ra c k m a y tip o v e r c a u s in g s e r io u s p e r s o n a l in ju r y ”
- e l e m e n t 4: th e te x t b e lo w o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
B e fo re e x te n d in g th e ra c k to th e in s ta lla tio n p o s itio n , re a d th e in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s .
D o n o t p u t a n y l o a d o n t h e s l i d e - r a i l m o u n t e d e q u i p m e n t in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p o s i t i o n .
D o n o t l e a v e t h e s l i d e - r a i l m o u n t e d e q u i p m e n t in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p o s i t i o n .
8.11.3 Mechanical strength test
8.11.3.1 Downward force test
With the SRME in its extended position, a force in addition to the weight of the SRME is to be
applied downwards through the centre o f gravity for 1 min.
The additional force applied to the SRME shall be equal to the greater o f the following two
values, with a maximum of 800 N:
- 5 0 % o f the SRME weight plus a force of 330 N; or

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 185 -
- 50 % of the SRME weight， plus an additional weight， where the additional weight is equal
to the SRME weight or a force of 530 N， whichever is less.
NOTE This additional force is intended to take into account other items or devices that are stacked on top of the
installed SRME while in the extended position during installation of other SRME.
For slide-rail mounted shelves, the shelf shall be tested with a weight of 125 % of the
maximum weight that is intended to be placed on the shelf.
A marking shall be provided on the shelf to indicate the maximum weight that can be added to
the shelf.
8.11.3.2 Lateral push force test
A 250 N static push force is applied laterally， in both directions at or near the end of the
SRME with the slide rails in their fully extended (service) position for a period of 1 min. The
applied weight need not be in full contact with uneven surfaces (for example, corrugated or
curved surfaces) but shall be concentrated within 30 mm of the end of the SRME.
8.11.3.3 Integrity of slide rail end stops
To test the integrity of the end stops, a 250 N static pull force is applied at the front of the
fully extended rail on the SRME for a period of 1 min9 in an attempt to cause the SRME to
come off the slide-rail. The SRME is then returned to the (installed) use position and then
placed back in the fully extended position. The test is performed 10 times.
Compliance is checked by inspection and available manufacturer’s data. If data is not

available, then the tests according to 8.11.3 are conducted.
Following each test, the SRME and its associated slide-rails shall remain secure for one
complete cycle of travel on its slide-rails. If the mounting means is not able to perform one
complete cycle without binding， a force o f 100 N shall be applied horizontally to the front of
the SRME at its centre point with the intent to completely retract the SRME into the rack.
The mounting means shall not bend or buckle to any extent that could introduce an injury. End
stops shall retain the SRME in a safe position and shall not allow the SRME to slide past the
end of the slide-rails.
8.12 Telescoping or rod antennas
A te le s c o p in g o r ro d a n te n n a s h a ll be p ro v id e d w ith a m in im u m 6 ,0 mm d ia m e te r b u tto n or
b a ll o n th e end. An a n te n n a end p ie c e and th e s e c tio n s o f a te le s c o p in g a n te n n a s h a ll be
s e c u r e d in s u c h a m a n n e r a s t o p r e v e n t r e m o v a l .
Compliance is checked by inspection and the test o f Clause T.11.
9 Thermal burn injury
9.1 General
T o re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f p a in fu l e ffe c ts a n d in ju r y d u e to th e r m a l b u r n s , accessible p a rts

s h a ll b e c la s s ifie d a n d w h e n n e c e s s a r y p r o v id e d w ith th e safeguards s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 9 .
NOTE Electric burns due to radio frequency (RF) energy sources are a special case in this document. They are
controlled by limiting accessibility above a specified frequency. These limits and conditions are defined in the notes
d and e defined in Table 4.

- 186 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
9.2 Thermal energy source classifications
9.2.1 TS1
TS1 is a c l a s s l t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w i t h t e m p e r a t u r e l e v e l s :
- not e x c e e d in g TS1 lim its u n d e r normal operating conditions; and
- not e x c e e d in g TS2 lim its u n d e r:
• abnormal operating conditions; or
• single fault conditions.
9.2.2 TS2
T S 2 is a c l a s s 2 t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w h e r e :
- t he te m p e ra tu re e x c e e d s th e T S 1 lim its ; a n d
- under normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions or single fault

conditions t h e t e m p e r a t u r e d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e T S 2 l i m i t s .
W h e r e t h e m a l f u n c t i o n o f t h e e q u i p m e n t is e v i d e n t , n o l i m i t s a p p l y .
9.2.3 TS3
TS3 is a c la s s 3 th e rm a l e n e rg y so u rce w h e re th e te m p e ra tu re exceeds th e TS2 lim its in

T a b le 3 8 u n d e r normal operating conditions or under abnormal operating conditions, or
under single fault conditions.
9.3 Touch temperature limits
9.3.1 Requirements
E x c e p t a s n o te d b e lo w , to u c h te m p e r a tu r e s o f accessible p a rts s h a ll c o m p ly w ith T a b le 38.
An accessible p a rt th a t, w h ile in c o n t a c t w i t h t h e b o d y , i s l i k e l y t o d r o p in t e m p e r a t u r e u p o n
to u c h can b e e v a lu a te d u n d e r th e lim its o f A n n e x A in IE C G u id e 1 1 7 :2 0 1 0 . A n a p p ro p ria te
and r e p r o d u c i b l e t e s t m e t h o d o l o g y is d e t e r m i n e d b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r w ith d u e r e g a r d to th e
t e s t m e t h o d in I E C G u i d e 1 1 7 .
9.3.2 Test method and compliance criteria
The temperature tests are run with the room ambient conditions as defined in B.1.5 and B.2.39
except that the mom ambient temperature shall be 25 0C ± 5 °C.
If the test is performed at a temperature between 20 °C and 25 °C , the results are adjusted to
reflect a value of 25 °C.
NOTE 1 For an explanation of why the test is done at 25 °C without adjusting results for higher ambient
temperatures, see IEC TR 62368-2.
The equipment shall be operated in a manner the manufacturer determines likely to result in
elevated thermal conditions of a c c e s s ib le surfaces and parts.
NOTE 2 This may not be the condition of maximum input current or wattage but the condition that delivers the
highest thermal level to the part in question.
Compliance is checked by measuring the steady state temperature of a c c e s s ib le surfaces.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 187 -
Table 38 - Touch temperature limits for accessible parts
Maximum tem perature (7max}
°C
A cce ssible parts b Glass,
P lastic
porcelain
Metal d and Wood
and vitre o us
rubber
m aterial
Devices worn on the body (in direct contact with the
43 to 48 43 to 48 43 to 48 43 to 48
skin) in normal use (> 8 h) e
Handles, knobs, grips, etc.， and surfaces either held
48 48 48 48
or touched in normal use (> 1 min and < 8 h) a
Handles, knobs, grips, etc., and surfaces held for

short periods of time or touched occasionally (> 10 s 51 56 60 60
TS1
and < 1 min)
Handle, knobs, grips etc., and surfaces touched
occasionally for very short periods (> 1 s and 60 71 77 107
< 10 s) f
Surfaces that need not be touched to operate the

70 85 94 140
equipment (< 1 s)
Handles, knobs, grips, etc., and surfaces held in

58 58 58 58
normal use (> 1 min) a
Handles, knobs, grips, etc., and surfaces held for

short periods of time or touched occasionally (> 10 s 61 66 70 70
and < 1 min)
TS2
Handle, knobs, grips etc.f and surfaces touched
occasionally for very short periods (> 1 s and 70 81 87 117
< 10 s ) f
Surfaces that need not be touched to operate the
80 (100) c 95 (100) c 104 150
equipment (< 1 s)
TS3 Higher than the TS2 limits
Examples of these surfaces include a telephone handset, a mobile phone or another handheld device, and
the palm rest surface of a notebook computer. Limits for > 1 s and < 10 s may be used for local hotspots
where touching can be easily avoided by changing the way the device is held.
b Where necessary, time of contact shall be determined by the manufacturer and shall be consistent with the
intended use in accordance with the equipment instructions.
c The values in parentheses may be used for the following areas and surfaces:
一 an area on the surface of the equipment that has no dimension exceeding 50 mm, and that is not likely to
be touched in normal use; or
一 heatsinks and metallic parts directly covering heatsinks, except those on surfaces incorporating switches
or controls handled during normal use.
For these areas and parts, an instructional safeguard in accordance with Clause F.5 shall be provided on or
near the hot part.
Under abnormal operating conditions and single fault conditions, for other areas and surfaces of the
equipment, an equipment basic safeguard is required.
For metal parts that are covered with plastic or rubber material of at least 0,3 mm thick, the covering is
considered suitable for use as a safeguard and the temperature limit of plastic and rubber is allowed.
Examples include portable lightweight devices such as watches, headsets, personal music players and sports
monitoring equipment. For larger devices or devices in direct contact with vital areas of the face (e.g. the
airways), lower limits may apply. For contact durations less than 8 hours based on its intended normal use,
apply limits between 48 °C/1 min and 43 °C/8 h. Calculations shall be rounded down to the nearest whole
number. An example is a headset with a limited battery charge of 2 h.
f Examples include surfaces that need to be touched for disconnection.
9.4 Safeguards against thermal energy sources
E x c e p t a s g iv e n b e lo w , safeguard r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p a r t s accessible to ordinary persons,

- 188 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
F o r p ro te c tio n o f a n ordinary person a g a i n s t T S 2 , an instructional safeguard in a c c o r d a n c e

w ith 9 .5 .2 m a y b e u s e d a s t h e basic safeguard.
Accessible p a rts (in te rn a l and e x te rn a l) c la s s ifie d as TS2 or TS 3 th a t re q u ire h e a t fo r th e

in te n d e d fu n c tio n (fo r e x a m p le , a d o c u m e n t la m in a to r , th e r m a l p rin t h e a d , fu s e r h e a te r, e tc .)
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith a ll o f th e f o llo w in g :
- t h e p a r t d o e s n o t n e e d to b e t o u c h e d to o p e r a te th e e q u ip m e n t ( fo r e x a m p le , a p a rt a ls o
s e r v in g a h a n d le , k n o b , o r g rip fu n c tio n ) ;
- it is u n lik e ly th a t an ordinary person w ill to u c h th e p a rt in te n tio n a lly under normal

operating conditions;
- u n i n t e n t i o n a l c o n t a c t w i t h t h e p a r t is u n l i k e l y b y a n ordinary person d u rin g m a in te n a n c e
n o t in v o lv in g th e p a rt;
- t he p a r t is p r o v i d e d w ith an instructional safeguard on o r n e a r th e p a r t in a c c o r d a n c e

w ith 9 .5 .2 ; a n d
- it is u n l i k e l y t h a t t h e p a r t w i l l b e t o u c h e d b y c h i l d r e n .
skilled person,
F o r p ro te c tio n o f a p a rts a n d s u r fa c e s c la s s e d T S 3 s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w ith a n
equipment safeguard o r p r o v i d e d w ith an instructional safeguard so th a t u n in te n tio n a l
c o n t a c t w i t h s u c h p a r t s a n d s u r f a c e s d u r i n g s e r v i c e o p e r a t i o n s is u n l i k e l y t o c a u s e t h e skilled
person to r e c o il in to o t h e r c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s ( s e e F ig u r e 1 9 ).
9.5 Requirements for safeguards
9.5.1 Equipment safeguard
An equipment safeguard s h a l l l i m i t t h e t r a n s f e r o f t h e r m a l e n e r g y ( s o u r c e t e m p e r a t u r e )
u n d e r normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions a n d single fault
conditions o r l i m i t a c c e s s i b i l i t y t o a t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e t o a t o u c h t e m p e r a t u r e a s
c l a s s i f i e d in T a b l e 3 8 .
T e m p e r a t u r e lim its a re a p p lie d o n ly fo r th o s e abnormal operating conditions orsingle fault

conditions w h e r e t h e e q u ip m e n t c o n tin u e s to o p e r a te a s in te n d e d a n d , h e n c e ，t h e abnormal
operating condition or single fault condition is n o t o b v io u s . If a m a lfu n c tio n is e v id e n t,
th e n th e lim its a re n o t a p p lic a b le .
An instructional safeguard s h a ll be p ro v id e d in a cco rd a n ce w ith C la u s e F.5, e x c e p t th a t

e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
e le m e n t 1a , IEC 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 4 1 (2 0 0 2 -1 0 )
- e l e m e n t 2: “ C A U T IO N ” a n d “ H o t s u rfa c e ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t
- e l e m e n t 4: “ D o n o t to u c h ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
9.6 Requirements for wireless power transmitters
9.6.1 General
Wireless power transmitters fo r near fie ld w ire le s s power tra n s fe r can w a rm up fo re ig n

m e ta llic o b je c ts th a t m a y b e p la c e d c lo s e to o r o n s u c h a tr a n s m it te r . T o a v o id a b u m d u e to
h ig h te m p e ra tu re s o f th e fo re ig n m e ta llic o b je c ts , th e tra n s m itte r is te s te d as s p e c ifie d in
9 .6 .3 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 —189 —
9.6.2 Specification of the foreign objects
T h e fo llo w in g fo re ig n o b je c ts a re u s e d :
- a s te e l d is c , s e e F ig u re 4 7 ;
- a n a lu m in iu m rin g , s e e F ig u re 4 8 ; a n d
- a n a lu m in iu m fo il, s e e F ig u r e 4 9 .
SECTION A - A
DETAIL S
No Name Remarks
1 Disc Steel 1,1011/ RFe 160
2 Thermocouple Any suitable type
3 Heatsink compound Heat transport
4 Silicon tubing Strain relief
Figure 47 - Steel disc

-1 9 0 - IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018
Gh 阶 ⑼ r©
No Name Remarks
1 Ring Aluminium (for example AISilM gIM n 100 Hv)
4 Silicon tubing Strain relief
Figure 48 - Aluminium ring

IEC 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018 191
5 〇
DETAIL S
A
IEC
No Name Remarks
1 Foil Al 99,5 %
4 Silicon tubing Strain relief (or use of glue layer on the foil)
Figure 49 - Aluminium foil
The w ire le s s p o w e r tra n s m itte r is placed in a room under the temperature conditions as
specified in 9.3.2.
The test is performed once with each of the foreign objects specified in 9.6.2 placed in direct
contact with the transmitter. Each test has four cycles:
- one without a receiver present and with the foreign object in direct contact with the
transmitter; and
- one with a receiver placed in direct contact with the foreign object; and
- one with a receiver placed at a distance of 2 mm from the foreign object; and
- one with a receiver placed at a distance of 5 mm from the foreign object.
The transmitter is operated to transmit its maximum power.

- 192 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
NOTE The test is not meant to test the temperature of the receiver, therefore any compatible receiver that can
draw the maximum power from the w ire le ss pow er tra n s m itte r can be used and the temperature of the receiver
does not have to be monitored.
During each cycle, the foreign object can be moved on the transmitter in order to find the
location where the highest temperature occurs.
During the tests, the temperature of the foreign object shall not exceed 70 °C.
10 Radiation
10.1 General
T o r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f p a in f u l e f f e c t s a n d in ju r y d u e to o p t ic a l e n e r g y ( v is ib le , IR , U V ) , X -
ra y , a n d a c o u s tic e n e rg y , e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w ith th e safeguards s p e c ifie d in t h i s
c la u s e .
10.2 Radiation energy source classifications
10.2.1 General classification
R a d i a t i o n e n e r g y s o u r c e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s a r e g i v e n in T a b l e 3 9 .
Table 39 - Radiation energy source classifications
Source RS1 RS2 RS3
optical fibre communication

According to IEC 60825-2
systems (OFCS)
free space optical

Lasers communication systems for According to IEC 60825-12
transmission of information
Other lasers, except those
According to IEC 60825-1 a
used in image projectors
Lamps and lamp systems (including LEDs),
According to IEC 62471:2006 b
except those used in image projectors
According to IEC 60825-1 a or
Image Image projectors with lasers
IEC 62471-5:2015 if applicable
projectors
(beamers) Image projectors with lamps
According to IEC 62471-5:2015
or LEDs
< 36 pA/kg < 1 8 5 pA/kg

X-Ray > RS2
at 50 mm c at 100 mm d
PMP Acoustic sound output < 85 dB(A) < 100 dB(A) > RS2
Maximum analogue output < 27 mV < 150 mV > RS2
sound
pressure e digital output < - 2 5 dBFS < -1 0 dBFS > RS2
100 % CSD =
sound output ^ 100 dB(A) > RS2
PMP Acoustic <80dB(A)/40h
Maximum dose
analogue output < 15 mV < 150 mV > RS2
exposure e
digital output < - 3 0 dBFS < - 1 0 dBFS > RS2

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -193-
a Additional considerations for laser products designed to function as conventional lamps (such as laser image
projector), see Note 2 of 10.3.
NOTE 1 For example, in IEC 60825-1:2014， Class 1, Class 1C， Class 1M, Class 2 ， Class 2M, Class 3R,
Class 3B and Class 4 are defined. These are not classifications of radiation energy source itself.
To classify the risk group, abnormal operating conditions and single fault conditions shall be taken into
accoimt.
In general, the radiation of the following low power application of a lamp is classified as Exempt Group. Also,
classification according to IEC 62471 (all parts) is not required for:
- indicating lights;
一 infra-red devices such as used in home entertainment devices;
- infra-red devices for data transmission such as used between computers and computer peripherals;
一 optocouplers;
一 UV radiation from general purpose incandescent and fluorescent lamps, with ordinary glass envelopes;
and
一 other similar low power devices.
NOTE 2 If optical radiation is broadband visible and IR-A radiation and the luminance of the source does
not exceed 104 cd/m2f it is expected that the radiation does not exceed the exposure limits given in 4.3 of
IEC 62471:2006 (see 4.1 of IEC 62471:2006).
For UV-C limits (wavelengths between 180 nm and 200 nm)t the value of IEC 62471 for 200 nm is used.
36 pA/kg equals 5 (.iSv/h or 0,5 mR/h. This value is consistent with International Commission on Radiation
Protection (ICRP) Publication 60.
d 185 pA/kg equals 25 jiSv/h or 2,5 mR/h.

Measurement is made with any part of the cabinet, case, and chassis removed per maintenance instructions
(CRT exposed) at the maximum test voltage applicable and under the conditions as specified below.
NOTE 3 In the member countries of CENELEC, the amount of ionizing radiation is regulated by European
Council Directive 96/29/Euratom of 13 May 1996. This Directive requires that at any point 100 mm from the
surface of the equipment, the dose-rate shall not exceed 1 pSv/h (0,1 mR/h) taking account of the
background level. For complete requirements refer to the above Directive.
NOTE 4 In the USA, the measuring conditions in the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations Title 21 Part 1020
are as given below (for complete requirements, refer to the above regulations).
Measurements are made with the EUT connected to the following source of supply:
- 1 3 0 V if the rated voltage is between 1 10V and 120 V; or
一 110 % of the rated voltage, if the rated voltage is not between 110 V and 120 V,
During the measurements:
- all user and service accessible controls are adjusted to combinations that produce maximum X-radiation
emissions; and
一 abnormal operating conditions of any component or circuit malfunction causing an increase of
X-radiation emissions are to be simulated.
NOTE 5 In Canada, the measuring conditions in the Consolidated Regulations of Canada, c.1370 are as
given below (for complete requirements refer to the above regulations).
Measurements are made with the EUT connected to the following source of supply:
一 127 V if the rated voltage is between 11 0 V and 120 V; or
一 110 % of the rated voltage, if the rated voltage is not between 110 V and 120 V.
During the measurements all user and service accessible controls are adjusted to combinations that
produce maximum X-radiation emissions.
e Fault testing measurements are not required for listening devices and personal music players.
10.2.2 RS1
F o r X -ra d ia tio n so u rce s, RS1 is a c l a s s 1 ra d ia tio n e n e rg y s o u rc e th a t d o e s n o t e x c e e d RS1

lim its u n d e r:
- abnormal operating conditions th a t d o n o t le a d to a single fault condition; and

- 194 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
- single fault conditions.
F o r a c o u s tic ra d ia tio n s o u rc e s , R S 1 is a c l a s s 1 r a d i a t i o n e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t d o e s n o t e x c e e d
R S 1 lim its u n d e r:
- abnormal operating conditions.
10.2.3 RS2
R S 2 is a c l a s s 2 r a d i a t i o n e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t d o e s n o t e x c e e d R S 2 lim it s u n d e r :
- abnormal operating conditions; and
- single fault conditions, e x c e p t fo r a c o u s tic ra d ia tio n s o u rc e s , a n d
is n o t R S 1 •
10.2.4 RS3
R S 3 is a c l a s s 3 r a d i a t i o n e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t e x c e e d s R S 2 lim it s u n d e r :
- normal operating conditions; or
- abnormal operating conditions; or
- single fault conditions.
10.3 Safeguards against laser radiation
E q u i p m e n t c o n t a i n i n g l a s e r ( s ) s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s a s i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 3 9 .
W h e n a p p ly in g th e IE C 6 0 8 2 5 s e rie s , th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th is d o c u m e n t s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d ,
in p a r t i c u l a r t h o s e f o r :
- t he ro b u s tn e s s o f a safeguard (se e 4.4.3);

- o p e r a t i n g c o n d itio n s (s e e A n n e x B ); a n d
- safety interlocks (s e e A n n e x K ).
L a s e r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d fo r u s e b y a n ordinary person or an instructed person s h a ll n o t

be C la s s 3 B o r C la s s 4.
NOTE 1 National and regional legislation regarding occupational safety and health (OSH) and regarding the
general public, for example for consumer products, may contain additional or different requirements.
NOTE 2 For laser products designed to function as conventional lamps (such as laser image projector), see 4.4 of
IEC 60825-1:2014. For additional consideration for such equipment, see 10.4.
Compliance is checked by evaluation of available data sheets， by inspection and， if

necessary, by measurement.
NOTE 3 For guidance on measuring techniques, see the IEC 60825 series.
10.4 Safeguards against optical radiation from lamps and lamp systems (including
LED types)
10.4.1 General requirements
E q u ip m e n t e m ittin g o p tic a l ra d ia tio n s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts as in d ic a te d in

T a b le 39.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -195-
E le c tro n ic lig h t e ffe c t e q u ip m e n t does not have to c o m p ly w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts of 1 0 .4 .

H o w e ve r, IE C T R 6 2 4 7 1 -2 s h o u ld b e c o n s id e re d and p ro p e r in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s s h a ll b e
p ro v id e d .
F o r l a m p s u s e d in o t h e r e q u i p m e n t , t h e f o l l o w i n g a p p l i e s :
NOTE 1 National legislation regarding occupational safety and health (OSH) may contain additional or different
requirements.
R a d ia tio n n o t n e e d e d to b e accessible fo r th e c o r r e c t fu n c tio n in g o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll n o t

exceed th e le v e l s p e c ifie d in T a b l e 40. W hen th e accessible ra d ia tio n le v e l fo r th e co rre ct
f u n c t i o n i n g o f t h e e q u i p m e n t n e e d s t o e x c e e d t h e l e v e l s in T a b l e 40, th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e
p ro v id e d w ith a n instructional safeguard in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 10.4.3.
Table 40 - Allowable radiation level according

to IEC 62471 (all parts) for each hazard type
Hazard type Allowed radiation level

Ultraviolet hazard
Exempt Group
200 nm to 400 nm
Retinal blue light hazard
Exempt Group or Risk Group 1
300 nm to 700 nm
Retinal thermal hazard
Exempt Group or Risk Group 1
380 nm to 1400 nm
Cornea/lens infrared hazard

Exempt Group
780 nm to 3 000 nm
Retinal thermal hazard, weak visual stimulus
Exempt Group
780 nm to 1 400 nm
Lam ps and la m p s y s te m s in te n d e d fo r u s e by an ordinary person or an instructed person

s h a ll n o t e m it R is k G r o u p 3 e n e r g y .
T h e ris k g r o u p , b a s e d o n th e c la s s ific a tio n a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 2 4 7 1 s e rie s , s h a ll b e m a r k e d o n

th e e q u ip m e n t. If th e s iz e o r d e s ig n o f th e p ro d u ct m a ke s m a rk in g im p ra c tic a l, th e m a rk in g
s h a ll be in c lu d e d in t h e p a c k a g in g and in c lu d e d in t h e u s e r in s tru c tio n s . If th e accessible
r a d i a t i o n l e v e l d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e l e v e l s p e c i f i e d in T a b l e 4 0 , m a r k i n g is n o t r e q u i r e d .
If a safety interlock is u s e d f o r r e d u c i n g t h e ra d ia tio n le v e l, it s h a l l re d u c e th e r a d ia tio n to

t h e a l l o w a b l e r a d i a t i o n l e v e l s s p e c i f i e d in T a b l e 4 0 .
W h e n e q u i p m e n t e m i t s o p t i c a l r a d i a t i o n in m o r e t h a n o n e h a z a r d t y p e , s e e a l s o 1 0 . 4 . 3 .
The fo llo w in g in fo rm a tio n s h o u ld be p ro v id e d in th e user m anual fo r s a fe o p e ra tio n and

in s ta lla tio n . T h is in fo rm a tio n s h a ll a ls o be p ro v id e d fo r s a fe o p e ra tio n by a skilled person
w h o m a y b e e x p o s e d to R is k G r o u p 3 e n e r g y le v e ls .
- Adequate in s tru c tio n s fo r p ro p e r a s s e m b ly , in s ta lla tio n , m a in te n a n c e and s a fe use,

in c lu d in g c le a r w a r n in g s c o n c e rn in g p r e c a u tio n s to a v o id p o s s ib le e x p o s u r e to h a z a r d o u s
o p tic a l ra d ia tio n ; a n d
- Advice on s a fe o p e ra tin g p ro ce d u re s and w a rn in g s c o n c e rn in g reasonably foreseeable

misuse, m a lfu n c tio n s and h a za rd o u s fa ilu re m odes. W h e re s e rv ic in g and m a in te n a n c e
p ro ce d u re s a re d e ta ile d , th e y s h o u ld , w h e r e v e r p o s s ib le , in c lu d e e x p lic it in s tru c tio n s on
s a fe p ro c e d u re s to b e fo llo w e d ; a n d

- 196 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- The m a rk in g on th e e q u ip m e n t s h o u ld be re p ro d u c e d in th e user m a n u a l. A y e llo w

b a c k g r o u n d is n o t r e q u i r e d in t h e u s e r m a n u a l .
NOTE 2 See IEC TR 62471-2 for more information including the terms and definitions used in this subclause.
10.4.2 Requirements for enclosures
The enclosure p ro te c tin g a g a in s t o p tic a l ra d ia tio n not needed to be accessible fo r th e

c o rre c t fu n c tio n in g o f th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th a t e x c e e d s th e le v e l s p e c ifie d in T a b l e 40 s h a ll
c o m p ly w ith 4.4.3 a n d is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e a reinforced safeguard.
M a te ria ls th a t c o m p ris e a safeguard and a re exposed to UV ra d ia tio n fro m a la m p in t h e

e q u ip m e n t s h a ll be s u ffic ie n tly re s is ta n t to d e g ra d a tio n to th e e x te n t th a t th e safeguard
fu n c tio n re m a in s e ffe c tiv e fo r th e e q u ip m e n t life tim e . M e ta l, g la s s a n d c e ra m ic m a te ria ls a re
c o n s id e re d to b e re s is ta n t to d e g ra d a tio n .
For im a g e p ro je c to rs , th e instructional safeguard s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts of

6 .5 .4 a n d 6 .5 .5 o f IE C 6 2 4 7 1 - 5 :2 0 1 5 fo r R is k G r o u p 2 a n d R is k G r o u p 3, r e s p e c tiv e ly .
F o r im a g e p ro je c to r s w ith la m p s , th e c a u tio n a r y s ta te m e n t d e fin e d in I E C 6 2 4 7 1 - 5 : 2 0 1 5 s h a l l

be used as an instructional safeguard.
For a ll o th e r e q u ip m e n t w ith la m p s , an instructional safeguard in a cco rd a n ce w ith

C la u s e F.5 s h a ll b e u s e d . T h e e le m e n ts o f t h e instructional safeguard s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
e le m e n t 1a th e UV ra d ia tio n sym bol IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -6 0 4 0 :2 0 1 0 -0 8 fo r

u ltra v io le t h a z a rd ; o r
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 4 1 :2 0 1 0 - 0 8 fo r re tin a l
b lu e lig h t h a z a rd a n d R e tin a l th e r m a l h a z a rd ; o r
th e IR ra d ia tio n sym bol ________, IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 1 5 1 :2 0 1 2 - 0 2 fo r

c o rn e a /le n s in fra re d h a za rd and re tin a l th e rm a l h a za rd , weak v is u a l
s tim u lu s
e le m e n t 2: A c c o r d in g to T a b le 41 o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
e le m e n t 3 a n d 4: A c c o rd in g to T a b le 4 2 o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
T h e e le m e n ts 1a a n d 2 s h a ll b e b la c k o n a y e llo w b a c k g r o u n d .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 197 -
Table 41 - Hazard-related risk group marking of equipment
Hazard Exempt Group Risk Group 1 Risk Group 2 Risk Group 3

Ultraviolet hazard Not required NOTICE CAUTION WARNING
200 nm to 400 nm
UV emitted from this UV emitted from this UV emitted from this
product product. product.
Retinal blue light Not required Not required CAUTION WARNING

hazard
Possibly hazardous Possibly hazardous
300 nm to 700 nm optical radiation emitted optical radiation emitted
from this product from this product
Retinal thermal Not required Not required CAUTION WARNING
hazard
Possibly hazardous Possibly hazardous
380 nm to 1400 nm optical radiation emitted optical radiation emitted
from this product from this product
Cornea/lens infrared Not required NOTICE CAUTION WARNING
hazard
IR emitted from this IR emitted from this IR emitted from this
780 nm to 3 000 nm product product product.
Retinal thermal Not required CAUTION CAUTION WARNING
hazard, weak visual IR emitted from this IR emitted from this IR emitted from this
stimulus product product. product.
780 nm to 1 400 nm
Table 42 - Explanation of marking information and guidance on control measures
Hazard Exempt Group Risk Group 1 Risk Group 2 Risk Group 3

Ultraviolet hazard Not required Minimize exposure to Eye or skin irritation Avoid eye and skin
eyes or skin. Use may result from exposure to
200 nm to 400 nm appropriate shielding. exposure. Use unshielded product.
appropriate shielding.
Retinal blue light Not required Not required Do not stare at Do not look at
hazard operating lamp. May operating lamp. Eye
be harmful to the injury may result.
300 nm to 700 nm eyes.
Retinal thermal Not required Not required Do not stare at Do not look at
hazard operating lamp. May operating lamp. Eye
be harmful to the injury may result.
380 nm to 1400 nm eyes.
Cornea/lens infrared Not required Use appropriate Avoid eye Avoid eye exposure.
hazard shielding or eye exposure.Use Use appropriate
protection. appropriate shielding shielding or eye
780 nm to 3 000 nm or eye protection. protection.
Retinal thermal Not required Do not stare at Do not stare at Do not look at
hazard, weak visual operating lamp. operating lamp. operating lamp.
stimulus
780 nm to 1 400 nm
W hen e q u ip m e n t e m its o p tic a l ra d ia tio n in m o re th a n one h a za rd s p e c tra l re g io n , th e

e q u ip m e n t s h a ll be c la s s ifie d fo r th e m ost re s tric tiv e case. If t h e o p tic a l ra d ia tio n in any
s p e c tra l re g io n re q u ire s a m a rk in g p e r T a b le 41 o r T a b le 4 2 , a ll re le v a n t w a rn in g s s h a ll be
i n c lu d e d . F o r e x a m p l e , f o r a la m p a s s ig n e d to R is k G r o u p 3 o n t h e b a s is o f a r e t in a l IR h a z a r d
and e m ittin g U V to th e le v e l o f R is k G r o u p 2, th e le g e n d o f th e m a rk in g s h a ll in d ic a te R is k
G r o u p 3, w ith th e a p p r o p r ia te ‘W a r n in g ’ te x t; a n d s h o w th e ‘C a u t io n ’ te x t f o r R is k G r o u p 2 fo r
t h e U V , b u t s h a l l n o t m e n t i o n R i s k G r o u p 2 e x p l i c i t l y , a s i l l u s t r a t e d in F i g u r e 5 0 .

—198 — 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
RISK GROUP 3
^ W A R N I N G IR e m it t e d f r o m th is p r o d u c t . D o n o t lo o k a t t h e o p e r a t in g la m p .
C A U T I O N U V e m itte d fr o m th is p ro d u c t. E y e o r s k in irrita tio n m a y
A , r esul t fr o m e x p o s u re . U s e a p p ro p ria te s h ie ld in g .
Figure 50 - Example of a warning label for a lamp

with multiple hazard spectral regions
Compliance is checked by evaluation of available data sheets, by inspection and， if

necessary, by measurement.
NOTE For guidance on measuring techniques, see the relevant part of the IEC 62471 series.
Compliance against material degradation from UV radiation is checked by the relevant tests in
Annex C.
10.5 Safeguards against X-radiation
10.5.1 Requirements
E q u ip m e n t X -ra d ia tio n th a t e x its th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll not exceed RS1 under normal

operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions, and single fault conditions.
An equipment safeguard is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n R S 2 o r R S 3 a n d a ll p e r s o n s .
D o o rs a n d c o v e rs a c tin g a s a safeguard th a t, w h e n o p e n , w o u ld a llo w a c c e s s to RS2 or RS3

fo r a skilled person s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith an instructional safeguard in a c c o r d a n c e w ith
C la u s e F .5 .
Compliance is checked by inspection and, where necessary, by the test of 10.5.3.
10.5.3 Test method
Equipment that is likely to produce ionizing radiation is checked by measuring the amount of
radiation. Account is taken of the background level.
The amount of radiation is determined by means of a radiation monitor of the ionizing

chamber type with an effective area of 1 〇 d 〇 mm2 or by measuring equipment o f other types
giving equivalent results.
Measurements are made with the BUT operating at the most unfavourable supply voltage
(see B.2.3) and with controls for an o rd in a ry p e rs o n and an in s tru c te d p e rso n , and controls
for a s k ille d p e rs o n that are not locked in a reliable manner, adjusted so as to give maximum
radiation whilst maintaining the equipment operative for normal use.
NOTE 1 Soldered joints and fixing by application of paint, epoxy, or similar materials are considered reliable
locking means.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -199-
Moreover, the measurement shall be made under any a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n and
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s that can cause an increase of the high-voltage, provided an
intelligible picture is maintained for 5 min, at the end o f which the measurement is made and
averaged over 5 min.
During the measurements, an intelligible picture is to be maintained.
A picture is considered to be intelligible if the following conditions are met:
- a scanning amplitude of at least 70 % of the usable screen for both width and height;
- a minimum luminance of 50 cd/m2 with locked blank raster provided by a test generator;
- not more than 12 flashovers in a 1 h period; and
- a horizontal resolution corresponding to at least 1，5 MHz in the centre with a similar
vertical degradation.
NOTE 2 In the USA and Canada, an intelligible picture is in synchronization while covering 60 % of the viewable
scree 门 area.
10.6 Safeguards against acoustic energy sources
10.6.1 General
Safeguard re q u ire m e n ts fo r p ro te c tio n a g a in s t lo n g -te rm e xp o su re to e x c e s s iv e sound

p re ssu re le v e ls fro m p e rs o n a l m u s ic p la y e rs c lo s e ly c o u p le d to th e e a r a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
R e q u ire m e n ts fo r e a rp h o n e s and headphones in te n d e d fo r u s e w ith p e rso n a l m u s ic p la y e rs
a re a ls o c o v e r e d
A p e rso n a l m u s ic p la y e r (P M P ) is a p o rta b le e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d fo r use by an ordinary

person, th a t:
- is d e s i g n e d t o a l l o w t h e u s e r t o l i s t e n t o a u d i o o r a u d i o v i s u a l c o n t e n t / m a t e r i a l ; a n d
- uses a lis te n in g d e v ic e , s u c h as headphones o r e a rp h o n e s th a t ca n be w o rn in o r o n o r

a ro u n d th e e a rs ; a n d
- h a s a p la y e r th a t c a n be b o d y w o rn (o f a s iz e s u ita b le to b e c a rrie d in a c l o t h i n g p o c k e t)
a n d i s i n t e n d e d f o r t h e u s e r t o w a l k a r o u n d w i t h w h i l e in c o n t i n u o u s u s e ( f o r e x a m p l e , o n a
s t r e e t , in a s u b w a y , a t a n a i r p o r t , e t c . ) .
EXAMPLES Portable CD players, MP3 audio players, mobile phones with MP3 type features, PDAs or similar
equipment.
P e r s o n a l m u s ic p la y e r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f e ith e r 1 0 .6 .2 o r 1 0 .6 .3 .
NOTE 1 Protection against acoustic energy sources from telecom applications is referenced to ITU-T P.360.
NOTE 2 It is the intention of the Committee to allow the alternative methods for now, but to only use the dose
measurement method as given in 10.6.3 in future. Therefore, manufacturers are encouraged to implement 10.6.3
as soo 门 as possible.
L is te n in g d e v ic e s s o ld s e p a r a t e ly s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 1 0 .6 .6 .
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s a re v a lid fo r m u s ic o r v id e o m o d e o n ly .
F o r e q u ip m e n t th a t is c l e a r l y d e s ig n e d or in te n d e d p rim a rily fo r u s e b y c h ild re n , a d d itio n a l

lim its o f th e r e le v a n t to y s ta n d a r d s m a y a p p ly .
NOTE 3 In Europe, the relevant requirements are given in EN 71-1:2011, 4.20 and the related tests methods and
measurement distances apply.
T h e r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
- professional equipment;

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- h e a r i n g a id e q u ip m e n t a n d o t h e r d e v ic e s f o r a s s is t iv e lis t e n in g ; a n d
- t h e fo llo w in g ty p e o f a n a lo g u e p e rs o n a l m u s ic p la y e rs :
• lo n g d is ta n c e ra d io re c e iv e r (fo r e x a m p le , a m u ltib a n d ra d io re c e iv e r o r w o rld band

ra d io re c e iv e r, a n A M ra d io re c e iv e r), a n d
• c a s s e tte p la y e r/re c o rd e r; a n d
NOTE 2 This exemption has been allowed because this technology is falling out of use and it is expected that
within a few years it will no longer exist. This exemption will not be extended to other technologies.
- a p la y e r w h ile c o n n e c te d to an e x te rn a l a m p lifie r th a t does n o t a llo w th e u s e r to w a lk

a r o u n d w h i l e in u s e .
10.6.2 Classification
10.6.2.1 RS1 limits
RS1 is a c l a s s 1 a c o u s t i c e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e f o l l o w i n g :
- f or e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d as a package (p la y e r w ith its lis te n in g d e v ic e ), and w ith a

p ro p rie ta ry c o n n e c to r b e tw e e n th e p la y e r and its lis te n in g d e v ic e , or w h e re th e
c o m b in a tio n o f p la y e r a n d lis te n in g d e v ic e is known by o th e r m e a n s such as s e ttin g or
a u to m a tic d e te c tio n , th e T a c o u s tic o u tp u t s h a ll b e lo w e r o r e q u a l to th e r e le v a n t R S 1
sound o u tp u t v a lu e of T a b le 3 9 when p la y in g th e fix e d “p ro g ra m m e s im u la tio n n o is e ”
d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .
- f or e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d w ith a s ta n d a r d iz e d c o n n e c to r (fo r e x a m p le , a 3 ,5 m m p h o n e ja c k )
th a t a llo w s c o n n e c tio n to a lis te n in g d e v ic e fo r g e n e ra l u s e , th e u n w e ig h te d RMS o u tp u t
v o lta g e s h a ll be lo w e r o r e q u a l to th e re le v a n t RS1 a n a lo g u e o u tp u t v a lu e o f T a b le 39
w h e n p l a y i n g t h e f i x e d “ p r o g r a m m e s i m u l a t i o n n o i s e ” d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .
- f or e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d w ith a d ig ita l o u tp u t, th e o u tp u t s ig n a l s h a ll b e lo w e r o r e q u a l to
th e re le v a n t RS1 d ig ita l o u tp u t v a lu e of T a b le 3 9 when p la y in g th e fix e d “p ro g ra m m e
s i m u l a t i o n n o i s e ” d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .
NOTE 1 Unless otherwise specified, wherever the term acoustic output is used in 10.6.2, LAeq r is the A-weighted
equivalent sound pressure level over a 30 s period.
If t h e p la y e r is a b l e to a n a ly s e a song, and w h e re th e a ve ra g e sound p re ssu re (lo n g te rm

L Aeq r ) m e a s u r e d o v e r th e d u ra tio n o f th e song is l o w e r t h a n th e a ve ra g e p ro d u c e d b y th e
p ro g ra m m e s im u la tio n n o is e , th e o u tp u t is c o n s i d e r e d RS1 as lo n g as th e a ve ra g e sound
p r e s s u r e o f t h e s o n g d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e b a s i c l i m i t o f 8 5 d B ( A ) . In t h i s c a s e , T becom es th e
d u ra tio n o f th e s o n g .
NOTE 2 Classical music typically has an average sound pressure (long term LAeq T) which is much lower than the
average programme simulation noise.
For example, if the player is set with the programme simulation noise to 85 dB(A), but the average sound pressure
of the song is only 65 dB(A), the output is considered to be RS1 as long as the average sound level of the song is
not above the basic limit of 85 dB(A).
10.6.2.2 RS2 limits
R S 2 is a c l a s s 2 a c o u s t i c e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e f o l l o w i n g :
- f or e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d as a package (p la y e r w ith its lis te n in g d e v ic e ), and w ith a

p ro p rie ta ry c o n n e c to r b e tw e e n th e p la y e r and its lis te n in g d e v ic e , or w h e re th e
c o m b in a tio n o f p la y e r a n d lis te n in g d e v ic e is known by o th e r m e a n s such as s e ttin g or
a u to m a tic d e te c tio n , th e LAeq T a c o u s t i c o u tp u t s h a ll b e lo w e r o r e q u a l to th e r e le v a n t R S 2
sound o u tp u t v a lu e of T a b le 3 9 when p la y in g th e fix e d “p ro g ra m m e s im u la tio n n o is e ”
d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .
一 fo r e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d w ith a s ta n d a r d iz e d c o n n e c to r (fo r e x a m p le , a 3 ,5 m m p h o n e ja c k )
th a t a llo w s c o n n e c tio n to a lis te n in g d e v ic e fo r g e n e ra l u s e , th e u n w e ig h te d RMS o u tp u t
v o lta g e s h a ll be lo w e r o r e q u a l to th e re le v a n t RS2 a n a lo g u e o u tp u t v a lu e o f T a b le 39
w h e n p l a y i n g t h e f i x e d “ p r o g r a m m e s i m u l a t i o n n o i s e ” d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- f or e q u ip m e n t p r o v id e d w ith a d ig ita l o u t p u t , th e o u t p u t s ig n a l s h a ll b e lo w e r o r e q u a l to
th e re le v a n t RS2 d ig ita l o u tp u t v a lu e of T a b le 3 9 when p la y in g th e fix e d "p ro g ra m m e
s i m u l a t i o n n o i s e ” d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .
10.6.2.3 RS3 limits
R S 3 is a c l a s s 3 a c o u s t i c e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t e x c e e d s R S 2 l i m i t s .
10.6.3 Requirements for dose-based systems
P e rs o n a l m u s ic p la y e rs s h a ll g iv e th e w a r n in g s a s p ro v id e d b e lo w w h e n te s te d a c c o rd in g to
EN 5 0 3 3 2 -3 .
T h e m a n u fa c tu r e r m a y o ffe r o p tio n a l s e ttin g s to a llo w th e u s e rs to m o d ify w h e n a n d h o w th e y

w is h to re c e iv e th e n o tific a tio n s and w a rn in g s to p ro m o te a b e tte r u s e r e x p e rie n c e w ith o u t
d e fe a tin g th e safeguards. T h is a llo w s th e u s e rs to b e in fo rm e d in a m e t h o d t h a t b e s t m e e t s
th e ir p h y s ic a l c a p a b ilitie s and d e v ic e usage needs. If s u c h o p tio n a l s e ttin g s a re o ffe re d , a n
a d m in is tra to r (fo r e x a m p le , p a re n ta l re s tric tio n s , b u s in e s s /e d u c a tio n a l a d m in is tra to rs , e tc .)
s h a ll b e a b le to lo c k a n y o p tio n a l s e ttin g s in to a s p e c if ic c o n fig u r a tio n .
T h e p e r s o n a l m u s ic p la y e r s h a ll b e s u p p lie d w ith e a s y to u n d e r s ta n d e x p la n a tio n o f th e d o s e

m a n a g e m e n t s y s te m and how to u s e it. T h e u s e r s h o u ld be m ade a w a re th a t o th e r s o u rc e s
m ay s ig n ific a n tly c o n trib u te to th e sound exposure (fo r e x a m p le w o rk, tra n s p o rta tio n ,
c o n c e rts , c lu b s , c in e m a , c a r ra c e s , e tc .).
10.6.3.2 Dose-based warning and automatic decrease
W h e n a d o s e o f 1 0 0 % C S D is r e a c h e d ( R S 2 ) , a n d a t l e a s t a t e v e r y 1 0 0 % f u r t h e r i n c r e a s e o f
C S D , t h e d e v i c e s h a l l w a r n t h e u s e r a n d r e q u i r e a n a c k n o w l e d g e m e n t . In c a s e t h e u s e r d o e s
n o t a c k n o w le d g e , th e o u tp u t le v e l s h a ll a u to m a tic a lly d e c r e a s e to R S 1 .
NOTE 100 % CSD is based on 80 dB(A) for 40 h.
T h e w a r n in g s h a ll a t le a s t c le a r ly in d ic a te th a t lis te n in g a b o v e 1 0 0 % C S D le a d s to th e ris k o f
h e a rin g d a m a g e o r lo s s .
10.6.3.3 Exposure-based warning and requirements
The p u rp o se o f th e d o s e -b a s e d o n l y r e q u i r e m e n t is t o in fo rm and e d u c a te u se rs a b o u t s a fe
lis te n in g p ra c tic e .
In a d d i t i o n to d o s e - b a s e d r e q u i r e m e n t s , a s y s t e m s h a ll t h e r e f o r e e it h e r :
- L i mi t t h e 3 0 s i n t e g r a t e d e x p o s u r e le v e l ( M E L 3 0 ) to t h e r e l e v a n t R S 2 l i m i t o f T a b l e 3 9 . T h e
lim ite r s e ttlin g tim e s h a ll b e 2 0 s o r fa s te r . T h e m e a s u r e m e n t o f s u c h lim itin g fu n c tio n a lity
is , a fte r a llo w in g th e 20 s s e ttlin g tim e of th e PMP lim ite r, c o n d u c te d a c c o rd in g to
E N 5 0 3 3 2 -1 o r E N 5 0 3 3 2 -2 a s a p p lic a b le .
- Wa r n th e u s e r in c a s e momentary exposure level (MEL) e q u a ls o r e x c e e d s 100 d B (A ).

The w a rn in g m ay be g iv e n v is u a lly or a u d ib ly . If th e w a rn in g is g iv e n v is u a lly , it s h a l l
re m a in v is ib le fo r at le a s t 5 s. If t h e w a rn in g is g iv e n a u d ib ly , it s h a ll in te rru p t th e
p r o g r a m m e c l e a r l y a n d u n m i s t a k i n g l y f o r a t le a s t 1 s.
10.6.4 Measurement methods
A ll v o lu m e c o n t r o ls s h a ll b e t u r n e d to m a x im u m d u rin g te s ts .
M e a s u r e m e n t s s h a l l b e m a d e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 o r E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 2 a s a p p l i c a b l e .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
10.6.5 Protection of persons
E x c e p t a s g iv e n b e l o w ，p r o t e c t i o n re q u ire m e n ts fo r p a rts accessible to ordinary persons，

NOTE 1 Volume control is not considered a safeguard.
An equipment safeguard s h a ll p r e v e n t e x p o s u r e of an ordinary person to a n RS2 so u rce

u n le s s a ll o f t h e f o l l o w i n g a r e m e t:
- an instructional safeguard is p r o v i d e d a s g i v e n b e l o w ; a n d
- t he instructional safeguard i s a c k n o w l e d g e d b y t h e u s e r . T h e o u t p u t l e v e l s h a l l n o t b e
h i g h e r t h a n RS1 u n t i l t h e a c k n o w l e d g m e n t i s m a d e . T h e a c k n o w l e d g e m e n t d o e s n o t n e e d
to b e re p e a te d m o re th a n o n c e e v e r y 2 0 h o f c u m u la tiv e lis te n in g tim e .
NOTE 2 The 20 h listening time is the accumulative listening time, independent of how often and how long
the personal music player has been switched off.
The o u tp u t le v e l s h a ll a u to m a tic a lly re tu rn to an o u tp u t le v e l n o t e x c e e d in g RS1 when th e

p o w e r is s w i t c h e d o ff.
A skilled person s h a ll n o t u n in t e n t io n a lly b e e x p o s e d to R S 3 .
W hen re q u ire d , an instructional safeguard in a cco rd a n ce w ith C la u s e F.5 s h a ll be used,

e x c e p t th a t th e instructional safeguard s h a l l b e p la c e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t, o n th e p a c k a g in g ,
o r in t h e i n s t r u c t i o n m a n u a l . A l t e r n a t i v e l y , t h e instructional safeguard m a y b e g i v e n t h r o u g h
th e e q u ip m e n t d is p la y d u rin g use. T he e l e m e n t s o f t h e instructional safeguard s h a l l b e a s
fo llo w s :
- e l e m e n t 1a: th e s y m b o l IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -6 0 4 4 (2 0 1 1 -0 1 )
- e l e m e n t 2: “ H ig h s o u n d p r e s s u r e ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o r d in g
- e l e m e n t 3: “ H e a rin g d a m a g e ris k ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd in g
- e l e m e n t 4: “ D o n o t lis te n a t h ig h v o lu m e le v e ls fo r lo n g p e r io d s .” o r e q u iv a le n t w o r d in g
10.6.6 Requirements for listening devices (headphones, earphones, etc.)
10.6.6.1 Corded listening devices with analogue input
W i t h 9 4 d B ( A ) L Aeq a c o u s t i c p r e s s u r e o u t p u t o f t h e l i s t e n i n g d e v i c e , a n d w i t h t h e v o l u m e a n d
sound s e ttin g s in t h e lis te n in g d e v ic e (fo r e x a m p le , b u ilt-in v o lu m e le v e l c o n tr o l, a d d itio n a l
sound fe a tu re lik e e q u a liz a tio n , e tc .) s e t to th e c o m b in a tio n o f p o s itio n s th a t m a x im iz e th e
m e a su re d a c o u s tic o u tp u t, th e in p u t v o lta g e o f th e lis te n in g d e v ic e when p la y in g th e fix e d
“ p r o g r a m m e s i m u l a t i o n n o i s e ” a s d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 s h a ll b e > 7 5 m V .
NOTE The values of 94 dB(A) and 75 mV correspond with 85 dB(A) and 27 mV or 100 dB(A) and 150 mV.
10.6.6.2 Corded listening devices with digital input
W ith any p la y in g d e v ic e p la y in g th e fix e d “p ro g ra m m e s im u la tio n n o is e ” d e s c rib e d in

E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 ，a n d w ith th e v o lu m e and sound s e ttin g s in th e lis te n in g d e v ic e (fo r e x a m p le ,
b u ilt-in v o lu m e le v e l c o n tro l, a d d itio n a l sound fe a tu re lik e e q u a liz a tio n , e tc .) set to th e
c o m b in a tio n of p o s itio n s th a t m a x im iz e th e m e a su re d a c o u s tic o u tp u t, th e L Aeq,r a c o u s tic
o u tp u t o f th e lis te n in g d e v ic e s h a ll b e < 1 0 0 d B ( A ) w ith a n in p u t s ig n a l o f - 1 0 d B F S .
10.6.6.3 Cordless listening devices
I门 c o r d le s s m o d e ,

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- wi t h any p la y in g and tra n s m ittin g d e v ic e p la y in g th e fix e d p ro g ra m m e s im u la tio n n o is e

d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 ; a n d
- r e s p e c t i n g th e c o r d le s s tr a n s m is s io n s ta n d a r d s , w h e r e a n a ir in te r fa c e s ta n d a r d e x is ts th a t
s p e c ifie s th e e q u iv a le n t a c o u s tic le v e l; a n d
- w i t h v o l u m e a n d s o u n d s e t t i n g s in t h e r e c e i v i n g d e v i c e ( f o r e x a m p l e , b u i l t - i n v o l u m e l e v e l
c o n tr o l, a d d itio n a l s o u n d f e a t u r e lik e e q u a liz a tio n , e tc .) s e t to th e c o m b in a tio n o f p o s itio n s
th a t m a x im iz e th e m e a su re d a c o u s tic o u tp u t fo r th e above m e n tio n e d p ro g ra m m e
s im u la tio n n o is e ,
- t h e L Aeq T a c o u s tic o u tp u t o f th e lis te n in g d e v ic e s h a ll b e < 1 0 0 d B ( A ) w ith a n in p u t s ig n a l

o f -1 0 dBFS.
10.6.6.4 Measurement method
Measurements shall be made in accordance with EN 50332-2 as applicable.

- 204 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex A
(informative)
Examples of equipment within the scope of this document
S o m e e x a m p le s o f e q u ip m e n t w ith in th e s c o p e o f th is d o c u m e n t a re :
Generic product type Specific example of generic type

Banking equipment Monetary processing machines including automated teller (cash dispensing)
machines (ATM)
Consumer electronic equipment Receiving equipment and amplifiers for sound and/or vision, supply
(including professional audio, equipment intended to supply other equipment covered by the scope of this
video and musical instrument document, electronic musical instruments, and electronic accessories such
equipment) as rhythm generators, tone generators, music tuners and the like for use with
electronic or non-electronic musical instruments, audio and/or video
educational equipment, video projectors, video cameras and video monitors,
network surveillance cameras, video games, juke boxes, record and optical
disc players, tape and optical disc recorders, antenna signal converters and
amplifiers, antenna positioners, Citizen's Band equipment, equipment for
imagery, electronic light effect equipment, intercommunication equipment
using low voltage mains as the transmission medium, cable head-end
receivers, multimedia equipment, electronic flash equipment
Data and text processing Data preparation equipment, data processing equipment, data storage
machines and associated equipment, personal computers, tablets, smartphones, wearable devices,
equipment plotters, printers (including 3D printers 〉， scanners, text processing
equipment, visual display units
Data network equipment Bridges, data circuit terminating equipment, data terminal equipment, routers
Electrical and electronic retail Cash registers, point of sale terminals including associated electronic scales
equipment
Electrical and electronic office Calculators, copying machines, dictation equipment, document shredding
machines machines, duplicators, erasers, micrographic office equipment, motor-
operated files, paper trimmers (punchers, cutting machines, separators),
paper jogging machines, pencil sharpeners, staplers, typewriters
Other information technology Photoprinting equipment, public information terminals, electronic kiosks,
equipment multimedia equipment
Postage equipment Mail processing machines, postage machines

Telecommunication network Billing equipment, multiplexers, network powering equipment, network
infrastructure equipment terminating equipment, radio base stations ， repeaters, transmission
equipment, telecommunication switching equipment
Telecommunication terminal Facsimile equipment, key telephone systems, modems, PABXs, pagers,
equipment telephone answering machines, telephone sets (wired and wireless)
T h i s l i s t is n o t i n t e n d e d t o b e a l l - i n c l u s i v e , a n d e q u i p m e n t t h a t is n o t l i s t e d is n o t n e c e s s a r i l y
e x c lu d e d fro m th e s c o p e .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex B
(normative)
Normal operating condition tests， abnormal operating

condition tests and single fault condition tests
B.1 General
B.1.1 Test applicability
T h is a n n e x s p e c ifie s v a rio u s te s ts a n d te s t c o n d itio n s a p p lic a b le to th e e q u ip m e n t.
If it is e v id e n t th a t a p a rtic u la r te s t is n o t a p p lic a b le , or not n e ce ssa ry a fte r in s p e c tio n of

a v a ila b le d a ta , th e te s t s h a ll n o t b e m a d e . T e s ts in t h i s d o c u m e n t s h a l l b e c o n d u c t e d o n l y if
s a f e t y is i n v o l v e d .
In o r d e r t o e s t a b l i s h w h e t h e r o r n o t a t e s t is a p p l i c a b l e , t h e c i r c u i t s a n d c o n s t r u c t i o n s h a ll b e
c a re fu lly in v e s tig a te d to ta k e in to account th e consequences of p o s s ib le fa u lts . The
consequence of a fa u lt m ay or m ay not re q u ire th e use of a safeguard to re d u c e th e
lik e lih o o d o f in ju r y o r fire .
B.1.2 Type of test
E x c e p t w h e re o th e rw is e s ta te d , te s ts s p e c ifie d a re type tests.
B.1.3 Test samples
U n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d , th e s a m p le under te s t s h a ll be re p re s e n ta tiv e of th e a c tu a l

e q u ip m e n t o r s h a ll b e th e a c tu a l e q u ip m e n t.
As an a lte rn a tiv e to c o n d u c tin g te s ts on th e c o m p le te e q u ip m e n t, te s ts m ay be c o n d u c te d

s e p a ra te ly on c irc u its , c o m p o n e n ts o r s u b -a s s e m b lie s o u ts id e th e e q u ip m e n t, p ro v id e d th a t
in s p e c tio n o f th e e q u ip m e n t a n d c irc u it a rra n g e m e n ts e n s u re th a t s u c h te s tin g w ill in d ic a te
th a t th e a s s e m b le d e q u ip m e n t w o u ld c o n fo rm to th e re q u ire m e n ts o f th is d o c u m e n t. If a n y
such te s t in d ic a te s th e lik e lih o o d o f n o n -c o n fo rm a n c e in th e c o m p le te e q u ip m e n t, th e te s t
s h a l l b e r e p e a t e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t .
If a t e s t c o u ld b e d e s t r u c t iv e , a m o d e l m a y b e u s e d to r e p r e s e n t th e c o n d it io n to b e e v a lu a t e d .
B.1.4 Compliance by inspection of relevant data
W h e r e in t h i s d o c u m e n t c o m p l i a n c e o f m a t e r i a l s , c o m p o n e n t s o r s u b a s s e m b l i e s is c h e c k e d b y
in s p e c tio n o r b y te s tin g o f p ro p e rtie s , c o m p lia n c e m a y b e c o n firm e d b y re v ie w in g a n y re le v a n t
d a ta o r p re v io u s te s t re s u lts th a t a re a v a ila b le in s te a d o f c a rry in g o u t th e s p e c ifie d type tests.
B.1.5 Temperature measurement conditions
The te s t m e a su re m e n t s e t-u p s h a ll re p ro d u ce th e m ost se ve re e q u ip m e n t in s ta lla tio n

c o n d itio n s . W h e re a m a x im u m te m p e ra tu re (Tmax) i s s p e c i f i e d f o r c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t e s t s , it is
based on th e a s s u m p tio n th a t th e ro o m a m b ie n t a ir te m p e ra tu re w ill be 25 °C when th e
e q u i p m e n t is o p e r a t i n g . H o w e v e r , t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r m a y s p e c i f y a d i f f e r e n t m a x i m u m a m b ie n t
a ir te m p e r a tu r e .
U n l e s s o t h e r w i s e s p e c i f i e d , it i s n o t n e c e s s a r y t o m a i n t a i n t h e a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e ( r a m b ) a t
a s p e c i f i c v a l u e d u r i n g t e s t s , b u t it s h a l l b e m o n i t o r e d a n d r e c o r d e d .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
W ith re fe re n c e to th o s e te s ts th a t a re to be c o n tin u e d u n til s te a d y s ta te te m p e ra tu re s a re

a tta in e d , s te a d y s ta te is c o n s i d e r e d to e x is t if th e te m p e ra tu re ris e does not exceed 3 K in
3 0 m i n . If t h e m e a s u r e d t e m p e r a t u r e is a t l e a s t 1 0 % l e s s t h a n t h e s p e c i f i e d t e m p e r a t u r e l im i t ,
s t e a d y s t a t e i s c o n s i d e r e d t o e x i s t i f t h e t e m p e r a t u r e r i s e d o e s n o t e x c e e d 1 K in 5 m i n .
U n le s s a p a rtic u la r m e th o d is s p e c i f i e d , t e m p e r a t u r e s o f w i n d i n g s s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d e ith e r
by th e th e rm o c o u p le m e th o d o r b y a n y o th e r m e th o d g iv in g th e a v e ra g e te m p e ra tu re o f th e
w in d in g w ire s s u c h a s th e re s is ta n c e m e th o d .
B.2 Normal operating conditions
B.2.1 General
E x c e p t w h e r e s p e c i f i c t e s t c o n d i t i o n s a r e s t a t e d e l s e w h e r e a n d w h e r e it is c l e a r t h a t t h e r e is a
s ig n ific a n t im p a c t on th e re s u lts o f th e te s t, th e te s ts s h a ll be c o n d u c te d u n d e r th e m ost
u n fa v o u ra b le normal operating conditions ta k in g in to a c c o u n t th e fo llo w in g p a r a m e t e r s :
- s u p p l y v o lta g e ;
- s u p p l y fre q u e n c y ;
- environmental c o n d itio n s (fo r e x a m p le , th e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s ra te d m a x im u m a m b ie n t

te m p e ra tu re );
- physical lo c a tio n of e q u ip m e n t and p o s itio n of m o v a b le p a rts , as s p e c ifie d by th e

m a n u fa c tu re r;
- o p e r a t i n g m o d e , in c lu d in g e x te rn a l lo a d in g d u e to in te rc o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t; a n d
- a d j u s t m e n t o f a c o n tro l.
F o r a u d io a m p lifie rs and e q u ip m e n t c o n ta in in g an a u d io a m p lifie r, a d d itio n a l te s t c o n d itio n s

a p p ly , s e e A n n e x E.
B.2.2 Supply frequency
In d e t e r m i n i n g t h e m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e s u p p l y f r e q u e n c y f o r a t e s t , d i f f e r e n t f r e q u e n c i e s w i t h i n
th e rated frequency ra n g e s h a ll be ta k e n in to a c c o u n t (fo r e x a m p le , 50 H z and 60 Hz) but
c o n s id e ra tio n o f th e to le ra n c e on a rated frequency (fo r e x a m p le ，5 0 H z ± 0 ,5 H z ) is not
n e ce ssa ry.
B.2.3 Supply voltage
In d e t e r m i n i n g t h e m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e s u p p l y v o l t a g e f o r a t e s t , t h e f o l l o w i n g v a r i a b l e s s h a ll b e
ta k e n in to a c c o u n t:
- multiple rated voltages;

- extremes of rated voltage ranges; and
- tolerance on rated voltage a s d e c la re d b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r.
U n le s s th e m a n u fa c tu re r d e c la re s a w id e r to le ra n c e , th e m in im u m to le ra n c e s h a ll b e ta k e n
as + 1 0 % and - 1 0 % fo r A C mains a n d + 2 0 % a n d - 1 5 % fo r D C mains. E q u ip m e n t in te n d e d
b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r to be re s tric te d to c o n n e c tio n to a c o n d itio n e d p o w e r s u p p ly s y s te m (fo r
e x a m p l e , a U P S ) m a y b e p r o v id e d w it h a n a r r o w e r t o l e r a n c e if t h e e q u i p m e n t is a ls o p r o v id e d
w ith in s tr u c tio n s s p e c ify in g s u c h r e s tr ic tio n .
B.2.4 Normal operating voltages
T h e fo llo w in g v o lta g e s s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d :
- n o r m a l o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s g e n e ra te d in t h e e q u i p m e n t , in c lu d in g re p e titiv e p e a k v o lta g e s

s u c h a s th o s e a s s o c ia te d w ith s w itc h m o d e p o w e r s u p p lie s ; a n d

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- normal o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s g e n e ra te d e x te rn a l to th e e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g rin g in g s ig n a ls

re c e iv e d fro m external circuits a s i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 1 3 , I D n u m b e r s 1 a n d 2 .
E x te rn a lly g e n e ra te d mains transient voltages and external circuit tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e s s h a ll

n o t be c o n s id e re d :
- when d e te rm in in g working voltages， because such tra n s ie n ts have been ta k e n in to

a c c o u n t in t h e p r o c e d u r e s f o r d e t e r m i n i n g m i n i m u m clearances (s e e 5 .4 .2 ); a n d
- w h e n c l a s s i f y i n g c i r c u i t s in t h e e q u i p m e n t a s E S 1 , E S 2 a n d E S 3 ( s e e 5 . 2 ) .
B.2.5 Input test
In determination o f the input current or input power， the following variables shall be
considered:
- l oads due to optional features, offered or provided for by the manufacturer for inclusion in
or with the EUT;
- l oads due to other units of equipment intended by the manufacturer to draw power from
the EUT;
- l oads that could be connected to any standard supply outlet on the equipment that is
a c c e s s ib le to an o rd in a ry p e rso n , up to the value specified by the manufacturer;
- for equipment containing an audio amplifier, see Clause E.1;
- for equipment where the primary function is to display moving images， the following
settings shall apply:
• the ‘Three vertical bar signal， shall be used as defined in 3.2.1.3 of IEC 60107-1:1997;
and
• user a c c e s s ib le picture controls shall be adjusted so as to obtain the maximum power
consumption; and
• sound settings shall be as defined in Clause E. 1 of this document.
Artificial loads may be used to simulate such loads during testing.
In each case， the readings are taken when the input current or input power has stabilized. If
the current or power varies during the normal operating cycle, the steady state current or
power is taken as the mean indication o f the value, measured on a recording RMS ammeter or
power meter， during a representative period.
The measured input current or input power under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ， but at the
ra te d v o lta g e or at each end of each ra te d v o lta g e ra n g e ， shall not exceed the ra te d
c u rre n t or ra te d p o w e r by more than 10 %.
Compliance is checked by measuring the input current or input power of the equipment under
the following conditions:
- where equipment has more than one ra te d v o lta g e ， the input current or input power is
measured at each ra te d vo lta g e ; and
- where equipment has one or more ra te d v o lta g e ra n g e s ， the input current or input power
is measured at each end of each ra te d v o lta g e rang e:
• where a single value of ra te d c u rre n t or ra te d p o w e r is marked， it is compared with
the higher value of input current or input power measured in the associated ra te d
v o lta g e rang e; and
• where two values of rafed cii/renf o厂 rafed power a 厂e marked, separated by a
hyphen, they are compared with the two values measured in the associated ra te d
v o lta g e range.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
B.2.6 Operating temperature measurement conditions
B.2.6.1 General
T e m p e ra tu re s m e a s u re d o n th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o n fo r m to B .2 .6 .2 o r B .2 .6 .3, a s a p p lic a b le ,
a ll t e m p e r a t u r e s b e i n g in d e g r e e s C e l s i u s ( ° C ) ; w h e r e :
T is t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o f t h e g iv e n p a r t m e a s u r e d u n d e r t h e p r e s c r i b e d t e s t c o n d i t i o n s ;
r max is t h e m a x i m u m t e m p e r a t u r e s p e c i f i e d f o r c o m p l i a n c e w it h t h e t e s t ;
r amb is t h e a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e d u r i n g te s t ;
r ma is th e m a x im u m a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re s p e c ifie d by th e m a n u fa c tu re r, or 2 5 °C ,
w h i c h e v e r is g r e a t e r .
B.2.6.2 Operating temperature dependent heating/cooling
For e q u ip m e n t w h e re th e am ount of h e a tin g or c o o lin g is d e s ig n e d to be dependent on

te m p e ra tu re (fo r e x a m p le , th e e q u ip m e n t c o n ta in s a fa n th a t h a s a h ig h e r s p e e d a t a h ig h e r
te m p e ra tu re ), th e te m p e ra tu re m e a su re m e n t is m ade at th e le a s t fa v o u ra b le a m b ie n t
te m p e ra tu re w ith in th e m a n u fa c tu re rs s p e c ifie d o p e ra tin g ra n g e . In th is case, T s h a ll not
e x c e e d 7 max.
NOTE 1 In order to find the highest value of T for each component, it can be useful to conduct several tests at
different values of T a m b .
NOTE 2 The least favourable value of r amb can be different for different components.
A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e te m p e ra tu re m e a s u r e m e n t m a y b e m a d e u n d e r a m b ie n t c o n d itio n s w ith th e

h e a t in g / c o o lin g d e v ic e a t its le a s t e f f e c t iv e s e t t in g o r w it h t h e d e v ic e d e f e a t e d .
B.2.6.3 Operating temperature independent heating/cooling
F o r e q u ip m e n t w h e re th e a m o u n t o f h e a tin g o r c o o lin g is n o t d e s i g n e d to be d e p e n d e n t on
a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re , th e m e th o d in B . 2 . 6 . 2 m a y b e u s e d . A l t e r n a t i v e l y , t h e t e s t is p e r f o r m e d
a t a n y v a l u e o f r amb w i t h i n t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ' s s p e c i f i e d o p e r a t i n g r a n g e . In t h i s c a s e , r s h a l l
n o t e x c e e d ( r m a x + T a m b _ 7"m a ).
D u r i n g t h e t e s t , r amb s h o u l d n o t e x c e e d r ma u n l e s s a g r e e d b y a l l p a r t i e s i n v o l v e d .
B.2.7 Battery charging and discharging under normal operating conditions
Under normal operating conditions, battery c h a rg in g and d is c h a rg in g c o n d itio n s s h a ll

c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f A n n e x M a s a p p lic a b le .
B.3 Simulated abnormal operating conditions
B.3.1 General
W hen a p p ly in g s im u la te d abnormal operating conditions, p a rts , s u p p lie s , a n d m e d ia s h a ll

b e in p l a c e i f t h e y a r e l i k e l y t o h a v e a n e f f e c t o n t h e o u t c o m e o f t h e t e s t .
Each abnormal operating condition s h a l l b e a p p l i e d in t u r n , o n e a t a t i m e .
F a u lts th a t a re th e d ire c t c o n s e q u e n c e o f th e abnormal operating condition a r e d e e m e d to

be a single fault condition.
The e q u ip m e n t, in s ta lla tio n , in s tru c tio n s , and s p e c ific a tio n s s h a ll b e e x a m in e d to d e te rm in e

th o s e abnormal operating conditions th a t m ig h t r e a s o n a b ly b e e x p e c te d to o c c u r.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
As a m in im u m , th e fo llo w in g e x a m p le s of abnormal operating conditions s h a ll be

c o n s i d e r e d , a s a p p l i c a b l e , in a d d i t i o n t o t h o s e m e n t i o n e d in B . 3 . 2 t o B . 3 . 7 :
- f or p a p e r h a n d lin g e q u ip m e n t : a p a p e r ja m ;
- f or e q u ip m e n t w ith c o n t r o ls accessible to a n ordinary person: a d ju s tm e n t o f th e c o n tro ls ,

b o th in d iv id u a lly a n d c o lle c tiv e ly , fo r w o r s t- c a s e o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ;
- f or a u d io a m p lifie rs w ith c o n tro ls accessible to an ordinary person: a d ju s tm e n t o f th e

c o n tro ls , b o th in d iv id u a lly and c o lle c tiv e ly , fo r w o rs t-c a s e o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , w ith o u t
a p p l y i n g t h e c o n d i t i o n s s p e c i f i e d in A n n e x E ;
- f or e q u ip m e n t w ith m o v in g p a rts accessible to a n ordinary person: a m o v in g p a rts ja m ;
- f or e q u ip m e n t w ith m e d ia : in c o rre c t m e d ia , in c o rre c t s iz e m e d ia , and in c o rre c t m e d ia

q u a n tity ;
- f or e q u ip m e n t w ith re p le n is h a b le liq u id s or liq u id c a rtrid g e s , or re p le n is h a b le m a te ria ls :

liq u id s o r m a te r ia ls s p ille d in to th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
- f or e q u ip m e n t th a t u s e s a n insulating liquid d e s c r i b e d in 5.4.12.1: lo s s o f liq u id .
B e fo re in tro d u c in g a n y o f th e a b o v e abnormal operating conditions, th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e

o p e ra tin g u n d e r normal operating conditions.
B.3.2 Covering of ventilation openings
T h e to p , s id e s a n d th e b a c k o f e q u ip m e n t, if s u c h s u r fa c e s h a v e v e n tila tio n o p e n in g s , s h a ll b e
c o v e r e d o n e a t a tim e w ith a c a rd (th ic k , s tiff p a p e r o r th in c a r d b o a r d ) w ith a m in im u m d e n s ity
o f 2 0 0 g / m 2 , w it h d i m e n s i o n s n o t le s s t h a n e a c h t e s t e d s u r f a c e , c o v e r in g a ll o p e n i n g s .
O p e n in g s o n d if fe r e n t s u r fa c e s o n to p o f th e e q u ip m e n t (if a n y ) a re c o v e r e d s im u lt a n e o u s ly b y
s e p a ra te p ie c e s o f c a rd .
O p e n in g s on to p o f th e e q u ip m e n t, on a s u rfa c e in c lin e d at an a n g le g re a te r th a n 30° and

s m a l l e r t h a n 6 0 ° t o t h e h o r i z o n t a l , f r o m w h i c h a n o b s t r u c t i o n is f r e e t o s l i d e , a r e e x c l u d e d .
On th e back and th e s id e s o f th e e q u ip m e n t, th e ca rd is a t t a c h e d to th e upper edge and

a llo w e d to h a n g fr e e ly .
E x c e p t a s s p e c ifie d b e lo w , th e re a re n o r e q u ir e m e n ts fo r b lo c k in g o p e n in g s in t h e b o t t o m of
In a d d itio n , e q u ip m e n t w ith v e n tila tio n o p e n in g s lik e ly to be used on a s o ft su p p o rt (lik e

b e d d in g , b la n k e ts e tc .), s h a ll c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :
- Openings in th e b o tto m , s id e s and back of th e e q u ip m e n t a re to be co ve re d

s i m u l t a n e o u s l y . E x t e r n a l s u r f a c e s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d t h e T S 2 l i m i t s in T a b l e 3 8 .
- An instructional safeguard s h a ll b e p r o v id e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F.5, e x c e p t th a t

e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
• e le m e n t 1a: n o t a v a ila b le
• e le m e n t 2: “ D o n o t c o v e r v e n tila tio n o p e n in g s ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd in g
• e le m e n t 3: o p tio n a l
• e le m e n t 4: “T h is e q u ip m e n t is not in te n d e d to be used on s o ft su p p o rt (lik e

b e d d in g s , b la n k e ts e tc .).” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd in g

-210 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
B.3.3 DC mains polarity test
If t h e c o n n e c tio n to th e DC mains is n o t p o l a r i z e d and th e c o n n e c tio n is accessible to a n

ordinary person, th e n th e p o s s ib le in flu e n c e o f p o la rity s h a ll be ta k e n in to account when
te s tin g e q u ip m e n t d e s ig n e d fo r D C .
B.3.4 Setting of voltage selector
E q u ip m e n t to b e s u p p lie d fr o m th e mains a n d p r o v i d e d w ith a v o lta g e s e ttin g d e v ic e to b e s e t

by th e ordinary person or an instructed person, i s te s te d w ith th e mains v o lta g e s e ttin g
d e v ic e a t th e m o s t u n fa v o u r a b le p o s itio n .
B.3.5 Maximum load at output terminals
O u tp u t te rm in a ls o f e q u ip m e n t s u p p ly in g p o w e r to o th e r e q u ip m e n t, e x c e p t s o c k e t-o u tle ts a n d
a p p lia n c e o u tle ts d ire c tly c o n n e c te d to th e mains, a re c o n n e c te d to th e m o s t u n fa v o u ra b le
lo a d im p e d a n c e , in c lu d in g s h o r t- c ir c u it.
B.3.6 Reverse battery polarity
I f it i s p o s s i b l e f o r a n ordinary person to in s e rt re p la c e a b le batteries w ith r e v e rs e d p o la rity ,

th e e q u ip m e n t is t e s t e d in a ll p o s s ib le c o n fig u ra tio n s w ith one o r m o re batteries re v e rs e d
(s e e a ls o A n n e x M ).
B.3.7 Audio amplifier abnormal operating conditions
Abnormal operating conditions f o r a u d i o a m p l i f i e r s a r e s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e E . 3 .
B.3.8 Compliance criteria during and after abnormal operating conditions
During an a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n that does not lead to a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n , all

s a fe g u a rd s shall remain effective. After restoration of n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , all
s a fe g u a rd s shall comply with applicable requirements.
If an a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n leads to a consequential fault, the compliance criteria of

B.4.8 apply.
B.4 Simulated single fault conditions
B.4.1 General
W hen a p p ly in g s im u la te d single fault conditions, p a rts , s u p p lie s , and m e d ia s h a ll be in

p la c e if t h e y a r e lik e ly to h a v e a n e f f e c t o n t h e o u t c o m e o f t h e t e s t .
T h e in tro d u c tio n o f a n y single fault condition s h a l l b e a p p l i e d i n tu rn o n e a t a tim e . F a u lts ,

t h a t a r e t h e d i r e c t c o n s e q u e n c e o f t h e single fault condition, a r e d e e m e d to b e p a rt o f th a t
single fault condition.
T h e e q u ip m e n t c o n s tru c tio n , c irc u it d ia g ra m s , c o m p o n e n t s p e c ific a tio n s , in c lu d in g functional

insulation a re e x a m in e d to d e t e r m in e th o s e single fault conditions th a t m ig h t re a s o n a b ly
be e x p e c te d a n d th a t:
- mi ght b yp a ss a safeguard; or
- c a u s e th e o p e ra tio n o f a supplementary safeguard; or
- o t h e r w i s e a ffe c t th e s a fe ty o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
T h e fo llo w in g single fault conditions s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d :

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 211 -
- an abnormal operating condition th a t re s u lts in a single fault condition ( f o r e x a m p l e ,

an ordinary person o v e r l o a d i n g e x te rn a l o u tp u t t e r m i n a l s , o r a n ordinary person
in c o rre c tly s e ttin g a s e le c to r s w itc h );
- a basic safeguard fa ilu re o r a supplementary safeguard fa ilu re ;
- except fo r in te g ra te d c irc u it cu rre n t lim ite rs c o m p ly in g w ith C la u s e G .9 , a com ponent

fa ilu re s im u la te d b y s h o r t- c ir c u itin g a n y tw o le a d s a n d o p e n - c ir c u itin g a n y o n e le a d o f th e
c o m p o n e n t o n e a t a tim e ; a n d
- w h e n re q u ire d b y B .4 .4 , a fa ilu re o f functional insulation.
B.4.2 Temperature controlling device
E x c e p t fo r te m p e ra tu re c o n tro llin g safeguards, a c c o rd in g G.3.1 to G.3.4, a n y s in g le d e v ic e o r

c o m p o n e n t o f a c irc u it c o n tro llin g th e te m p e r a tu r e d u rin g te m p e r a tu r e m e a s u r e m e n t s h a ll b e
o p e n - c i r c u i t e d o r s h o r t - c i r c u i t e d , w h i c h e v e r is m o r e u n f a v o u r a b l e .
T e m p e r a t u r e s s h a ll b e m e a s u r e d a c c o r d in g to B .1 .5 .
B.4.3 Motor tests
B.4.3.1 Blocked motor test
Motors are blocked or the rotor is locked in the end product if it is obvious that such an action
will result in an increase in internal ambient temperature of the equipment (for example,
locking the rotor o f the fan motor to stop air flow).
B.4.3.2 Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and examination of the available data or by testing

according to G.5.4.
BAA Functional insulation
B.4.4.1 Clearances for functional insulation
U n le s s th e clearance fo r functional insulation c o m p lie s w ith :
- t he clearance fo r basic insulation a s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 2 ; o r
- f or ES1 and PS1 c irc u its used pollution

in degree 1 and pollution degree 2
e n v iro n m e n ts , th e clearance fo r basic insulation fo r p rin te d w irin g b o a r d s a s s p e c i f i e d in
旧 C 6 0 6 6 4 -1 :2 0 0 7 , T a b le F .4 ; o r
- t he e le c tric s tre n g th te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1 fo r basic insulation,
a clearance fo r functional insulation s h a ll b e s h o r t- c ir c u ite d .
B.4.4.2 Creepage distancesfor functional insulation
U n le s s th e creepage distance fo r functional insulation c o m p lie s w ith :
- t he creepage distance fo r basic insulation a s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 3 ; o r
- f or ES1 and PS1 c i r c u i t s used pollution

in degree 1 and pollution degree 2
e n v iro n m e n ts , t h e clearance fo r basic insulation fo r p rin te d w irin g b o a r d s a s s p e c i f i e d in
旧 C 6 0 6 6 4 -1 :2 0 0 7 , T a b le F .4 ; o r
- t he e le c tric s tre n g th te s t o f 5.4.9.1 fo r basic insulation,
a creepage distance fo r functional insulation s h a ll b e s h o r t- c ir c u ite d .

- 212 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
B.4.4.3 Functional insulation on coated printed boards
U n le s s th e functional insulation c o m p lie s w ith :
- t he s e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e o f T a b le G .1 3 ; o r
- t he e le c tric s tre n g th te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1 fo r basic insulation,
a functional insulation o n a c o a te d p rin te d b o a rd s h a ll b e s h o r t- c ir c u ite d .
B.4.5 Short-circuit and interruption of electrodes in tubes and semiconductors
E l e c t r o d e s in e l e c t r o n i c t u b e s a n d l e a d s o f s e m i c o n d u c t o r d e v i c e s s h a l l b e s h o r t - c i r c u i t e d , o r
if a p p lic a b le , in te rru p te d . One le a d at a tim e is in te rru p te d or any tw o le a d s c o n n e c te d
t o g e t h e r in t u r n .
B.4.6 Short-circuit or disconnection of passive components
R e s is to r s , c a p a c ito r s , w in d in g s , lo u d s p e a k e r s , V D R s a n d o th e r p a s s iv e c o m p o n e n ts s h a ll b e
s h o r t - c i r c u i t e d o r d i s c o n n e c t e d , w h i c h e v e r is m o r e u n f a v o u r a b l e .
These single fault conditions d o n o t a p p ly to :
- P T C th e r m is to r s c o m p ly in g w ith IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 , C la u s e s 1 5 f 17, J .1 5 a n d J .1 7 ;
- a P T C p ro v id in g IE C 6 0 7 3 0 -1 T y p e 2 .A L a c tio n ;
- r e s i s t o r s c o m p ly in g w ith th e te s ts o f 5 .5 .6 ;
- capacitors c o m p ly in g w ith IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 and assessed a c c o rd in g to 5 .5 .2 of th is

d o c u m e n t;
- isolating c o m p o n e n ts (fo r e x a m p le , o p to c o u p le rs and tra n s fo rm e rs ) c o m p ly in g w ith th e

r e l e v a n t c o m p o n e n t r e q u i r e m e n t s in A n n e x G f o r reinforced insulation; and
- ot her c o m p o n e n ts th a t s e rv e as a safeguard c o m p ly in g w ith th e r e le v a n t r e q u ir e m e n ts o f

A n n e x G o r w ith th e s a fe ty re q u ire m e n ts o f th e re le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd .
B.4.7 Continuous operation of components
Motors， relay coils or the like， intended for s h o rt-tim e o p e ra tio n or in te rm itte n t o p e ra tio n ,
are operated continuously if this can occur during operation o f the equipment.
For equipment rated for s h o rt-tim e o p e ra tio n or in te rm itte n t o p e ra tio n , the test is repeated
until steady state conditions are reached, irrespective of the operating time. For this test, the
th e rm o s ta ts ， te m p e ra tu re lim ite rs and th e rm a l c u t-o ffs are not short-circuited.
In circuits not directly connected to the m a in s and in circuits supplied by a DC power

distribution system， electromechanical components normally energized intermittently， except
for motors, a fault shall be simulated in the drive circuit to cause continuous energizing of the
component.
The duration o f the test shall be as follows:
一 for equipment or components whose failure to operate is not evident to an o rd in a ry

p e rso n , as long as necessary to establish steady conditions or up to the interruption of
the circuit due to other consequences of the simulated fault condition, whichever is the
shorter; and
- for other equipment and components: 5 min or up to interruption of the circuit due to a
failure of the component (for example ， burn-out) or to other consequences of the
simulated fault condition, whichever is shorter.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 213 -
B.4.8 Compliance criteria during and after single fault conditions
During and after a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n , an a c c e s s ib le part shall not exceed the relevant
energy class as specified in 5.3, 8.3, 9.4 ， 10.3， 10.4.1, 10.5.1 and 10.6.5 for the related
person depending on the hazard involved. During and after s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s ， any
flame inside the equipment shall extinguish within 10 s and no surrounding parts shall have
ignited. Any part showing flames shall be regarded as a PIS.
After a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n that might impact an insulation used as a sa fe g u a rd , the

insulation shall withstand the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 for the relevant insulation.
During and after a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n ， the opening of a conductor on a printed board shall
not be used as a s a fe g u a rd ， except for the following situations， in which case the fault
condition shall be repeated 3 times:
- Conductors o f a printed board of V-1 cla ss m a te ria l or VTM-1 cla ss m a te ria l may open
under overload condition provided that the open circuit is not an a rc in g PIS. Conductors
on a printed board material that has no m a te ria l fla m m a b ility cla ss or is classed lower
than V-1 c la s s m a te ria l shall not open.
- Under a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n , the peeling of conductors on a printed board shall not
result in the failure of any s u p p le m e n ta ry s a fe g u a rd or re in fo rc e d safeguard.
B.4.9 Battery charging and discharging under single fault conditions
Under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s ， b a tte ry charging and discharging conditions shall comply with
the requirements o f Annex M as applicable.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex C
(normative)
UV radiation
C.1 Protection of materials in equipment from UV radiation
C.1.1 General
T h is annex d e fin e s th e te s t re q u ire m e n ts and te s t p ro ce d u re s fo r m a te ria ls th a t have

safeguard p r o p e r tie s a n d th a t a re s u b je c t to UV ra d ia tio n e x p o s u re .
C.1.2 Requirements
The fo llo w in g re q u ire m e n ts a p p ly to e q u ip m e n t, o r p a rts o f e q u ip m e n t, th a t a re exposed to

la m p s th a t p ro d u c e s ig n ific a n t UV r a d i a t i o n in t h e s p e c t r u m 180 n m to 400 n m a n d to o u td o o r
e q u ip m e n t e x p o s e d to s u n lig h t.
NOTE 1 General-purpose incandescent and fluorescent lamps, with ordinary glass envelopes, are not considered
to emit significant UV radiation.
NOTE 2 Filters and/or lenses usually act as a safeguard and can serve as part of the enclosure.
Table C.1 - Minimum property retention limits after UV exposure
Standard for the test Minimum retention

Parts to be tested Property
method after test
Parts providing mechanical Tensile strength a ISO 527 series 70 %

support
or flexural strength a b ISO 178 70 %
Parts providing impact Charpy impact c or ISO 179-1 70 %

resistance
Izod impact c or ISO 180 70 %
Tensile impact c ISO 8256 70 %
d
All parts Material flammability See Clause S.4 of this
class document
Tensile strength and flexural strength tests are to be conducted on specimens no thicker than the actual
thicknesses.
b The side of the sample exposed to UV radiation is to be in contact with the two loading points when using the
three point loading method.
c Tests conducted on 3,0 mm thick specimens for Izod impact and tensile impact tests and 4,0 mm thick
specimens for Charpy impact tests are considered representative of other thicknesses, down to 0f75 mm.
d The material flammability class may change as long as it does not fall below that specified in Clause 6 of
this document.
C.1.3 Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by examination of the construction and of available data regarding the
UV resistance characteristics of the parts exposed to UV radiation in the equipment. If such
data is not available, the tests in Table C.1 are carried out on the parts.
Samples taken from the parts, or consisting of identical material, are prepared according to
the standard for the test to be carried out. They are then conditioned according to Clause C.2.
After conditioning， the samples shall show no signs of significant deterioration， such as
crazing or cracking. They are then kept at room ambient conditions for not less than 16 h and
not more than 96 h， after which they are tested according to the standard for the relevant test.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 215 -
In order to evaluate the percentage retention of properties after test, samples that have not
been conditioned according to Clause C.2 are tested at the same time as the conditioned
samples.
The retention shall be as specified in Table C.1.
C.2 UV light conditioning test
C.2.1 Test apparatus
Samples are exposed to UV light by using one of the following apparatus:
- a twin enclosed carbon-arc (see C.2.3) with continuous exposure for a minimum of 720 h.
The test apparatus shall operate with a black-panel temperature of 63 °C ± 3 °C in a
relative humidity of (50 ± 5) %; or
- a xenon-arc (see C.2.4) with continuous exposure for a minimum of 1 000 h. The test
apparatus shall operate with a 6 500 Wf water-cooled xenon-arc lamp， a spectral
irradiance o f 0,35 W/m2 at 340 nm， a black-panel temperature of 63 °C 土 3 °C in a relative
humidity of (50 ± 5) %.
C.2.2 Mounting of test samples
The samples are mounted vertically on the inside of the cylinder of the light exposure
apparatus， with the widest portion of the samples facing the arcs. They are mounted so that
they do not touch each other.
C.2.3 Carbon-arc light-exposure test
The apparatus described in ISO 4892-4, or equivalent, is used in accordance with the
procedures given in ISO 4892-1 and ISO 4892-4 using a type 1 filter， with water spray.
C.2.4 Xenon-arc light-exposure test
The apparatus described in ISO 4892-2:2013， or equivalent， is used in accordance with the
procedures given in ISO 4892-1 and ISO 4892-4 using cycle 1 of method A of Table 3, without
water spray.

- 216 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex D
(normative)
Test generators
D.1 Impulse test generators
T h e s e c i r c u i t s p r o d u c e t e s t p u l s e s a s r e f e r e n c e d i n T a b l e D . 1 . In t h i s t a b l e :
- t h e c i r c u i t 1 i m p u l s e is t y p i c a l o f v o l t a g e s i n d u c e d i n t o t e l e p h o n e w i r e s a n d c o a x i a l c a b l e s
in l o n g o u t d o o r c a b l e r u n s d u e t o l i g h t n i n g s t r i k e s t o t h e i r e a r t h i n g s h i e l d ;
- t he c irc u it 2 im p u ls e is t y p i c a l o f e a rth p o te n tia l ris e s due to e ith e r lig h tn in g s trik e s to

p o w e r lin e s o r p o w e r lin e fa u lts ; a n d
- t he c irc u it 3 im p u ls e is ty p ic a l o f v o lta g e s in d u c e d in to a n te n n a s y s te m w irin g due to

n e a rb y lig h tn in g s trik e s to e a rth .
NOTE During the tests, use extreme care due to the high electric charge stored in the capacitor Cr
T h e c i r c u i t i n F i g u r e D . 1 ，u s i n g t h e c o m p o n e n t v a l u e s i n c i r c u i t s 1 a n d 2 o f T a b l e D . 1 , i s u s e d
to g e n e r a t e im p u ls e s , th e C1 c a p a c i t o r b e in g c h a r g e d in itia lly to a v o lta g e Uc.
C i r c u i t 1 o f T a b l e D .1 g e n e ra te s 1 0 /7 0 0 jas i m p u l s e s (1 0 p s v i r t u a l 什 o n t t i m e , 7 0 0 jas v i r t u a l
tim e to h a lf v a lu e ) to s im u la te tra n s ie n ts in external circuits as in d ic a te d in T a b le 13, ID
n u m b e r s 1, 2 , 3 , 4 a n d 5.
C i r c u i t 2 o f T a b l e D .1 g e n e ra te s 1 ,2 /5 0 jas i m p u l s e s (1 ,2 p s v irtu a l fro n t tim e , 5 0 p s v irtu a l

t i m e t o h a l f v a l u e ) t o s i m u l a t e t r a n s i e n t s in p o w e r d i s t r i b u t i o n s y s t e m s .
The im p u ls e w a v e shapes a re u n d e r o p e n -c irc u it c o n d itio n s and can b e d if fe r e n t u n d e r lo a d

c o n d itio n s .
During the test， the peak voltage of the applied impulse shall not be less than the peak
impulse test voltage (for example， see Table 14) and the pulse shape (for example ， 1,2 jus
virtual front time, 50 / / s virtual time to half value for the 1,2/50 jljs impulse) shall remain
substantially the same as under open-circuit conditions. Components in parallel with the
cle a ra n ce may be disconnected during this test.
Rs Ri 及3
Figure D.1 - 1,2/50 |is and 10/700 |is voltage impulse generator
D.2 Antenna interface test generator
The c irc u it in F ig u re D .2 u s in g th e com ponent v a lu e s o f c irc u it 3 in T a b l e D . 1 , is used to

g e n e ra te im p u ls e s , th e C1 c a p a c i t o r b e in g c h a r g e d in itia lly to a v o lta g e Uc.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 217 -
Figure D.2 - Antenna interface test generator circuit
Table D.1 - Component values for Figure D.1 and Figure D.2
Test
Figure
impulse c i R2 Rz
Circuit 1 10/700 ms D.1 ■ 20 nF 0,2 mF 5〇 a 15 a 25 Q
Circuit 2 1,2/50 Ms D.1 _

1 mF 30 nF 76 il 13 Q 25 Q
Circuit 3 ■ D.2 15 MQ 1 nF ■
1 ka ■ -
Alternative test generators may be used provided they give the same result.
NOTE Circuits 1 and 2 are based on ITU-T Recommendation K.44.
D.3 Electronic pulse generator
NOTE 1 The operating pressure of the lamp can be converted to energy (Joules). The operating energy level can
typically be used as the starting point for the test charge.
NOTE 2 The relay is a 5 kV double pole defibrillator type, nitrogen filled. A defibrillator qualified relay is sufficient.
See IEC 60601-2-4.
NOTE 3 The HV capacitor is rated 0,42 j.iF 5 kV.
Figure D.3 - Example of an electronic pulse generator

- 218 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex E
(normative)
Test conditions for equipment containing audio amplifiers
E.1 Electrical energy source classification for audio signals
W h e n c la s s ify in g a u d io s ig n a ls a s a n e le c tric a l e n e rg y s o u rc e (s e e T a b le E .1 ), th e e q u ip m e n t
s h a ll be o p e ra te d to d e liv e r m a x im u m non-clipped output power in to its rated load
impedance. The lo a d is r e m o v e d and th e e le c tric a l e n e rg y s o u rc e c la s s is d e t e r m i n e d fro m
th e re s u ltin g o p e n -c irc u it o u tp u t v o lta g e .
T o n e c o n tr o ls a re to b e s e t a t m id - r a n g e .
Table E.1 - Audio signal electrical energy source classes and safeguards
Class A udio signal voltage Exam ples o f safeguards between energy Example o f safeguards
source and o rd in a ry person between energy source
V RMS and in stru cte d person
ES1 0 up to 71 No safeguard necessary No safeguard necessary
Insulated terminals a
marked with ISO 7000,
Above 71 and symbol ^ 0434a (2004-01) or

ES2 No safeguard necessary
up to 120
symbol ^ 0434b (2004-01)
In s tru c tio n a l safeguard for uninsulated parts
of terminals and bare wiring b
Connectors conforming to the requirements of IEC 61984 and marked
ES3 Above 120
with the symbol of IEC 60417-6042 ( 2 0 1 0 - 1 1 ) ^
a Terminals that have no conductive parts accessible after wiring are installed according to instructions.
b An in s tru c tio n a l safeguard indicating that touching uninsulated terminals or wiring may result in an
unpleasant sensation.
E.2 Audio am plifier normal operating conditions
E q u ip m e n t c o n ta in in g an a u d io a m p lifie r s h a ll be o p e ra te d u s in g a s in e w ave a u d io s ig n a l
so u rce at a fre q u e n c y of 1 000 Hz. In th e case w h e re an a m p lifie r is not in te n d e d fo r
o p e ra tio n a t 1 000 H z, th e peak response frequency s h a ll b e u s e d .
T h e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e o p e r a te d in s u c h a w a y a s t o d e l i v e r 1/8 non-clipped output power

to th e rated load impedance. A l t e r n a t i v e l y , a b a n d -lim ite d p in k n o is e s ig n a l m a y b e u s e d fo r
o p e r a t i o n a f t e r non-clipped output power is e s ta b lis h e d u s in g a s in e wave. The n o is e
b a n d w id th o f th e p in k n o is e te s t s ig n a l s h a ll b e lim ite d b y a filte r o f a c h a r a c t e r is t ic a s s h o w n
in F i g u r e E . 1 .
If v is ib le c lip p in g c a n n o t b e e s ta b lis h e d , th e m a x im u m a tta in a b le p o w e r s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d

a s th e non-clipped output power.
In a d d itio n , a ll of th e fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s s h a ll be c o n s id e re d under normal operating

conditions:
- T h e m o s t u n fa v o u ra b le rated load impedance o r th e a c tu a l lo u d s p e a k e r, w h e n p ro v id e d ,

is c o n n e c t e d t o t h e a m p l i f i e r o u t p u t .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 219 -
- Al l a m p l i f i e r c h a n n e l s a r e o p e r a t e d s i m u l t a n e o u s l y .
- Organs o r s im ila r in s tr u m e n ts th a t h a v e a t o n e - g e n e r a t o r u n it s h a ll n o t b e o p e r a te d w ith

th e 1 0 0 0 H z s ig n a l, b u t in s te a d b e o p e ra te d w ith a n y c o m b in a tio n o f tw o b a s s p e d a l k e y s ,
if p r e s e n t, a n d te n m a n u a l k e y s d e p r e s s e d . A ll s to p s a n d ta b s th a t c a n in c r e a s e th e o u tp u t
power s h a ll be a c tiv a te d and th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll be a d ju s te d to d e liv e r 1 /8 of th e
m a x im u m a tta in a b le o u tp u t p o w e r.
- Wher e th e in te n d e d a m p lifie r fu n c tio n depends on phase d iffe re n c e b e tw e e n tw o

c h a n n e ls , th e re s h a ll be a phase d iffe re n c e of 90° b e tw e e n s ig n a ls a p p lie d to th e tw o
c h a n n e ls .
- For e q u ip m e n t c o n ta in in g m u lti-c h a n n e l a m p lifie rs , w h e re som e c h a n n e ls cannot be

o p e ra te d in d e p e n d e n tly , th o s e c h a n n e ls s h a ll be o p e ra te d u s in g th e rated load
impedance a t t h e o u t p u t power le v e l th a t co rre sp o n d s, by d e s ig n , to 1 /8 of th e
non-clipped output power o f th e a d ju s ta b le a m p lifie r c h a n n e l(s ).
- Wher e c o n tin u o u s o p e ra tio n is not p o s s ib le ， th e a m p lifie r s h a ll be o p e ra te d at th e

m a x im u m o u tp u t p o w e r le v e l th a t a llo w s c o n tin u o u s o p e r a tio n .
The te m p e ra tu re m e a s u re m e n ts s h a ll be c a rrie d out w ith th e e q u ip m e n t p o s itio n e d in

a cco rd a n ce w ith th e in s tru c tio n m anual p ro v id e d b y th e m a n u f a c t u r e r , o r , in t h e absence of
in s tr u c tio n s , th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p o s itio n e d 5 c m b e h in d th e fr o n t e d g e o f a n o p e n - fr o n te d
wooden te s t b o x w ith 1 cm fre e space a lo n g th e s id e s and to p and 5 cm d e p th b e h in d th e
e q u ip m e n t.
Figure E.1 - Band-pass filter for wide-band noise measurement
E.3 Audio am plifier abnormal operating conditions
Abnormal operating conditions s h a ll be s im u la te d by a d ju s tin g th e c o n tro ls to th e m ost

u n fa v o u ra b le o u tp u t p o w e r fro m ze ro up to th e m a x im u m a tta in a b le o u tp u t power in to th e
m o s t u n fa v o u ra b le rated load impedance c o n n e c te d to th e o u tp u t te rm in a ls . S h o rt-c irc u it o f
t h e o u t p u t t e r m i n a l s is a l s o c o n s i d e r e d t o b e a n abnormal operating condition.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex F
(normative)
Equipment markings ，instructions， and instructional safeguards
F.1 General
T h is annex s p e c ifie s e q u ip m e n t m a rk in g s , e q u ip m e n t in s tru c tio n s , and instructional

safeguards n e ce ssa ry fo r e q u ip m e n t in s ta lla tio n , o p e ra tio n , m a in te n a n c e , and s e rv ic in g in
a c c o r d a n c e w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th is d o c u m e n t.
U n le s s s y m b o ls a re u s e d ，s a f e t y re la te d e q u ip m e n t m a rk in g , in s tru c tio n s and instructional

safeguards s h a l l b e in a l a n g u a g e a c c e p t e d i n t h e r e s p e c t i v e c o u n t r i e s .
T h is annex does not a p p ly to m a rk in g s on c o m p o n e n ts . M a rk in g s on c o m p o n e n ts a re

s p e c i f i e d in t h e r e l e v a n t c o m p o n e n t s t a n d a r d .
T h is a n n e x m a y a p p ly to s u b - a s s e m b lie s s u c h a s p o w e r s u p p lie s .
NOTE 1 Where the term marking is used in this document, it also applies to instructions and required elements of
an instructional safeguard.
NOTE 2 See Table F.1 for examples of markings.
C a re s h a ll b e ta k e n s o th a t a d d itio n a l m a r k in g s a n d in s tr u c tio n s n o t re q u ire d b y th is d o c u m e n t

d o n o t c o n tr a d ic t th e m a r k in g s a n d in s tr u c tio n s r e q u ir e d b y th is d o c u m e n t.
F.2 Letter symbols and graphical symbols
F.2.1 Letter symbols
L e t t e r s y m b o l s f o r q u a n t i t i e s a n d u n i t s s h a l l b e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 0 2 7 - 1 .
F.2.2 Graphical symbols
G ra p h ic a l s y m b o ls p la c e d on th e e q u ip m e n t fo r s a fe ty p u rp o se s, w h e th e r re q u ire d b y th is
d o c u m e n t o r n o t , s h a l l b e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h IE C 6 0 4 1 7 , IS O 3 8 6 4 -2 , IS O 7 0 0 0 o r IS O 7 0 1 0 ,
if a v a ila b le . In th e absence of s u ita b le s y m b o ls , th e m a n u fa c tu re r m ay d e s ig n s p e c ific
g ra p h ic a l s y m b o ls .
F.2.3 Compliance criteria
F.3 Equipment markings
F.3.1 Equipment marking locations
I n g e n e r a l , e q u i p m e n t m a r k i n g s s h a l l b e l o c a t e d n e a r o r a d j a c e n t t o t h e p a r t o r r e g i o n t h a t is
th e s u b je c t o f th e m a rk in g .
U n l e s s o t h e r w i s e s p e c i f i e d , e q u i p m e n t m a r k i n g s r e q u i r e d in F . 3 . 2 , F . 3 . 3 , F . 3 . 6 a n d F . 3 . 7 s h a l l
be o n th e e x te rio r o f th e e q u ip m e n t, e x c lu d in g th e b o tto m . H o w e v e r, th e s e m a rk in g s m a y be
in a n a r e a t h a t i s e a s i l y accessible b y h a n d , fo r e x a m p le :
- u n d e r a lid ; o r

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- o n th e e x te r io r o f th e b o tto m o f:
• direct plug-in equipment, hand-held equipment, transportable equipment; or
• movable equipment w ith a m ass n o t e x c e e d in g 18 kg, p ro v id e d th a t th e lo c a tio n of

t h e m a r k i n g i s g i v e n in t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s .
M a r k in g s s h a ll n o t b e p u t o n p a rts th a t c a n b e r e m o v e d w it h o u t th e u s e o f a tool, u n le s s th e y
a p p ly to th a t p a rt.
For permanently connected equipment, in s ta lla tio n in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll b e p r o v id e d e ith e r a s

m a rk in g s on th e e q u ip m e n t, or in th e in s tru c tio n s , or in a s e p a ra te in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n
d o c u m e n t.
F o r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to b e m o u n te d o n a s u p p o r t in g s tr u c tu r e (fo r e x a m p le , a ra c k , p a n e l,
w a ll, c e ilin g , e tc .) a n d w h e r e th e e x te r n a l s u r fa c e o f th e e q u ip m e n t b e c o m e s p a rtia lly in v is ib le
a fte r in s ta lla tio n , m a r k in g s m a y b e o n a n y s u rfa c e , in c lu d in g th e b o tto m , th a t b e c o m e s v is ib le
a fte r re m o v a l o f th e e q u ip m e n t fro m th e s u p p o rtin g s tru c tu re .
U n le s s th e m e a n in g of th e m a rk in g is o b v io u s , th e m a rk in g s h a ll be e x p la in e d in th e
in s tru c tio n s .
F.3.2 Equipment identification markings
F.3.2.1 Manufacturer identification
The m a n u fa c tu re r o r re s p o n s ib le v e n d o r s h a ll be id e n tifie d by m eans of a m a rk in g on th e

e q u ip m e n t. Id e n tific a tio n m ay be th e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s n a m e , th e re s p o n s ib le v e n d o r’s n a m e ，
tra d e m a rk , o r o th e r e q u iv a le n t id e n tific a tio n .
F.3.2.2 Model identification
The m o d e l n u m b e r , m o d e l n a m e , o r e q u iv a le n t s h a ll b e id e n tifie d b y m e a n s o f a m a rk in g on
F.3.3 Equipment rating markings
F.3.3.1 Equipment with direct connection to mains
If a u n it is p r o v i d e d w i t h a m e a n s f o r d i r e c t c o n n e c t i o n to th e mains, it s h a l l b e m a r k e d w i t h
a n e l e c t r i c a l r a t i n g , a s s p e c i f i e d in F . 3 . 3 . 3 t o F . 3 . 3 . 6 .
F.3.3.2 Equipment without direct connection to mains
If a u n it is not p ro v id e d w ith a m eans fo r d ire c t c o n n e c tio n to mains，

th e it n e e d not be
m a r k e d w ith a n y e le c tr ic a l ra tin g . H o w e v e r , a n y rated power or rated current m a rk in g o n th e
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith B .2 .5 .
F.3.3.3 Nature of the supply voltage
The n a tu re of th e s u p p ly v o lta g e , DC, AC, or th re e -p h a s e AC, s h a ll be m a rke d on th e

e q u i p m e n t a n d s h a l l i m m e d i a t e l y f o l l o w t h e e q u i p m e n t v o l t a g e r a t i n g . If a s y m b o l is u s e d ,
- t he s y m b o l IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 3 2 ( 2 0 0 2 - 1 0 ) s h a ll b e u s e d fo r A C ;

- 222 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- t he sym b o l IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 3 1 ( 2 0 0 2 - 1 0 ) s h a ll b e u s e d fo r D C ;
- t he sym b o l 3〜，I E C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 3 2 - 1 ( 2 0 0 2 - 1 0 ) s h a ll b e u s e d f o r th r e e - p h a s e A C ;
- t he sym bol 3N〜， | E C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 3 2 - 2 (2 0 0 2 -1 0 ) s h a ll be used fo r th re e -p h a s e AC w ith a

n e u tra l c o n d u c to r; o r
- t he sym b o l IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 3 3 ( 2 0 0 2 - 1 0 ) s h a ll b e u s e d fo r c o m b in e d A C a n d D C .
T h re e -p h a se e q u ip m e n t m a y be id e n tifie d w ith “ 3 -p h a s e ” o r “ 3 0 ” o r a n y o th e r a rra n g e m e n t

th a t c le a rly in d ic a te s th e p h a s e o f th e s u p p ly v o lta g e o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
F.3.3.4 Rated voltage
The rated voltage o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll be m a rke d on th e e q u ip m e n t. The v o lta g e ra tin g

m a rk in g s h a ll b e im m e d ia te ly fo llo w e d b y th e n a tu re o f th e s u p p ly m a rk in g .
The rated voltage m a y be:
- a s in g le , n o m in a l v a lu e ; o r
- a s in g le n o m in a l v a lu e a n d a to le ra n c e p e rc e n ta g e o f th e n o m in a l v a lu e ; o r
- t w o o r m o r e n o m in a l v a lu e s s e p a r a t e d b y a s o lid u s (/); o r
- a ra n g e in d ic a te d b y m in im u m a n d m a x im u m v a lu e s s e p a ra te d b y a h y p h e n ; o r
- a n y o th e r a rr a n g e m e n t th a t c le a rly in d ic a te s th e v o lta g e o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
If t h e e q u i p m e n t h a s m o r e t h a n o n e n o m i n a l v o l t a g e , a ll s u c h v o l t a g e s m a y b e m a r k e d o n t h e
e q u ip m e n t. H o w e ve r, th e v o lta g e fo r w h ic h th e e q u ip m e n t is s e t s h a l l be c le a rly in d ic a te d
(s e e F .3 .4 ). If th e e q u i p m e n t is i n s t a l l e d by a skilled person, th is in d ic a tio n m ay b e in t h e
in s ta lla tio n in s tr u c tio n s o r a t a n y lo c a tio n o n th e e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g in s id e th e e q u ip m e n t.
T h r e e - p h a s e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e m a r k e d w ith th e p h a s e - to - p h a s e v o lta g e , a s y m b o l in d ic a tin g

power s u p p ly s y s te m in a cco rd a n ce w ith IE C 6 1 2 9 3 , a s o lid u s (/), th e p h a s e -to -n e u tra l
v o lta g e , th e sym bol fo r v o lta g e (V) and th e num ber of phases, in th a t o rd e r. Any o th e r
a rra n g e m e n t th a t c le a rly in d ic a te s th e th re e -p h a s e rated voltage o f th e e q u ip m e n t is a l s o
a c c e p ta b le .
NOTE The solidus (/) represents the word “or” and the hyphen (-) represents the word “to” .
F.3.3.5 Rated frequency
The rated frequency o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e m a r k e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t.
The rated frequency m a y be:
- a s in g le , n o m in a l v a lu e ; o r
- a s in g le n o m in a l v a lu e a n d a to le ra n c e p e r c e n ta g e o f th e n o m in a l v a lu e ; o r
- t w o o r m o r e n o m in a l v a lu e s s e p a r a t e d b y a s o lid u s (/); o r
- a ra n g e in d ic a te d b y m in im u m a n d m a x im u m v a lu e s s e p a ra te d b y a h y p h e n ; o r
- a n y o th e r a rr a n g e m e n t th a t c le a rly in d ic a te s th e rated frequency o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
F.3.3.6 Rated current or rated power
The rated current or rated power o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e m a r k e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t.
For th re e -p h a s e e q u ip m e n t, th e rated current is th e cu rre n t of one phase and th e rated

power is t h e t o t a l p o w e r o f t h e t h r e e p h a s e s .
NOTE 1 B.2.5 establishes criteria for the way in which rated current or rated power are measured.

旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 1 :2 0 1 8
- ◎ 旧C 2 0 1 8
NOTE 2 The rated current or rated power need not be stated to more than one significant digit.
NOTE 3 In some countries， for markings on equipment， a period is used as the decimal designator
If t h e e q u i p m e n t h a s a s o c k e t - o u t l e t f o r p r o v i d i n g mains p o w e r to o th e r e q u ip m e n t, th e rated
current or rated power o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll in c lu d e th e a s s ig n e d c u r r e n t o r p o w e r o f th e
s o c k e t-o u tle t.
See F.3.5.1 fo r m a rk in g re q u ire m e n ts fo r a mains s o c k e t-o u tle t.
If t h e e q u i p m e n t h a s m o r e t h a n o n e rated voltage, th e rated current or rated power fo r e a ch

rated voltage s h a ll be m a rke d on th e e q u ip m e n t. The a rra n g e m e n t o f th e m a rk in g s s h a ll
c le a rly in d ic a te th e rated current or rated power a s s o c ia te d w ith e a c h rated voltage o f th e
e q u ip m e n t.
E q u ip m e n t w ith a rated voltage range m ay be m a rke d w ith e ith e r th e m a x im u m rated

current o r w ith th e c u r r e n t ra n g e .
F.3.3.7 Equipment with multiple supply connections
If t h e e q u ip m e n t h a s m u ltip le s u p p ly c o n n e c tio n s , e a c h c o n n e c tio n s h a ll be m a rke d w ith its

rated current or rated power.
W h e re th e m u ltip le mains s u p p lie s a re id e n tic a l, th e y m ay have one m a rk in g in d ic a tin g th e

n u m b e r o f s u p p lie s .
EXAMPLE “240 V 〜 / 10 A x ;V” where iV is the number of identical mains supply connections.
If t h e e q u i p m e n t h a s m u lt ip le s u p p ly c o n n e c t i o n s , a n d if e a c h c o n n e c t i o n h a s a d if f e r e n t rated
voltage t h a n th e o th e r s u p p ly c o n n e c tio n s , each c o n n e c tio n s h a ll be m a rke d w ith its rated
voltage.
T h e o v e ra ll s y s te m e le c tric a l ra tin g n e e d n o t b e m a rk e d .
F.3.3.8 Compliance criteria
F.3.4 Voltage setting device
If t h e e q u i p m e n t u s e s a v o l t a g e s e t t i n g d e v i c e t h a t is o p e r a b l e by an ordinary person or an
instructed person, th e a c t o f c h a n g in g th e v o lta g e s e ttin g s h a ll a ls o c h a n g e th e in d ic a tio n o f
t h e v o l t a g e f o r w h i c h t h e e q u i p m e n t is s e t. T h e s e t t in g s h a ll b e r e a d a b l e w h e n t h e e q u i p m e n t
is r e a d y f o r u s e .
If t h e e q u i p m e n t u s e s a v o l t a g e - s e t t i n g d e v i c e t h a t is o p e r a b l e o n l y b y a skilled person, and

if t h e a c t o f c h a n g i n g th e v o lta g e s e ttin g does n o t a ls o c h a n g e th e in d ic a tio n o f th e v o lta g e
ra tin g , an instructional safeguard s h a ll s ta te th a t, w h e n c h a n g in g th e v o lta g e s e ttin g , th e
in d ic a tio n o f th e v o lta g e s e ttin g s h a ll a ls o b e c h a n g e d .
F.3.5 Markings on terminals and operating devices
F.3.5.1 Mains appliance outlet and socket-outlet markings
If a mains a p p lia n c e o u t l e t is p ro v id e d on th e e q u ip m e n t, th e rated voltage and a s s ig n e d

c u r r e n t o r p o w e r s h a ll b e m a r k e d a d ja c e n t to th e a p p lia n c e o u tle t.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
If th e mains s o c k e t-o u tle t is c o n fig u re d in a cco rd a n ce w ith IE C TR 60083 or a re le v a n t

n a t i o n a l s t a n d a r d , t h e a s s i g n e d c u r r e n t o r p o w e r s h a ll b e m a r k e d . If t h e v o l t a g e o f t h e s o c k e t -
o u t l e t is t h e s a m e a s t h e mains v o lta g e , th e v o lta g e n e e d n o t b e m a rk e d .
F.3.5.2 Switch position identification marking
The p o s itio n o f a d is c o n n e c t s w itc h o r c ir c u it- b r e a k e r s h a ll be id e n tifie d . Such id e n tific a tio n

m a y be c o m p ris e d o f w o rd s , s y m b o ls , o r an in d ic a to r.
If a s y m b o l is u s e d , t h e s y m b o l s h a l l b e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 4 1 7 .
F.3.5.3 Replacement fuse identification and rating markings
If a f u s e is r e p l a c e a b l e by an ordinary person or an instructed person, id e n tific a tio n of a

s u ita b le re p la c e m e n t fu s e s h a ll be m a rke d a d ja c e n t to th e fu s e h o ld e r. Id e n tific a tio n s h a ll
in c lu d e th e fu s e c u r r e n t ra tin g a n d th e fo llo w in g a s a p p ro p ria te :
- if th e fu s e needs a s p e c ia l b re a k in g c a p a c ity w h ic h is n e ce ssa ry fo r th e safeguard

fu n c tio n , th e a p p ro p ria te s y m b o l th a t in d ic a te s th e b re a k in g c a p a c ity ;
- if th e fu s e c a n b e r e p la c e d w ith a fu s e o f a d iffe r e n t v o lt a g e ra tin g , th e fu s e v o lta g e ra tin g ;
- if th e fu s e is a tim e -d e la y fu s e , and th e tim e -d e la y is n e ce ssa ry fo r th e safeguard

fu n c tio n , th e a p p ro p ria te s y m b o l th a t in d ic a te s th e tim e -d e la y .
If a f u s e is r e p l a c e a b l e by an ordinary person, th e c o d in g s o f th e re le v a n t fu s e s s h a ll be
e x p l a i n e d in t h e u s e r i n s t r u c t i o n s .
If a f u s e is n o t r e p l a c e a b l e b y a n ordinary person or an instructed person:
- id e n tific a tio n o f a s u ita b le r e p la c e m e n t fu s e s h a ll b e m a rk e d a d ja c e n t to th e fu s e o r s h a ll

b e p r o v i d e d in t h e s e r v i c e i n s t r u c t i o n s ; a n d
- if th e fu s e is , o r c o u l d be, in t h e n e u tra l o f th e mains s u p p ly and a fte r o p e ra tio n o f th e

fu s e , p a rts o f th e e q u ip m e n t th a t re m a in e n e rg iz e d a re at E S 3 le v e l d u r in g s e rv ic in g , an
instructional safeguard s h a l l s ta te th a t th e fu s e m ay be in th e n e u tra l, and th a t th e
mains s h a l l b e d i s c o n n e c t e d t o d e -e n e rg iz e th e p h a s e c o n d u c to rs .
If a f u s e is n o t i n t e n d e d t o b e r e p l a c e a b l e , f u s e r a t i n g s n e e d n o t b e m a r k e d .
F.3.5.4 Replacement battery identification marking
If abattery c a n be re p la c e d by an in c o rre c t ty p e o f re p la c e a b le battery, an instructional

safeguard s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e M . 1 0 .
F.3.5.5 Neutral conductor terminal
For permanently connected equipment, t h e t e r m i n a l , i f a n y , in te n d e d e x c lu s iv e ly fo r

c o n n e c t i o n o M h e mains n e u t r a l c o n d u c t o r s h a l l b e i d e n t i f i e d b y t h e c a p ita l le tte r “ N ” .
F.3.5.6 Terminal marking location
T h e t e r m i n a l m a r k i n g s s p e c i f i e d in F . 3 . 5 . 5 , F . 3 . 6 . 1 a n d F .3 .6 .3 s h a ll n o t b e p la c e d o n s c re w s ,
re m o v a b le w a sh e rs, or o th e r p a rts th a t can be re m o ve d when c o n d u c to rs a re b e in g
c o n n e c te d .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
F.3.6 Equipment markings related to equipment classification
F.3.6.1 Class I equipment
F.3.6.1.1 Protective earthing conductor terminal
The te rm in a l in te n d e d fo r c o n n e c tio n of class I equipment to th e in s ta lla tio n protective

earthing conductor s h a ll b e id e n tifie d w ith th e s y m b o l ® , IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 9 ( 2 0 0 6 - 0 8 ) .
A te r m in a l in te n d e d fo r c o n n e c tio n o f a c la s s I s u b - a s s e m b ly (fo r e x a m p le , a p o w e r s u p p ly ), o r
a c o m p o n e n t ( fo r e x a m p le , a te r m in a l b lo c k ) to th e e q u ip m e n t protective earthing conductor
m ay be id e n tifie d w ith e ith e r sym bol IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 9 (2 0 0 6 -0 8 ), or w ith s y m b o l^ ,
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 7 (2 0 0 6 -0 8 ).
F.3.6.1.2 Protective bonding conductor terminals
T e rm in a ls fo r protective bonding conductors n e e d n o t b e id e n tifie d .
If such te rm in a ls a re id e n tifie d , th e y s h a ll be m a rke d w ith th e e a rth sym bol ^ ,

IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 1 7 (2 0 0 6 -0 8 ). H o w e v e r, a c o m p o n e n t te rm in a l o r a te rm in a l fo r b o n d in g w irin g
fro m th e a p p lia n c e in le t a lr e a d y m a rke d w ith th e s y m b o l® , I E C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 9 ( 2 0 0 6 - 0 8 ) ， is

a c c e p ta b le a s id e n tific a tio n o f a protective bonding conductor te rm in a l.
F.3.6.2 Equipment class marking
Class II equipment w ith a functional earthing c o n n e c tio n s h a ll bear th e sym bol
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 9 2 (2 0 1 3 -0 3 ).
A ll o t h e r class II equipment s h a ll b e a r th e s y m b o l ------- , IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -5 1 7 2 (2 0 0 3 -0 2 ).
T h e a b o v e s y m b o ls s h a ll n o t b e u s e d fo r class I equipment.
E q u ip m e n t p ro v id in g protective earthing to o th e r e q u ip m e n t s h a ll n o t b e c la s s ifie d a s class

II equipment.
F.3.6.3 Functional earthing terminal marking
W irin g te rm in a ls to be used o n ly fo r th e c o n n e c tio n of functional earthing s h a ll b e m a rke d
w ith th e sym bol IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 8 (2 0 1 1 -0 7 ). T h e se te rm in a ls s h a ll not be m a rke d w ith
th e s y m b o l ~ , IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 7 ( 2 0 0 6 - 0 8 ) o r w ith th e s y m b o l A ' f IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 1 9 (2 0 0 6 -
0 8 ).
H o w e ve r, th e s e s y m b o ls m ay be used fo r a w irin g te rm in a l p ro v id e d on a com ponent (fo r

e x a m p le , a te rm in a l b lo c k ) o r s u b a s s e m b ly .
\ F.3.7 Equipment IP rating marking
；I f t h e e q u ip m e n t is in te n d e d fo r o th e r th a n IP X 0 , th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e a r th e IP num ber
i a c c o r d i n g t o t h e d e g r e e o f p r o t e c t i o n a g a i n s t i n g r e s s o f w a t e r in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 5 2 9 .
Copyright International Eteclrotechmcal Commission

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
F.3.8 External power supply output marking
The DC o u tp u t of an e x te rn a l power s u p p ly s h a ll be m a rke d w ith th e v o lta g e ra tin g , th e

cu rre n t ra tin g and th e p o la rity . P o la rity m a rk in g is not re q u ire d when th e p in c o n fig u ra tio n
p re v e n ts re v e rs e d p o la rity . T h e A C o u tp u t o f a n e x te r n a l p o w e r s u p p ly s h a ll b e m a r k e d w ith
th e v o lta g e ra tin g , th e cu rre n t ra tin g and th e fre q u e n c y if it is d iffe re n t fro m th e in p u t
fre q u e n c y .
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement.
F.3.9 Durability, legibility and permanence of markings
In g e n e r a l , a ll m a rk in g s re q u ire d to be on th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll be d u ra b le and le g ib le , and

s h a ll b e e a s ily d is c e r n a b le u n d e r n o r m a l lig h tin g c o n d itio n s .
U n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d , instructional safeguards do not have to be in c o lo u r. If a n

instructional safeguard is in c o lo u r to in d ic a te h a za rd s e v e rity , th e c o lo u r s h a ll be in
a c c o r d a n c e w ith th e IS O 3 8 6 4 s e rie s . M a r k in g s th a t a re e n g r a v e d o r m o u ld e d n e e d n o t b e in
c o n tra s tin g c o lo u rs p ro v id e d th a t th e y a re le g ib le and re a d ily d is c e rn a b le under n o rm a l
lig h tin g c o n d itio n s .
P rin te d o r s c r e e n e d m a r k in g s s h a ll a ls o b e p e r m a n e n t.
Compliance is checked by inspection. Permanency is determined by the tests of F.3.10.
F.3.10 Test for the permanence of markings
F.3.10.1 General
Each required printed or screened marking shall be tested. However， if the data sheet for a
label confirms compliance with the test requirements, the test need not be performed.
F.3.10.2 Testing procedure
The test is conducted by rubbing the marking by hand without appreciable force for 15 s with
a piece o f cloth soaked with water and at a different place or on a different sample for 15 s
with a piece o f cloth soaked with the petroleum spirit specified in F.3.10.3.
F.3.10.3 Petroleum spirit
P e t r o l e u m s p i r i t is a r e a g e n t g r a d e h e x a n e w i t h a m i n i m u m o f 8 5 % n - h e x a n e .
NOTE The designation “n-hexane” is chemical nomenclature for“a "normal" or straight chain hydrocarbon. The
CAS (American Chemical Society) number of n-hexane is CAS#110-54-3.
After each test， the marking shall remain legible. If the marking is on a separable label, the
label shall show no curling and shall not be removable by hand.
F.4 Instructions
W hen in fo rm a tio n w ith re g a rd to s a fe ty is re q u ire d a c c o rd in g to th is d o c u m e n t, th is

in fo rm a tio n s h a ll b e g iv e n in a n in s tru c tio n fo r in s ta lla tio n o r in s tru c tio n fo r in itia l u s e . T h is
in fo r m a tio n s h a ll b e a v a ila b le p r io r to in s ta lla tio n a n d in itia l u s e o f th e e q u ip m e n t.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
E q u ip m e n t fo r use in lo c a tio n s w h e re c h ild re n a re not lik e ly to be p re se n t and th a t is

e v a lu a te d u s in g th e jo in te d te s t p ro b e of F ig u re V .2 s h a ll have th e fo llo w in g o r e q u iv a le n t
s t a t e m e n t in t h e u s e r i n s t r u c t i o n s .
NOTE 1 This equipment design typically applies to commercial or industrial equipment expected to be installed in
locations where only adults are normally present.
T h i s e q u i p m e n t i s n o t s u i t a b l e f o r u s e in l o c a t i o n s
w h e re c h ild re n a re lik e ly to b e p re s e n t.
NOTE 2 See also ISO/IEC Guide 37, instructions for use of products of consumer interest.
T h e in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll in c lu d e th e fo llo w in g a s fa r a s a p p lic a b le :
- I n s t r u c t i o n s to e n s u re c o rre c t a n d s a fe in s ta lla tio n a n d in te rc o n n e c tio n o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
- F o r e q u i p m e n t i n t e n d e d o n l y f o r u s e in a restricted access area, th e in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll so

s ta te .
- If t h e e q u i p m e n t is i n t e n d e d t o b e f a s t e n e d in p l a c e , t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l e x p l a i n h o w to
s e c u re ly fa s te n th e e q u ip m e n t.
- F o r a u d io e q u ip m e n t w ith te r m in a ls c la s s ifie d as ES3 in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h T a b le E .1 f a n d

fo r o th e r e q u ip m e n t w ith te rm in a ls m a rke d in a cco rd a n ce w ith F .3 .6 .1 , th e in s tru c tio n s
s h a ll r e q u ire th a t th e e x te r n a l w ir in g c o n n e c te d to th e s e t e r m in a ls s h a ll b e in s ta lle d by a
skilled person, o r s h a ll be c o n n e c te d by m eans o f re a d y-m a d e le a d s or co rd s th a t a re
c o n s t r u c t e d in a w a y t h a t w o u l d p r e v e n t c o n t a c t w i t h a n y E S 3 c i r c u i t .
- If protective earthing i s u s e d a s a safeguard, t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l r e q u i r e c o n n e c t i o n o f

t h e e q u i p m e n t protective earthing conductor t o t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n protective earthing
conductor ( f o r e x a m p l e , b y m e a n s o f a p o w e r c o r d c o n n e c t e d t o a s o c k e t - o u t l e t w i t h
e a rth in g c o n n e c tio n ).
- F o r e q u ip m e n t w ith protective conductor current on th e protective earthing conductor

e x c e e d in g th e E S 2 lim its o f 5 .2 .2 . 2 f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e a r a n instructional safeguard
in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 7 . 6 .
- Graphical s y m b o ls p la c e d on th e e q u ip m e n t and used as an instructional safeguard

s h a ll b e e x p la in e d .
- If a permanently connected equipment is n o t p r o v i d e d w i t h a n a l l - p o l e mains s w itc h , th e

in s tru c tio n s fo r in s ta lla tio n s h a ll s ta te th a t an a ll-p o le mains s w itc h in a c c o r d a n c e w ith
A n n e x L s h a l l b e i n c o r p o r a t e d in t h e e l e c t r i c a l i n s t a l l a t i o n o f t h e b u i l d i n g .
- If a r e p la c e a b le c o m p o n e n t o r m o d u le p ro v id e s a safeguard fu n c tio n , id e n tific a tio n of a

s u ita b le re p la c e m e n t com ponent or m o d u le s h a ll be p ro v id e d in th e ordinary person
in s tru c tio n s or instructed person in s tru c tio n s , or skilled person in s tru c tio n s , as
a p p lic a b le .
- For e q u ip m e n t c o n ta in in g an insulating liquid, s a fe ty in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w h e r e

a p p l i c a b l e , i n c l u d i n g t h e u s e o f P P E i f n e e d e d , t a k i n g i n t o a c c o u n t t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s d a t a
fo r th e insulating liquid a n d t h e i n f o r m a t i o n in t h e m a t e r i a l s a f e t y d a t a s h e e t .
- The in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s fo r outdoor equipment s h a l l i n c l u d e d e t a i l s of any s p e c ia l

fe a tu re s n e e d e d fo r p ro te c tio n f r o m c o n d i t i o n s in t h e outdoor location.
F.5 Instructional safeguards
U n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d , an instructional safeguard is c o m p ris e d of e le m e n t 1a or

e le m e n t 2 , o r b o th , t o g e t h e r w ith e le m e n t 3 a n d e le m e n t 4 . If a s u it a b le s y m b o l fo r e le m e n t 1a
is n o t a v a i l a b l e , t h e n e l e m e n t 1 b m a y b e u s e d i n s t e a d .
U n le s s o th e r w is e s p e c ifie d , th e lo c a tio n o f th e instructional safeguard s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- t he c o m p le te instructional safeguard s h a ll b e m a r k e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t; o r
- element 1a o r e le m e n t 2, o r b o th , s h a ll be m a rke d on th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th e c o m p le te
instructional safeguard s h a ll be in th e te x t of an a c c o m p a n y in g d o c u m e n t. If o n ly
e l e m e n t 2 is u s e d , t h e t e x t s h a l l b e p r e c e d e d b y t h e w o r d “ W a r n i n g ” o r “ C a u t i o n ” o r s i m i l a r
w o rd in g .
Any instructional safeguard e le m e n t p la c e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e v is ib le to th e p e r s o n

p r io r to p o te n tia l e x p o s u r e to th e c la s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e o r c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e p a r ts a n d a s
c lo s e a s r e a s o n a b ly p o s s ib le to th e e n e r g y s o u r c e p a r ts .
E l e m e n t s 1 a , 1 b , 2 , 3 , a n d 4 a r e s p e c i f i e d in T a b l e F . 1 .
A s in g le instructional safeguard m ay b e re la te d to s e v e r a l p a rts , p r o v id e d th o s e p a rts a re

c lo s e ly lo c a te d near each o th e r. A n a c c o m p a n y in g d o c u m e n t o r th e in s tru c tio n m a n u a l s h a ll
show th e lo c a tio n s o f th e s e p a rts , if t h e s e p a rts a re n o t e a s ily id e n tifia b le , or n o t lo c a te d
a d ja c e n t to th e instructional safeguard.
Table F.1 - Instructional safeguard element description and examples
Element Description Example
A symbol that identifies the nature of the class 2 or

1a class 3 energy source or the consequences that can
be caused by the class 2 or class 3 energy source. A
A symbol such as ISO 7000-0434 (2004-01) or a
ad®
combination of this symbol and ISO 7000-1641 (2004-
1b
01) to refer to text in an accompanying document.
These symbols may be combined.
Text that identifies the nature of the class 2 or class 3
energy source or the consequences that can be
2 Hot parts!
caused by the energy source, and the location of the
energy source.
Text that describes the possible consequences of

3 Burned fingers when handling the parts
energy transfer from the energy source to a body part.
Text that describes the safeguard action necessary to Wait one-half hour after switching off
4
avoid energy transfer to a body part. before handling parts
The symbols for elements 1a and 1b shall be from IEC 60417, ISO 3864-2, ISO 7000, ISO 7010 or the
equivalent.
F i g u r e F .1 illu s tra te s o n e e x a m p le o f th e a rra n g e m e n t o f th e fo u r e le m e n ts th a t c o m p ris e a

c o m p le te instructional safeguard. O t h e r a r r a n g e m e n t s in t h e p o s i t i o n i n g o f t h e e l e m e n t s a r e
a ls o a c c e p ta b le .
Hot parts!
A Burned fingers when handling the parts
Wait one-half hour after switching off before handling parts
t[c
Figure F.1 - Example of an instructional safeguard
S e e T a b le F .2 fo r e x a m p le s o f m a rk in g s , in s tru c tio n s , a n d instructional safeguards.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table F.2 - Examples of markings， instructions， and instructional safeguards
Rating Example
48 V DC
Rated DC voltage
48 V ---------
230 V
230 V ^ ^ ± 1 0 %
Rated AC voltage
100/120/220/240 V AC
100-250 V A C
400 Y/230 V 3 0
Rated 3-phase voltage 208 Y/120 V 3-phase
208 Y/120 V 3
50-60 Hz
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Rated current 1A
AC rated power
DC rated power
Instruction Example
Positioning of cell, IEC 60417-5002 (2002-10) ( + I
AC, IEC 60417-5032 (2002-10)
DC, IEC 60417-5031 (2002-10) 一一一
Class II equipm ent, IEC 60417-5172 (2003-02)

回
Caution, ISO 7000, 0434a or 0434b (2004-01)
A
Dangerous voltage, IEC 60417-5036 (2002-10)
Earth; ground, IEC 60417-5017 (2006-08) 丄
Protective earth; protective ground, IEC 60417-5019 (2006-08)

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex G
(normative)
Components
G.1 S w itc h e s
G.1.1 General
R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r s w i t c h e s t h a t a r e l o c a t e d in P S 3 a r e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w .
A switch may be tested separately or in the equipment.
G.1.2 Requirements
S w itc h e s u s e d a s disconnect devices s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s in A n n e x L.
A s w itc h s h a l l n o t b e f i t t e d in a mains s u p p ly c o rd .
A s w it c h s h a ll c o m p l y w it h a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g :
- c o m p l y w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 , w h e r e b y th e fo llo w in g a p p lie s :
• 10 0 0 0 o p e ra tin g c y c le s (s e e 7 .1 .4 .4 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 ) ;
• t h e s w i t c h s h a l l b e s u i t a b l e f o r u s e in t h e pollution degree e n v i r o n m e n t in w h i c h i t is
u s e d , ty p ic a lly a pollution degree 2 e n v ir o n m e n t (s e e 7 .1 .6 .2 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 ) ;
• th e s w itc h h a v e a g lo w w ire te m p e r a tu r e o f 8 5 0 °C (s e e 7 .1 .9 .3 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 );
• fo r mains s w i t c h e s u s e d in C R T t e l e v i s i o n s , t h e s p e e d o f c o n t a c t m a k i n g a n d b r e a k i n g
s h a ll b e in d e p e n d e n t o f th e s p e e d o f a c tu a tio n ;
NOTE This is because there is a high inrush current due to the degausing coil.
• th e c h a ra c te ris tic s of th e s w itc h w ith re g a rd to th e ra tin g s and c la s s ific a tio n (se e

IEC 61058-1) s h a l l b e a p p r o p r i a t e f o r th e fu n c tio n of th e s w itc h under normal
operating conditions a s g i v e n b e l o w :
- t h e r a tin g s o f th e s w itc h ( s e e C la u s e 6 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6);
- t h e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f t h e s w it c h a c c o r d i n g to :
• n a tu r e o f s u p p ly ( s e e 7 .1 .1 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 ) ;
• ty p e o f lo a d to b e c o n tr o lle d b y th e s w itc h (s e e 7 .1 .2 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 );
• a m b ie n t a ir te m p e r a tu r e (s e e 7 .1 .3 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 ).
Compliance is checked according to IEC 61058-1:2016.

- t he s w itc h s h a ll be so c o n s tru c te d t h a t it d o e s n o t a tta in e x c e s s iv e te m p e ra tu re s under
normal operating conditions;
Compliance is checked in the on-position according to 16.2.2 d), I) and m) of
IEC 61058-1:2008, except the current is the sum of the equipment current and the
maximum current supplied to other equipment, if any.
- a mains s w itc h c o n tr o llin g c o n n e c t o r s s u p p ly in g p o w e r to o th e r e q u ip m e n t s h a ll w ith s ta n d
th e e le c tric a l e n d u ra n ce te s t a c c o rd in g to 1 7 .2 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 : 2 0 1 6 f w ith an a d d itio n a l
lo a d a c c o r d in g to F ig u r e 9 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 . T h e to ta l c u r r e n t r a tin g o f th e a d d itio n a l
lo a d s h a ll co rre sp o n d to th e m a rk in g of th e c o n n e c to rs s u p p ly in g power to o th e r
e q u ip m e n t. T h e p e a k s u r g e c u r r e n t o f th e a d d itio n a l lo a d s h a ll h a v e a v a lu e a s s h o w n in
T a b le G .1 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table G.1 - Peak surge current
Current rating Peak surge current

A A
up to and including 0,5 20

over 2,5 150
G.1.3 Test method and compliance criteria
The tests of IEC 61058-1:2016 shall be applied with the modifications shown in G.1.2.
After the tests, the switch shall show no deterioration of its e n c lo s u re and no loosening of
electrical connections or mechanical fixings.
G.2 Relays
G.2.1 Requirements
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r r e l a y s t h a t a r e l o c a t e d in a P S 3 c i r c u i t a r e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w .
A r e l a y m a y b e t e s t e d s e p a r a t e l y o r in t h e e q u i p m e n t .
F o r r e s i s t a n c e t o h e a t a n d f i r e , s e e C l a u s e 1 6 in I E C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 5 .
A re la y s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts of IE C 6 1 8 1 0 -1 :2 0 1 5 , ta k in g in to account th e

fo llo w in g :
- m a t e r i a l s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 6 .4 .5 .2 o r p a s s a g lo w w ire te s t a t 7 5 0 °C o r a n e e d le fla m e

te s t;
- 1 0 000 o p e ra tin g c y c le s fo r e n d u ra n ce (se e 5 .5 of IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5 ) and d u rin g th e

e le c tric e n d u ra n ce te s t (s e e C la u s e 11 o f I E C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 5 ) ，n o t e m p o r a r y m a lfu n c tio n
s h a ll o c c u r;
NOTE A temporary malfunction is an event that has to be eliminated during the test at latest after one
additional energization cycle without any external influence (see Clause 11 of IEC 61810-1:2015).
- t he re la y s h a ll b e s u ita b le fo r u se in t h e a p p lic a b le p o llu tio n s itu a tio n (se e C la u s e 13 o f

IE C 6 1 8 1 0 -1 :2 0 1 5 );
- c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f th e re la y w ith re g a rd to th e ra tin g s a n d c la s s ific a tio n (s e e IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 ) ,

s h a ll be a p p ro p ria te fo r th e fu n c tio n o f th e re la y under normal operating condition as
g iv e n b e lo w :
• r a t e d c o il v o l t a g e a n d r a t e d c o il v o l t a g e r a n g e ( s e e 5 .1 o f I E C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 5 ) ;
• r a te d c o n ta c t lo a d a n d th e ty p e o f lo a d ( s e e 5 .7 o f IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5);
• re le a s e v o lta g e (s e e 5 .3 o f IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5 ) ;
• th e a m b ie n t a ir te m p e r a tu r e and upper and lo w e r lim it o f th e te m p e r a tu r e (s e e 5 .8 o f

IE C 6 1 8 1 0 -1 :2 0 1 5 );
• o n ly r e la y t e c h n o lo g y c a t e g o r y R T IV a n d R T V s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d to m e e t pollution
degree 1 e n v iro n m e n t, fo r e x a m p le , th e re la y m e e ts 5 .4 .1 .5 .2 o f th is d o c u m e n t (se e
5 .9 o f IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5 ) ;
- electric s tre n g th (se e 1 0 .3 of IE C 6 1 8 1 0 -1 :2 0 1 5 ), except th e te s t v o lta g e s h a ll be th e

r e q u i r e d t e s t v o l t a g e s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 9 . 1 o f th is d o c u m e n t;

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- if th e required withstand voltage ( r e f e r r e d t o a s i m p u l s e w i t h s t a n d v o l t a g e in

IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 ) e x c e e d s 1 2 k V , clearances s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h T a b l e 1 4 o f t h i s d o c u m e n t ;
- RMS working voltage ( r e f e r r e d

if th e t o a s v o l t a g e R M S in I E C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 ) e x c e e d s 5 0 0 V ,
creepage distances s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h T a b le 17 o f th is d o c u m e n t;
- solid insulation in a cco rd a n ce w ith 1 3 .3 of IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5 or w ith 5 .4 .4 of th is

d o c u m e n t.
Compliance is checked according to IEC 61810-1 and the requirements of this document.
G.2.2 Overload test
A relay shall withstand the following test.
The contact of the relay is subjected to an overload test consisting of 50 cycles o f operation at
the rate of 6 to 10 cycles per minute， making and breaking 150 % of the current imposed in
the application, except that where a contact switches a motor load, the test is conducted with
the rotor of the motor in a locked condition. After the test, the relay shall still be functional.
G.2.3 Relay controlling connectors supplying power to other equipment
A m a in s relay controlling connectors supplying power to other equipment shall withstand the
endurance test of Clause 11 of IEC 61810-1:2015, with an additional load that is equal to the
total marked load o f the connectors supplying power to other equipment.
For m a in s relays, the tests of IEC 61810-1 and this document shall be applied with the
modifications shown in Clause G.2 of this document.
After the tests， the relay shall show no deterioration of its e n clo su re , no reduction of
cle a ra n ce s and creepage d is ta n c e s and no loosening of electrical connections or
mechanical fixings.
G .3 Protective devices
G.3.1 Thermal cut-offs
G.3.1.1 Requirements
A thermal cut-off used as a safeguard s h a ll c o m p ly w ith r e q u ir e m e n t s a ) a n d b), o r c ).
NOTE In IEC 60730-1, a “thermal cut-off’ is a “thermal cut-out”
a) The thermal cut-off, when te s te d as a s e p a ra te c o m p o n e n t, s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e

re q u ir e m e n ts a n d te s ts o f th e IE C 6 0 7 3 0 s e rie s a s fa r a s a p p lic a b le :
- t he thermal cut-off s h a ll b e o f T y p e 2 a c tio n (s e e 6 .4 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 );
- t he thermal cut-off s h a ll h a v e a t le a s t m ic r o - d is c o n n e c tio n , T y p e 2 B (se e 6 .4 .3 .2 and

6 .9 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ;
- t he thermal cut-off s h a ll have a trip -fre e m e c h a n is m in w h ic h c o n ta c ts cannot be

p re v e n te d fro m o p e n in g a g a in s t a c o n tin u a tio n of a fa u lt, Type 2E (se e 6 .4 .3 .5 of
IE C 6 0 7 3 0 -1 :2 0 1 3 );
- t h e n u m b e r o f c y c le s o f a u to m a tic a c tio n s h a ll b e a t le a s t:
• 3 0 0 0 c y c le s fo r a thermal cut-off w i t h a u t o m a t i c r e s e t u s e d in c i r c u i t s t h a t a r e n o t
s w i t c h e d o f f w h e n t h e e q u i p m e n t is s w i t c h e d o f f ( s e e 6 . 1 1 . 8 o f I E C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 3 ) ,
• 300 c y c le s fo r a thermal cut-off w ith a u to m a tic re se t used in c irc u its th a t a re

s w itc h e d o ff to g e t h e r w ith a p p a ra tu s and fo r thermal cut-off w ith no a u to m a tic

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
re s e t th a t can b e re s e t b y h a n d fro m th e o u ts id e o f th e e q u ip m e n t (s e e 6 .1 1 .1 0 o f
IE C 6 0 7 3 0 -1 :2 0 1 3 ),
• 3 0 c y c le s fo r a thermal cut-off w ith n o a u to m a tic r e s e t a n d th a t c a n n o t b e re s e t b y

h a n d fro m th e o u ts id e o f th e e q u ip m e n t (s e e 6 .1 1 .1 1 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 );
- t he thermal cut-off s h a ll b e te s te d a s d e s ig n e d fo r a lo n g p e rio d o f e le c tric a l s tre s s

a c ro s s in s u la tin g p a rts (s e e 6 .1 4 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ;
- t he thermal cut-off s h a ll m e e t th e c o n d itio n in g r e q u ir e m e n ts fo r a n in te n d e d u s e o f a t

le a s t 10 0 0 0 h (s e e 6 .1 6 .3 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ;
- t he c o n ta c t g a p , a n d th e d is ta n c e b e tw e e n th e te rm in a tio n s and c o n n e c tin g le a d s of

th e c o n ta c ts , s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 1 3 .1 .4 a n d 1 3 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 .
b) T h e c h a ra c te ris tic s o f th e thermal cut-off w ith r e g a r d to
- t he ra tin g s o f th e thermal cut-off ( s e e C la u s e 5 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3);
- t he c la s s ific a tio n o f th e thermal cut-off a c c o r d in g to th e :
• n a t u r e o f s u p p l y ( s e e 6 .1 o f I E C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 3 ) ,
• ty p e o f lo a d to b e c o n tr o lle d (s e e 6 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ,
• d e g re e o f p ro te c tio n p ro v id e d by enclosures a g a in s t in g r e s s o f s o lid o b je c ts and

d u s t ( s e e 6 .5 .1 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ,
• d e g re e o f p ro te c tio n p ro v id e d by enclosures a g a in s t h a rm fu l in g re s s o f w a te r (s e e
6 .5 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ,
• p o llu tio n s itu a tio n fo r w h ic h th e thermal cut-off is s u ita b le (se e 6 .5 .3 of

IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ,
• m a x im u m a m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e lim it (s e e 6 .7 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ,
s h a l l b e a p p r o p r i a t e f o r t h e a p p l i c a t i o n in t h e e q u i p m e n t .
c) The thermal cut-off w h e n te s te d a s a p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll:
- have at le a s t m ic ro -d is c o n n e c tio n a c c o rd in g to IE C 6 0 7 3 0 -1 w ith s ta n d in g a te s t

v o lt a g e a c c o r d in g to 1 3 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 3 ; a n d
- have a trip -fre e m e c h a n is m in w h ic h c o n ta c ts cannot be p re v e n te d fro m o p e n in g

a g a in s t a c o n tin u a tio n o f a fa u lt; a n d
- be c o n d itio n e d fo r 300 h w hen th e e q u ip m e n t is o p e ra te d under normal operating

conditions at an a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re of 30 °C or at th e m a x im u m a m b ie n t
t e m p e r a t u r e s p e c i f i e d b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , w h i c h e v e r is h i g h e r ; a n d
- be s u b je c te d to a n u m b e r o f c y c le s o f a u to m a tic a c tio n as s p e c ifie d u n d e r a) fo r a

thermal cut-off te s te d as a s e p a ra te c o m p o n e n t, by e s tim a tin g th e re le v a n t fa u lt
c o n d itio n s .
G.3.1.2 Test method and compliance criteria
The th e rm a l c u t- o ff is checked according to the test specifications of IEC 60730 series by

inspection and by measurement. The test is made on three specimens.
During the test， no sustained arcing shall occur. After the test， the th e rm a l c u t_ o ff shall show
no loosening of electrical connections or mechanical fixings.
G.3.2 Thermal links
A th e rm a l lin k u s e d a s a safeguard s h a ll m e e t e ith e r r e q u ir e m e n t a ) o r b) b e lo w :
a) The th e rm a l lin k when te s te d as a s e p a ra te c o m p o n e n t ， s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e

r e q u ir e m e n ts o f IE C 6 0 6 9 1 .
T h e c h a r a c t e r is t ic s o f th e th e r m a l lin k w ith r e g a r d to :

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- t he a m b ie n t c o n d itio n s (s e e C la u s e 5 o f IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5 );
- t h e e l e c t r i c a l c o n d i t i o n s ( s e e 6 .1 o f I E C 6 0 6 9 1 : 2 0 1 5 ) ;
- t he th e rm a l c o n d itio n s (s e e 6 .2 o f IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5 );
- t h e r a tin g o f th e th e r m a l lin k ( s e e C la u s e 8 b ) o f IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5 ) ; a n d
- t he s u ita b ility fo r s e a lin g in , o r u s e w it h im p re g n a tin g flu id s o r c le a n in g s o lv e n ts (se e

C la u s e 8 c) o f IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5 ),
s h a ll be a p p ro p ria te fo r th e a p p lic a tio n in th e e q u ip m e n t under normal operating

conditions and under single fault conditions.
The e le c tric s tre n g th o f th e th e rm a l lin k s h a ll m e e t th e re q u ire m e n ts o f 5 .4 .9 .1 o f th is
docum ent except a cro ss th e d is c o n n e c tio n (c o n ta c t p a rts ) and except b e tw e e n
te rm in a tio n s and c o n n e c tin g le a d s of th e c o n ta c ts , fo r w h ic h 1 0 .3 of IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5
a p p lie s .
b) T h e th e r m a l lin k w h e n te s te d a s a p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll be:
- aged fo r 300 h at a te m p e ra tu re c o rre s p o n d in g to th e a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re o f th e

th e rm a l lin k w h e n th e e q u i p m e n t is o p e r a t e d under normal operating conditions at
a n a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re o f 3 0 °C o r a t th e m a x im u m a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re s p e c ifie d b y
t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , w h i c h e v e r is h i g h e r ; a n d
- s u b j e c t e d to s u c h single fault conditions o f th e e q u ip m e n t t h a t c a u s e th e t h e r m a l lin k

to o p e r a te . D u r in g th e te s t, n o s u s ta in e d a r c in g s h a ll o c c u r ; a n d
- capable o f w ith s ta n d in g tw o tim e s th e v o lta g e a c ro s s th e d is c o n n e c tio n and have an

in s u la tio n re s is ta n c e o f a t le a s t 0 ,2 MQ, when m e a su re d w ith a v o lta g e e q u a l to tw o
tim e s th e v o lta g e a c ro s s th e d is c o n n e c tio n .
If a thermal link is tested as a separate component according to G.3.2.1 a) above, compliance

is checked according to the test specifications of IEC 60691 f by inspection and measurement.
If a thermal link is tested as a part of the equipment according to G.3.2.1 b) above ，

compliance is checked by inspection and by the specified tests in the given order. The test is
carried out three times. The thermal link is replaced partially or completely after each test.
When the thermal link cannot be replaced partially or completely, the complete component
part including the thermal link (for example, a transformer) should be replaced.
No failure is allowed.
G.3.3 PTC thermistors
PTC th e rm is to rs used as s a fe g u a rd s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e s 1 5 ， 1 7 ，丄 15 and 丄 17 of

IE C 6 0 7 3 0 -1 :2 0 1 3 .
F o r P T C th e rm is to rs ,
- whose c o n tin u o u s p o w e r d is s ip a tio n th a t a p p e a rs a t its m a x im u m v o lta g e at an a m b ie n t

te m p e ra tu re of 25 °C or o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d by th e m a n u fa c tu re r fo r trip p e d s ta te ,
d e t e r m i n e d a s g i v e n in 3 . 3 8 o f I E C 6 0 7 3 8 - 1 : 2 0 0 6 , e x c e e d s 1 5 W ; a n d
- wi t h a s iz e o f 1 7 5 0 m m 3 o r m o re ; a n d
- l o c a t e d in a P S 2 o r P S 3 c i r c u i t ,
th e e n c a p s u la tio n o r tu b in g s h a ll b e m a d e o f V-1 class material o r e q u iv a le n t m a te ria l.
NOTE Tripped state means the state in which PTC thermistors are shifted to a high resistance condition at a
given temperature.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.3.4 Overcurrent protective devices
E x c e p t fo r d e v ic e s co ve re d by G .3 .5 , o ve rcu rre n t p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s used as a safeguard

s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e ir a p p lic a b le IE C s ta n d a rd s in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 4 . 1 . 2 . S u c h a p r o t e c t i v e
d e v ic e s h a ll have a d e q u a te b re a k in g (ru p tu rin g ) c a p a c ity to in te rru p t th e m a x im u m fa u lt
c u r r e n t ( in c lu d in g s h o r t- c ir c u it c u r r e n t) th a t c a n flo w .
G.3.5 Safeguard components not mentioned in G.3.1 to G.3.4
Such p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s (fo r e x a m p le , fu s in g re s is to rs , fu s e -lin k s not s ta n d a rd iz e d in

IE C 6 0 1 2 7 s e rie s , IE C 6 0 2 6 9 s e r ie s o r m in ia tu r e c ir c u it b r e a k e r s ) s h a ll h a v e a d e q u a te ra tin g
in c lu d in g b re a k in g c a p a c ity .
For n o n -re s e tta b le p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s , such as fu s e -lin k s , a m a rk in g s h a ll be p ro v id e d in

a c c o r d a n c e w ith F .3 .5 .3 .
Compliance is checked by inspection and by performing s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n testing as

specified in Clause BA.
The test is carried out three times. No failure is allowed.
G.4 Connectors
G.4.1 Clearance and creepage distance requirements
The clearance creepage distance b e t w e e n t h e o u t e r

and in s u la tin g s u rfa c e o f a c o n n e c to r
( i n c l u d i n g a n o p e n i n g in t h e enclosure) a n d c o n d u c t i v e p a rts th a t a re c o n n e c te d to ES2
w i t h i n t h e c o n n e c t o r ( o r in t h e enclosure) s h a l l c o m p l y w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts fo r basic
insulation.
The clearance creepage distance b e t w e e n t h e o u t e r i n s u l a t i n g s u r f a c e o f a c o n n e c t o r

and
( i n c l u d i n g a n o p e n i n g in t h e enclosure) a n d c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s t h a t a r e c o n n e c t e d t o ES3
w i t h i n t h e c o n n e c t o r ( o r i n t h e enclosure) s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r reinforced
insulation. A s a n e x c e p t i o n , t h e clearance a n d creepage distance m a y c o m p l y w i t h t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r basic insulation i f t h e c o n n e c t o r i s :
- f i xed to th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
- l o c a t e d in te r n a lly to th e o u t e r electrical enclosure o f th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
- only accessible a fte r re m o v a l o f a s u b a s s e m b ly th a t
• is r e q u i r e d t o b e in p l a c e d u r i n g normal operating conditions, and
• is p r o v i d e d w i t h a n instructional safeguard to re p la c e th e re m o v e d s u b a s s e m b ly .
T h e te s ts o f 5 .3 .2 a p p ly to s u c h c o n n e c t o r s a fte r r e m o v a l o f th e s u b a s s e m b ly .
G.4.2 Mains connectors
Mains c o n n e c to rs th a t a re lis te d in IEC TR 60083 and c o m p ly w ith IEC 6 0 8 8 4 - 1 , or th a t

c o m p ly w ith one of th e fo llo w in g s ta n d a rd s - IEC 60309 s e rie s , IEC 6 0 3 2 0 s e rie s ,
IEC 6 0 9 0 6 -1 or IEC 6 0 9 0 6 -2 - a re c o n s id e re d a c c e p ta b le w ith o u t fu rth e r e v a lu a tio n when
u s e d w ith in th e ir ra tin g s fo r th e p u r p o s e o f c o n n e c tin g o r in te r c o n n e c tin g mains p o w e r.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
G.4.3 Connectors other than mains connectors
C o n n e c to rs o th e r th a n fo r c o n n e c tin g mains p o w e r s h a l l b e s o d e s i g n e d t h a t th e p lu g has

such a shape th a t in s e rtio n in to a mains s o c k e t - o u t l e t o r a p p l i a n c e c o u p l e r is u n lik e ly to
o ccu r.
EXAMPLE Connectors meeting this requirement are those constructed as described in IEC 60130-9, IEC 60169-3
or IEC 60906-3. An example of a connector not meeting the requirements of this subclause is the so-called
"banana” plug. Standard 3,5 mm audio plugs are not considered likely to be put in the mains socket outlet.
G_5 Wound components
G.5.1 Wire insulation in wound components
G.5.1.1 General
T h is c la u s e a p p lie s to wound c o m p o n e n ts c o m p ris in g basic insulation, supplementary

insulation or reinforced insulation.
G.5.1.2 Protection against mechanical stress
W h e re tw o w in d in g w ire s , or one w in d in g w ire and a n o th e r w ire , a re in c o n ta c t in s id e th e

w o u n d c o m p o n e n t, c r o s s in g e a c h o th e r a t a n a n g le b e tw e e n 4 5 ° a n d 9 0 °, o n e o f th e fo llo w in g
a p p lie s :
- protection a g a in s t m e c h a n ic a l s tr e s s s h a ll b e p r o v id e d . F o r e x a m p le , th is p ro te c tio n can

b e a c h ie v e d b y p ro v id in g p h y s ic a l s e p a ra tio n in t h e f o r m o f in s u la tin g s le e v in g or sheet
m a te ria l, o r b y u s in g d o u b le th e r e q u ire d n u m b e r o f in s u la tio n la y e rs o n th e w in d in g w ire ;
or
- t he w o u n d c o m p o n e n t p a s s e s th e e n d u ra n c e te s ts o f G .5 .2 .
A d d it io n a l ly , if t h e a b o v e c o n s t r u c t i o n p ro v id e s basic insulation, supplementary insulation

or reinforced insulation, th e fin is h e d w o u n d c o m p o n e n t s h a l l p a s s a routine test f o r e l e c t r i c
s t r e n g t h in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 9 . 2 .
Compliance is checked by 5.4.4.1 and, where required, by G.5.2. If the tests of Annex J are
required, they are not repeated if the material data sheets confirm compliance.
G.5.2 Endurance test
G.5.2.1 General test requirements
Where required by G.5.1.2, three samples o f the wound component are subjected to 10 test
cycles as follows:
- The samples are subjected to the heat run test of G.5.2.2. After the test, the samples are
allowed to cool down to ambient temperature.
- The samples are then subjected to the vibration test of G.15.2.4.
- The samples are then subjected for two days to the humidity conditioning o f 5.4.8.
The tests described below are made before the start of the 10 cycles and after each cycle.
The electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 is carried out.
After the electric strength test, the test of G.4.3 is made on wound components that are
supplied from the m ains, except for switching mode power supply.
旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.5.2.2 Heat run test
Depending on the type thermal classification of the insulation, the specimens are kept in a
heating cabinet for a combination of time and temperature as specified in Table G.2. The
10 cycles are carried out with the same combination.
The temperature in the heating cabinet shall be maintained within a tolerance o f ± 5 °C.
Table G.2 - Test temperature and testing time (days) per cycle
Thermal Class 105 Class 120 Class 130 Class 155 Class 180 Class 200 Class 220 Class 250
classification (A) (E) (B) (F) (H) (N) (R) ■
Test
temperature Testing time duration for the test of G.5.2
°C
290 4 days
280 7 days
270 14 days
260 4 days
250 7 days
240 4 days 14 days
230 7 days
220 4 days 14 days
210 7 days
200 14 days
190 4 days
180 7 days
170 14 days
160 4 days
150 4 days 7 days

140 7 days
130 4 days
120 7 days
The classes are related to the classification of electrical insulating materials and EIS in accordance with
The manufacturer shall specify the test duration or the test temperature.
G.5.2.3 Wound components supplied from the mains
One input circuit is connected to a voltage equal to a test voltage o f at least 1f2 times the
ra te d volta ge, at double the ra te d fre q u e n c y for 5 min. No load is connected to the
transformer. During the test， multiple wire windings, if any, are connected in series.
A higher test frequency may be used; the duration of the period of connection, in minutes,
then being equal to 10 times the ra te d fre q u e n c y divided by the test frequency, but not less
than 2 min.
The test voltage is initially set at ra te d v o lta g e and gradually increased up to 1y2 times the
initial value, and then maintained for the time specified. If during the test there is a non-linear
change of current in an uncontrollable manner， it is regarded as breakdown between winding
turns.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
G.5.2.4 Compliance criteria
For wound components supplied from the m ains, there shall be no breakdown o f the
insulation between the turns of a winding, between input and output windings, between
adjacent input windings and between adjacent output windings, or between the windings and
any conductive core.
G.5.3 Transformers
G.5.3.1 General
T r a n s fo r m e r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :
- m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s g i v e n in G . 5 . 3 . 2 a n d G . 5 . 3 . 3;
- I E C 6 1 2 0 4 - 7 f o r a t r a n s f o r m e r u s e d in a l o w - v o l t a g e p o w e r s u p p l y ;
- meet th e re q u ire m e n ts of IE C 6 1 5 5 8 -1 and th e re le v a n t p a rts of IE C 6 1 5 5 8 -2 w ith th e

fo llo w in g a d d itio n s a n d lim ita tio n s :
• th e lim it v a lu e s fo r E S 1 o f th is d o c u m e n t a p p ly (s e e 5 .2 .2 .2 );
• fo r working voltages above 1 000 V RMS, see 1 8 .3 o f IE C 6 1 5 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 7 u s in g th e

t e s t v o l t a g e s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 9 . 1 ;
• th e o v e rlo a d te s t a c c o rd in g to G .5 .3 .3; a n d
• I E C 6 1 5 5 8 - 2 - 1 6 f o r t r a n s f o r m e r s u s e d in a s w i t c h m o d e p o w e r s u p p l y ; o r
- m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s g i v e n in G . 5 . 3 . 4 f o r a t r a n s f o r m e r t h a t u s e s FIW.
EXAMPLES The relevant parts of IEC 61558-2 are:
一 IEC 61558-2-1: Separating transformers;
- I EC 61558-2-4: Isolating transformers; and
一 IEC 61558-2-6: Safety isolating transformers.
G.5.3.2 Insulation
G.5.3.2.1 Requirements
I n s u l a t i o n in t r a n s f o r m e r s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s .
W in d in g s and c o n d u c tiv e p a rts o f tra n s fo rm e rs s h a ll be tre a te d as p a rts o f th e c irc u its to

w h ic h t h e y a r e c o n n e c t e d , if a n y . T h e in s u la t io n b e tw e e n th e m s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t
re q u ire m e n ts o f C la u s e 5 and pass th e re le v a n t e le c tric s tre n g th te s ts , a c c o rd in g to th e
a p p l i c a t i o n o f t h e i n s u l a t i o n in t h e e q u i p m e n t -
p re c a u tio n s s h a ll be ta k e n to p re v e n t th e re d u c tio n b e lo w th e re q u ire d m in im u m v a lu e s of

clearances a n d creepage distance th a t p ro v id e basic insulation， supplementary
insulation o r reinforced insulation b y :
- d i s p l a c e m e n t o f w in d in g s , o r th e ir tu rn s ;
- d i s p l a c e m e n t o f in te rn a l w irin g o r w ire s fo r e x te rn a l c o n n e c tio n s ;
- u n d u e d i s p l a c e m e n t o f p a r t s o f w i n d i n g s o r i n t e r n a l w i r i n g , in t h e e v e n t o f r u p t u r e o f w i r e s
a d ja c e n t to c o n n e c tio n s o r lo o s e n in g o f th e c o n n e c tio n s ; a n d
- bridging of in s u la tio n by w ire s , scre w s, w a sh e rs and th e lik e s h o u ld th e y lo o s e n or

b e c o m e fre e .
It i s n o t e x p e c t e d t h a t t w o i n d e p e n d e n t f i x i n g s w i l l l o o s e n a t t h e s a m e t i m e .
A ll w in d in g s s h a ll h a v e th e e n d tu r n s r e ta in e d b y p o s itiv e m e a n s .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
E x a m p le s o f a c c e p ta b le fo rm s o f c o n s tru c tio n a re th e fo llo w in g (th e re a re o th e r a c c e p ta b le

fo rm s o f c o n s tru c tio n ):
- windings is o la te d fro m e a c h o th e r b y p la c in g th e m on s e p a ra te lim b s o f th e c o re , w ith o r

w ith o u t s p o o ls ;
- w i n d i n g s o n a s in g le s p o o l w ith a p a rtitio n w a ll, w h e r e e ith e r th e s p o o l a n d p a rtitio n w a ll

a re p re sse d o r m o u ld e d in o n e p ie c e , o r a p u s h e d - o n p a rtitio n w a ll has an in te rm e d ia te
s h e a th o r c o v e r in g o v e r th e jo in t b e tw e e n th e s p o o l a n d th e p a rtitio n w a ll;
- concentric w in d in g s on a spool of in s u la tin g m a te ria l w ith o u t fla n g e s , or on in s u la tio n

a p p l i e d in t h i n s h e e t f o r m t o t h e t r a n s f o r m e r c o r e ;
- insulation is p r o v i d e d b e tw e e n w in d in g s c o n s is tin g o f s h e e t in s u la tio n e x te n d in g beyond

th e e n d tu r n s o f e a c h la y e r;
- c o n c e n t r i c w in d in g s , s e p a r a t e d b y a n e a r t h e d c o n d u c t iv e s c r e e n t h a t c o n s is t s o f m e ta l fo il
e x te n d in g th e fu ll w id th o f th e w in d in g s , w ith s u ita b le in s u la tio n b e tw e e n e a c h w in d in g a n d
th e s c re e n . T h e c o n d u c tiv e s c re e n a n d its l e a d - o u t w ir e h a v e a c r o s s - s e c t io n s u ff ic ie n t to
e n s u r e t h a t o n b r e a k d o w n o f th e in s u la t io n a n o v e r lo a d d e v ic e w ill o p e n th e c ir c u it b e fo r e
t h e s c r e e n is d e s t r o y e d . T h e o v e r l o a d d e v i c e m a y b e a p a r t o f t h e t r a n s f o r m e r .
If a t r a n s f o r m e r is f i t t e d w i t h a n e a r t h e d s c r e e n f o r p r o t e c t i v e p u r p o s e s , t h e t r a n s f o r m e r s h a l l
pass th e te s t of 5 .6 .6 b e tw e e n th e e a rth e d scre e n and th e e a rth in g te rm in a l of th e
tra n s fo rm e r.
No e le c tric s tre n g th te s t a p p lie s to in s u la tio n b e tw e e n a n y w in d in g and th e co re o r scre e n ,

p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e c o r e o r s c r e e n is t o t a l l y e n c l o s e d o r e n c a p s u l a t e d a n d t h e r e is n o e le c t r ic a l
c o n n e c t io n to th e c o r e o r s c r e e n . H o w e v e r , th e te s ts b e tw e e n w in d in g s th a t h a v e te r m in a t io n s
c o n tin u e to a p p ly .
G.5.3.2.2 Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection, measurement and where applicable by test.
G.5.3.3 Transformer overload tests
G.5.3.3.1 Test conditions
If the tests are carried out under simulated conditions on the bench, these conditions shall
include any protective device that would protect the transformer in the complete equipment.
Transformers for switch mode power supply units are tested in the complete power supply unit
or in the complete equipment. Test loads are applied to the output of the power supply unit.
A linear transformer or a ferro-resonant transformer has each winding isolated from the m a in s
loaded in turn, with any other winding isolated from the m a in s loaded between zero and its
specified maximum load to result in the maximum heating effect.
The output of a switch mode power supply is loaded to result in the maximum heating effect in
the transformer.
Where an overload condition cannot occur or is unlikely to cause a s a fe g u a rd to fail, the tests
are not made.
Maximum temperatures of windings shall not exceed the values in Table G.3 when measured
as specified in B.1.5, and determined as specified below:
- wi th an external overcurrent protective device: at the moment of operation， for

determination of the time until the overcurrent protective device operates, reference may

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
be made to a data sheet of the overcurrent protective device showing the trip time versus
the current characteristics;
- wi th an automatic reset th e rm a l c u t-o ff: as shown in Table G.3 and after 400 h;
- wi th a manual reset th e rm a l c u t-o ff: at the moment o f operation; or
- for current limiting transformers: after the temperature has stabilized.
If the temperature o f the windings of a transformer with a ferrite core, measured as specified
in B.1.5, exceeds 180 ° C , it shall be retested at maximum rated ambient temperature
( Tamb = Tma) ， a n d n o ta sca lcu la te d a cco rd in g to B .2 .6 .3 .
Windings isolated from the m ains, that exceed the temperature limits but that become open
circuit or otherwise require replacement of the transformer, do not constitute a failure of this
test provided that the transformer continues to comply with B.4.8.
During the test the transformer shall not emit flames or molten-metal. After the test， the
transformer shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 as applicable.
Table G.3 - Temperature limits for transformer windings and for motor windings
(except for the motor running overload test)
Maximum temperature °C
Class Class Class Class Class Class Class Class
105 120 130 155 180 200 220 250
Method of protection (A) (E) (B) (F) (H) (N) (R) ■
No protective device used or

protected by internal or external 150 165 175 200 225 245 265 295
impedance
Protected by a protective device
that operates during the first 200 215 225 250 275 295 315 345
hour
Protected by any protective
device:
一 maximum after first hour 175 190 200 225 250 270 290 320
- arithmetic average
temperature (/A) during the
2nd hour and during the 150 165 175 200 225 245 265 295
72nd hour and during the
400th hour a
a The arithmetic average temperature is determined as follows:
The graph of temperature against time (see Figure G.1)f while the power to the transformer is cycling on and
off, is plotted for the period of test under consideration. The arithmetic average temperature (/A) is determined
by the formula:
’ max + ’ min
/a
~ 2 ~
where:
t __ is the average of the maxima,
is the average of the minima.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Figure G.1 - Determination of arithmetic average temperature
G.5.3.3.3 Alternative test method
The transformer is covered with a single layer of ch e e s e c lo th and is placed on a wooden

board that is covered with a single layer of w ra p p in g tissu e . The transformer is then
gradually loaded until one of the following situations occurs:
- the overload protective device operates;

- the winding becomes an open circuit; or
- the load cannot be increased any further without reaching a short-circuit or foldback
condition.
The transformer is then loaded to a point ju s t before the above applicable situation occurs
and is operated for 7 h.
During the test the transformer shall not emit flames or molten metal. The c h e e s e c lo th or
w ra p p in g tis s u e shall not char or catch fire.
If the transformer voltage exceeds ES1， the b a s ic s a fe g u a rd or re in fo rc e d s a fe g u a rd

provided in the transformer shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 as applicable
after it has cooled to room temperature.
G.5.3.4 Transformers using fully insulated winding wire (FIW)
G.5.3.4.1 General
The re q u ire m e n ts of G .5 .3 .4 m ay o n ly be a p p lie d to e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d fo r use in

O v e r v o l t a g e C a t e g o r i e s I a n d II.
W h e re FIW is used w ith in a tra n s fo rm e r, th e FIW s h a ll c o m p ly w ith IE C 6 0 8 5 1 -5 :2 0 0 8 ,

IE C 6 0 3 1 7 - 0 - 7 a n d IE C 6 0 3 1 7 -5 6 .
FIW w i n d i n g s a t E S 2 or ES3 le v e ls s h a ll not be accessible to an ordinary person or an

instructed person.
If t h e w ire has a n o m in a l d ia m e te r o th e r th a n d e fin e d in T a b l e G . 5 (F IW 3 -9 ), th e m in im u m

e le c tric s tre n g th v a lu e c a n b e c a lc u la te d a c c o rd in g to th e fo rm u la b e lo w T a b le G .5 .
A tra n s fo rm e r th a t u s e s FIW s h a ll c o m p ly w ith IE C 6 0 0 8 5 and m a y o n ly be used u p to a n d

in c lu d in g in s u la tio n C la s s 1 5 5 (F ).
W h e re m e c h a n ic a l s e p a ra tio n is r e q u i r e d b e lo w , th e m e c h a n ic a l s e p a r a tio n s h a ll c o m p ly w ith

th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t fo r basic insulation in a cco rd a n ce w ith 5 .4 .9 .1 e x c e p t th a t
T a b le G .4 s h a ll b e a p p lie d in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 .

- 242 - 旧C 62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
Table G.4 - Test voltages for electric strength tests

based on the peak of the working voltages
Voltage up to and including Test voltage for basic insulation or Test voltage for reinforced
supplementary insulation insulation
V peak kV peak or DC (Vrms)
< 70,5 0,35 (0,25) 〇 J (0,5)

212 2 (1,41) 4 (2,82)
423 3 (2,12) 6 (4,24)
846 3,5 (2,47) 7 (4,95)

1 410 3,9 (2,76) 7,8 (5,52)
This table is based on Table 14 of IEC 61558-1:2017.
G.5.3.4.2 Transformers with basic insulation only
FIW s e rv in g as basic insulation s h a ll b e a c o n s tr u c tio n h a v in g a m in im u m te s t v o lta g e per

T a b le G .5 th a t e x c e e d s th e te s t v o lta g e s fo r e le c tric s tre n g th te s ts based on 5 .4 .9 .1 except
th a t T a b le G .4 s h a ll b e a p p lie d in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 .
M e c h a n i c a l s e p a r a t i o n is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n t h e FIW a n d e n a m e lle d w ire .
Clearances and creepage distances b e tw e e n th e FIW a n d e n a m e lle d w ire a re n o t re q u ire d .
NOTE 1 An example of this construction is a transformer with FIW as one winding and enamelled wire as the
other.
NOTE 2 The specified values in Table G. are RMS
G .5 .3.4.3 Transformers with double insulation or reinforced insulation
T r a n s fo r m e r s w ith double insulation or reinforced insulation c o m p r is e d o f:
- t wo or m o re FIW w in d in g s in s u la te d w ith basic insulation and supplementary

insulation, s h a ll c o m p l y w it h a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g :
• FIW s e rv in g as basic insulation and th e FIW s e rv in g as supplementary insulation

s h a ll e a c h h a v e a m in im u m te s t v o lta g e p e r T a b le G .5 th a t e x c e e d s th e te s t v o lta g e s
fo r e le c tric s tre n g th te s ts based on 5 .4 .9 .1 except th a t T a b le G .4 s h a ll be a p p lie d
in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 ;
• m e c h a n ic a l s e p a ra tio n th a t fu lfils th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t fo r basic insulation is

re q u ire d b e tw e e n b o th FIW w in d in g s ; a n d
• clearances and creepage distances b e tw e e n th e FIW a re n o t re q u ire d .
- one FIW w in d in g p ro v id e d w ith reinforced insulation s h a ll c o m p ly w ith a ll of th e

fo llo w in g :
• FIW s e rv in g a s reinforced insulation s h a ll h a v e a m in im u m te s t v o lta g e p e r T a b le G .5

th a t e x c e e d s th e te s t v o lta g e s fo r e le c tric s tre n g th te s ts b a s e d o n 5 .4 .9 .1 e x c e p t th a t
T a b le G .4 s h a ll b e a p p lie d in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 ;
• m e c h a n ic a l s e p a ra tio n th a t fu lfils th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t fo r basic insulation is

re q u ire d b e tw e e n th e FIW a n d e n a m e lle d w ire w in d in g s ; a n d
• clearances and creepage distances b e tw e e n th e FIW and e n a m e lle d w ire a re not

re q u ire d .
- one FIW w in d in g p ro v id e dbasic insulation i n c o m b i n a t i o n

w ith w ith s o lid o r th in la y e r
in s u la tio n s e rv in g a s supplementary insulation, s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h a ll o f t h e f o llo w in g :

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
• FIW s e rv in g a s basic insulation s h a l l h a v e a m i n i m u m t e s t v o l t a g e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h

T a b le G .5 th a t e x c e e d s th e te s t v o lta g e s fo r e le c tric s tre n g th te s ts based on 5 .4 .9 .1
e x c e p t th a t T a b le G .4 s h a ll b e a p p lie d in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 ;
• s o lid o r th in la y e r in s u la tio n s e rv in g as supplementary insulation s h a ll c o m p ly w ith

C la u s e 5, in c lu d in g solid insulation; and
• clearances and creepage distances b e tw e e n th e FIW and e n a m e lle d w ire a re

re q u ire d .
G .5 .3.4.4 Transformers with FIW wound on metal or ferrite core
FIW s h a ll b e d e s ig n a te d basic insulation b a s e d on th e p e a k o f th e working voltage.
FIW s e rv in g as basic insulation s h a ll be a c o n s tru c tio n h a v in g a m in im u m te s t v o lta g e in

a c c o r d a n c e w ith T a b le G .5 th a t e x c e e d s th e te s t v o lta g e s fo r e le c tric s tre n g th te s ts b a s e d o n
5 .4 .9 .1 e x c e p t th a t T a b le G .4 s h a ll b e a p p lie d in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 .
M e c h a n i c a l s e p a r a t i o n is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n t h e FIW a n d th e m e ta l o r fe rrite c o re .
G .5 .3.4.5 Thermal cycling test and compliance
For tra n s fo rm e rs with FIW the following test is required:
Three samples of the transformer shall be used. The samples shall be subjected 10 times to
the following sequence of temperature cycles:
- 6 8 h at the highest winding temperature ± 2 °C measured in normal use plus 10 K with a

minimum of 85 °C;
- 1 h at 25 CC 土 2 °C;
- 2 h at 0 °C 土 2 0C;
- 1 h at 25 CC ± 2 ° C .
During each thermal cycling test, a voltage o f twice the value of the w o rk in g v o lta g e at 50 Hz
or 60 Hz shall be applied to the samples between the windings.
After conditioning o f the three samples above,
- t wo of the three samples are then subjected to the humidity treatment o f 5.4.8 (48 h
treatment) and the relevant electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, except that T a b l e G . 4 is
applied instead of Table 26; and
- the remaining sample shall be subjected to the relevant electric strength test of 5.4.9.1
except that T a b l e G . 4 is applied instead of Table 26 immediately at the end of the last
period at highest temperature during the thermal cycling test.
There shall be no insulation breakdown during the test.
G .5 .3.4.6 Partial discharge test
If FIW is used and if the recurring peak voltage U{ across the insulation is greater than 750 Vf
a partial discharge test according to IEC 60664-1 (additional test description details below)
shall be performed. The partial discharge test shall be done after the thermal cycling test of
G.5.3.4.5 at normal room temperature for the two samples that were subjected to the humidity
treatment.
The relevant recurring peak voltage is the maximum measured voltage between the input and
the transformer and associated circuitry if the secondary side is earthed.
The measuring shall be done at the maximum of the ra te d v o lta g e of the equipment.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
A partial discharge test shall be done at the transformer with the measured recurring peak
voltage U{ where:
- U{ is the maximum peak o f the w o rk in g vo lta g e ;

- /1 is 5 s;
- t2 is 15 s.
Partial discharge shall be less than or equal to 10 pC at time / 2 . The test shall be done
according to Figure G.2. For other applications higher values may be required (for example,
IEC 61800-5-1).
G .5.3.4.7 Routine test
The finished component is subjected to ro u tin e te s ts for electric strength (between windings
and between windings and the core, see G.5.3.2.1), in accordance with 5.4.9.2.

IEC 62368_1:2018
Table G.5 - Values of FIW wires with maximum overall diameter and minimum test voltages according to the enamel increase
Minimum overall FIW diameter Minimum dielectric strength test voltage values per wire for
Minimum basic or reinforced insulation at overall diameter, U s [V]
Nominal
specific [mm] (duration of 60 s)
conductor
breakdown
diameter
voltage a Grade Grade of Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade
◎
[mmj of FIW FIW of FIW of FIW of FIW of FIW of FIW of FIW of FIW of FIW of FIW of FIW of FIW of FIW
Ub [V/pm]
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
IEC 2018
0,04 56 0,055 0,059 0,070 0,080 0,090 0,100 714 904 1 428 1 904 2 380 2 856
0,045 56 0,062 0,067 0,079 0,090 0,101 0,112 809 1 047 1 618 2 142 2 666 3 189
0,05 56 0,067 0,073 0,084 0,095 0,106 0,117 809 1 095 1 618 2 142 2 666 3 189
0,056 56 0,075 0,082 0,093 0,105 0,117 0,129 904 1 238 1 761 2 332 2 904 3 475
0,063 56 0,084 0,090 0,103 0,116 0,129 0,142 1 000 1 285 1 904 2 523 3 142 3 760
0,071 56 0,092 0,098 0,111 0,124 0,137 0,150 0,163 1 000 1 285 1 904 2 523 3 142 3 760 4 379
0,08 56 0,102 0,109 0,123 0,137 0,151 0,165 0,179 1 047 1 380 2 047 2 713 3 380 4 046 4 712
0,09 56 0,114 0,121 0,135 0,149 0,163 0,177 0,191 1 142 1 476 2 142 2 808 3 475 4 141 4 808
0,1 56 0,126 0,133 0,149 0,165 0,181 0,197 0,213 1 238 1 571 2 332 3 094 3 856 4 617 5 379
0,112 53 0,140 0,148 0,165 0,182 0,199 0,216 0,233 1 261 1 622 2 388 3 154 3 919 4 685 5 451
0,125 53 0,155 0,164 0,182 0,200 0,218 0,236 0,254 1 352 1 757 2 568 3 379 4 190 5 001 5 811
- 245
0,14 53 0,172 0,182 0,202 0,222 0,242 0,262 0,282 1 442 1 892 2 793 3 694 4 595 5 496 6 397
0,16 53 0,195 0,206 0,228 0,250 0,272 0,294 0,316 1 577 2 072 3 063 4 055 5 046 6 037 7 028
I
0,18 53 0,218 0,230 0,254 0,278 0,302 0,326 0,350 1 712 2 253 3 334 4 415 5 496 6 577 7 659
〇 ,2 53 0,240 0,253 0,278 0,303 0,328 0,353 0,378 1 802 2 388 3 514 4 640 5 766 6 893 8 019
0,224 53 0,267 0,281 0,308 0,335 0,362 0,389 0,416 1 937 2 568 3 784 5 001 6 217 7 433 8 650
0,25 53 0,298 0,313 0,343 0,373 0,403 0,433 0,463 2 162 2 838 4 190 5 541 6 893 8 244 9 596
0,28 53 0,330 0,346 0,377 0,408 0,439 0,470 0,501 2 253 2 973 4 370 5 766 7 163 8 560 9 956
0,315 53 0,368 0,385 0,416 0,447 0,478 0,509 0,540 2 388 3 154 4 550 5 947 7 343 8 740 10 136
0,355 53 0,412 0,429 0,460 0,491 0,522 0,553 0,584 2 568 3 334 4 730 6 127 7 523 8 920 10 316
〇 ,4 49 0,460 0,479 0,510 0,541 0,572 0,603 2 499 3 290 4 582 5 873 7 164 8 455
0,45 49 0,514 0,534 0,565 0,596 0,627 0,658 2 666 3 499 4 790 6 081 7 372
0,5 49 0,567 0,588 0,629 0,670 0,711 2 791 3 665 5 373 7 081 8 788
0,56 37 0,631 0,654 0,695 0,736 0,777 2 233 2 956 4 246 5 535 6 825
0,63 37 0,705 0,729 0,770 0,811 0,852 2 359 3 114 4 403 5 692 6 982
0,71 37 0,790 0,815 0,856 0,897 0,938 2 516 3 302 4 592 5 881 7 171
0,8 37 0,885 0,912 0,963 1,014 2 673 3 522 5 126 6 730
0,9 37 0,990 1,019 1,070 1,121 2 831 3 743 5 347 6 950
1 37 1,095 1,125 1,176 1,227 2 988 3 931 5 535 7 139
1,12 33 1,218 1,249 1,310 2 749 3 618 5 330
1,25 33 1,350 1,382 1,443 2 805 3 703 5 414
1,4 33 1,503 1,536 1,597 2 889 3 815 5 526
1,6 33 1,707 1,741 1,802 3 001 3 955 5 666
Value according to Table 7 of IEC 60317-0-7:2017.
Copyright International Electrotechncal Commission

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
The values o f allowed voltage strength for FIW dimensions other than specified in Table G.5
are calculated according to the following formula:
v = ^ - d C u x ^ x1Q3
2
where:
da is the maximum overall diameter in mm;
dCu is the nominal copper diameter in mm;
U is the voltage value according to Table 7 of IEC 60317-0-7:2017 (see column 2) in V/fjm;
V is the allowed voltage strength for FIW wire in volts.
Higher voltage values, based on the "enamel increase" o f Table 6 o f IEC 60317-0-7:2017, are
under consideration.
G.5.4 Motors
G.5.4.1 General requirements
DC m o to rs s u p p lie d fro m P S 2 o r P S 3 c irc u its is o la te d fro m th e A C mains s h a ll c o m p ly w ith

th e te s ts o f G .5 .4 .5 , G .5 .4 .6 a n d G .5 .4 .9 . D C m o to rs th a t b y th e ir in trin s ic o p e ra tio n n o r m a lly
o p e ra te u n d e r lo c k e d -ro to r c o n d itio n s , s u c h a s s te p p e r m o to rs , a re n o t te s te d a n d D C m o to rs
t h a t a r e u s e d f o r a i r - h a n d l i n g o n l y a n d w h e r e t h e a i r p r o p e l l i n g c o m p o n e n t is d i r e c t l y c o u p l e d
to th e m o to r s h a ft a re n o t re q u ire d to p a s s th e te s t o f G .5 .4 .5.
A ll o t h e r m o t o r s s u p p lie d fro m PS2 or PS3 c irc u its s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e o v e rlo a d te s ts of

G .5 .4 .3 a n d G .5 .4 .4 a n d , w h e re a p p lic a b le , G .5 .4 .7 , G .5 .4 .8 a n d G .5 .4 .9 .
H o w e v e r, th e fo llo w in g m o to rs a re e x e m p t fro m th e te s t o f G .5 .4 .3 :
- mot or s th a t a re used fo r a ir-h a n d lin g o n ly and w h e re th e a ir-p ro p e llin g com ponent is

d ire c tly c o u p le d to th e m o to r s h a ft; a n d

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- s h a d e d p o le m o to rs w h o s e v a lu e s o f lo c k e d - r o to r c u r r e n t a n d n o -lo a d c u r r e n t d o n o t d iffe r
b y m o re th a n 1 A a n d h a v e a ra tio o f n o t m o re th a n 2 /1 .
G.5.4.2 Motor overload test conditions
Unless otherwise specified， during the test， the equipment is operated at ra te d v o lta g e or at
the highest voltage of the ra te d v o lta g e range.
The tests are carried out either in the equipment or under simulated conditions on the bench.
Separate samples may be used for bench tests. Simulated conditions include:
- any protective device that would protect the motor in the complete equipment; and
- use of any mounting means that may serve as a heat sink to the motor frame.
Temperatures of windings are measured as specified in B.1.5. Where thermocouples are used
they are applied to the surface of the motor windings. Temperatures are measured at the end
of the test period where specified, otherwise when the temperature has stabilized, or at the
instant of operation of fuses, th e rm a l c u t-o ffs , motor protective devices and the like.
For totally enclosed, impedance-protected motors, the temperatures are measured by

thermocouples applied to the motor case.
When motors without inherent thermal protection are tested under simulated conditions on the
bench， the measured winding temperature is adjusted to take into account the ambient
temperature in which the motor is normally located within the equipment.
G.5.4.3 Running overload test and compliance criteria
A running overload test is carried out by operating the motor under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g
c o n d itio n s . The load is then increased so that the current is increased in appropriate gradual
steps, the motor supply voltage being maintained at its original value. When steady conditions
are established， the load is again increased. The load is thus progressively increased in
appropriate steps but without reaching locked-rotor condition (see G.5.4.4)f until the overload
protective device operates.
Compliance is checked by measuring the motor winding temperatures during each steady
period. The measured temperatures shall not exceed the values in T a b l e G . 6 .
Table G.6 - Temperature limits for running overload tests
Maximum temperature
oc
Class 105 Class 120 Class 130 Class 155 Class 180 Class 200 Class 220 Class 250
(A) (E> (B) (F) (H) (N) (R) ■
140 155 165 190 215 235 255 275
G.5.4.4 Locked-rotor overload
G.5.4.4.1 Test method
A locked-rotor test is carried out starting at room temperature.
The duration of the test is as follows:

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- a motor protected by inherent or external impedance is operated on locked-rotor for

15 days except that testing is discontinued when the windings of the motor reach a
constant temperature, provided that the constant temperature is not more than that
specified in Table 9 for the insulation system used;
- a motor with an automatic reset protective device is cycled on locked-rotor for 18 days;
- a motor with a manual reset protective device is cycled on locked-rotor for 60 cycles, the
protective device being reset after each operation as soon as possible for it to remain
closed， but after not less than 30 s;
- a motor with a non-resettable protective device is operated until the device operates.
Compliance is checked by measuring temperatures at regular intervals during the first three
days for a motor with inherent or external impedance protection or with an automatic reset
protective device, or during the first 10 cycles for a motor with a manual reset protective
device， or at the time of operation o f a non-resettable protective device. The measured
temperatures shall not exceed the values in Table G.3.
During the test, protective devices shall operate reliably without permanent damage to the
motor including:
- severe or prolonged smoking or flaming;

- electrical or mechanical breakdown of any associated component part such as a capacitor
or starting relay;
- flaking, embrittlement or charring of insulation; or
- deterioration o f the insulation.
Discoloration of the insulation may occur， but charring or embrittlement to the extent that
insulation flakes off or material is removed when the winding is rubbed with the thumb is not
acceptable.
After the period specified for temperature measurement, the motor shall withstand the electric
strength test of 5.4.9.1 after the insulation has cooled to room temperature and with test
voltages reduced to 0,6 times o f the specified values.
NOTE Continuation of the test of an automatic reset protective device beyond 72 h, and of a manual reset
protective device beyond 10 cycles, is only for the purpose of demonstrating the capability of the device to make
and break locked-rotor current for an extended period of time.
G.5.4.5 Running overload for DC motors
T h e t e s t o f G . 5 . 4 . 5 . 2 is c a r r i e d o u t o n l y if a p o s s i b i l i t y o f a n o v e r l o a d o c c u r r i n g is d e t e r m i n e d
b y in s p e c tio n o r b y r e v ie w o f th e d e s ig n . F o r e x a m p le , th e te s t n e e d n o t b e c a rrie d o u t w h e r e
e le c tr o n ic d riv e c irc u its m a in ta in a s u b s ta n tia lly c o n s ta n t d riv e c u rre n t.
If d i f f i c u l t y is e x p e r i e n c e d in o b t a i n i n g a c c u r a t e t e m p e r a t u r e m e a s u r e m e n t s , d u e t o t h e s m a l l
s iz e o r u n c o n v e n tio n a l d e s ig n o f th e m o to r, th e m e th o d o f G .5 .4 .5 .3 c a n be u s e d in s te a d .
G.5.4.5.2 Test method and compliance criteria
The motor is operated under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s . The load is then increased so
that the current is increased in appropriate gradual steps, the motor supply voltage being
maintained at its original value. When steady conditions are established, the load is again
increased. The load is thus progressively increased in appropriate steps until either the
overload protection device operates, the winding becomes an open circuit or the load cannot
be increased any further without reaching a locked rotor condition.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
The motor winding temperatures are measured during each steady period. The measured
temperatures shall not exceed the values in Table G.6.
Following the test， if the motor voltage exceeds ES1, the b a s ic s a fe g u a rd or re in fo rc e d

s a fe g u a rd provided in the motor shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 after it
has cooled to room temperature， but with test voltages reduced to 0,6 times the specified
values.
G.5.4.5.3 Alternative method
The motor is covered with a single layer o f c h e e s e c lo th and placed on a wooden board that
is covered with a single layer of w ra p p in g tissu e . The motor is then gradually loaded until
one of the following situations occur:
- the overload protective device operates;

- the winding becomes an open circuit; or
- the load cannot be increased any further without reaching a locked rotor condition.
During the test， the motor shall not emit flames or molten metal. The c h e e s e c lo th or
Following the test， if the motor voltage exceeds ES1, the b a s ic s a fe g u a rd or re in fo rc e d

s a fe g u a rd provided in the motor shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 after it
has cooled to room temperature, but with test voltages reduced to 0f6 times the specified
values.
G.5.4.6 Locked-rotor overload for DC motors
M o t o r s s h a l l p a s s t h e t e s t in G . 5 . 4 . 6 . 2 .
W h e re d i f f i c u l t y is e x p e r i e n c e d in o b t a i n i n g a c c u ra te te m p e ra tu re m e a s u re m e n ts because of
th e s m a ll s iz e o r u n c o n v e n tio n a l d e s ig n o f th e m o to r, th e m e th o d o f G .5 .4 .6 .3 can be used
in s te a d .
The motor is operated at the voltage used in its application and with its rotor locked for 7 h or
until steady state conditions are established， whichever is longer. However， if the motor
winding opens， or the motor otherwise becomes permanently de-energized, the test is
discontinued.
Compliance is checked by measuring the motor winding temperatures during the test. The
measured temperatures shall not exceed the values in Table G.3.
Following the test， if the motor voltage exceeds ES1 ， and after it has cooled to room
temperature, the motor shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 but with test
voltages reduced to 0,6 times the specified values.
G.5.4.6.3 Alternative method
The motor is covered with a single layer of c h e e s e c lo th and placed on a wooden board that
is covered with a single layer o f w ra p p in g tissue.
The motor is then operated at the voltage used in its application and with its rotor locked for
7 h or until steady state conditions are established， whichever is the longer. However， if the
motor winding opens， or the motor otherwise becomes permanently de-energized， the test is
discontinued.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
During the test， the motor shall not emit flames or molten metal. The c h e e s e c lo th or
Following the test, if the motor voltage exceeds ES1， and after it has cooled to room
temperature, the motor shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 but with test
voltages reduced to 0 , 6 times the specified values.
G.5.4.7 Test method and compliance criteria for motors with capacitors
Motors having phase-shifting capacitors are tested under locked-rotor conditions with the
capacitor short-circuited or open-circuited (whichever is the more unfavourable).
The short-circuit test is not made if the capacitor is so designed that， upon failure， it will not
remain short-circuited.
G.5.4.8 Test method and compliance criteria for three-phase motors
Three-phase motors are tested under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , with one phase
disconnected, unless circuit controls prevent the application of voltage to the motor when one
or more supply phases are missing.
The effect of other loads and circuits within the equipment may necessitate that the motor be
tested within the equipment and with the three supply phases disconnected one at a time.
G.5.4.9 Test method and compliance criteria for series motors
Series motors are operated at a voltage equal to 1,3 times the voltage rating of the motor for
1 min with the lowest possible load.
After the test， windings and connections shall not have worked loose and all applicable
s a fe g u a rd s shall remain effective.
G.6 Wire insulation
G.6.1 General
Except fo r e n a m e lle d w in d in g in s u la tio n , th e fo llo w in g re q u ire m e n ts a p p ly to a ll w ire s ,

in c lu d in g w ire s in wound c o m p o n e n ts (se e a ls o C la u s e G .5 ), le a d -o u t w ire s and th e lik e ,
whose in s u la tio n p ro v id e s basic insulation, supplementary insulation or reinforced
insulation.
NOTE 1 For insulation provided in addition to insulation on winding wire, see 5.4.4.
If th e peak of th e working voltage does not exceed ES2, th e re is no d im e n s io n a l or

c o n s tru c tio n a l re q u ire m e n t.
If t h e p e a k o f t h e working voltage e x c e e d s E S 2 , o n e o f th e fo llo w in g a p p lie s :
a) T h e re is no d im e n s io n a l or c o n s tru c tio n a l re q u ire m e n t fo r basic insulation t h a t is not

u n d e r m e c h a n ic a l s tre s s (fo r e x a m p le , fro m w in d in g t e n s i o n ) . F o r basic insulation t h a t is
u n d e r s u c h m e c h a n ic a l s tre s s , b) o r c) a p p lie s .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
NOTE 2 This exception does not apply to supplementary insulation or reinforced insulation.
b) For basic insulation， supplementary insulation or reinforced insulation, th e in s u la tio n

o n th e w ir e s h a ll:
- h a v e a th ic k n e s s o f a t le a s t 0 ,4 m m p ro v id e d b y a s in g le la y e r; o r
- c o m p l y w it h 5 . 4 . 4 . 6 if t h e w i r e is n o t a w i n d i n g w ir e ; o r
- c o m p l y w it h A n n e x J if t h e w i r e is a w i n d i n g w ir e .
c) T h e w in d in g w ir e s h a ll c o m p ly w ith A n n e x J. T h e m in im u m n u m b e r o f o v e rla p p in g la y e rs
o f s p ir a lly w r a p p e d ta p e o r e x tr u d e d la y e rs o f in s u la tio n s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
- f or basic insulation: o n e la y e r;
- f or supplementary insulation: tw o la y e rs ;
- f or reinforced insulation: th r e e la y e rs .
d) FIW used as a safeguard in t r a n s f o r m e r s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h G . 5 . 3 . 4 .
F o r i n s u l a t i o n b e t w e e n t w o a d j a c e n t w i n d i n g w i r e s , o n e l a y e r o n e a c h c o n d u c t o r is c o n s i d e r e d
to p r o v id e supplementary insulation.
S p ir a lly w r a p p e d ta p e s h a ll b e s e a le d a n d p a s s th e t e s t s o f 5 .4 .4 . 5 a ), b ) o r c).
NOTE 3 For wires insulated by an extrusion process, sealing is inherent to the process.
The w in d in g w ire s h a ll pass a routine test fo r e le c tric s tre n g th te s t, u s in g th e te s t as

s p e c i f i e d in 丄 3 . 2 .
G.6.2 Enamelled winding wire insulation
E n a m e l l e d w i n d i n g w i r e is n o t c o n s i d e r e d t o p r o v i d e supplementary insulation o r reinforced

insulation, u n l e s s it c o m p l i e s w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r FIW a s s p e c i f i e d in G . 5 . 3 . 4 .
O th e r e n a m e lle d w in d in g w ire s used as basic insulation s h a ll c o m p ly w ith a ll t h e f o l l o w i n g

c o n d itio n s :
- t he in s u la tio n p ro v id e s basic insulation in a wound com ponent b e tw e e n an external

circuit a n d a n in te rn a l c irc u it o p e ra tin g a t ES2 and ES1;
- t h e in s u la t io n o v e r a ll c o n d u c t o r s c o m p r i s e s e n a m e l c o m p l y i n g w it h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f a
g r a d e 2 w in d in g w ire o f IE C 6 0 3 1 7 s e rie s o f s ta n d a r d s w ith th e routine test c o n d u c te d at
th e h ig h e s t v o lta g e o f T a b le 2 5 a n d T a b le 26;
- t h e f i n i s h e d c o m p o n e n t is s u b j e c t e d to a type test fo r e le c tric s tre n g th (b e tw e e n w in d in g s

a n d b e t w e e n w i n d i n g s a n d t h e c o r e , s e e G . 5 . 3 . 2 . 1 ) , in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 9 . 1 ; a n d
- t he fin is h e d com ponent is s u b je c te d to routine tests fo r e le c tric s tre n g th (b e tw e e n

w i n d i n g s a n d b e t w e e n w i n d i n g s a n d t h e c o r e , s e e G . 5 . 3 . 2 . 1 ) , in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 9 . 2 .
G .7 Mains supply cords
G.7.1 General
A mains s u p p ly co rd s h a ll be of th e s h e a th e d ty p e and c o m p ly w ith th e fo llo w in g as

a p p ro p ria te :
- if r u b b e r s h e a th e d , be o f s y n th e tic ru b b e r and not lig h te r th a n o rd in a ry to u g h ru b b e r-

s h e a th e d fle x ib le c o rd a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 0 2 4 5 -1 ( d e s ig n a tio n 6 0 2 4 5 IE C 5 3 );
- if P V C s h e a t h e d :
• fo r e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d w ith a non-detachable power supply cord a n d h a v in g a m a s s

n o t e x c e e d in g 3 kg, b e n o t lig h te r th a n lig h t P V C s h e a th e d fle x ib le co rd a c c o rd in g to
IE C 6 0 2 2 7 -1 ( d e s ig n a tio n 6 0 2 2 7 IE C 5 2 ),

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
• fo r e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d w ith a non-detachable power supply cord a n d h a v in g a m a s s

e x c e e d in g 3 kg, be n o t lig h te r th a n o rd in a ry PVC s h e a th e d fle x ib le co rd a c c o rd in g to
IE C 6 0 2 2 7 -1 ( d e s ig n a tio n 6 0 2 2 7 IE C 5 3 ),
NOTE 1 There is no limit on the mass of the equipment if the equipment is intended for use with a
detachable power supply cord.
• fo r e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d w ith a d e ta c h a b le p o w e r s u p p ly c o rd , b e n o t lig h te r th a n lig h t

P V C s h e a th e d fle x ib le c o rd a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 0 2 2 7 -1 ( d e s ig n a tio n 6 0 2 2 7 IE C 5 2 ),
• fo r scre e n e d co rd s of movable equipment, th e fle x in g te s t of 3 .1 of

IE C 6 0 2 2 7 -2 :1 9 9 7 ;
NOTE 2 Although screened cords are not covered in the scope of IEC 60227-2, the relevant flexing tests
of IEC 60227-2 are used.
- ot her ty p e s o f c o rd s m ay be used if t h e y h a v e s im ila r e le c tr o - m e c h a n ic a l a n d fire s a fe ty

p ro p e rtie s a s a b o v e .
NOTE 3 Where national or regional standards exist, they can be used to show compliance with the above
paragraph.
For pluggable equipment type A o r pluggable equipment type B t h a t h a s protective

earthing, a protective earthing conductor s h a l l b e i n c l u d e d i n t h e mains s u p p l y c o r d . F o r
a l l o t h e r e q u i p m e n t , i f a mains s u p p l y c o r d i s s u p p l i e d w i t h o u t a protective earthing
conductor, a protective earthing conductor c a b l e s h a l l b e s u p p l i e d a s w e l l .
E q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to be used by m u s ic ia n s w h ile p e rfo rm in g (fo r e x a m p le , m u s ic a l

in s tr u m e n ts a n d a m p lifie r s ) s h a ll h a v e :
- an a p p lia n c e in le t a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 0 3 2 0 -1 fo r c o n n e c tio n to th e mains b y d e ta c h a b le

c o rd s e ts ; o r
- a m eans o f s to w a g e to p ro te c t th e mains s u p p ly co rd when n o t in use (fo r e x a m p le , a

c o m p a rtm e n t, h o o k s o r p e g s).
Compliance is checked by inspection. For screened cords， damage to the screen is

acceptable provided that:
- during the flexing test the screen does not make contact with any conductor; and
一 after the flexing test, the sample withstands the appropriate electric strength test between
the screen and all other conductors.
G.7.2 Cross sectional area
Mains s u p p ly co rd s s h a ll have c o n d u c to rs w ith c ro s s -s e c tio n a l a re a s not le s s th a n th o s e

s p e c i f i e d in T a b l e G . 7 ( s e e a l s o 5 . 6 . 3 ) .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table G.7 - Sizes of conductors
Rated current of the equipment Minimum conductor sizes

up to and including a
Cross-sectional area AWG or kcmil
A mm2 [cross-sectional area in mm2] e
3 0,5 b 20 [0,5]
6 0,75 18 [0,8]
10 1,00 (0,75) c 16 [1,3]
16 1,50 (1,0) d 14 [2]
25 2,5 12 [3]
32 4 10 [5]
40 6 8 [8]
63 10 6 [13]
80 16 4 [21]
100 25 2 03]
125 35 1 [42]
160 50 0 [53]
190 70 000 [85]

230 95 0000 [107]
kcmil
[cross-sectional area in mm2] e
260 120 250 [126]
300 150 300 [152]

340 185 400 [202]
400 240 500 [253]
460 300 600 [304]
NOTE 1 IEC 60320-1 specifies acceptable combinations of appliance couplers and flexible cords， including
those covered by footnotes b， c and d. However， a number of countries have indicated that they do not accept all
of the values listed in this table, particularly those covered by footnotes b, c and d.
NOTE 2 For higher currents see the IEC 60364 series.
The rated current includes currents that can be drawn from a socket outlet providing mains power for other
equipment. If the rated current of the equipment is not declared by the manufacturer, it is the calculated
value of the rated power divided by rated voltage.
b For rated current up to 3 A, a nominal cross-sectional area of 0,5 mm2 may be used in some countries
provided that the length of the cord does not exceed 2 m.
The value in parentheses applies to detachable power supply cords fitted with the connectors rated 10 A in
accordance with IEC 60320-1 (types C13, C15, C15A and C17) provided that the length of the cord does not
exceed 2 m.
The value in parentheses applies to detachable power supply cords fitted with the connectors rated 16 A in
accordance with IEC 60320-1 (types C19, C21 and C23) provided that the length of the cord does not exceed
2 m.
AWG and kcmil sizes are provided for information only. The associated cross-sectional areas, in square
brackets, have been rounded to show significant figures only. AWG refers to the American Wire Gage and the
term "cmil" refers to circular mils where one circular mil is equal to the area of a circle having a diameter of
one mil (one thousandth of an inch). These terms are commonly used to designate wire sizes in North
America.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
G.7.3 Cord anchorages and strain relief for non-detachable power supply cords
G.7.3.1 General
Safeguards a g a in s t s tra in b e in g tr a n s m it te d to th e e q u ip m e n t te r m in a t io n s o f th e c o n d u c t o r s
o f c o rd s o r in te r c o n n e c tin g c a b le s c o n n e c te d to E S 2 c irc u its , E S 3 c irc u its o r P S 3 c irc u its a re
s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
G.7.3.2 Cord strain relief
A k n o t s h a ll n o t b e u s e d a s a s tra in r e lie f m e c h a n is m .
A s c r e w th a t b e a r s d ir e c tly o n th e c o rd o r c a b le s h a ll n o t b e u s e d a s a s tra in r e lie f m e c h a n is m

u n l e s s t h e c o r d a n c h o r a g e , i n c l u d i n g t h e s c r e w , is m a d e o f i n s u l a t i n g m a te ria l a n d th e s c r e w
is o f c o m p a r a b l e s i z e t o t h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e c o r d b e i n g c l a m p e d .
W hen a lin e a r fo rc e and a to rq u e a re a p p lie d to a non-detachable power supply cord or

c a b le , a basic safeguard s h a ll m in im iz e s tra in fro m b e in g tra n s m itte d to th e co rd o r c a b le
te rm in a tio n s .
T h e l i n e a r f o r c e a p p l i e d t o t h e c o r d o r c a b l e is s p e c i f i e d in T a b l e G . 8 . T h e f o r c e i s a p p l i e d in
th e m o s t u n fa v o u r a b le d ire c tio n fo r 1 s a n d re p e a te d 2 5 tim e s .
Table G.8 - Strain relief test force
Mass of the equipment Force
kg N
Up to and including 1 30
Over 1 up to and including 4 60
Over 4 100
A t o r q u e o f 0 , 2 5 N m is a p p l i e d f o r 1 m i n t o t h e c o r d o r c a b l e i m m e d i a t e l y a f t e r t h e l i n e a r f o r c e
a p p l i c a t i o n . T h e t o r q u e is a p p l i e d a s c l o s e a s p r a c t i c a b l e t o t h e s t r a i n r e l i e f m e c h a n i s m a n d is
r e p e a t e d in t h e o p p o s i t e d i r e c t i o n .
Compliance is determined by applying the specified force and torque， by measurement， and
visual inspection. There shall be no damage to the cord or conductors and the displacement
of the conductors shall not exceed 2 mm. Stretching of the cord outer jacket without
displacement o f the conductors is not considered displacement.
G.7.3.2.2 Strain relief mechanism failure
basic safeguard ( s t r a i n r e l i e f m e c h a n i s m ) s h o u l d f a i l a n d s t r a i n i s t r a n s m i t t e d t o t h e
If t h e
non-detachable power supply cord o r c a b l e t e r m i n a t i o n s , a supplementary safeguard
s h a l l e n s u r e t h a t t h e e a r t h t e r m i n a t i o n is t h e l a s t t o t a k e t h e s t r a i n .
Compliance is determined by inspection and， if necessary, by defeating the b a s ic s a fe g u a rd

and inspecting the conductor slack while applying the force in Table G.8.
G.7.3.2.3 Cord sheath or jacket position
The co rd or c a b le s h e a th or ja c k e t s h a ll e x te n d fro m th e basic safeguard (s tra in re lie f

m e c h a n is m ) in to th e e q u ip m e n t a t le a s t o n e - h a lf th e d ia m e t e r o f th e c o r d o r c a b le .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.7.3.2.4 Strain relief and cord anchorage material
T h e co rd a n c h o r a g e s h a ll e ith e r b e m a d e o f in s u la tin g m a te r ia l o r h a v e a lin in g o f in s u la tin g

m a te r ia l c o m p ly in g w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s fo r basic insulation. W h e re th e c o rd a n c h o ra g e is
a b u s h in g th a t in c lu d e s th e e le c tr ic a l c o n n e c tio n to th e s c r e e n o f a s c r e e n e d p o w e r c o rd , th is
r e q u ir e m e n t s h a ll n o t a p p ly .
basic safeguard ( s t r a i n r e l i e f m e c h a n i s m ) i s m a d e o f p o l y m e r i c m a t e r i a l , t h e basic

If t h e
safeguard s h a l l r e t a i n i t s s t r u c t u r a l p r o p e r t i e s f o l l o w i n g t h e m o u l d s t r e s s r e l i e f a c c o r d i n g t o
C la u s e T .8 .
Compliance is determined by inspection and by applying the force and torque tests of
G. 7.3.2.1 after the b a s ic s a fe g u a rd has come to room temperature.
G.7.4 Cord entry
Safeguards a g a in s t e le c tr ic s h o c k a n d e le c tr ic a lly - c a u s e d fire fro m c o rd s o r c a b le s c o n n e c te d

to E S 2 c irc u its , E S 3 c ir c u its o r P S 3 c ir c u its a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
The e n try o f a co rd o r c a b le in to th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll be p ro v id e d w ith safeguards a g a in s t

e le c tric s h o c k a s s p e c ifie d 5. I f t h e c o r d j a c k e t p a s s e s t h e e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h t e s t o f
in C l a u s e
5.4.9.1 f o r supplementary insulation, t h e c o r d j a c k e t m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d a supplementary
safeguard.
T h e c o rd o r c a b le e n tr y s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w ith a supplementary safeguard to :
- p r e v e n t a b ra s io n o f th e c o rd o r c a b le o u te r s u rfa c e ; a n d
- p r e v e n t th e c o rd o r c a b le fro m b e in g p u s h e d in to th e e q u ip m e n t to s u c h a n e x te n t th a t th e
c o r d o r its c o n d u c t o r s , o r b o th , c o u ld b e d a m a g e d o r in t e r n a l p a r t s o f t h e e q u i p m e n t c o u ld
b e d is p la c e d .
Compliance is determined by an electric strength test between the cord or cable conductors
and a c c e s s ib le conductive parts following the tests o f G.7.3.2.1. The test voltage shall be for
re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n in accordance with 5.4.9.1.
G.7.5 Non-detachable cord bend protection
The non-detachable power supply cord of hand-held equipment o r e q u i p m e n t i n t e n d e d to

b e m o v e d w h i l e in o p e r a t i o n s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a safeguard a g a i n s t j a c k e t , i n s u l a t i o n , or
c o n d u c t o r d a m a g e d u e to b e n d in g a t th e e q u ip m e n t e n tr a n c e .
A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e in le t o r b u s h in g s h a ll be p ro v id e d w ith a s m o o th ly ro u n d e d b e ll-m o u th e d

o p e n in g h a v in g a ra d iu s o f c u rv a tu re e q u a l to a t le a s t 1 ,5 tim e s th e o v e ra ll d ia m e te r o f th e
c o r d w ith th e la r g e s t c r o s s - s e c t io n a l a r e a to b e c o n n e c t e d .
T h e c o rd b e n d in g safeguard s h a ll:
- be so d e s ig n e d as to p ro te c t th e co rd a g a in s t e x c e s s iv e b e n d in g w h e re it e n t e r s th e
e q u ip m e n t; a n d
- b e o f in s u la tin g m a te ria l; a n d
- b e f i x e d in a r e l i a b l e m a n n e r ; a n d
- p r o j e c t o u ts id e th e e q u ip m e n t b e y o n d th e in le t o p e n in g fo r a d is ta n c e o f a t le a s t fiv e tim e s
th e o v e ra ll d ia m e te r or, fo r fla t c o rd s , a t le a s t fiv e tim e s th e m a jo r o v e ra ll c r o s s - s e c tio n a l
d im e n s io n o f th e c o rd .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
The equipment is so placed that the axis of the cord bending safeguard, where the cord
emerges, projects at an angle of 45° when the cord is free from stress. A mass equal to
10 x D2 g is then attached to the free end of the cord， where D is the overall diameter or， for
flat cords, the minor overall dimension of the cord, in millimetres.
If the cord guard is of temperature-sensitive material， the test is made at 23 °C 土 2 °C.
Flat cords are bent in the plane o f least resistance.
Immediately after the mass has been attached, the radius of curvature of the cord shall
nowhere be less than 1,5 D.
Compliance is checked by inspection, by measurement and， where necessary， by test with the
cord as delivered with the equipment.
G.7.6 Supply wiring space
G.7.6.1 General requirements
The s u p p ly w irin g space p ro v id e d in s id e , or as p a rt o f, th e e q u ip m e n t fo r p e rm a n e n t

c o n n e c tio n o r fo r c o n n e c tio n of an o rd in a ry non-detachable power supply cord s h a ll be
d e s ig n e d :
- to a llo w th e c o n d u c t o r s to b e in tr o d u c e d a n d c o n n e c t e d e a s ily ; a n d
- s o t h a t t h e u n i n s u l a t e d e n d o f a c o n d u c t o r is u n l i k e l y to b e c o m e f r e e f r o m its t e r m i n a l , o r ,
s h o u l d it d o s o , c a n n o t c o m e i n t o c o n t a c t w i t h :
• an accessible c o n d u c t i v e p a r t t h a t is n o t c o n n e c t e d t o a protective conductor; or
• an accessible c o n d u c tiv e p a rt o f hand-held equipment; and
- to p e rm it c h e c k in g b e fo re fittin g th e co ve r, if any, th a t th e c o n d u c to rs a re c o rre c tly

c o n n e c te d a n d p o s itio n e d ; a n d
- so th a t c o v e rs , if a n y , c a n b e fitte d w it h o u t ris k o f d a m a g e to th e s u p p ly c o n d u c to rs or
th e ir in s u la tio n ; a n d
- s o t h a t c o v e r s , if a n y , g iv in g a c c e s s to t h e t e r m i n a l s c a n b e r e m o v e d w it h a tool.
Compliance is checked by inspection and by an installation test with cords of the largest
cross-sectional area of the appropriate range specified in T a b l e G . 9 .
Table G.9 - Range of conductor sizes to be accepted by terminals
Nominal cross-sectional area

Rated current of equipment
mm2
A
Flexible cords Other cables
Up to and including 3 0,5 to 0,75 1 to 2,5
Over 3 up to and including 6 0,75 to 1 1 to 2,5
Over 6 up to and including 10 1 to 1,5 1 to 2,5
Over 10 up to and including 13 1,25 to 1,5 1,5 to 4
Over 13 up to and including 16 1,5 to 2,5 1,5 to 4
Over 16 up to and including 25 2,5 to 4 2,5 to 6
Over 25 up to and including 32 4 to 6 4 to 10

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.7.6.2 Stranded wire
T h e e n d o f a s tra n d e d c o n d u c to r s h a ll n o t b e c o n s o lid a te d b y s o ft s o ld e rin g a t p la c e s w h e re

t h e c o n d u c t o r is s u b j e c t t o c o n t a c t p r e s s u r e u n l e s s t h e m e t h o d o f c l a m p i n g is d e s i g n e d s o a s
to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f a b a d c o n ta c t d u e to c o ld flo w o f th e s o ld e r .
S p r in g te r m in a ls th a t c o m p e n s a te fo r th e c o ld flo w a re c o n s id e r e d to s a tis fy th is r e q u ir e m e n t.
P re v e n tin g th e c la m p in g s c re w s fro m r o t a t i n g is n o t c o n s i d e r e d to b e a d e q u a t e .
T e rm in a ls s h a ll be lo c a te d , g u a rd e d or in s u la te d so th a t, s h o u ld a s tra n d of a fle x ib le
c o n d u c to r e s c a p e when th e c o n d u c to r is f i t t e d , th e re is no lik e lih o o d o f a c c id e n ta l c o n ta c t
b e tw e e n s u c h a s tra n d a n d :
- accessible c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ; o r
- unearthed c o n d u c tiv e p a rts s e p a ra te d fro m accessible c o n d u c tiv e p a rts by

supplementary insulation o n ly .
Compliance is checked by inspection and, unless a special cord is prepared in such a way as
to prevent the escape of strands, by the following test.
A piece of insulation approximately 8 mm long is removed from the end of a flexible conductor
having the appropriate nominal cross-sectional area. One wire of the stranded conductor is
left free and the other wires are fully inserted into， and clamped in the terminal. Without
tearing the insulation back, the free wire is bent in every possible direction, but without
making sharp bends around the guard.
If the conductor is an ES3 source, the free wire shall not touch any conductive part which is
a c c e s s ib le or is connected to an a c c e s s ib le conductive part or, in the case of double
insulated equipment, any conductive part which is separated from a c c e s s ib le conductive
parts by s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n only.
If the conductor is connected to an earthing terminal， the free wire shall not touch any ES3
source.
G.8 Varistors
G.8.1 General
A v a r is to r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith IE C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 o r IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 3 1 :2 0 1 7 , w h e t h e r a fire enclosure is

p r o v id e d o r n o t, t a k in g in to a c c o u n t a ll o f t h e f o llo w in g :
- P r e f e r r e d c lim a tic c a te g o r ie s (s e e 2 .1 .1 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 :1 9 9 1 ) :
• lo w e r c a te g o ry te m p e ra tu re : - 1 0 °C
• u p p e r c a te g o ry te m p e ra tu re : + 8 5 °C
• d u r a tio n o f d a m p h e a t, s te a d y s ta te te s t: 21 d a y s ,
or
P r e f e r r e d c lim a t ic c a t e g o r ie s ( s e e 4 .1 o f IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 3 1 : 2 0 1 7 )
• lo w e r c a te g o ry te m p e ra tu re : - 4 0 °C
• u p p e r c a te g o ry te m p e ra tu re : + 8 5 °C
• r e la tiv e h u m id ity : 2 5 % to 7 5 % .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- M a x i m u m c o n tin u o u s v o lta g e :
• a t le a s t 1, 2 5 tim e s th e rated voltage o f th e e q u ip m e n t; o r
• a t le a s t 1 ,2 5 tim e s th e u p p e r v o lta g e o f th e rated voltage range.

NOTE The maximum continuous voltages are not limited to values specified in 2.1.2 of IEC 61051-2:1991 or
the values in Table 1 and Table 2 of IEC 61643-331:2017, other voltages can be used.
- Combination p u ls e (T a b le I g ro u p 1 of IE C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 :1 9 9 1 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 9 or 8 .1 .1 of
IE C 6 1 6 4 3 -3 3 1 :2 0 1 7 , F ig u re 4 ).
F o r th e te s t, a c o m b in a tio n p u ls e is s e l e c t e d f r o m 2 .3 .6 in I E C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 : 1 9 9 1 / A M D 1 : 2 0 0 9
o r fro m 8 .1 .1 o f IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 3 1 :2 0 1 7 , F ig u re 4. T h e te s t c o n s is ts o f 10 p o s itiv e p u ls e s o r
1 0 n e g a t i v e p u l s e s , e a c h h a v i n g a s h a p e o f 1 , 2 / 5 0 j i s f o r v o l t a g e a n d 8 / 2 0 (as f o r c u r r e n t .
F o r th e s e le c tio n , AC mains v o lta g e a n d o v e rv o lta g e c a te g o ry , s e e T a b le 12.

Mains u n d e r 3 0 0 V is c o n s i d e r e d to b e 3 0 0 V .
F o r O v e r v o lt a g e C a t e g o r y IV o f T a b le 1 2 , a c o m b in a t io n p u l s e 6 k V / 3 k A is u s e d e x c e p t f o r
6 0 0 V ， fo r w h ic h a c o m b in a tio n p u ls e of 8 k V /4 kA is used. As an a lte rn a tiv e , th e
c o m b in a tio n p u ls e te s t of IE C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 :1 9 9 1 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 9 ( 2 .3 .6 ， T a b le I g ro u p 1 and
A n n e x A ) o r th e c o m b in a tio n p u ls e te s t o f 8 .1 .1 F ig u re 4 o f IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 3 1 :2 0 1 7 , in c lu d in g
c o n s id e ra tio n o f th e n o m in a l mains v o l t a g e a n d o v e r v o l t a g e c a t e g o r y , is a c c e p t a b l e .
A fte r th e te s t, th e v a ris to r v o lta g e a t th e m a n u fa c tu r e r's s p e c ifie d c u r r e n t s h a ll not have

c h a n g e d b y m o re th a n 10 % w h e n c o m p a r e d to th e v a lu e b e fo re th e te s t.
The body of su rg e s u p p re s s io n v a ris to r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e n e e d le fla m e a c c o rd in g to

IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 , w ith th e fo llo w in g te s t s e v e ritie s :
- D u r a t i o n o f a p p lic a tio n o f th e te s t fla m e : 10 s.
- A f t e r fla m e tim e : 5 s.
If t h e b o d y o f s u r g e s u p p r e s s i o n v a r i s t o r c o m p l i e s w i t h V-1 class material, th e n e e d le fla m e

te s t d o e s n o t n e e d to be p e rfo rm e d .
NOTE 1 A varistor is sometimes referred to as an MOV or a VDR.
NOTE 2 Nominal varistor voltage is a voltage, at a specified DC current, used as a reference point in the
component characteristic (see IEC 61051-1).
G.8.2 Safeguards against fire
G.8.2.1 General
T h is s u b c la u s e a p p lie s to v a r is to r s u s e d a s a safeguard a g a in s t fire :
- w h e n th e m e th o d “ r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n it io n ” o f 6 .4 .1 is c h o s e n ; o r
- when th e m e th o d “ c o n tro l fire sp re a d ” of 6.4.1 is c h o s e n and th e enclosure is m a d e of

combustible material a n d lo c a te d le s s t h a n 13 m m fro m th e v a ris to r.
The safeguards in th is s u b c la u s e a re not a p p lic a b le to a v a ris to r used in a s u p p re s s io n

c irc u it whose n o m in a l v a ris to r v o lta g e , as s p e c ifie d in IEC 61051-1, is above AC mains
transient voltage.
A v a r is to r s h a ll b e r e g a r d e d a s a PIS.
T h e v a ris to r o v e rlo a d te s t o f G .8 .2 .2 a n d th e temporary overvoltage te s t o f G . 8 . 2 . 3 s h a ll b e

p e rfo rm e d d e p e n d in g on th e m a x im u m c o n tin u o u s AC v o lta g e o f th e v a ris to r a c c o rd in g to
T a b le G .1 0 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table G.10 - Varistor overload and temporary overvoltage test
Maximum continuous AC Connection between

voltage of a varistor L to N or L to L L to PE N to PE
1,25 x Vr G.8.2.2 G.8.2.2

G.8.2.2
to 2 x Fr and G.8.2.3 and G.8.2.3
Over 2 x Vt
No test G.8.2.3 G.8.2.3
to 1 200 + 1,1 x Vf
Over 1 200 + 1,1 x Vx No test No test No test
Vx is the rated voltage or the upper voltage of the rated voltage range of the equipment.
G.8.2.2 Varistor overload test
The following test is simulated as required by Table G.10 to either a varistor or a surge
suppression circuit containing varistors connected across the m a in s (L to L or L to N)f line to
protective earth (L to PE)， or neutral to protective earth (N to PE).
The following test simulation circuit shall be used:
- Voltage is the AC source of 2 x Vr

- Current is the current resulted from a test resistor R x connected in series with the AC
source.
- Vr is the ra te d v o lta g e or the upper voltage of the ra te d v o lta g e ra n g e of the equipment.
The test shall be performed with an initial test resistor R 1 = 16 x Vr
If the circuit does not open immediately during the initial application of test current, the test
shall be continued until temperature stability (see B.1.5).
Subsequently， the test shall be repeated with new values of R x (R 2, R 3, R 4, etc.) until the
circuit opens, where:
- R2 = 8 x Vr Q
- R3 = 4 x Vr Q
- R4 = 2 x Vr Q
- Rx = 0 , 5 x ( R x .- i) x Vx Q.
Components in parallel with the varistor that may be affected by this test shall be
disconnected.
During and following the test， there shall be no risk of fire and e q u ip m e n t sa fe g u a rd s, other
than the varistor under test, shall remain effective.
During the test, the circuit may:
- open due to the operation of a protective device such as a fuse, a thermal fuse; or
- close due to the operation of a GDT.
G.8.2.3 Temporary overvoltage test
The te m p o ra ry o v e rv o lta g e test is simulated by the following test methods where applicable:
A surge suppression circuit containing varistors connected between the m a in s conductors

and the earth is tested according to 8.3.8.1 and 8.3.8.2 of IEC 61643-11:2011. The

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
compliance criteria of B.4.8 may be used as an alternative to the compliance criteria of

IEC 61643-11.
If a surge suppression circuit is used, the combination pulse specified in G.8.2 is applied
before this test.
During the test， the circuit may:
- open due to the operation of a protective device such as a thermal fuse; or

- close due to the operation of a GDT.
NOTE For different power distribution systems, the temporary overvoltages are defined in Annex B of
IEC 61643-11:2011.
Components in parallel with the varistor that may be affected by this test shall be
disconnected.
G .9 Integrated circuit (IC) current limiters
G.9.1 Requirements
IC cu rre n t lim ite rs used fo r cu rre n t lim itin g in power so u rce s so th a t th e a v a ila b le o u tp u t
pow er be co m e s PS1 o r P S 2 a re n o t s h o rte d fro m i n p u t to o u t p u t if t h e y c o m p l y w it h a ll o f th e
fo llo w in g :
- t he IC cu rre n t lim ite rs lim it th e c u r r e n t to m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s d e f i n e d v a lu e (n o t to be m o re

th a n 5 A) under normal operating conditions w ith a n y s p e c ifie d d r ift ta k e n in to a c c o u n t;
- t he IC c u r r e n t lim it e r s a r e e n t i r e l y e le c t r o n i c a n d have n o m e a n s o f m a n u a l o p e ra tio n or

re s e t;
- t h e IC c u r r e n t l im i t e r s o u t p u t c u r r e n t is lim i t e d to 5 A o r le s s ( s p e c i f i e d m a x i m u m lo a d );
- t he IC cu rre n t lim ite rs lim it th e cu rre n t or v o lta g e to th e re q u ire d v a lu e w ith th e

m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s d e fin e d d rift, as a p p lic a b le , ta k e n in to account a fte r each of th e
c o n d itio n in g te s ts ; a n d
- t h e t e s t p r o g r a m a s s p e c i f i e d in G . 9 . 2 .
G.9.2 Test program
The test program consists of the performance tests outlined in T a b l e G . 1 1.
The following specifications are to be supplied by the manufacturer for application of tests:
一 power source limitation/specification (if less than 250 VA);

一 maximum input voltage (volts); and
- maxi mum output load (amperes).
Six samples are used for testing as follows:
Sample 1: Line 1
Sample 2: Lines 2 and 3
Sample 3: Lines 4 and 5
Sample 4: Line 6
Sample 5: Line 7
Sample 6: Line 8.
The power source for the tests should be capable of delivering 250 VA minimum, unless the
IC current limiter has a lower specification or is tested in the end product.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table G.11 - Performance test program for integrated circuit (IC) current limiters
Line Test Test Cycles Device Device Device Device

category condition condition enable input voltage output load
temperature voltage (amperes) to RTN d,e
〇 qb a c
Enable pin - Maximum

1 Start up 10 000 25 Off to On Maximum (rated)
cycle (rated)
2 “
50 70 Off to On 0 a || 470 pF
cycle (rated)
3 41
50 -30 Off to On 0 a || 470 mF
cycle (rated)
Input power Maximum
4 41
50 70 On 0 Q || 470 jjF
pin - cycle (rated)
Input power Maximum
5 41
50 ■30 On 0 a II 470 mF
pin - cycle (rated)
Output power Open to 0 H

Short Maximum
6 pin - short 50 70 On
Circuit (rated) (open to short)
circuit
7 Overload 50 25 Off to On 150 % maximum
cycle (rated)
Input power Maximum

8 H
50 25 On 150 % maximum
pin - cycle (rated)
RTN = Return
II = in parallel
a r ma not applied
b ± 2 x
c sample conditioned 3 h before test

d 士 20 %
卜 Load should be implemented through a suitably rated capacitor and a parallel conductive wire providing
similar characteristics to a shorted, zero ohm (0 LI) resistive load. The capacitor voltage rating should be
not less than the maximum voltage rating of the component under test.
G.9.3 Compliance criteria
After the test program, the device shall lim it the current in accordance with its specification as
applicable or the device shall become open circuit. The open circuited device is replaced with
a new sample and tests continued as applicable.
G.10 Resistors
G.10.1 General
For each o f the tests in this clause, ten samples o f resistors are tested. A sample is a single
resistor if used alone or a group of resistors as used in the application. Prior to each test, the
resistance of the samples is measured, followed by the conditioning of G. 10.2.
G.10.2 Conditioning
The samples shall be subjected to the damp heat test according to IEC 60068-2-78, with the
following details:
- temperature: (40 ± 2) °C;

- humidity: (93 ± 3 ) % relative humidity;
- test duration: 21 days.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
G.10.3 Resistor test
Each sample is then subjected to 10 impulses of alternating polarity， using the impulse test
generator circuit 2 o f Table D.1. The interval between successive impulses is 60 s , and Uc is
equal to the applicable re q u ire d w ith s ta n d voltage.
After the test， the resistance of each sample shall not have changed by more than 10 %. No
failure is allowed.
The lowest resistance value of the ten samples tested is used to measure the current when
determining compliance with T a b l e 4 .
G.10.4 Voltage surge test
Each sample is subjected to 50 discharges from the impulse test generator circuit 3 of
Table D.1, at not more than 12 discharges per minute， with Uc equal to 10 kV.
After the tests, the resistance of each sample shall not have changed by more than 20 %. No
failure is allowed.
G.10.5 Impulse test
Each sample is subjected to 10 pulses from the impulse test generator circuit 1 o f Table D.1f
with Uc equal to 4 kV or 5 kV of alternating polarity with a minimum of 60 s interval between
pulses as applicable (see Table 13).
After the tests, the resistance of each sample shall not have changed by more than 20 %. No
failure is allowed.
G.10.6 Overload test
The samples are each subjected to a voltage of such a value that the current through it is 1,5
times the value measured through a resistor, having a resistance equal to the specified rated
value, which is fitted to the equipment， when operated under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s . During
the test the voltage is kept constant. The test is performed until thermal steady state is
reached.
After the tests， the resistance of each sample shall not have changed by more than 20 %. No
failure is allowed.
G.11 Capacitors and RC units
G.11.1 General
T h e r e q u ir e m e n ts b e lo w s p e c ify c o n d itio n in g c rite ria w h e n te s tin g c a p a c ito r s a n d R C u n its o r

d is c re te c o m p o n e n ts fo rm in g an RC u n it a n d s e rv in g as safeguards and p ro v id e s s e le c tio n
c rite ria fo r c a p a c ito r s a n d R C u n its th a t c o m p ly w ith IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 .
G.11.2 Conditioning of capacitors and RC units
W h e n r e q u i r e d b y 5 . 5 . 2 . 1 , t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n i n g is a p p l i e d w h e n e v a l u a t i n g a c a p a c i t o r o r
a n R C u n it to th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 .
The d u ra tio n o f th e d a m p h e a t, s te a d y s ta te te s t a s s p e c ifie d in 4 . 1 2 o f I E C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 : 2 0 0 5 ,

s h a l l b e 2 1 d a y s a t a t e m p e r a t u r e o f ( 4 0 ± 2 ) 0C a n d a r e l a t i v e h u m i d i t y o f ( 9 3 ± 3 ) 〇
/ 〇•
C a p a c ito rs s u b je c te d to a d u ra tio n th a t is lo n g e r th a n 21 days d u rin g th e above te s t a re

c o n s id e re d a c c e p ta b le .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.11.3 Rules for selecting capacitors
The a p p ro p ria te c a p a c ito r s u b c la s s s h a ll be s e le c te d fro m th o s e lis te d in T a b le G .1 2 ,

a c c o r d i n g t o t h e r u l e s o f a p p l i c a t i o n in t h e t a b l e .
Table G.12 - Capacitor ratings according to IEC 60384-14
Capacitor subclass Rated voltage of the Type test impulse test Type test RMS test
according to capacitor voltage of the capacitor voltage of the capacitor
IEC 60384-14
V RMS kV peak kV RMS
Y1 Up to and including 500 8 4
Over 150 up to and

Y2 5a 1,5
including 300
Y4 Up to and including 150 2,5 〇 ,9
4 a
X1 Up to and including 760 -
X2 Up to and including 760 2,5 a ■
Rules for the application of this table.
1 The voltage rating of the capacitor shall be at least equal to the RMS working voltage across the insulation
being bridged, determined according to 5.4.1.8.2. As an exception to the requirements in the table, one Y2
capacitor may be used in cases where 2 f5 kV is required.
2 For a single capacitor (X type) serving as functional insulation, failure of the capacitor shall not result in
the failure of a safeguard and the type test impulse test voltage shall be at least equal to the required
withstand voltage.
3 A higher grade capacitor than the one specified may be used, as follows:
一 subclass Y1 if subclass Y2 is specified;
- subclass Y1 or Y2 if subclass Y4 is specified;
一 subclass Y1 or Y2 if subclass X1 is specified;
- subclass X1, Y1 or Y2 if subclass X2 is specified.
4 Two or more capacitors may be used in series in place of the single capacitor specified, as follows:
一 subclass Y1 or Y2 if subclass Y1 is specified;
- subclass Y2 or Y4 if subclass Y2 is specified;
一 subclass X1 or X2 if subclass X1 is specified.
5 If two or more capacitors are used in series they shall comply with 5.5.2.1 as applicable and comply with the
other rules above.
a For capacitance values of more than 1 j.iF, this test voltage is reduced by a factor equal to \fc , where C is
the capacitance value in pF.
G.12 Optocouplers
O p t o c o u p l e r s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f I E C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 : 2 0 0 7 . In t h e a p p l i c a t i o n o f
IE C 6 0 7 4 7 -5 -5 :2 0 0 7 ,
- t he type testing as s p e c ifie d in 7 .4 .3 o f IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 :2 0 0 7 s h a ll be p e rfo rm e d w ith a

v o lta g e K ini>a t h a t is at le a s t equal to th e a p p ro p ria te te s t v o lta g e in 5 .4 .9 .1 of th is
d o c u m e n t; and
- t he routine testing a s s p e c i f i e d in 7 . 4 . 1 o f IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 : 2 0 0 7 s h a ll b e p e r fo r m e d w ith a

v o lta g e K ini>b t h a t is at le a s t equal to th e a p p ro p ria te te s t v o lta g e in 5 .4 .9 .2 of th is
d o c u m e n t.
Copyright Inlern^lional Etectrotechmcal Commission

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
G.13 Printed boards
G.13.1 General
The re q u ire m e n ts fo r basic insulation， supplementary insulation, reinforced insulation

and double insulation o n p rin te d b o a rd s a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s a ls o a p p ly to th e w in d in g s o f a p la n a r tr a n s fo r m e r .
G.13.2 Uncoated printed boards
The in s u la tio n b e tw e e n c o n d u c to rs on th e o u te r s u rfa c e s o f an u n c o a te d p rin te d b o a rd s h a ll

c o m p ly w ith th e m in im u m clearance re q u ire m e n ts of 5.4.2 and th e m in im u m creepage
distance re q u ire m e n ts o f 5.4.3.
Compliance is checked by inspection and by measurement.
G.13.3 Coated printed boards
T h e r e q u ir e m e n ts fo r s e p a r a tio n d is ta n c e s b e fo re th e b o a rd s a re c o a te d a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
A n a l t e r n a t i v e m e t h o d t o q u a l i f y c o a t e d p r i n t e d b o a r d s is g i v e n in I E C 6 0 6 6 4 - 3 .
F o r p r in te d b o a r d s w h o s e o u te r s u r fa c e s a re to b e c o a te d w ith a s u ita b le c o a tin g m a te r ia l, th e

m in im u m s e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e s of T a b le G .1 3 a p p ly to c o n d u c tiv e p a rts b e fo re th e y a re
c o a te d .
Double insulation and reinforced insulation s h a ll p a s s routine tests fo r e le c tric s tre n g th o f

5 .4 .9 .2 .
E ith e r o n e o r b o th c o n d u c tiv e p a rts and th e e n tire d is ta n c e s o v e r th e s u rfa c e b e tw e e n th e

c o n d u c tiv e p a rts s h a ll b e c o a te d .
T h e m in im u m clearances o f 5 .4 .2 a n d th e m in im u m creepage distances o f 5 .4 .3 s h a ll a p p ly :
- if t h e a b o v e c o n d it io n s a r e n o t m e t;
- b e t w e e n a n y tw o u n c o a te d c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ; a n d
- o v e r th e o u ts id e o f th e c o a tin g .
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement, taking Figure 0.11 and Figure 0.12
into account, and by the tests of G.13.6.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table G.13 - Minimum separation distances for coated printed boards
Peak of the working voltage Basic insulation or Reinforced insulation

up to and including supplementary insulation
V peak mm mm
71 a 0,025 0,05
89 a 0,04 0,08
113a 0,063 0,125
141 a 0,1 〇 ,2
177a 0,16 0,32
227 a 0,25 0,5
283 a 0,4 0,8
354 a 0,56 1,12
455 a 0,75 1,5
570 1,0 2,0
710 1,3 2,6
895 1,8 3,6

1 135 2,4 3,8
1 450 2,8 4,0
1 770 3,4 4,2
2 260 4,1 4,6
2 830 5,0 5,0

3 540 6,3 6,3
4 520 8,2 8,2
5 660 10 10
7 070 13 13
8 910 16 16
11 310 20 20
14 140 26 26
17 700 33 33
22 600 43 43
28 300 55 55
35 400 70 70
45 200 86 86
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated spacing being rounded up to the
next higher 0,1 mm increment.
a The test of G.13.6 is not required.
G.13.4 Insulation between conductors on the same inner surface
The re q u ire m e n ts fo r in s u la tio n on th e sam e in n e r la y e r o f a m u ltila y e r b o a rd a re s p e c ifie d

b e lo w .
On an in n e r s u rfa c e o f a m u ltila y e r p rin te d b o a rd (se e F ig u re 0 .1 4 ) , th e p a th b e tw e e n any

t w o c o n d u c t o r s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r a c e m e n t e d j o i n t in 5 . 4 . 4 . 5 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
G.13.5 Insulation between conductors on different surfaces
The re q u ire m e n ts fo r in s u la tio n on th e d iffe re n t la y e rs of a m u ltila y e r b o a rd a re s p e c ifie d

b e lo w .
For basic insulation t h e r e is n o t h i c k n e s s r e q u i r e m e n t .
Supplementary insulation or reinforced insulation b e tw e e n c o n d u c tiv e p a rts on d iffe re n t

s u rfa c e s in d o u b le -s id e d s in g le -la y e r p rin te d b o a rd s, m u lti-la y e r p rin te d b o a rd s and m e ta l
co re p rin te d b o a rd s , s h a ll e ith e r h a v e a m in im u m th ic k n e s s o f 0 ,4 m m p ro v id e d b y a s in g le
l a y e r o r c o n f o r m w i t h o n e o f t h e s p e c i f i c a t i o n s a n d p a s s t h e r e l e v a n t t e s t s in T a b l e G . 1 4 .
Table G.14 - Insulation in printed boards
Routine tests
Specification of insulation Type tests a
for electric strength c
Two layers of sheet insulating material including pre-preg b No Yes
Three or more layers of sheet insulating material including
No No
pre-preg b
An insulation system with ceramic coating over a metallic
No Yes
substrate, cured at > 500 °C
An insulation system, with two or more coatings other than
Yes Yes
ceramic over a metallic substrate, cured at < 500 °C
NOTE 1 Pre-preg is the term used for a layer of glass cloth impregnated with a partially cured resin.
NOTE 2 For definition of ceramic, see IEC 60050-212:2010, 212-15-25.
a Thermal conditioning of G.13.6.2 followed by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1.

b Layers are counted before curing.
c Electric strength testing is carried out on the finished printed board.
G.13.6 Tests on coated printed boards
G.13.6.1 Sample preparation and preliminary inspection
Three sample printed boards (or， for coated components in Clause G.14, two components and
one board) identified as samples 7, 2 and 3 are required. Either actual boards or specially
produced samples with representative coating and minimum separations may be used. Each
sample board shall be representative of the minimum separations used, and coated. Each
sample is subjected to the full sequence of manufacturing processes， including soldering and
cleaning， to which it is normally subjected during equipment assembly.
When visually inspected, the boards shall show no evidence of pinholes or bubbles in the
coating or breakthrough of conductive tracks at corners.
Sample 1 is subjected to the thermal cycling sequence of 5.4.1.5.3.
Sample 2 is aged in a full draught oven at a temperature and for a time duration chosen from
the graph shown in Figure G.3 using the temperature index line that corresponds to the
maximum operating temperature of the coated board. The temperature of the oven is
maintained at the specified temperature ± 2 °C. The temperature used to determine the
temperature index line is the highest temperature on the board where safety is involved.
When using Figure G.3, interpolation may be used between the nearest two temperature
index lines.

IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018
00 06
00 09
0O9Z
(LI)ESg
Q)
.E
6e leou 卜
a)
■
a>
■jl
q
M
lll
ll
fll
r
fll
fl
300 280 266~ 246~ ~ 226~ ~ 260------------- m ----------^60-------- H 0 ---------------- ^ 2 Q -------------W

Oven temperature (°C)
IEC
Figure G.3 - Thermal ageing time
Samples 1 and 2 are then subjected to the humidity conditioning of 5.4.8 and shall withstand
the electric strength test o f 5.4.9.1 between conductors.
Sample board 3 is subjected to the following abrasion resistance test:
Scratches are made across five pairs of conducting parts and the intervening separations at
points where the separations will be subject to the maximum potential gradient during the
tests.
The scratches are made by means of a hardened steel pin， the end of which has the form of a
cone having a tip angle of 40°， its tip being rounded and polished， with a radius of
0,25 mm 土 0,02 mm.
Scratches are made by drawing the pin along the surface in a plane perpendicular to the
conductor edges at a speed of 20 mm/s ± 5 mm/s as shown in Figure G.4. The pin is so
loaded that the force exerted along its axis is 10 N 土 0,5 N. The scratches shall be at least
5 mm apart and at least 5 mm from the edge of the specimen.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
B C
NOTE The pin is in the plane ABCD that is perpendicular to the specimen under test.
Figure G.4 - Abrasion resistance test for coating layers
After the test, the coating layer shall neither have loosened nor have been pierced. The
coating shall withstand an electric strength test as specified in 5.4.9.1 between conductors. In
the case of metal core printed boards, the substrate is one of the conductors.
If mechanical stress or bending is applied to the board, additional tests to identify cracking
may be needed (see IEC 60664-3).
G.14 Coatings on component terminals
G.14.1 Requirements
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r c o a t i n g s o n c o m p o n e n t t e r m i n a l s a n d t h e l ik e , w h e r e t h e c o a t i n g is u s e d
to r e d u c e clearances and creepage distances a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
C o a tin g s m ay be used over e x te rn a l te rm in a tio n s of c o m p o n e n ts to in c re a s e e ffe c tiv e

clearances and creepage distances (se e F ig u re 0 . 1 1 ) . T h e m in im u m s e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e s
o f T a b le G .1 3 a p p ly to th e com ponent b e fo re c o a tin g , and th e c o a tin g s h a ll m eet a ll th e
r e q u ir e m e n ts o f G .1 3 .3 . T h e m e c h a n ic a l a r r a n g e m e n t a n d rig id ity o f th e te r m in a tio n s s h a ll b e
a d e q u a te to e n s u re th a t, d u rin g n o rm a l h a n d lin g , a s s e m b ly in to e q u ip m e n t a n d subsequent
u s e , th e te r m in a t io n s w ill n o t b e s u b je c t to d e f o r m a t io n th a t w o u ld c r a c k th e c o a tin g o r r e d u c e
th e s e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e s b e tw e e n c o n d u c tiv e p a rts b e lo w th e v a lu e s in T a b le G .1 3
(se e G .1 3 .3 ).
Compliance is checked by inspection taking into account Figure 0.11 and by applying the
sequence of tests covered by G.13.6. These tests are carried out on a completed assembly
including the component(s).
The abrasion resistance test o f G.13.6.2 is carried out on a specially prepared sample printed
board as described for sample 3 in G. 13.6.1, except that the separation between the
conductive parts shall be representative o f the minimum separations and maximum potential
gradients used in the assembly.
Copyright International Electrotechnical Commission

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.15 Pressurized liquid filled components
G.15.1 Requirements
A n L F C lo c a t e d in t e r n a l to th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith a ll o f th e f o llo w in g r e q u ir e m e n t s :
- flammable o r c o n d u c tiv e liq u id s h a ll b e s to re d in a c o n t a i n e r , a n d th e LFC s h a ll c o m p ly

w ith th e te s ts o f G . 1 5 .2 .3 , G . 1 5 .2 .4 , G . 1 5 .2 .5 a n d G . 1 5 .2 .6 ;
- t he liq u id s h a ll be p ro v id e d w ith p ro te c tio n in a cco rd a n ce w ith C la u s e 7 (hazardous

substances);
- non-metallic p a rts of th e c o n ta in e r s y s te m s h a ll w ith s ta n d th e te s ts o f G . 1 5 . 2 .1 and
G .1 5 .2 .2 ; a n d
- t he LFC s h a ll be m o u n te d w ith in th e e q u i p m e n t in s u c h a w a y th a t th e tu b in g s h a ll not

c o m e in to c o n ta c t w ith s h a r p e d g e s o r a n y o th e r s u r fa c e th a t c o u ld d a m a g e th e tu b in g a n d
if th e LFC b u r s t s o r r e l i e v e s its p r e s s u r e , t h e liq u id c a n n o t d e f e a t a safeguard.
T h e o r d e r o f t e s t s is n o t s p e c i f i e d . T h e t e s t s m a y b e p e r f o r m e d o n s e p a r a t e s a m p l e s , e x c e p t
a f t e r t h e t e s t o f G . 1 5 . 2 . 2 , t h e t e s t o f G . 1 5 . 2 .1 is c o n d u c t e d .
G.15.2 Test methods and compliance criteria
G.15.2.1 Hydrostatic pressure test
Compliance is checked by evaluation o f the available data or by the following test. An LFC
that is open to the atmosphere or is non-pressurised (for example, an ink cartridge) is not
subjected to this test.
One sample of the LFC is subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test for 2 min at room
temperature and at a pressure that is the highest of the following:
- three times the maximum working pressure specified by the manufacturer at the maximum
temperature measured during n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ; and
- t wo times the maximum measured working pressure at the maximum temperature
measured during application of the a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s of Clause B.3 and
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s of Clause BA.
G.15.2.2 Creep resistance test
Two samples of the LFC， of which one or more parts are made of non-metallic materials， shall
be conditioned for 14 days at a temperature of 87 °C and placed in a full draft air-circulating
oven. Following the conditioning, the system shall comply with the test of G.15.2.1 and non-
metallic parts shall show no sign of deterioration such as cracking and embrittlement.
G.15.2.3 Tubing and fittings compatibility test
Ten samples of the test specimens made o f the material used for the tubing and associated
fittings of the LFC， of which one or more parts are made of non-metallic materials， shall be
tested for tensile strength in accordance with the ISO 527 series. Five specimens shall be
tested in the condition as received and the remaining five specimens after a conditioning test
for 40 days in a water bath filled with the intended liquid and maintained at 38 °C. The internal
pressure o f the assemblies is maintained at atmospheric pressure. The tensile strength after
conditioning shall not be less than 60 % of the tensile strength before the tests.
Alternatively, the five samples of the finished LFC assembly may be tested as far as the part
under test is suitable for the tensile strength test. The samples of finished assembly filled with
the intended liquid at the internal pressure maintained at atmospheric pressure is conditioned
for 40 days at 38 °C in a full draft air-circulating oven.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
G.15.2.4 Vibration test
One sample of the LFC, or the equipment containing the LFCt shall be fastened to the
vibration generator in its normal position o f use, as specified in IEC 60068-2-6， by means of
screws, clamps or straps round the component. The direction of vibration is vertical, and the
severities are:
- duration: 30 min;
- amplitude: 0,35 mm;
- frequency range: 10 Hz， 55 Hz， 10 Hz;
- sweep rate: approximately one octave per minute.
G.15.2.5 Thermal cycling test
One sample of the LFC is subjected to three cycles of conditioning for 7 h at a temperature
that is 10 °C above the maximum temperature obtained during n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,
a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s o f Clause B.3 and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s of Clause B.4f
followed by room temperature for 1 h.
NOTE The LFC is not energized during the above test.
G.15.2.6 Force test
One sample of the LFC is subjected to the tests of Clause T.2 (10 N test applied to fittings
a c c e s s ib le to a s k ille d p e rso n ) and Clause T.3 (30 N test applied to fittings a c c e s s ib le to
an in s tru c te d p e rs o n or to an o rd in a ry p e rso n ).
Compliance is checked by inspection and evaluation o f the available data or by the tests of
G.15.2. During and after these tests, there shall be no rupture， no leaks and no loosening of
any connection or part.
G.16 IC that includes a capacitor discharge function (ICX)
G.16.1 Requirements
A n IC X a n d a n y a s s o c ia te d c o m p o n e n ts c ritic a l to th e d is c h a rg e fu n c tio n o f a c a p a c ito r (s u c h

a s th e mains c a p a c ito r) to an accessible p a rt a re fa u lt te s te d u n le s s o n e o f th e fo llo w in g
c o n d i t i o n s is m e t :
- t he IC X w ith th e a s s o c ia te d c irc u itry a s p ro v id e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t c o m p l i e s w i t h t h e t e s t s

of G .1 6 .2. Any im p u ls e a tte n u a tin g c o m p o n e n ts (su ch as v a ris to rs and G DTs) th a t
a tte n u a te th e im p u ls e to th e IC X a n d th e a s s o c ia te d c irc u itry a re d is c o n n e c te d ; o r
- t he IC X te s te d s e p a ra te ly c o m p lie s w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts of G .1 6 .2. If d is c h a rg e

c o m p o n e n ts e x te rn a l to th e IC X a re n e c e s s a ry :
• t h e y s h a l l b e i n c l u d e d in t h e t e s t o f G . 1 6 . 2 , a n d
• t h e d i s c h a r g e c o m p o n e n t s u s e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t s h a l l b e w i t h i n t h e r a n g e t e s t e d .
G.16.2 Tests
Where the ICX is tested by itself, the test set up shall be as recommended by the ICX
manufacturer.
- humidi ty treatment o f 5.4.8 for 120 h.

- 1 0 0 positive impulses and 100 negative impulses between line and neutral using a
capacitor with the smallest capacitance and a resistor with the smallest resistance
specified by the manufacturer of the ICX. The time between any two impulses shall not be

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
less than 1 s. The impulse shall be as specified in circuit 2 of Table D. 1 with Uc equal to
the transient voltage as determined in 5.4.2.3.2.2.
The impulses are to be superimposed on the m ains voltage. The m ains voltage is taken
as the maximum of:
• the equipment rated voltage range when tested in the equipment， or
• the maximum m ains voltage as specified by the ICX manufacturer when tested
separately.
- Application o f an AC m ains voltage that is 120 % of the rated voltage for 2,5 min.
- 1 0 000 cycles of the connection and disconnection of the mains. If the ICX is tested by
itself， a capacitor with the largest capacitance and a resistor with the smallest resistance
as specified by the manufacturer shall be used. The connection and disconnection cycle
time shall not be less than 2 s.
If any of the associated circuitry components other than those critical for the discharge
function fails, it may be replaced with a new component.
Compliance is checked by evaluation of the available data or by conducting the above tests.
The capacitor discharge test is conducted after the above tests, ensuring the ICX or the BUT
provided with the ICX continues to provide the safeguard function.
NOTE Evaluation of available data includes information of failure of any associated circuitry components that
keeps the discharge mode in the on/stay mode.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex H
(n o rm a tive )
Criteria for telephone ringing signals
H_1 General
The tw o a lte rn a tiv e m e th o d s d e s c rib e d in th is annex re fle c t s a tis fa c to ry e x p e rie n c e in

d iffe re n t p a rts o f th e w o rld . M e th o d A is t y p i c a l o f a n a l o g u e te le p h o n e n e tw o rk s in E u ro p e ,
and M e th o d B o f th o s e in N o rth A m e ric a . The tw o m e th o d s r e s u l t in s t a n d a r d s o f e le c tric a l
s a fe ty th a t a re b ro a d ly e q u iv a le n t.
H.2 Method A
This method requires that the currents I TS1 and I TS2 flowing through a 5 000 Q resistor,
between any two conductors or between one conductor and protective earth do not exceed
the limits specified, as follows:
a) For n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , I TS1, the current determined from the calculated or
measured current for any single active ringing period t 1 (as defined in Figure H.1)3 does
not exceed:
- for cadenced ringing (t1 < °°)9 the current given by the curve of Figure H.2 at tp
- for continuous ringing (t^ = °°)y 16 mA.
/ r S 7 , i n m A ，i s a s g i v e n b y
TS1=去 for (t^\ < 6 0 0 m s)
/ 丨 - 600 /pp 1200 - /| P

I TS1 for (600 m s < tA < 1200 m s)
600 X 2 v¥ + 600 X V2
for (^ > 1 2 0 0 m s)
2V2
where:
p is the peak current, in mA, of the relevant waveform given in Figure H.3;
rpp
is the peak-to-peak current, in mA， of the relevant waveform given in Figure H.3;
is expressed in ms.
b) For n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , / r S 2 , the average current for repeated bursts of a
cadenced ringing signal calculated for one ringing cadence cycle t2 (as defined in
Figure H. 1)9 does not exceed 16 mA RMS
I TS2 in mA is as given by
1/2
TS2
h
7^
x
；
j2
TS1
12 X
42
，
2 3 ,7 5
where:
JTS1 in mA, is as given by H.2 a);
’ dc is the DC current in mA flowing through the 5 000 Q resistor during the

non-active period of the cadence cycle;
t1 and t2 are expressed in ms.
NOTE The frequencies of telephone ringing voltages are normally within the range of 14 Hz to 50 Hz.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
c) Under single fa u lt c o n d itio n s ， including where cadenced ringing becomes continuous:

- JTS1 shall not exceed the current given by the curve of Figure H.2, or 20 mAr
whichever is greater; and
- I TS2 shall not exceed a limit of 20 mA.
J
A A
4------------ 上 ----------------------- ,
IEC
Key
/1 is
the duration of a single ringing period, where the ringing is active for the whole of the single ringing
period;
一 the sum of the active periods of ringing within the single ringing period, where the single ringing period
contains two or more discrete active periods of ringing, as in the example shown， for which ^ = / 1a + f 1b.
t2 is the duration of one complete cadence cycle.
Figure H.1 - Definition of ringing period and cadence cycle

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Figure H.2 - / TS1 limit curve for cadenced ringing signal
Figure H.3 - Peak and peak-to-peak currents

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
H.3 Method B
H.3.1 Ringing signal
H.3.1.1 Frequency
The rin g in g s ig n a l s h a ll use o n ly fr e q u e n c ie s whose f u n d a m e n t a l c o m p o n e n t is e q u a l t o or

le s s th a n 7 0 H z.
H.3.1.2 Voltage
The rin g in g v o lta g e s h a ll be le s s th a n 300 V p e a k -to -p e a k and le s s th a n 200 V peak w ith

r e s p e c t to e a r th , m e a s u r e d a c r o s s a r e s is t a n c e o f a t le a s t 1 M Q .
H.3.1.3 Cadence
The rin g in g v o lta g e s h a ll be in te rru p te d to c re a te q u ie t in te rv a ls of at le a s t 1s d u ra tio n

s e p a ra te d by no m o re th a n 5 s. D u rin g th e q u ie t in te rv a ls , th e v o lta g e to e a rth s h a ll not
exceed 60 V DC.
H.3.1.4 Single fault current
W h e re ca d e n ce d rin g in g b e c o m e s c o n tin u o u s a s a c o n s e q u e n c e o f a s in g le fa u lt, th e c u r r e n t

th ro u g h a 5 000 Cl re s is to r c o n n e c te d b e tw e e n any tw o o u tp u t c o n d u c to rs or b e tw e e n one
o u t p u t c o n d u c t o r a n d e a r t h s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 5 6 , 5 m A p e a k - t o - p e a k , a s s h o w n in F i g u r e H . 3 .
H.3.2 Tripping device and monitoring voltage
H.3.2.1 Conditions for use of a tripping device or a monitoring voltage
A rin g in g s ig n a l c ir c u it s h a ll in c lu d e a trip p in g d e v ic e as s p e c ifie d in H .3 .2 .2 , or p ro v id e a

m o n ito rin g v o lta g e as s p e c ifie d in H .3 .2 .3 , or b o th , d e p e n d in g on th e cu rre n t th ro u g h a
s p e c ifie d re s is ta n c e c o n n e c te d b e tw e e n th e rin g in g s ig n a l g e n e r a to r a n d e a rth , a s fo llo w s :
：
- if th e c u rre n t th ro u g h a 5 0 0 Q o r g re a te r re s is to r d o e s n o t e x c e e d 100 m A p e a k -to -p e a k ,
n e i t h e r a t r i p p i n g d e v i c e n o r a m o n i t o r i n g v o l t a g e is r e q u i r e d ;
：
- if th e cu rre n t th ro u g h a 1 500 Q or g re a te r re s is to r exceeds 100 mA p e a k -to -p e a k , a
trip p in g d e v ic e s h a ll b e in c lu d e d . If th e t r ip p in g d e v ic e m e e ts th e trip c rite ria s p e c ifie d in
F ig u re H .4 w ith R> 500 Q, no m o n ito rin g v o lta g e is re q u ire d . If, h o w e ve r, th e trip p in g
* d e v ic e o n ly m e e ts th e trip c rite ria w ith R> 1 500 Q, a m o n ito rin g v o lta g e s h a ll a ls o be
p ro v id e d ;
- if t h e c u r r e n t t h r o u g h a 500 Q o r g re a te r re s is to r e x c e e d s 100 mA p e a k -to -p e a k , b u t th e

c u rre n t th ro u g h a 1 5 0 0 Cl o r g r e a te r r e s is to r d o e s n o t e x c e e d th is v a lu e , e ith e r:
• a t r i p p i n g d e v i c e s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d , m e e t i n g t h e t r i p c r i t e r i a s p e c i f i e d in F i g u r e H . 4 w i t h
R> 500 or
• a m o n ito r in g v o lta g e s h a ll b e p r o v id e d .
NOTE 1 Tripping devices are, in general, current-sensitive and do not have a linear response, due to the
resistance/current characteristics and time delay/response factor in their design.
NOTE 2 In order to minimize testing time, a variable resistor box is normally used.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
(<lu)
o)
J
J
n
o2 HJ
a
0
d
3
-o
v->
lm d
a)
NOTE 1 / is measured from the time of connection of the resistor R to the circuit.
NOTE 2 The sloping part of the curve is defined as / = 100 / V7 •
Figure H.4 - Ringing voltage trip criteria
H.3.2.2 Tripping device
A s e rie s c u rre n t-s e n s itiv e trip p in g d e v ic e in t h e rin g le a d th a t w ill trip rin g in g a s s p e c ifie d in
F ig u re H .4 .
H.3.2.3 Monitoring voltage
A v o lt a g e to e a r th o n th e tip o r rin g c o n d u c t o r w ith a m a g n itu d e o f a t le a s t 19 V p e a k , b u t n o t

e x c e e d i n g 6 0 V D C , w h e n e v e r t h e r i n g i n g v o l t a g e is n o t p r e s e n t ( i d l e s t a t e ) .
Copyright Iniernatipnal Etectrotechmcal Commission

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex I
(in fo rm a tiv e )
Overvoltage categories
(see IEC 60364-4-44)
T h e c o n c e p t o f o v e rv o lta g e c a te g o rie s is u s e d f o r e q u i p m e n t e n e r g i z e d d ire c tly fro m th e A C

mains.
The la rg e s t tra n s ie n t v o lta g e lik e ly to be e x p e rie n c e d at th e power in p u t in te rfa c e of

e q u ip m e n t mains i s k n o w n
c o n n e c te d to th e as th e mains transient voltage. In th is
d o c u m e n t , m i n i m u m clearances f o r i n s u l a t i o n in c irc u its c o n n e c t e d t o t h e mains a r e based
o n t h e mains transient voltage.
A c c o rd in g to IE C 6 0 6 6 4 -1 , th e v a lu e o f th e mains transient voltage is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m th e

mains v o lta g e a n d th e O v e r v o lta g e C a te g o r y , I to IV (s e e T a b le 12 o f th is d o c u m e n t) .
The o v e rv o lta g e c a te g o ry th e re fo re s h a ll be id e n tifie d fo r each e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to be

c o n n e c t e d to th e mains ( s e e T a b l e 1 .1 ).
The o v e rv o lta g e c a te g o rie s have a p ro b a b ilis tic im p lic a tio n ra th e r th a n th e m e a n in g of

p h y s ic a l a tte n u a tio n o f th e tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e d o w n s tr e a m in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n .
NOTE 1 This concept of overvoltage categories is used in IEC 60364-4-44:2007, section 443.
NOTE 2 The term overvoltage category in this document is synonymous with impulse withstand category used in
IEC 60364-4-44:2007, section 443.
T h e t e r m o v e r v o l t a g e c a t e g o r y i s n o t u s e d i n c o n n e c t i o n w i t h D C p o w e r d i s t r i b u t i o n s y s t e m s in
th is d o c u m e n t.
Table 1.1 - Overvoltage categories
Overvoltage Equipment and its point of connection Examples of equipment

category to the AC mains
• Electricity meters
Equipment that will be connected to the point where
IV • Communications ITE for remote
the mains supply enters the building
electricity metering
• Socket outlets, fuse panels and

Equipment that will be an integral part of the building switch panels
III
wiring
• Power monitoring equipment
• Household appliances, portable

Pluggable or permanently connected equipment that tools, home electronics
II
will be supplied from the building wiring
• Most ITE used in the building
Equipment that will be connected to a special mains in • ITE supplied via an external filter
I
which measures have been taken to reduce transients or a motor driven generator

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex J
(n o rm a tive )
Insulated winding wires for use without interleaved insulation
J.1 General
R e q u ire m e n ts fo r w in d in g w ire s w h o s e in s u la tio n m ay be used to p ro v id ebasic insulation,

supplementary insulation, double insulation or reinforced insulation i n w o u n d
c o m p o n e n ts w it h o u t in te r le a v e d in s u la tio n a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
T h is a n n e x a p p lie s to :
- sol i d ro u n d w in d in g w ire s h a v in g d ia m e te r s b e tw e e n 0 ,0 1 mm and 5 ,0 m m , a n d s tra n d e d

w in d in g w ire s w ith e q u iv a le n t c r o s s - s e c tio n a l a re a s ; a n d
- sol i d sq u a re and s o lid re c ta n g u la r (fla tw is e b e n d in g ) w in d in g w ire s w ith c ro s s -s e c tio n a l

a re a s o f 0 ,0 3 m m 2 to 1 9 ,6 m m 2.
NOTE See G.6.1 for the minimum number of overlapping layers.
J.2 Type tests
J.2.1 General
Unless otherwise specified, the winding wire shall pass thefollowing typ e tests, carried out at
a temperature between 15 °C and 35 °C and a relative humidity between 45 % and 75 %.
J.2.2 Electric strength
J.2.2.1Solid round winding wires and strandedwinding wires
J.2.2.1.1 Wires with a nominal conductor diameter up to and including 0,1 mm
The test specimen is prepared according to 4.3 of IEC 60851-5:2008. The specimen is then
subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, between the conductor of the wire and the
cylinder, with a minimum test voltage of:
- 3 kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or

- 1 , 5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
J.2.2.1.2 Wires with a nominal conductor diameter over 0,1 mm up to and including
2,5 mm
The test specimen is prepared according to 4.4.1 of IEC 60851-5:2008. The specimen is then
subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 with a test voltage that is not less than twice
the appropriate voltage of 5.4.9.1, with a minimum of:

- 3 kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
J.2.2.1.3 Wires with a nominal conductor diameter over 2,5 mm
The test specimen is prepared according to 4.5.1 of IEC 60851-5:2008. The specimen is then
subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 between the conductor o f the wire and the
shot, with a minimum test voltage of:

- 1,5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
J.2.2.2 Square or rectangular wires
The test specimen is prepared according to 4.7.1 of IEC 60851-5:2008 (single conductor
surrounded by metal shots). The specimen is then subjected to the electric strength test of
5.4.9.1, with a minimum test voltage of:

- 1 , 5 kV RMS or 2t 1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
J.2.3 Flexibility and adherence
Clause 5.1.1 (in Test 8) of IEC 60851-3:2009 shall be used， using the mandrel diameters of
Table J.1.
The test specimen is then examined in accordance with 5.1.1.4 of IEC 60851-3:2009, followed
by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 in this document, with minimum test voltage of:

The test voltage is applied between the wire and the mandrel.
Table J.1 - Mandrel diameter
Nominal conductor diameter or thickness Mandrel diameter

mm mm
less than 0,35 4,0 土 0,2
less than 0,50 6,0 士 0,2

less than 0,75 8,0 土 0,2
less than 2,50 10,0±0,2

less than 5,00 Four times the conductor diameter or thickness a
3 In accordance with IEC 60317-43.
The tension to be applied to the wire during winding on the mandrel is calculated from the
wire diameter to be equivalent to 118 MPa ± 10 % (118 N/mm2 ± 10 %).
Edgewise bending on the smaller dimension side (width) is not required for rectangular wire.
For mandrel winding test of the square and rectangular wire， two adjacent turns do not need
to contact each other.
J.2.4 Heat shock
The test specimen shall be prepared in accordance with 5.1.1 (in Test 8) of
IEC 60851-3:2009， followed by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 in this document， with a
minimum test voltage of:

- 1 ，5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
The test voltage is applied between the wire and the mandrel. The oven temperature is the
relevant temperature of the thermal class of insulation in Table J.2. The mandrel diameter and
tension applied to the wire during winding on the mandrel are as specified in J.2.3. The
electric strength test is conducted at room temperature after removal from the oven.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table J.2 - Oven temperature
Thermal class Class Class Class Class Class Class Class Class
105 120 130 155 180 200 220 250
(A) (E) (B) (F) (H) (N) (R) _
Oven
temperature 200 215 225 250 275 295 315 345
0C
Oven temperatures shall be maintained within ± 5° of the specified temperature.
The classes are related to the classification of electrical insulating materials and EISs in accordance with
Edgewise bending on the smaller dimension side (width) is not required for rectangular wire.
J.2.5 Retention of electric strength after bending
Five specimens are prepared as in J.2.3 and tested as follows. Each specimen is removed
from the mandrel， placed in a container and positioned so that it can be surrounded by at
least 5 mm of metal shot. The ends of the conductor in the specimen shall be sufficiently long
to avoid flash over. The shot shall be not more than 2 mm in diameter and shall consist of
balls of stainless steel， nickel or nickel plated iron. The shot is gently poured into the
container until the specimen under test is covered by at least 5 mm of shot. The shot shall be
cleaned periodically with a suitable solvent.
NOTE The above test procedure is reproduced from 4.6.1 c) of IEC 60851-5:1996, now withdrawn. It is not
included in the fourth edition (2008) of that standard.
The specimen shall be subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, with a minimum test
voltage of:

- 1 ，5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
The mandrel diameter and tension applied to the wire during winding on the mandrel are as in
Table 丄 1.
J.3 Testing during manufacturing
J.3.1 General
The wire manufacturer shall subject the wire to a spark test during manufacture according to
IEC 62230 as specified in J.3.2 and J.3.3.
J.3.2 Spark test
The test voltage for the spark test shall be in accordance with the electric strength test of
5.4.9.1, with a minimum of:

J.3.3 Sampling test
The s a m p lin g te s t shall be conducted according to the suitable test specified in J.2.2.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex K
(n o rm a tive )
Safety interlocks
K.1 General
K.1.1 General requirements
Safety interlocks s h a ll be so d e s ig n e d th a t, fo r an ordinary person, th e c la s s 2 e n e rg y

so u rce s and c la s s 3 e n e rg y so u rce s w ill be re m o ve d b e fo re th e co ve r, d o o r, e tc . is in a
p o s itio n th a t th o s e p a rts b e c o m e accessible a s a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e .
Safety interlocks s h a ll be so d e s ig n e d th a t, fo r an instructed person, th e c la s s 3 e n e rg y

s o u r c e s w ill b e r e m o v e d b e fo re th e c o v e r, d o o r, e tc . is in a p o s i t i o n th a t th is p a rt b e c o m e s
accessible a s a c la s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e o r le s s .
T h e in te r lo c k s h a ll e ith e r:
- n e c e s s i t a t e p re v io u s d e -e n e rg iz a tio n o f s u c h p a rts ; o r
- a u t o m a t i c a l l y in itia te d is c o n n e c t io n o f th e s u p p ly to s u c h p a r ts , a n d to r e d u c e to a:
• c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e w ith in 2 s fo r a n ordinary person, and
• c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e w ith in 2 s fo r a n instructed person.
If re d u c tio n of th e e n e rg y so u rce c la s s ta k e s lo n g e r th a n 2 s, th e n an instructional

safeguard s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t :
- element 1a s h a ll be p la c e d on th e d o o r, c o v e r o r o th e r p a rt th a t in itia te s th e in te rlo c k

a c t i o n a n d is o p e n e d o r r e m o v e d t o g a in a c c e s s ; a n d
- e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
- e l e m e n t 1a: IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 7 ( 2 0 1 1 -0 5 ) fo r m o v in g p a rts o r
A IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 4 1 (2 0 0 2 -1 0 ) fo r h o t p a rts
- e l e m e n t 2: n o t s p e c ifie d
- e l e m e n t 3: n o t s p e c ifie d
- e l e m e n t 4: th e tim e w h e n th e e n e r g y s o u r c e w ill b e r e d u c e d to th e r e q u ir e d c la s s
K.1.2 Test method and compliance criteria
The energy level of class 2 or class 3 energy source parts are monitored.
Compliance is checked by inspection, measurement and use o f the straight unjointed version
o f the test probe according to Annex V.
K.2 Components of the safety interlock safeguard mechanism
The c o m p o n e n ts c o m p ris in g th e safety interlock m e c h a n is m s h a ll be c o n s id e re d

safeguards, a n d s h a ll c o m p ly w ith A n n e x G o r K .7 .1 w h e r e a p p lic a b le .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Compliance is checked in accordance with Annex G or K.7.1 and by inspection.
K.3 Inadvertent change of operating mode
A safety interlock s h a l l not be o p e ra b le by m eans of p ro b e s s p e c ifie d in F ig u re V.1 or

F i g u r e V.2, a s a p p l i c a b l e s o a s to c h a n g e th e e n e r g y c la s s w ith in th e a r e a , s p a c e o r a c c e s s
p o in t b e in g c o n tro lle d to a c la s s 3 e n e rg y so u rce instructed person,
fo r an o r to a c la s s 2
e n e rg y s o u rc e o r a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r an ordinary person.
Compliance is checked in accordance with Annex V and by inspection.
K.4 Interlock safeguard override
A safety interlock m ay be o v e rrid d e n by a skilled person. The safety interlock o v e rrid e

s y s te m :
- s hal l r e q u ir e a n in te n tio n a l e ffo r t to o p e r a t e ; a n d
- shal l re se t a u to m a tic a lly to n o rm a l o p e ra tio n when s e rv ic in g is c o m p le te , or p re ve n t

n o rm a l o p e ra tio n u n le s s th e skilled person h a s c a rrie d o u t re s to ra tio n ; a n d
- if lo c a t e d in a n a re a accessible to a n ordinary person o r, if a p p li c a b le , an instructed

person, s h a l l n o t b e o p e r a b l e b y m e a n s o f p r o b e s s p e c i f i e d in A n n e x V , a n d s h a l l r e q u i r e
a tool f o r o p e r a t i o n .
Compliance is checked in accordance with Annex V and by inspection.
K.5 Fail-safe
K.5.1 Requirement
In th e event of any single fault condition in th e safety interlock s y s te m , th e space

c o n tro lle d b y th e safety interlock s h a l l :
- r ev e r t to a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r a n ordinary person o r a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r
an instructed person; or
- b e l o c k e d in t h e normal operating condition a n d c o m p ly w ith a p p lic a b le r e q u ir e m e n t s fo r

a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e .
Compliance is checked by introduction of electrical， electro-mechanical， and mechanical

component faults, one at a time. S in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s are described in Clause B.4. For
each fault, the space controlled by the s a fe ty in te rlo c k shall comply with the applicable
requirements for s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s for the respective energy source.
The components and parts of the s a fe ty in te rlo c k used as a s a fe g u a rd mechanism are not
subjected to s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s if they comply with K.2 or K.6 as applicable.
Fixed separation distances in s a fe ty in te rlo c k circuits (for example, those associated with
printed boards) are not subjected to simulated s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s if the separation
distances comply with K.7.1.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
K.6 Mechanically operated safety interlocks
K.6.1 Endurance requirement
M o v i n g m e c h a n i c a l p a r t s in m e c h a n i c a l a n d e l e c t r o m e c h a n i c a l safety interlock s y s te m s s h a ll
h a ve a d e q u a te e n d u ra n c e .
Compliance is checked by inspection o f the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, available data and, if

necessary， by cycling the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system through 10 000 operating cycles. In the
event of any fault during or after the 10 000 operating cycles in the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system,
the space controlled by the s a fe ty in te rlo c k shall:
一 revert to a class 1 energy source for an o rd in a ry p e rs o n or a class 2 energy source for

an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; or
- be locked in the n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n and comply with applicable requirements for
a class 3 energy source.
NOTE The above test is conducted to check the endurance of moving parts other than those in safety interlock
systems, switches and relays. Safety interlock systems, switches and relays, if any, are subject to Annex G or
K.7.1.
K.7 Interlock circuit isolation
K.7.1 Separation distances for contact gaps and interlock circuit elements
S e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e s fo r c o n ta c t gaps and in te rlo c k c irc u it e le m e n ts s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e

fo llo w in g re q u ire m e n ts a s a p p lic a b le .
a) If t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y d i s c o n n e c t s a c i r c u i t c o n d u c t o r in a c i r c u i t c o n n e c t e d t o t h e mains,
th e s e p a r a tio n d is ta n c e s fo r c o n ta c t g a p s a n d th e ir re la te d c ir c u its s h a ll b e n o t le s s th a n
th a t fo r a disconnect device (se e A n n e x L).
b) If t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y is in a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m th e mains, th e s e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e s fo r
c o n ta c t gaps s h a ll be not le s s th a n th e re le v a n t m in im u m clearance v a lu e fo r basic
insulation fo r is o la tio n o f c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e s . In te rlo c k c irc u it e le m e n ts , th e fa ilu re o f
w h i c h c a n d e f e a t t h e i n t e r l o c k s y s t e m , s u c h a s t h e f i x e d s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e s in a safety
interlock c i r c u i t , s h a l l c o m p l y w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts o f 5 .4 .2 fo r basic insulation. T h e
temporary overvoltage i s n o t ta k e n in to a c c o u n t to d e t e r m in e th e v o lt a g e to b e u s e d in
T a b l e 1 0 a n d T a b l e 11 u n l e s s t h e c i r c u i t is s u b j e c t t o a temporary overvoltage.
c) I f t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y i s in a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m th e mains, t h e s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e s f o r
c o n ta c t g a p s s h a ll b e n o t le s s th a n th e r e le v a n t m i n i m u m clearance v a l u e f o r reinforced
insulation fo r is o la tio n o f c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s . In te rlo c k c irc u it e le m e n ts , th e fa ilu re o f
w h i c h c a n d e f e a t t h e i n t e r l o c k s y s t e m , s u c h a s t h e f i x e d s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e s in a safety
interlock c irc u it, s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t o f 5 .4 .2 fo r basic insulation, except
t h a t if a life t h r e a t e n i n g h a za rd is i n v o l v e d in t h e i n t e r l o c k e d s p a c e , th e fix e d s e p a ra tio n
d is ta n c e s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e re q u ire m e n t fo r reinforced insulation. The temporary
overvoltage is n o t t a k e n in to a c c o u n t to d e t e r m in e th e v o lta g e to be used in T a b l e 1 0
a n d T a b l e 11 u n l e s s t h e c i r c u i t i s s u b j e c t t o a temporary overvoltage.
As an a lte rn a tiv e to a ), b) and c), th e s e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e s fo r th e c o n ta c t gap b e tw e e n

c o n ta c ts in th e o ff p o s itio n s h a ll w ith s ta n d th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1 re q u ire d fo r
basic insulation or reinforced insulation, a s a p p lic a b le . T h e c o n ta c t g a p s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
th e a b o v e r e q u ir e m e n t s b e fo r e a n d a f t e r th e t e s t o f K . 7 . 2.
T h e a ltitu d e m u ltip lic a tio n f a c t o r o f T a b le 16 d o e s n o t n e e d to b e ta k e n in to a c c o u n t.
The s e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e s fo r th e c o n ta c t g a p of th e s w itc h o r r e la y s h a ll c o m p ly w ith K .7 .3

a n d K . 7 . 4 in a d d i t i o n t o t h e a b o v e r e q u i r e m e n t s , u n l e s s t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y c o m p l i e s w i t h G . 1
and G .2 re s p e c tiv e ly . The e n d u ra n ce te s t c o n d itio n s h a ll re p re se n t th e m a x im u m normal
Copyright International Eteclrotechmcal Commission

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
operating condition w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t w ith re sp e ct to v o lta g e and cu rre n t th a t th e

c o n ta c ts in te rru p t.
Two in d e p e n d e n t in te rlo c k s y s te m s , in s e rie s , u s in g basic insulation m ay be used as an

a lt e r n a t iv e to th e p r o v is io n o f reinforced insulation.
K.7.2 Overload test
The contact of a switch or relay in the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system is subjected to an overload

test consisting of 50 cycles of operation at the rate of 6 to 10 cycles per minute, making and
breaking 150 % of the current imposed in the application, except that where a switch or relay
contact switches a motor load, the test is conducted with the rotor o f the motor in a locked
condition.
After the test， the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, including the switch or relay， shall still be
functional.
K.7.3 Endurance test
The contact of a switch or relay in the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system is subjected to an endurance

test, making and breaking 100 % of the current imposed in the application at a rate o f 6 to
10 cycles of operation per minute. A higher rate of cycling may be used if requested by the
manufacturer.
For reed switches used in a s a fe ty in te rlo c k system in ES1 or ES2, the test is 100 000
operating cycles. For other switches and relays in a s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, the test is
10 000 operating cycles.
After the test， the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, including the switch or relay， shall still be
functional.
K.7.4 Electric strength test
Except for reed switches in ES1 or ES2， an electric strength test as specified in 5.4.9.1 is
applied between the contacts after the tests o f K.7.3. If the contact is in a circuit connected to
the m ains, the test voltage is as specified for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n . If the contact is in a
circuit isolated from the m ains, the test voltage is as specified for b a s ic in s u la tio n in a
circuit connected to the m ains.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex L
(n o rm a tive )
Disconnect devices
L.1 General requirements
A disconnect device s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d to d is c o n n e c t th e e q u ip m e n t fro m th e s u p p ly . If a

disconnect device i n t e r r u p t s t h e n e u t r a l c o n d u c t o r , it s h a l l s i m u l t a n e o u s l y i n t e r r u p t a ll p h a s e
c o n d u c to rs .
A disconnect device m a y be:
- t h e p lu g o n th e p o w e r s u p p ly c o r d ; o r
- a n a p p lia n c e c o u p le r; o r
- a n is o la tin g s w itc h ; o r
- a c irc u it b re a k e r; o r
- a n y e q u iv a le n t m e a n s fo r d is c o n n e c tio n .
F o r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to be p o w e re d fro m an AC mains t h a t is O v e rv o lta g e C a te g o ry I,

O v e rv o lta g e C a te g o ry II or O v e rv o lta g e C a te g o ry III，o r fro m a DC mains th a t is ES3, a
disconnect device s h a ll h a v e a c o n ta c t s e p a r a tio n o f a t le a s t 3 m m . F o r a n A C mains t h a t is
O v e rv o lta g e C a te g o ry IV , I E C 6 0 9 4 7 - 1 s h a ll a p p ly . W h e n in c o rp o ra te d in t h e e q u i p m e n t , t h e
disconnect device s h a ll b e c o n n e c te d a s c lo s e ly a s p r a c tic a b le to th e in c o m in g s u p p ly .
F o r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to b e p o w e r e d fr o m a D C mains t h a t is n o t a t E S 3 f
- a disconnect device s h a l l h a v e a c o n ta c t s e p a ra tio n at le a s t equal to th e m in im u m

clearance f o r basic insulation; a n d
- a re m o v a b le fu s e m ay be used as a disconnect device, p ro v id e d t h a t it is accessible
o n ly to a n instructed person o r to a skilled person.
L.2 Permanently connected equipment
For permanently connected equipment th e disconnect device s h a ll b e in c o r p o r a te d in t h e

e q u ip m e n t, u n le s s th e e q u ip m e n t is a c c o m p a n i e d b y in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s s ta tin g th a t an
a p p ro p ria te disconnect device s h a ll b e p r o v id e d a s p a rt o f th e b u ild in g in s ta lla tio n .
NOTE External disconnect devices will not necessarily be supplied with the equipment.
L.3 Parts that remain energized
P a rts on th e s u p p ly s id e of a disconnect device in t h e e q u ip m e n t, th a t re m a in e n e rg iz e d

w h e n th e disconnect device is s w i t c h e d o ff, s h a ll b e g u a r d e d to r e d u c e t h e r is k o f a c c i d e n t a l
c o n ta c t b y skilled persons.
A s a n a l t e r n a t i v e , i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d in t h e s e r v i c e m a n u a l .
L.4 Single-phase equipment
For s in g le -p h a s e e q u ip m e n t, th e disconnect device s h a l l d is c o n n e c t b o th p o le s

s im u lta n e o u s ly , e x c e p t th a t a s i n g l e - p o l e disconnect device c a n b e u s e d to d is c o n n e c t th e
p h a se c o n d u c to r w h e n it i s p o s s i b l e t o r e l y o n t h e i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f t h e n e u t r a l in t h e mains. If
o n ly a s in g le p o le disconnect device i s p r o v i d e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t , i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l b e g i v e n

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
fo r th e p ro v is io n o f a n a d d itio n a l tw o -p o le disconnect device in t h e b u i l d i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n w h e n

t h e e q u i p m e n t i s u s e d w h e r e i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f t h e n e u t r a l in t h e mains is n o t p o s s i b l e .
EXAMPLE Cases where a two-pole disconnect device is required are:

一 on equipment supplied from an IT power system;
一 on pluggable equipment supplied through a reversible appliance coupler or a reversible plug (unless the
appliance coupler or plug itself is used as the disconnect device;
一 on equipment supplied from a socket-outlet with indeterminate polarity.
L.5 Three-phase equipment
F o r th re e -p h a s e e q u ip m e n t, th e disconnect device s h a ll d i s c o n n e c t s i m u l t a n e o u s l y a ll p h a s e
c o n d u c to rs of th e s u p p ly . For e q u ip m e n t re q u irin g a n e u tra l c o n n e c tio n to an IT power
s y s te m , th e disconnect device s h a ll be a fo u r-p o le d e v ic e and s h a ll d i s c o n n e c t a ll phase
c o n d u c to rs and th e n e u tra l c o n d u c to r. If th is fo u r-p o le d e v ic e is not p ro v id e d in th e
e q u ip m e n t, th e in s ta lla tio n in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll s p e c ify th e n e e d f o r its p r o v is io n as p a rt o f th e
b u ild in g in s ta lla tio n .
L.6 Switches as disconnect devices
W h e re th e disconnect device is a s w itc h in c o rp o ra te d in th e e q u ip m e n t, th e on and o ff

p o s i t i o n s s h a l l b e m a r k e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h F . 3 . 5 . 2 .
L.7 Plugs as disconnect devices
W h e re a p lu g on th e p o w e r s u p p ly c o rd is u s e d a s th e disconnect device, th e in s ta lla tio n

in s tru c tio n s s h a ll s ta te th a t fo r p lu g g a b le e q u ip m e n t, th e s o c k e t-o u tle t s h a ll be e a s ily
accessible. For p lu g g a b le e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d fo r in s ta lla tio n by an ordinary person, th e
in s ta lla tio n in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll b e m a d e a v a ila b le to th e ordinary person.
L.8 Multiple power sources
W h e re a u n it re c e iv e s power fro m m o re th a n one so u rce (fo r e x a m p le , d iffe re n t

v o lta g e s /fre q u e n c ie s or as re d u n d a n t p o w e r), th e re s h a ll be a p ro m in e n t instructional
safeguard in a cco rd a n ce w ith C la u s e F.5 near each disconnect device g iv in g a d e q u a te
i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t h e r e m o v a l o f a ll p o w e r f r o m t h e u n it .
One instructional safeguard m a y be u s e d fo r m o re th a n o n e disconnect device, a s lo n g a s

it i s c l e a r l y v i s i b l e f r o m t h e d i s c o n n e c t p o i n t s .
- e l e m e n t 2: “ C a u tio n ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t, a n d “ S h o c k h a z a rd ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
- element 4: “ D i s c o n n e c t a ll p o w e r s o u r c e s ” o r e q u i v a l e n t t e x t
E q u ip m e n t in c o r p o r a tin g a n in te rn a l U P S s h a ll h a v e p r o v is io n s fo r r e lia b ly d is a b lin g th e U P S

a n d d is c o n n e c t i n g its o u t p u t p r io r to s e r v ic in g t h e e q u ip m e n t . I n s t r u c t io n s f o r d is c o n n e c t i o n o f

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
th e UPS s h a ll be p ro v id e d . The in te rn a l e n e rg y so u rce of th e UPS s h a ll be m a rke d

a p p ro p ria te ly a n d g u a rd e d a g a in s t a c c id e n ta l c o n ta c t b y a skilled person.
L.9 Compliance criteria

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex M
(n o rm a tive )
Equipment containing batteries and their protection circuits
M.1 General requirements
T h is annex p ro v id e s a d d itio n a l re q u ire m e n ts fo r e q u ip m e n t th a t c o n ta in s batteries. Use of

batteries in t h e e q u ip m e n t m a y re q u ire safeguards th a t h a v e not been a d d re sse d in o t h e r
p a rts of th is d o c u m e n t. T h is annex does not cover re q u ire m e n ts fo r e x te rn a l batteries，
in s ta lla tio n o f e x te rn a l batteries o r battery m a i n t e n a n c e o th e r th a n battery re p la c e m e n t by
an ordinary person or a n instructed person.
W h e re a battery s a f e t y s t a n d a r d c o n t a i n s e q u i v a l e n t r e q u i r e m e n t s t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s in t h i s
a n n e x , a battery in c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h a t battery s t a n d a r d is c o n s i d e r e d t o f u l f i l t h e
c o r r e s p o n d i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s a n n e x , a n d t e s t s t h a t a r e p a r t o f t h e battery s a f e t y
s ta n d a rd n e e d n o t b e re p e a te d u n d e r th is a n n e x .
For consum er g ra d e , n o n -re c h a rg e a b le c a rb o n -z in c or a lk a lin e batteries, M.3 and M.10

a p p ly .
M.2 Safety of batteries and their cells
M.2.1 Requirements
Batteries a n d th e ir cells s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t IE C s ta n d a r d s fo r batteries a s lis te d

b e lo w .
IE C 6 0 0 8 6 -4 , IE C 6 0 0 8 6 -5 , IE C 6 0 8 9 6 -1 1 , IE C 6 0 8 9 6 -2 1 , IE C 6 0 8 9 6 - 2 2 , IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -1 and
IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -2 , IE C 6 1 4 2 7 (a ll p a rts ), IE C T S 61430, IE C 6 1 4 3 4 , IE C 6 1 9 5 9 , IE C 6 2 1 3 3 (a ll
p a rts ), IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -1 , IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -2 , IE C 6 2 2 8 1 , IE C 6 2 4 8 5 -2 a n d IE C 6 2 6 1 9 .
NOTE O th e r battery s a f e t y s t a n d a r d s a r e u n d e r d e v e l o p m e n t , a n d a r e i n t e n d e d t o b e i n c l u d e d in f u t u r e .
M.2.2 Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection or evaluation based on data provided by the

manufacturer.
M.3 Protection circuits for batteries provided within the equipment
M.3.1 Requirements
P ro te c tio n c irc u its o r c o n s tru c tio n fo r batteries p ro v id e d w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th a t a re n o t

a n in te g ra l p a rt o f th e battery s h a ll b e s o d e s ig n e d th a t:
- safeguards a r e e f f e c t i v e d u r i n g normal operating conditions, abnormal operating

conditions, single fault conditions, i n s t a l l a t i o n c o n d i t i o n s a n d t r a n s p o r t a t i o n c o n d i t i o n s ;
and
- t he o u tp u t c h a ra c te ris tic s of a battery c h a rg in g c irc u it a re c o m p a tib le w ith its

re c h a rg e a b le battery; and
- f or n o n -re c h a rg e a b le batteries, d is c h a rg in g at a ra te e x c e e d in g th e battery

m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s a n d u n i n t e n t i o n a l c h a r g i n g a r e p r e v e n t e d ; a n d
- f or re c h a rg e a b le batteries, c h a rg in g and d is c h a rg in g at a ra te e x c e e d in g th e battery

m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s , a n d r e v e r s e d c h a r g i n g a r e p r e v e n t e d ; a n d

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- batteries in hand-held equipment， direct plug-in equipment a n d transportable

equipment t h a t a r e r e p l a c e a b l e b y a n ordinary person s h a l l b e i n h e r e n t l y p r o t e c t e d t o
a v o id c re a tin g a c la s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e o r a c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u rc e ; a n d
- f or batteries th a t a re re p la c e a b le by an ordinary person, re v e rs e p o la rity in s ta lla tio n

s h a ll b e p r e v e n t e d if t h is c o u ld c r e a t e a c l a s s 2 o r c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e ( s e e a ls o B . 3 . 6 ) .
NOTE R e v e rs e d c h a rg in g o f a re c h a rg e a b le battery o c c u r s w h e n t h e p o l a r i t y o f th e c h a r g i n g c i r c u i t is r e v e r s e d ,
a id in g th e d is c h a rg e o f th e battery.
M.3.2 Test method
Protection circuits for b a tte rie s are checked by inspection and by evaluation of the data
provided by the equipment manufacturer and b a tte ry manufacturer for charging and
discharging rates.
When appropriate data is not available， compliance is checked by test. However， b a tte rie s
that are inherently safe for the conditions given are not tested under those conditions.
Consumer grade ， non-rechargeable carbon-zinc or alkaline b a tte rie s are considered safe
under short-circuiting conditions and therefore are not tested for discharge; nor are such
b a tte rie ste sted forle aka ge un de rstorag econ ditio ns.
The b a tte ry used for the following tests is either a new non-rechargeable b a tte ry or a fully
charged rechargeable b a tte ry as provided with the equipment， or recommended by the
manufacturer for use with the equipment. The test for b a tte ry protection circuits in the
equipment may be performed using a b a tte ry simulator replacing the b a tte ry itself. The
temperature test is conducted in a temperature controlled chamber. A control signal
simulating the actual signal from the temperature sensor in the b a tte ry may be used in order
to perform the test.
- Overcharging of a rechargeable b a tte ry. The b a tte ry is charged while briefly subjected to
the simulation of any s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n that is likely to occur in the charging circuit
and that results in overcharging of the b a tte ry. To minimize testing time, the failure is
chosen that causes the worst-case overcharging condition. The b a tte ry is then charged
for a single period of 7h with the simulated failure in place.
- Excessive discharging. The b a tte ry is subjected to rapid discharge by open-circuiting or
short-circuiting any current limiting or voltage limiting component in the load circuit of the
b a tte ry under test (one component at a time).
- Unintentional charging of a non-rechargeable b a tte ry. The b a tte ry is charged while briefly
subjected to the simulation of any single component failure that is likely to occur in the
circuit and that would result in unintentional charging of the b a tte ry. To minimize testing
time, the failure is chosen that causes the highest charging current. The b a tte ry is then
charged for a single period of 7 h with the simulated failure in place.
Where more than one c e ll is provided in a b a tte ry, all c e lls shall be tested as a unit.
NOTE Some o f th e te s ts s p e c ifie d can be h a za rd o u s to th e persons p e rfo rm in g th e te s ts . Use a p p ro p ria te

m e a s u r e s to p r o te c t s u c h p e r s o n s a g a in s t p o s s ib le c h e m ic a l o r explosion h aza rd s.
For equipment where the b a tte ry can be removed from the equipment by an o rd in a ry
p e rso n , the following additional test applies:
- Reverse charging of a rechargeable b a tte ry. Check whether the equipment containing a
b a tte ry has such construction design that the b a tte ry may be placed into the equipment in
the manner causing reverse charging. Also it will be checked if the electrical connection is
made. If a reverse charging is judged possible by the inspection， the following test is
applied. However, when relevant IEC b a tte ry standards cover this requirement, the test is
considered to be performed.
The b a tte ry is installed in the reverse orientation and then the charging circuit is subject
to simulation o f any single component failure. To minimize testing time， the failure is
chosen that causes the highest reverse charging current. The b a tte ry is then reverse
charged for a single period of 7 h with the simulated failure in place.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
These tests shall not result in any o f the following:
- chemical leakage caused by cracking, rupturing or bursting of the b a tte ry jacket, if such
leakage could adversely affect a sa fe g u a rd ; or
- spillage of liquid from any pressure relief device in the b a tte ry, unless such spillage is
contained by the equipment without risk of damage to a s a fe g u a rd or harm to an o rd in a ry
p e rs o n or an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; or
- e x p l o s i o n of the b a tte ry, if such e x p lo s io n could result in injury to an o rd in a ry p e rs o n
or an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; or
- emission of flame or expulsion of molten metal to the outside of the equipment e n clo su re .
Throughout the tests:
- the b a tte ry temperature shall not exceed the allowable temperature of the b a tte ry as
specified by the b a tte ry manufacturer; and
- the maximum current drawn from the b a tte ry shall be within the range of the specification
of the b a tte ry.
M.4 Additional safeguards for equipment containing a portable secondary

lithium battery
M.4.1 General
E q u ip m e n t d e s ig n e d to be o p e ra te d w h ile in c o rp o ra tin g one or m o re p o rta b le s e a le d

secondary lithium batteries a r e s u b j e c t t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s in t h i s c l a u s e .
M.4.2 Charging safeguards
M.4.2.1 Requirements
Under normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions o r single fault

conditions t h e c h a r g i n g v o l t a g e p e r secondary lithium battery a n d t h e c h a r g i n g c u r r e n t p e r
secondary lithium battery s h a l l n o t e x c e e d t h e maximum specified charging voltage a n d
maximum specified charging current.
Under abnormal operating conditions, th e battery c h a r g in g c ir c u it s h a ll:
- s to p c h a rg in g when th e te m p e ra tu re of th e battery exceeds th e highest specified

charging temperature; and
- lim it th e cu rre n t to th e v a lu e s p e c ifie d battery m a n u f a c t u r e r

by th e when th e battery
t e m p e r a t u r e is l o w e r t h a n t h e lowest specified charging temperature.
M.4.2.2 Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by measuring the charging voltage, the charging current and the
temperature of each individual c e ll of the s e c o n d a ry lith iu m b a tte ry under n o rm a l
o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s . The
c e ll temperature shall be measured at the points specified by the b a tte ry manufacturer.
S in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s that may affect the charging voltage or charging current or the
temperature shall be applied in accordance with Clause BA.
NOTE 1 F o r p o tte d a s s e m b lie s , t h e r m o c o u p le s c o u ld b e a tta c h e d to th e c e ll s u r fa c e b e fo r e p o ttin g .
A higher charging voltage than the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g v o lta g e or a higher

charging current than the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g cu rre n t, that occurs ju st after the
introduction of an a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n or a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n ， may be

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
ignored if the operation o f a protective device or circuitry, provided in addition to the normal
regulating circuitry, prevents an unsafe condition of the b a tte ry.
Where appropriate, for the purpose o f the measurement， the b a tte ry may be replaced by a
circuit simulating the b a tte ry load.
The charging voltage shall be measured when the s e c o n d a ry lith iu m b a tte ry becomes fully
charged. The charging current shall be measured during the entire charging cycle up to the
m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g voltage.
During and after the test， the following applies:
- The charging voltage shall not exceed the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g voltage.
- The charging current shall not exceed the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g cu rre n t.
- The charging of the b a tte ry shall stop when the temperature of the b a tte ry exceeds the
h ig h e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g tem perature.
- The b a tte ry charging circuit shall limit the current to the value specified by the b a tte ry
manufacturer when the b a tte ry temperature is lower than the lo w e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g
tem perature.
In addition， for equipment where the b a tte ry can be removed from the equipment by an
o rd in a ry p e rso n , compliance is checked by measuring the charging voltage and the charging
current， and by evaluating the temperature control function of the equipment under n o rm a l
o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s .
All parameters controlled by the protection circuit for the b a tte ry shall be within those
specified in the relevant IEC b a tte ry standard, and shall cover the following:
- the maximum current drawn from the b a tte ry shall be within the range of the specification
of the b a tte ry ; and
- throughout the tests, the b a tte ry temperature shall not exceed the allowable temperature
of the b a tte ry as specified by the b a tte ry manufacturer.
NOTE 2 T h e c o n tro llin g e le m e n ts a re v o lta g e , c u rre n t, a n d te m p e ra tu re .
M.4.3 Fire enclosure
Secondary lithium batteries s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a fire enclosure a c c o r d i n g t o 6 . 4 . 8 . The

fire enclosure m a y b e t h a t o f t h e secondary lithium battery i t s e l f , o f t h e cell o r of a
c o m b i n a t i o n o f cells o r t h a t o f t h e e q u i p m e n t c o n t a i n i n g t h e secondary lithium battery.
E q u ip m e n t w ith batteries a re e x e m p t fro m th e a b o v e r e q u ir e m e n t if th e e q u ip m e n t u s e s a cell

th a t c o m p lie s w ith P S 1 .
Compliance is checked by inspection of the relevant material or by evaluation of the

s e c o n d a ry lith iu m b a tte ry data sheet.
M.4.4 Drop test of equipment containing a secondary lithium battery
M.4.4.1 General
The te s ts fo r direct plug-in equipment, hand-held equipment a n d transportable

equipment t h a t c o n t a i n a secondary lithium battery a r e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w . T h e s e t e s t s a r e
s p e c i f i e d t o v e r i f y t h a t m e c h a n i c a l s h o c k w i l l n o t c o m p r o m i s e a safeguard w i t h i n t h e battery
o r th e e q u ip m e n t.
M.4.4.2 Preparation and procedure for the drop test
The drop test is conducted in the following order:

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- St ep 1: drop of the equipment containing a b a tte ry as specified in M.4.4.3.

- St ep 2: check the charge and discharge function of the dropped equipment as specified
in M.4.4.4.
- St ep 3: conduct a charge and discharge cycle test of the dropped b a tte ry as specified
in M.4.4.5.
As a preparation o f the drop test, two b a tte rie s are fully charged at the same time under the
same charging conditions. The open circuit voltages of both b a tte rie s are measured to
confirm the initial voltages are the same. One b a tte ry is used for the drop test and the other
is used as a reference.
M.4.4.3 Drop
The equipment with a fully charged b a tte ry installed shall be subjected to the drop test of
Clause T.7.
After the drop testf the b a tte ry is removed from the equipment. The open circuit voltages of
the dropped b a tte ry and the reference (undropped) b a tte ry are periodically monitored during
the following 24 hour period. The voltage difference shall not exceed 5 %.
M.4.4.4 Check of the charge / discharge function
The charging/discharging circuit functions (charging- control voltage, charging control current,
and temperature control) are checked to determine that they continue to operate and that all
s a fe g u a rd s are effective. A dummy b a tte ry or appropriate measurement tool that represents
the b a tte ry characteristics may be used for this examination in order to differentiate between
b a tte ry damage and equipment malfunctions.
If the charge/discharge function does not operate, the test is terminated, continuation with
step 3 is not necessary and compliance is determined by M.4.4.6.
M.4.4.5 Charge / discharge cycle test
If the dropped equipment is still functioning, the dropped equipment with the dropped b a tte ry
installed is subject to three complete discharge and charge cycles under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g
c o n d itio n s .
M.4.4.6 Compliance criteria
During the tests, fire or e x p lo s io n o f the b a tte ry shall not occur unless an appropriate
s a fe g u a rd is provided that contains the e x p lo s io n or fire. If venting occurs, any electrolyte
leakage shall not defeat a safeg uard.
When a protection circuitry for charging or discharging in the equipment or the b a tte ry
detects an abnormality in the b a tte ry and stops charging or discharging, the result is
considered to be acceptable.
M.5 Risk of burn due to short-circuit during carrying
M.5.1 Requirements
Battery te rm in a ls s h a ll be p ro te c te d fro m th e p o s s ib le b u rn th a t m a y o c c u r to an ordinary

person or an instructed person d u rin g th e c a rry in g of a battery w ith exposed b a re
c o n d u c tiv e te rm in a ls (su ch as in th e u s e r ’s c a r r y in g bag) due to a s h o rt-c irc u it c a u s e d by
m e ta l o b je c ts , s u c h a s c lip s , k e y s a n d n e c k la c e s .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
M.5.2 Test method and compliance criteria
If the b a tte ry is designed to be carried with bare conductive terminals, the b a tte ry shall
comply with the test of P.2.3.
The compliance criteria of M. 3.3 apply.
M.6 Safeguards against short-circuits
M.6.1 Requirements
The e le c tric e n e rg y s to re d in cells or batteries m ay be re le a s e d in an in a d v e rte n t and

u n c o n tro lle d m a n n e r d u e to e x te rn a l s h o rt-c irc u itin g o f th e te rm in a ls o r a n in te rn a l safeguard
fa ilu re , such as a m e ta l c o n ta m in a n t b rid g in g th e in s u la tio n . As a re s u lt, th e c o n s id e ra b le
am ount of e n e rg y , heat and p re ssu re g e n e ra te d by th e h ig h cu rre n t can p ro d u ce m o lte n
m e ta l, s p a rk s , explosion a n d v a p o ris a tio n o f e le c tro ly te .
T o a d d r e s s e x te r n a l fa u lts , th e m a in c o n n e c t io n s fr o m th e battery te r m in a ls s h a ll e ith e r:
- b e p r o v id e d w ith a s u ff ic ie n t o v e r c u r r e n t p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e to p r e v e n t a n y a c c id e n ta l s h o r t-
c irc u it in d u c in g c o n d itio n s a s m e n tio n e d a b o v e ; o r
- t he battery c o n n e c tio n s u p to th e fir s t o v e r c u r r e n t p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e s h a ll b e c o n s tr u c te d

s o t h a t a s h o r t - c i r c u i t is n o t l i k e l y t o o c c u r a n d c o n n e c t i o n s s h a ll b e d e s i g n e d to w i t h s t a n d
th e e le c tr o m a g n e tic fo rc e s e x p e rie n c e d d u rin g a s h o rt-c irc u it.
NOTE 1 W h e re te rm in a ls a n d c o n d u c to rs a re n o t in s u la te d , b y d e s ig n o r fo r m a in te n a n c e p u rp o s e s , o n ly in s u la te d
tools a r e t o b e u s e d in t h a t a r e a .
U n le s s in te rn a l fa u lt te s tin g h a s b e e n c o n d u c te d o n th e cell a s p a rt o f c o m p lia n c e w ith a n IE C

battery s t a n d a r d in M . 2 . 1 , t h e i n t e r n a l f a u l t t e s t i n g a s d e s c r i b e d b e l o w i s r e q u i r e d ,
NOTE 2 N o t a ll battery s t a n d a r d s in M.2.1 c o n ta in a s im ila r in te rn a l fa u lt te s t.
Each cell in a battery s h a l l be fa u lte d to e n s u re th a t each cell v e n ts s a fe ly w ith o u t

in tro d u c in g an explosion o r fire . W h e re a cell is in c o rp o ra te d in to a battery o r th e
e q u ip m e n t, s u ffic ie n t s p a c in g s h a ll b e a llo w e d fo r th e p r o p e r v e n t o p e r a tio n o f e a c h cell.
For external faults， compliance may be checked by inspection.
The sample shall not explode or emit molten material at any time during any of the tests.
M.7 Risk of explosion from lead acid and NiCd batteries
M.7.1 Ventilation preventing an explosive gas concentration
W h e re batteries a re p ro v id e d w ith in a n e q u ip m e n t s u c h th a t e m itte d g a s e s m a y c o n c e n tra te

in a c o n f i n e d e q u ip m e n t s p a c e , th e battery c o n s tr u c tio n , a ir flo w o r v e n tila tio n s h a ll b e s u c h
th a t th e a tm o s p h e r e w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t d o e s n o t re a c h a n explosive c o n c e n tra tio n .
In a c o m p a r t m e n t c o n t a i n i n g b o th a battery a n d e le c tr ic a l c o m p o n e n t s , th e ris k o f ig n itio n o f

lo c a l c o n c e n t r a t io n s o f h yd ro g e n and oxygen b y a d ja c e n t o p e ra tio n a l a rc in g p a rts , such as
c o n ta c to rs and s w itc h e s c lo s e to battery v e n ts o r v a lv e s , s h a ll b e c o n tro lle d . T h is s h a ll be
a c h ie v e d , fo r e x a m p le , by th e use of fu lly e n c lo s e d c o m p o n e n ts , s e p a ra tio n of battery
c o m p a r tm e n ts o r a d e q u a te v e n tila tio n .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
T h e v e n tila tio n s y s te m s h a ll b e s o c o n s tr u c te d th a t a n y p o te n tia l fa u lt, in c lu d in g d is to rtio n of

th e battery cases d u e to o v e rh e a tin g o r th e rm a l ru n a w a y , d o e s n o t r e s u l t in t h e v e n tila tio n
s y s te m fa ilin g to v e n t explosive gasses.
If v e n t i l a t i o n tu b e s a re used fo r c o n d u c tin g explosive gas fro m th e battery cases to th e

o u ts id e a ir, th e y s h a ll not be th e o n ly m eans o f e lim in a tin g th e b u ild -u p of gas fro m th e
c a b in e t. A n in d e p e n d e n t m e a n s o f n a tu ra l v e n tila tio n th a t a d e q u a te ly v e n tila te s th e enclosure
c o n ta in in g th e batteries s h a ll b e p r o v id e d .
If m e c h a n ic a l or fo rc e d -a ir v e n tila tio n is used, a d e q u a te v e n tila tio n s h a ll c o n tin u e to be

p ro v id e d u n d e r single fault conditions.
Enclosures w ith m e c h a n ic a l or e le c tro m e c h a n ic a l d a m p e rs s h a ll c o n tin u e to p ro v id e

a d e q u a t e v e n t i l a t i o n w h e n t h e d a m p e r is in t h e c l o s e d p o s i t i o n .
C l a u s e M . 7 is a p p l i e d f o r o p e n t y p e batteries a n d v a lv e re g u la te d ty p e batteries. S e a le d ty p e
batteries w ith a m e c h a n is m o f r e d u c in g g a s a re c o n s id e r e d to c o m p ly w ith th is r e q u ir e m e n t.
If it can be shown th a t th e v e n tila tio n c a p a b ility of th e enclosure is c o m p lia n t w ith th e

c a lc u la te d re q u ire d v e n tila tio n a ir flo w (O) a c c o r d i n g t o M . 7 . 2 , t h e e q u i p m e n t is in c o m p l i a n c e
w ith C la u s e M .7 . U n le s s it can be d e m o n s tra te d under a single fault condition in th e
c h a rg in g c irc u itry th a t th e ch a rg e v o lta g e cannot exceed th e v a lu e s fo r flo a t c h a rg in g in
T a b le M .1 , o r if th e battery enclosure c o n ta in s n o in te rn a l c h a rg in g c a p a b ility , c a lc u la tio n s
s h a ll be c o n d u c te d fo r b o o s t c h a rg e c o n d itio n fo r th e battery ty p e s and m a x im u m c a p a c ity
s p e c ifie d and a p p ro v e d by th e m a n u fa c tu re r. If t h e v e n t i l a t i o n c a n n o t be a d e q u a te ly s h o w n ,
one of th e v e n tila tio n te s ts in M .7 .3 s h a ll be c o n d u c te d in o rd e r to e n s u re a d e q u a te
v e n tila tio n .
The h yd ro g e n g e n e ra tio n (flo w ra te fo r te s tin g ) fo r th e m a x im u m s u p p o rte d battery c a p a c ity

a n d s u p p o rte d battery ty p e s s h a ll b e c a lc u la te d u s in g d a ta fro m th e battery m a n u fa c tu re r, or
t h e v a l u e s f o r / flo a t a n d / b o o s t w i t h s u p p o r t i n g d a t a a s g i v e n i n T a b l e M . 1 o r b y t h e f o l l o w i n g :
〇 m
^B a tt = ° » 4 5 x 1 ° x ^g a s x C r txw
w it h / g a s , C rt, a n d n as d e s c r i b e d in M . 7 . 2 .
M.7.2 Test method and compliance criteria
The purpose of ventilating a b a tte ry location or e n c lo s u re is to maintain the hydrogen

concentration below the e x p lo s iv e 4 %vol hydrogen LEL threshold. The hydrogen gas
concentration shall not exceed 1 % by volume if the mixture is in proximity to an ignition
source, and not exceed 2 % by volume if the mixture is not in proximity to an ignition source.
NOTE 1 W hen a cell r e a c h e s its f u lly c h a r g e d s ta te , w a t e r e le c t r o l y s i s o c c u r s a c c o r d i n g to t h e F a r a d a y 's la w .
Under standard conditions of normal temperature and pressure where T = 273 K，

P = 1 013 hPa:
- 1 Ah decomposes H20 into 0,42 I H2 + 0,21 I 0 2,

- decomposition of 1 cm3 (1 g) H 2 〇 requires 3 Ah,
- 26, 8 Ah decomposes H20 into 1 g H2 + 8 g 0 2
When the charging operation is stopped， the emission of gas from the c e lls can be regarded
as having come to an end 1 h after having switched off the charging current.

旧C 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018 - 295 -
The minimum air flow rate for ventilation of a b a tte ry location or compartment shall be
calculated by the following formula:
0=vxqxsxn x / g a s x Crt x 1 0 rrvV h
where:
Q is the ventilation air flow in m3/h;

v is the necessary dilution of hydrogen.
(100-4)%
^ 4%~
q 0,45 x 10 - 3 m 3/A h l generated hydrogen at 20 °Cf
s = 5, general safety factor;

n is the number of c e lls ;
gas is the current producing gas in mA / Ah rated capacity for the float charge current
1float 〇 r the boost charge current I boost;
C rt is the capacity C 10 for lead acid c e lls (Ah) or capacity C5 for NiCd c e lls (Ah)
NOTE 2 C1 〇 is t h e 10 h ra te w ith c u r r e n t / 1〇 f o r le a d a c id cells: ( A h ) t o L rfjna| = 1,80 V/cell at 20 °C.
C 5 is th e 5 h ra te w ith c u r r e n t / 5 fo r N iC d cells: (A h ) to Ufinal = 1,00 V/cell at 20 °C.
v x ^ x s = 0 , 0 5 「m 3 / A h
with L the ventilation air flow calculation formula is:
•3
Q= 0 ,0 5 x nx / g a s x C rt x 1 0 m 3/ h
The current Igas in mA producing gas is determined by one o f the following formulas.
’ gas = ’ float x / g x ’s [m A /A h ] 〇厂
/g a s = ’ b o o s tx ,g x [m A /A h ]
where:
/ gas is the current producing gas in mA / Ah rated capacity for the float charge current
】float 〇 r the boost charge current I boost;
’ flo a t is the float charge current under fully charged condition at a defined float charge
voltage at 20 °C;
/boost is the boost charge current under fully charged condition at a defined boost charge
voltage at 20 °C;
/g
is the gas emission factor， proportion of current at fully charged state producing
hydrogen (see T a b l e
/s is the safety factor, to accommodate faulty c e lls in a b a tte ry and an aged b a tte ry
(see T a b l e M . 1 j .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
T a b l e M . 1 - V a l u e s f o r c u r r e n t / f l o a t a n d / b o o s t ，f a c t o r s / g a n d / s ，
a n d v o lta g e s Uuoat and Uboosi
Parameter Lead-acid batteries Lead-acid batteries NiCd batteries

vented cells VRLA cells vented cells b
Sb < 3 % a
G a s e m is s io n f a c t o r / g 1 0 ,2 1
G a s e m i s s i o n s a f e t y f a c t o r / s (in cl. 10 %
5 5 5
fa ulty cells and a geing)
F lo a t c h a rg e v o lta g e Uu〇a{ 0
2 ,2 3 2 ,2 7 1,40
V/cell
T y p i c a l f l o a t c h a r g e c u r r e n t / f 丨〇at
1 1 1
A /A h
C u r r e n t ( f l o a t ) / gas
m A /A h
5 1 5
(u n d e r flo a t c h a rg e c o n d itio n s re le v a n t fo r
a ir flo w c a lc u la tio n )
B o o s t c h a r g e v o l t a g e " b〇〇st c
2 ,4 0 2 ,4 0 1 ,5 5
V/cell
T y p i c a l b o o s t c h a r g e c u r r e n t / b〇〇st
4 8 10
m A /A h
C u r r e n t ( b o o s t ) / gas
m A /A h
20 8 50
(u n d e r b o o s t c h a rg e c o n d itio n s re le v a n t
fo r a ir flo w c a lc u la tio n )
a F o r an a n tim o n y (S b ) c o n te n t h ig h e r th a n 3 % , th e c u rre n t u s e d fo r c a lc u la tio n s s h a ll be d o u b le d .
b F o r re c o m b in a tio n ty p e N iC d cells c o n s u lt th e m a n u fa c tu re r.
c F l o a t a n d b o o s t c h a r g e v o l t a g e c a n v a r y w i t h t h e s p e c i f i c g r a v i t y o f e l e c t r o l y t e in l e a d - a c i d cells.
T h e v a l u e s o f f l o a t a n d b o o s t c h a r g e c u r r e n t i n c r e a s e w i t h t e m p e r a t u r e . T h e c o n s e q u e n c e s o f a n i n c r e a s e in
t e m p e r a t u r e , u p t o a m a x i m u m o f 4 0 ° C , h a v e b e e n a c c o m m o d a t e d in t h e v a l u e s in T a b l e M . 1 .
In c a s e o f u s e o f g a s r e c o m b i n a t i o n v e n t p l u g s , t h e g a s p r o d u c i n g c u r r e n t ^gas t h e v a l u e s f o r v e n t e d c e l l s c a n b e
r e d u c e d to 50 % o f th e v a lu e s fo r v e n te d cells.
T h e v e n t i l a t i o n a i r v o l u m e r e q u i r e m e n t s , f o r e x a m p l e , f o r t w o 4 8 V s t r i n g s o f V R L A cells in t h e s a m e battery
c a b in e t a n d e a c h w ith 120 A h ra te d C 1〇 c a p a c ity a m o u n t, u n d e r flo a t a n d u n d e r b o o s t c h a rg e s e rv ic e c o n d itio n s
a re :
一 s e rv ic e w ith flo a t c h a r g e c o n d itio n o n ly : Q = 0 , 0 5 x 2 4 x 1 x 1 2 0 x 0 , 0 0 1 = 0 , 1 4 4 m 3/ h p e r s t r i n g o r 2 8 8 l / h

to ta l;
一 s e rv ic e w ith b o o s t c h a r g e c o n d itio n : p = 0 , 0 5 x 2 4 x 8 x 1 2 0 x 〇 ,〇〇 1 = 1 , 1 5 m 3/ h p e r s t r i n g o r 2 3 0 0 l / h
to ta l.
For recombinant NiCd cells， or for lead-acid b a tte ry types where the gassing rate in volts per
cell per hour (per ampere-hour) is published by the manufacturer, it is permitted to determine
the minimum air flow rate O using the measure gas emissions at boost-charge volts per cell
charging， unless it can be verified that the output voltage of the charging circuit cannot
exceed the float voltage under any conditions required by this document. The equation for O
becomes:
Q = v x s x n x r (x Cn ) x 1〇^3 (m3/h)

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
where:
v = 24, the necessary dilution of hydrogen:

s = 5, general safety factor;
n is the number of c e lls ;
r is the outgassing rate at a given voltage per cell per hour (may be per ampere-hour
rating);
C rt is the capacity C10 for lead acid c e lls (Ah) or capacity C5 for NiCd c e lls (Ah).
NOTE C r( i s n o t r e q u i r e d f o r d e t e r m i n i n g Q i f t h e g a s s i n g r a t e /• i s p r o v i d e d i n m l / ( h - c e / / ) o r t h e e q u i v a l e n t .
For the purpose of calculating the area of ventilation openings required for natural ventilation,
the air velocity is assumed to be 0 ,1 m/s.
Alternately, the following equation can be used:
A = 28 x Q
where:
Q is the ventilation rate of fresh air (m3/h);
A is the free area of openings in air inlet and outlet (cm2).
M.7.3 Ventilation tests
M.7.3.1 General
The test shall be performed with the EUT stabilized at 25 °C. If forced air ventilation is used, it
shall be run under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s . Movable mechanical or electro-mechanical
dampers shall be closed or in the unpowered position. The air movement around the cabinet
shall be minimized， or the EUT shall be placed in a cabinet to prevent air movement around
the EUT during testing.
M .7.3.2 Ventilation test - alternative 1
Samples of the atmosphere within the b a tte ry compartment are to be taken after 7 h of
operation. The samples are to be taken at locations where the greatest concentration of
hydrogen gas is likely. The hydrogen gas concentration shall not exceed 1 % by volume if the
mixture is in proximity to an ignition source, and not exceed 2 % by volume if the mixture is
not in proximity to an ignition source. See M.3.2 for evaluating the overcharging of a
rechargeable b a tte ry.
M .7.3.3 Ventilation test - alternative 2
The performance of the EUT b a tte ry ventilation system shall be verified by conducting a test
utilizing hydrogen， or helium to represent hydrogen.
The test will determine if the EUT is capable o f ventilating the calculated hydrogen generation
rate.
Step 1 Helium or hydrogen sensors (depending on the chosen gas) shall be placed in all
cabinet compartments that are subjected to hydrogen evolution from the b a tte ry
compartment.
Step 2 Helium or hydrogen shall be injected into the b a tte ry compartment until a
concentration of 1 % or 2 % as required below is reached. The rate of helium or
hydrogen injection required to maintain the concentration under steady state
conditions shall be reported. Steady state shall be defined as a maximum variation of
± 0,25 % over a period of 1 h.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Step 3 Compare the rate of helium or hydrogen obtained in Step 2 with the calculated
hydrogen generation rate in M. 7.1.
If the calculated hydrogen generation rate for the maximum b a tte ry capacity as specified by
the manufacturer exceeds the amount of helium or hydrogen that was being injected by more
than 1 〇/〇 by volume if the mixture is in proximity to an ignition source, or exceeds 2 〇/〇 by
volume if the mixture is not in proximity to an ignition source, the EUT compartment
ventilation system is not in compliance with this requirement.
If the calculated hydrogen generation rate, for the maximum b a tte ry capacity as specified by
the manufacturer, is less than or equal to the rate o f helium or hydrogen that was being
injected, the EUT compartment ventilation system is in compliance with this requirement.
M.7.3.4 Ventilation test - alternative 3
The test shall be performed as described in M .7 .3 .1 with a hydrogen or helium source used to
inject a flow rate described in M.7.1. Samples of the atmosphere within the b a tte ry
compartment or other area where hydrogen may accumulate is continuously monitored for 7 h
or until the levels are stable. Steady state shall be defined as a maximum variation of ±0,25 〇/〇
over a period of 1 h. The gas monitored in this manner is to be returned to the EUT under
test. The hydrogen gas concentration shall not exceed 1 % by volume if the mixture is in
proximity to an ignition source, and not exceed 2 % by volume if the mixture is not in proximity
to an ignition source. The sampling method in the original test may also be used, however, if
hydrogen is used, care should be taken to establish that safe levels exist in the EUT prior to
injecting for 7 h.
NOTE T h i s m e t h o d is p a r t i c u l a r l y s u it e d to e v a l u a t i n g m ix e d o r c o m p l e x s y s t e m s o r v e n t i l a t i o n p a t t e r n s .
M.7.4 Marking requirement
U n le s s th e batteries a re p ro v id e d w ith th e e q u ip m e n t, th e c o m p a rtm e n t s h a ll be m a rke d

e ith e r w ith th e s u p p o rte d battery ty p e s and th e m a x im u m c a p a c itie s or “Use o n ly b a tte rie s
a p p ro ve d by th e m a n u f a c t u r e r ”， p r o v i d e d th a t th is in fo rm a tio n is s p e c ifie d in th e
in s ta lla tio n /s e rv ic e in s tru c tio n s .
M.8 Protection against internal ignition from external spark sources of

batteries with aqueous electrolyte
M.8.1 General
The re q u ire m e n ts s p e c ifie d b e lo w a p p ly to re c h a rg e a b le batteries p ro v id in g a v e n tin g

s y s te m .
NOTE F o r e x a m p le , a battery u s e d in a U P S .
T h e le v e l o f a ir v e n tila tio n ra te s h a ll e n s u r e th a t a ris k o f explosion d o e s n o t e x is t b y k e e p in g

t h e h y d r o g e n c o n t e n t i n a i r b e l o w 1 % vol a t t h e PIS.
The u s e o f a n e f f e c t i v e f l a m e a r r e s t e r in t h e battery v e n tin g s y s te m w ill p r e v e n t a n e x te r n a l

explosion p r o p a g a tin g in to th e battery.
M.8 i s
C la u s e a p p lie d fo r o p e n ty p e batteries a n d v a lv e re g u la te d ty p e batteries. S e a le d ty p e
batteries w i t h a m e c h a n is m o f r e d u c in g g a s a re c o n s id e r e d to c o m p ly w ith th is r e q u ir e m e n t.
M.8.2 Test method
M.8.2.1 General
The test shall be carried out according to IEC 60896-21:2004, 6.4.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
NOTE 1 T h i s t e s t is d e s i g n e d to r e v e a l t h e p r o t e c t i o n a f f o r d e d b y t h e v a l v e u n it a g a i n s t t h e ig n it io n o f th e g a s e s
w ith in a cell by an e x te rn a l ig n itio n s o u rc e . D u rin g th is te s t, u s e p ro p e r p re c a u tio n s to safeguard persons and
e q u ip m e n t fro m explosion and burns.
A minimum distance d extending through air shall be maintained within which a maximum
surface temperature of 300 °C shall not be exceeded (no flames ， sparks， arcs or glowing
devices).
NOTE 2 W h e n c a lc u la tin g th e m in im u m d is ta n c e d to p ro te c t a g a in s t explosion in c l o s e p r o x i m i t y t o t h e s o u r c e o f

r e l e a s e o f a cell o r battery, t h e d i l u t i o n o f explosive g a s e s i s n o t a l w a y s e n s u r e d . T h e d i s p e r s i o n o f explosive
g a s d e p e n d s o n th e g a s re le a s e ra te a n d th e v e n tila tio n c h a ra c te ris tic s c lo s e to th e s o u rc e o f re le a s e .
The minimum distance d can be estimated by calculating the dimensions of a hypothetical

volume Vz o f potentially e x p lo s iv e gas around the source of release, outside of which the
concentration of hydrogen is below the safe concentration of the LEL.
d = 2 8 ,8 X ^ / gas x [m m ]
where:
’ gas is the current producing gas [mA / Ah];

is the rated capacity [Ah].
NOTE 3 T h e re q u ire d d is ta n c e d ca n be a c h ie v e d b y th e u s e o f a p a rtitio n w a ll b e tw e e n th e battery a n d s p a rk in g
d e v ic e .
Where b a tte rie s form an integral part of a power supply system (for example， in a UPS
system)， the distance d， where d is the minimum distance (clearance) between the ventile of
the b a tte ry and the electronic equipment that may exhibit flames, sparks, arcs or glowing
devices (maximum surface temperature 300 °C)f may be reduced according to the equipment
manufacturer’s calculations or measurements. The level of air ventilation rate should ensure
that a risk of e x p lo s io n does not exist by keeping the hydrogen content in air below 1 %voj
plus a margin at the PIS.
M .8 .2 .2 E s tim a tio n o f h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e Vz
The th e o re tic a l m in im u m v e n tila tio n flo w ra te to d ilu te th e fla m m a b le gas (h yd ro g e n ) to a

c o n c e n tra tio n b e lo w th e L E L c a n b e c a lc u la te d b y m e a n s o f th e fo rm u la :
dV_\ = ㈤也 x x J _
dt " k x LEL 293
w h e re :
d V /d i^ n is t h e m i n i m u m v o l u m e t r i c f l o w r a t e o f f r e s h a i r r e q u i r e d t o d i l u t e t h e g a s ( m 3/ s ) ;
clG/dt m a x is th e m a x i m u m g a s r e l e a s e r a t e ( k g / s ) ;
LEL i s 4 % v 0 | f o r h y d r o g e n ( k g / m 3 );
k is t h e f a c t o r a p p l i e d t o t h e L E L ; k = 0 , 2 5 is c h o s e n f o r d i l u t i o n o f h y d r o g e n g a s ;
T is t h e a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e in k e l v i n ( 2 9 3 K = 2 0 ° C ) .
The v o lu m e Vz re p re s e n ts th e v o lu m e o v e r w h ic h th e m ean c o n c e n tra tio n o f fla m m a b le gas

w ill b e 0 ,2 5 tim e s th e L E L . T h is m e a n s th a t a t th e e x t r e m it ie s o f th e h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e , th e
c o n c e n t r a t io n o f g a s w ill b e s ig n if ic a n t ly b e lo w th e L E L ( fo r e x a m p le , th e h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e
w h e r e t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n is a b o v e L E L w o u l d b e l e s s t h a n Vz).
NOTE S e e B . 4 . 2 . 2 in I E C 6 0 0 7 9 - 1 0 : 2 0 0 2 f o r t h e c a l c u l a t i o n o f L E L .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
M .8 .2 .3 C o rre c tio n fa c to rs
W ith a g iv e n n u m b e r o f a ir c h a n g e s p e r u n it tim e , c, re la te d to th e g e n e ra l v e n tila tio n th e

h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e Vz o f p o te n tia lly e x p lo s iv e a tm o s p h e re a ro u n d th e s o u rc e o f re le a s e ca n
b e e s tim a te d a s fo llo w s :
w h e re c is t h e n u m b e r o f f r e s h a i r c h a n g e s p e r u n i t t i m e ( s - 1 ).
The above fo rm u la h o ld s fo r an in s ta n ta n e o u s and hom ogenous m ix in g at th e so u rce of

re le a s e g iv e n id e a l flo w c o n d itio n s o f fre s h a ir. In p ra c tic e , id e a l c o n d itio n s ra re ly e x is t.
T h e r e fo r e a c o rre c tio n f a c t o r / i s in tro d u c e d to d e n o te th e e ffe c tiv e n e s s o f th e v e n tila tio n .
w h e re / is th e v e n tila tio n e ffe c tiv e n e s s fa c to r, d e n o tin g th e e ffic ie n c y o f th e v e n tila tio n in

te rm s o f its e ffe c tiv e n e s s in d ilu tin g th e e x p lo s iv e a tm o s p h e re , / ra n g in g fro m 1 (id e a l) to
ty p ic a lly 5 (im p e d e d a ir flo w ). For b a tte ry in s ta lla tio n s th e v e n tila tio n e ffe c tiv e n e s s f a c t o r is
/= 1 ,2 5 .
M.8.2.4 C a lc u la tio n o f d is ta n c e d
The te rm in c lu d in g a ll f a c t o r s co rre sp o n d s w ith th e h o u rly v e n tila tio n a ir flo w Q

V dt y m jn
(in m 3/ h ) f o r s e c o n d a r y b a t t e r i e s c a l c u l a t e d u n d e r
fdV]
Q=
k dt y
Q = 0 ,0 5 X (n )x / gas X c rt X 1 0 - 3 [ m 3 /h ]
T h is h o u rly v e n tila tio n a ir flo w Q can be used to d e fin e a h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e . A s s u m in g a

h e m is p h e ric a l d is p e rs a l o f g a s , a v o lu m e o f a h e m is p h e r e Vz = 2 /3 n d3 c a n b e d e fin e d , w h e re
d is t h e d i s t a n c e f r o m t h e s o u r c e o f r e l e a s e .
T h i s r e s u l t s i n t h e c a l c u l a t i o n f o r m u l a f o r t h e d i s t a n c e r / ，w i t h e = 1 a i r c h a n g e p e r h o u r w i t h i n
th e h e m is p h e re :
x 0 , 0 5 x 1 0 6 x ( j V ) x / g as x Crt
d = 2 8 , 8 x { W ) x ^ x ^ [m m
D e p e n d in g on th e so u rce of gas re le a s e , th e n u m b e r o f c e lls p e r m o n o b lo c b a tte ry (N) or

v e n t o p e n in g s p e r c e ll in v o lv e d (VN) s h a ll be ta k e n in to c o n s id e r a tio n (fo r e x a m p le , b y th e
fa c to r , re s p e c tiv e ly yj\lN ).
The d is ta n c e d a s a fu n c tio n o f th e ra te d c a p a c ity fo r v a rio u s ch a rg e c u rre n ts / ( m A / A h ) is

s h o w n in F i g u r e M . 1 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Figure M.1 - Distance d as a function of the rated capacity

for various charge currents I (mA/Ah)
M_9 Preventing electrolyte spillage
M.9.1 Protection from electrolyte spillage
E q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e c o n s tr u c te d s o th a t s p illa g e o f e le c tro ly te fro m batteries, t h a t m a y h a v e

an a d ve rse e ffe c t on s k in , eye and o th e r hum an body p a rts , o t h e r safeguards o r t h e
p r e m i s e s , is u n l i k e l y . A ll p o s s i b l e o p e ra tin g m o d e s d u rin g m a in te n a n c e s h o u ld be ta k e n in to
a c c o u n t, in c lu d in g r e p la c e m e n t o f th e battery a n d re fillin g o f c o n s u m e d m a te ria l.
M.9.2 Tray for preventing electrolyte spillage
If cell fa ilu re c o u ld r e s u l t in t h e s p illa g e o f e le c tro ly te , th e s p illa g e s h a ll be c o n ta in e d (fo r

e x a m p le , b y u s e o f a r e ta in in g tr a y a d e q u a te to c o n ta in th e e le c t r o ly te ) ta k in g in to a c c o u n t th e
m a x im u m p o s s ib le s p illa g e a m o u n t.
T h i s r e q u i r e m e n t is a p p l i c a b l e t o stationary equipment a n d d o e s n o t a p p ly if t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n
o f th e battery is s u c h t h a t l e a k a g e o f t h e e l e c t r o l y t e f r o m t h e battery is u n li k e ly , o r if s p i l l a g e
o f e le c tro ly te d o e s n o t a d v e rs e ly a ffe c t re q u ire d in s u la tio n .
NOTE A n e x a m p l e o f a battery c o n s t r u c t i o n w h e r e l e a k a g e o f t h e e l e c t r o l y t e i s c o n s i d e r e d t o b e u n l i k e l y i s t h e
s e a le d cell v a l v e - r e g u l a t e d t y p e .
M.10 Instructions to prevent reasonably foreseeable misuse
A battery in c o rp o ra te d in th e e q u ip m e n t and a battery to g e th e r w ith its a s s o c ia te d

c o m p o n e n ts (in c lu d in g cells a n d e l e c t r i c p o w e r g e n e r a t o r s ) s h a l l b e s o c o n s tru c te d th a t an
e le c tr ic s h o c k o r fire safeguard f a i l u r e ( f o r e x a m p l e , f l a m m a b l e c h e m i c a l le a k a g e c a u s in g fire

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
o r i n s u l a t i o n d a m a g e ) i s u n l i k e l y , t a k i n g a l l r e a s o n a b l y f o r e s e e a b l e c o n d i t i o n s i n t o a c c o u n t . If
a p p lic a b le , th is s h a ll in c lu d e e x tr e m e c o n d itio n s a s s p e c ifie d b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r , s u c h a s :
- hi gh o r lo w e x tre m e te m p e r a tu r e s th a t a battery can b e s u b je c te d to d u r in g use , s to ra g e

o r tra n s p o rta tio n ; a n d
- l o w a ir p r e s s u r e a t h ig h a ltitu d e .
W h e re p ro v id in g s a fe ty d e v ic e s or d e s ig n in a battery o r e q u i p m e n t i s n o t re a s o n a b ly
p ra c tic a l c o n s id e rin g th e fu n c tio n a l n a tu re o f th e battery o r e q u i p m e n t c o n t a i n i n g a battery,
instructional safeguards i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 s h a ll be p ro v id e d to p ro te c t th e
battery f r o m e x t r e m e c o n d i t i o n s o r u s e r ' s a b u s e . E x a m p l e s th a t s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d in c lu d e :
- replacement of a battery w ith a n in c o r r e c t ty p e th a t c a n d e fe a t a safeguard (fo r e x a m p le ,

in t h e c a s e o f s o m e l i t h i u m battery ty p e s );
- disposal of a battery in to fire or a hot oven, or m e c h a n ic a lly c ru s h in g or c u ttin g of a

battery, t h a t c a n r e s u l t in a n explosion;
- leaving a battery i n a n e x tre m e ly h ig h te m p e ra tu re s u rro u n d in g e n v iro n m e n t th a t can
r e s u l t in a n explosion o r th e le a k a g e o f f la m m a b le liq u id o r g a s ; a n d
- a battery s u b je c te d t o e x t r e m e l y l o w a i r p r e s s u r e t h a t m a y r e s u l t in a n explosion o r th e
le a k a g e o f f la m m a b le liq u id o r g a s .
For e q u ip m e n t c o n ta in in g a battery th a t is re p la c e a b le by an ordinary person, an

instructional safeguard s h a l l b e p ro v id e d in a c c o r d a n c e w ith C la u s e F .5 , e x c e p t th a t th e
c o m p l e t e instructional safeguard m a y b e p r o v i d e d in t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s .
- e l e m e n t s 1 a o r 1b: n o t re q u ire d
- e l e m e n t 2: “ C A U T IO N ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t
- e l e m e n t 3: “ R is k o f fire o r e x p lo s io n if t h e b a tte ry is r e p l a c e d by an in c o rre c t

ty p e ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
Compliance is checked by inspection or by evaluation of available data provided by the

manufacturer.

IEC 62368-1:2018
Annex N
(normative)
Electrochemical potentials (V)
Aluminium/magnesium
80 tin/20 zinc on steel,
zinc on iron or steel 1
Copper, copper alloys

c
◎
Cr on Ni on steel, tin
o
Chromium on steel,
austenitic stainless
magnesium alloys
"5
on steel, 12 % Cr
0) 5 〇
IEC 2018
Zinc， zinc alloys
— O)
High chromium
a>
Gold， platinum
stainless steel
stainless steel
if) ^
Silver solder ，
c a>
Magnesium,
o w
soft solder
c =
Aluminium
E 0) c
3 0) E o E ^
3 •2 £ c
</> a> o
Silver
E alloy « T3 "2 〇 . > n
steel
TJ k. 2 a
re •w 3 a> •o
w
〇
<0
〇 s Q z S o l 〇
0 0 ,5 0 ,5 5 07 〇 ,8 0 ,8 5 0 ,9 1 ,〇 1 ,0 5 1,1 1 ,1 5 1 ,2 5 1 ,3 5 1 ,4 1 ,4 5 1,6 1 ,6 5 U 175 M a g n e s iu m , m a g n e s iu m a llo y s
0 0 ,0 5 〇 ,2 0 ,3 0 ,3 5 0 ,4 0 ,5 0 t5 5 0 ,6 0 ,6 5 0 ,7 5 0 ,8 5 0 ,9 0 ,9 5 1,1 1 ,1 5 1,2 1 ,2 5 Z in c , z in c a llo y s

8 0 tin /2 0 z in c o n s te e l, z in c o n iro n
I
0 0 ,1 5 0 ,2 5 0 ,3 0 ,3 5 0 ,4 5 0 ,5 0 ,5 5 0 ,6 〇 ,7 0 ,8 0 ,8 5 0 ,9 1 ,0 5 1,1 1 ,1 5 1,2
o r ste e l
303
0 0 ,1 0 ,1 5 0 ,2 0 ,3 0 ,3 5 0 ,4 0 ,4 5 0 ,5 5 0 ,6 5 0 ,7 0 ,7 5 0 ,9 0 ,9 5 1,0 1 ,0 5 A lu m in iu m
I
0 0 ,0 5 0 ,1 0 ,2 0 ,2 5 〇 ,3 0 ,3 5 0 ,4 5 0 ,5 5 0 ,6 0 ,6 5 0 ,8 0 ,8 5 0 ,9 0 ,9 5 C a d m iu m on ste e l
0 0 ,0 5 0 ,1 5 0 ,2 0 ,2 5 0 ,3 0 ,4 0 ,5 0 ,5 5 0 ,6 0 ,7 5 0 ,8 0 ,8 5 0 ,9 A lu m in iu m /m a g n e s iu m a llo y
0 0 ,1 0 ,1 5 0 ,2 0 ,2 5 0 ,3 5 0 ,4 5 0 ,5 0 ,5 5 0 ,7 0 ,7 5 0 ,8 0 ,8 5 M ild s te e l
0 0 ,0 5 〇 ,1 0 ,1 5 0 ,2 5 0 ,3 5 0 ,4 0 ,4 5 0 ,6 0 ,6 5 0 ,7 0 ,7 5 D u ra lu m in
0 0 ,0 5 0,1 0 ,2 0 ,3 0 ,3 5 0 ,4 0 ,5 5 0 ,6 0 ,6 6 0 .7 Lead
0 0 ,0 5 0 ,1 5 0 ,2 5 0 ,3 0 ,3 5 0 ,5 0 ,5 5 0 ,6 0 ,6 5 C h r o m iu m on s te e l, s o ft s o ld e r
C r = C h ro m iu m C r o n Ni o n s te e l, tin o n s te e l,
0 0 ,1 0 ,2 0 ,2 5 0 .3 0 ,4 5 0 ,5 0 ,5 5 0 ,6
Ni = N ic k e l 12 % C r s ta in le s s s te e l
0 0,1 0 ,1 5 0 ,2 0 ,3 5 〇 ,4 0 ,4 5 0 ,5 H ig h c h r o m iu m s ta in le s s s te e l
0 0 ,0 5 0,1 0 ,2 5 0 ,3 0 ,3 5 〇 ,4 C o p p e r, c o p p e r a llo y s
S ilv e r s o ld e r, a u s te n itic s ta in le s s
0 0 ,0 5 0 ,2 0 ,2 5 0 ,3 0 ,3 5
s te e l
0 0 ,1 5 0 ,2 0 ,2 5 0 ,3 N ic k e l on s te e l
0 0 ,0 5 0,1 0 ,1 5 S ilv e r
R h o d iu m on s ilv e r on c o p p e r,
0 0 ,0 5 〇 ,1
s ilv e r/g o ld a llo y
0 0 ,0 5 C arbon
0 G o ld , p la tin u m
C o r r o s i o n d u e t o e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l a c t i o n b e t w e e n d i s s i m i l a r m e t a l s t h a t a r e in c o n t a c t i s m i n i m i z e d i f t h e c o m b i n e d e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l p o t e n t i a l i s b e l o w a b o u t 0 , 6 V . In t h e t a b l e t h e
c o m b i n e d e le c t r o c h e m i c a l p o t e n t i a l s a re lis te d f o r a n u m b e r o f p a ir s o f m e t a l s in c o m m o n u s e ; c o m b i n a t i o n s a b o v e t h e d iv id in g lin e s h o u ld b e a v o id e d .
Copyright International Electrotechncal Commission

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex O
(normative)
Measurement of creepage distances and clearances
In t h e f o l l o w i n g F ig u re s 0 .1 to 0 . 1 6 , th e v a lu e o f X i s g i v e n in T a b l e 0 . 1 . W h e r e t h e d i s t a n c e
shown is le s s th a n Xf th e d e p th o f th e gap or g ro o ve is d is re g a rd e d when m e a s u rin g a
creepage distance.
If t h e r e q u i r e d m i n i m u m clearance is m o r e t h a n 3 m m , t h e v a l u e o f ^ i s g i v e n in T a b l e 0 . 1 .
If t h e r e q u ir e d m in im u m clearance is l e s s t h a n 3 m m , t h e v a l u e o f Z is t h e s m a l l e r o f:
- t h e r e l e v a n t v a l u e in T a b l e 0 . 1 ; o r
- o n e th ird o f th e re q u ire d m in im u m clearance.
Table 0.1 - Value of 久
Pollution degree
(see 5.4.1.5) 丄
1 0 ,2 5
2 1 ,0 0
3 1 ,5 0
NOTE T h r o u g h o u t t h i s a n n e x , t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n v e n t i o n is u s e d :
c le a ra n c e
c r e e p a g e d i s t a n c e p a th
ie c
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s a p a ra lle l R u l e : Creepage distance a n d clearance a r e

o r c o n v e rg in g - s id e d g ro o v e o f a n y d e p th w ith w id th m e a s u re d d ire c tly a c ro s s th e g ro o v e ,
le s s th a n X mm.
Figure 0.1 - Narrow groove

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s a Clearance is t h e " l i n e o f s i g h t "

R u le : d is ta n c e .
p a ra lle l-s id e d g ro o v e o f a n y d e p th , a n d e q u a l to or Creepage distance p a t h f o l l o w s t h e c o n to u r o f th e
m o re th a n X m m w id e . g ro ove .
Figure 0.2 - Wide groove
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s a Clearance is t h e 丨M ine o f s i g h t "

V - s h a p e d g ro o v e w ith an in te rn a l a n g le o f le s s th a n Creepage distance p a t h f o l l o w s t h e c o n to u r o f th e
8 0° a n d a w id th g re a te r th a n X m m . g ro o v e b u t "s h o rt-c irc u its " th e b o tto m o f th e g ro o v e by
X m m lin k.
Figure 0.3 - V-shaped groove
U n c o n n e c te d c o n d u c tiv e part
C o n d itio n : In s u la tio n d is ta n c e w ith in te rv e n in g , Clearance

R u le : is t h e d i s t a n c e d + I ) %creepage
u n c o n n e c te d c o n d u c tiv e p a rt. distance is a l s o 十 D . W h e r e t h e v a l u e o f J o r D is
s m a lle r th a n X m m it s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d a s z e r o .
Figure 0.4 - Intervening unconnected conductive part
IEC
C o n d it io n : P a th u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n i n c l u d e s a rib . R u le : Clearance is t h e s h o r t e s t d i r e c t a i r p a t h o v e r th e
to p o f t h e r i b . Creepage distance p a t h f o l l o w s th e
c o n t o u r o f th e rib .
Figure 0.5 - Rib

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
<^Tmm — ►!—
— k— — ►!—
— N— <^Tmm
ie c
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s an R u le : Clearance and creepage distance p a t h is t h e

u n c e m e n te d jo in t w ith g ro o v e s le s s th a n X m m w id e "lin e o f s ig h t" d is ta n c e s h o w n ,
o n e ith e r s id e .
Figure 0.6 - Uncemented joint with narrow groove
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s an Clearance i s t h e .’ l i n e o f s i g h t "

u n c e m e n te d jo in t w ith a g ro o v e e q u a l to o r m o re th a n Creepage distance p a t h f o l l o w s t h e c o n to u r o f th e
X m m w id e e a c h s id e . g ro ove .
Figure 0.7 - Uncemented joint with wide groove
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s an R u l e : Clearance a n d creepage distance p a th a re as

u n c e m e n te d jo in t w ith g ro o v e s o n o n e s id e le s s th a n shown.
X m m w id e , a n d a g ro o v e on th e o th e r e q u a l to o r m o re
th a n X m m w id e .
Figure 0.8 - Uncemented joint with narrow and wide grooves

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
IEC
G a p b e tw e e n h e a d o f s c r e w a n d w a ll o f r e c e s s to o n a r r o w to b e ta k e n in to a c c o u n t.
W h e r e t h e g a p b e t w e e n th e h e a d o f t h e s c r e w a n d th e w a l l o f r e c e s s is s m a l l e r t h a n X m m , th e m e a s u r e m e n t of
c r e e p a g e d i s t a n c e is m a d e f r o m t h e s c r e w t o t h e w a l l a t t h e p l a c e w h e r e t h e d i s t a n c e i s e q u a l t o X mm.
F igure 0 .9 - N arrow recess
—► k — Â^mm
—^ _— > ^fm m
• IEC
G a p b e tw e e n h e a d o f s c r e w a n d w a ll o f r e c e s s w id e e n o u g h to be ta k e n in to a c c o u n t.
F igure 0 .1 0 - W ide recess

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
S e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e
b e fo re coatin g C o a tin g a cc o rd in g
T e r m in a l p in Clearance a c c o rd in g to 6 . 1 3 . 3 to G .1 3 .3
a c c o rd in g to 5.4.2 a n d T a b l e G . 13
Creepage distance
a c c o r d i n g to 5 . 4 . 3
M e ta l ca n
iec
Figure 0.11 - Coating around terminals
C o m p o n e n t p in
C o p p e r tra ck
Clearance a c c o r d i n g t o 5 . 4 . 2
Creepage d i s t a n c e a c c o r d i n g to 5.4.3
C o a tin g
C o a tin g
>
P rin te d w irin g s u b s tra te
S e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e b e fo re
c o a tin g a c c o r d in g to G .1 3 .3
a n d T a b l e G . 13
IEC
Figure 0.12 - Coating over printed wiring

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
P o i n t X is u s e d f o r m e a s u r e m e n t s o f c l e a r a n c e s a n d c r e e p a g e d i s t a n c e s
f r o m t h e o u t e r s u r f a c e o f a n e n c l o s u r e o f i n s u l a t i n g m a t e r i a l t o a n in t e r n a l
c o n d u c tiv e part at E S 3 o r ES 3
Figure 0.13 - Example of measurements in an enclosure of insulating material
See 5 .4 4 .5
//
U ■一 • 一一 / I
m s u ia im g la m ina te 1
- |
---------------------- 一 !一
■ 二 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - , --------------- j-- - - - - - - - - - - - \~ ~ « ：- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
x x x x x x x x x > o c ^
x j C o n d u c tiv e C o n d u c tiv e
In s u la tin g _ _
•p Part 1 part 2
c o m p o u n d >〇〇 ^ < $ 〇 < V x x x Xa ^
5〇〇〇 <x
XXXXXXH
5ooooool
■ 4
— —
= In su la tin a la m in a te \
\
IEC
Figure 0.14 - Cemented joints in multi-layer printed boards

IEC 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
D is ta n c e th ro u g h
in s u la tio n ,
In s u la tin g c a s in g
se e 5.4.4.2
In s u la tin g c o m p o u n d
C e m e n te d jo in t
s e e 5.4.4.5
C o n n e c tio n 1
C o n n e c tio n 2
ie c
Figure 0.15 - Device filled with insulating compound
S e e 5 .4 .4 .5 S e e 5 .4 .4 .3 A d h e s iv e or
Figure 0.16 - Partitioned bobbin

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 - 311 -
Annex P
(normative)
Safeguards against conductive objects
P.1 General
T h is a n n e x s p e c ifie s safeguards to re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f fire , e le c tr ic s h o c k a n d a d v e rs e

c h e m ic a l re a c tio n d u e to th e e n try o f o b je c ts th ro u g h to p o r s id e o p e n in g s in t h e e q u i p m e n t ,
or due to s p illa g e of in te rn a l liq u id s , or th e fa ilu re of m e ta lliz e d c o a tin g s and a d h e s iv e s
s e c u rin g c o n d u c tiv e p a rts in s id e th e e q u ip m e n t.
The basic safeguard a g a in s t e n try o f a fo re ig n o b j e c t is t h a t p e r s o n s a re n o t e x p e c te d to

in s e rt a fo re ig n o b je c t in to th e e q u ip m e n t. The safeguards s p e c ifie d in th is annex a re
supplementary safeguards.
T h is a n n e x d o e s n o t a p p ly to o p e n in g s th a t a re p a r ts o f c o n n e c t o r s .
F o r e q u i p m e n t i n t e n d e d , a c c o r d i n g t o t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’ s i n s t r u c t i o n s , t o b e u s e d in m o r e t h a n
o n e o rie n ta tio n , th e safeguards s h a ll b e e ffe c tiv e fo r e a c h s u c h o r ie n ta tio n .
For transportable equipment, th e safeguards s h a ll b e e f f e c t iv e f o r a ll o r ie n t a t io n s .
NOTE T h e e x a m p le s o f F ig u re P . 1 ， F ig u re P .2 a n d F ig u re P .3 a re n o t in te n d e d to be used as e n g in e e rin g

d ra w in g s b u t a re o n ly s h o w n to illu s tra te th e in te n t o f th e s e r e q u ire m e n ts .
P.2 Safeguards against entry or consequences of entry of a foreign object
P.2.1 General
E q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f P .2 .2 o r w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f P .2 .3 .
P.2.2 Safeguards against entry of a foreign object
O p e n i n g s in t h e t o p a n d s i d e s o f a n accessible enclosure s h a ll b e s o lo c a te d o r c o n s tr u c te d
to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d th a t a fo r e ig n o b je c t w ill e n te r th e o p e n in g s .
E q u ip m e n t o p e n in g s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e re q u ire m e n ts s p e c ifie d b e lo w when th e d o o rs,

p a n e l s , a n d c o v e r s , e t c . , a r e c l o s e d o r in p l a c e . T h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p l y t o o p e n i n g s
lo c a te d b e h in d d o o rs, p a n e ls , co ve rs, e tc ., even if t h e y can be opened or re m o ve d by an
ordinary person.
A n y o n e o f th e fo llo w in g c o n s tr u c tio n s a re c o n s id e re d to c o m p ly :
- o p e n i n g s t h a t d o n o t e x c e e d 5 m m in a n y d i m e n s i o n ;
- o p e n i n g s th a t d o n o t e x c e e d 1 m m in w i d t h r e g a r d l e s s o f l e n g t h ;
- o p e n i n g s th a t m e e t th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f IP 3 X ;
- t o p o p e n i n g s in w h i c h v e r t i c a l e n t r y is p r e v e n t e d ( s e e F i g u r e P .1 f o r e x a m p l e s ) ;
- si de o p e n in g s p ro v id e d w ith lo u v re s th a t a re shaped to d e fle c t o u tw a rd s an e x te rn a l

v e r tic a lly fa llin g o b je c t (s e e F ig u re P .2 fo r e x a m p le s ) ;
- si de o p e n in g s w ith o u t lo u v re s w h e re th e enclosure th ic k n e s s a t th e o p e n in g is n o t l e s s
th a n th e v e rtic a l d im e n s io n o f th e o p e n in g .
Compliance is checked by inspection or measurement.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
S la n te d o p e n in g s
Figure P.1 - Examples of cross-sections of designs

of top openings which prevent vertical entry
O u tw a rd p ro je ctio n s In w ard p ro je c tio n s

ie c
Figure P.2 - Examples of cross-sections of designs

of side opening louvres which prevent vertical entry
P.2.3 Safeguards against the consequences of entry of a foreign object
P.2.3.1 Safeguard requirements
T h e e n tr y o f a fo r e ig n o b je c t s h a ll n o t d e fe a t a n equipment supplementary safeguard or an

equipment reinforced safeguard. F u rth e rm o re , t h e o b j e c t s h a l l n o t c r e a t e a PIS.
Safeguards a g a in s t th e c o n s e q u e n c e s o f e n try o f fo re ig n o b je c ts in c lu d e th e fo llo w in g :
- a n in te rn a l b a rrie r th a t p re v e n ts a fo re ig n o b je c t fro m d e fe a tin g a n equipment safeguard

o r c re a tin g a PIS;
- w i t h i n t h e p r o j e c t e d v o l u m e a s d e p i c t e d in F i g u r e P . 3 t h e r e a r e
• n o b a re c o n d u c tiv e p a rts o f a safeguard, or
• no PIS, or
• n o b a re c o n d u c tiv e p a rts o f E S 3 o r P S 3 c irc u its , o r
• o n ly c o n d u c tiv e p a rts c o v e r e d w ith c o n fo r m a l o r o th e r s im ila r c o a tin g s ;
NOTE 1 C o n d u c tiv e p a rts covered w ith c o n fo rm a l o r o th e r s im ila r c o a tin g s are n o t c o n s id e re d to be bare

c o n d u c t i v e p a r ts . A c o n f o r m a l c o a t i n g is a d i e l e c t r i c m a t e r i a l d e p o s i t e d o n a p r i n t e d c i r c u i t b o a r d and
c o m p o n e n t s in o r d e r t o p r o t e c t t h e m a g a i n s t m o i s t u r e , d u s t , c o r r o s i o n a n d o t h e r e n v i r o n m e n t a l s t r e s s e s .
- within th e p ro je c te d v o lu m e as d e p ic te d in F ig u re P .3 , b a re c o n d u c tiv e p a rts at ES3 or

P S 3 s u b je c te d to th e te s ts o f P .2 .3 .2 .
O t h e r c o n s t r u c t io n s s h a ll b e s u b je c t to th e te s t o f P .2 .3 .2 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -313-
O u ts id e
Key
A enclosure o p e n in g
B v e rtic a l p ro je c tio n o f th e o u te r e d g e s o f th e o p e n in g
C in c lin e d lin e s th a t p ro je c t a t a 5° a n g le fro m th e e d g e s o f th e o p e n in g to p o in ts lo c a te d E d is ta n c e fro m B
D l i n e t h a t is p r o j e c t e d s t r a i g h t d o w n w a r d in t h e s a m e p l a n e a s t h e enclosure s id e w a ll
E p r o j e c t i o n o f t h e o u t e r e d g e o f t h e o p e n i n g ( B ) a n d t h e i n c l i n e d l in e ( C ) ( n o t to b e g r e a t e r t h a n L)
L m a x im u m d im e n s io n o f th e enclosure o p e n in g
V p ro je c te d (k e e p -o u t) v o lu m e fo r supplementary safeguards or reinforced safeguards
Figure P.3 - Internal volume locus for foreign object entry
For transportable equipment, if th e d e s ig n d o e s n o t p r e v e n t th e e n tr y o f a fo r e ig n o b je c t, th e

o b j e c t is c o n s i d e r e d t o m o v e t o a n y p l a c e w i t h i n th e e q u ip m e n t. T h e ES3 and P S 3 k e e p -o u t
v o l u m e in F i g u r e P . 3 is n o t a p p l i c a b l e t o transportable equipment.
For transportable equipment w it h m e t a l li z e d p la s t ic p a r t s a n d t h e lik e , if t h e d e s ig n d o e s n o t

p re v e n t th e e n try o f a fo re ig n o b je c t, th e d is ta n c e b e tw e e n th e m e ta lliz e d p a rts a n d a ll b a r e
c o n d u c tiv e p a rts of ES3 or PS3 s h a ll b e a t le a s t 13 m m . A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e m e ta lliz e d p a rts
a n d th e b a re c o n d u c tiv e p a rts s h a ll b e te s te d b y s h o rtin g .
NOTE 2 E x a m p le s o f m e ta lliz e d b a rrie rs o r m e ta lliz e d enclosures in c lu d e th o s e m a d e o f c o n d u c tiv e c o m p o s ite

m a te r ia ls o r m a te r ia ls th a t a re e le c tr o p la te d , v a c u u m - d e p o s ite d , fo il lin e d o r p a in te d w ith m e ta llic p a in t.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Compliance is checked by inspection, measurement, and where necessary by the test of

P.2.3.2.
P.2.3.2 Consequence of entry test
An attempt shall be made to short all bare conductive parts of ES3 or PS3 within volume Vf
Figure P.3, along a direct straight path to all other bare conductive parts and to all metallized
parts within a 13 mm radius. The attempt of shorting is made by means o f a straight metal
object， 1 mm in diameter and having any length up to 13 mmf applied without appreciable
force.
For tra n s p o rta b le e q u ip m e n t, the attempt of shorting shall be at all places where the foreign
object could lodge.
During and after the tests, all s u p p le m e n ta ry s a fe g u a rd s and re in fo rc e d s a fe g u a rd s shall

be effective, and no part shall become a PIS.
P.3 Safeguards against spillage of internal liquids
P.3.1 General
The re q u ire m e n ts s p e c ifie d b e lo w a p p ly to e q u ip m e n t w ith in te rn a l liq u id s w h e re t h a t liq u id

m a y d e fe a t a n y equipment safeguard.
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n ts d o n o t a p p ly to :
- l i q u i ds th a t a re n o n -c o n d u c tiv e , n o n -fla m m a b le , n o n -to x ic , a n d n o n -c o rro s iv e , a n d a re n o t

in a p r e s s u r i z e d c o n t a i n e r ;
- e l e c t r o l y t i c c a p a c ito rs ;
- l i q u i ds w ith v is c o s ity o f 1 P a s o r m o re ; a n d
- batteries ( s e e A n n e x M ).
NOTE V i s c o s i t y o f 1 P a s is a p p r o x i m a t e l y e q u i v a l e n t to 6 0 w e i g h t m o t o r o il.
P.3.2 Determination of spillage consequences
If t h e e q u i p m e n t is n o t transportable equipment, th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e e n e r g iz e d , a n d th e
liq u id s h a ll b e a llo w e d to le a k fro m p i p i n g c o n n e c t o r s a n d s i m i l a r j o i n t s in t h e l i q u i d s y s t e m .
If t h e e q u ip m e n t is transportable equipment, th e n , fo llo w in g in tro d u c tio n o f th e le a k , th e

e q u i p m e n t s h a ll b e m o v e d to a ll p o s s ib l e p o s it io n s a n d t h e n e n e r g i z e d .
P.3.3 Spillage safeguards
If t h e s p i l l a g e m a y r e s u l t in a single fault condition n o t c o v e r e d b y C la u s e B .4 , th e n :
- t he v e s s e l s e rv in g as a basic safeguard s h a l l a l l o w n o s p i l l a g e under normal operating

conditions, and th e supplementary safeguard ( f o r e x a m p l e , a b a rrie r or d rip pan or
s u p p le m e n t a r y c o n ta in m e n t v e s s e l, e tc .) s h a ll e ffe c tiv e ly lim it th e sp re a d o f th e s p illa g e ;
or
- t h e l i q u i d s h a l l b e c o n t a i n e d in a v e s s e l c o m p r i s i n g a reinforced safeguard; or
- t he c o n ta in m e n t v e s s e l safeguard s h a ll c o m p ris e a double safeguard or a reinforced

safeguard.
If t h e liq u id is c o n d u c t i v e , f l a m m a b l e , t o x i c , o r c o r r o s i v e , t h e n :
- t h e l i q u i d s h a l l b e c o n t a i n e d in a double safeguard or a reinforced safeguard; or
- f o l l o w i n g th e s p illa g e :

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 -315-
• a to x ic liq u id s h a ll n o t b e accessible to ordinary persons or instructed persons, and
• a c o n d u c tiv e liq u id s h a ll n o t b r id g e a basic insulation, a supplementary insulation

or a reinforced insulation, and
• a fla m m a b le liq u id ( o r its v a p o u r ) s h a ll n o t c o n t a c t a n y PIS o r p a rts a t a te m p e ra tu re

th a t m a y ig n ite th e liq u id , a n d
• a c o r r o s iv e liq u id s h a ll n o t c o n ta c t a n y c o n n e c tio n o f a protective conductor.
A v e s s e l t h a t m e e t s t h e r e l e v a n t t e s t r e q u i r e m e n t s o f C l a u s e G . 1 5 is c o n s i d e r e d t o c o m p r i s e a
NOTE T h e fo llo w in g liq u id s a re g e n e r a lly c o n s id e r e d n o n -fla m m a b le :
- O i l o r e q u i v a l e n t l i q u i d s u s e d f o r l u b r i c a t i o n o r in a h y d r a u l i c s y s t e m h a v in g a fla s h p o in t o f 1 4 9 °C o r h ig h e r;
or
- R e p le n is h a b le liq u id s s u c h a s p rin tin g in k s h a v in g a fla s h p o in t o f 6 0 °C o r h ig h e r.
P.3.4 Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection or available data, and where necessary, by the relevant
tests.
During and after the tests, all s u p p le m e n ta ry sa fe g u a rd s and re in fo rc e d s a fe g u a rd s shall

be effective， and no part shall become a PIS.
P.4 Metallized coatings and adhesives securing parts
P.4.1 General
The m e ta lliz e d c o a tin g a n d a d h e s iv e s h a ll h a v e a d e q u a te b o n d in g p ro p e r tie s th r o u g h o u t th e

life o f t h e e q u ip m e n t .
Compliance is checked by examination of the construction and of the available data. If such
data is not available, compliance is checked by the tests of P.4.2.
For metallized coatings, cle a ra n ce s and creepage d is ta n c e s for p o llu tio n degree 3 shall be
maintained instead of the tests of P.4.2.
P.4.2 Tests
A sample of the equipment or a subassembly of the equipment containing parts having

metallized coating and the parts joined by adhesive is evaluated with the sample placed with
the part secured by adhesive on the underside.
Condition the sample in an oven at a temperature Tc for the specified duration (eight weeks,
three weeks or one week) as follows:
In case the value for TA ^ 10 - Ts is negative, the value will be replaced by zero,
where:
Tc is the conditioning temperature;
Tr is the rated conditioning temperature value o f (82 土 2) °C for eight weeks; (90 土 2) °C
for three weeks; or (100 ± 2) °C (for one week) as applicable;
Ta is the temperature of the coating or the part under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s (see
B.2.6.1);

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Ts = 82.
NOTE 1 F o r e x a m p l e f o r e i g h t w e e k c o n d i t i o n i n g , if t h e a c t u a l t e m p e r a t u r e is 7 0 ° C , t h e n t h e r A + 10 - = 70 +
1 0 - 8 2 = - 2 , t h e n t h i s - 2 is i g n o r e d . T h e m i n i m u m c o n d itio n in g te m p e ra tu re re m a in s 8 2 °C. A ls o , fo r th re e w e e k
c o n d i t i o n i n g , if t h e a c t u a l t e m p e r a t u r e is 7 0 ° C , t h e n th e r A + 1 0 - Ts = 7 0 + 1 0 - 8 2 = - 2 , t h e n t h i s - 2 i s i g n o r e d .
T h e m i n i m u m c o n d i t i o n i n g t e m p e r a t u r e r e m a i n s 9 0 ° C . A l s o , f o r o n e w e e k c o n d i t i o n i n g , i f t h e a c t u a l t e m p e r a t u r e is
7 0 °C , th e n th e r A + 10 - r s = 7 0 + 1 0 - 8 2 = - 2 , t h e n t h i s - 2 is i g n o r e d . T h e m i n i m u m c o n d itio n in g te m p e ra tu re
r e m a in s 1 0 0 °C.
NOTE 2 F o r e x a m p l e f o r e i g h t w e e k c o n d i t i o n i n g , if t h e a c t u a l t e m p e r a t u r e is 7 5 ° C , t h e n t h e r A + 10 - r s = 75 +
10 - 8 2 = + 3, t h e m i n i m u m c o n d i t i o n i n g t e m p e r a t u r e b e c o m e s 8 2 + 3 = 8 5 ° C . A l s o , f o r t h r e e w e e k c o n d i t i o n i n g , if
th e a c tu a l te m p e ra tu re is 7 5 ° C f th e n th e rA + 10 - r s = 75 + 10 - 8 2 = + 3 ? th e n th e m in im u m c o n d itio n in g
t e m p e r a t u r e r e m a i n s 9 0 + 3 = 9 3 ° C . A l s o , f o r o n e w e e k c o n d i t i o n i n g , if t h e a c t u a l t e m p e r a t u r e is 7 5 ° C , t h e n th e
r A + 10 - Ts = 7 5 + 1 0 - 8 2 = + 3 , t h e n t h e m i n i m u m c o n d i t i o n i n g t e m p e r a t u r e r e m a i n s 1 0 0 + 3 = 1 0 3 ° C .
NOTE 3 T h e t a b l e b e l o w g i v e s t h e s u m m a r y o f t h e r e s u l t s in N O T E 1 a n d N O T E 2 :
T ^ I O - T g 7，
c = 7 ' r + 7 'a + 1 〇 - 7 's
70 8 2 (8 w e e k s ) 82 70 + 10 - 82 = - 2 82 + 0 = 82
70 9 0 (3 w e e k s ) 82 7 0 + 10 - 8 2 = - 2 90 + 0 = 90
70 1 0 0 (1 w e e k ) 82 70 + 10 - 82 = - 2 100 + 0 = 100
75 8 2 (8 w e e k s ) 82 75 + 10 - 82 = +3 82 + 3 = 85
75 9 0 (3 w e e k s ) 82 75 十 10 _ 82 = +3 90 十 3 = 93
75 1 0 0 (1 w e e k ) 82 75 + 10 - 82 = +3 100 + 3 = 103
Upon completion of the temperature conditioning， subject the sample to the following:
- remove the sample from oven and leave it at any convenient temperature between 20 °C
and 30 °C for a minimum of 1 h;
- pl ace the sample in a freezer at -4 0 °C ± 2 °C for a minimum of 4 h;
- remove and allow the sample to come to any convenient temperature between 20 °C and
30 °C for a minimum of 8 h;
- pl ace the sample in a cabinet at 91 % to 95 % relative humidity for 72 h at any convenient
temperature between 20 °C and 30 °C;
- remove the sample and leave it at any convenient temperature between 20 °C and 30 °C
for a minimum of 1 h;
- pl ace the sample in an oven at the temperature used for the temperature conditioning (Tc)
for a minimum of 4 h; and
- remove the sample and allow it to reach any convenient temperature between 20 °C; and
30 °C for a minimum of 8 h.
The sample is then immediately subjected to the tests of Annex T according to 4.4.3.
With the concurrence of the manufacturer, the above time durations may be extended.
After the above tests:
- a metallized coating or a part secured by adhesive shall not fall off or partly dislodge;
- a metallized coating shall be subjected to the abrasion resistance test o f G .13.6.2. After
the abrasion resistance test， the coating shall have not loosened and no particles shall
become loose from the coating; and
- enc l os ur e parts serving as s a fe g u a rd s shall comply with all the applicable requirements
for e n clo su re s.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex Q
(normative)
Circuits intended for interconnection with building wiring
Q_1 Limited power source
Q.1.1 Requirements
A lim ite d p o w e r s o u r c e s h a ll c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :
a) t h e o u t p u t i s i n h e r e n t l y l i m i t e d in c o m p l i a n c e w i t h T a b l e Q . 1 ; o r
b) lin e a r o r n o n -lin e a r im p e d a n c e lim its th e o u t p u t in c o m p l i a n c e w ith T a b le Q .1 . If a P T C

d e v i c e is u s e d , it s h a l l :
1) p a s s t h e t e s t s s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e s 1 5 , 1 7 , J . 1 5 a n d J . 1 7 o f I E C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 3 ; o r
2) m e e t th e re q u ire m e n ts o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 fo r a d e v ic e p ro v id in g T y p e 2 .A L a c tio n ;
c) a r e g u l a t i n g n e t w o r k l i m i t s t h e o u t p u t in c o m p l i a n c e w i t h T a b l e Q . 1 , b o t h w i t h a n d w i t h o u t
a s i m u l a t e d s i n g l e f a u l t ( s e e C l a u s e B . 4 ) , in t h e r e g u l a t i n g n e t w o r k ( o p e n c i r c u i t o r s h o r t -
c irc u it); o r
d) an o ve rcu rre n t p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e is used and th e o u tp u t is lim ite d in c o m p lia n c e w ith

T a b le Q .2 ; o r
e) a n IC c u r r e n t l im it e r c o m p ly i n g w it h C la u s e G .9 .
W h e re a n o v e rc u rre n t p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e is u s e d , it s h a l l b e a f u s e o r a n o n - a d j u s t a b l e , non

a u to re s e t, e le c tr o m e c h a n ic a l d e v ic e .
Q.1.2 Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement and, where appropriate, by

examination of the manufacturer’s data for b a tte rie s. B a tte rie s shall be fully charged when
conducting the measurements for Uoc and I sc according to Table Q.1 and Table Q.2. The
maximum power shall be considered， such as from a b a tte ry and from a m a in s circuit.
The non-capacitive load referenced in footnotes b and c of Table Q.1 and Table Q.2 is
adjusted to develop maximum current and maximum power transfer in turn. S in g le fa u lt
c o n d itio n s are applied in a regulating network according to Clause Q.1.1, item c) while under
these maximum current and power conditions.
Table Q.1 - Limits for inherently limited power sources
Output voltage a Output current b d Apparent power c d

U〇
c ，sc S
V AC V DC A VA
< 8 ,0 < 100

^ 〇 c ^ 30 30
— 3〇 < 6〇 < 1瞻〇c < 100
U〇 c： O u t p u t v o lta g e m e a s u re d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h B . 2 . 3 w i t h a l l l o a d c i r c u i t s d i s c o n n e c t e d . V o l t a g e s a r e f o r
s u b s ta n tia lly s in u s o id a l A C a n d rip p le fre e D C F o r n o n - s in u s o id a l A C a n d D C w ith rip p le g r e a te r th a n 10 % o f
th e p e a k , th e p e a k v o lta g e s h a ll n o t e x c e e d 4 2 ,4 V.
b / $ c ： M a x im u m o u tp u t c u rr e n t w ith a n y n o n -c a p a c itiv e lo a d , in c lu d in g a s h o rt-c irc u it
c S (V A ): M a x im u m o u tp u t V A w ith a n y n o n - c a p a c itiv e lo a d .
d M e a sure m e nt o f / and S are m a d e 5 s a f t e r a p p l i c a t i o n o f t h e lo a d if p r o t e c t i o n is b y a n e l e c t r o n i c c i r c u i t a n d

6 0 s in c a s e o f a P T C d e v i c e o r in o t h e r c a s e s .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table Q.2 - Limits for power sources not inherently limited

(overcurrent protective device required)
Output voltage a Output Apparent Current rating of

current b d power c d overcurrent
ôc S protective device e
V AC V DC A VA A
< 20 < 20 < 5 ,0
2〇 < U〇c ^ 30 20 < 30 < 1 o o o /u nr

oc ^ 250 < 1 _ oc
一 30 < U〇c < 60 < 1 0 0 / [ / 〇c
U〇c：O u t p u t v o lta g e m e a s u r e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h B . 2 . 3 w i t h a l l l o a d c i r c u i t s d i s c o n n e c t e d . V o l t a g e s a r e f o r
s u b s ta n tia lly s in u s o id a l A C and rip p le fre e DC F o r n o n -s in u s o id a l A C and fo r DC w ith rip p le g re a te r th a n
10 % o f th e p e a k , th e p e a k v o lta g e s h a ll n o t e x c e e d 4 2 ,4 V.
b / s c ：M a x im u m o u tp u t c u rre n t w ith any n o n -c a p a c itiv e lo a d , in c lu d in g a s h o rt-c irc u it, m easured 60 s a fte r

a p p lic a tio n o f th e lo a d .
S (V A ): M a x im u m o u tp u t V A w ith a n y n o n - c a p a c itiv e lo a d m e a s u r e d 6 0 s a fte r a p p lic a tio n o f th e lo a d .
C urrent lim itin g im p e d a n c e s in th e e q u ip m e n t re m a in in th e c irc u it d u rin g m e a s u re m e n t, but overcurrent

p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s a re b y p a s s e d .
T h e r e a s o n f o r m a k i n g m e a s u r e m e n t s w it h o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e s b y p a s s e d is to d e t e r m i n e th e
a m o u n t o f e n e r g y t h a t is a v a i l a b l e to c a u s e p o s s i b l e o v e r h e a t i n g d u r i n g t h e o p e r a t i n g t i m e o f t h e o v e r c u r r e n t
p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s .
T h e c u rre n t ra tin g s o f o v e rc u rre n t p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s a re b a s e d on fu s e s a n d c irc u it b re a k e rs th a t b re a k th e

c i r c u i t w i t h i n 1 2 0 s w i t h a c u r r e n t e q u a l t o 2 1 0 % o f t h e c u r r e n t r a t i n g s p e c i f i e d in t h e t a b l e .
Q.2 Test for external circuits - paired conductor cable
Equipment supplying power to an external c irc u it paired conductor cable intended to be

connected to the building wire shall be checked as follows.
If current limiting is due to the inherent impedance of the power source, the output current into
any resistive load， including a short-circuit， is measured. The current limit shall not be
exceeded after 60 s o f test.
If current limiting is provided by an overcurrent protective device having a specified

time/current characteristic:
- the time/current characteristic shall show that a current equal to 110 % of the current limit
will be interrupted within 60 min; and
- the output current into any resistive load, including a short-circuit, with the overcurrent
protective device bypassed， measured after 60 s of test， shall not exceed 1 000/U where U
is the output voltage measured in accordance with B.2.3 with all load circuits
disconnected.
If current limiting is provided by an overcurrent protective device that does not have a
specified time/current characteristic:
- the output current into any resistive load， including a short-circuit, shall not exceed the
current limit after 60 s o f test; and
- the output current into any resistive load, including a short-circuit, with the overcurrent
protective device bypassed, measured after 60 s of test, shall not exceed 1 000/U, where
U is the output voltage measured in accordance with B.2.3 with all load circuits
disconnected.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex R
(normative)
Limited short-circuit test
R.1 General
T h is a n n e x d o c u m e n ts th e te s t p r o c e d u r e a n d c o m p lia n c e c rite ria fo r th e lim ite d s h o rt-c irc u it

te s t. T h is te s t d e m o n s tra te s th a t a protective bonding conductor, u s e d in c i r c u i t s p r o t e c t e d
b y a d e v ic e h a v in g a ra tin g n o t e x c e e d i n g 2 5 A , is s u i t a b l e f o r t h e f a u l t c u r r e n t p e r m i t t e d by
th e o ve rcu rre n t p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e , and in d o in g so, te s ts th e in te g rity of a supplementary
safeguard.
R.2 Test setup
The source used to conduct the limited short-circuit test shall be short-circuited at its output
terminals and the current measured to ensure that it can supply at least 1 500 A. This can be
an AC wall socket, generator， power supply or battery.
If the overcurrent protective device is pmvided in the equipment， then this is used for the test.
For AC sources where only one overcurrent protective device is provided in the equipment
and the plug is non-polarisedf the protective device in the building installation is used for the
test and the internal overcurrent protective device is by-passed. The manufacturer shall
specify the device used for the test in the equipment safety instructions.
Where there is no protective device present in the equipment， a suitable overcurrent

protective device shall be chosen. This overcurrent protective device shall be such that it
does not interrupt the fault current before half a cycle has passed. The overcurrent protective
device in the building installation for AC sources, or that specified to be provided externally to
the equipment for DC sources, is used for the test. The manufacturer shall then specify the
device used to conduct the test in the equipment safety instructions.
R.3 Test method
The source shall be applied to the EUT via the m a in s cord supplied or specified by the
equipment manufacturer. Where there is no m a in s cord supplied or specified, a i m length of
2,5 mm2 or 12 AWG shall be used. For DC sources， the cable shall be sized for the maximum
ra te d c u rre n t of the equipment.
To conduct this test a short-circuit in the equipment to the earth connection of the equipment
shall be introduced. The point at which this is done is depending on the equipment. After
consideration o f the equipment construction and circuit diagrams, the short-circuit shall be
introduced between the phase conductor， at the point nearest to the input (the point of lowest
impedance), and the protective bonding path under consideration. There may be more than
one point at which this short-circuit may be applied to determine the worst case.
The p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r is connected to a source capable of supplying an AC or

DC current， as appropriate to the EUT， of 1 500 A under short-circuit conditions， and using a
source voltage equal to the ra te d v o lta g e or any voltage within the ra te d v o lta g e range of
the equipment. In cases where the prospective short-circuit current seen by the equipment is
known, then the source used for test shall be able to supply that current under short-circuit
conditions. The manufacturer shall state the prospective short-circuit current that has been
used in the evaluation in the safety instructions. The overcurrent protective device protecting
the circuit under consideration (in accordance with Clause R.2) is kept in series with the

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r. The power supply cord, if provided or specified, shall remain

connected when conducting the test.
The limited short-circuit test for p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to rs in a potted or conformally

coated assembly is conducted on a potted or coated sample.
The test is conducted two more times (for a total of three times, on a different sample unless
the manufacturer agrees to conduct the test on the same sample). The test is continued until
the overcurrent protective device operates.
R.4 Compliance criteria
At the conclusion of the test, compliance is checked by inspection as follows.
There shall be
- no damage to the p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r;

- no damage to any b a s ic in s u la tio n ， s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n ， or re in fo rc e d
in s u la tio n ;
- no reduction of c le a ra n c e s ， creepage d is ta n c e s and distances through insulation; and
一 no delamination of the printed board.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex S
(normative)
Tests for resistance to heat and fire
NOTE T o x ic fu m e s a re g iv e n o ff d u rin g th e te s ts . T h e te s ts a re u s u a lly c a rrie d o u t e ith e r u n d e r a v e n tila te d h o o d

o r in a w e l l - v e n t i l a t e d r o o m , b u t f r e e f r o m d r a u g h t s t h a t c o u l d i n v a l i d a t e t h e t e s t s .
S.1 Flammability test for fire enclosure and fire barrier materials of equipment
where the steady state power does not exceed 4 000 W
F ire e n c lo s u re and fire barrier materials are tested according to IEC 60695-11-5. The test is
performed on three test specimens.
The following additional requirements apply to the specified clauses of IEC 60695-11-5:2016.
Clause 6 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Test specimen
For fire e n c lo s u re s and fire barriers, each test specimen consists of either a complete fire
e n c lo s u re or fire barrier or a section of the fire e n c lo s u re or fire barrier representing the
thinnest significant wall thickness and including any ventilation opening.
Clause 7 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Flame application times
The values of duration of application of the test flame are as follows:
- the test flame is applied for 10 s;

- if flaming does not exceed 30 s9 the test flame is immediately reapplied for 1 min at the
same point;
- if again flaming does not exceed 30 s, the test flame is immediately reapplied for 2 min at
the same point.
Clause 8 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Conditioning and test conditions
Prior to being tested， the specimens are conditioned in a circulating air oven for a period of
7 days (168 h)r at a temperature 10 K higher than the maximum temperature of the part
measured during the test of 5.4.1.4 or 70 0C， whichever is the higher， and then cooled to room
temperature.
For printed boards, a preconditioning of 24 h at a temperature of 125 °C ± 2 °C in an air

circulating oven and a subsequent cooling period of 4 h at room temperature in a desiccator
over anhydrous calcium chloride is to be applied.
Subclause 9.3 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Application of needle flame
The test flame is applied to an inside surface of the test specimen at a point judged to be
likely to become ignited because o f its proximity to a source of ignition.
If a vertical part is involved, the flame is applied at an angle of approximately 45° from the
vertical.
If ventilation openings are involved， the flame is applied to an edge of an opening， otherwise
to a solid surface. In all cases， the tip of the flame is to be in contact with the test specimen.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
The test is repeated on the remaining two test specimens. If any part being tested is near a
source of ignition at more than one point, each test specimen is tested with the flame applied
to a different point that is near a source of ignition.
Clause 11 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Evaluation of test results
The existing text is replaced by the following.
The test specimens shall comply with all of the following:
- after every application o f the test flame， the test specimen shall not be consumed
completely; and
- after any application of the test flame, any self-sustaining flame shall extinguish within
30 s; and
- no burning of the specified layer or w ra p p in g tis s u e shall occur.
S.2 Flammability test for fire enclosure and fire barrier integrity
Compliance of fire e n c lo s u re and fire barrier integrity is checked according to

IEC 60695-11-5. The test is performed on three test specimens.
For the purpose of this document, the following additional requirements apply to the stated
clauses o f IEC 60695-11-5:2016-
For fire e n c lo s u re s and fire barriers, each test specimen consists of either a complete fire
e n c lo s u re and fire barrier or a section of the fire e n c lo s u re and fire barrier representing the
thinnest significant wall thickness and including any ventilation opening.
Clause 7 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Flame application times
The value of duration of application of the test flame is as follows:
- the test flame is applied for 60 s. Top openings are covered with single layer of cheese
cloth.
Clause 8 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Conditioning and test conditions
Prior to being tested， the specimens are conditioned in a circulating air oven for a period of
7 days (168 h), at a temperature 10 K higher than the maximum temperature of the part
measured during the test of 5.4.1.4 or 70 °C， whichever is the higher， and then cooled to room
temperature.
For printed boards, a preconditioning of 24 h at a temperature o f 125 °C ± 2 °C in an air

circulating oven and a subsequent cooling period of 4 h at room temperature in a desiccator
over anhydrous calcium chloride is to be applied.
Subclause 9.3 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Application of needle flame
The test flame is applied at a distance measured from the closest point of a PIS to the closest
surface point of the test specimen. The application of the flame is measured from the top of
the needle flame burner to the closest surface point, see Figure S.1.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
If a vertical part is involved or if the test specimen drips molten or flaming material during the
application o f the flame, the flame is applied at an angle of approximately 45° from the
vertical.
The test is repeated on the remaining two test specimens. If any part being tested is near a
source of ignition at more than one point, each test specimen is tested with the flame applied
to a different point that is near a source of ignition. In case o f openings having different
dimensions, the test shall be conducted on one opening of each group o f openings with the
same dimensions.
T o p s u rfa c e
Figure S.1 - Top openings / surface of fire enclosure or fire barrier
Clause 11 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Evaluation of test results
The c h e e s e c lo th s h a ll n o t ig n ite .
S.3 Flammability tests for the bottom of a fire enclosure
5.3.1 Mounting of samples
A sample of the complete finished bottom of the fire e n c lo s u re is securely supported in a

horizontal position. A c h e e s e c lo th is placed in one layer over a shallow ， flat-bottomed pan
approximately 50 mm below the sample， and is of sufficient size to cover completely the
pattern of openings in the sample, but not large enough to catch any of the oil that runs over
the edge of the sample or otherwise does not pass through the openings.
Use of a metal screen or a wired-glass e n c lo s u re surrounding the test area is recommended.
A small metal ladle (preferably no more than 65 mm in diameter), with a pouring lip and a long
handle whose longitudinal axis remains horizontal during pouring, is partially filled with 10 ml

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
of diesel fuel oil. The ladle containing the oil is heated and the oil ignited and allowed to burn
for 1 min, at which time all o f the hot flaming oil is poured at the rate of approximately 1 ml/s
in a steady stream onto the centre o f the pattern of openings, from a position approximately
100 mm above the openings.
NOTE “ D i e s e l fu e l o i l ” is r e g a r d e d to b e s im ila r to a m e d iu m v o la tile d i s t i l l a t e f u e l o il h a v i n g a m ass p e r u n it

v o lu m e b e tw e e n 0 ,8 4 5 g /m l a n d 0 ,8 6 5 g /m lf a fla s h p o in t b e tw e e n 4 3 ,5 °C a n d 9 3 ,5 °C a n d a n a v e r a g e c a lo rific
v a lu e o f 3 8 M J/I.
The test is repeated twice at 5 min intervals, using clean ch e e se clo th .
During these tests the ch e e s e c lo th shall not ignite.
S.4 Flammability classification of materials
M a te ria ls a re c la s s ifie d a c c o rd in g to th e b u rn in g b e h a v io u r a n d th e ir a b ility to e x t i n g u i s h , if

i g n i t e d . T e s t s a r e m a d e w i t h t h e m a t e r i a l in t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s u s e d .
The h ie ra rc h ie s o f th e material flammability classes a re g iv e n in T a b l e S.1, T a b le S.2 and

T a b le S.3.
Table S.1 - Foamed materials
Material flammability class ISO standard

H F -1 r e g a r d e d b e tte r th a n HF_2 IS O 9 7 7 2
H F -2 re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n H B F IS O 9 7 7 2
HBF IS O 9 7 7 2
Table S.2 - Rigid materials
Material flammability class IEC standard

5 V A re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n 5 V B IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -2 0
5 V B re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n V -0 IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -2 0
V - 0 r e g a r d e d b e tt e r th a n V -1 IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -1 0
V-1 re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n V -2 IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -1 0
V -2 re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n H B 4 0 IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -1 0
H B 4 0 re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n H B 7 5 IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -1 0
HB75 IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -1 0
Table S.3 - Very thin materials
Material flammability class ISO standard

VTM-0 re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n VTM-1 IS O 9 7 7 3
VTM-1 re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n VTM-2 IS O 9 7 7 3
VTM-2 IS O 9 7 7 3
W hen VTM m a te ria ls a re u s e d , re le v a n t e le c tric a l a n d m e c h a n ic a l re q u ire m e n ts s h o u ld a ls o

b e c o n s id e re d .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
W ood and w o o d -b a se d m a te r ia l w ith a th ic k n e s s o f a t le a s t 6 m m is c o n s i d e r e d to fu lfil th e

V-1 re q u ire m e n t. W o o d -b a s e d m a t e r i a l is m a t e r i a l in w h i c h th e m a in i n g r e d i e n t is m a c h i n e d
n a tu ra l w o o d , c o u p le d w ith a b in d e r.
EXAMPLE W o o d - b a s e d m a te ria ls a re m a te ria ls in c o rp o ra tin g g ro u n d o r c h ip p e d w o o d , s u c h as h a rd fib re b o a rd

o r c h ip b o a rd .
S.5 Flammability test for fire enclosure materials of equipment with a steady
state power exceeding 4 000 W
F ire e n c lo s u re materials are tested according to IEC 60695-11-20:2015, using the plate
procedure of IEC 60695-11-20:2015, 8.3.
For the purpose of this document, the following additional requirements apply to the specified
clauses o f IEC 60695-11-20:2015.
For fire e n c lo s u re s , each test specimen consists o f either a complete fire e n c lo s u re or a

section of the fire e n c lo s u re representing the thinnest significant wall thickness and including
any ventilation opening (plate procedure).
Subclause 8.1 of IEC 60695-11-20:2015 - Conditioning
Prior to being tested, the samples are conditioned in a circulating air oven for a period of
7 days (168 h), at a temperature 10 K higher than the maximum temperature of the part
measured during the test of 5.4.1.4 or 70 °C， whichever is the higher， and then cooled to room
temperature.
Subclause 8.3 of IEC 60695-11-20:2015 - Plate shaped test specimens
The test flame is applied to an inside surface of the test specimen at a point judged to be
likely to become ignited because of its proximity to a source of ignition.
If a vertical part is involved, the flame is applied at an angle of approximately 20° from the
vertical.
If ventilation openings are involved, the flame is applied to an edge o f an opening, otherwise
to a solid surface. In all cases, the tip o f the flame is to be in contact with the test specimen.
The values of duration of application o f the test flame are as follows:
- the test flame is applied for 5 s and removed for 5 s;

- the test flame application and removal is repeated four more times at the same location
(total of five flame applications).
Subclause 8.4 of IEC 60695-11-20:2015 - Classification

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
The test specimens shall comply with all of the following:
- after every application o f the test flame， the test specimen shall not be consumed
completely; and
- after the fifth application o f the test flame, any flame shall extinguish within 1 min.
No burning of the specified cotton indicator shall occur.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex T
(normative)
Mechanical strength tests
T.1 General
In g e n e ra l, th is annex d e s c rib e s a num ber of te s ts th a t a re in v o k e d by th is d o c u m e n t.

C o m p l i a n c e c r i t e r i a a r e s p e c i f i e d in t h e c l a u s e t h a t i n v o k e s a p a r t i c u l a r te s t .
No te s ts a re a p p lie d to h a n d le s , le v e rs , knobs, th e fa c e of CRTs or to tra n s p a re n t or

tra n s lu c e n t c o v e rs o f in d ic a tin g or m e a s u rin g d e v ic e s , u n le s s p a rts at ES3 a re accessible
w h e n t h e h a n d l e , l e v e r , k n o b o r c o v e r is r e m o v e d .
T.2 Steady force test, 10 N
A steady force of 10 N ± 1 N is applied to the component or part under consideration for a

short time duration of approximately 5 s .
The test is conducted by means of the straight unjointed version of the applicable test probe
of Figure V.1 or Figure V.2， applied with a force of 30 N ± 3 N for a short time duration of
approximately 5 s.
The test is conducted by subjecting the external enclosure to a steady force of 100 N 土 10 N
over a circular plane surface 30 mm in diameter for a short time duration of approximately 5 s9
applied in turn to the top, bottom, and sides.
The test is conducted by subjecting the external enclosures to a steady force of 250 N ± 10 N
over a circular plane surface 30 mm in diameter for a short time period of approximately 5 s ,
applied in turn to the top， bottom and sides.
T_6 Enclosure impact test
A sample consisting of the complete enclosure or a portion thereof, representing the largest
unreinforced area is supported in its normal position. A solid, smooth, steel sphere o f 50 mm
土 1 mm in diameter and with a mass of 500 g 土 25 g， is used to perform the following tests:
- on horizontal surfaces, the sphere is to fall freely from rest through a vertical distance of
1 300 mm 土 10 mm onto the sample (see Figure T.1); and
- on vertical surfaces， the sphere is suspended by a cord and swung as a pendulum in order
to apply a horizontal impact， dropping through a vertical distance of 1 300 mm ± 10 mm
onto the sample (see Figure T.1).
For evaluating a part that acts as a fire enclosure only, the test is done as above, but the
vertical distance is 410 mm ± 1 0 mm.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Alternatively horizontal impacts may be simulated on vertical or sloping surfaces by mounting

the sample at 90° to its normal position and applying the vertical impact test instead o f the
pendulum test.
S t e e l b a ll s t a r t
p ositio n
^
S t e e l ball s t a r t
positio n
S
t a
ll
eeIbs
it
i imp 〇)
0
po lon (〇
七 3 3 匚
0)
-€
0
0.
0133
p s
-6 )
T e s t sa m p le
S t e e l b a ll i m p a c t
p osition
R igid s u p p o rtin g s u rfa c e R igid s u p p o rtin g s u rfa c e

////////////// ///////////////////
IEC IEC
Figure T.1 - Impact test using sphere
T.7 Drop test
A sample of the complete equipment is subjected to three impacts that result from being
dropped onto a horizontal surface in positions likely to produce the most adverse results.
The height of the drop shall be:
- 7 5 0 mm 土 10 mm for desk-top equipment and m o va b le e q u ip m e n t;

- 1 000 mm ± 10 mm for h a n d -h e ld e q u ip m e n t, d ire c t p lu g -in e q u ip m e n t and
tra n s p o rta b le e q u ip m e n t;
一 350 mm 土 10 mm for a part acting as a fire e n c lo s u re only of desk-top equipment and
m o va b le e q u ip m e n t;
- 5 0 0 mm ± 1 0 mm for a part acting as a fire e n c lo s u re only of h a n d -h e ld e q uip m e nt,
d ire c t p lu g -in e q u ip m e n t and tra n s p o rta b le e q uip m e nt.
The horizontal surface consists of hardwood at least 13 mm thick, mounted on two layers of
plywood each 18 mm ± 2 mm thick, all supported on a concrete or equivalent non-resilient
floor.
T.8 Stress relief test
Stress relief is checked by the mould stress relief test o f IEC 60695-10-3 or by the test
procedure described below or by the inspection of the construction and the available data
where appropriate.
One sample consisting of the complete equipment, or of the complete e n c lo s u re together

with any supporting framework, is placed in a circulating air oven at a temperature 10 K
higher than the maximum temperature observed on the sample during the heating test of
5.4.1.4.2, but not less than 70 °C9 for a period of 7 /?, then cooled to room temperature.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
For large equipment where it is impractical to condition a complete e n clo su re , a portion of

the e n c lo s u re representative of the complete assembly with regard to thickness and shape,
including any mechanical support members, may be used.
NOTE R e la tiv e h u m id ity n e e d n o t be m a in ta in e d a t a s p e c ific v a lu e d u rin g th is te s t.
T.9 Glass impact test
The test sample is supported over its whole area and shall be subjected to a single impact,
specified in Table T.1. The impact shall be applied in a location representing the centre o f the
glass.
The impact specified shall be caused by allowing a solid, smooth, steel ball of 50 mm ± 1 mm
in diameter and with the mass of 500 g ± 25 g to fall freely from rest through a vertical
distance not less than specified in Table T.1, as shown in Figure T.1, and strike the sample
with the specified impact in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sample.
Table T.1 - Impact force
Part Safeguards against Impact Height

J mm
U n l e s s o t h e r w i s e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w ，a n y g l a s s u s e d E x p o s u re to c la s s 3 e n e rg y 3 ,5 714
a s a safeguard a g a i n s t c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s so urces
except PS3
G la s s on flo o r s ta n d in g e q u ip m e n t S k in -la c e ra tio n s 3 ,5 714
G l a s s o n a ll o t h e r e q u i p m e n t S k in -la c e ra tio n s 2 408
L a m in a te d g la s s u s e d a s a safeguard a g a in s t E x p o s u re to c la s s 3 e n e rg y 1 204
c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s e x c e p t PS 3 so urces
G la s s le n s e s th a t a re p ro v id e d fo r th e a tte n u a tio n E x p o s u re to U V ra d ia tio n 0 ,5 102

o f U V ra d ia tio n
T o a p p l y t h e r e q u i r e d i m p a c t , t h e h e i g h t is c a l c u l a t e d b y H = / (g x m )
w here:
H i s t h e v e r t i c a l d i s t a n c e in m e t r e s w i t h a t o l e r a n c e o f ± 1 0 m m ;
E i s t h e i m p a c t e n e r g y in j o u l e s ;
g is t h e g r a v i t a t i o n a l a c c e l e r a t i o n o f 9 ,8 1 m / s 2;
m is t h e m a s s o f th e s t e e l b a ll in k i l o g r a m s .
T.10 Glass fragmentation test
The test sample is supported over its whole area and precautions shall be taken to ensure
that particles will not be scattered upon fragmentation. Then the test sample is shattered with
a centre punch placed approximately 15 mm in from the midpoint of one o f the longer edges
of the test sample. After a maximum of 5 min of fracture， and without using any aid to vision,
except spectacles if normally worn, the particles are counted in a square of 50 mm side
located approximately at the centre of the area of coarsest fracture and excluding any area
within 15 mm of any edge or hole.
The test sample shall fragment in such a way that the number of particles counted in a square
with sides o f 50 mm shall not be less than 45.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
T.11 Test for telescoping or rod antennas
The end piece of telescoping or rod antennas shall be subjected to a 20 N force along the
major axis of the antenna for a period of 1 min. In addition, if the end piece is attached by
screw threads， a loosening torque is to be applied to the end pieces of five additional
samples. The torque is to be gradually applied with the rod fixed. When the specific torque is
reached, it is to be maintained for no more than 15 s. The holding time for any one sample
shall be not less than 5 s and the average holding time of the five samples shall be not less
than 8 s.
The value of torque is given in Table T.2.
Table T.2 - Torque values for end-piece test
End-piece diameter Torque

mm Nm
< 8 ,0 0 ,3
> 8 ,0 0 ,6

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex U
(normative)
Mechanical strength of CRTs and protection

against the effects of implosion
U.1 General
T h is annex s p e c ifie s m e c h a n ic a l s tre n g th of CRTs, how to p ro te c t a g a in s t th e e ffe c ts of

im p lo s io n a n d h o w a p ro te c tiv e s c re e n c a n w ith s ta n d m e c h a n ic a l fo rc e s .
CRTs w ith a m a x im u m fa c e d im e n s io n e x c e e d in g 160 m m s h a ll be e ith e r in trin s ic a lly

p ro te c te d w ith r e s p e c t to e ffe c ts o f im p lo s io n a n d to m e c h a n ic a l im p a c t, o r th e enclosure of
th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll p ro v id e a d e q u a te p ro te c tio n a g a in s t th e e ffe c ts of an im p lo s io n o f th e
CRT.
T h e fa c e o f a n o n -in trin s ic a lly p ro te c te d C R T s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w ith a n e ffe c tiv e s c r e e n th a t

ca n n o t be re m o ve d by hand. If a s e p a r a t e scre e n o f g la s s is u s e d , it s h a l l n o t c o n ta c t th e
s u rfa c e o f th e C R T .
T h e C R T , o th e r th a n th e fa c e o f a n in tr in s ic a lly p r o te c te d C R T , s h a ll n o t b e accessible to an
ordinary person.
A p ro te c tiv e film a tta c h e d to th e fa c e p la te of th e p ic tu re tu b e as p a rt of th e im p lo s io n

p r o t e c t io n s y s t e m s h a ll b e c o v e r e d o n a ll e d g e s b y t h e enclosure o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
If t h e e q u i p m e n t is p r o v i d e d w i t h a C R T w i t h p r o t e c t i v e f i l m a tta c h e d to th e fa c e p la te a s p a rt
o f th e s a fe ty im p lo s io n s y s te m , an instructional safeguard s h a ll b e p r o v id e d in a c c o r d a n c e
w ith C la u s e F .5 :
- e le m e n t 1a: n o t a v a ila b le
- e le m e n t 2: “W a r n in g ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t
- e l e m e n t 3: “ R is k o f in ju r y ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
一 e le m e n t 4: “T h e CRT in th is e q u ip m e n t uses a p ro te c tiv e film on th e fa c e . T h is film

s h a ll not be re m o ve d as it se rve s a s a fe ty fu n c tio n and re m o va l w ill
in c r e a s e th e ris k o f in ju r y ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
The instructional safeguard s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d in t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s .
Compliance is checked by inspection, by measurement, and by the tests of:
- I EC 61965 for intrinsically protected CRTs， including those having integral protective
screens;
- Cl auses U.2 and U.3 for equipment having non-intrinsically protected CRTs; and
- Annex V for application of probes for the e n clo su re .
N O T E 1 A p i c t u r e t u b e C R T i s c o n s i d e r e d t o b e i n t r i n s i c a l l y p r o t e c t e d w i t h r e s p e c t t o t h e e f f e c t s o f i m p l o s i o n if,
w h e n i t i s c o r r e c t l y m o u n t e d , n o a d d i t i o n a l p r o t e c t i o n is n e c e s s a r y .
NOTE 2 T o f a c i l i t a t e t h e t e s t s , t h e C R T m a n u f a c t u r e r is r e q u e s t e d to i n d i c a t e t h e m o s t v u ln e ra b le a re a o n th e
C R T s to b e te s te d .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
U.2 Test method and compliance criteria for non-intrinsically protected CRTs
The equipment， with the CRT and the protective screen in position， is placed on a horizontal
support at a height of (750 ± 50) mm above the floor， or directly on the floor if the equipment
is obviously intended to be positioned on the floor.
The CRT is imploded inside the e n c lo s u re of the equipment by the following method.
Cracks are propagated in the envelope of each CRT. An area on the side or on the face of
each CRT is scratched with a diamond stylus and this area is repeatedly cooled with liquid
nitrogen or the like until a fracture occurs. To prevent the cooling liquid from flowing away
from the test area， a dam o f modelling clay or the like should be used.
NOTE S u i t a b l e s c r a t c h p a t t e r n s a r e f o u n d in F i g u r e 6 o f I E C 6 1 9 6 5 : 2 0 0 3 .
After this test, within 5 s of the initial fracture, no particle (a single piece of glass having a
mass greater than 0,025 g) shall have passed a 250 mm high barrier， placed on the floor，
500 mm from the projection of the front of the equipment.
U.3 Protective screen
A p r o te c tiv e s c r e e n s h a ll b e a d e q u a t e ly s e c u r e d a n d r e s is t a n t to m e c h a n ic a l fo r c e s .
Compliance is checked by the tests o f Clause T.3, without cracking of the protective screen or
loosening o f its mounting.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex V
(normative)
Determination of accessible parts
V.1 A c c e s s ib le p arts o f e q u ip m en t
V.1.1 General
An accessible p a rt o f an e q u i p m e n t is a p a rt th a t can be to u c h e d by a body p a rt- F o r th e

p u rp o s e s o f d e te rm in in g a n accessible p a r t , a b o d y p a r t is r e p r e s e n t e d b y o n e o r m o r e o f th e
s p e c ifie d te s t p ro b e s .
Accessible p a rts o f a n e q u ip m e n t m a y in c lu d e p a rts b e h in d a d o o r, p a n e l, r e m o v a b le c o v e r,

e tc . th a t c a n b e o p e n e d w ith o u t th e u s e o f a tool.
Accessible p a rts do not in c lu d e th o s e th a t becom e accessible when flo o r s ta n d in g

e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g a m a s s e x c e e d i n g 4 0 k g is t i l t e d .
F o r e q u ip m e n t in t e n d e d f o r b u ild in g - in o r r a c k - m o u n t in g , o r f o r s u b a s s e m b lie s a n d th e lik e f o r

in c o rp o ra tio n in la rg e r e q u ip m e n t, accessible p a rts do not in c lu d e th o s e th a t a re not
accessible when th e e q u ip m e n t or s u b a s s e m b ly is in s ta lle d a c c o rd in g to th e m e th o d of
m o u n t i n g o r i n s t a l l a t i o n s p e c i f i e d in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s .
A p a r t is c o n s i d e r e d accessible if th e in s tr u c tio n s o r m a r k in g s in te n d e d to b e fo llo w e d r e q u ir e

th a t a p e rso n p h y s ic a lly c o n ta c ts th a t p a rt. T h is a p p lie s w ith o u t te s t and irre s p e c tiv e of
w h e th e r a tool is r e q u i r e d t o g a i n a c c e s s .
V.1.2 Test method 1 - Surfaces and openings tested with jointed test probes
For surfaces and openings, the following jointed test probe is applied, without appreciable
force and in any possible position, to the surfaces and openings of the equipment:
- the test probe o f Figure V. 1 for equipment that is likely to be a c c e s s ib le to children;

NOTE 1 E q u i p m e n t i n t e n d e d f o r u s e in h o m e s , s c h o o l s , p u b l i c a n d s i m i l a r l o c a t i o n s is e q u i p m e n t g e n e r a l l y
c o n s id e re d to be accessible to c h ild re n , s e e a ls o C la u s e F.4.
- the test probe of Figure V.2 for equipment that is not likely to be a c c e s s ib le to children.
Where entry behind a door, panel， removable cover， etc. is possible without the use o f a tool,
or entry is directed by manufacturer instructions or marking， with or without the use of a tool,
the test probe is applied to surfaces and openings in those areas.
Where the entire probe passes through a large opening (allowing entry of an arm but not of a
shoulder), the probe shall be applied to all parts within a hemisphere with radius of 762 mm.
The probe handle shall point along a path towards the large opening to simulate the hand on
the end of the arm extending through the large opening. The plane of the hemisphere shall be
the outside plane o f the opening. Any part outside the 762 mm radius hemisphere is deemed
not a cce ssib le .
NOTE 2 T h e e q u ip m e n t c a n b e d is m a n tle d to p e r fo rm th is te s t.
V.1.3 Test method 2 - Openings tested with straight unjointed test probes
Openings preventing access to a part by the applicable jointed test probe of Figure V.1 or
Figure V.2 are further tested by means of a straight unjointed version of the respective test
probe applied with a force of 30 N. If the unjointed probe enters the openings, test method 1
is repeated， except that the applicable jointed version of the test probe is pushed through the
opening using any necessary force up to 30 N.

IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018
R25
IEC
T o le ra n c e s on d im e n s io n s w ith o u t s p e c ific to le ra n c e s :
a n g le s : 土 15r
o n ra d ii: ± 0,1 m m
T o le ra n c e s on lin e a r d im e n s io n s w ith o u t s p e c ific to le ra n c e s :
< 15 m m :
0,1 _
> 1 5 mm < 25 m m : ± 0,1 m m
> 25 mm: 土 0 ,3 m m
M a te ria l o f th e te s t p ro b e : h e a t-tre a te d s te e l, fo r e x a m p le .
Figure V.1 - Jointed test probe for equipment likely to be accessible to children

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
050
S e c tio n A -A
S e c tio n B -B
eg參
o
+i
o
CM
H a n d le
C y lin d ric a l
ie c
L i n e a r d i m e n s i o n s in m i l l i m e t r e s
T o le ra n c e s o n d im e n s io n s w ith o u t s p e c ific to le ra n c e s :
1 4 。a n d 3 7 ° a n g l e s : 土 1 5 '
o n r a d ii: ± 0,1 m m
on lin e a r d im e n s io n s :
< 15 m m :
mm
> 15 m m < 2 5 m m : ± 0,1 m m
> 25 mm: 士 0 ,3 m m
NOTE T h i s j o i n t e d t e s t p r o b e is t a k e n f r o m F i g u r e 2 , t e s t p r o b e B o f IE C 6 1 0 3 2 : 1 9 9 7 .
Figure V.2 - Jointed test probe for equipment not likely to be accessible to children

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
V.1.4 T est m ethod 3 - P lugs, ja c k s , c o n n e c to rs
The blunt probe of Figure V.3 is applied without appreciable force and in any possible position
to specified parts.
N o n - c o n d u c tiv e m a te ria l
"6 ，〇 ? ，?5
IEC
F igure V.3 - B lu n t probe
V.1.5 T e st m ethod 4 - S lo t o p e n in g s
The wedge probe of Figure V.4 is applied as specified.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
T o le ra n c e s on lin e a r d im e n s io n s w ith o u t s p e c ific to le ra n c e s :
< 25 mm: 士 0 ,1 3 m m
> 25 mm: 土 0 ,3 m m
NOTE T h e th ic k n e s s o f th e p ro b e v a rie s lin e a rly , w ith s lo p e c h a n g e s a t th e fo llo w in g p o in ts a lo n g th e p ro b e :
Distance from probe tip Probe thickness

mm mm
0 2
12 4
180 24
F igure V.4 - W edge probe
V.1.6 T est m ethod 5 - T e rm in a ls in te n d e d to be used by an o rd in a ry pe rso n
The rigid test wire of the test probe of Figure V.5 is inserted into the applicable opening with a
force up to 1 N 土 0,1 N and with the length limited to 20 mm 土 0,2 mm. While inserted, the
probe is moved in any angle with minimal force.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
S p h e r e 35 ± 0,2
NOTE T h i s p r o b e is t a k e n f r o m F i g u r e 4 o f I E C 6 1 0 3 2 : 1 9 9 7 .
F igure V.5 - T e rm in a l probe
V .2 A c c e s s ib le part c rite rio n
If a part can be touched by the specified probe, then the part is a cce ssib le .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex W
(in fo rm a tiv e )
C o m p a r i s o n o f t e r m s i n t r o d u c e d in t h i s d o c u m e n t
W.1 G eneral
T h is d o c u m e n t in tr o d u c e s n e w s a fe ty te r m s a s s o c ia te d w ith th e n e w s a fe ty c o n c e p ts .
T h i s a n n e x i d e n t i f i e s t h e r e l e v a n t t e r m s i n t h i s d o c u m e n t a n d , w h e r e d i f f e r e n t ，c o m p a r e t h e m
to th e e q u iv a le n t IE C /T C 6 4 3 b a s ic s a fe ty p u b lic a tio n s a n d o th e r r e le v a n t s a fe ty p u b lic a tio n s .
T e rm s n o t in t h e t a b l e s b e l o w a r e e i t h e r t h e s a m e o r s u b s t a n t i a l l y t h e s a m e a s in o t h e r I E C
s ta n d a rd s .
W .2 C o m p a ris o n o f te rm s
In th e T a b le s W .1 to W .6 b e lo w , th e te x t q u o te d fro m an IE C s ta n d a rd is in n o rm a l fo n t.
R e m a r k s a b o u t IE C 6 2 3 6 8 -1 a r e in i t a l i c f o n t .
3 IE C /T C 6 4 : E le c tr ic a l in s ta lla tio n s a n d p r o te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tr ic s h o c k . C lic k o n th e IE C w e b s ite fo r a lis t o f

p u b lic a tio n s is s u e d by T C 64.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table W.1 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60664-1:2007 and IEC 62368-1
IEC 60664-1:2007 IEC 62368-1
3.2 3.3.12.1
clearance clearance
s h o rte s t d is ta n c e in a ir b e tw e e n tw o s h o rte s t d is ta n c e in a ir b e tw e e n tw o
c o n d u c tiv e p a rts c o n d u c tiv e p a rts
3.3 3.3.12.2
creepage d ista n ce creepage d ista n ce
s h o rte s t d is ta n c e a lo n g th e s u rfa c e of a s h o rte s t d is ta n c e a lo n g th e s u rfa c e of an
s o lid in s u la tin g m a te ria l b e tw e e n tw o in s u la tin g m a te ria l b e tw e e n tw o c o n d u c tiv e
c o n d u c tiv e p a rts p a rts
3.4 3.3.5.6
s o lid in s u la tio n s o lid in s u la tio n
s o lid in s u la tin g m a te ria l in te r p o s e d b e tw e e n in s u la tio n c o n s is tin g e n tire ly of s o lid
tw o c o n d u c tiv e p a rts m a te ria l
3.5 3.3.14.8
w o rk in g v o lta g e w o rk in g v o lta g e
h ig h e s t R M S v a lu e o f th e A C or DC v o lta g e h ig h e s t v o lta g e a cro ss any p a rtic u la r
a cro ss any p a rtic u la r in s u la tio n w h ic h can in s u la tio n th a t can occur when th e
occur when th e e q u ip m e n t is s u p p lie d at e q u ip m e n t is rated v o lta g e o r
s u p p lie d at
ra te d v o lta g e a n y v o lta g e in t h e rated v o lta g e range
u n d e r norm al o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s
3.9 3.3.10.4
rated v o lta g e rated v o lta g e
v a lu e of v o lta g e a s s ig n e d by th e v a lu e of v o lta g e a s s ig n e d by th e
m a n u fa c tu re r, to a c o m p o n e n t, d e v ic e or m a n u fa c tu re r to a c o m p o n e n t, d e v ic e or
e q u ip m e n t and to w h ic h o p e ra tio n and e q u ip m e n t and to w h ic h o p e ra tio n and
p e rfo rm a n c e c h a ra c te ris tic s a re re fe rre d p e rfo rm a n c e c h a ra c te ris tic s a re re fe rre d
3.13 3.3.6.8
p o llu tio n degree p o llu tio n degree
n u m e ra l c h a ra c te riz in g th e e x p e c te d n u m e ra l c h a ra c te ris in g th e e x p e c te d
p o llu tio n o f th e m ic r o - e n v iro n m e n t p o llu tio n o f th e m ic r o - e n v iro n m e n t
3.19.1 3.3.6.15
ty p e te s t typ e te s t
te s t of one or m o re d e v ic e s m ade to a te s t on a re p re s e n ta tiv e s a m p le w ith th e
c e rta in d e s ig n to s h o w th a t th e d e s ig n m e e ts o b je c tiv e o f d e te rm in in g if, a s d e s i g n e d and
c e rta in s p e c ific a tio n s m a n u fa c tu re d , it c a n m e e t th e re q u ire m e n ts
o f th is d o c u m e n t
3.9.2 3.3.14.2
rated im p u ls e vo lta g e m ains tra n s ie n t v o lta g e
im p u ls e w ith s ta n d v o lta g e v a lu e a s s ig n e d by h ig h e s t p e a k v o lta g e e x p e c te d a t th e m ains
th e m a n u fa c tu re r to th e e q u ip m e n t or to a in p u t to th e e q u ip m e n t, a r is in g fr o m e x te rn a l
p a rt of it, c h a ra c te riz in g th e s p e c ifie d tra n s ie n ts
w ith s ta n d c a p a b ility o f its in s u la t io n a g a in s t
tra n s ie n t o v e rv o lta g e s

旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 -1 :2 0 1 8 © IE C 2 0 1 8 - 3^M -
IEC 60664-1:2007 IEC 62368-1
3.17.1 3.3.5.3
fu n c tio n a l in s u la tio n fu n c tio n a l in s u la tio n
i n s u l a t i o n b e t w e e n c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s w h i c h is i n s u l a t i o n b e t w e e n c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s w h i c h is
n e c e s s a r y o n ly fo r th e p ro p e r fu n c tio n in g of n e c e s s a r y o n ly fo r th e p ro p e r fu n c tio n in g of
th e e q u ip m e n t th e e q u ip m e n t
3.17.2 3.3.5.1
b a sic in s u la tio n b a sic in s u la tio n
in s u la tio n of h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rts w h ic h in s u la tio n to p ro v id e a b a sic safeg uard
p ro v id e s b a s ic p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k
3.17.3 3.3.5.7
s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n
in d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n a p p lie d in a d d i t i o n t o in d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n a p p lie d in a d d i t i o n t o
b a s ic in s u la tio n fo r fa u lt p ro te c tio n b a sic in s u la tio n to p ro v id e s u p p le m e n ta ry
sa fe g u a rd f o r fa u lt p ro te c tio n a g a in s t
e le c tric s h o c k
3.17.4 3.3.5.2
d o u b le in s u la tio n d o u b le in s u la tio n
in s u la tio n c o m p ris in g b o th b a s ic in s u la tio n in s u la tio n c o m p ris in g b a sic in s u la tio n
b o th
a n d s u p p le m e n ta r y in s u la tio n and s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n
3.17.5 3.3.5.5
re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n
in s u la tio n of h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rts w h ic h s in g le in s u la tio n s y s te m th a t p ro v id e s a
p ro v id e s a d e g re e of p ro te c tio n a g a in s t d e g re e of p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric shock
e le c tric shock e q u iv a le n t to d o u b le e q u iv a le n t to d o u b le in s u la tio n
in s u la tio n
3.19.2 3.3.6.10
ro u tin e te s t ro u tin e te s t
te s t to w h ic h each in d iv id u a l d e v ic e is te s t to w h ic h each in d iv id u a l d e v ic e is
s u b je c te d d u rin g or a fte r m a n u fa c tu re to s u b je c te d d u rin g or a fte r m a n u fa c tu re to
a s c e rta in w h e th e r it c o m p lie s w ith c e rta in a s c e rta in w h e th e r it c o m p lie s w ith c e rta in
c rite ria c rite ria
3.19.3 3.3.6.11
s a m p lin g te s t s a m p lin g te s t
te s t o n a n u m b e r o f d e v ic e s ta k e n a t ra n d o m te s t o n a n u m b e r o f d e v ic e s ta k e n a t ra n d o m
fro m a b a tc h fro m a b a tc h

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table W.2 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 61140:2016 and IEC 62368-1
IEC 61140:2016 te rm s IEC 62368-1 te rm s
For consistency throughout the document

the term "safeguard” is used to describe the
device or scheme that provides protection
against an energy source.
3.1.1 3.3.11.2
b a sic p ro te c tio n b a sic sa fe g u a rd
p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k u n d e r fa u lt- sa fe g u a rd t h a t p r o v i d e s p r o t e c t i o n u n d e r
fre e c o n d itio n s n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d u n d e r
a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s w h e n e v e r
a n e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g p a in o r
i n j u r y is p r e s e n t in t h e e q u i p m e n t
3.10.2 3.3.11.17
s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n s u p p le m e n ta ry sa fe g u a rd
In d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n a p p lie d in a d d i t i o n t o sa fe g u a rd a p p l i e d i n a d d i t i o n t o t h e b a sic
b a s ic in s u la tio n , fo r fa u lt p ro te c tio n sa fe g u a rd t h a t i s o r b e c o m e s o p e r a t i o n a l in
t h e e v e n t o f f a i l u r e o f t h e b a sic sa fe g u a rd
3.4 The term live p a rt is not used.

live part
c o n d u c to r o r c o n d u c tiv e p a rt in te n d e d to b e In accordance with the IEC 61140 definition,
e n e rg iz e d in n o rm a l o p e ra tio n , in c lu d in g a ES1, ES2 and ES3 are all live parts
n e u tra l c o n d u c to r, but by c o n v e n tio n not a
PEN c o n d u c to r or PEM c o n d u c to r or PEL
c o n d u c to r
N o te 1 to e n try: T h is concept does not n e c e s s a rily

im p ly a ris k o f e le c tr ic s h o c k .
N o te 2 to e n try : F o r d e fin itio n s o f P E M and PEL see

IE V 1 9 5 -0 2 -1 3 a n d 1 9 5 -0 2 -1 4 .
3.5 The term hazardous-live-part is not used.

h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rt
liv e p a rt th a t, u n d e r c e rta in c o n d itio n s , can In accordance with the IEC 61140 definition,
g iv e a h a rm fu l e le c tric s h o c k an ES3 source is a hazardous-live-part.
N o te 1 to e n try : In c a s e o f h i g h v o l t a g e , a h a z a r d o u s
v o lta g e m a y be p re s e n t on th e s u rfa c e o f s o lid
i n s u l a t i o n . In s u c h a c a s e t h e s u r f a c e is c o n s i d e r e d t o
be a h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rt.
3.26 No equivalent term. See ES1.

e x tra -lo w -v o lta g e (ELV)
any v o lta g e not e x c e e d in g th e re le v a n t
v o l t a g e l i m i t s p e c i f i e d in I E C T S 6 1 2 0 1
3.26.1
SELV system ES1
an e le c tric a l s y s te m in w h ic h th e v o lta g e ES1 is a v o l t a g e n o t e x c e e d in g th e re le v a n t
cannot exceed ELV: v o lta g e lim it s p e c ifie d in IE C T S 6 1 2 0 1 or a
cu rre n t not e x c e e d in g th e re le v a n t cu rre n t
- u n d e r n o rm a l c o n d itio n s ; a n d l i m i t s p e c i f i e d in I E C T S 6 0 4 7 9 - 1
- under s in g le -fa u lt c o n d itio n s , in c lu d in g

- u n d e r n o rm a l c o n d itio n s ; a n d
e a r t h f a u l t s in o t h e r c i r c u i t s
- under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
3.28
lim ite d -c u rre n t-s o u rc e ES1
d e v ic e s u p p ly in g e le c tric a l e n e rg y in an ES1 is a v o l t a g e n o t e x c e e d in g th e re le v a n t
e le c tric c irc u it v o lta g e lim it s p e c ifie d in IE C T S 6 1 2 0 1 or a
cu rre n t not e x c e e d in g th e re le v a n t cu rre n t
- wi t h p ro te c tiv e -s e p a ra tio n fro m h a za r l i m i t s p e c i f i e d in I E C T S 6 0 4 7 9 - 1
d o u s -liv e -p a rts , a n d
- u n d e r n o rm a l c o n d itio n s ; a n d
- that e n s u re s th a t th e s te a d y s ta te to u c h
cu rre n t and ch a rg e a re lim ite d to non- - under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s .
h a z a r d o u s le v e ls , u n d e r n o rm a l a n d fa u lt
c o n d itio n s
5.1.6
L im ita tio n o f ste a d y state to u c h c u rre n t
ES1 current limit is 0,5 mA AC and 2 mA DC
and charge
L im ita tio n o f s te a d y s ta te to u c h cu rre n t and
ch a rg e s h a ll p re ve n t p e rso n s or a n im a ls ES2 current limit is 5 mA AC， 25 mA DC
fro m b e in g s u b je c te d to v a lu e s of s te a d y (these values are taken from
s ta te to u c h cu rre n t and ch a rg e lia b le to be IEC TS 60479-1)
h a z a rd o u s o r p e rc e p tib le .
N o te 1 to e n try: For person s, th e fo llo w in g v a lu e s

(A C v a lu e s fo r fr e q u e n c ie s u p to 1 0 0 H z ) a re g iv e n as
g u id a n c e :
- A s te a d y s ta te c u rre n t flo w in g b e tw e e n
s im u lta n e o u s ly a c c e s s ib le c o n d u c tiv e p a rts
t h r o u g h a p u r e r e s i s t a n c e o f 2 0 0 0 f2 n o t
e x c e e d in g th e th re s h o ld o f p e rc e p tio n , A C 0 ,5 m A
o r D C 2 m A a re re c o m m e n d e d .
— V a lu e s n o t e x c e e d in g th e th re s h o ld o f p a in A C
3 ,5 m A o r D C 10 m A m a y b e s p e c ifie d .
N o e q u iv a le n t te rm 3.3.11.12
sa fe g u a rd
p h y s ic a l p a rt or s y s te m or in s tru c tio n
s p e c if ic a lly p r o v id e d to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d
o f in ju ry , o r, fo r fire , to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d
o f ig n itio n o r s p r e a d o f fire
No e q u iv a le n t te rm . Based on d o u b le 3.3.11.2
in s u la tio n d o u b le sa fe g u a rd
sa fe g u a rd c o m p ris in g b o th a b a sic
sa fe g u a rd a n d a s u p p le m e n ta ry sa fe g u a rd
No e q u iv a le n t te rm . Based on re in fo rc e d 3.3.11.12
in s u la tio n re in fo rc e d sa fe g u a rd
s i n g l e sa fe g u a rd t h a t is p r o v i d e s p ro te c tio n
under
- nor mal o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,

- abnor mal o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , and
- si ngl e fa u lt c o n d itio n s .
N o e q u iv a le n t te r m . R o u g h ly e q u iv a le n t to a 3.3.11.5
w a rn in g in s tru c tio n a l safeg uard
a n in s tru c tio n in v o k in g s p e c ifie d b e h a v io u r

- 3 之\4 - IE C 6 2 3 6 8 - 1 :2 0 1 8 ® IE C 2 0 1 8
p re c a u tio n a ry sa fe g u a rd
in s tru c te d pe rso n b e h a v i o u r to a v o id
c o n ta c t w ith o r e x p o s u r e to a c la s s 2 e n e r g y
so u rce based on s u p e rv is io n o r in s tru c tio n s
g iv e n b y a s k ille d person
s k ill sa fe g u a rd
s k ille d pe rso n b e h a v io u r to a v o id c o n ta c t
w ith or e xp o su re to a c la s s 2 or c la s s 3
e n e rg y so u rce based on e d u c a tio n and
e x p e rie n c e
The te rm n o rm a l c o n d itio n is used in 3.3.7.4

IE C 6 1 1 4 0 , b u t n o t d e fin e d n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n
m o d e o f o p e ra tio n th a t re p re s e n ts a s c lo s e ly
a s p o s s ib le th e ra n g e o f n o rm a l u s e th a t ca n
re a s o n a b ly be e x p e c te d
a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n
te m p o ra ry o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n th a t is not a
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n a n d i s n o t a
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n o f t h e e q u i p m e n t
its e lf
The te rm s in g le f a u l t is u s e d in IE C 6 1 1 4 0 , 3.3.7.9
b u t n o t d e fin e d s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n
f a u l t u n d e r no rm al o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n o f
a s i n g l e sa fe g u a rd ( b u t n o t a re in fo rc e d
s a fe g u a rd ) o r o f a s i n g l e c o m p o n e n t o r a
d e v ic e

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table W.3 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60950-1:2005 and IEC 62368-1
IEC 60950-1:2005 te rm s IEC 62368-1 te rm s
1.2.8.8 5.2.1.1
SELV c irc u it ES1
s e co n d a ry c irc u it th a t is so d e s ig n e d and ES1 i s a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e
p ro te c te d th a t under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g w i t h to u c h c u rre n t o r p ro s p e c tiv e to u c h
c o n d itio n s and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s , its v o lta g e l e v e l s
v o lta g e s d o n o t e x c e e d a s a fe v a lu e
- not e x c e e d in g ES1 lim its u n d e r
• n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , and
• a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,
and
• s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s of a
c o m p o n e n t, d e v ic e or in s u la tio n not
s e rv in g a s a sa fe g u a rd ; and
n o t e x c e e d in gES2 l i m i t s u n d e r s in g le fa u lt
c o n d itio n s o f a b a sic sa fe g u a rd o r o f a
s u p p le m e n ta ry sa fe g u a rd .
1.2.8.11
TNV c irc u it See detailed TNV classes for comparison.
c i r c u i t t h a t is in t h e e q u i p m e n t a n d t o w h i c h
t h e a c c e s s i b l e a r e a o f c o n t a c t is l i m i t e d a n d
t h a t i s s o d e s i g n e d a n d p r o t e c t e d t h a t ，u n d e r
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s and s in g le fa u lt
c o n d itio n s (s e e 1 .4 .1 4 o f IE C 6 0 9 5 0 - 1 :2 0 0 5 ) ,
th e v o lta g e s do not exceed s p e c ifie d lim it
v a lu e s
A TNV c irc u it is c o n s id e re d to be a
s e co n d a ry c irc u it in th e m e a n in g of th is
d o c u m e n t.
1.2.8.12
TNV-1 c irc u it
ES 1 on w h ic h tra n s ie n ts a c c o rd in g to
T N V c irc u it
T a b le 13, ID n u m b e rs 1, 2 and 3 a re
p o s s ib le
- w h o s e n o rm a l o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s d o n o t
e x c e e d th e lim its fo r a n S E L V c ir c u it
NOTE T h e e le c tric a l c h a ra c te ris tic s a re n o t id e n tic a l
u n d e r n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d
to T N V c irc u its b u t w ill g iv e e q u iv a le n t le v e l o f s a fe ty .
- O n w h ic h o v e rv o lta g e s fro m
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk s a n d c a b le
d is trib u tio n s y s te m s a re p o s s ib le

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
IEC 60950-1:2005 term s IEC 62368-1 te rm s
1.2.8.13
TNV-2 c irc u it ES2
T N V c irc u it
ES2 is a c la s s 2 e le c tric a l e n e rg y so u rce
- whose n o rm a l o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s e x c e e d w h e re
th e lim its fo r an SELV c irc u it under
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d - bot h th e p ro s p e c tiv e to u c h v o lta g e a n d
th e to u c h c u rre n t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t s f o r
- w h i c h is n o t s u b j e c t t o o v e r v o l t a g e s f r o m
E S 1 ; and
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk s
- under
• n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , and
• a b norm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,

and
• s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s ,
e ith e r th ep ro s p e c tiv e to u c h v o lta g e o r th e
to u c h c u rre n t d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t fo r
ES2_
NOTE T h e e le c tric a l c h a ra c te ris tic s a re n o t id e n tic a l

to T N V c ir c u its b u t w ill g iv e e q u iv a le n t le v e l o f s a fe ty .
1.2.8.14
TNV-3 c irc u it ES 2 on w h ic h tra n s ie n ts a c c o rd in g to
T N V c irc u it T a b le 13, ID n u m b e rs 1, 2 and 3 a re
p o s s ib le
- whose n o rm a l o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s e x c e e d
th e lim its fo r an SELV c irc u it under NOTE T h e e le c tric a l c h a ra c te ris tic s a re n o t id e n tic a l
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d to T N V c irc u its b u t w ill g iv e e q u iv a le n t le v e l o f s a fe ty .
- on w h ic h o v e rv o lta g e s fro m
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk s and c a b le
d is tr ib u tio n s y s te m s a re p o s s ib le
1.2.13.6 3.3.S.2
USER o rd in a ry person
a n y p e rs o n , o th e r th a n a s e rv ic e p e rs o n p e rso n who is n e i t h e r a s k ille d pe rso n nor
an in s tru c te d person
The term user in this document is the same
as the term operator and the two terms can
be interchanged
1.2.13.7 See 3.3.8.2

o p e ra to r
s e e u se r (1 .2 .1 3 .6 o f IE C 6 0 9 5 0 - 1 :2 0 0 5 )

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
1.2.13.8 3.3.1.1
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk e xte rn a l c irc u it
m e ta llic a lly te rm in a te d tra n s m is s io n m e d iu m e le c tric a l c irc u it th a t is e x te rn a l to th e
in te n d e d fo r c o m m u n ic a tio n b e tw e e n e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t m ains
e q u ip m e n t th a t m a y be lo c a te d in s e p a ra te
b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g : N o te 1 to e n try : An external circuit is c l a s s i f i e d as
ES1, ES2 or ES3, and PS1, PS2, or PS3.
- t he m a in s s y s te m fo r s u p p ly ,
tr a n s m is s io n a n d d is tr ib u tio n o f e le c tric a l
p o w e r, if used as a te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
tr a n s m is s io n m e d iu m ;
- c a b l e d is trib u tio n s y s te m s ;
- SELV c irc u its c o n n e c tin g u n its of

in fo rm a tio n te c h n o lo g y e q u ip m e n t
N o te 1 to e n try : T h e te rm te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk
i s d e f i n e d in t e r m s o f i t s f u n c t i o n a l i t y , n o t i t s e l e c t r i c a l
c h a ra c te ris tic s , a te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk is not
its e lf d e fin e d a s b e in g e ith e r a n S E L V c irc u it o r a T N V
c irc u it. O n ly th e c irc u its in th e e q u ip m e n t are so
c la s s ifie d .
N o te 2 to e n try: A te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk may

be:
- p u b lic ly o r p riv a te ly o w n e d :
一 s u b je c t to tra n s ie n t o v e rv o lta g e s due to

a tm o s p h e ric d is c h a rg e s and fa u lts in power
d is trib u tio n s y s te m s :
一 s u b je c t to lo n g itu d in a l (c o m m o n m o d e ) v o lta g e s
in d u c e d fro m n e a rb y power lin e s o r e le c tric
tr a c t io n lin e s .
N o te 3 to e n try: E x a m p le s of te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
n e tw o rk s a re :
一 a p u b lic s w itc h e d te le p h o n e n e tw o rk :
- a p u b lic d a ta n e tw o rk :
一 an in te g ra te d S e r v ic e s D ig ita l N e tw o rk (IS D N );
- a p riv a te n e tw o rk w ith e le c tric a l in te rfa c e

c h a ra c te ris tic s s im ila r to th e a b o v e .
None 3.3.8.1
in s tru c te d person
p e rs o n in s tru c te d o r s u p e rv is e d by a s k ille d
p e rso n as to e n e rg y so u rce s and who can
re s p o n s ib ly u s e e q u ip m e n t sa fe g u a rd s and
p re c a u tio n a ry sa fe g u a rd s w ith re sp e ct to
th o s e e n e rg y s o u rc e s

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
1.2.13.5
3.3.8.3
s e rv ic e person
s k ille d person
p e rso n h a v in g a p p ro p ria te te c h n ic a l tra in in g
p e rso n w ith re le v a n t e d u c a tio n or
and e x p e rie n c e n e ce ssa ry to be a w a re of
e x p e rie n c e to e n a b le h im o r h e r to id e n tify
h a z a rd s to w h ic h th a t p e rso n m ay be
h a z a rd s and to ta k e a p p ro p ria te a c tio n s to
exposed in p e rfo rm in g a ta s k and of
re d u ce th e lik e lih o o d of ris k s of in ju ry to
m e a su re s to m in im iz e th e ris k s to th a t
th e m s e lv e s a n d o th e rs
p e rs o n or o th e r p e rs o n s
1.2.13.14 3.3.1.1
cab le d is trib u tio n system e xte rn a l c irc u it
m e ta llic a lly te rm in a te d tra n s m is s io n m e d iu m e le c tric a l c irc u it th a t is e x te rn a l to th e
u s in g c o a x ia l c a b le , m a in ly in te n d e d fo r e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t m ains
tra n s m is s io n of v id e o a n d /o r a u d io s ig n a ls
b e tw e e n s e p a ra te b u ild in g s or b e tw e e n N o te 1 to e n try : The re le v a n t external circuits are
o u td o o r a n te n n a s a n d b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g : i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .
- t he m a in s s y s te m fo r s u p p ly ,
tra n s m is s io n and d is trib u tio n of e le c tric
p o w e r, if used as a c o m m u n ic a tio n
- t e l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n n e tw o rk s ;
- SELV c irc u its c o n n e c tin g u n its of

in fo rm a tio n te c h n o lo g y e q u ip m e n t
N o te 1 to e n try: E x a m p le s Of c a b le d is trib u tio n

s y s te m s a re :
一 lo c a l a re a c a b le n e tw o rk s , c o m m u n ity a n te n n a
te le v is io n s y s te m s a nd m a s te r a n te n n a te le v is io n
s y s te m s p ro v id in g v id e o a n d a u d io s ig n a l
d is trib u tio n ;
- o u td o o r a n te n n a s in c lu d in g s a te llite d is h e s ,
re c e iv in g a n te n n a s , a n d o th e r s im ila r d e v ic e s .
N o te 2 to e n try: C a b le d is trib u tio n s y s te m s may be

s u b je c te d to g re a te r tra n s ie n ts th a n te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
n e tw o rk s .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table W.4 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60728-11:2016 and I EC 62368-1
IEC 60728-11:2016 te rm s IEC 62368-1 te rm s
3.1.4 3.3.1.1
cab le n e tw o rk s < fo r te le v is io n s ig n a ls ， e xte rn a l c irc u it
so u n d s ig n a ls and in te ra c tiv e s e rv ic e s 〉 e le c tric a l c irc u it th a t is e x te rn a l to th e
re g io n a l and lo c a l b ro a d b a n d c a b le e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t m ains
n e tw o rk s , e x te n d e d s a te llite and te rre s tria l
te le v is io n d is trib u tio n n e tw o rk s or s y s te m s N o te 1 to e n try: The re le v a n t external circuits a re
and in d iv id u a l s a te llite and te rre s tria l i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .
te le v is io n re c e iv in g s y s te m s
N o te 1 to e n tr y : T h e s e n e tw o rk s a n d s y s te m s ca n be
u s e d in d o w n s t r e a m a n d u p s t r e a m d i r e c t i o n s .
3.1.5
CATV n e tw o rk o r c o m m u n ity antenna
te le v is io n n e tw o rk
re g io n a l a n d lo c a l b r o a d b a n d c a b le n e tw o r k s
d e s ig n e d to p ro v id e sound and te le v is io n
s ig n a ls as w e ll as s ig n a ls fo r in te ra c tiv e
s e r v ic e s to a r e g io n a l o r lo c a l a re a
N o te 1 to e n try: O rig in a lly d e fin e d as C o m m u n ity

A n te n n a T e le v is io n n e tw o rk .
3.1.31
MATV n e tw o rk or m a ste r antenna
te le v is io n n e tw o rk
e x te n d e d te rre s tria l te le v is io n d is trib u tio n
n e tw o rk s or s y s te m s d e s ig n e d to p ro v id e
sound and te le v is io n s ig n a ls re c e iv e d by
te rre s tria l re c e iv in g a n te n n a to h o u s e h o ld s
in o n e o r m o r e b u i l d i n g s
N o te 1 to e n try : O rig in a lly d e fin e d a s m a s te r a n te n n a

te le v is io n n e tw o rk .
N o te 2 to e n try : T h is k in d o f n e tw o rk or s y s te m can
p o s s ib ly be c o m b in e d w ith a s a te llite a n te n n a fo r th e
a d d itio n a l r e c e p t io n o f T V a n d / o r r a d io s ig n a ls v ia
s a te llite n e tw o rk s .
N o te 3 to e n try : T h is k in d o f n e tw o rk o r s y s te m can
a ls o ca rry o th e r s ig n a ls fo r s p e c ia l tra n s m is s io n
s y s te m s (e .g . M oCA or W iF i) in th e re tu rn p a th
d ire c tio n .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
■EC 60728-11:2016 te rm s IEC 62368-1 te rm s
3.1.44
SMATV n e tw o rk o r s a te llite m aste r
antenna te le v is io n n e tw o rk
e x te n d e d d is trib u tio n n e tw o rk s or s y s te m s
d e s ig n e d to p ro v id e sound and te le v is io n
s ig n a ls re c e iv e d by s a te llite re c e iv in g
a n te n n a to h o u s e h o ld s in one or m o re
b u ild in g s
N o te 1 to e n try : O rig in a lly d e fin e d a s s a te llite m a s te r

a n te n n a te le v is io n n e tw o rk
N o te 2 to e n try : T h is k in d o f n e tw o r k o r s y s te m ca n
p o s s ib ly be c o m b in e d w ith te rre s tria l a n te n n a s fo r th e
a d d itio n a l re c e p tio n of TV a n d /o r ra d io s ig n a ls v ia
te rre s tria l n e tw o rk s .
N o te 3 to e n try : T h is k in d o f n e tw o rk or s y s te m can
a ls o ca rry c o n tro l s ig n a ls fo r s a te llite s w itc h e d
s y s te m s or o th e r s ig n a ls fo r s p e c ia l tra n s m is s io n
s y s te m s (e .g . M oCA or W iF i) in th e re tu rn p a th
d ire c tio n .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
IEC 62151:2000 terms IEC 62368-1 terms

3.1.3 3.3.1.1
telecommunication network external circuit
a m e ta llic a lly te rm in a te d tra n s m is s io n e le c tric a l c irc u it th a t is e x te rn a l to th e
m e d iu m in te n d e d fo r c o m m u n ic a tio n e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t mains
b e tw e e n e q u ip m e n ts th a t m a y b e lo c a te d in
s e p a r a te b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g : N o te 1 to e n try: The re le v a n t external circuits are
i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .
- t he m a in s s y s te m s fo r s u p p ly ,
一 te le v is io n d is trib u tio n s y s te m s u s in g
c a b le
N o te 1 to e n try : T h e te rm te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk
c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , a t e l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n n e t w o r K is n o t
its e lf d e fin e d a s b e in g a T N V c irc u it. O n ly th e c irc u its
in e q u i p m e n t a r e s o c l a s s i f i e d .
N o te 2 to e n try : A te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk m a y be
一 p u b lic ly o r p riv a te ly o w n e d ;
一 s u b je c t to tra n s ie n t o v e rv o lta g e s due to

d is trib u tio n s y s te m s ;
- s u b je c t to p e r m a n e n t lo n g itu d in a l (c o m m o n m o d e )
v o lta g e s in d u c e d fro m n e a rb y power lin e s or
e le c tr ic tr a c tio n lin e s .
N o te 3 to e n try : E x a m p le s of te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
n e tw o rk s are
- a p u b lic s w itc h e d te le p h o n e n e tw o rk ;
一 a p u b lic d a ta n e tw o rk ;
- a n IS D N n e tw o rk ;
- a p riv a te n e tw o rk w ith e le c tric a l in te rfa c e

3.5.4 5.2.1.1
TNV-0 circuit ES1
a T N V c irc u it: ES1 i s a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e
w i t h touch current o r prospective touch
- whose n o rm a l o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s do not voltage l e v e l s
exceed a s a fe v a lu e under n o rm a l
o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s and under s in g le - not e x c e e d in g ES1 lim its u n d e r
fa u lt c o n d itio n s ;
- w h i c h is n o t s u b j e c t t o o v e r v o l t a g e s f r o m
• abnormal operating conditions,
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk s
and
N o te 1 to e n try : T h e lim itin g v a lu e s o f v o lta g e under
• single fault conditions of a
norm al o p e ra tin g and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s are
s p e c i f i e d in 4 . 1 . c o m p o n e n t， d e v ic e or in s u la tio n not
s e rv in g a s a safeguard; and
ES2 l i m i t s u n d e r single fault

n o t e x c e e d in g
conditions o f a basic safeguard o r o f a
supplementary safeguard.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018

3.5.3 5.2.1.2
TNV circuit ES2
a c irc u it w h ic h is in th e e q u ip m e n t and to ES2 is a c la s s 2 e le c tric a l e n e rg y so u rce
w h ic h th e a c c e s s ib le a re a of c o n ta c t is w h e re
lim ite d (e x c e p t fo r a T N V -0 c irc u it) a n d th a t
is so d e s ig n e d and p ro te c te d th a t, under - both the prospective touch voltage a n d
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g a n d s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s , th e touch current e x c e e d t h e l i m i t s f o r
th e v o lta g e s d o n o t e x c e e d s p e c ifie d lim itin g ES1; and
v a lu e s - under
A TNV c irc u it is c o n s id e re d to be a • normal operating conditions, and

s e co n d a ry c irc u it in th e m e a n in g of th is
• abnormal operating conditions,
d o c u m e n t.
and
N o te 1 to e n try: The v o lta g e re la tio n s h ip s b e tw e e n • single fault conditions.

T N V C I R C U I T S a r e s h o w n in t a b l e 1.
prospective touch voltage o r
e ith e r th e th e
touch current d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t fo r
ES2.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018

2.2.12 3.3.3.8
professional apparatus professional equipment
a p p a ra tu s fo r use in t r a d e s , p ro fe s s io n s or e q u ip m e n t fo r u s e in t r a d e s , p ro fe s s io n s or
in d u s trie s a n d w h ic h is n o t i n t e n d e d f o r s a le in d u s trie s a n d w h ic h is n o t i n t e n d e d f o r s a le
to th e g e n e r a l p u b lic to th e g e n e r a l p u b lic
N o te 1 to e n try : T h e d e s ig n a tio n s h o u ld be s p e c ifie d

by th e m a n u fa c tu re r.
2.4.3 No equivalent term.

directly connected to the mains
e le c tric a l c o n n e c tio n w ith th e m a i n s in s u c h
In accordance with the IEC 60065 definition,
a w a y th a t a c o n n e c t io n to e ith e r p o le o f th e
an ES3 source would be considered directly
m a in s causes in th a t c o n n e c tio n a connected to the mains.
p e r m a n e n t c u r r e n t e q u a l to o r g r e a t e r th a n 9
A , p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e s in t h e a p p a r a t u s b e in g
n o t s h o rt-c irc u ite d
N o te 1 to e n try : A cu rren t of 9 A is chosen as th e

m in im u m b re a k in g c u rre n t o f a 6 A fu s e .
2.4.4 No equivalent term.

conductively connected to the mains
e le c tric a l c o n n e c tio n w ith th e m a i n s in s u c h In accordance with the IEC 60065 definition,
a way th a t a c o n n e c tio n th ro u g h a an ES3 or ES2 source could be considered
re s is ta n c e of 2 000 Q to e ith e r p o le o f th e conductively connected to the mains.
m a i n s c a u s e s in t h a t r e s i s t a n c e a p e r m a n e n t
cu rre n t g re a te r th a n 0 ,7 mA (p e a k), th e
a p p a r a tu s n o t b e in g c o n n e c te d to e a rth

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018

2.4.7 3.3.1.1
telecommunication network external circuit
m e ta llic a lly -te rm in a te d tra n s m is s io n m e d iu m e le c tric a l c irc u it th a t is e x te rn a l to th e
in te n d e d fo r c o m m u n ic a tio n b e tw e e n e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t mains
a p p a ra tu s th a t m ay be lo c a te d in s e p a ra te
b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g : N o te 1 to e n try: The re le v a n t external circuits a re
i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .
- t he m a in s s y s te m s fo r s u p p ly ,
- television
- d i s t r i b u t i o n s y s te m s u s in g c a b le
N o te 1 to e n tr y : T h e te rm te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk
c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , a t e l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n n e t w o r k is n o t
its e lf d e fin e d as b e in g e ith e r a T N V c irc u it. O n ly th e
c i r c u i t s in t h e a p p a r a t u s a r e s o c l a s s i f i e d .
N o te 2 to e n try: A te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk may

be:
一 p u b lic ly o r p riv a te ly o w n e d :
- s u b je c t to tra n s ie n t o v e rv o lta g e s due to

d is trib u tio n s y s te m s :
- s u b je c t to lo n g itu d in a l (com m o n m ode) v o lta g e s

in d u c e d fro m n ea rb y power lin e s or e le c tric
tr a c t io n lin e s .
N o te 3 to e n try : E x a m p le s of te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
n e tw o rk s a re :
一 a p u b lic s w itc h e d te le p h o n e n e tw o rk ;
一 a p u b lic d a ta n e tw o rk ;
- an IS D N n e tw o rk ;
一 a p riv a te n e tw o rk w ith e le c tric a l in te rfa c e

2.6.10 The term hazardous-live is not used.

hazardous live
e le c tric a l c o n d itio n o f an o b je c t fro m w h ic h a In accordance with the IEC 60065 definition ，
h a z a rd o u s to u c h cu rre n t (e le c tric shock)
an ES3 source is hazardous live.
c o u ld b e d ra w n (s e e 9 .1 .1 )
2.8.6 3.3.8.1
instructed person instructed person
p e rso n a d e q u a te ly a d v is e d o r s u p e rv is e d by p e rso n in s tru c te d o r s u p e rv is e d b y a s k ille d
s k ille d p e r s o n s to e n a b le h im o r h e r to a v o id p e rso n as to e n e rg y so u rce s and who can
d a n g e rs and to p re ve n t ris k s w h ic h re s p o n s ib ly equipment safeguards
uses
e le c tric ity m a y c re a te and precautionary safeguards w i t h r e s p e c t
to th o s e e n e rg y s o u rc e s
N o te 1 to e n try : S u p e r v i s e d , a s u s e d in t h e d e f i n i t i o n ,
m e a n s h a v in g th e d ire c tio n and o v e rs ig h t of th e
p e rfo rm a n c e o f o th e rs .
[S O U R C E : IE V 8 2 6 -1 8 -0 2 , m o d ifie d ]

旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 -1 :2 0 1 8 © IE C 2 0 1 8 - 3t) 5 -

2.8.11 3.3.9.2
potential ignition source arcing PIS
p o s s ib le fa u lt w h ic h can s ta rt a fire if th e PIS w h e r e an a rc m ay occur due to th e
o p e n -c irc u it v o lta g e m e a su re d a cro ss an o p e n in g o f a c o n d u c to r o r c o n ta c t
in te rru p tio n or fa u lty c o n ta c t exceeds a
v a lu e of 50 V (p e a k) AC or DC and th e N o te 1 to e n try: An e le c tro n ic p ro te c tio n c irc u it or
p r o d u c t o f th e p e a k v a lu e o f th is v o lta g e a n d a d d itio n a l c o n s tru c tio n a l m e a s u re s may be used to
th e m e a su re d RMS cu rre n t under n o rm a l p re v e n t a lo c a tio n fro m b e c o m in g an arcing PIS.

o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s e x c e e d s 15 V A .
N o te 2 to e n try : A f a u l t y c o n t a c t o r i n t e r r u p t i o n in a n
e le c tric c o n n e c tio n t h a t m a y o c c u r in c o n d u c t i v e
Such a fa u lty c o n ta c t or in te rru p tio n in an p a t t e r n s o n p r i n t e d b o a r d s is c o n s i d e r e d to b e w i t h i n
e le c tric a l c o n n e c tio n in c lu d e s th o s e w h ic h th e s c o p e o f th is d e fin itio n .
m a y o c c u r in c o n d u c t i v e p a tte rn s on p rin te d
b o a rd s.
N o te 1 to e n try : An e le c tro n ic p ro te c tio n c irc u it m a y

be used to p revent such a fa u lt fro m b e c o m in g a
p o te n tia l ig n itio n s o u rc e .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex X
(normative)
Alternative method for determining clearances for insulation in circuits

connected to an AC mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)
For an A C mains n o t e x c e e d in g 4 2 0 V p e a k (3 0 0 V R M S ):
- if t h e peak o f th e working voltage does not exceed th e peak v a lu e o f th e AC mains

s u p p ly v o lta g e , th e a lte rn a te m in im u m clearance is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m T a b l e X . 1 ;
- if t h e peak o f th e working voltage e x c e e d s th e peak v a lu e of th e AC mains s u p p ly

v o lta g e , th e a l t e r n a t e m i n i m u m clearance i s t h e s u m o f th e fo llo w in g tw o v a lu e s :
• th e clearance fro m T a b le X .1 , a n d
• th e a p p ro p ria te a d d itio n a l clearance fro m T a b le X .2 .
NOTE A clearance o b t a i n e d b y t h e u s e o f T a b l e X.1 l i e s b e t w e e n t h e v a l u e s r e q u i r e d f o r h o m o g e n e o u s a n d

i n h o m o g e n e o u s f i e l d s . A s a r e s u l t , it m a y n o t p a s s t h e a p p r o p r i a t e e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h t e s t if t h e f ie ld is s u b s t a n t i a l l y
in h o m o g e n e o u s .
Table X.1 - Alternative minimum clearances for insulation in circuits

connected to ac mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)
C learances in mm
Mains transient voltage
Voltage up to and 1 500 V a 2 500 V a

including Pollution degree
V 1 and 2 3 1 and 2 3
B/S R B/S R B/S R B/S R
71 1 ,0 2 ,0 1 ,3 2 ,6 2 ,0 4 ,0 2 ,0 4 ,0
210 1 ,0 2 ,0 1 ,3 2 ,6 2 ,0 4 ,0 2 ,0 4 ,0
420 B /S 2 ,0 R 4 ,0
If t h e p e a k o f t h e working voltage e x c e e d s t h e p e a k v a l u e o f t h e A C mains s u p p l y v o l t a g e , l i n e a r i n t e r p o l a t i o n is

p e rm itte d b e tw e e n th e n e a re s t tw o p o in ts , th e c a lc u la te d m in im u m clearance b e i n g r o u n d e d u p to th e n e x t
h i g h e r 0,1 m m i n c r e m e n t .
a T h e re la tio n s h ip b e tw e e n mains transient voltage and AC mains s u p p l y v o l t a g e i s g i v e n in T a b l e 12.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table X.2 - Additional clearances for insulation in circuits connected

to ac mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)
C learances in mm
Mains transient voltage

1 500 V a 2 500 V a
Voltage
Voltage
up to and
up to and including
Basic or including Basic or
V Reinforced Reinforced
supplementary V supplementary
insulation insulation
insulation insulation
Pollution Pollution Pollution
degrees degree 3 degrees
1 and 2 1, 2 and 3
210 210 〇 , 〇〇 , 〇 420 〇 , 〇 0 ,0
298 294 〇 ,1 〇 ,2 493 0 ,1 0 ,2
386 379 0 ,2 0 ,4 567 0 ,2 0 ,4
474 463 0 ,3 〇 ,6 640 0 ,3 0 ,6
562 547 〇 ,4 〇 ,8 713 0 ,4 0 ,8
650 632 0 ,5 1,0 787 0 ,5 1,0
738 715 〇 ,6 1 ,2 860 〇 ,6 1,2
826 800 〇J 1,4 933 〇 ,7 1,4
914 885 0 ,8 1 ,6 1 006 0 ,8 1,6
1 002 970 0 ,9 1,8 1 080 〇 ,9 1,8
1 090 1 055 1,0 2 ,0 1 153 1,〇 2 ,0
1 178 1 140 1,1 2 ,2 1 226 1,1 2 ,2
1 266 1 225 1,2 2 ,4 1 300 1 ,2 2 ,4
1 354 1 310 1,3 2 ,6 1 374 1,3 2 ,6
F o r v o lta g e s a b o v e th e p e a k v a lu e o f th e working voltage g i v e n in t h e t a b l e , l i n e a r e x t r a p o l a t i o n i s p e r m i t t e d .
F o r v o lta g e s w ith in th e p e a k v a lu e o f th e working voltage g iv e n in t h e t a b le , lin e a r in te rp o la tio n is p e r m i t t e d

b e tw e e n th e n e a re s t tw o p o in ts , th e c a lc u la te d m in im u m a d d itio n a l clearance b e in g ro u n d e d up to th e n e x t h ig h e r
0 f1 m m in c re m e n t.
a T h e re la tio n s h ip b e tw e e n mains transient voltage and AC mains s u p p l y v o l t a g e i s g i v e n in T a b l e 1 2 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex Y
(normative)
Construction requirements for outdoor enclosures
Y.1 General
P ro te c tio n a g a in s t c o rro s io n s h a ll be p ro v id e d by th e use of s u ita b le m a te ria ls or by th e

a p p lic a tio n of a p ro te c tiv e c o a tin g a p p lie d to th e exposed s u rfa c e , ta k in g in to a c c o u n t th e
in te n d e d c o n d itio n s o f u s e .
P a rts , s u c h a s d ia ls o r c o n n e c to r s , th a t s e r v e a s a fu n c tio n a l p a rt o f a n outdoor enclosure

s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e sam e e n v iro n m e n ta l p ro te c tio n re q u ire m e n ts a s f o r t h e outdoor
enclosure.
NOTE 1 A s p e c ts a ffe c tin g s a fe ty th a t in flu e n c e th e in te g rity o f th e outdoor enclosure th ro u g h th e life o f th e

p ro d u c t in c lu d e :
一 c o n tin u e d p ro te c tio n a g a in s t a c c e s s to c la s s 2 a n d c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s , in c lu d in g a fte r m e c h a n ic a l s tre n g th

te s ts ;
一 c o n tin u e d p ro te c tio n a g a in s t in g re s s o f d u s t a n d w a te r; a n d
- c o n tin u e d p ro v is io n o f e a rth c o n tin u ity .
An outdoor enclosure s h a ll n o t b e u s e d to c a r r y c u r r e n t d u r in g n o r m a l o p e r a t io n if t h is c o u ld
c a u s e c o rro s io n th a t w o u ld im p a ir s a fe ty . T h is d o e s n o t p re c lu d e c o n n e c tio n o f a c o n d u c tiv e
p a rt of an outdoor enclosure to protective earthing fo r th e p u rp o se of c a rry in g fa u lt
c u rre n ts .
NOTE 2 T h e a c tio n o f a c u rre n t flo w in g th ro u g h a jo in t ca n in c re a s e c o rro s io n u n d e r w e t c o n d itio n s .
W h e re a c o n d u c tiv e p a rt o f an outdoor enclosure is c o n n e c t e d to protective earthing fo r

th e p u r p o s e o f c a r r y in g fa u lt c u r r e n ts , th e r e s u ltin g c o n n e c tio n s h a ll m e e t th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f
5 .6 , a fte r th e a p p r o p r ia te w e a t h e r c o n d itio n in g te s ts , s e e C la u s e Y .3 .
Compliance is checked by inspection and， if necessary， by the tests of 5.6 after the tests of
Clause Y.3.
Y.2 Resistance to UV radiation
N o n -m e ta llic p a rts o f a n outdoor enclosure r e q u ir e d fo r c o m p lia n c e w ith th is d o c u m e n t s h a ll

b e s u ffic ie n tly r e s is ta n t to d e g r a d a tio n b y U V ra d ia tio n .
Compliance is checked by examination of the construction and of available data regarding the
UV resistance characteristics o f the o u td o o r e n c lo s u re material and any associated
protective coating. If such data is not available， Annex C applies.
Y.3 Resistance to corrosion
Y.3.1 General
M e ta llic p a rts o f outdoor enclosures, w ith o r w it h o u t p r o t e c t iv e c o a t in g s , s h a ll b e r e s is t a n t to

th e e ffe c ts o f w a te r-b o rn e c o n ta m in a n ts .
Compliance is checked by either:
- inspection and by evaluation o f data provided by the manufacturer; or

- the tests and criteria as specified in Y.3.2 through Y.3.5; or

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- the applicable performance level (A1， A2 or A3) of IEC 61587-1 •
Y.3.2 Test apparatus
T h e a p p a r a tu s fo r th e s a lt s p r a y te s t s h a ll c o n s is t o f a te s t c h a m b e r a n d s p r a y in g d e v ic e s a s
d e s c r i b e d in I E C 6 0 0 6 8 - 2 - 1 1 .
T h e a p p a r a t u s f o r t h e t e s t in a w a t e r - s a t u r a t e d s u l p h u r d i o x i d e a t m o s p h e r e s h a l l c o n s i s t o f a n
in e rt, h e r m e tic a lly s e a le d , c h a m b e r c o n ta in in g a w a te r - s a t u r a t e d s u lp h u r d io x id e a tm o s p h e re
in w h i c h t h e t e s t s p e c i m e n s a n d t h e i r s u p p o r t s a r e h e l d . T h e c h a m b e r s h a l l b e a s d e s c r i b e d in
IS O 3 2 3 1 .
Y.3.3 Water - saturated sulphur dioxide atmosphere
If the test chamber has an internal volume o f 300 I ± 30 I the water-saturated sulphur dioxide
atmosphere is created by the introduction of 0,2 I of sulphur dioxide with a concentration of
0,067 % by volume into the closed test chamber. The sulphur dioxide can either be introduced
from a gas cylinder or by creating a specific reaction within the chamber. For test chambers
having a different internal volume the quantity of sulphur dioxide is varied accordingly.
Sulphur dioxide can be formed inside the test apparatus by treating sodium pyrosulphite
(Na2S20 5) with a relatively strong acidf sulphamic acid (H S 03NH2).
NOTE 1 T h e m e t h o d c o n s i s t s o f d is s o l v in g e x c e s s s o d iu m p y r o s u l p h i t e in w a t e r , g iv in g th e r e a c t io n :
N a 2S 2 〇 5 + H 20 ^ 2 NaHS〇 3
A s t o i c h i o m e t r i c q u a n t i t y o f s u l p h a m i c a c i d is t h e n a d d e d g i v i n g t h e r e a c t i o n :
N a H S 〇 3 + H S 〇 3N H 2 ^ N a S 〇 3N H 2 + H 20 + S 0 2
T h e r e s u l t i n g o v e r a l l r e a c t i o n is :
N a 2S 2 〇 5 + 2 H S 〇 3 N H 2 ^ 2 N a S 〇 3N H 2 + H 2 〇 + 2 S〇 2
T o o b ta in 1 I o f S 〇 2 u n d e r n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n s o f 0 0C t e m p e r a t u r e a n d 1 , 0 1 3 3 x 1 0 5 P a ，a i r p r e s s u r e , 4 , 2 4 g
s o d iu m p y r o s u lp h ite a n d 4 ,3 3 g s u lp h a m ic a c id a re n e e d e d .
NOTE 2 S u l p h a m i c a c i d is t h e o n l y s o l i d m i n e r a l a c i d t h a t i s e a s y t o c o n s e r v e .
NOTE 3 T h e a b o v e d e s c r i p t i o n is t a k e n f r o m 8 . 2 . 1 1 . 3 . 1 a n d 8 . 2 . 1 1 . 3 . 2 o f I E C 6 1 4 3 9 - 5 : 2 0 1 4 .
Y.3.4 Test procedure
The test shall consist of two identical and successive 12 day periods.
Each 12 day period consists of test a) followed by test b):
test a) 168 h of exposure to the salt spray atmosphere. The concentration of the saline
solution forming the salt spray atmosphere is 5 % 土 1 % by weight and the
temperature of the test chamber is maintained at 35 0C 土 2 0C.
test b) 5 exposure cycles each consisting of an 8 h exposure to a water-saturated sulphur
dioxide-rich atmosphere (see Y.3.3)f during which the temperature of the test
chamber is maintained at 40 °C ± ^ °C , followed by 16 h at rest with the test
chamber door open.
After each 12 day period, the test specimens are washed with demineralized water.
Alternatively, the test procedures as described in the following standards may be used to
show compliance:
- I SO 21207 Method B; or
- I SO 14993; or

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- any other equivalent standard.
Y.3.5 Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by visual inspection. The o u td o o r e n c lo s u re shall not show rust or

oxidation of the protective coating, cracking or other deterioration that will jeopardize the
safety aspects as follows:
- continued protection against access to class 2 and class 3 energy sources, including after
mechanical strength tests; and
- continued protection against ingress of dust and water; and
- continued provision of earth continuity.
However, surface corrosion of the protective coating is disregarded.
Y.4 G askets
Y.4.1 General
W hen g a s k e ts a re used as th e m e th o d p ro v id in g p ro te c tio n a g a in s t th e in g re s s o f p o te n tia l

c o n ta m in a n ts , Y .4 .2 th r o u g h Y . 4 . 6 s h a ll a p p ly a s a p p ro p r ia te .
NOTE In C a n a d a a n d t h e U n i t e d S t a t e s , enclosure t y p e s a r e s p e c i f i e d in t h e C a n a d i a n E l e c t r i c a l C o d e a n d t h e
U .S . N a tio n a l E le c tric a l C o d e .
J o in ts f o r a ll d e v ic e s c lo s in g o p e n in g s in to th e e q u ip m e n t c a v ity of an outdoor enclosure

s u b je c te d to s p la s h in g o r s e e p a g e o f o il, a s w e ll a s a n y d o o r o r c o v e r f o r s u c h a n outdoor
enclosure, s h a l l i n c l u d e a g a s k e t in t h e f u ll l e n g t h o f t h e j o i n t .
A gasket of e la s to m e ric or th e rm o p la s tic m a te ria l, or a c o m p o s itio n gasket u tiliz in g an

e la s to m e ric m a t e r i a l t h a t is p r o v i d e d on an outdoor enclosure s u b je c te d to w a te r o r d u s t,
s h a ll m e e t r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th is d o c u m e n t.
Compliance is checked by inspection and by applying the relevant tests o f Y.4.2 through
Y.4.6.
Y.4.2 Gasket tests
T h e r e l e v a n t t e s t s s p e c i f i e d in Y . 4 . 3 o r Y . 4 . 4 , d e p e n d i n g o n t h e t y p e o f g a s k e t m a t e r i a l u s e d ,
a re a p p lic a b le to g a s k e ts e m p lo y e d o n a n outdoor enclosure s u b je c t e d to w a t e r o r d u s t. T h e
a d d i t i o n a l t e s t o f Y . 4 . 5 is a p p l i c a b l e t o g a s k e t s e m p l o y e d o n a n outdoor enclosure s u b je c te d
to o il o r c o o la n t . A s e t o f t h r e e s p e c im e n s o f th e g a s k e t m a te r ia l s h a ll be s u b je c te d to th e
re le v a n t te s ts .
Y.4.3 Tensile strength and elongation tests
This test is applicable to gaskets， which can stretch (such as O-rings). Gasket material shall
be o f such quality that samples subjected to a temperature of 69 °C to 70 °C in circulating air
for 168 h have a tensile strength o f not less than 75 % and an elongation of not less than
60 % of values determined for unaged samples. At the conclusion of the temperature
conditioning, there shall be no visible deterioration, deformation, melting, or cracking of the
material and the material shall not harden as determined by normal hand flexing.
As an alternative， the tensile strength and elongation tests as given in ISO 37， ISO 1798,
ASTM D412 or ASTM D3574 may be used.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Y.4.4 Compression test
This test is applicable to gaskets with closed cell construction. The set of specimens o f gasket
material shall be tested to the requirements of a)9 b) and c) (see Figure Y.1). On completion of
each test, the specimens shall not show signs o f deterioration or cracks that can be seen with
normal or corrected vision.
a) A cylindrical weight sufficient to apply 69 kPa shall be placed on the middle portion of
each specimen for a period of 2 h. At the end of that time the weight shall be removed and
the specimen allowed to rest at a room temperature of 25 °C ± 3 °C for 30 min. The
thickness of the gasket shall then be determined and compared with a measurement
obtained before the application of the weight. The compression set shall not exceed 50 %
of the initial thickness of the specimen.
b) Following the test specified in a)9 the same specimens shall be suspended in an air oven
at a temperature o f 70° C for a period of 5 days. The specimens shall then be tested for
compliance with a)9 approximately 24 h after removal from the oven.
c) Following the test specified in b), the same specimens shall be cooled for a period of 24 h
to the minimum temperature specified by the manufacturer or - 3 3 ° C if no minimum
ambient temperature is specified and then subjected to an impact from a hammer of
1,35 kg mass falling from a height o f 150 mm upon removal from the cold chamber. The
hammer head shall be steel, 28,6 mm in diameter and have a flat striking surface,
25,4 mm in diameter with slightly rounded edges. The specimens being tested shall be
placed on short lengths of 50 mm by 100 mm minimum wooden pieces (clear spruce)
when being impacted. Following the impact the specimens shall be examined for evidence
of cracking or other adverse effects. The test shall be continued and the specimens
impacted every 24 h for two more days. The specimens shall then be removed from the
cold chamber, allowed to rest at a room temperature of 25 °C ± 3 °C for approximately
24 h, and then again tested for compliance with a).

IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018
G a lv a n iz e d o r p a in te d s te e l b a c k in g plate
225 b y 5 0 by 3 ,5 m m to 1,5 m m
J ( g a u g e No. 10 to g a u g e No. 16, M S G )
T e s t s p e c i m e n a t t a c h e d to b a c k in g plate
by s u b m it t o r usin g p r o p o s e d a d h e s iv e a n d
p ro p o s e d p ro d u c tio n m e th o d .
T e s t p ie c e 2 5 b y 2 0 0
o i
OO
S
CN
CNJ CNJ
C y lin d ric a l w e ig h t, a p p r o x im a t e ly
100 m m d ia m e t e r a n d 18 kg in m a s s
25
50
ie c
Figure Y.1 - Gasket test
Y.4.5 Oil resistance
A gasket p ro v id e d o n an outdoor enclosure s u b je c t e d to o il o r c o o l a n t s h a ll b e o il r e s is t a n t .
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the following oil immersion test.
Gasket material shall not swell more than 25 % or shrink more than 1 % as a result of
immersion in oil for 70 h at a room temperature of 25 °C ± 3 °C. Specifications are provided in
ISO 1817:2015 or ASTM D471-98.
NOTE In C a n a d a a n d U n i t e d S t a t e s , I R M I m m e r s i o n O i l N o . 9 0 3 is a c c e p t e d .
Y.4.6 Securing means
A gasket s h a ll b e s e c u r e d w it h a d h e s i v e o r b y m e c h a n i c a l m e a n s . T h e g a s k e t a n d its s e c u r in g
m e a n s s h a l l n o t b e d a m a g e d w h e n t h e j o i n t is o p e n e d .
Where a gasket is secured by adhesive alone without mechanical securement， and the
specific part(s) associated with the gasket may be subjected to opening or similar movement
on a periodic basis, the gasket and adhesive shall be subjected to the testing in
Clause P.4.Compliance is checked by inspection and available manufacturer's data. If data is
not available， then the tests according to Clause P.4 are conducted， as applicable.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Y.5 Protection of equipment within an outdoor enclosure
Y.5.1 General
E q u ip m e n t w ith in an outdoor enclosure s h a ll h a v e a d e q u a te p ro te c tio n fro m th e e ffe c ts o f

m o is tu re a n d e x c e s s iv e d u s t.
S e e T a b le Y .1 fo r e x a m p le s fo r p ro v is io n s o f pollution degree e n v ir o n m e n ts . T o e s ta b lis h a

pollution degree, b o th c o n s id e r a tio n s s h a ll b e m e t.
Table Y.1 - Examples of the provision of pollution degree environments
Method of achievement Method of achievement

Pollution degree Dust Moisture
(Y.5.5) (Y.5.1 to Y.5.3)
Pollution degree 3 D e fa u lt T he use o f an enclosure m e e tin g
IP X 4 o r th e re q u ire m e n ts o f Y .5 .3
r e l a t i n g t o t h e i n g r e s s o f w a t e r is
c o n s i d e r e d t o p r o v i d e a pollution
degree 3 e n v i r o n m e n t w i t h i n t h e
outdoor enclosure.
R e d u c tio n o f pollution pollution degree
R e d u c tio n o f 3 to R e d u c tio n o f th e pollution degree 3
degree 3 to pollution degree 2 pollution degree 2 c a n b e e n v ir o n m e n t to pollution degree 2
a c c o m p lis h e d b y e ith e r: c a n b e a c c o m p lis h e d b y e ith e r:
- p ro vi d i n g c o n tin u o u s - p r o v i d i n g c o n tin u o u s e n e rg iz a tio n

e n e rg iz a tio n o f th e e n c lo s e d o f th e e n c lo s e d e q u ip m e n t; or
e q u ip m e n t; o r
- p ro v i d i n g s e p a ra te c lim a te
- p r o v i d i n g s e p a ra te c lim a te c o n d itio n in g w h ic h p re v e n ts
c o n d itio n in g w h ic h p re v e n ts c o n d e n s a tio n w ith in th e outdoor
c o n d e n s a t i o n w i t h i n t h e outdoor equipment o r outdoor
equipment or outdoor enclosure; or
enclosure; or
一 th e u s e o f an enclosure m e e tin g
- I P5X IP X 4 .
一 IP 6 X
- Y. 5.5.2
- Y . 5 . 5.3
e q u iv a le n t (fo r, e x a m p le N E M A ).
R e d u c tio n to pollution S e e 5 .4 .1 .5 .2 , T e s t fo r pollution C o n tro l o f th e e n v ir o n m e n t a t th e

degree 1 degree 1 e n v iro n m e n t a nd fo r an i n s u l a t i o n s u r f a c e t o pollution
in s u la tin g c o m p o u n d . degree 1 c a n b e a c c o m p l i s h e d f o r
e x a m p le by, e n c a p s u la tio n , p o ttin g o r
c o a tin g .
Compliance is checked by inspection o f the construction, available data and, if necessary, by

the tests in Y.5.2 to Y.5.5.
Y.5.2 Protection from moisture
The outdoor enclosure s h a ll p r o v id e a d e q u a te p r o te c tio n fr o m th e e ffe c t o f m o is tu re o n th e

e n c lo s e d e q u ip m e n t.
N O T E 1 T h i s d o e s n o t p r e c l u d e outdoor enclosure o r outdoor equipment b e in g c o n s tru c te d w ith s e g m e n te d

v o l u m e s , e a c h p r o v i d i n g a d i f f e r e n t pollution degree.
NOTE 2 F o r c o n s id e r a tio n o f th e e ffe c ts o f th e p re s e n c e o f c o n d u c tiv e p o llu tio n , a s o p p o s e d to n o n -c o n d u c tiv e

p o llu tio n w h i c h c a n b e c o m e c o n d u c t i v e o n l y d u e t o t h e p r e s e n c e o f m o i s t u r e , s e e t h e r e l e v a n t r e q u i r e m e n t s in
IE C 6 0 5 2 9 .
W h e re n e c e s s a ry , th e outdoor enclosure s h a ll be p ro v id e d w ith d ra in h o le s to c o n tro l th e

a c c u m u la t io n o f m o is t u r e d u e to ;

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
- e n t r a n c e o f w a te r th ro u g h o p e n in g s ; a n d
- c o n d e n s a t i o n , w h e n t h is is l ik e l y t o o c c u r ( f o r e x a m p l e , k e e p i n g t h e e q u i p m e n t e n e r g i z e d
o r s e p a r a t e l y h e a t i n g t h e e q u i p m e n t is c o n s i d e r e d t o k e e p it f r e e o f c o n d e n s a t i o n ) .
The p ro v is io n of d ra in h o le s and th e ir lo c a tio n s h a ll be ta k e n in to c o n s id e ra tio n when

d e t e r m i n i n g t h e IP r a tin g .
Compliance is checked by inspection and, if necessary, by the relevant tests o f IEC 60529 or
Y.5.3.
Prior to testing， the equipment shall be mounted， so far as is reasonably practicable,

according to the manufacturer's installation instructions. If fans or other means for ventilation
are provided， which could affect the ingress of water， the test shall be conducted with the
ventilation means both on and off unless it is evident that one o f the modes of operation will
produce the more onerous result.
At the conclusion o f the test the following conditions shall exist:
- For outdoor enclosures, n o w a te r s h a ll h a v e e n te r e d th e outdoor enclosure.

- For outdoor equipment, w a t e r is p e r m i t t e d to e n te r th e outdoor enclosure p ro v id e d it
d o e s n o t:
• d e p o s i t o n i n s u l a t i o n w h e r e it c o u l d l e a d t o t r a c k i n g a l o n g t h e creepage distance,
• d e p o s it o n b a re liv e p a r ts o r b a r e w ir in g , o r o n w in d in g s n o t d e s ig n e d to o p e r a t e w h e n
w e t, o r
• e n te r a n y s u p p ly w irin g s p a c e , s e e G .7 .6 .
Y.5.3 Water spray test
The water-spray test apparatus， using fresh water， is to consist of three spray heads mounted
in a water supply pipe rack as shown in Figure Y.2. Spray heads are to be constructed in
accordance with the details shown in Figure Y.3. The o u td o o r e n c lo s u re is to be positioned
in the focal area of the spray heads so that the greatest quantity of water is likely to enter the
o u td o o r e n clo su re . The water pressure is to be maintained at 34,5 kPa at each spray head.
The o u td o o r e n c lo s u re is to be exposed to the water spray for 1 h.
Unless the construction is such that a test on one side of the o u td o o r e n c lo s u re is

representative of a test on another side， the test is to be repeated on other sides o f the
o u td o o r e n c lo s u re as necessary.
The water spray is to produce a uniform spray over the surface or surfaces under test. The
various vertical surfaces of an o u td o o r e n c lo s u re may be tested separately or collectively,
provided that a uniform spray is applied.
The top surface of the o u td o o r e n c lo s u re shall be tested by applying a uniform spray from
nozzles located at proper heights (see the focal point in Figure Y.2)， if
- there are openings in the top surface; or

一 from an examination of the construction, it is determined that run-off from the top surface
could cause water ingress at a vertical surface which would not be detected by the test of
the vertical surface.
If there are openings in a vertical surface, located less than 250 mm above ground level, such
that water ingress from rain bouncing upwards from the ground surface might occur, a test
shall be performed， spraying water on the ground surface in front of such openings， over such
distance necessary to cause the deflected spray to reach the o u td o o r e n clo su re . This test is
not carried out if, from an examination o f the construction， it is determined that the test o f the
vertical surface adequately assures compliance.

IEC 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
D im ensions in m illim etres, unless in d ica te d otherw ise
710 710
S e e d e t a il A W a te r pressure g auge
fo r each spray head
E3- • •i
230 75
ie c
Figure Y.2 - Water-spray test spray-head piping

IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018
D im ensions in m illim etres, unless in d ica te d otherw ise
Assembly
Body
11 14
0,5 in (127 mm)
Optional - to serve as a wrench grip
5 (Drill through)
Insert
45° counter sink
Three holes spaced 120°
0,80 (deep)
0,80 max. 2,80 (Drill through)
63,5 (Drill to depth required

/ for throat)
16 (Hexagonal or
round bar stock)
2,50 (Drill through)
18.3
Three square section slots

16 (wide) x 1，52 (deep)- spaced 120。 - 60。 ___
helix - leading edges tangent to radial holes —
ie c
Figure Y.3 - Water-spray test spray head
Y.5.4 Protection from plants and vermin
If e n t r y by p la n ts and v e rm in is a c o n s id e ra tio n , outdoor equipment s h a ll have a d e q u a te

p ro te c tio n .
NOTE F o r p ro te c tio n a g a in s t p la n ts a n d v e rm in , s e e IE C 6 1 9 6 9 -3 .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Y.5.5 Protection from excessive dust
Y.5.5.1 General
U n le s s th e clearances a n d creepage distances c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s a s g i v e n in 5 . 4

f o r pollution degree 3 , outdoor equipment s h a l l h a v e a d e q u a t e p r o t e c t i o n a g a i n s t t h e
i n g r e s s o f t h e d u s t t h r o u g h t h e u s e o f a n a p p r o p r i a t e l y r a t e d I P 5 X o r I P 6 X enclosure， o r
e q u i v a l e n t ( f o r e x a m p l e , a n e q u i v a l e n t N E M A r a t e d enclosure).
NOTE D u s t f r o m r o a d v e h i c l e s is n o t c o n s i d e r e d to b e c o n d u c t i v e .
Compliance is checked by inspection and， if necessary， by the relevant tests o f IEC 60529 or
alternatively, by the tests of V.5.5.2 or Y.5.5.3 using the acceptance conditions of
IEC 60529:1989f Clause 5f 13.5.2 and 13.6.2.
If the e n c lo s u re complies with the dust chamber test for IP5X or IP6X, the examination for
spherical objects mentioned in the note of 13.3 of IEC 60529:1989 can be considered done
and complied with.
Y.5.5.2 IP5X equipment
D u s t-p ro o f e q u ip m e n t (firs t c h a r a c te r is tic IP n u m e ra l 5 ) s h a ll be te s te d in a dust cham ber

s i m i l a r t o t h a t s h o w n in F i g u r e 2 o f I E C 6 0 5 2 9 : 1 9 8 9 , in w h i c h t a l c u m p o w d e r is m a i n t a i n e d in
s u s p e n s io n b y a n a ir c u r r e n t. T h e c h a m b e r s h a ll c o n ta in 2 k g o f p o w d e r fo r e v e r y c u b ic m e te r
o f its v o lu m e . T h e t a lc u m p o w d e r u s e d s h a ll b e a b le to p a s s th r o u g h a s q u a r e - m e s h e d s ie v e
whose n o m in a l w ire d ia m e te r is 5 0 (.im and whose n o m in a l fre e d is ta n c e b e tw e e n w ire s is
7 5 n m . It s h a l l n o t h a v e b e e n u s e d f o r m o r e t h a n 2 0 t e s t s .
The test shall proceed as follows:
a) The equipment is suspended outside the dust chamber and operated at ra te d vo lta g e
until operating temperature is achieved.
b) The equipment, whilst still operating, is placed with the minimum disturbance in the dust
chamber.
c) The door of the dust chamber is closed.
d) The fan/blower causing the talcum powder to be in suspension is switched on.
e) After 1 min， the equipment is disconnected and allowed to cool for 3 h whilst the talcum
powder remains in suspension.
NOTE The 1 m in i n t e r v a l b e t w e e n s w i t c h i n g o n t h e f a n / b l o w e r a n d s w i t c h i n g o f f th e e q u i p m e n t is to e n s u r e t h a t
t h e t a l c u m p o w d e r i s p r o p e r l y in s u s p e n s i o n a r o u n d t h e e q u i p m e n t d u r i n g i n i t i a l c o o l i n g , w h i c h i s m o s t i m p o r t a n t
w i t h s m a l l e r e q u i p m e n t . T h e e q u i p m e n t i s o p e r a t e d i n i t i a l l y a s in i t e m a ) t o e n s u r e t h e t e s t c h a m b e r is n o t
o v e rh e a te d .
Y.5.5.3 IP6X equipment
D u s t-tig h t e q u ip m e n t (firs t c h a ra c te ris tic IP n u m e ra l 6) s h a ll be te s te d in a cco rd a n ce w ith

Y .5 .5 .2 .
Y.6 Mechanical strength of enclosures
Y.6.1 General
Outdoor enclosures and outdoor equipment s h a ll h a v e a d e q u a te m e c h a n ic a l s tr e n g th and

s h a ll p ro v id e p ro te c tio n a g a in s t access to c la s s 3 e n e rg y so u rce s w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t
th r o u g h o u t th e in te n d e d a m b ie n t o p e ra tin g ra n g e .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Compliance is checked by the inspection of the construction and available data and, if
necessary， by the test o f Y.6.2. After the test， the level of protection shall remain in
accordance with Y.5.5.1,
Y.6.2 Impact test
For equipment with an o u td o o r e n c lo s u re made of polymeric material, the o u td o o r

e n c lo s u re of the equipment should be subjected to the low temperature conditioning before
the impact test. Subsequently o u td o o r e n c lo s u re s and o u td o o r e q u ip m e n t are to be
subjected to the impact test of Clause T.6. Where the o u td o o r e n c lo s u re is made of
polymeric material, the test is carried out at an ambient temperature equal to the minimum
ambient temperature specified by the manufacturer or -3 3 °C if no minimum ambient
temperature is specified, for 24 h. The test can be applied to a portion of the e n c lo s u re
representing the largest unreinforced area, supported in its normal position.
The impacts are applied to doors, covers, seams and the like which could affect the ingress of
dust and moisture. The test is performed whether or not failure would give direct access to
class 3 energy sources. The impacts are applied within 2 min of removal from the climatic
chamber.

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Bibliography
IE C G u id e 1 1 7 :2 0 1 0 , Electrotechnical equipment - Temperatures of touchable hot surfaces
IE C 6 0 0 5 0 (a ll p a rts ), International Electrotechnical Vocabulary (a v a ila b le at

< h ttp ://w w w .e le c tro p e d ia .o rg >)
IE C 6 0 0 5 0 -1 6 1 , International Electrotechnical Vocabulary - Chapter 161: Electromagnetic

compatibility
International Electrotechnical Vocabulary - Part 195: Earthing and protection

IE C 6 0 0 5 0 -1 9 5 ,
against electric shock
Electrical apparatus
IE C 6 0 0 7 9 - 1 0 :2 0 0 2 , for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 10:
Classification of hazardous a r e a s 4
Connectors for frequencies below 3 MHz - Part 9: Circular connectors for

IE C 6 0 1 3 0 -9 ,
radio and associated sound equipment
IE C 6 0 1 6 9 -3 , Radio-frequency connectors - Two-pin connector for twin balanced aerial

feeders
IE C 6 0 2 0 4 -1 , Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General

requirements
Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 11:

IE C 6 0 2 0 4 -1 1 ,
Requirements for HV equipment for voltages above 1 000 V AC or 1 500 V DC and not
exceeding 36 kV
Low-voltage fuses - Part 2: Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by

IE C 6 0 2 6 9 -2 ,
authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application) - Examples of standardized
systems of fuses A to K
IE C 6 0 3 0 9 -1 , Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes - Part 1: General

requirements
IE C 6 0 3 6 4 (a ll p a r ts ) , Low-voltage electrical installations
Low-voltage electrical installations - Part 4-44: Protection for safety -

IE C 6 0 3 6 4 -4 -4 4 :2 0 0 7 ,
Protection against voltage disturbances and electromagnetic disturbances
IE C T S 6 0 4 7 9 -1 :2 0 0 5 , Effects of current on human beings and livestock - Part 1: General

aspects
Medical electrical equipment - Part 2-4: Particular requirements for the basic
IE C 6 0 6 0 1 -2 -4 ,
safety and essential performance of cardiac defibrillators

IE C 6 0 6 6 4 -1 ,
Principles, requirements and tests

IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 4 :2 0 0 5 ,
Consideration o f high-frequency voltage stress
4 W ith d ra w n .

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of

IE C 6 0 7 2 1 -3 -4 ,
environmental parameters and their severities - Section 4: Stationary use at non-weather
protected locations
IEC System o f plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes -
IE C 6 0 9 0 6 -3 ,
Part 3: SELV plugs and socket-outlets, 16 A 6V， 12 V， 24 V， 48 V， AC and DC
\EC 6 飞032:' 997, Protection o f persons and equipment by enclosures - Probes for verification
IE C 6 1 1 4 0 :2 0 1 6 , Protection against electric shock - Common aspects for installation and

equipment
IE C T S 6 1 2 0 1 :2 0 0 7 , Use o f conventional touch voltage limits - Application guide
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 5: Assemblies

IE C 6 1 4 3 9 - 5 :2 0 1 4 ,
for power distribution in public networks
Functional safety o f electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related

IE C 6 1 5 0 8 -1 ,
systems - Part 1: General requirements
Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products -

IE C 6 1 5 5 8 - 2 - 1 ,
Part 2-1: Particular requirements and tests for separating transformers and power supplies
incorporating separating transformers for general applications
Safety o f transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products for
IE C 6 1 5 5 8 - 2 - 4 ,
supply voltages up to 1 100 V - Part 2-4: Particular requirements and tests for isolating
transformers and power supply units incorporating isolating transformers
Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products for
IE C 6 1 5 5 8 -2 -6 ,
voltages up to 1 100 V - Part 2-6: Particular requirements and tests for safety isolating
transformers and power supply units incorporating isolating transformers
Mechanical structures for electronic equipment - Tests for IEC 60917

IE C 6 1 5 8 7 -1 ,
and IEC 60297 series - Part 1: Environmental requirements, test set-up and safety aspects
for cabinets ， racks， subracks and chassis under indoor condition use and transportation
Low voltage surge protective devices - Part 21: Surge protective devices
IE C 6 1 6 4 3 -2 1 ,
connected to telecommunications and signalling networks - Performance requirements and
testing methods
Components for low-voltage

IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 1 1 , surge protective devices - Part 311:
Specification for gas discharge tubes (GDT)
Components for low-voltage surge protective

IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 2 1 ， devices - Part 321:
Specifications for avalanche breakdown diode (ABD)
Mechanical structures for electronic equipment - Outdoor enclosures - Part 3:

IE C 6 1 9 6 9 -3 ,
Environmental requirements, tests and safety aspects
IE C 6 2 0 4 0 -1 , Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Part 1: Safety requirements
IE C 6 2 1 5 1 :2 0 0 0 , Safety of equipment electrically connected to a telecommunication network
IE C 6 2 3 0 5 -1 , Protection against lightning - Part 1: General principles

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Audio/video, information and communication technology equipment - Part 2:

IE C T R 6 2 3 6 8 -2 ,
Explanatory information related to IEC 62368-1
Audio/video9 information and communication technology equipment - Part 3:

IE C 6 2 3 6 8 -3 ,
Safety aspects for DC power transfer through communication cables and ports
IE C T R Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems - Part 2: Guidance on

6 2 4 7 1 -2 ,
manufacturing requirements relating to non-laser optical radiation safety
IS O /IE C G u id e 3 7 , Instructions for use of products by consumers
IS O /IE C G u id e 5 1 , Safety aspects - Guidelines for their inclusion in standards
Paints and varnishes - Evaluation of degradation of coatings - Designation of

IS O 4 6 2 8 -3 ,
quantity and size of defects, and of intensity of uniform changes in appearance - Part 3:
Assessment o f degree of rusting
IS O 1 0 2 1 8 -1 , Robots and robotic devices - Safety requirements for industrial robots - Part 1:
Robots
Robots and robotic devices - Safety requirements for industrial robots - Part 2:
IS O 1 0 2 1 8 -2 ,
Robot systems and integration
IS O 1 3 4 8 2 , Robots and robotic devices - Safety requirements for personal care robots
IS O 1 3 8 5 0 , Safety of machinery - Emergency stop - Principles for design
IT U -T R e c o m m e n d a tio n K .2 7 , Bonding configurations and earthing inside a

telecommunication building
Resistibility tests for telecommunication equipment exposed to

IT U -T R e c o m m e n d a tio n K .4 4 ,
overvoltages and overcurrents - Basic Recommendation
IT U -T Efficiency of devices for preventing the occurrence of excessive acoustic

P .3 6 0 ,
pressure by telephone receivers
A C IF G 6 2 4 :2 0 0 5 - Network interface voltage levels, A u s tra lia
A S /N Z S 3112, Approval and test specification-Plugs and socket outlets
BS 13 A plugs ， socket-outlets， adaptors and connection units. Specification for

1363,
rewirable and non-rewirable 13 A fused plugs
CFR 21, P a rt 1020: Code o f F e d e ra l R e g u la tio n s (U S A ) P a rt 1020: P e rfo rm a n c e s ta n d a rd s

fo r io n iz in g ra d ia tio n e m ittin g p ro d u c ts
C o n s o lid a te d R e g u la tio n s o f C a n a d a (C R C ), c .1 3 7 0 , Radiation Emitting Devices
E N 7 1 - 1 : 2 0 1 1, Safety of toys - Part 1: Mechanical and physical properties
EN General requirements for Home and Building Electronic Systems (HBES)

5 0 4 9 1 -3 :2 0 0 9 ,
and Building Automation and Control Systems (BACS) - Part 3: Electrical safety requirements
UL 2556 - U L s ta n d a rd fo r s a fe ty W ire a n d c a b le te s t m e th o d s

旧C 62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
E u ro p e a n C o u n c il D ire c tiv e 9 6 /2 9 /E u r a to m of 13 M a y 1 9 9 6 L a y in g down B a s ic S a fe ty

S ta n d a rd s fo r th e P ro te c tio n o f th e H e a lth o f W o rke rs and th e G e n e ra l P u b lic a g a in s t th e
D a n g e r A ris in g fro m Io n is in g R a d ia tio n
In te rn a tio n a l C o m m is s io n o n R a d io lo q ic a l P ro te c tio n (IC R P ) P u b lic a tio n 6 0 :R e c o m m e n d a tio n s

o f IC R P

Iec 62368-1-2018

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Iec 62368-1-2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

I EC ■EC 62368-1

Edition 3.0 2018-10

Audio/video, information and communication technology equipment-

白quipements des technologies de I’audio/video, de ^information et de la

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

A Copyright ® 2018 IEC, Geneva, Switzerland

IEC Central Office Tel.: +41 22 919 02 11

About the IEC

About IEC publications

IEC Catalogue - webstore.iec.ch/catalogue Electropedia-www.electropedia.org

IEC publications search - webstore.iec.ch/advsearchform IEC Glossary - std.iec.ch/glossary

A propos des publications IEC

Catalogue IEC - webstore.iec.ch/catalogue Electropedia-www.electropedia.org

IEC Just Published - webstore.iec.ch/justpublished Service Clients - webstore.iec.ch/csc

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

Audio/video, information and communication technology equipment-

白quipements des technologies de Taudio/video, d e 「 information et de la

ICS 33.160.01; 35.020 ISBN 978-2-8322-5977-1

® Registered trademark of the International Electrotechnical Commission

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

3.3.9 Potential ignition sources.................................................................................... 57

Copyright Inlernational Etectrotechmcal Commission

4.6 Fixing of conductors.................................................................................................... 76

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

5.6 Protective conductor................................................................................................. 130

7.3 Ozone exposure......................................................................................................... 162

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

8.12 Telescoping or rod antennas......................................................................................185

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

B.1.3 Test samples.......................................................................................................205

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

G.7.3Cord anchorages and strain relief for non-detachable power supply

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

Annex I (informative) Overvoltage categories (see IEC 60364-4-44).................................... 277

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

M.3.2 Test method......................................................................................................... 289

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

Figure 1 - Three block model for pain and injury.......................................................................24

Copyright Inlernational Etectrotechmcal Commission

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

Figure H.2 - 打 31 limit curve for cadenced ringing signal........................................................274

Table 1 - Response to energy class..........................................................................................24

Table 8 - Minimum air gap distance........................................................................................... 88

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

Table F.1 - Instructional safeguard element description and examples..................................228

Copyright International Eieclrotechnical Commission

Table Y.1 - Examples of the provision of pollution degree environments 363

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION

AUDIO/VIDEO, INFORMATION AND

Part 1: Safety requirements

- addition of requirements for outdoor equipment;

Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission

- addition of requirements for wireless power transmitters;

The text of this document is based on the following documents:

FDIS Report on voting

In this document, the following print types or formats are used:

- requirements proper and normative annexes: in roman type;

- normative conditions within tables：in smaller roman type;

- terms that are defined in 3.3: bold.

In figures and tables, if colour is available:

- green colour denotes a class 1 energy source;